Casti Asme Section Ix 2013 PDF

Codes and Standards Training Institute
"" ' I •
1
{~ ' '· ,•
1
.._ • : , \! '' •, , J 1l 4' ' I 1 : ' ' , ' : ,· : , - .! I 11• v-,:. ~
ASME Section IX •
Welding Codes and Metallurgy

for Engineers, Inspectors, and Experienced Tradesmen
April 30-May 3, 2013

Suite 205, 10544 106 Street, Edmonton, AS T5H 2X6
phone: 780-424-2552 fax: 780-421-1308
website: www.casti.ca email: casti @casti.ca
Engineering Information: Training and Publishing

API, ASME, ASTM, AWS, NACE, CSA
Metallurgy, Welding, NDE, Piping, Pressure Vessels
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
COPYRIGHT
© 2013 Codes and Standards Training Institute (CAST!}. All rights reserved. All CAST! course
materials are the property of CAST! and CAST! Publishing Inc. The materials are copyrighted and
protected under Canadian and International copyright laws. Copying any CAST! materials without
written permission from CAST! is illegal. No part of CAST! notebooks covered by copyright laws may
be reproduced or used in any form or by any means- graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including
photocopying, recording, taping, information storage, or retrieval systems- without the written
permission of CAST!. CAST! reserves the right to revise these policies, terms, and conditions at any
time without notice.
INTENT OF ATIENDANCE
The course text and materials supplied to attendees at CAST! courses are prepared and issued for
the attendee's sole use. Use of CAST! materials and training methods in any form for training
personnel, other than fully paid attendees of CAST! courses, is strictly forbidden.
All employees of companies offering any form of training in areas that are the same or similar to the
training provided by CAST! are strictly prohibited from attending a CAST! course and subsequently
presenting the same or similar courses for any reason and under any circumstances, or any other
form of obtaining and using CAST! training materials or methods. Committing any of these acts
without written permission from CAST! is a violation of these Terms and Conditions, and will be
dealt with through legal actions. Attendance at our courses or sending attendees to our courses
constitutes full acceptance of these Terms and Conditions and no other Terms and Conditions
contained in purchase orders, requisitions or other documents shall supersede these Terms and
Conditions under any circumstance.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
The material presented herein has been prepared for the general information of the reader and
should not be used or relied upon for specific applications without first securing competent technical
advice. Nor should it be used as a replacement for current complete engineering codes and
standards. In fact, CAST! highly recommends that the appropriate, current engineering codes and
standards be reviewed in detail prior to any decision making.
Codes, standards, and technology constantly change. Information delivered in CAST! courses and
contained in course materials is based on the best available information obtained by CAST! and its
instructors at the time of the course. While the material in all CAST! notebooks was prepared with
great effort and is believed to be technically correct, CASTI and its staff do not represent or warrant
the material's suitability for any general or specific use and assume no liability or responsibility of
any kind in connection with the information therein. CAST! is in no way responsible for subsequent
use regardless of intention. Nothing in the CAST! notebooks shall be construed as a defense against
any alleged infringement ofletters of patents, copyright, or trademark, or as defense against liability
for such infringement.
©Codes and Standards Training Institute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 3
Notebook Page 4
Introduction to Codes and Standards
The Need
Standards and codes have been established for manufacturing, operation of equipment, and personal
conduct that represent the minimum standard of quality ·o r behavior that is to be expected by the
manufacturer, supplier, operator or individual. Codes and standards that deal with manufacturing
and operation of pressure systems establish the rules for minimum safety. For equipment
components to be safe, they must be standardized so that personnel can become familiar with the
various pieces of equipment for their safe operation. While the safety aspects are easy to understand,
the standardization concept r equires va rious manufacturers to make equipment that will interface
with other equipment or components so that th e equipment can be safely coupled together.
Therefore, while codes and standards have subtle different meanings and requirements, the
ultimate goal is to produce products that function safer. In th e "Foreword" section of ASME VIII,
Division1, this role is clearly defined: ''The Committee's function is to establish rules of safety .. .".
Similar wording is presented in the "Introduction" of ASME B31.3; "The Code sets forth engineering
requirements deemed necessary for safe design and construction of pressure piping."
The Canadian Standards Association has been providing a Code for the m anufacture and operation
of pressured components since 1939. The need for such a s tandard however was recognized in the
previous century when investigations were undertaken by a US congressional committee to define
the safety requirements for pressure containment systems.
What we h ave today is a set of safety standards t hat have been developed over many years through
the experience and deliberation of engineers and scientists who have the goal of making equipment
that functions properly and safely.
T he Legal Position of the Pressure Equipment Codes
In Canada, the jurisdiction for public safety is split between the Federal and Province governments
with the Federal government responsible for issues that transcribe provincial boundaries while the
provincial governments are confined to issues within their boundaries. It is the responsibility of the
applicable jurisdiction to decide upon the rules and regulations for the design, manufacture,
operation and inspection of pressure containment systems.
In Canada, we have an organization of volunteers known as the Canadian Standards Association

(CSA) that produces standards and guidelines for various facets of product manufacture and use.
The CSA Standards Steering Committee on public safety has a technical subcommittee on boilers
and pressure vessels. This committee has been active for a great many years and in 1939, published
the first Canadian Standard dealing with pressure containment systems. The Standard CSA B51
"Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code", and. was produced to standardize the safety
aspects of pr essure containment systems among the Provincial Jurisdictions in Canada. This
Standard makes a number of codes and standards by other organizations mandatory, a listing of
which is given in the following excerpt from B51. Among those mandatory standards are the ASME
©Codes and Standards Training Institute (CAST!)
Notebook Paqe 5
Standards relating to pressure piping and boiler and pressure vessels, and the CSA Standard for oil
and gas pipeline systems.
I n Canada, the legislative assemblies of the various jurisdictions have passed Acts normally referred
to as the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Act. These Acts set up an authority to administer matters
related to pressure vessels, boilers, and pressure piping. The authority in turn makes regulations to
facilitate the administration of their legislated responsibility and the key component of all these
regulations is the adoption of CSA B51 in whole or in part. Most of the jurisdictions also have a
Pipelines Act that establishes one or more authorities that are responsible for pipelines. These
legislated Acts make the ASME pressure vessel, boiler and pressure piping Standards and Codes,
and the CSA pipeline standard the law for minimum safety in the design, operation and inspection
of pressure systems.
Codes and Standards for Pressure Vessels and Piping
As previously indicated, the overriding Standard in Canada is CSA B51 "Boiler, Pressure Vessel,
and Pressure Piping Code". This Code requires that drawings and specifications of designs of boilers,
pressure vessels, and piping systems must be submitted to the regulatory authority and the design
must be accepted and registered in the jurisdiction before construction is commenced. In addition,
fittings shall likewise be registered if they are to form a part of a boiler or pressure vessel or
pressure piping system. When a design is acceptable, a Canadian Registration Number (CRN) is
issued. This design will be a sequential number issued by the jurisdictional authority. That number
will be followed by a decimal with another number indicating the jurisdictional authority which has
approved the design, e.g. 1) British Columbia, 2) Alberta, 3) Saskatchewan, 4) Manitoba, 5) Ontario,
6) Quebec, 7) New Brunswick, 8) Nova Scotia, 9) Prince Edward Island, 0) Newfoundland,
T) Northwest Territories, Y) Yukon Territory, N) Nunavit.
In a similar manner, welding and brazing procedures are to be registered with the regulatory
authority. As with pressure vessel and piping design, the Provincial code number shall be used
following the decimal point of the registration number.
To ensure that the fabricated system is traceable to manufacturer and original material of use, the
documentation specified in the applicable ASME Code (known as the "Data Report") must be
submitted to the jurisdictional authority. As well, a means of permanently identifying the part so
that it is traceable back to that Data Report shall be undertaken. As a minimum, this identification
will include the CRN.
For manufacture of pressure containment systems, a satisfactory quality control system is required.
Those companies within Canada that possess a valid stamp of authorization by the ASME are
presumed to have in place a satisfactory quality control system. Not all pressure containment work
is applicable to the ASME Code, nor do all jurisdictions require that pressure work be done strictly
by those firms conforming to the ASME Code and therefore, other forms of quality control programs
may be accepted by the jurisdictional authority.
Notebook Page 6
Alberta Acts and Regulations for Pressure Equipment
The hierarchy of Alberta Act s and Regulations that govern pressure equipment is as follows.
Alberta
Safety Codes Act
Ministerial Regulations
Orders II (e.g., PESR) I
CSA 851 , 852 Administrator's Directives,
(B&PV, Piping) Variances, Interpretations
ASME B&PV ASME 831 II Other Adopted ,I

Codes Piping Codes Bodies of Rules
Cod es and Standar ds Declared in Force by t h e Alb erta R egulations
The codes and standards set out the minimum requirements for the design and construction of
pressure equipment under the jurisdict ion of the act. Codes and standards are updated regularly by
technical committees comprised of representatives of owners, manufacturers, the concerned public,
other affected parties and jurisdictions. Codes and standards are declared in force by the Design,
Constr uction and Installation of Boilers and Pressure Vessel Regulations. By declaring the codes
and standards in force, all the r equirements of the standards become mandatory for Alberta unless
specifically exempt. The Pressure Equipment Safety Regulation (AR 49/2006) Section 6 declares the
following codes and standards in force in respect of pressure equipment:
CSA Codes
• CSA B51 Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code

• CSA B52 Mechanical Refrigeration Code
• CSA 2662 Oil and Gas Pipeline Systems - (in particular, the oilfield steam distribution
Cla use)
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
• Section I Rules for Construction of Power Boilers

• Section II Materials
• Section III Rules for Construction of Nuclear Power Plant Components
• Section IV Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers
• Section V Nondestructive Examination
• Section VI Recommended Rules for Care and Operation of Heating Boilers
• Section VII Recommended Guidelines for Care of Power Boilers
• Section VIII Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels Divisio? 1, 2 and 3
• Sect ion IX Welding and Brazing Qualifications
• Section X Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels
• Section XI Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components
o Section XII Rules for Construction and Continued Service of Transport Tanks
©Codes and Standards Training Institute (CAST I)
Notebook Page 7
ASME Pressure P iping Cod es
• B31.1 Power Piping

• B31.3 Process Piping
• B31.5 Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components
• B31.9 Building Services Piping
Other Bodies of Ru les
• ANSI K61.1 Safety Requirements for the Storage and Handling of Anhydrous Ammonia
• NFPA 58 Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code
• NFPA 59 Utility LP-Gas Plant Code
• MSS Standard Practice, SP-25, Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and
• Unions
• Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association Standards (TEMA) (refer to IB03-010 for details)
• API Standard 661, Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Services
CSA 851 - Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code
One of CSA's goal is to harmonize its standards with those of other countries to the greatest extent
possible. To this end, the CSA Technical Committee on Boilers and Pressure Vessels and its
subcommittees work closely with other code development organizations, such as the National Board
of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBPVI) and with the American Society of Mechanical
Engineers (ASME) committees responsible for producing boiler and pressure vessel related codes.
CSA 51 has three main parts, as follows:
Part 1 contains requirements for boilers, pressure vessels, pressure p1pmg, and fittings. It is
intended mainly to fulfill two objectives: first, to promote safe design, construction, installation,
oper ation, inspection, testing, and repair practices, and second, to facilitate adoption of uniform
requirements by Canadian jurisdictions.
Part 2 contains requirements for high-pressure cylinders for the on-board storage of natural gas as a
fuel for automotive vehicles. It has been harmonized with International Organization for
Standardization (ISO) Standard 11439:2000, Gas cylinders- High pressure cylinders for the onboard
storage of natural gas as a fuel for automotive vehicles. In addition, the CSA subcommittee
responsible for developing Part 2 has consulted with the American National Standards Institute
(ANSI) committee responsible for developing ANSI Standard NGV2-2000, Basic Requirements for
Compressed Natural Gas Vehicle (NGV) Fuel Containers. The members ofthese two committees are
dedicated to harmonizing their Standards as far as circumstances allow.
Part 3 contains requirements for compressed natural gas refuelling station pressure piping systems
and ground storage vessels. These requirements have been allotted a separate part of the Standard
to emphasize the differences between them and the requirements in Part 1, and thereby to facilitate
their application.
Notebook Page 8
In 2009 a new edition of CSA B51 was released- the first new edition since 2003. Some ofthe more
significant changes within the 2009 edition include the following subjects:
1. acceptability of fittings manufactured outside Canada (Part 1, Clause 4.2.4);

2. documentation supporting registration or reregistration (Part 1, Clause 4.2.6);
3. new requirement for hot tapping (Part 1, Clause 4.7 .3);
4. small pressure vessels registered as Category H fittings are exempt fr om shop inspection
(Part 1, Clause 4.8.2(g));
5. a udit requirements for m anufacturer s outside of Canada (P art 1, Clause 4.11);
6. two means for determining the water level for high-pressure steam boilers (Part 1, Clause
6.3.1.3);
7. new requirements for welded staybolts (Part 1, Clause 6.8);
8. fittings used in piping systems need to be registered (P art 1, Clause 8.2); and
9. new definition of"design pressure" has been added to Parts 1 and 2.
It is important t o note that CSA B51 is a recommended do<:ument for use by provincial jurisdictions
within Canada and does not have the force of law except where it has been officially adopted. For
example, Alberta has officially adopted CSA B51 as part of its Safety Code Act and Pressure
Equipment Safety Regulations (Section 6(a)) and therefor e the requirements of CSA B51 are legally
required to be met in Alberta.
Also note that adoption does not necessarily mean that CSA B51 has been adopted without
exception. For example, the Alberta jurisdiction, under the guidance of ABSA the Pressure
Equipment Safety Authority, may have exceptions to the rules within CSA B51. Should there be
conflicts between CSA B51 and the Alberta PESR, then the Alberta regulations must be followed in
Alberta.
Quality Control Systems
CSA Standard B51 requires that any manufacturer of a boiler, pressure vessel, piping or fitting
must have a quality control system in place that meets the requirements of the applicable
manufacturing standard. The jur isdictional authority may further require that any organization
conducting repairs or modifications to such equipment also have in place a quality control system.
The in-service reliability is not a required function ofCSA B51 or of the ASME Code sections, except
for boiler operation. CSA B51 however does have a non mandatory appendix to the Standard
(Appendix C), which details the requirements for a quality assurance program for defect prevention
and in-service reliability. Appendix Cis usually adopted by jurisdictional authorities which requires
users of pressure containment systems to have in place a quality control system to ensure in service
reliability (safety) of their pressure retaining components.
When repairs and modifications are made to pressure equipment, the jurisdictional authority will
require a quality control system. It should be noted; in many instances that there is very little
differentiation between a modification and a new manufactur e so the same requirements for
material control, design, and workmanship are applicable.
Notebook Page 9
Alterations to Registered Designs
CSA B51 requires that any alteration to a vessel, registered piping system, weld procedure, or fitting
will require registration of the alteration with the jurisdictional authority.
Alberta Design Registration Program Administered by ABSA1

(www .absa.ca/Design%20Survey/DesignRegistration. aspx)
The primary quality objective of the Design Registration Program is to ascertain, within reasonable
bounds, that designs or procedures submitted for registration under the Safety Codes Act are in
compliance with the Act, regulations and relevant codes and standards. One must, however, keep in
mind that the owner of the design has ultimate responsibility for its correctness. Acceptable designs
and procedures will be registered in accordance with the regulations.
Where the word Act is used here, it means the Safety Codes Act, the applicable regulations under
that Act and the relevant codes and standards.
The scope of the Design Registration Program involves:
• Assessment of new and revised designs of boilers, pressure vessels, pressure piping, fittings
and other pressure equipment for compliance with the Act and registration of those found
acceptable;
• Assessment of alterations to boilers, pressure vessels and fittings and registration of those
found acceptable;
• Assessment of new joining procedures and registration of those found acceptable;
• Assessment of various other procedures, e.g. repair or testing procedures, and registration of
those found acceptable;
• Maintenance of a database and records of registered designs and procedures.
Safety Codes Act Flow Chart
This flow chart (AB-508) will help a person to determine if a pressurized item is subject to the Safety
Codes Act and what requirements apply.
Design Submission Require m ents
Detailed design submission requirements are available for the following areas:
• Boilers and Pressure Vessels

• Pressure Piping
• Fitting Design
• Welding, Brazing and other Joining Procedures
• Other
Notebook Page 10
Pressure Equipment Design Registrations
Canadian Registration Number (CRN)
A Canadian Registration Number (CRN) for a boiler or pressure vessel is defined by CSA B51
Clause 4.3 as:
• consisting of a letter, four digits, and a decimal point followed by up to ten digits and/or two
letters
• the first letter a nd four digits are part of a sequential numbering system used by the issuing
province or territory
• the first digit or letter to t he right of th e decimal point indicates the province that issued th e
particular number
• the following ident ifications are used in accordance with th e code:
1- British Columbia 8 - Nova Scotia

2- Alberta 9 - Prince Edward Island
3- Saskatchewan 0 (zero) - Newfoundland
4- Manitoba N- Nunavut
5- Ontario T - Northwest Territories
6- Quebec Y - Yukon Territory
7- New Brunswick
The letter C may follow the designation of first registration if a design is registered in all
j urisdictions. No jurisdiction issues the letter C; it is a convenience for st amping once the
manufacturer has received all the registrations.
To be eligible for use in Alberta, the CRN must have the digit 2 somewhere after the decimal point.
For example, the following could be valid CRNs: B1079.23 and M2138.5C
Alberta Identification "A" Number
An Albert a identification number (or "A-number") is a unique number that identifies each boiler or
pressure vessel manufactured for use in Alberta. The num ber is assigned by a Safety Codes Officer
upon completion of the shop inspection (if manufactured in Alberta) or upon completion of initial
inspection (if imported into Alberta).
An A-number begins with an "A" (in a cir cle) followed by up to seven numbers. It is usually st amped
on th e pressure equipment item , on or near the nameplate or code stamping. Pressure vessels and
boiler s m anufactured in Alberta for export are not usually assigned an A-number.
1 Reference: Reprinted with permission from ABSA, the pressure equipment safety authority of the Province of
Alberta. This information may be updated at any time and you are requested to check with ABSA for the latest
information by visiting www.absa.ca or contacting ABSA directly.
Notebook Page 11
Alberta Boilers Safety Assoc iation (ABSA)
(www .absa.ca)
ABSA Safet y Codes Act Flow Chart
A flow chart illustrating the workflow of the Safety Codes Act is available from the ASBA website.
For more information see ABSA Form AB-508 - Safety Codes Act Flow Chart:
www .absa.ca/F'orms/AB-508%20Safety%20Codes%20Act%20Flow%20Chart. pdf
ABSA Forms
www.absa.ca/Forms/Default.aspx
Design Registration Forms
• AB31 Design Registration Application
• AB41 Statutory Declaration Form for Registration of Fittings
• AB41a Guide For Completing Form AB-41
• AB96 General Engineering Requirements for Design & Construction of Pressure Piping Systems
• AB96a Guide for Completing Form AB-96
• AB520 Finite Element Analysis (FEA) Requirements
Pressure Equipment Forms
• AB76A Welder Qualification Record (WQR)
• AB76B Welding Operator Qualification Record (WOQR)
• AB83 Construction Data Report for Piping Systems
• AB83a G uide for Completing Form AB-83
• AB83F Construction Data Report for Piping Systems Manufactured Outside Alberta
• AB147 Owners Integrity Management System Information Form
• AB505 Risk Based Inspection Programs for Pressure Equipment
• AB506 Inspection and Servicing Requirements for Pressure Equipment, Rev 6
• AB512 Owner-User Pressure Equipment Integrity Management Requirements
• AB512a Owner-User PEIM Program Scope and Responsibilities
• AB512b Integrity Management Requirements Checklist
• AB512c PEIM Audit Workbook
• AB513 Pressure Equipment Repair and Alteration Requirements
• AB516 PESR User Guide
• AB518 Pressure Piping Construction Requirements
• AB522 Standard Pneumatic Test Procedure Requirements
© Codes and Standards Training Institute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 12
Examples of ABSA Information Bulletins
Alert
IB07-003 Rev. 1: NPS 2 Class 3000 Screwed Couplings

(IML Industria Meccanica Ligure S.P.A. Heat Number 79168)
www .absa.ca/IBindex!IB07-003R 1. pdf
IBll-010: Fatal Accident Involving a High Temperature Hydrogen Attack

www.absa.ca/lBindex/IB11-0lO.pdf
Directive
IBl0-006 Rev. 2: ABSA Requirements for Steam Pipelines

ww\v.absa.ca!IBindex!IB10-006R2.pdf
IBll-006: Pressure Equipment Repair and Alteration Requirements

www. absa.ca/IBindex/IB 11-006. pdf
Exemption
IB01-002: Exemption of Pressurized Cargo Transport Vessels from the Provisions of the Alberta
Safety Codes Act
http://www.absa.ca/IBindex/ib01-002.pdf
External Alerts, Safety Bulletings, and Reports
G-04-11-ABSA: Gas Safety Information Bulletin, Standata G-4-11-ABSA, Propane Storage Tanks
Designed for 200 psig
http://m unicipalaffairs. alberta.ca/documents/ss/STANDATA/gas/G-04-11. pdf
Information Bulletin
IBU-020: Responsibility for NDE During Pressure Vessel Fabrication

www .absa.ca/IBindex/IB ll-020. pdf
Interpretation
IB07-002: Random Radiography for a Designated Lot of ASME B31.3 Piping

www .absa.ca/IBindex/IB07-002.pdf
Variance
IBll-011. (VAll-008) - Use of2007 Edition (or later) ASME Section VIII Division 2 Code
W\\"vv.absa.ca/IBindex/IB11-0ll.pdf
Notebook Page 13
Notebook Page 14
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding Qualification
Scope
The scope of Section IX specifies the requirements for the qualification of welders, brazers, and the
welding and brazing pr ocedure specifications employed when welding or brazing in accordan ce with
th e ASME Boiler and Pressure Code, and th e ASME B31 Code for Pressure Piping.
A Code user may be directed to use Section IX by any of the construction codes of ASME, such as
Sections I, III, IV, VIII, XI, and by the ASME B31 Pressure Piping codes, such as B31.1 or B31.3.
Section IX m ay also be r eferenced by th e API Petrochemical and Refinery codes such as API 510,
API 570, and API 653 . Or it may simply be required by purchase order.
Qualificat ion of welders and the welding procedure specifications they use in code construction
involves ma ny fact ors that are difficult to outline in a code or standar d. The CASTI Guidebook to
ASME Section IX - Welding Qualifications, is a guide to the requirement s of the ASME Boiler an d
Pressure Vessel Code Section IX - Welding and Brazing Qualificat ions.
Organization of Section IX
Section IX is divided into two parts: welding and brazing. The welding part is divided into five
articles, as outlined in Table 1.1 and explained further in the pages that follow. The brazing part is
divided into four articles, also explained further in the pages that follow.
Table 1.1 Organization of Section IX
Foreword Brief history, Code operations, committee activities, Code user

responsibility, Code cases, revisions, jurisdiction precautions, th e National
Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors, inquiries and materials.
Int roduction Brief guide and explanation of Code rules and part s. -·-----..-····-
Art icle I General rules which apply to the qualification of welding pr ocedure
QW-100 General specifications (WPS) and to the qualification of the performance of the
welders who will use the WPSs.
Article II Rules for r esponsibility, variables and tests for the preparation of a WPS,
QW-200 Welding the qualification of the WPS and recording the qualification on P QR forms.
Procedure Qualifications ...... -~-·
_ ..._ _,...,, _ ____
...,.•...•
.
~
Article III s for responsibility, variables and tests for the preparation of a WPQ,
QW-300 Performan r the expiration, renewal and continuity records for welders.
Article IV Specific data for varia bles, P-Nos. , S-Nos., F-Nos. & A-Nos. , thickness
QW-400 Dat a ranges , diameters, positions, types of specimens, removal of specimens, t est
equipment, etching and definitions. ·-···- ·
Article V Rules for the use of sta ndard welding procedure specifications (SWP S).
.9.W-500 SWPS ...................
''" ''"'--""'"""'""' ·-·-····································-·····-· ·················- -···········- ·-·-····-····-
Appendices Technical Inquiries, Forms, Materials by P-No. and Group No.
QB-Brazing QB has the first four articles as in QW, except related to brazing and
labeled as QB-100, QB-200, QB-300 and QB-400.
Notebook Page 15
Summary of Articles
Article I- Welding General Requirements QW-100
Article I covers the scope of Section IX; the purpose and use of the WPS, PQR and WPQ;
responsibility; test positions; types and purposes of tests and examinations; test procedures;
acceptance criteria; visual examination; radiographic examination; and stud, laser, and resistance
welding tests.
Article II - Welding Procedure Qualifications QW-200
Article II covers the rules for the preparation of welding procedure specifications (WPS) and of
procedure qualification records (PQR).
Each process is listed separately in QW-250 with the essential, nonessential, and supplementary
essential variables as they apply to that process. The WPS must specify a value or range for each
essential, nonessential and, when required, each supplementary essential variable listed for each
welding process.
The PQR records the value for each essential and, when required, each supplementary essential
variable used for each welding process.
If a change is made in a nonessential variable, the WPS must be revised, or amended, but does not
need to be requalified.
When a change is made in an essential variable, the WPS must be revised, and the revised WPS
must be qualified with a new PQR, or the revision must be supported by an existing, valid PQR.
Article III- Welding Performance Qualifications QW-300
Article III covers the preparation of welder performance qualification (WPQ) records. Each process
is listed separately in QW-350 with the essential variables as they apply to that process. The WPQ
form must record a value for each essential variable used and must list a qualified range for each of
these essential variables.
Items addressed are; Code users' responsibility, simultaneous qualificat ions of welders and welding
operators, types of tests, records, welder identification requirements, welding positions, diameter
limitations, qualifications expiration, and renewal of qualifications.
The rules for welders versus welding operators qualifications are clearly separated. Welders and
Welding Operators may be qualified by visual and mechanical tests, or by radiography of a test coupon.
Radiography of the initial production weld, depending upon the welding process used, is also allowed.
Notebook Page 16
Article IV - Welding Data QW-400
Article IV covers welding data that must be applied to the preparation and qualification of the WPS,
PQR, and the WPQ depending on the process. The welding data groups th e variables into the
categories of: joints, base materials, filler materials, positions, preheat, postweld h eat treatment ,
gas, electrical characteristics, and technique.
Article IV also includes assignments of P-Numbers (ASME base materials), S-Numbers (other
materials), F-Numbers (grouping of filler metals) and A-Numbers (weld metal chemical analysis).
Tables for welding procedure specification qualification thickness limits, and welder performance
qualification thickness and diameter limits are provided.
Welding positions also are specified in QW-400. Qualification ranges for welder positions are defined
Article IV also gives guidance for test coupons, the removal of test specimens, and requirements for
the test jig dimensions.
Article V - Standard Welding P rocedure Specifications (SWPS) QW-500
Article V covers rules for the adoption, demonstration, and application of the St andard Welding
Procedure Specifications, (SWPSs), listed in Appendix E . See details in Chapter 15. Welder
qualifications for using SWPSs are the same as when using Section IX qualified procedures.
@Codes and Standards Training Institute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 17
Table 1.2 Scopes of the WPS, PQR, and WPQ
WPS PQR WPQ

Specify: Record: Record: Specify:
Variable ranges Actual values value range
Essential variables Essential variables tested qualified
Welding Nonessential variables Tests and results Record tests
Application Other directions Other data and test results
-~.~ ~~P.!~._1_.2
_.__1_,,. . . . . .,. . . . . . . . .........,__,_____ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..-_,._. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,___ ,_,,. . . . . . . . . . . ,____ ............... . .___,__________
What do each of A WPS provides direction A PQR provides support A WPQ provides proof of
these documents for making welds, (prooD of the mechanical the welder's ability to
provide? specifies what material is and other weldability make sound welds.
to be welded and how it properties of the WPS.
is to be welded.
How are these A WPS is prepared by A welder is qualified by A WPS is qualified by
documents specifying what is to be welding a test coupon, welding a test coupon,
prepared and/or welded and how it is to preparing test specimens, preparing test
qualified? be welded by specifying recording the tests specimens, recording
values or ranges for each performed, the results the tests and test
variable on the WPS . and ranges qualified on a results on a PQR.
WPQ.
-------------~--------------~-----------~~~-----·-----~
What must be A WPS must specify, for A PQR must record, for A WPQ must record the
documented, each process, the ranges each process, all essential variables used
specified or of all essential and essential variables used to weld the test coupon,
recorded? nonessential variables to weld the test coupon, the tests performed, the
that must be followed. the tests performed and test results, and the
the test results. ranges qualified .
What happens The WPS must be APQR must be A WPQ must be prepared
when changes are revised or rewritten for prepared to support any to support each
made? any change in an change made to an pe1formance variable
essential or nonessential essential variable in a change in a welders
variable. WPS. WPQ.
©Co des and Standards Training Instit ute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 18
Three Basic Steps and Documents
There are three steps and documents involved in qualifying welding procedure specifications and
welders/welding oper ators for Code construction.
• The first step requires the Code user to prepare the first document, a welding pr ocedure
sp ecification (WPS). The WPS must contain the minimum requirements that are specified by the
construction or repair code. The WPS is intended to provide guidance for welding by specifying
ranges for each variable. The WPS must be supported by a procedure qualification record (PQR).
• The second step requires the Code user to qualify the WPS by welding procedure qualification
test coupon. The Code user must record the variables a nd tests used, and must certify the tests
and test results on the second document, the procedure qu alification record (PQR).
• The third step requires the Code user t o qualify the performance of the welders by welding
performance qualification test coupons. The Code user must record the variables and tests used,
specify the variable ranges qualified, and must certify the tests and tests results on th e third
document, a welders performance qualification (WPQ) record.
The majority ofthe rules in Section IX involve one of these three documents, the WPS, PQR or WPQ.
One of the biggest sources of confusion with Section IX is mixing the rules between these three
documents. So be careful when reading exam questions and answer s to be sur e which document is
being referenced.
Welding Procedure Specification Hierarchy
WPS
- A written document that provides direction to the
welder for making production welds in accor-
dance with Code requirements.
- The purpose for qualification of a WPS is to
determine that the weldment proposed for
constmction is capable of providing the required
properties for its intended application.
I
. - - - - - - - - -~
PQR WPQ
- supports WPS - requires Qualified WPS
- requires only essential variables - welder that welds WPS coupon is qualified to
I.e(·······
-
-
nonessential variables are optional
The Procedure Qualification Record (PQR)
.... ,.. weld with the WPS
- requires only essential variables
documents what occurred during welding the - In perfonnance qualification, the basic criterion
test coupon and the results of testing of the established for welder qualification is to
coupon. determine the welder's ability to deposit sound
weld metal.
@ Codes and St andards Training Institute (CAST!)
NntPhnnk P;:,np 1 Q
Welding General Requirements - Article I
The rules in ASME Section IX are only applied when qualifying either a welding procedure
specification (WPS) or a welder/welding operator. These rules do not apply when performing
construction code welding. Construction codes, such as ASME Section VIII-1, may specify different
requirements than those listed in ASME Section IX. Note that such requirements take precedence
over the rules in ASME Section IX and that the manufacturer or contractor must comply with them.
QW-100.1 defines; "the purpose for qualification of a WPS is to determine that the weldment
proposed for construction is capable of providing the required properties for its intended application."
This terse opening statement puts the responsibility on the Code user to assure that welding
qualifications are suitable for the welding application.
Note: Section IX does not cover the application, service, or life of the component.
QW-100.1 and QW-100.2 provide definitions of the three documents: the WPS, the PQR, and the
WPQ in which all of them are written and not verbal. For example, a WPS is a written document
that provides direction to the welder for making production welds in accordance with Code
requirements.
QW-100.2 defines the basic criterion established for welder qualification is to determine the welder's
ability to deposit sound weld metal. The basic criterion established for welding operator qualification
is to determine the welding operator's mechanical ability to operate the welding equipment.
QW-100.3 covers the WPS, PQR, and WPQ, in more detail. QW-100.3 states that these documents,
prepared in accordance with Section IX, may be used in any ASME construction.
QW-100.3 also allows the continued use of a WPS, PQR or WPQ, qualified at any time in the past,
provided all requirements of the 1962 or later Edition a re met. QW-100.3 does not require a WPS,
WPQ or a PQR to be amended to include any variables required by later Editions and Addenda.
However, QW-100.3 does require the qualification of a new WPS or WPQ, or, the requalification of
an existing WPS or WPQ to be performed in full accordance with the latest version of Section IX.
QW-103.1 requires the manufacturer or contractor to conduct the tests used to qualify the welding
procedures and welders for welding under this Code.
QW-103.2 Each manufacturer or contractor must maintain a record of the results obtained in
welding procedure and welder and welding operator performance qualifications. These records must
be certified by a signature or other means as described in the manufacturer's or contractor's Quality
Control System and must be accessible to the Authorized Inspector.
Notebook Page 20
Practice Problem 01: OW-1 00.1 - Welding General Requirements
What is a welding procedure specification (WPS)?
a) Verbal instructions prepared to provide direction for making production welds to Code
requirements.
b) A written welding procedure prepared to make production welds to meet the design.
c) Instructions from the welding foreman that provides direction to the welder in
accordance with Code requirements.
d) A written document that provides direction to the welder for making production welds in
accordance with Code requirements.
e) A written procedure prepared to establish welding inspection requirements to Code
requirements.
Practice Problem 02: OW-100.1- Welding General Requirements

What is the purpose for qualification of a WPS?
a) to determine that the weldment proposed for construction is capable of providing the
required properties for its intended application
b) to determine that the weldment proposed for construction is capable of meeting the
requirements of the PQR
c) to verify that the weldment is suitable for the base material and weld filler metal
d) to verify that the weldment is suitable for the base material, weld filler metal, preheat
and postweld heat treatment
e) to verify that the weldment is suitable for the welder or welding operator to weld
- .... . . . ~ - ~- ~
Practice Problem 03: OW-1 00.2 - Welding General Requirements

In performance qualification, what is the basic criterion established for welder qualification?
a) to determine the welder's ability to deposit sound weld metal

b) to determine the welder's ability to follow the WPS
c) to determine the welder's ability to follow the inspector's instructions
d) to ensure the PQR qualifies the WPS
e) to ensure the welds are of radiographic quality
Notebook Paoe 21
Test Positions for Groove Welds- QW-120
It is important to recognize that there are test posit ions, as described in QW-120, and there are
welding application positions.
The test positions in QW-120 and QW-461.3 through 461.8 defme the positions that are allowed as
one of the test positions. The test positions are labeled, for example, as 1G, 2G, 3G, etc. and 1F, 2F,
3F, etc. (see figure below).
Plate Positions- QW-121
• Flat Position 1G; see figure QW-461.3, illustration (a).

• Horizontal Position 2G; see figure QW-461.3, illustration (b).
• Vertical Position 3G; see figure QW-461.3, illustration (c).
• Overh ead Position 4G; see QW-461.3, illustration (d).
(a) 1G (b) 2G (c) 3G (d) 4G
Pipe Positions- QW-122
• Flat Position 1G; see figure QW-461.4, illustration (a).

• Horizontal Position 2G (pipe is not be rotated); see figure QW-461.4, illustration (b).
• Multiple Position 5G (pipe is not be rotated); see figure QW-461.4, illustration (c).
• Multiple Position 6G (pipe is not be rotated); see figure QW-461.4, illustration (d).
a] ) a] )
(a) 1 G Rotated (b) 2G (c) 5G (d) 6G
© Codes and Standards Training Institute (CAST!)

ceQ
<:-'1;\
Notebook Page 22 ~iJ, y
Test Positions for Fillet Welds- QW-130
Plate Positions - QW-131
• Flat Position lF; see figure QW-461.5, illustration (a).

• Horizontal Position 2F; see figure QW-461.5, illustration (b).
• Vertical Position 3F; see figure QW-461.5, illustration (c).
• Overhead Position 4F; see figure QW-461.5, illustration (d).
Axis of weld
Throat of weld horizontal
vertical
(a) 1F (b) 2F (c) 3F (d) 4F
Pipe Positions- QW-132
• Flat Position l F; see figure QW-461.6, illustration (a).

• Horizontal Positions:
(a) Posit ion 2F (pipe is not rotated); see figure QW-461.6, illustration (b).
(b) Posit ion 2FR (pipe is rotated); see figure QW-461.6, illustration (c).
• Overh ead Posit ion 4F (pipe is not rot ated). see figure QW-461.6, illustration (d).
• Mult iple Position 5F (pipe is not rot at ed); see figure QW-461.6, illustration (e).
C'
l:bl
o-
{"·
i i I
'-,:J'.
~\ ::.)
fr-
L
v, "
':.,
\ffi111Q....,..
'
·;jj
...._
45 deg
T
:b
~\
<
\?·.
·.:::0
~
llilli1:I1S.
f, j •
~
A:::
\.....-:
H-
f-
l:J
'GrJ ll -~14-
45deg
(a) 1F (Rotated) (b)2F (c ) 2FR (Rotated) (d) 4F (e) SF
NntP.hook P!=lnP. :>~

Practice Problem Q4: QW-120 and QW-130- Test Positions
Which of the following test positions designates overhead welding without rotation?
a) lG
b) 6G
c) 3F
d) 4F
e) 4FR
Practice Problem Q5: QW-120 and QW-130- Test Positions

Which of the following test positions requires the coupon to be held at 45° angle?
a) lG
b) 5G
c) lF
d) 2F
e) 2FR
Notebook Page 24
Types and Purposes of Tests and Examinations- QW-140
QW-140 describes the types and purposes of tests and examinations.
Mechanical Tests- QW-141
• Tension tests are used to determine the ultimate strength of groove-weld joints; see QW-150.
• Guided-bend tests are used to determine the degree of soundness and ductility of groove-weld
joints; see QW-160.
• Fillet-weld tests are used to determine the size, contour, and degree of soundness of fillet
welds; see QW-180.
• Notch-toughness tests (e.g., Charpy impact test) are used t o determine the notch toughness
of the weldment; in QW-171 and QW-172.
• Stud-weld test include deflection bend, hammering, torque, or tension tests and a macro-
examination are used to determine acceptability of stud welds; see QW-466.4, QW-466.5,
QW-466.6, and QW-202.5, respectively.
Special E xaminations for Welders- QW-142
Radiographic or ultrasonic examination may be s ubstituted for mechanical testing of QW-141 for
groove-weld performance qualification as permitted in QW-304 to prove the ability of welders to
make sound welds.
. . ~
Practice Problem 06: QW-150- Mechanical Tests

Which of the following tests is performed to determine the ultimate strength of groove-weld joints?
a) guided-bend test
b) hammer test
c) torque test
d) tension test
e) impact test
Practice Problem Q7: Types of Tests

What may be substituted for mechanical testing for groove-weld performance qualification to prove
t he ability of welding operators to make sound welds?
a) ultrasonic examination
b) radiographic examination
c) bend testing
d) tensile testing
e) both a and b
Notebook Paoe 25
Tension Test- QW-150
QW-150 gives the rules for tension tests, including the specimens, procedure, and acceptance
criteria. The tension test is one of the most widely used tests of mechanical properties. Here a
specimen of known length and cross-sectional area is gr ipped by its ends and subjected to a steadily
incr easing tensile loading parallel to its lon g axis until it fractures (see following figure).
Showing a typical tension test machine.
Close-up view of tension test showing broken specimen .
The output from a tension test is normally in the form of a stress-strain plot (see example below).
The test output and measurements made on the fractured specimen are typically used to determine
yield strength, yield point, tensile strength, elongation and reduction in area. The test procedures for
obtaining these are specified by the ASTM Standards E 8 and E 8M: Standard Test Methods for
Tension Testing of Metallic Materials (E 8M is a metric version of E 8).
Notebook Page 26
:: :::::::: ::: ::: ::::·--
Total Elongation
:~;;~- - -- - -- - --~ .•
.'!1.~!~-~!~~~J!~----------····--
_________ .................................... '
Breaking Strength
Proportional
Limit
Stress. cr
E= ~~ ~ /
/
//
,//
Strain , &
Showing a typical stress-strain curve from a t ension test of carbon steel.
Specimens for the tension test can be full section or alternatively can be machined (with care) so that
they have a uniform reduced cross-section (the "gage length") in the mid-length region. This leaves
the ends with larger cross-section suitable for being gripped in the tension testing machine. In this
manner the gripping action can be prevented from influencing the behavior of th e specimen.
Types of Tension Test Specime ns- QW-462.1
There are 4 different types of tension t est specimens which shall meet the requirements ofQW-153.
• QW-151.1 Reduced Section - Plate; see QW-462.1(a)

• QW-151.2 Reduced Section- Pipe; see QW-462.1 (b), and (c)
• QW-151.3 Turned Specimens; see QW-462.1 (d)
• QW-151.4 Full-Section Specimens for Pipe; see QW-462.1 (e)
E
Tc is the test coupon thickness; Ts is the test specimen thickness.
QW-151(a) Tension test specimen.
© C~des and Standards Training Institute (CAST!)
NntP.hnnk P::tnP ?7
T ension Test P r ocedu re - QW-152
The tensile strength is calculated by dividing the ultimate total load by the least cross-sectional area
of the specimen from actual measurements made before the load is applied, as follows.
t ens1.1e s t rength = -maximum

- - - -- load-
area of specimen
Acceptan ce Criteria - Tension Test s- QW-153
The minimum specified tensile strength (MSTS) values for WPS qualification are provided under the
column heading "Minimum Specified Tensile, ksi" of table QW/QB-422. In order to pass the tension
test, the specimen shall have a tensile strength that is not less than:
(a) the minimum specified tensile strength of the base metal; or

(b) the minimum specified tensile strength of the weaker of the two, if base metals of different
minimum tensile strengths are used; or
(c) the minimum specified tensile strength of the weld metal when the applicable Section
provides for the use of weld metal having lower room temperature strength than the base
metal;
(d) if the specimen breaks in the base metal outside of the weld or weld interface, the test shall
be accepted as meeting the requirements, provided the strength is not more than 5% below
the minimum specified tensile strength of the base metal.
(e) the specified minimum tensile strength is for full thickness specimens including cladding for
Aluminum Alclad materials (P-No. 21 through P-No. 23) less than 112 in. (13 rom). For
Aluminum Alclad materials 112 in. (13 mm) and greater, the specified minimum tensile
strength is for both full thickness specimens that include cladding and specimens taken from
the core.
Notebook Page 30
. . -~
Example 09: OW-152 - Tension Test Procedure

As part of a welding procedure qualification, a tensile test is performed on SA-516 grade 70 plate,
normalized, with an allowable stress of 20,000 psi. The test specimen was 0.750 in. wide, the
maximum load during the tensile test was 43,376 lb, and the tensile strength was 72,100 psi. What
was the area of the tensile test specimen?
Diagram:
width
weld material base metal
' t
i I
thickness
Formula:
maximum load
tensile strength = - - - - - - -
area of specimen
Required Variables:
maximum load = 43,376 lbs
tensile strength = 72,100 psi
maximum load
tensile str ength = - - - - - - -
area of specimen
maximum load
area of specimen = tensile strength
43,376lb
= 72,100psi
=0.602 in.2
.... ._._....,.__....._. ....__ --~~... ... ..... ._......., ....__..........
Practice Problem 010: OW-152 - Tension Test Procedure
As part of a welding procedure qu alification, a tensile test is performed on SA-333 grade 6 pla te,
normalized and tempered, with an allowable stress of 17,100 psi. The test specimen was 0.550 in.
thick, the maximum load during the tensile test was 38,482 lb, and the tensile strength was
70,100 psi. What was the width of the tensile test specimen?
a) 0.550 in.
b) 0.750 in.
c) 0.875 in.
d) 0.998 in.
e) 1.120 in.
~ Codes and Standards Training Institute (CAST!)
Notebook Paqe 31
Types of Guided-Bend Specimens:
1. Transverse Face Bend; see figure QW-462.3(a)

• The weld is transverse to the longitudinal axis of the specimen, which is bent so that the
face surface becomes the convex surface of the bent specimen.
2. Transverse Root Bend; see figure QW-462.3(a)

• The weld is transverse to the longitudinal axis of the specimen, which is bent so that the
root surface becomes the convex surface of the bent specimen.
3. Transverse Side Bend; see figure QW-462.2

• The weld is transverse to the longitudinal axis of the specimen, which is bent so that one
of the side surfaces becomes the convex surface of the bent specimen.
• Specimens of base metal thickness equal to or greater than 1-112 in. (38 mm) may be cut
into approximately equal strips between 3/4 in. (19 mm) and 1-112 in. (38 mm) wide for
testing, or the specimens may be bent at full width.
4. Longitudinal Face Bend; see figure QW-462.3(b)

• The weld is parallel to the longitudinal axis of the specimen, which is bent so that the
face surface becomes the convex surface of the bent specimen.
5. Longitudinal Root Bend; see figure QW-462.3(b)

• The weld is parallel to the longitudinal axis of the specimen, which is bent so that the
root surface becomes the convex side of the bent specimen.
Notebook Page 34
Guided-Bend Specimens and Jig Dimensions
The specimen thickness and bend radius are also shown in figure QW-462.2 for side bends,
QW-462.3(a) for transverse face and root bends, and QW-462.3(b) for longitudinal face and root
bends .
Dimensions are shown in figure QW-466.1 for the standard test jig, QW-466 .2 for the guided-bend
roller jig, and QW-466.3 for the guided-bend wrap around jig.
Guide d-Bend Test Acceptance Criteria- QW-163
The weld and heat-affected zone of a transverse bend specimen must be completely within t he bent
portion ofthe specimen after testing, as shown below.
NOTE: Weld & HAZ must be within

th e 180° bent port1on of specimen.
Vs" R max.
A'-A A' A
Corner of
bend specimen
Guided face bend test specimen.
The following figure displays two side bend specimens, before and after testing, with the weld etched
in accordance with QW-472.4 to ensure the welds are within the bend limits specified in QW-463.
@Codes and Standards Training Institute (CAST!)
P"nP. ~~
Side bend specimens before and after testing,
with the weld etched in accordance with QW-472.4.
Several sets of bend specimens after testing is shown below.
A set of bend specimens.
Notebook Page 36
Guided-Bend Test Acceptance for Open Discontinuity- QW-163
The guided-bend specimens are acceptable if an open discontinuity in the weld or heat-affected zone
is 1/8 in. (3 mm) or less, measured in any direction on the convex surface of the specimen after
bending (see example photo below).
QW-163- Acceptable root bed with no open discontinuities.
1\lnt,.hnnk P<>nP ~7
If an open cliscontinuity in the weld or heat-affected zone is greater than 118 in. (3 mm) then the test
fails (see example photos below).
QW-163- Unacceptable open discontinuity greater than 1/8 inch within a root bend specimen
(upper photo); and a close-up view of the unacceptable discontinuity (lower photo);
consequently this bend specimen fails.
Notebook Page 38
Guided-Bend Test Acceptance for Open Discontinuity on a Corner - QW-163
Open discontinuities occurring on the corners of the specimen during testing are not considered
unless there is definite evidence that they result from lack offusion, slag inclusions, or other internal
discontinuities (see example photos below).
QW-163 Open discontinuity of greater than 118 inch on the corner (upper photo);
the close-up of the discontinuity (lower photo) also shows lack offusion;
consequently this bend specimen fails .
NotP.book PanP. ~9
Guided-Bend Test Acceptance for Corrosion-Resistant Weld Ove rlay C ladding- QW-163
For coiTosion-resistant weld overlay cladding, no open discontinuity exceeding 1/16 inch (1.5 mm),
measured in any direction, is permitted in the cladding, and no open discontinuity exceeding 118 inch
(3 mm) is be permitted along the approximate weld interface.
Practice Problem 013: OW-160 Guided-Bend Tests

A guided-bend specimen that has an open discontinuity in the heat-affected zone on the convex surface
of the specimen after bending that measures 5/32 in. in length. What should the inspector do?
a) accept the test

b) inspect further for evidence of lack of fusion
c) inspect further for evidence of slag inclusions
d) fail the test
e) both b) and c)
Practice Problem 014: OW-160 Guided-Bend Tests

A guided-bend specimen that has an open discontinuity on the corner of the convex surface of the
specimen after bending that measures 5/32 in. in length. What should the inspector do?
a) accept the test

b) inspect further for evidence of lack of fusion , slag inclusions, or other internal
discontinui ties
c) fail the test
d) accept the test, pending a retest
e) both b) and c)
Notebook Page 40
Notch-Toughness Tests (Impact Tests) - QW-170
QW-170 gives the rules for impact tests. There are 2 different types of notch-toughness tests that
are refer enced in QW-170:
1. Charpy V-notch impact tests: are made when requii·ed by other sections. Test procedures and
a pparatus must meet the requirements of SA-370. The acceptance criteria is in accordance
with that Section specifying impact r equirements.
2. Drop weight tests: are made when required by other Sections. Test procedures and apparatus
must meet the requirements of ASTM Specification E 208. The acceptance criteria are in
accordance with that Section requiring dr op weight tests.
The standard Charpy specimen is a square bar with a length of 55 mm and a squar e cross-section of
10 x 10 rom (see following figure). The primary output from a notched bar impact test is an absorbed
energy value in J or ft-lb.
lllllll ~l'
Full size Charpy specimen.
The most common type has a 2 rom deep 45° V-notch at mid-length with a tip radius of 0.25 mm (see
following diagram). Th e abbreviation CVN is often used to mean Charpy V-notch. Specimen
production costs are appreciable because of the strict machining requirement s of th e notch and the
need to finish machine the specimen surfaces.
~lnt<>hnnlt D::.no d.1

10 mm (0.394 in.) 45°~
L
,--------------",------.,1 L_j
n
8 mm (0.315 in.)
_j_
I
1 0.25 mm (0.01 0 in.) radius .
t l·~------
~-o ~ 55mm (2.165in.) ----l·llo i r
Dimensions of a full size Charpy specimen (10 mm x 10 mm x 55 mm)
with 2 mm V-notch depth.
In the Charpy test a standard specimen is brought to test temperature and placed in the impact
machine (see following figure) where it is fractured by being struck by a sharp-edged pendulum.
Before being released to swing down and strike the specimen, the pendulum is initially at rest at a
particular height above the specimen so that the energy absorbed in fracturing the specimen can be
determined by measuring how high the pendulum rises after the fracturing event. A dial gage on
the machine gives a direct readout of the energy absorbed based on this determination.
Before the test, the Charpy test specimen is brought to the test temperature in a controlled
temperature bath, then removed from the bath and placed hor izontally in the testing machine
against an anvil which supports it at two points 40 mm apart. When struck by the pendulum
midway between these supports, the specimen then behaves as a simple beam in three-point
bending.
The specimen must be oriented in the supports such that the pendulum strikes it on the side
opposite the notch so that the bending creates tensile stresses across the root of the notch (see
following figures). The specimen must be struck within 5 seconds of leaving the temperature bath in
accordance with ASME SA-370.
Notebook Page 42
Charpy impact machine with the impact hammer supported on a wooden timber.
..
test specimen
striker
direction
of blow
Top view of a Charpy test specimen sitting in the anvil of the test machine.
Provisions are made in ASME SA-370 for sub-size specimens but results of tests on different size
specimens cannot be directly compared (see following figure). For example, in ASME Section VIII,
Division 1, UG-84(c)(4)(a), the applicable minimum energy requirement for all specimen sizes for
Table UCS-23 materials having a specified minimum tensHe strength less than 95,000 psi (655 MPa)
Notebook Paoe 43
shall be that shown in Fig. UG-84.1, multiplied by the ratio of the actual specimen width along the
notch to the width of a full-size (10 mm X 10 mm) specimen. Table UG-84.2 defines the Charpy
impact test temperature reduction below minimum design metal temperature for sub-sized
specimens.
Full size, 2/3 size, and 1/3 size CharpyV-notch specimens.
The following figure shows a broken Charpy V-notch specimen after testing has been completed.
Note the notch and fracture surfaces are clearly visible.
Broken Charpy V-notch specimen after testing.
Notebook Page 44
Lateral Expansion
The lateral expansion of the specimen on the side opposite the notch (the compression side in
bending) can be measured and reported, as it is related to the toughness of the material.
lateral
expansion
Vernier calipers being used to measure lateral expansion

on a 10 mm (full size) Charpy impact specimen.
Lat eral expansion test requirement s a re commonly specified for materials with excellent low
temperature toughness, such as in ASME Section VIII-1, UHA-51(a)(2) and ASME B31.3 323.3.5(b)
for austenitic stainless steels (ASME P-No. 8).
~ . ... ~ ....
Practice Problem 015: QW-170 - Notch-Toughness Test
Which testing standard shall Charpy V-notch impact tests conform to for WPS qualification?
a) ASTMA370
b) ASME SA-370
c) ASME SA-23
d) the standard specified in the qualified WPS
e) the owner's specifications
1\lntPhnnk P::.nP 4<;

Fillet-Weld Tests- QW-180
Fillet-We ld Procedure Qua lification Specime n s - QW-18 1.1
The dimensions and preparation of the fillet-weld test coupon for procedure qualification are shown
in figure QW-462.4(a) and figure QW-462.4(d).
The test coupon for plate-to-plate shall be cut transversely to provide five test specimen sections,
each approximately 2 in. (50 mm) long. For pipe-to-plate or pipe-to-pipe, the test coupon shall be cut
transversely to provide four approximately equal test specimen sections. The test specimens are
macro-examined to the requirements of QW-183.
Note that production assembly mockups may be used in lieu ofQW-181.1. Mockups are also used for
tube-to-tubesheet demonstration qualification, see QW-193.
The mockup assembly essentially duplicates the production assembly, for example, the tube hole
configuration and the tube-to-tubesheet joint design within the limits of the essential variables must
be used for the PQR test coupon (see QW-193.1).
F ille t-Weld P e rforma n ce Qua lification Sp ecimens- QW-181.2
The dimensions and the preparation of the fillet-weld test coupon for performance qualification must
meet the requirements in figure QW-462.4(b) or figure QW-462.4(c).
The test coupon for plate-to-plate is cut transversely to provide a center section approximately 4 in.
(100 mm) long and two end sections, each approximately 1 in. (25 mm) long. For pipe-to-plate or
pipe-to-pipe, the test coupon is cut to provide two 114 sections test specimens opposite to each other.
One of the test specimens is fracture tested in accordance with QW-182 and the other
macroexamined to the requirements ofQW-184. Production assembly mockups may be used in lieu of
the fillet weld test coupon requirements; see QW-181.2.1.
Ma cro-Exam inations
The rules for macro-examination during welding procedure and welder performance qualifications
are found in:
• fillet weld testing, QW-183 and QW-184;

• stud weld testing QW-192.1.4;
• tube-to-tubesheet testing QW-193.1.3);
• resistance weld testing QW-196.1; and
• laser beam weld (LBW) lap joint testing QW-197.1.1.
The definition of a macro-examination is found in QW-492 Defmitions, as follows:
macro-examination: the process of observing a specimen cross-section by the unaided eye, or at a

specified low magnification, with or without the use of smoothing and etching.
©Codes and Standard s Train ing Insti tute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 46
Practice Problem 016: QW-492- Macro-Examination Definition
What magnification is used when performing a filet weld test macro-examination during procedure
or performance qualifications?
a) at 5X magnification
b) at lOX magnification
c) at 50X magnification
d) at a specified low magnification
e) at a specified high magnification
N ntP.hnnk Pi'lnP. 4 7
Volumetric NDE- QW-191
When radiographic or ultrasonic examination is substituted for mechanical testing of QW-141 for
groove-weld performance qualification as permitted in QW-304 to prove the ability of welders to
make sound welds, the indication types are defined in QW-191.1.2.1 and QW-191.2.3, as follows.
Radiography:
(a) Linear indications such as cracks, incomplete fusion, inadequate penetration, and slag are
represented on the radiograph as linear indications in which the length is more than three
times the width.
(b) Rounded indications such as porosity and inclusions such as slag or tungsten are represented
on the radiograph as rounded indications with a length three times the width or less. These
indications may be circular, elliptical, or irregular in shape; may have tails; and may vary in
density.
The acceptance criteria for welder and welding operator performance tests by radiography for both
linear and rounded Indications are listed in QW-191.1.2.2.
Ultrasonic Examination:
(a) All indications characterized as cracks, lack of fusion, or incomplete penetration are
unacceptable regardless of length.
(b) Indications exceeding 118 in. (3 mm) in length are considered relevant and are unacceptable
when their lengths exceed:
(1) 118 in. (3 mm) fort up to 3/8 in. (10 mm)
(2) 113t fort from 3/8 in. to 2-1/4 in. (10 mm to 57 mm)
(3) 3/4 in. (19 mm) for t over 2-114 in. (57 mm) where t is the thickness of the weld
excluding any allowable reinforcement. For a butt weld joining two members having
different thicknesses at the weld, t is the thinner of these two thicknesses. If a full
penetration weld includes a fillet weld, the thickness of the throat of the fillet shall
be included in t.
Notebook Page 48
Visu al Examination for Welder/Welding Operator Performance Qualificat ion- QW-194
The visual examination requirements for welder or welding operator performance test coupons are
that they must show complete joint penetration with complete fusion of weld metal and base metal.
Practice Problem 017: QW-191.1.2.1 Radiographic Examination

When is incomplete fusion defined as a radiographic linear indication?
a) when the width is more than three times the len gth
b) wh en the length is more than two t imes the width
c) when the volume is more than three times the width
d) wh en the length is more than three times the width
e) as defined by the radiographic requirements in t h e qualified WPS
Nntf>hnnk Pilnf> Ml
P-Number- F-Number- A-Number
P-No. P-No.
P-Number (P-No.)- QW-420
QW-420 defines a P -Number as a family of base metals logically organized by their characteristics,
s uch as:
• chemical composition,
• weldability, and
• mechanical properties.
P-Numbers were made to reduce the number of welding procedure qualifications.
QW/QB-422 lists all P-No. materials alpha-numerically by specification number, where ferrous
metals begin with SA- or A and nonferrous metals begin with SB- orB, e.g., SA-36 and B-16.
Although QW-424.1 allows one metal from a P-Number welded to any metal from the same
P-Number to qualify any metals assigned that same P-Number, it also warns the Code user that this
cannot be done indiscriminately. QW-420 states that:
"These assignments (P-Numbers.) do not imply that base metals may be

indiscriminately substituted for a base metal that was used in the qualification test
without consideration of compatibility from the standpoint of metallurgical
properties, postweld heat treatment, design, mechanical properties, and service
requirements."
Notebook Page 50
Group Numbers (Within P-Numbers) - QW-420
QW-420 describes Group Numbers as being assigned within a P-Number to fer rous base metals that
have specified impact test requirements. The Group Number is a supplementary essential variable,
which must be addressed on the PQR whenever impact testing is imposed for low temperature
applications by the construction code.
When impact testing is not imposed by th e construction code, the Group Number is no longer a
variable that is required to be addressed by ASME Section IX (see definition for supplementary
essential variable in QW-251.2).
However, good engineering judgment should include a review of all variables to ensure that the
weldment proposed for construction is capable of providing the required properties for its intended
application (see QWlOO.l ).
The P-Number is an essential variable for WPS and welder performance qualifications.
The complete listing ofP-Numbers is found in QW/QB-422 (see excerpt below). Note that base metals
for welding and brazing are combined in this table. QW/QB-422 lists each of the base metals in an
alpha-numerical sequence based upon the material specification.
Appendix D is a nonmandatory listing of P-Numbers, and lists each of the base metals in a numeric
sequence based upon the P-Number. Appendix Dis a convenient place to find all the base metals of a
given P-Number in one table. Appendix D may be very useful when a Code user is looking for other
base metals within a given P-Number for the purpose of qualification.
QW/QB-422 also lists other base material information for qualifying WPS and BPS.
Steps to Find a P -Number- QW/QB-422
Step 1: Find the base metal specification in the left-hand column in QW/QB-422; they are organized
in alpha-numerical order, starting with SA-36; (note that the ferrous metal SA-specifications
are listed first, followed by the nonferrous metal SB-specifications).
St ep 2: Move to the next column and find the Grade or Type.
Step 3: Move horizontal to the Welding P-No., Group No. column.
These steps are shown in the following example. You can proceed to answer the practice problems
after the example.
NntP.hnnk Pi'lnP. <; 1

Example 018: OW/08-422- P-No. Group No.
What is the P-No. and Group No. for ASME SA-105 flanges and fittings?
QW/QB-422 FERROUS/NONFERROUS P·NUMBERS

Grouping of Base Metals lor Qualification
Ferrous
Minimum Welding Brazing
Specified ISO
UNS Tensile, p. Group lSbOB
Spec. No. Type or Grade No. ksi IMPal No. No. P-No. Group Nominal Composition Product Form
SA-3& K02&00 58 (400) 1 101 11.1 C- Mn- SI Plate, bar & shapes
SA·53 Type F 48 (330) 1 101 11.1 c Furnace welded pipe
SA·53 TypeS, Gr. A K02504 48 (330) 1 101 11.1 c Smls. pipe
SA·53 Type E, Gr. A K02504 48 (330) 1 101 11.1 c Resistaoce welded pipe
SA-53 Type E, Gr. B K03005 60 (415) 1 101 11.1 C- Mn Resistan<:e welded pipe
SA-53 TypeS, Gr. B K03005 60 (415) 1 1 101 11.1 C- Mn Smls. pipe
SA· 105 K0.3504 70(48.5)~ 101 11.1 c Flanges & fittings
SA-106 A K02501 48 (330) 1 1 101 1.1 C- Si Smls. pipe
Practice Problem 019: OW/OB-422- Minimum Specified Tensile Strength

What is the minimum specified tensile strength of ASME SA-516 Grade 70?
a) 16 ksi
b) 516 ksi
c) 70,000 ksi
d) 70 ksi
e) 51670 ksi
Practice Problem 020: OW/08-422- Nominal Composition

What is the nominal composition of ASME SA-333 Grade 6?
a) carbon steel
b) manganese steel
c) C-Mn-Si steel
d) alloy steel
e) C-Mn steel
Notebook Page 52
QW-424 Base Metals Used for Procedure Qualification
Base metals are qualified for welding procedure specificati ons by welding a procedure qualification
t est coupon and passing the required tests. Once the test coupon has passed all tests, then the base
metal is qualified according to its P-No., as listed in the QW-424 table (see below). Note that metals
that do not appear in Table QW/QB-422 are considered to be unassigned metals.
Base Metal(s) Used in

Welding Procedure Test Coupon B ase Metals Qualified
One metal from a P-Number to any Any metals assigned that P-Number
metal from the same P-Number
One metal from P-No. 15E to any Any P-No. 15E or 5B metal to any
metal from P-No. 15E metal assigned P-No. 15E or 5B
One metal from a P-Number to any Any metal assigned the first to any
metal from any other P-Number P-Number metal assigned the second
P-Number
One metal from P-No. 15E to any Any P-No. 15E or 5B metal to any
metal from any other P-Number metal assigned the second P-No.
One metal from P-No. 3 to any metal Any P-No. 3 metal to any metal
from P-No. 3 assigned P-No. 3 or 1
One metal from P-No. 4 to any metal Any P-No. 4 metal t o any metal
from P-No. 4 assigned P-No. 4, 3, or 1
One metal from P-No. 5A to any Any P-No. 5A metal to any m etal
metal from P-No. 5A assigned P-No. 5A, 4, 3, or 1
One metal from P-No. 5A to a metal Any P-No. 5A metal to any metal
from P-No. 4, or P-No. 3, or P-No. 1 assigned toP-No. 4, 3, or 1
One metal from P-No. 4 to a metal Any P-No. 4 metal to any metal
from P-No. 3 or P-No. 1 assigned to P-No. 3 or 1
Any unassigned metal to the same The unassigned metal to itself
unassigned metal
Any unassigned metal to any P - The unassigned metal to any metal
Number metal assigned to the same P-Number as
the qualified metal
Any unassigned metal to any metal The unassigned metal to any metal
from P-No. 15E assigned P-No. 15E or 5B
Any unassigned metal to any other The first unassigned metal to the
unassigned met al second u n assigned metal
©Codes and St andards Training Institute (CAST!)
Notebook Paoe 53
F-Number (F-No.) - QW-430
QW-430 defines F-Numbers as families of filler metals based essentially on usability characteristics.
Similar to P-Numbers, F-Numbers were made to reduce the number of welding procedure and
performance qualifications, where it was logical.
However, like P-Numbers, the filler metals within an F-Number does not imply that base metals or
filler metals within the same F-Number may be indiscriminately substituted for a metal that was
used in the qualification test without consideration of the compatibility of the base and filler metals
from the standpoint of metallurgical properties, postweld heat treatment, design, mechanical
properties, and service requirements.
The F-Nurober is an essential variable for WPS and welder performance qualifications.
Steps to Find an F-Nu.mber- QW-432
Step 1: A filler metal must be produced to an AWS classification (or other national or international
organizations, within an ASME specification, in order to have an F-Number assigned).
Step 2: Using QW-432 find the EXX XX that matches the filler metal being considered.
Step 3: When the EXX XX has been found, move left on this same line, to match the SFA
specification number.
Step 4: On the same line as the EXX XX and the SFA specification, move left to read the F-Number.
These steps are shown in the following examples. You can proceed to answer the practice problems
after the examples.
Notebook Page 54
Example 021: QW-432- F-No.
What is the F-No. ofSFA-5.1 classification E6010?
QW-432
F-NUMBE RS
Groupingof Electrodes and Welding Rodsfor Q u alification
ASME Specification AWS Classification UNS No.
Steel and Steel Alloys
SFA-5.1 EXX20
SFA-5.1 EXX22
SFA-5 .1 EXX24
SFA-5.1 EXX27
SFA-5.1 EXX28
SFA-5.4 EXXX(X)-26
SFA-5.5 EXX20-X
SFA-55 EXX27-X
2 SFA-5.1 EXX12
2 SFA-5.1 EXX13
2 SFA-5.1 EXX14
2 SFA-5.1 EXX19
2 SFA-5.5 E(X)XX13·X
CD SFA-5.1 ~
3 SFA-5.1 EXX1 1
3 SFA-5.5 E(X)XX10-X
4 SFA-5.1 EXX15
4 SFA-5.1 EXX16
4 SFA-5.1 EXX18
4 SFA-5.1 EXX18M
4 SFA-5.1 EXX48
4 SFA-5.4 other than austenitic and duplex EXXX(X)-15

4 SFA-5.4 other than austeniticand duplex EXXX(X)-17
4 SFA-5.5 E(X)XX16·X
4 SFA-5.5 E(X)XX18M
4 SFA-5.5 E(X)XX18M1
4 SFA-5.5 E(X)XX45
5 SFA-5.4 austenitic and duplex EXXX(X)-15

6 SFA-5.2 All classifications

6 SFA-59 All classifications

6 SFA-5.28 Al l classifications

6 SFA-5.30 INMs-X
6 SFA-5.30 IN5XX
6 SFA-5.30 IN3XX(X)
1\lotP.hook Pr~oP. !i!i

Example 022: QW-432- F-No.
QW-432
F-NUMBERS
Grouping of Electrodes and Welding Rods for Qualification
ASME Specification AWS Classification UNS No.
SFA-5.1 EXX20
SFA-5 .1 EXX22
SFA-5.1 EXX24
SFA-5 .1 EXX27
SFA-5.1 EXX28
SFA-5.4 EXXX(X)-26
SFA-5.5 EXX20-X
SFA-5.5 EXX27-X
2 SFA-5.1 EXX12
2 SFA-5.1 EXX13
2 SFA-5.1 EXX14
2 SFA-5.1 EXX19
3 SFA-5.1 EXX10
3 SFA-5.1 EXX11
3 SFA-5.5 E(X}XX10-X
3 SFA-5.5 E(X}XX1 1-X
4 SFA-5.1 EXX15
4 SFA-51 EXX16
CD SFA-5.1 ~
4 SFA-5.1 EXX18M
4 SFA-5.1 EXX48

4 SFA-5.4 other than austeni tic and duplex EXXX(X)-17
4 SFA-5.5 E(X}XX18M
4 SFA-5.5 E(X}XX18M1
4 SFA-5.5 E(X}XX45




6 SFA-5.30 INMs-X
6 SFA-5.30 IN5XX
6 SFA-5.30 IN3XX(X)
© Codes and Stand ards Training Institute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 56
Practice Problem 023: OW-432 - F-No.
a) F-No. 1
b) F-No. 3
c) F-No. 4
d) F-No. 6
e) F-No. 22
Practice Problem 024: OW-432 - F-No.

What is the F-No. of SFA-5.5 classification E8018-B3L, low-alloy steel electrodes for shielded metal
arc welding?
a) F-No. 1
b) F-No. 3
c) F-No. 4
d) F-No. 5
e) F-No. 22
Notebook Paqe 57
A-Number (A-No.)- QW-442
QW-442 defines an A-Number as families of weld metal have been assigned A-Numbers based
essentially on resultant properties of the weld metal (i.e., the filler metal and both base metals that
have been mixed together by welding).
The A-Number is an essential variable for WPS, but not for welder qualification. Since the
F-Number is an essential variable for welder qualification, however, the A-Number would also have
to conform to changes in the F-Number.
Steps to Find an A-Number- QW-442
Step 1: Estimate the chemical composition of the completed weldment (i.e., base metal+ filler metal).
Step 2: Using QW-442 find the appropriate matching chemical composition of the weldment (note
that the chemical composition ranges can be very wide).
Step 3: Move to the left column to find the A-No.
These steps are shown in the following examples. You can proceed to answer the practice problems
after the examples.
Example 025: QW-442 - A-No.

What is the A-No. when welding P-No. 1 toP-No. 1 using SFA-5.1 classification E7018 (F-No. 4) filler
metal?
QW-442
A-NUMBERS
Clas!ification of Ferrol.S Weld Metal Analysis for Proced ll'e Qualification
Analysis, % [Note {1)]
Type5 of Weld
Deposit c Cr Mo Ni Mn Si
M ild Steel 0.20 1.60 1.00
Carbon-Molybdenum 0 .15 050 0.40·0.65 1.60 1.00
Chrome (0.4% to 2%)-Molybdenum 0.15 0 .40-2.00 0.40-0.65 1.60 1.00

Chrome (2% to 6%) -Molybdcnum 0 .15 2.00-600 0.40-1 50 1.60 2.00
Chrome (6% to 10.5%)-Molybdcnum 0.15 6.00·1 0.50 0.40-1.50 1.20 2.00
Cl1romc-Martcnsitic 0.15 11 00-15 .00 0.70 2.00 1.00
7 Chrome-Ferrit ic 0.1 5 11 00-30 .00 1 00 1.00 300
8 Chromium-Nickel 0 .1 5 14.50-30.00 4.00 7 50-15.00 2.50 1.00

9 Chromium-N ickel 0.30 1900·3000 600 15.00 -37.00 2.50 1.00
10 Nickel to 4% 0.1 5 0.55 0 80-4.00 1 70 1.00
11 Manganese-Molybdenum 0.1 7 0.25-0 .75 085 1.25-2 25 1.00
12 Nickel-Chromium -Molybdenum 0.15 1.50 0.25-0.80 1 25 -2.80 0 .75-2.25 1.00
NOTE :
(1) Single va lues shown above arc maximum.
From QW/QB-442, P-No. I is carbon steel and from general knowledge SFA-5.1 classification E70 18 is also carbon steel.
Notebook Page 58
Example 026: QW-442 - A-No.
What is the A-No. when welding SA-335 grade P l using SFA-5.5 classification E7818-Al (C-0.5Mo
alloy steel) filler m etal?
QW-442
A-NUMBERS
Classification of FerrotS Weld Metal A nalysis for Procedure Qualification
Types of Weld Analysis, % [Note (1)]

Deposit c Cr Mo Ni Mn Si
M ild $te<)l 0.20 1 60 1.00
2 Carl)on-Molybdcoum 0 .15 0.50 0.40-0.65 1.60 1.00
3 Chrome (0.4% to 2%)-Molybdenum 0.15 0.40·2 00 0. 40·0.65 1 60 1.00

4 Chrome (2% to 6%) -Molybdenum 0 .1 5 2.00-6.00 0.40-1.50 1 60 2.00
5 Chrome (6% to 10.5%)-Molybdenum 0.15 6.00-10.50 0.40-1.50 1.20 2.00
6 Chromc-Martcnslt lc 01 5 11 00·15 00 0 .70 2 00 1.00
Chromc- Ferrit ic 0 15 11.00-30 00 1.00 1.00 300
8 Chr omium-N ickel 0.15 14.50-30 00 4.00 7.50 ·15.00 2.50 1.00
9 Chromium-Nickel 030 1900·3000 6.00 15.00-37 .00 2.50 100
10 Nickel to 4% 0.1 5 0 55 0.80-4 00 1.70 100
11 Manganese-Molybdenum 0.17 0.25-0.75 0.85 1.25·2.25 1 00
12 N ickei-Chromium-Molybdcnum 0.15 1.50 0.25-0.80 1 25-2 80 0 75·2 25 1.00
NOTE:
(1) Single values shown above arc maximum.
From QW/QB-442, SA-335 Grade PI nominal composition is a C-O.SMo alloy steel

and the filler metal is also C-O.SMo alloy steel.
.................----··---- ____ , ...........................................
_,._... ... ~ -. ..... ~ -·.... ~ . - - ' - - "" ~
Practice Problem 027: OW-442 - A-No.

What is the A-No. when welding SA-240 grade 304L using SFA-5.4 classification E309L (austenitic
stainless steel 18Cr-8Ni) filler metal?
a) A-No. 6
b) A-No. 7
c) A-No. 8
d) A-No. 9
e) A-No. 10
Notebook Paoe 59
Practice Problem 028: QW-442 - A-No.
What would be the A-No. when welding an ASME SA-105 flange to SA-106 Grade B pipe, using an
AWS A 5.1 E7018 electrode?
a) A-No. 1
b) A-No. 2
c) A-No. 3
d) A-No. 4
e) A-No. 6
Practice Problem Q29: QW-442 - A-No.

What would be the A-No. when welding ASME SA-312 Type TP316 pipe using an AWS A 5.4 E316
electrode?
a) A-No. 1
b) A-No. 2
c) A-No. 4
d) A-No. 8
e) A-No. 5
Notebook Page 60
Article II - Welding Procedure Qualifications QW-200
Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS)- QW-200.1
Each manufacturer and contractor must prepare and qualify written Welding Procedure
Specifications (WPS) to provide direction for making production welds to Code requirements,
including direction to the welder or welding operator to assure compliance with the Code
requirements (QW-200.l(a)).
Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) - QW-200.1(a)
A WPS is a written document prepared to provide direction for making pr oduction welds to Code
requirements. The WPS and/or other documents may be used to provide direction to the welder or
welding operator to assist with achieving compliance of Code requirements.
Contents of the WPS- QW-200.1(b)
The completed WPS must include all essential, nonessential, and when required, supplementary
essential variables for each welding process used in the WPS.
Changes to the WPS - QW-200.1(c)
Changes to the WPS may be made in the nonessential variables of a WPS to suit production
r equirements without requalification only if the variable changes are documented for each process.
This may be done by amending the current WPS or by writing a new WPS with the variable changes.
P rocedure Qualification Record (PQR) - QW-200.2
Each manufacturer or contractor shall be required to pr epare a Procedure Qualification Record

(PQR) as part of qualifying the WPS with a test coupon. A PQR is a record of the welding data used
to weld a test coupon (QW-200.2(a)). The PQR is a record of the variables recorded during the
welding of the test coupons and contains the test results.
Contents of the PQR - QW-200.2(b)
The PQR must include all essential, and when required, supplementary essential variables for each
welding process used during the welding of the test coupon. Different than the WPS, it is the
manufacturer's or contractor's option to include nonessential or oth er variables used during the
welding of the test coupon.
All welding variables, if recorded, shall be the actual variables (including ranges) used during the
welding of the test coupon. If variables are not monitored during welding, they are not permitted to
be included in the PQR.
Notebook Paoe 61
Changes to the PQR- QW-200.2(c)
Changes to the PQR are not permitted since they are a record of history, although there are a few
exceptions, such as to correct typographical errors (editorial corrections) to the PQR which are
permitted.
Combination of Welding Procedures- QW-200.4
When more than one WPS with different variables is to be used in a single production joint, ASME
Section IX permits multiple WPSs to be combined into one WPS (QW-200.4(a)).
Manufacturer's or Contractor's Responsibility- QW-201
The manufacturer or contractor is responsible for the following:
1. Each manufacturer or contractor shall qualify the WPS by the welding of test coupons and
the testing of specimens, and the recording of the welding data and test results in a PQR.
2. The welders or welding operators used to produce weldments to be tested for qualification of
procedures shall be under the full supervision and control of the manufacturer or contractor
during the welding of the PQR test.
3. The weldments to be tested for qualification of procedures shall be welded either by direct
employees or by individuals engaged by contract for their services as welders or welding
operators under the full supervision and control of the manufacturer or contractor.
4. It is not permissible for the manufacturer or contractor to have the supervision and control of
welding of the test weldments performed by another organization.
5. It is permissible, however, to subcontract any or all of the work of preparation of test metal
for welding and subsequent work on preparation of test specimens from the completed
weldment, performance of nondestructive examination, and mechanical tests, provided the
manufacturer or contractor accepts the responsibility for any such work.
Notebook Page 62
Type of Tests Required QW-202
Specimen Removal QW-202.1
Test speeimens for WPS qualification must be removed in a manner shown in QW-463. Figure
QW-463.l(a) is used as a guide for specimen removal for plate test coupons and Figure QW-463.l (d)
or (e) is used as a guide for specimen removal for pipe specimens.
Plate Test Coupon
OW-463.1 (a)
QW-463.1(a) specimen order of removal.
Pip e Test Coupon
Horizontal axis
-+--+--- +
2 Face plus
2 Roots bends
4 Side bends
QW-463.1(d) & (e)
Figure QW-463.l(d) & (e) Specimen order of removal.
Notebook Paoe 63
Practice Problem 030: OW-200 WPS Requirements
What shall the WPS include when notch toughness requirements are not mandatory?
a) all essential and nonessential variables

b) only essential variables
c) all essential, nonessential variables, and supplementary essential variables
d) essential variables and nonessential variables are optional
e) only the variables listed in the PQR are required

What changes may be made to a qualified WPS, without the need to requalify it?
a) all nonessential variables may be changed

b) nonessential variables may be changed for each process
c) nonessential variables may be changed for each process provided the WPS is amended or
by use of a new WPS
d) essential and nonessential variables may be changed for each process provided the WPS
is amended or by use of a new WPS
e) all variables may be changed for each process provided the WPS is amended or by use o
anewWPS

What shall the PQR include when notch toughness requirements are not mandatory?
a) all essential and nonessential variables

b) all essential variables
c) all essential, nonessential variables, and supplementary essential variables
d) essential variables and supplementary essential variables are optional
e) all the variables listed in the WPS are required

Which document or documents shall be certified as part of qualifYing a welding procedure and
welder/welding operator performance?
a) WPS
b) PQR
c) WPQ
d) WPS andPQR
e) WPS, PQR, WPQ
Notebook Page 64
Welding Procedure Qualification Variables and QW-250 Tables
E ssential Va riable - QW-251.2
An essential variables are those in which a change, as described in the specific variables, is
considered to affect the mechanical properties of the weldment, and shall require requalification of
theWPS.
Supplementary Essential Variable- QW-251.2
A supplementary essential variable are those that are required for metals for which other Sections
specify notch-toughness tests and are in addition to the essential variables for each welding process .
Nonessential Variable- QW-251.3
Nonessential variable are th ose in which a change, as described in the specific variables, may be
made in the WPS without requalification. This may be by amendment to the WPS or by use of a new
WPS.
Special P rocesses- QW-251.4(a)
The special process essential variables apply to corrosion-resist ant and hard-surfacing weld metal
overlays. A change in the corrosion-resistant or hard-s urfacing welding process shall require
requalification.
WPS Variables - QW-250/260 Tables
The QW-250/260 tables list the essential, nonessential, and supplementary essential variables based
on th e welding process. For example, QW-253 lists the WPS qualification variables for SMAW, while
QW-254lists the WPS qualification variables for SAW.
Note: the QW-250/260 tables are for qualifying the WPS. not for performance qualification of the
welder or welding operat or. The welding variables used for qualifying the welder or welding operator
are found in the QW-350 tables in Article III.

Using QW-250/260 Tables and Article IV Variables
The following example explains how to read Article IV variable paragraphs when using the QW-
250/260 WPS variables tables.
Example 034: Using QW-202 Type of Tests Required QW-250/260 Tables and Article IV Variables
QW-402.1 states: "A change in the type of groove (Vee-groove, U-groove, single-bevel, double-bevel,
etc.)."
By itself, this paragraph does not define what type of welding variable it is or how to apply this
variable, since it depends on whether this paragraph is being referenced for welding procedure
qualification or welder/welding operator performance qualification for the welding process being
used.
For a WPS qualification using SMAW, QW-253 identifies a change in groove design, described in
QW-402.1, as a nonessential variable and QW-402.1 should now be read as follows:
"A change in the type of groove (Vee-groove, U-groove, single-bevel, double-bevel, etc.) is a
nonessential variable for WPS qualification when using the SMAW process."
Notebook Page 66
Example 035: QW-253 SMAW WPS Variable- Groove Design
For SMAW, what type ofWPS variable is a change in groove design for a WPS?
QW-253
WELDING VARIABLES PROCEDURE SPECIFICATIONS (WPS)
Shielded Metal-Arc Welding (SMAW)
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential ( Nonessential
.1
"'-
Groove design
0
QW-402 .4 Backing X
Joints .10 Root spacing X
.11
"'
± Retainers X
.5 Group Number X
QW-403
.6 "' T Limits impact X
Base .8 TQualified X
Metals
.9 "' t Pass > liz in. (13 mm) X
.11 P-No. qual ified X
.4
"' F-Number X
.5 "' A-Number X
.6 "' Diameter X
QW-404
Fi ller
Metals
.7 "'
</> Diameter> ~ in. (6 mm) X
.12 t/> Classification X
.30 t/> t X
.33 t/> Classificat ion X
.1 + Position X
QW-405
.2 t/> Position X
Positions
.3 t/> i -1- Vertical welding X
.1 Decrease> 100°F (55°C) X

QW-406
Preheat
.2 t/J Preheat maint. X
.3 Increase> 100°F (55°C) <IPl X
.1 PWHT X
QW-407
PWH T
.2 "' PWHT CT & T range) X
.4 "' T Limits X
.1 > Heat input X

QW-409
Electrical .4 Current or polarity X X
Characteristics
.8 "' l & E range X
.1 "' String/weave X
.5 "'4> Method cleaning X
.6 Method back gouge X
QW-410
Technique
.9 "'4> Multiple to single pass/side X X
.25 Manual or automatic X
.26 "'
± Peening X
.64 Use of ther mal processes X
Legend :
+ Addition > Incr ease/greater than i Uphill t- Forehand ¢> Change
- Deletion < Decrease/less t han -1- Downhill ~ Backhand
for a WPS is a nonessential variable (see QW-402.1).
1\lntohnnk P::onP (',7

Example Q36: QW-253 SMAW WPS Variable- Base Metal
For SMAW, what type of WPS variable is a change in base metal thickness beyond the range
qualified in QW-451?
QW-253
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief ol Variables CE~tial:> E~ti al Nonessential
.1 </> Groove design X
QW-402 .4 - Backing X
</>
.1 1 ± Retainers X
.5 </> Group Number X
.6 T Limits impact X
QW-403
Base .8 </> TQ.lalifie:i ( X)
Metals
.9 t Pass> ~ in. {13 mm) X
.1 1 </> P-No. qualifie:i X
.4 </> F-Numba- X
.5 </> A-Numba- X
.6 </> Diameter X
QW-404
Filler .7 </> Diameter>~ i n. (6 mm) X
Metals
.1 2 </> a assi fi cation X
.30 t X
.33 "'
</> Classification X
.1 + Position X
QW-405
.2 Position X
Positions
.3 "'
</> H Vertical welding X
.1 Decrease> 100• F (55•C) X
QW-406
Preheat
.2 </> Preheat maint. X
.3 Increase> 1oo•F (55•C) (I P) X
.1 </> PWHT X
QW-407 PWHT (T & T range) X
PWHT .2 </>
.4 T limits X
.1 > Heat input X
QW-409
Characteristics
.8 "'
</> I & E range X
.1 </> String/weave X
.5 </> Method cleaning X
.6 </> Method back gouge X
QW-410 Multiple to single passlside X X
Technique .9 </>
.25 Manual or automatic X
.26 "'
± Peening X
.64 Use ol thermal processes X
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase/greater than Uphill <--Forehand <1> Change
- Deletion < Decrease/less than Downh ill _, Backhand
For SMAW, a change in base metal thickness beyond the range qualified in QW-451 is an essential
variable for a WPS.
Notebook Page 68
Example 037: QW-253 SMAW WPS Variable- F-No.
For SMAW, what type ofWPS variable is a change in F-No.?
QW-253
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables ( Essential ) Essential Nonessential
.1 4> G roove design X
Joints X
.10 4> Root spacing
.11 ± Retainers X
.5 4> Qoup Number X

.6 T Li mits impact X
QW-403
Base .8 4> T QJalifia:l X
Metals
.9 t Pass>~ in. (13 mm) X
.11 4> P-No. qualifi a:l X
.4 4> F-Number 0
.5 4> A-Number X
QW-404
6 4> Diameter X
Filler .7 4> Diameter >~ in. (6 mm) X
Metals
.1 2 4> Oassification X
.30 4> t X
.33 4> Classification X
.1 + Position X
QW-405
.2 4> Posit ion X
Positions
.3 4> l! Va-ti cal weldi ng X
.1 Decrease> 1oo•F (55.C) X
QW-406
Preheat .2 4> Preheat malnt. X
.3 Increase > 1oo•F (5s•q (IP) X
.1 4> PWHT X
QW-407
PWHT
.2 4> PWHT {T & T range) X
.4 T limits X
.1 > Heat input X
QW-409
Electrical .4 4> CUrrent or polarity X X
Characteristics
.8 4> I & E range X
.1 String/weave X
.5 "'4> Method cleaning X
.6 4> Method back gouge X
QW-410
.9 Multiple to single pass'side X X
Technique
.25 "' Manual or automatic X
.26 "'
± Peening X
.64 Use of thermal processes X
Legend:
+ Addition > Inc rease/greater than l Uphill ,__ Forehand 4> Change
- Deletion < Decrease/less than ! Downhill --+ Backhand
A change in the F-No. is an essential variable for a WPS (see QW-404.4).
NntPhnnk P::tnP. fiQ

Example 038: QW-253 SMAW WPS Variable- Positions
For SMAW, what type of WPS variable is a change in the progression specified for any pass of a
vertical weld?
QW-253
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential ([onessenti~
OW-402 .4 - Backing X
</>
.11 ± Retainers X
5 </> Group Number X
.6 T Li mits impact X
QW-403
Base .8 </> T Qual i fi a:! X
Metals
.9 t Pass> ~ in. (1 3 mm) X
.11 </> P-No. quali fia:l X
.4 </> F-Number X
.5 </> A-Number X
.6 </> Diameter X
QW-404
Filler .7 Diameter> !.'4 in. (6 mm) X
Metals
.12 "'
</> Oassification X
.30 t X
.33 "' Classification X
.1
"'
+ Position X
QW-405
2 Position X
Positions
.3 "' H Vertical wading (~
.1
"' Decrease> 1oo •F (55.C) X
QW-406 Preheat main!.
Preheat .2 X
.3 "' 1ncrease > 1oo•F (55°C) (I P) X
.1 PWHT X
QW-407
PWHT .2 "' PWHT (T & T range) X
.4 "' T l imits X
.1 > Heat input X
QW-409
Characteristics
.8 "' I & E range X
.5 "' Method cleaning X
QW-410
.6 "'
</> Method back gouge X
.9 Multiple to single pass's de X X
Technique
.26 "'
± Peening X
Legend :
+ Addition > Increase/greater than Uphill ..... Forehand ¢>Change
- Deletion < Decrease/less than Downhill ..... Backhand
For SM...<\W, a change in the vertical weld progression for a WPS is a nonessential variable (see
QW405.3).
Notebook Page 70
Example 039: QW-253 SMAW WPS Variable- Preheat
During a SMAW procedure qualification, if the WPS lists a minimum preheat of 250°F and the PQR
test coupon was welded with a 225°F minimum preheat, what would be the qualified preheat
t emperature if all other PQR tests passed?
QW-253
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables ( Essential ::> Essential Nonessential
.1 Groove design X
QW-402 .4 -"' Backing X
.11 "'
± Retainers X
.5 </> G-oup Number X
.6 Tlimits impact X
QW-403
Base .8 </> T Cllal i fi e:J X
Metals
.9 t Pass> J.'2 in. (13 mm) X
.11 </> P-No. qualifie:J X
.4 </> F-Number X
.5 A-Number X
QW-404
.6 "'
"'
Diameter X
Filler .7 Diameter >~ in. (6 mm) X
Metals
.12 "' O assification X
.30 "'
"'
t X
.33 Classification X
.1
"'
+ Position X
QW-405
.2 Position X
Positions
.3 "' t! Va-ti cal welding X
.1
"' Decrease > 1oo•F (ss·c ) ( x)
QW-406 Preheat maint.
Preheat .2 </> X
.3 1ncreare > 1oo•F (5s•c ) (I P) X
.1 </> PWHT X
QW-407
PWHT .2 </> PWHT (T & T range) X
.4 Tlimi ts X
.1 > Heat input X
QW-409
Electrical .4 </> CUrrent or polarity X X
Characteristics
.8 </> I & E range X
.1 </> String/weave X
QW-410
.9 </> Multiple to single pas:fside X X
Technique
.25 </> Manual or automatic X
.26 ± Peening X
.64 Use of thErmal processES X
Legend :
+ Addition > Increase/greater than t Uphill - Forehand <P Change
- Deletion < Decrease/less than ! Downhill - Backhand
QW-406.1 is an essential variable that allows the listed WPS preheat temperature to be decreased
up to 100°F during in the PQR coupon test and still qualify the listed WPS preheat temper ature.
Therefore, the ualified WPS pr eheat tern erature would be 250°F.
© Codes and Standards Trainin g Institute (C ASTI)
1\lntPhnnk P::tnf' 71
Example 040: QW-253 SMAW WPS Variable- PWHT
For SMAW, what type of WPS variable is the addition or deletion of PWHT below the lower
transformation temperature for P-No. 1, P -No. 3, P-No. 4, and P-No. 5A?
QW-253
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables (Essential ) Essential Nonessential
.1 4> Groove design X

QW-402 .4 - Backi ng X
4>
.11 ± Retainers X
.5 G-oup Number X
QW-403
.6 "' T Limits impact X
Base .8 TQJali fied X
Metals
.9 "' t Pass >!12 in. (13 mm) X
.11 P-No. qualified X
.4
"'4> F-N umber X
.5 4> A -Number X
.6 4> Diameter X
QW-404
Filler .7 Diameter> Y.t in. (6 mm) X
Metals
.1 2 "'4> a assi fi cat ion X
.30 4> f X
33 4> Classification X
.1 + Position X
QW-405
.2 Position X
Positions
.3 "'4> H Vertical welding X
.1 Decrease > 1oo•F (ss•c ) X
QW-406
Preheat
.2 Preheat maint. X
.3 "' Increase> 1oo•F (ss•C) (IP) X
.1 '.2. PWHT @
QW-407
PWHT
.2 PWHT (T & T range) X
.4 "' Tlimits X
.1 > Heat input X

QW-409
Electrical .4 Cu-rent or polari ty X X
Characteristics
.8 "' I & E range X
.5 "' Method cleaning X
.6 "' Method back gouge X
QW-4 10
Technique
.9 "' Multiple to singl e pass'side X X
.26 "'
± Peening X
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase/greater than Uph i ll - Forehand 4> Change
- Deletion < Decrease/less than Down hill - Backhand
QW-407.1 is an essential variable which specifies a separate procedure qualification is required for
the addition or deletion of a PWHT below the lower transformation temperature (see QW-407.1(a)
and QW-407.1(a)(2)).
Notebook Page 72
Example 041: QW-253 SMAW WPS Variable- Electrical Characteristics
For SMAW, what type ofWPS variable is an increase in heat input?
QW-253
W ELDING VARIABLES PROCEDURE SPECIFICATIONS (WPS)
c:_upplementa~
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential Nonessential
.1 4> Groove design X
4>
.11 :t Retainers X
.5 G-oup Number X
QW-403
.6 "' T limits impact X
Base 8 TQ.aalifia:l X
Metals
.9 "' t Pass>~ in. (13 mm) X
.11 4> P-No. qualifia::f X
.4 4> F-Number X
.5 4> A-Number X
.6 4> Diameter X
QW-404
Filler .7 4> Diameter>~ in. (6 mm) X
Metals
.12 4> a assi fi cation X
.30 t X
.33 "'4> Classifi cation X
.1 + Position X
QW-405
.2 4> Posi tion X
Positions
.3 4> tt Vertical welding X
.1 Decrease > 100'F (55'C) X
QW-406
Preheat
.2 4> Preheat maint. X
.3 l ncra:~~> 100'F (55'C) (IP) X
.1 t/> PWHT X
QW-407 PWHT (T & T range) X
PWHT .2
.4 "' Tlimits X
QW-409
.1 > Heat ineut @
Characteristics
.8 "'tP I & E range X
.1 String/weave X
.5 "'t/> Method cleaning X
.6 Method back gouge X
QW-410
Technique
.9 "' Multiple to si ngle pass/side X X
.26 "'
:1: Peening X
.64 u~ of thermal procelSeS X
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase/greater than Uphill - Forehand 4> Change
- Deletion < Decrease/less than Downhill - Backhand
For S MAW, an increase in heat input is a supplement ary essential variable for a WPS (see
QW-409.1).
NntPhnnk PrtnP 73
Example Q42: QW-253 SMAW WPS Variable- Techniques
For SMAW, what type ofWPS variable is the addition or deletion of peening?
QW-253
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Va1iables Essential Essential __([ooessential

</>
.11 ± Retainers X
.5 4> Group Number X
.6 Tlimits i mpact X
QW-403
Base .8 4> TOJalified X
Metals
.9 t Pass> }2 in. (13 mm) X
.11 </> P-No. qualified X
.4 F-Number X
.5 "' A-Number X
QW-404
.6 "'
</> Diameter X
Filler .7 </> Diameter>~ in. (6 mm) X
Metals
.12 </> aasafication X
.30 </> t X
.33 Classification X
.1
"'
+ Position X
QW-405
2 </> Position X
Positions
.3 </> l! Vert ical welding X
.1 Decrease > 1oo•F (55. C) X
QW-406
Preheat
.2 </> Preheat main!. X
.3 1ncr ease > 1oo•F ( ss•q (1P) X
.1 </> PWHT X
QW-407 PWHT (T & T range)
PWHT
.2 Heat input X

QW-409
Electrical .4 </> CUrrent or polari t y X X
Characteristics
.8 Manual or automatic X
.26 ± Peeninlj (X)
Legend:
+ Addition > Inc rease/greater than Uphill ,_ Forehand ¢>Change
- Deletion < Decrease/less than Downhill - Backhand
For SMAW, the addition or deletion of peening is a nonessential variable for a WPS (see QW-410.26).
Notebook Page 74
Example 043: QW-254 SAW WPS Variable- Supplemental
For SAW, what type of WPS variable is the addition, deletion, or change of more than 10% in the
volume of s upplemental filler metal?
QW-254
Submerged-Arc Welding (SAW)
Supplem entary
Paragraph Brief of Variables ~ssentia,.L.. Essential Nonessenti al
QW-402 .1 </> Groove design X
Joints
.4 - Backing X
.10 </> Root spaci ng X
.11 ± Retainers X
QW-403 .5 </> Group Number X

Base
Metals
.6 T limits X
.8 </> TQ..Ialified X
.9 t Pass~ in. (13 mm) X
.11 </> P-No. qualifi ed X
QW-404 .4 </> F-Number X

Filler
.5 </> A-Number X
Metals
.6 </> Diameter X
.9 </> Flux/wire class . X
.10 </> A ll oy flux X
.24 ±
</>
Supplerner~tal
0
.27 </> All oy aerner1t s X
.29 </> Fl ux designation X
.30 </> t X
.33 </> Oas9fication X
.34 </> Fl ux type X
.35 </> Fl ux/wire d ass. X X
.36 Recrushed slag X
QN-405 .1 + Position X
Positions
QW-406 .1 Decrease> 1oo•F (55.C) X

Preheat
.2 </> Pretleat rnaint. X
.3 I ncr~> 1oo·F (55.C) (IP) X
QW-407 .1 </> PWHT X

PWHT
.2 </> PWHT (T & T range) X
.4 Tlimit s X
QN-409 .1 > Heat input X

Electrical
.4 </> Currer1t or polarity X X
Characteristics
.8 </> I & E range X
For SAW, the addition, deletion, or change of more than 10% in the volume of supplemental filler
metal for a WPS is an essential variable (see QW404.24).

'Example 044: QW-255 SAW WPS Variable- Gas
For SAW, what type of WPS variable is a change from a single shielding gas to any other single
shielding gas?
QW-255
WELDING VARIABLES PROCEDURE SPECIFICATIONS (WPS) (CONT'D)
Gas Metal-Arc Welding (GMAW and FCAW)
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables CEssential ~ Essential Nonessential
.1 ± Trail or Heat input X

QW-409 2 Transfer mode X
<P
Electrical
Characteristics .4 <P OJrrent or polar ity X X
.8 <P I & E range X
.1 <P Stri ng/weave X

.3 <P Q ifi oe, cup, or nozzle size X
.5 <P Method cleaning X
.6 <P Method back gouge X
.7 <P Oscillation X
QW-410 .8 <P Tube-work distance X
Technique .9 X X
 Increase/greater than t Uphill .- Forehand Backhand
For SAW, a change in the shielding gas is an essent ial variable (see QW408.2(a)).
Notebook Page 76
Example 045: QW-256 GTAW WPS Variable- Addition of Filler Metal
For GTAW, what type ofWPS variable is the deletion or addition offtller metal?
QW-256
Gas Tungsten-Arc Welding (GT AW)
Suppl ementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables ~ssenti~ Essential Nonessenti al
QW-402 .1 ¢> Groove deSgn X
Joints
.5 + Backing X
.10 ¢> Root spacing X
.1 1 ± Retainers X
QW-403 .5 ¢> Group Number X
Base
.6 Tlimits X
Metals
8 TQ.lalifie:J X
'11 ¢> P-No. qualifioo X
QW-404 .3 ¢> Si ze X
Filler
Metals
.4 ¢> F-Number X
.5 ¢> A-Number X
'12 ¢> Oa5Sfication X
.14 :1: Filler (x)
.22 ± Conrum. insert X
.23 ¢> Filler metal product form X
.30 ¢> t X
.33 ¢> OasSfication X
.50 ± Flux X
QN-405 .1 + Position X
Positions
.2 ¢> Position X
.3 ¢> i! Verti cal welding X
QW-406 '1 Decrease> 100°F (55°C) X
Preheat
.3 Increase > 100°F (55°C) X
(IP)
QW-407 '1 ¢> PWHT X

PWHT
.2 ¢> PWHT (T &T range) X
.4 T l imits X
QW-408 '1 ± Trail or ¢> oomp. X
Gas
.2 ¢> Single, mixture, or % X
.3 ¢> Flow rate X
.5 ± or ¢>Backing flow X
.9 - Backing or¢> comp. X
.10 ¢> Shielding or trailing X
QW-404.14 is an essential variable that specifies an addition or deletion of filler metal is an essential
variable.
Note: this is an essential variable since GTAW can be used with or without filler metal (i.e.,
auto enous welding).
1\lntPhnnl< P~nP 77
Practice Problem 046: OW-253 SMAW WPS Variable- P-No.
For a SMAW WPS, what type ofWPS variable is a change in P -No . qualified?
a) essential
b) nonessential
c) nonessential, except when base metal is > 1 in. it is essential
d) not a welding variable
e) either nonessential or essential depending on the filler metal
Practice Problem 047: OW-253 SMAW WPS Variable- Electrode Classification

For a SMAW WPS, what type of WPS variable is a change in the electrode classification within an
SFA specification (i.e., no notch toughness testing)?
a) nonessential
b) essential
c) not a welding variable
d) none of the above
e) all of the above
Notebook Page 78
Article Ill - Welder and Welding Operator Performance Qualifications QW-300
General· QW-300.1
This Article lists the welding processes separately, with the essential variables that apply to welder
and welding operator performance qualifications, much like Article II for WPSs .
Again, much like Article II, the welder qualification is limited by the essential variables given for
each welding process, as listed in QW-350 tables and which are summarized in one larger table in
QW-416. Welding operator essential variables are found in QW-460.
A welder or welding operator may be qualified by volumet ric NDE of a test coupon, or their initial
production welding within the limitations of QW-304 and QW-305 or by bend tests taken from a test
coupon.
QW-300.2(a) restates that the basic premises of responsibility are contained within QW-103 and
QW-301.2. These paragraphs require that each manufacturer or contractor is responsible for
conducting tests to qualify the performance of welders and welding operators in accordance with
qualified WPSs , which th eir organization employs in the construction of weldments built in
accordance with the ASME B&PV Code.
The purpose of this requirement is to ensure that the manufacturer or contractor has determined
that their welders and welding operators using their procedures are capable of developing the
minimum requirements specified for an acceptable weldment. This responsibility cannot be
delegated to another organization.
QW-300.2(b) further states that the welders or welding oper ators used to produce such weldments
must be tested under the full s upervision and control of the manufacturer, contractor, assembler, or
installer during th e production of these test weldments.
It is not permissible for the manufacturer, contractor, assembler, or installer to have the welding of
the test coupon performed by another organization.
However, it is permissible, to subcontract any or all of the work of preparation of test materials for
welding and subsequent work on the preparation of test specimens from the completed weldments,
performance of nondestructive examination and mechanical tests, provided the manufacturer,
contractor, assembler, or installer accepts full responsibility for any such work.
Intent ofTests • QW-301.1
The performance qualification tests are intended to determine the ability of welders and welding
operators to make sound welds.
Notebook Paoe 79
Qualification Tests- QW-301.2
Each manufacturer or contractor must qualify each welder or welding operator for each welding
process to be used in production welding. Each performance qualification test must be welded in
accordance with qualified WPSs.
Identification of Welders and Welding Operators - QW-301.3
Each qualified welder and welding operator is assigned an identifying number, letter, or symbol by
the manufacturer or contractor, which shall be used to identify the work of that welder or welding
operator.
R ecord of Tests- QW-301.4
The record of Welder/Welding Operator Performance Qualification (WPQ) tests must include:
1. the essential variables (QW-350 or QW-360)

2. the type of test and test results, and
3. the ranges qualified in accordance with QW-452 for each welder and welding operator.
Suggested forms for these records are given in Forms QW-484NQW-484B (see Nonmandatory
Appendix B).
Practice Problem 048: QW-300.2 Welder Performance Qualification

What is the purpose of the welder performance qualification?
a) To ensure that the owner has determined that the engineering department using his
procedures are capable of developing the minimum requirements specified for an
acceptable weldment.
b) To ensure that the PQR supports the WPS.
c) To ensure all of the requirements in ASME Section IX are met.
d) To ensure that the manufacturer has determined that his welders using his procedures
are capable of developing the minimum requirements specified for an acceptable
weldment.
e) To qualify the welder and WPS simultaneously.
Practice Problem 049: QW-301 Intent of Tests

What is the intent of the performance qualification tests?
a) to determine the ability of the WPS t o make sound welds

b) to determine the ability of welders and welding operators to make sound welds
c) to determine the ability of the PQR to make sound welds
d) to determine the ability of WPS/PQR to make sound welds
e) to ensure radiographic quality welds
Notebook Page 80
'J '•
Practice Problem 050: QW-301 Record of Tests
What shall the record ofWPQ tests include?
a) all nonessential and essential variables

b) all nonessential, essential variables, and supplementary essential variables when
r equired
c) all essential variables
d) all nonessential, essential variables, and other welding parameters deemed necessary by
the inspector
e) all nonessential, essential variables, and other welding parameters deemed necessary by
th e owner
Type of Test Required - QW-302
Summary of P erformance Qualification - QW-302
Performance qualification can be done in 3 ways:
1. Qualify by bend tests from a welded test coupon. See QW-452.1(a) for the number and type
of t ests.
2. Qualify by volumet ric examinat ion using RT or UT of a welded t est coupon of at least 6 in.
See QW-302.2 and QW-304.1.
3. Qualify by volumetric examination using RT or UT on the first production weld of at least
6 in. See QW-304.1.
R etest M t er Failing Performance Qualification Test
The general rule for failing a performance qualification test is to retest by making twice the number
of tests done in t he initial qu alification.
Mech a nical Test s- QW-302.1
The type and number of test specimens required for mechanical testing are done in accordance with
QW-452 tables.
Sp ecimen Removal
QW-302.1 requires that groove weld test specimens must be removed in a manner as shown in
QW-463.2 and Figure 1.2 (a), with an example shown in Figure 1.2 (b).
@ Codes and Standards Training Inst itute (CAST!)
NntPhnok Pl'lnP. R1
(b)
Figures 1.2 (a) and (b) Performance qualification test coupons.
The as-welded test coupon has been marked to remove one face and one root bend. The run off tabs,
the start, the finish, and the area in the middle are marked as areas to be discarded.
Figure 1.2(b) shows an actual plate welded performance qualification test coupon. Note the discard
on both ends, and the discard material in the center of the test coupon. The actual test coupon could
have been shortened by the amount of the discard in the middle of the plate. The face and root bend
specimens have been pre-marked.
The welders' identification and the WPQ test identification should also be pre-marked. These pre-
markings should be placed out of harm's way, such as the edge of the specimen. The pre-marking
may help to identify the root from the face bend after grinding the reinforcement, and may assure
that test specimens are identified to the proper welder.
Volumetric NDE- QW-302.2
When the welder or welding operator is qualified by volumetric NDE, the minimum length of
coupon(s) to be examined must be 6 in. (150 mm) and must include the entire weld circumference for
pipe(s), except that for small diameter pipe, mul tiple coupons may be required, but the number does
need have to exceed four (4) consecutively made test coupons.
The limits of qualified positions and diameters are listed in QW-461.9.
Practice Problem 051: QW-302 Type of Test Required

When a welding operator is qualified by volumetric NDE, what is the minimum length of the coupon
to be examined?
a) 4 in.
b) 6 in.
c) 8 in.
d) 12 in.
e) as required in the WPS

• .~~nO~
Notebook Page 82
..j
1-('jf 1
~-l.. 'vv
Retests
The following rules apply when a welder has failed a test for qualification as a new welder under
QW-301 or for the renewal of existing welder qualifications under QW-322. When a welder is
qualified u sing mechanical testing, the qualification t est coupon must first pass a visual
examination. If th e visual examination fails, the welder may pe1form immediate retests in
accordance with QW-321.1 (two tests, etc.). When a welders test coupon passes the visual
examination, the welders test coupon may then be mechanically tested. If the mechanical test fails,
the welder may perform immediate retests in accordance with QW-321.2 (two tests, et c.).
Imme diate R etest Using Visual Examination- QW-321.1
When the WPQ test coupon fails the visual examination, retesting shall be by visual examination
before conducting t he mechanical testing, see QW-302.4.
When an immediate retest is done, two consecutive tests for each test failed must pass visual
examination requirements, see QW-321.1. If the two consecutive visual examinations are acceptable,
the Code user must then select one of the successful test coupons for conducting the mechanical
testing.
Immediate Retest Using Mechanical Testing- QW-321.2
When the WPQ test coupon has passed the visual examination of QW-302.4, the WPQ may then be
tested by mechanical testing. When the qualification coupon fails the mechanical testing, retesting
must be by mechanical testing. An immediate mechanical retest requires two consecutive tests for
each position failed, and both retests must pass the mechanical testing.
Immediate Retest Using Volumetric NDE- QW-321.3
When the WPQ test coupon fails the volumetric NDE, retesting must be by the same examination
method in accordance with QW-321.3. An immediate retest requires two (2) consecutive test coupons
for each coupon failed. Both retest coupons must pass the examination. Plates require two (2)
consecutive plate retests, each 6 inch (150 mm) minimum length. Pipe requires two (2) consecutive
pipe retests using QW-302.2 rules.
When the WPQ test is conducted on 6 inches (150 mm) of the first production weld, allowed as an
alternative to QW-304.1, the welder may be retested by examining an additional12 inches (300 rom)
of the same production weld. If the 12 inch (300 mm) length of weld passes the test, the welder is
qualified and may repair the failed 6 inch (150 mm) section. If the 12 inch (300 mm) length of weld
fails, the welder is not qualified. All welds represented by both the 6 inch (150 rom) and 12 inch
(300 mm) length s must be examined and repaired by a qualified welder. It might be less expensive to
remove all welds made by this welder and have them re-welded by a qualified welder.
NniPhnnk P-'l11P R::\

Practice Problem 052: WPQ Expiration
Welders and welding operators whose qualification coupon has failed the volumetric NDE may take
a retest consisting of what number and length of pipe?
a) 2 pipes for a total of 12 in. (300 mm)

b) 1 pipe for a total of 12 in. (300 mm)
c) 2 pipes for a total of 6 in. (150 mm)
d) 1 pipe for a total of 6 in. (150 mm)
e) none of the above
Notebook Page 84
Expiration and Renewal of Qualification- QW-322
Expiration of Qualification - QW·322.1(a)
When a welder has not welded with a process during a period of 6 months or more, the welder's
qualifications for that process shall expire. Qualifications are maintained if within the six month
period, prior to expiration of qualification,
1. a welder has welded using a manual or semiautoma tic welding process which will
maintain qualifications for manual and semiautomatic welding with that process.
N ote: QW-322.1(a) is subdivided into QW-322.1(a)(1) for welders and (a)(2) for welding operators.
This split is intended to point out that Code users must maintain the continuity of welders and
welding operators separately.
2. a welding operator has welded with a machine or aut omatic welding process which will
maintain his qualification for machine and automatic welding with that pr ocess.
Note: QW-322.2(a) Renewal of Qualification, is stated only once, with the expression, in th e second
sentence, "renews th e welders or welding operator's ... " This reference is intended to highlight that
the Code User must maintain the continuity of their welders and welding oper ators separately.
R enewal of Expired Welders Performance Qua lificat ion - QW-322.2(a)
Renewal of qualification expired under QW-322.1(a) a bove may be made for any process by welding a
single test coupon of either plate or pipe, of any material, t hickness, or diameter, in a ny position and
by testing of that coupon as r equired by QW-301 and QW-302. A successful test renews the welder or
welding operator's previous qualifications for that pr ocess and for t hose materials, thicknesses,
diamet ers, positions, and other variables for which previously qualified.
Providing the conditions of QW-304 and QW-305 are satisfied, renewal of qualification under
QW-322.1(a) may be done on production work.
Note: Remember, this is 'renewal' of qualification and therefore can be done by the original,
qualifying Code user only.
There are many reasons why a welder may not have welded with a process in 6 months, e.g., they
may have been sick, or laid off due to production demands. The welder may have been promot ed to a
supervisory position or may be qualified for several process, but has a special process which is used
only once in two or th ree years. Whatever the reason, when a welder has not used a process for six
months or more, all qualifications with that pr ocess can be renewed by successfully qualifying on a
single WPQ renewal test coupon as shown in Example 12.1.1 in T able 12.1
NniPhnnk P~nP A~
Practice Problem Q53: QW-322 Expiration of Qualification
When does a welder's ASME Sec. IX qualification expire?
a) When the welder has not welded with a process during a period of 6 months or more.
b) When the welder has not welded with a process during a period of 12 months or more.
c) When the welder has not welded with a process during a period of 24 months or more.
d) When the welder has not welded with a process during a period of 30 months or more.
e) When the welder has not welded with a process during a period of 36 months or more.
Practice Problem Q54: QW-322 Renewal of Qualification

How many renewal tests must a welder or welding operator's perform when renewing previous
ASME Sec. IX qualifications for a welding process for each material, thickness, diameter, position,
and other variables for which they were previously qualified?
a) 1
b) 2
c) 4
d) 6
e) 1 test for each set of essential variables
Welder Performance Qualification Cards in Alberta
Unlike QW482 and QW-483 for suggested WPS and PQR forms, ASME Section IX does not included
suggested forms for welder and welding operator qualification. In Alberta, the Alberta Boiler Safety
Association (ABSA) provides suggested forms for WQR (AB-76A) and WOQR (AB-76B).
ASME Section IX also does not contain rules for certifying a welder's or welding operator's
qualification, nor who shall witness and perform the WPQ testing. The province of Alberta, through
its Safety Code Act and the Pressure Welders Regulations, defines the rules for pressure welder
certification, testing, and qualification, as follows.
Notebook Page 86
Province of Alberta - Safety Code Act: Pressure Welders Regulations
6 Performance Qua lification Cards
A perform ance qualification card must show all information required by the
Administrator (i.e., ABSA), including but not limited to:
(a) the name of the person to whom it is issued,

(b) the welding process that the holder of th e card is permitted to engage in,
(c) the base material group and filler metal group the holder of the car d is permitted
to weld,
(d) t he thickness of the deposited weld metal the holder of the card is permitted to
weld,
(e) the positions and the minimum pipe diameter for which the holder of the card is
qualified,
(f) the date of the test,
(g) the dat e that the card expires,
(h) in the case of a performance qualification card issued by a testing organization
a uthorized to do so by the Administrator on behalf of th e Administrator, the
name of the testing organization,
(i) the signature and number of the testing organization's examiner who conducted
the performance qualification test,
(j) the progression of the weld,
(k) whether backing was used, and
(l) whether backing gas was used.
8 Expiry Dates
(1) Subject to this section, a certificate of compet ency including a performance

qualification card issued pursuant to this Regulation remains valid unless it is
suspended or cancelled.
(2) A Grade C Pressure Welder Certificate of Competency expires on the date stated
on the certificate, which date must be no later than 24 months after the date the
certificate is issued.
(3) (3), (3 .1) Repealed AR 7112010 s2.
(4) A Welding Examiner Certificate of Compet ency expires 3 years after the date it is
issued.
(5) A performance qualification card expires on the date stated on the card.
(6) The expiry date of a performance qualification card must be no later than 24
months following the date it is issued.
NniPhnnk P.::tnP. R7
Example of Alberta Welder Performance Qualification Card
A.O.Q.P. No.
CAST/
Testing Organization 1234A
WELDER PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION CARD
Name ABSA File No.

This card is issued pursuant to the Safety Codes Act and Pressure Welder's
Regulations. The performance qualification is in accordance with ASME
Section IX and subject to the limitations herein.
Date of Test Signature of Welder
Examiner (Print/Type) CARD NO. 0 0 01
PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION CARD NO. 0001

Materials
Process(es) (P-No.) - - - - - -
Max Deposited Minimum
Weld Metal Pipe Dia _ _ __ _ __
Filler Metal Position(s)
Group (F-No.) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Qualified _ _ _ __ _ _
Backing - - - - - - - - - - - - - Backing Gas _ _ __ _
Progression
P.O. Expiry Date Weld Examiner Signature Certification No.
Notebook Page 88
Practice Problem Q55: Alberta Performance Qualification Cards
Which of the following is not required to be included on an Alberta welder's performance
qualification card?
1. welding process 4. progression ofweld

2. base material range (not group) 5. WPS registration number
3. filler metal group 6. WPS/PQR numbers
a) 1, 4, 6
b) 2, 4, 6
c) 2,5,6
d) 3,4,6
e) 4,5,6
'
Practice Problem Q56: Alberta Performance Qualification Cards

When does a welder's performance qualification expire according to the Alberta Pressure Welders
Regulation?
a) when the welder has not welded with a process during a period of 6 months or more
b) on the date stated on the card
c) must be no later than 24 months following the date it is issued
d) provided the welder welds with a process during a period of 6 months, their qualification
does not expire
e) on the date stated on the card, but must be no later than 24 month s following the date it
is issued
Notebook Paae 89
Welder and Welding Operator Performance Qualifications Variables
Welding Variables For Welder s - QW-350
General- QW-351
A welder must be requalified whenever a change is made in one or more of the essential variables
listed for each welding process in the QW-350 tables. Note: Table QW-416 is a summary of all the
QW-350 tables and is very useful.
Note: unlike WPS, there are only essential variables for WPQ (i.e., nonessential and supplementary
essential variables are not a part ofWPQ).
The limits of WPQ weld metal thickness (t) are dependent upon the thickness of the weld metal
deposited with each welding process, exclusive of any weld reinforcement, in accordance with
QW-452.
Welders are not permitted to deposit a thickness greater than the limit qualified in accordance with
QW-452 for each welding process during any production weldment.
When a combination of welding processes is required in a qualified WPS, each welder must be
qualified for the particular welding process or processes they will use in production welding.
A welder may be qualified by making tests with each individual welding process, or with a
combination of welding processes in a single test coupon.
Using QW-350 Tables
The following example explains how to read Article IV essential variable paragraphs when using the
QW-350 WPQ variables tables.
Example 057: Using QW-350/QW-416 Tables and Article IV Variables

QW-402.4 states: "The deletion of the backing in single welded groove welds."
By itself, this paragraph does not define what type of welder qualification variable it is or how to
apply this variable, since it depends on whether this paragraph is being referenced for welding
procedure qualification or welder/welding operator performance qualification for the welding process
being used.
For a WPQ qualification using SMAW, QW-353 identifies the deletion of backing as an essential
variable, as described in QW-402.4, and should now be read as follows:
"The deletion of backing in single welded groove welds is an essential variable for WPQ when using
the SMAW process."
©Co des and Standards Training Institute (CAST!)
Notebook Page 90
Note: QW-402.4 also stipulates that double-welded groove welds are considered welding with
backing.
Example 058: QW-353 SMA W WPQ Variable - F-No.

For SMAW, what type ofWPQ variable is a change from F-No. 3 without backing to F-No. 4 without
backing?
QW- 353
SHIELDED METAL-ARC WELDING (SMAW)
~senti al Variabl§ )
Paragraph Brief of Variables
QW-402
.4 - Backing
Joints
QW-403
.16 <P Pipe diameter
Base Metals .18 <P P-Number
QW-404
.15 <P F-Number
Filler Metals .30 <P t Weld deposit
QW-405
.1 + Position
Positions .3 <P l! Vertical welding
For SMAW, a change from F-No. 3 to F-No. 4 is an essential variable for a WPQ (see QW-404.15).
.1' ~ --~ - ---
Practice Problem 059: QW-354 Pipe Diameter Qualified

What type of WPQ variable is a change in pipe diameter beyond the range qualified for SAW?
a) nonessential variable
b) essential variable
c) supplementar y essential variable
d) optional variable
e) non-variable
Notebook Paqe 91
Using Table QW-416 Tables
Table QW-416 is a very useful since it places all of the QW-350 welder performance essential
variables in one place, so there's no need to reference multiple tables. The following practice
problems will assist to become familiar with QW-416.
QW-416
W ELDING VARIABLES
Welder Performance
Essential
O FW SMAW SAW GMAW 2 GTAW PAW

Paragraph 1 Bri ef of Variables QW-352 QW-353 QW-354 QW-355 QW-356 QW-357
.4 - Backing X X X X
QW-402
Joints .7 + Backing X
.2 Maximum qualified X
QW-403 .16 <f;J Pipe diameter X X X X X
Base
Metal .18 <P P-Number X X X X X X
.14 :1: Filler X X X
.15 <f;J F-Number X X X X X X
.22 ± Inserts X X
QW-404
Filler
.23 t Solid or metal-cored to X X
flux-cored
Metals
.30 <f;J t Weld deposit X X X X X
.31 <f;J t Weld deposit X
.32 t Limit (s. cir. arc) X
.1 + Position X X X X X X
QW-405
Positions .3 <f;J i J. Vert. welding X X X X
.7 <f;J Type fuel gas X

QW-408
Gas .8 - Inert backing X X X
.2 <f;J Transfer mode X

QW-409
Electrical .4 <f;J Current or polarity X
Welding Processes:
OFW Oxyfuel gas welding
SMAW Shielded metal-arc welding
SAW Submerged-arc welding
GMAW Gas metal-arc welding
GTAW Gas tungsten-arc welding
PAW Plasma-arc welding
Legend:
<P Change t Thickness
+ Addition i Uphill
- Deletion J, Downhill
NOTES:
(1) For description, see Section IV.
(2) Flux-cored arc welding as shown in QW-355, with or without additional shielding from an externally supplied gas or gas mixture, is included.
Notebook Page 92
Example 060: QW-350 Tables and QW-416 Welder Performance Qualification
What type of variable is the deletion of backing for welder performance qualification when using
SMAW, GMAW, and GTAW?
From ASME Section IX, Table QW-416:

QW-41 6
WELDING VARIABLES
Welder Performance
Essential)
OFW SMAW SAW GMAW 2 GTAW PAW

Paragraph 1 Brief of Variables QW-352 QW-353 QW-354 QW-355 QW-356 QW-357
QW-402
JOints .7 + Backing X
.2 Maximum qualifi ed X
QW-403 .16 ¢> Pipe diameter X X X X X
Base
Metal .18 ¢> P-Number X X X X X X
.14 ± Filler X X X
.15 ¢> F-Number X X X X X X
.22 ± Inserts X X
QW-404
Filler .23 t Solid or metal-cored to X X
fl ux-cored
Metals
.30 ¢> t Weld deposit X X X X X
.31 ¢> t Weld deposit X
QW-405
Positions .3 ¢> I .(. Vert. welding X X X X
.7 ¢> Type fuel gas X

QW-408
Gas .8 - I nert backing X X X
.2 ¢> Transfer mode X

QW-409
Electrical .4 ¢> Current or polarity X
Welding Processes:
Legend:
¢> Change t Thickness
+ Addition I Uphill
- Deletion .(. Downhill
NOTES:
The deletion ofbacking is an essential variable when usin SMAW, GMAW, and GTAW.
Notebook Paqe 93
Practice Problem Q61: QW-350 Tables and QW-416 Welder Performance Qualification
What type of variable is a change in F-No. for welder performance qualification when using SAW
and GTAW?
c) essential variable only for carbon steels
d) essential variable only for stainless steels
e) not listed as a variable in Sec. IX
Practice Problem Q62: QW-350 Tables and QW-416 Welder Performance Qualification
What type of variable is a change from downward to upward in the progression specified for a
vertical weld pass for welder performance qualification when using SAW?
c) essential variable only for carbon steels
d) not listed as a variable in Sec. IX
e) essential variable only for stainless steels
~ Cod es and Standards Training Institute (CAST!)
Notebook Page 94
Article IV - Welding Variables for Procedure QW-400
Article IV lists all of the variables for welding procedure qualification.
Article IV cannot be used on its own . It must be used together either with Article II for welding
procedure qualifications. That is, when you read an Article IV paragraph, you need to keep this in
mind (see the following example).
Example 063: Article IV - WPS Welding Variables

QW-253 lists a change in groove design, QW-402.1, as a nonessential variable for a WPS
qualification when using shielded metal arc welding.
QW-402.1 states: "A change in the type of groove (Vee-groove, U-groove, single-bevel, double-bevel,
etc.)."
By itself, the above QW-402.1 does not define what type of welding variable it is, since it depends on
whether this paragraph is being referenced for welding procedure qualification or welder
performance qualification .
Since this example has established that QW-402.1 is being referenced for WPS qualification, then
QW-402.1 is a nonessential variable and it sh ould now be read as follows:
"A change in the type of groove (Vee-groove, U-groove, single-bevel, double-bevel, etc.) is a
nonessential variable for WPS qualification wh en using the shielded met al arc welding process."
The following examples show how to use the various paragraphs and tables in Article IV for welding
procedure qualification a nd welder/welding operator performance qualifications.
Notebook Paqe 95
For a SMAW PQR groove weld plate test coupon 5/8 in. thick, using AWS A 5.1 E6010/E7018 to join P-No. 1 toP-No. 1 base metal, with a
250°F preheat, what is the WPS thickness range of base metal that can be qualified? (round to the nearest 0.001 in.)
QW-451.1
GROOVE-WELD TENSION TESTS AND TRANSVERSE-BEND TESTS
Range of Thickness T of Type and Number of Tests Required
Base Metal, Qualified, <Tension and Guided-Bend Tests) [ Note (2))
Maximum Thickness t of
in. (mml
Deposited Weld Metal, Qualified, Side Face Root
[ Notes (1) and (2)]
Th ickness Tof Test Coupon, Welded, in. (mm) Tension, Bend, Bend, Bend,
in. <mml Min. Max. [Notes (1) and (2)] QW-150 QW-160 QW-160 QW-160
Less than 'l16 ( 1.5) T 2T 2t 2 2 2
to 3-i (1.5 to 10), incl. Note (5)

1;; 6 1;;6 n.5> 2T 2t 2 2 2
Over 1'e (1 0), but less than ~ (19)

~ @ 2t 2 Not e (5) 2 2
%(19) to less than 1 ~ (38) ~6 (5) 2T 21 when t <% (19) 2 [Note (4)] 4
% <l9l to less than 1~ (38) ~6 (5) 2T 2Twhen t?.% (19) 2 [Note (4JJ 4
1~ (38) to 6 (150), incl. ~6 (5) 8 (200) [Note (3)] 2twhen t<% (19) 2 [Note (4)] 4
1 ~ (38) to 6 (150), incl. ~6 (5) 8 (200) [Note (3) ] 8 (200) [ Note (3)] when t?.% (19) 2 [Note (4)] 4
Over 6 (150) ~6 (5) 1.33 T 2t when t < 3t4 (19) 2 [Note (4)] 4
Over 6 (150) ~6 (5) 1.33 T 1.33 Twhen t?.% (19) 2 [Note (4)] 4
NOTES:
{1) The fol lowing variables further restrict the limits shown in this tab le when they are referenced in QW-250 for the process under consideration: QW-403.9, QW-403.10, QW-404.32, and
QW-407 .4. A lso, QW-202.2, QW-202.3, and QW-202.4 provide exemptions t hat supersede the l imits of th is t able.
(2 ) For combination of we lding procedures, see QW-200.4.
(3) For the SMAW, SAW, GMAW, PAW, and GTAW welding processes only; otherwise per Note (1) or 2 T, or 2t, whichever is applicable.
(4) See QW-151.1, QW-151.2, and QW- 151.3 for detai ls on mult iple specimens when coupon t hicknesses are over 1 in. (25 mm).
(5) Four side- bend tests may be substituted for the required face- and root-bend tests, when thickness T is ;g in. 00 mm) and over.
Since the thickness of the test coupon, T = 5/8 in. or 0.625 in., then the maximum WPS qualified thickness 2T or 2 x 0.625 in. = 1.250 in.
the qualified WPS thickness range = 3/16 in. to 1.250 in. (or 0.188 in. to 1.250 in.)
te Jk gt
For a GMAW PQR groove weld plate test coupon 0.750 in. thick, AWS A 5.18 ER70S-7, with back purge, what is the WPS thickness range
of base metal that can be qualified? (round to the nearest 0.001 in.)
QW-451.1
Base Metal, Qualified, <Tension and Guided-Bend Tests> [Note (2)]
in. (mm)
[ Notes (1) and ( 2)}
Thickness T of Test Coupon, Welded, in. <mm) Tension, Bend, Bend, Bend,
in. (mm) Min. Max. [Notes (1) and <2>1 QW-150 QW-160 QW-160 QW-160
l ess than ~ 6 (1.5) T 2T 2t 2 2 2
~6 t o ~ <1.5 to 10), incl. ~6 (1.5) 2T 2t 2 Note (5) 2 2
Over ~ (10), but less than~ (19) 3

16 (5) 2T 2t 2 Note (5) 2 2
~ (19) to less than 1~ (38) 3

16 (5) 2T 2twhen t < ~ (19) 2 [Note (4) ] 4
~ (19) to less than 1 ~ (38) 3
16 (5) @ 2 Twhen t> ~ (19 ) 2 [Not e (4)] 4
1 ~ (38) to 6 <150), incl. ~6 (5) 8 (200) [ Note (3)] 2t when t< 34 (19 ) 2 [ Note (4)] 4
1 ~ (38) to 6 ( 150), incl. 3
16 (5) 8 (200) ( Note (3)] 8 (200) [ Note (3)] when t <!: ~ (19) 2 [ Note (4JJ 4
Over 6 (150) ~b (5 ) 1.33 T 2twhen t< 34! (19) 2 [Note (4JJ 4

Over 6 <150) 'l-16 (5) 1.33 T l.33 T when t :?: ~ (19) 2 [Note (4)] 4
NOTES:
(1) The fo llowing variables further restr ict the l imit s shown in this table when they are referenced in QW-250 for the process under consideration: QW-403.9, QW-403.1 0, QW-404.32, and
QW-407.4. Also, QW-202.2, QW-202.3, and QW-202.4 provide exemptions. that supersede the li mits of this table.
(2) For combination of we lding procedu res, see QW-200.4.
(3) For the SMAW, SAW, GMAW, PAW, and GTAW welding processes only; otherwise per Note (1 ) or 2 T, or 2t, whichever is applicable.
(4) See QW-151.1, QW-151.2, and QW-151.3 for details on multiple specimens when coupon thicknesses are over 1 in. (25 mm).
(5) Four side-bend tests may be subst ituted for the required face- and root-bend tests, when thickness T is ~ in. no mml and over.
Since the thickness of the test coupon , T = 0.750 in., then tlhe maximum WPS qualified thickness 2Tor 2 x 0.750 in. = 1.500 in.
the qualified WPS thickness range is 3/16 in. to 1.500 in. (or 0.188 in. to 1.500 in.)
ote: the lower line of 3/4 in. to 1-112 in. was chosen since the deposited weld metal t 2: 3/4 in. , i.e., with a single welding process through
t =T.
Notebook PaQe 97
a SAW PQR groove weld plate test coupon 5/8 in. thick, P-No. 1 toP-No. 1 base metal, with a single pass weld and 250°F preheat and
1100°F PWHT, what is the WPS thickness range of base metal that can be qualified? (round to the nearest 0.001 in.)
QW-451.1
Base Metal, Qualified, (Tension and Guided-Bend Tests) [Note (2)]
Maximum Th ickness t of
in. (mm)
Thickness T of Test Coupon, Welded,
~nd(2)] in. <mm) Tension, Bend, Bend, Bend,
in. (mm) Min. Max. [Notes (1) and (2)]1 QW-150 QW-160 QW-160 QW-160
Less than ~ 6 (1.5) T 2T 2t 2 2 2
~ 6 to %( 1.5 to 10), incl. ~6 (1.5) 2T 2t 2 Note (5) 2 2
Over 3,.a (10), but less than 'i4 (19) ~ 2t 2 Note (5) 2 2
'i4 (19) to less than 1 ~ (38) ~6 (5) 2T 2 [ Note (4)] 4

3
~ (19) to less than 1 ~ (38) ~6 (5) 2T 2 [ Note (4}] 4
1 ~ (38} to 6 (150), incl. ~6 (5) 8 (200) [ Note (3)] 2 [Note (4)] 4

1 ~ (38) to 6 (150), incl. ~6 (5) 8 (200) [ Note (3)] 2 [ Note (4)] 4
Over 6 Cl50) ~6 (5) 1.33 T 2twhen t<% (19) 4

Over 6 Cl50) ~6 (5) 1.33 T 1.33Twhen t?.% (19) 4
NO TES:
(1) The following variables further restrict the limits shown in t his table when they are referenced in QW-250 for the process under consideration:~
QW-407.4. Also, QW-202.2, QW-202.3, and QW-202.4 provide exemptions that supersede the limits of this tab le.
(2) For combination of welding procedures, see QW-200.4.
(3) For the SMAW, SAW, GMAW, PAW, and GTAW welding processes only; otherwise per Note (1) or 2 T, or 2t, whichever is appl icable. QW-403.9 For single-pass or multipass welding in
(4) See QW-151.1, QW-1 51.2, and QW- 151.3 f or details on multiple specimens when coupon thicknesses are over 1 in. (25 mm). which any pass is greater than 112 in. (13 mm) thick, an
(5) Four side-bend t ests may be substituted for the required face- and root -bend tests, when t hickness T is 3,.a in. (10 mm) and over. increase in base metal thickness beyond 1.1 times that of
lhe qualification test coupon.
Since a single pass weld is made that is greater than 112 in., then QW-403.9 in Note (1) must be applied.
With T = 5/8 in. or 0.625 in. and applying QW-403.9 with a maximum qualified thickness of 1.1T, then the maximum qualified WPS
thickness becomes 1.1 x 0.625 in.= 0.687 in.
WPS thickness r = 3/16 in. to 0.687 in. or 0.188 in. to 0.687 in.
te Jk Ql 3
For a GMAW-S PQR groove weld plate test coupon 0.375 in. thick, AWS A 5.18 ER70S-7, with back purge, what is the thickness range
base metal that can be qualified for a WPS? (round to the nearest 0.001 in.)
QW-451.1
Base Metal, Qualified, (Tension and Guided-Bend Tests) [ Note {2)]
in. (mm>
Thickness T of Test Coupon, Welded,
~nd(2)) in. (mm) Tension, Bend, Bend, Bend,
in. (mml Min. Max. [Notes (1) and (2)] QW-150 QW-160 QW-160 QW-160
Less than 1;;.6 (1.5) T 2T 2t 2 2 2
1;;.6 to 'la (1.5 to 10), inc!.

~ 2t 2 Note (5) 2 2
Over 'la ClOl, but less than %(1 9) ~b {5) 2T 2 Note (5) 2 2
%(19) to less than 1 ~ (38 ) ~6 (5) 2T 2 [Note (4lJ 4

%(19) to less than 1 'l2 (38) ~6 (5) 2T 2 ( Note (4)) 4
1 ~ (38) to 6 (150), incl. ~6 ( 5) 8 (200} (Note (3 )) 4

1'l2 (38) to 6 <150 ), incl. ~6 (5) 8 (200) [Note (3)] 4
Over 6 <150) ~16 (5) 1.33 T 2twhen t< % (19) 4

Over 6 (150) 'lib (5) 1.33 T 1.33Twhen t~% <19)
NOTES:
(1) The following variables further restrict the limits shown in this table when they are referenced in QW-250 for the process under consideration: QW-403.9. _
QW-407.4. Also, QW-202.2, QW-202.3, and QW-202.4 provide exemptions t hat supersede the limits of this table. .___
(2 ) For combination of weld ing procedures, see QW-200.4.
(3) For the SMAW, SAW, GMAW, PAW, and GTAW welding processes on ly; otherwise per Note (l) or 2 T, or 2t, whichever is applicable. (:QW-403. 10 For the shon-circuiting h·ansler r~1ode of
(4 ) See QW-151.1, QW-151.2, and QW-151.3 for details on multiple specimens when coupon thicknesses are over 1 in. (25 mm). the gas metal-arc process. when the quail focatr.on t~st cou-
. • • . • • pon thrckness rs less than 1/2 rn. ( 13 111111) an rncr·ease rn
(5) Four stde-bend tests may be substttuted for the requtred face- and root-bend tests, when th tckness T ts 3:fa m. no
mml and over. tl . k b d . h f h '.. .
11c ·ness eyon 1. 1 tunes t at o t e qua1r1•catron test
coupon. For thicknesses of 1/2 in. (13 nun) and greater. usc
table QW-45 1. 1 or table QW-45 I .2, as applicable.
GMAW-S is the welding process, then QW-403.10 in Note (1) must be applied.
T =0.375 in. and applying QW-403.10 with a maximum qualified thickness of LIT, then the maximum qualified WPS thickness
ut::a.; umt:::. 1.1 x 0.375 in. = 0.413 in.
= 1116 in. to 0.413 in. (or 0.063 in. to 0.413 in.)
Notebook Page 99
For a SMAW PQR groove weld plate test coupon 5/8 in. thick, P -No. 1 to P-No. 1 base metal, with a 250°F preheat and a 1650°F
t is the thickness range of base metal that can be qualified? (round to the nearest 0.001 in.)
QW-451.1
~m> Deposited Weld Metal, Qualified, Side Face Root
CQ!otes Q))lnd (2)]
Thickness Tof Test Coupon, Welded, in. <mm> Tension, Bend, Bend, Bend,
in. (mm) Min. Max. [Notes (1) and (2)] QW-150 QW-160 QW-160 QW-160
Less than Yt6 (1.5) T 2T 2t 2 2
\116 to 'is (1.5 to 10}, incl. Yt6 (1.5) 2T 2t 2 Note (5) 2 2
Over 3
/s (10), but less than % U9J
~ 2t 2 Note (5) 2 2
% <19) to less than 1 ~ (38) 2T 2twhen t <% (19) 2 [Note (4)] 4

% (19) to less than 1 ~ (38) 2T 2Twhen t;d~ <19) 2 [Note (4)] 4
1 ~ (38) to 6 <l50), incl. 8 (200) ( Note (3) ] 2twhent<%(19) 2 [Note (4)] 4

1 ~ (38) to 6 <l50), incl. 8 (200) [Note (3)] 8 (200) ( Note (3 )] when t?! 14
3 (19) 2 [Note (4)] 4
Over 6 (150) ~6 (5) 1.33 T 2twhen t<% (19) 2 [Note (4)] 4

Over 6 (150) ~6 (5) 1.33 T 1.33Twhen t?!% (19) 2 [Note (4)J 4
NOTES:
variables further restrict the limits shown in this table when they are referenced in QW-250 for the process under consideration: QW-403.9, QW-403.10, QW-404.32, and
lso, QW-202.2, QW-202.3, and QW-202.4 provide exemptions that supersede the limits of this table.
(2) For com · ation of welding procedures, see QW-200.4. QW-407.4 For ferrous base metals other than P·No. 7,
(3) For the SMA , GMAW, PAW, and GTAW welding processes only; otherwise per Note (1) or 2 T, or 2 t, whichever is applicable.! P·NO. 8, and P-No. 45, when a procedure qualificalion lesl
(4) See QW-151.1, QW-151.2, for details on multip le specimens when coupon thicknesses are over 1 in. (25 mmJ. coupon receives a poslweld heat treatment exceeding the
(5) Four side-bend tests may be substituted for the requtre en thickness Tis 'isin. (10 mml and over. upper transformation temperature, the maximum qualified
base metal thickness, T, shall not exceed 1.1 times lhe
thickness of the tesl coupon.
the Body of Knowledge, since the PWHT exceeded the upper transformation temperature of 1600°F, then QW-407.4 in Note (1) must
applied.
With T = 5/8 in. or 0.625 in. and applying QW-407.4 with a maximum qualified thickness of 1.1T, the maximum qualified WPS thickness
becomes 1.1 x 5/8 in. or 1.1 x 0.625 in. = 0.688 in.
WPS thickness is 3/16 in. to 0.688 in. (or 0.188 in. to 0.688 in.)
.e. .k ~e JO
a SMAW PQR groove weld plate coupon 1.000 in. (25 mm) thick that has a maximum allowable cap and r oot pass r einfor cement of
and a single groove angle of62°, what is the maximum WPS deposited weld metal thickness th at can be qualified? (round to th e
001 in.)
QW-451.1
Range of Thickness T of Type and Number of Test s Required
Base Metal, Qualified, <Tension and Guided- Bend Tests) [ Note (2)]
Maximum Th ickness t of
in. (mml
Deposit ed Weld Metal, Qualified, Side Face Root
[ Notes (1) and (2 ) ]
Thi ckness T of Test Coupon, Welded, ln. <mml Tension, Bend, Bend, Bend,
in. (mml Min. Max. [ Notes (1) and (2)] QW-150 QW-160 QW-160 QW-160
Less than ~ 6 (1.5) T 2T 2t 2 2 2
Y1 6 to ~ (1.5 to 10), incl. ~& (1.5) 2T 2t 2 Note (5) 2 2
Over ~ (10), but less than~ (19) ~b (5) 2T 2t 2 Note (5) 2 2
~4 (19 ) to less than 1~ (38)

~ (19) to less than 1~ (38)
~& (5)
~6 (5)
2T
2T
~ 2 [ Note (4 )]
2 (Note ( 4)]
4
~ 4
1 ~ 0 8) to 6 Cl50 ), incl. ~6 (5) 8 (200) [ Note (3)] 2t when t< ~ (19) 2 ( Note <4)] 4
1~ (38) to 6 <150), incl. ~b (5) 8 ( 200) [ Note (3)] 8 (200) [ Note (3)) when t <?! ~ (19) 2 (Note ( 4 )) 4
Over b n so> ~6 (5) LJJT 2twhen t<~ (19) 2 [ Note (4)J 4

Over 6 (150) ~6 (5) 1.33T 1.33 T when tO?:~ (19) 2 (Note (4)] 4
NOTE S:
(1) The f ollowi ng variables further restrict the limits shown in this table when they are referenced in QW-250 for the process under consideration: QW-403.9, QW-403.10, QW-4 04. 32, and
QW-407.4. Also, QW-202.2, QW-202.3, and QW-202.4 provi de exemptions that supersede the l imits of this table.
(2) For combination of welding procedures, see QW-2 00.4.
(3) For the SMAW, SAW, GMAW, PAW, and GTAW welding processes only; otherwise per Note (1) or 2 T, or 2t, whichever is appl icable.
(4) See QW-151.1, QW-151.2, and QW-151.3 for details on multiple specimens when coupon thicknesses are over 1 in. (25 mm).
(5) Four side-bend tests may be subst ituted for the required face- and root-bend tests, when thickness T is ~ in. no mm) and over.
Since the t hickness of the t est coupon, T = 1.000 in., then the maximum WPS qualified thickness 2T or 2 x 1.000 in. = 2.000 in.
ote: the lower li ne of 3/4 in. to 1-1/2 in. was chosen since t he deposited weld metal t ~ 3/4 in., i.e., with a single welding process
t =T.
Notebook Page 101

For a GTAW PQR groove weld plate test coupon 0.250 in. thickness, AWS A 5.9 ER316L, with no trailing and backing purge, what are the
minimum number and type of bend tests required to qualify a WPS?
QW-451.1
GROOVE-WELD TE NSION TESTS AND TRANSVERSE-BEND TESTS
Base Metal, Qualified, <Tension and Guided-Bend Tests) ( Note (2)]
in. (mm)
[Notes (1) and (2)]
Thickness Tof Test Coupon, Welded, in. (mm) Tension, Bend, Bend, Bend,
in. (mm) Min. Max. [ Notes (1) and (2)] QW-150 QW-160 QW-160 QW-160
Less than )1 6 (1.5) T 2T 2t 2 ... 2 2
)16 to ~ (1.5 to 10), incl. Yto (1.5) 2T 2t 2

~ 0 CD
Over ~ (10), but less than t4
3
(19) ~. (5) 2T 2{ 2 Note (5) 2 2
% (19) to less than 1 ~ (38) ~b (5) 2T 2twhen t<% (19) 2 [ Note (4lJ 4
%(19) to less than 1 ~ (38) ~- (5) 2T 2Twhen t:<:% (19) 2 [ Note (4)1 4
1 'lz (38) to 6 (150), Incl. ~b (5) 8 (200) [Note (3)) 2twhen f<% (19) 2 [ Note (4)] 4
1 'lz (38) to 6 (150), incl. ~. (5) 8 (200) [Note (3)] 8 (200) [Note (3)] when t <!: % (19) 2 [ Note (4)] 4
Over 6 (150) ~. (5) 1.33T 2twhen t<% (19) 2 [Note (4)] 4

Over 6 <150) ~. (5) 1.33 T 1.33Twhen t:<:% (19) 2 [Note (4)] 4
NOTES:
(1) The following variables further restrict the limits shown in this table when they are referenced in QW-250 for the process under consideration: QW-403.9, QW-403.10, QW-404.32, and
QW-407.4. Also, QW-202.2, QW-202.3, and QW-202.4 provide exemptions that supersede the limits of this table.
(2) For combination of welding procedures, see QW-200.4.
(3) For the SMAW, SAW, GMAW, PAW, and GTAW welding processes only; otherwise per Note (1) or 2 T, or 2 t, whichever is applicable.
(4) See QW-151.1, QW-151.2, and QW-151.3 for detai ls on multiple specimens when coupon thicknesses are over 1 in. (25 mml.
(5) Four side-bend tests may be substituted for the required face- and root-bend tests, when thickness Tis~ in. (10 mml and over.
face and 2 root bend test s are required, since Note 5 (4 side bend tests) cannot be applied with T < 3/8 in.
Jt( ol 19 o:
For a SAW PQR groove weld plate coupon 1 in. (25 mm) in thickness that has a maximum allowable cap and root pass reinforcement
1J16 in. and a single groove angle of 62°, what are the minimum number oftension and bend tests required to qualify a WPS?
QW-451.1
Base Metal, Qualified, (Tension and Guided· Bend Tests) [Note (2 ))
in. (mm)
Deposited Weld Metal, Qual ified, Side Face Root
[ Notes (1) and (2)]
Thickness T of Test Coupon, Welded, in. (m m) Tension, Bend, Bend, Bend,
in. (m m) Min. Max. [ Notes (1) and (2)) QW-150 QW-1&0 QW-1&0 QW-1&0
Less than ~ 6 Cl.5) T 2T 2t 2 2 2
1;16 to ~ (1.5 to 10), incl. -\16 (1.5) 2T 2t 2 Note (5) 2 2
Over ~ (10}, but less than 'i4 {19) ~6 (5) 2T 2f 2 Note (5) 2 2
~ (19) to less than 1 ~ (38) ~6 (5) 2T 2twhen t< ~ {19) 2 [Note (4)) 4
~ (19) to less than 1 ~ (38) ~6 (5) 2T 2Twhen t?: ~ (19) ~ 0
1 ~ (38) to 6 (150), incl. ~6 (5) 8 (200} [ Note (3)) 2twhen t< ~ (19} 2 [Note (4)] 4
1~ (38) to 6 (150), incl. 'li6 (5) 8 (200} [ Note (3)] 8 ( 200) [Note (3)] when t?: ~ <19) 2 [ Note (4)] 4
Over 9 (150) 'li& (5) 1.33 T 2t when t<% <1 9) 2 [Note (4)] 4
Over 6 <150) 'li6 (5} 1.33 T 1.33 T when t ?: ~ (19) 2 [Note (4)) 4
NOTES:
(1) The fol lowing variables further restrict the limits shown in this table when they are referenced in QW-250 for t he process under consideration: QW-403.9, QW-403.10, QW-404.32, and
QW-407.4. A lso, QW-202.2, QW-202.3, and QW-202.4 provide exempt ions that supersede the limits of this table.
(2} For combination of welding procedures, see QW-200.4.
(3) For the SMAW, SAW, GMAW, PAW, and GTAW welding processes on ly; otherwise per Note (1) or 2T, or 2t, whichever is applicable.
(4) See QW-151.1, QW-151.2, and QW-151.3 for details on multiple specimens when coupon th icknesses are over 1 in. (25 mm).
(5) Four side-bend tests may be substituted for the required face- and root-bend tests, when thickness T is ~ in. (10 mml and over.
t ension tests and 4 side bend tests are required.
Note: 2 tension tests are required, since Note 4 (multiple specimens) cannot be applied with T ~ 1.0 in.
Notebook Page 103

Practice Problem Q72: QW-451.1 - PQR Qualified Thickness
For a SMAW PQR groove weld pipe test coupon 5/8 in. thickness, P-No. 1 toP-No. 1 base metal, in
the 6G position, with a single pass weld and 250°F preheat and a 1100°F PWHT, what is the
maximum WPS thickness of base metal that can be qualified? (Round to nearest 0.001 in.)
a) 1/16 in. to 1-114 in.

b) 1/8 in. to 1-1/4 in.
c) 3/16 in. to 0.625 in.
d) 1/16 in. to 0.688 in.
e) 3/16 in. to 0.688 in.
Practice Problem Q73: QW-451.1 - PQR Qualified Thickness

For a SAW PQR groove weld plate test coupon 5/8 in. thickness, P-No. 3 toP-No. 3 base metal, with
a 250°F preheat and a normalizing PWHT, what is the WPS thickness range of base metal that can
be qualified? (Round to nearest 0.001 in.)
a) 1/16 in. to 1-114 in.

b) 118 in. to 1-1/4 in.
c) 3/16 in. to 0.625 in.
d) 1/16 in. to 0.688 in.
e) 3/16 in. to 0.688 in.
Notebook Page 104

Article IV - Welder/Welding Operator Performance Variables - QW-400
Article IV list s all of the variables for welder/welding operat or qualification.
Article IV cannot be used on its own. It must be used t ogether eith er with Article III for performance
qualifications. That is, when you read an Article IV paragraph, you need to keep this in mind (see
the following example).
Welders Performan ce Qu alification (WPQ)
QW-103.2 Each Code user shall maintain a record of the results obtained in welder performance
qualifications. This paragraph is intended t o r equir e Code user s to record the results
of the performance qualification test on a WP Q or WOPQ record.
QW-301.2 Each Code user shall qualifY each welder for each welding process to be used in
production welding. The performa nce qualification test shall be welded in
accordance with a qualified WPS. Changes beyond which r equalification is required
are given in QW-351 through QW-357 for welders. Visual, mechanical, and
radiographic examination are described in QW-304 for welders.
QW-301.4 The record of WPQ tests shall include the essential variables (QW-353 for SMAW),
the type oftests, th e test results and the ranges qualified for each welder .
The following examples show how to use the various paragraphs and tables in Article IV for
welder/welding operat or performance qualifications.
Performance Qualification F -No.- QW-404.15
The performance qualification essential variable, QW-404.15, requires requalification for a change
from one F-Number to any other F-Number or to any oth er filler metal.
Welding Progression- QW-405.3
QW-405.3 A change from upward to downward, or from downward to upward, in the

progression specified for any pass of a vertical weld, except that the cover or wash
pass may be up or down. The root pass may also be run either up or down when the
root pass is removed to sound weld metal in the preparation for welding the second
side.
QW-405.3 applies to welds made in the 3G, 5G and 6G positions, which are considered vertical.
Upward or downward are often specified as uphill/downhill.
NntP.hnnk Pi'lnP. 10'1

Welder/Welding Operator Limits of Weld Metal Thickness- QW-452
The limits of weld metal thickness for which the welder will be qualified are dependent upon the
approximate thickness of the weld metal they deposit with each welding process, exclusive of any
weld reinforcement. This thickness shall be considered the test coupon thickness as given in
QW-452.
In any given production weldment, welders may not deposit a thickness greater than that permitted
by QW-452 for each welding process in which they are qualified.
Practice Problem Q74: QW-452.1(b) Thickness of Weld Metal Qualified

A welder welds an NPS 6 Schedule 80 test coupon that is 0.432 in. thick. He uses one welding
process, one set of essential variables, and deposits at least three layers of weld metal in that test
coupon. Is that welder qualified to weld the qualified WPS "maximum to be welded?"
a) No, the nominal coupon thickness must be at least 112 inch thick in order for a welder to
be qualified for "maximum to be welded."
b) Yes.
c) Yes, provided at least the three weld layers are done with the same electrode.
d) No, the nominal coupon thickness must be at least 3/4 inch thick in order for a welder to
be qualified for "maximum to be welded."
e) The qualified WPS defines the maximum to be welded by a qualified welder.
Practice Problem Q75: QW-452.1 (b) Thickness of Weld Metal Qualified

Can a double-beveled plate, 1 inch thick with each beveled groove being of 112 inch, be welded by a
welder qualified to weld a weld metal deposit of0.864 in.?
a) No, the since the welder is only qualified to weld up to 0.864 inch and the deposited weld
metal for this joint would be 1 inch.
b) Yes.
c) Yes, provided the filler metal used is the same for all passes.
d) Yes, since each side of the bevel is less than 0.864 inch.
e) The qualified WPS defines the maximum to be welded by a qualified welder.
© Codes and Standards Trainin g Instit ute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 106

Example Q76: QW-452.1(a)- Welder Performance Qualification Tests
What tests must be performed to qualify a welder performance coupon that has a diameter of NPS 4
and is 3/4 in. thick?
QW-452.1 (a)
TEST SPECIMENS
Type and Number of Examinations and Test Specimens Required
Face Bend Root Bend
Visual Side Bend QW-462.3(a) or QW-462.3(a) or
Thickness of Weld Examination QW-462.2 QW-462.3(b) QW-462.3(b)
Metal, in. (mm) per QW-302.4 [No te (1)) [Notes (1), (2)) [Notes (1), (2)]
Less than% (10) X

%(10) to less than X 2 (Note (3)) Note (3) Note (3)
%(19)
%(19) and over X
GENERAL NOTE: The " Thickness of Weld Meta l ' is the total we ld metal thicknessdeposited:>y all welders
and all processes in t he test couponexclusive of the weld reinforcement.
NOTES:
(1) To qualify using posit ions SG or 6G, a tot al of four bend specimens are required. To qualify using a
combination of 2G and SG in a single test cou pon, a total of six bend specimens are required. See
QW-302.3. The type of bend test shall be based on weld metal thickness.
(2) Couponstestedby face and root bendsshall be limited t o weld deposit made by one welder with one or
two processes or two welders with one process each. Weld deposit by each welder and each process shall
be present on theco nvexsurface of the appropriate bent specimen.
(3) Oneface and root bend may besubst itut edfor the two side bends.
2 side bends tests.

- - -- - ,...--. " - ~ ~ __.....,
Example Q77: QW-452.1(a)- Welder Performance Qualification Tests

How many bend tests must be performed to qualify a welder performance coupon that has a
diameter ofNPS 4, is 1/4 in. thick, and is in the 6G position?
QW-452.1(a)
TEST SPECIMENS
Face Bend Root Bend
Visual Side Bend QW-462.3(a) or QW-462.3(a) or
Thickness of Weld Examination QW-462.2 QW-462.3(b) QW-462.3(b)
Metal, in. (mm) per QW-302.4 [Note (1)) [Notes (1), (2)) (Notes (1 ). (2)]
less than% (10) X 1 1

%(10) to less than X 2 [Note (3)] Note (3) Note (3)
%(19)
%(19) and over X 2
GENERAL NOTE: The 'T hickness of Weld Metal" is the total weld metal thickness deposited by all welders
and all processes in the test coupon exclusive of the weld reinforcement.
NOTES:
(1) To qualify using positions SG or ,ill;2. a total of~bend specimens are required. To qualify using a
combination of 2G and SG in a single test coupon. a total of six bend specimens are required. See
QW-302.3. The type of bend test shall be based on weld metal thickness.
(2) Coupons tested by face and root bends shall be limited to weld deposit made by one welder with one or
two processes or two welders with one process each. Weld deposit by each welder and each process shall
be present on the convex surface of the appropriate bent speci men.
(3) One face and root bend may be substituted for the two side bends.
While the table in QW-452.1(a) only specifies 1 face and 1 root bend, note (1) indicates that 4 bend
s ecimens are re uired.
Notebook Paqe 107

Practice Problem Q78: QW-452.1 (a)- Welder Performance Qualification Tests
What tests must be performed to qualify a welder performance coupon that has a diameter of NPS 4
a) 1 face and 1 root bend

b) either 2 side bends or from Note (3) one face and 1 root bend
c) 2 side bends
d) 2 face and 2 root bends
e) 2 side bends or 2 face and 2 root bends
Example Q79: QW-452.3- Welder Performance Qualification for Groove-Weld Diameter

What is the minimum qualified diameter for a welder performance groove weld coupon that has a
diameter ofNPS 2 and welded using GTAW?
QW-452.3
GROCNE-WELD DIAMETER LIMITS
Outside Diameter
Qualified, in. (mm).
Outside Diameter
of Test CoupoQ in. (mm) Max.
Less than 1 (25) Size we lded Unlimited
1 (25) to 27k (73) Unlimited
Over 2 ~ (73)
7
Unlimited
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Type and number of tests required shall be in accordance with
QW-452.1
1
(b) 27-fl in. (73 mm) 0 D. is the equivalent of NPS 2 6 (ON 65).
The minimum qualified diameter is 1 inch.
Practice Problem Q80: QW-452.3- Welder Performance Qualification for Groove-Weld Diameter
What is the qualified diameter range for a welder performance groove weld coupon that has a
diameter of NPS 4 and is welded using SMAW?
a) size welded to unlimited

b) 1 in. to unlimited
c) 1 in. to 2-7/8 in. (NPS 2-1/2)
d) 2-7/8 in. to unlimited
e) NPS 2 to unlimited
Notebook Page 108

Example Q81 : QW-461 .9- Welder Performance Qualification for Position
What qualified position(s) result from a performance coupon with a groove weld in a pipe is qualified
in the 5G position, using GMAW short circuiting arc welding for groove welding 48 in. dia. pipe?
QW-461.9
PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION -- POSIT! ON AND DIAMETER LIMITATIONS
(Within the Other Limitations of QW-303)
Position and Type Weld Qualified [Note (1)]
Gro01e
Plate and Pipe
Qualification Test Fillet
Over 24 i n. Pipe 24 in.
Weld Position (610 mm) 0 .0. (610 mm) 0.0. Plate an d Pipe
Plate -- Groove lG F F (Note (2) ) F

2G F. H F.H (Note (2)] F,H
3G F.V F (Note (2)) F,H,V
4G F,O F (Note (2)) F. H.O
3G and 4G F.V.O F (Note (2)) All
2G. 3G. and 4G All F.H (Note (2)] All
Special Pos1tions (SP) SP.F SP,F SP.F
Plate-- Fillet lF F INote (2))
2F F.H [Note (2))
3F F. H,V (Note (2))
4F F.H.O (Note (2)]
3F and 4F All [Note (2} 1
Specia l Pos1tions (SP) SP.F [Note (2)]
Pipe-- Groove [Note (3)] lG F F F
2G F.H F.H F,H
SG (@:) F.V.O All
6G All All All
2G and 5G All Al l All
Special Pos1tions (SP) SP.F SP,F SP,F
Pipe-- Fillet {Note (3)) lF F
2F F.H
2FR F. H
4F F. H.O
SF All
Special Posit1ons (SP) SP.F
NOTES:
(1) Posi tions of weld ing as shown in QW-461.1 and QW-461.2.
F = Flat
H = Honzont<JI
V = Vertical
0 = Overhead
(2) Pipe 2 7k in. (73 mm) O.D. and over.
(3) See diameter restrictions 111 QW-452.3 , QW-452.4. and QW -452.6.
- ~ '.. • "l '
Practice Problem Q82: QW-452.3 - Welder Performance Qualification for Groove-Weld Diameter
What are the qualified position(s) from a pipe groove weld performance test in the 2G and 5G
positions, using SMAW for fillet welding plate and pipe intended for low t emperature service?
a) 5G
b) 1G,3G
c) F, V
d) all positions
e) F,V,O
Notf!hook PilnP. 109

Welding Documentation Forms
The application of the welding forms found in Nonmandatory Appendix B of ASME Section IX will be
practiced throughout this notebook.
The scope of ASME Section IX is the qualification of welders and the welding procedure
specifications they employ in welding according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and
the ASME B31 codes for pressure piping. The API ICP exams cover two of the documents,
specifically:
• QW-482, Format for the Welding Procedure Specification (WPS)

• QW-483, Format for the Procedure Qualification Record (PQR).
Section IX Appendix B
B-100 This Nonmandatory Appendix illustrates sample formats for WPS, PQR and WPQs.
B-101 Form QW-482 (Figure 2.1) is a suggested format for WPSs.

Form QW-483 (Figure 2.2) is a suggested format for PQRs.
©Co des and Standards Trainin g Instit ute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 110

QW-482 SUGGESTED FORMAT FOR WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATIONS (WPS)
(See QW-200.1, Section IX, ASME B oiler a nd P ressure Vessel Code)
Company Name By:

Welding Procedure Specification No. Date Supporting PQR No.(s)
Revision No. Date
Welding Process(esl Type(s)

(Automatic, Manual, Machine, or Semi-Auto)
JOINTS (QW-402) Details

Joint Design
Root Spacing
Backing: Yes No
Backing Material (Type)
tRefer to ix>th backing and retainers./
0 Metal 0 Nonfusing Metal

0 Nonmetallic 0 Other
Sketches, Production Drawings, Weld Symbols or Written Description
should show the general arrangement of the parts to be welded. Where
applicable, the details of weld groove may be specified.
[At the option of the manufacturer, sketches may be attached to illustrate

joint design, weld layers and bead sequence (e.g., for notch toughness
procedures, for multiple process procedures, etc.)J
*BASE METALS (QW-403)

P-No. Group No. toP-No. Group No.
OR
Specification and type/grade or UNS Number
to Specification and type/grade or UNS Number
OR
Chern. Analysis and Mech. Prop.
to Chern. Analysis and Mech. Prop.
Thickness Range:
Base Meta l: Groove Fillet
Maximum Pass Thickness:> liz in. (13 mm) (Yes) _ _ _ (No) _ _
Other
*FILLER METALS (QW-404) 1 2

Spec. No. (SFA}
AWS No. (Class}
F-No.
A-No.
Size of Filler Metals
Filler Metal Product Form
Supplemental Filler Metal
Weld Metal
Thickness Range:
Groove
Fillet
Electrode-Flux (Class)
Flux Type
Flux Trade Name
Consumable Insert
Other
• E:ach base metal-liller metal combination should be recorded individually.
Figure 2.1 QW-482 Form- Nonmandatory Appendix B (Page 1 of2)
Notebook Paae 11 1
QW-482 (Back)
WPSNo. Rev.
POSITIONS (QW-405) POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT (QW-407)

Position(s) of Groove Temperature Range
Welding Progression: Up Down Time Range
Position(s) ofFillet Other
Other
PREHEAT (QW-406) GAS (QW-408)

Preheat Temperature, Minimum Percent Composition
Interpass Temperature, Maximum Gas(es) (Mixture) Flow Rate
Preheat Maintenance Shielding
Other Trailing
<Continuous or special heating where applicable should be recorded) Backing
Other
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (QW-409)
Filler Metal Other

(e.g., Remarks, Com-
Current Wire Feed Energy or Travel ments, Hot Wire
Weld Classifi- Type and Amps Speed Power Volts Speed Addition, Technique,
Pass(es) Process cation Diameter Polmi y (Range) (Range) (Rangel (Range) (Range) Torch Angle, etc.)
Amps and volts, or power or energy range, should be recorded for each electrode size, position, and thickness, etc.
Pulsing Current Heat Input (max.)

Tungsten Electrode Size and Type
<P ure Tungsten, 2% Thoriat.ed, etc.)
Mode ofMetal Transfer for GMAW (FCAW)
<Spray Al-,:, Short Circuiting Arc, etc.)
Other
TECHNIQUE (QW-410)
String or Weave Bead
Orifice, Nozzle, or Gas Cup Size
Initial and Interpass Cleaning (Brushing, Grinding, etc.)
Method of Back Gouging

Oscillation
Contact Tube to work Distance
Multiple or Single Pass (per side)
Multiple or single E lectrodes
Electrode Spacing
Peening
Other
Figure 2.1 QW-482 Form - Nonmandatory Appendix B (Page 2 of2)
Notebook Page 112

QW-483 SUGGESTED FORMAT FOR PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION RECORDS (PQR)
(See QW-200.2, Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code)
Record Actual Conditions Used to Weld Test Coupon.
Company Name
Procedure Qualification Record No. Date
WPSNo.
Welding Process(es)
Types (Manual, Automatic, Semi-Auto.)
JOINTS <QW-402)
Groove Design of Test Coupon

(For combination qualifications, the deposited weld metal thickness shall be recorded for each filler metal and process used.)
BASE METALS (QW-403) POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT (QW-407)

Material Spec. Temperature
Type/Grade, or UNS Number Time
P-No. __ Group No. __ toP-No. __ Group No. - - Other
Thickness of Test Coupon
Diameter of Test Coupon
Maximum Pass Thickness
Other
GAS (QW-408)
Percent Composition
Gas(es) (Mixture) Flow Rate
Shielding
FILLER METALS (QW-404) 1 2 Trailing
SFA Specification Backing
AWS Specification Other
Filler Metal F-No.
Weld Metal Analysis A-No. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (QW-409)
Size of Filler Metal Current
Filler Metal Product Form Polarity
Supplemental Filler Metal Amps. Volts
Electrode Flux Classification Tungsten E lectrode Size
Flux Type Mode of Metal Transfer for GMAW (FCAW)
Flux Trade Name Heat Input
Weld Metal Thickness Other
Other
POSITION (QW-405) TECHNIQUE (QW-410)

Position of Groove Travel Speed
Weld Progression (Uphill, Downhill) String or Weave Bead
Other Oscillation
Multipass or Single Pass (per side)
Single or Multiple Electrodes
PREHEAT (QW-406) Other
Preheat Temp
Interpass Temp
Other
Notebook Paqe 113

QW-483 (Back )
PQRNo. - -- - - - -
Te n sil e T est (QW-150)

Ultimate Ultimate Type of
Total Load Unit Stress Failure &
Width Width Thickness Area lbs psi Location
.... ..........
···········r
....... ......
T
r
·················
I
J
Guided-Bend Tests (QW-160)
Type and Figure No. Result
-··· .... ···········-·- ·-·--

· i ·······
Toughness Tests (QW-170)

Specimen Notch Specimen Test Impact Values Drop Weight
No. Break
Location Size Temp. Ft-lbs % Shear I Mils (YIN)
--~---····_·-- - ~-- - -~· ·•·•__•_•• _• · ,_·_· ~·-·· _~-----

·-
...............
_ _ I·
,.. · · c :.· j _··-_·····_·
······-_··__ __
·-·
.,I :1-- -~---- ¥ ····
Comments: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ ____________________
:. '=: . •. •.• .• . . ~·· ........ ! -
Fillet-We ld Test (QW-180)
Result ·Satisfactory: Yes _ _ __ No _ _ ___ Penetration into Parent Metal: Yes _ _ _ _ No
Macro -Results -------------------------------------------------------- - - - - - - - - -- -
Other Tests
TypeofTest ________________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ __ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ ___
Deposit A n a l y s i s - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- -----------------
Other _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _______ _ __ _ _________________ __ _ _ _ _ __
Welder's Name Clock No. Stamp No.

Tests conducted by: Laboratory Test No. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
We certify that the statements in this record are correct and that the test welds were prepared, welded, and tested in accordance
with the requirements of Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
Manufacturer or Contractor - - - - - - -- ------------------
Date Certified By ------------- - -- - - - - - - - - -

<Detail of record of tests are illustrative only and may be modified to conform to the type and number of tests required by the
Code.)
Notebook Page 114

WELDER QUALIFICATION RECORD (WQR) AB·76A 2010·09
the pressure equipment safety authority
Welder's Name: _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _,ABSA File No.: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Stamp N o . : - - - - -

Identification of WPS followed by welder during welding of test coupon: _ _ _ _ _ _____ W.P. Reg.# WP- - - - - -
Base material(s) welded: Thickness: 0 Test Coupon 0 Prod. Weld
Testing Conditions and Qualification Limits
Welding Variables (QW-350) Actual Values Range Qualified
Welding Process(es) Used:
Type of Welding (i.e., Manual, Semi-Automatic) Used:
Base Metal P- or S-Number. ToP- or S-Number:
D Plate 0 Pipe (enter diameter if pipe or tube)
Backing (metal, weld metal, double-welded, etc.):
Filler Metal or Electrode Specification(s) (SFA) (info only):
Filler Metal or Electrode Classification(s) (info only):
Filler Metal or Electrode F-Number(s):
Filler Type (solid/metal or flux cored/powder) (GTAW or PAW):
Consumable Insert for GTAW or PAW:
Deposit Thickness for each process or electrode type, etc. (in.):
Process/Electrode 1: 3 layers minimum 0 Yes 0 No Process/Electrode 2: 3 layers minimum 0 Yes 0 No
Welding Position (2G, 6G, 3F, etc.):
Vertical Progression (Uphill or Downhill):
Fuel Gas for OFW or Inert Gas Backing for GTAW, PAW, GMAW:
Transfer Mode (spray/globular or pulse to short circuit- GMAW):
GTAW Current Type/Polarity (AC, DCEP, DCEN): - - - - - - - - - - - ' ' - - - - - - - - -- -
Results
Visual Examination of Fit-Up; Root Gap: Tack Welds: ( Length: Number: _ _ )
Root Pass (Describe Discontinuity if Unacceptable ) : - - - -- - - - - -- -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Completed Weld (Describe defects if unacceptable): - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - -- - -- - - - - - - -
Bend Test: 0 Transverse Root and Face [QW-462.3(a)] 0 Longitudinal Root and Face [QW-462.3(b)] 0 Side [QW-462.2]
0 Pipe Bend Specimen, corrosion-resistant overlay (QW-462.5(c)] 0 Plate Bend Specimen, corrosion-resistant overlay (QW-462.5(d))
D Macro Test for Fusion{QW-462.5(bll D Macro Test. for Fusion (QW-462.5(ell
T ype Result Type Result T ype Result
(For alternative qualification of groove welds by volumetric examination to QW-1 91)

R.T. Results: U.T. Results: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Fillet Weld - Fracture Test (Describe location, nature and size of any crack or tearing of specimen): - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Length and Per Cent of Defects: inches-- - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - - - - - -
Macro Test-Fusion: - - - - - - - - - -- - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Appearance-Fillet Size (leg.): _ _ _ X inch. Convexity: inch. or Concavity: _ _ _ _ inch.
Other Tests : - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - -- -
Record Information
Film or Specimens Evaluated by: Company: - - - - -- - -- - --
Welding supervised by : - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Mechanical tests conducted by: Laboratory test no.: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
We certify that the statements in this record are correct and that the test coupons were prepared, welded and tested in
accordance with the requirements of Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
ACCREDITED ORGANIZATION: AOQP No.: Expiry Date: - - -- -- -- --
Certified by: Examiner File No. Date: - - - -- - -- - - -
P.Q. Card No. (When issued): Performance Test Reference No.:
Test Coupon I.D. No.: Date Coupon is to be retained to: - - - - - -- - - -
Notebook Paqe 115

WELDING OPERATOR QUALIFICATION RECORD AB -76B 2010-09
(WOQP)
Welder's Name: ABSA File No.: Stamp No.: _ _ _ __

Identification of WPS followed by operator during welding of test coupon: W.P. Reg.# WP- _ _ _ __
Base material(s) welded: Thickn ess: D Test Coupon D Prod. Weld
Base Metal P Number: To P Number: Welding position (2G, 6G, 3F, etc.): - - - -- - - - -
0 Plate D Pipe (enter diameter if pipe or tube): - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- -- - -
Filler Metal (SFA) Specification: Filler Metal or Electrode Classification: - - -- - - - - - - - -
Testing Conditions and Qualification Limits When Using Automatic Welding Equipment
Welding Variables (QW-361 .1) Actual Values Range Qualified
Type of Welding (Automati c):
Addition or Deletion of Filler Metal (EBW or LBW):
Type of Laser for LBW (C02 to YAG, etc.):
Continuous Drive or Inertia Welding (FW):
Vacuum or Out of Vacuum (EBW):
Testing Conditions and Qualification Limits When Using Machine Welding Equipment
Welding Variables (QW-361 .2) Actual Values Range Qualified
Type of Welding (Machine):
Direct or Remote Visual Control: - - - - - - - - - - - + -- -- - -- - - -
Automatic Arc Voltage Control (GTAW):
Consumable Inserts (GTAW or PAW):
Automatic Joint Tracking:
Backing (metal, weld metal, backwelded, etc.): - - - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - -- - -
Welding Position (2G, '6G, 3F, etc.): - - - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - -- - -
Single or Multiple Passes per Side: - - - - - - - - - - - ' - - - - - - - -- - -
Results
Visual Examination of Root Pass (Describe Discontinuity if Unacceptable): - - - - - - - - - -- -- - - - - - -
Completed Weld (Describe defects if unacceptable): - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - -- - - -
Bend Test: D Transverse Root and Face [QW-462.3(a)J D Longitudinal Root and Face [QW-462.3(b)J D Side [QW-462.2]
0 Pipe Bend Specimen, corrosion-resistant overlay (QW-462.5(c)] 0 Plate Bend Specimen, corrosion-resistant overlay (QW-462.5(d))
D Macro Test for Fusion [QW-462.5(b)l D Macro Test for Fusion [QW-462.5(e))
Type Result T ype Result Type Result
(For alternative qualification of groove welds by volumetric examination to QW-1 91)

R.T. Results: U.T. Results: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Fillet Weld- Fractu re Test (Describe location, nature and size of any crack or tearing of specimen): - - - - - - -- - - - - - -
Length and Per Cent of Defects: inche s - - -- -- - -- - - - - -- - - - - - - -
Macro Test-Fusion: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Appearance-Fillet Size (leg.): _ _ _ X _ _ _ _ inch. Convexity: _ _ _ _ _ _ inch. or Concavity: ____ inch.
Other Tests: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Record Information
Film or Specimens Evaluated by: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Company:--- - - - - - - - - -
Welding supervised by: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Mechanical tests conducted by: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Laboratory test no.: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
W.e..cet:t.i.ty-tl:lat-the statemeJ:~tS-in tbis record are correct and that the test coupons were prepared, welded and tested in
accordance with the requirements of Section IX of the ASME Code.
ACCREDITED ORGANIZATION: AOQP No.: _ _ _ Expiry Date: - - -- - - - - - -
Certified b y : - - - - - - - - - - - - Examiner File No.__ __ _ _ _ _ Date: - - - - - - - - - -
P.Q. Card No. (When issued): _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Performance Test Reference No.: - - -- - - - - - -
Test Coupon I.D. No.: Date Coupon is to be retained t o : - - - - - - - - - -
Notebook Page 116

WPS/PQR Review# CS-2
Practice Problems
Notebook Page 117

QW-482 SUGGESTED FORMAT FOR WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION (WPS)
(See QW-200.1, Sectio11IX, ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code)
Company Name: _ C=o:. :. m:.coc:ac.. :n_,_y""lnc.:. :c: .·.

:. , - - - - - - - - - - - - - By: Pea Green
Welding Procedure Spec. No.: CS-2 Date: 09-10-13 Supporting PQR No. (s): CS-2 Rev. 0
WPS Revision No.: Rev. 0 Rev. Date: _0""9,_-,_1-"-0-_,1'""3:__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ __
Welding Process(s): SMAW Type(s): -'-':M'-"aC!..!n,
ua,.,I..,.--.,...,..._..,....,...,.......,....,..--....,....--...,....- -
(Au tomati c, Manual, Machine, or Semi-Auto)
JOINTS (QW-402)
Joint Design: ,---..,------.,.,--,--,..--- --

Backing: (Yes) X (No) ·-=-"X.:..___ _ __
Backing Material: (Type): SA-516 - Gr. 70 Joint Design
(Refer to both backing & retainers)
_x_ Metal _ Nonfusing Metal
Single ·v·
may be used with backing
Nonmetallic Other or open root
No nonmetallic retainers permitted.
Root spacing for open root: 3/32'' ! '!32"

Root spacing with backing: 'Is" ! 'Is"
P-N o. __,_1_ _ _ __ Group No. 1 2 and 3 to P-No. _.!....__ _ _ Group No. 1 2 and 3
OR
Specification type and grade - , - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - -- -
to Specification type and grade - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - -- -
OR
Chern. Analysis and Mech. Prop. - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --
to Chern. Analysis and Mech. Prop. - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --
Thickness range:
BaseMetal: Groove: 0.188 in.to 1.5in. Fillet: All
Pipe Dia. Range: Groove: ----'-A-'"11'----- - - -- - -- Fillet: All
*FILLER METALS (QW-404)
Spec. No. (SFA): 5.1

AWS No. (Class): E7018
Filler Metal F-No.: F-No. 4
Chern. Comp. -A No.: A-No. 1
Size of Filler Metals: 3/32 in .. 1/8 in.. 5/32 in.
Weld Metal
Thickness range: Note: single pass thickness 0.500 in. maximum.
Groove: 1.5 in. maximum

Fillet: all sizes
Electrode-Flux (Class):
Flux Trade Name:
Consumable Insert:
Other:
• Each base metal-filler metal combination should be recorded individually.
Notebook Page 118

\ ' /('..c ~· . (·
I (0
POSITIONS (QW-405) I
I QW-482 (Back)
WPS No. :
POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT (QW-407)
CS-2 Rev. No.: 0
Position(s) of Groove: ALL Temperature Range: NoPWHT

Welding Progression: Up X Down X Time Range: No PWHT
Positions(s) of Fillet: ALL
PREHEAT (QW-406) GAS ((QW-408)
Preheat Temp. Min.: 175°F Percent Composition :
lnterpass Temp. Max.: Gas(es) (Mixture) Flow Rate
Preheat Maint.: None Shielding:
Trailing :
Backing :
(Continuous or special h eating where applicable should be recorded.)
Current AC or DC: DC Polarity: Reverse

Amps Range: 75to 200 Volts (Range): 18 to 30
{Amps and volts range should be recorded for each electrode size,
position, and thickness, etc. This information may be listed in a
tabular form similar to that shown below. )

{Pure Tungsten, 2% Thoriated, etc. )
Mode of metal Transfer for GMAW

(Spray arc, short circuiting arc, etc. )
Electrode Wire feed speed range
TECHNIQUE (QW-410)
S tring o r Weav e Bead: String or Weave; with weave not greater than 3 times electrode diameter
Orifice or Gas Cup Size:
Initial and lnterpass Cleaning (Brushing, Grinding, etc . ): Brush, grind, fi le as reguired
Note: weld (;)re(;)aration must be cleaned at least 1 in. back from weld surfaces
Method of Back Gouging; _grinding or arc gouging allowed
Oscillation:
Contact Tube to Work Distance:
Multiple or Single Pass (per side) : Multiole
Multiple or Single Electrodes: Sinale
Travel Speed (Range):
Peening: Strictl::t no (;)eening allowed
Other:
Filler Metal Current
Other
(e.g.,
Remarks,
Travel Comments,
Weld Type Amp Volt Speed Hot Wire,
Layer(s) Process Class Dia. Polar. Range Range Range Technique,
Torch Angle,
etc.)
ALL SMAW E-7018 3/32 in. OC-RP 75 to 115 18- 21
ALL SMAW E-7018 1/8 in. OC-RP 100 to 150 20 -25
ALL SMAW E-7018 5/32 in. OC-RP 150 to 200 20-28

(See QW-200.2, Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure vessel Code)
Record Actual Conditions Used to Weld Test Coupon
Company Name: Comoanv Inc.

Procedure Qualification Record No.: CS-2 Rev. 0 Date: 09-10-13
WPS No.: CS-2 Rev. 0
Welding Process(s): SMAW
Types (Manual, Automatic, Semi-Auto. ): MANUAL
JOINTS (QW-402)

(For combination qualifications, the deposited weld metal thickness shall be recorded for each filler metal or process used.)

Material Spec.: SA-516 Temperature: None gerformed
Type or Grade: Grade 70 Time:
P-No.: 1 toP-No.: 1 Other:
Thickness of Test Coupon: 0.750 in.
Diameter of Test Coupon: Plate
Other:
GAS (QW-408)
FILLER METALS (QW-404) Percent Composition
SFA Specification : 5.1 Gas(es) (Mixture) Flow Rate
AWS Classification: E6010 Shielding:
Filler Metal F No.: 4 Trailing:
Weld metal Analysis No.: 1 Backing:
Size of Filler metal: 1/8 in. and 5/32 in. diameter ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (QW-409)
Other: Current: not recorded
Polarity: not recorded
Weld Metal Thickness: 0.750 in. Amps.: not recorded Volts: not recorded
Note: No single pass > 3/8 in. Tungsten Electrode Size:
POSITION (QW-405) Other:
Position of Groove: 1G
Weld Progression (Uphill, Downhill): N/A TECHNIQUE (QW-410)
Other: Travel Speed : not recorded
String or Weave Bead : string root Qass (see Other}
PREHEAT (QW-406) Oscillation:
Preheat Temp.: 200oF minimum Multipass or Single Pass (per side):
lnterpass temp.: Single or Multiple Electrodes :
other: Other: weave limited to 3 times electrode diameter
no Qeening done.
Notebook Page 120

QW-483 (Back)
PQR No.: CS-2 Rev. 0
Tensile Test (QW-1 50)

Specimen Total Load Unit Stress Failure &
No. Width Thickness Area Lb. psi Location
1 0.755 0.749 0.565 40,555 71,779 Weld Metal
2 0.752 0.748 0.562 37,173 / ' 66,575 *Base Metal
I h\') \\X'-"
.\t
*Specimen 2 fractured in the base metal outside the weld and weld interface. ~
~~
:X
~~
J'
Guided Bend Tests (QW-160) v-~..

Side Bend per QW-462.2 5/32 in. open discontinuity on one corn er of specimen, no sign
of internal discontinuity_
Side Bend per QW-462.2 No discontinuity
Side Bend per QW-462.2 3/32 in. discontinuity in the heat affected zone
Side Bend oer QW-462.2 No discontinuity
Toughness Tests (QW-170)
Impact Values
Specimen Notch Specimen Test
No. Location Size Temp. Ft. Lbs. %Shear Mils Dr~ We!g_ht Break (YIN)
Comments: no imQact testing Qerformed
Fillet Weld Test (QW-180)
Result -- Satisfactory: Yes: No: Penetration Into Parent Metal: Yes: - - - No: - - -
Macro --- Results:
Other Tests
Type of Test:
Deposit Analysis:
Other :
Welder's Name: Pierrine Nau Clock No.: OOZE Stamp No.: PN
Tests conducted by: Pea Green Laboratory Test No.: 091013
We certify that the statements in this record are correct and that the test welds were prepared, welded, and
tested in accordance w ith the requirements of Section IX of the ASME Code.
Manufacturer: ComQany Inc.
Date: 09-10-13 By: BLLL S~~~A.Lt¥1
1\lnt<>hnnk P:>n<> 1 ?1
Practice Problem 1: WPS # CS-2- Joint Design QW-402
Are the joint design variables (QW-402) properly addressed on the WPS and PQR to meet ASME
Sec. IX?
a) No, must also list the welding pass sequence for each electrode size.
b) No, angle ofV-groove is not specified.
c) No, backing size is not specified.
d) Yes.
Practice Problem 2: WPS # CS-2 - Base Metal P-No. QW-403, QW-420, and QW/QB-422
Does the PQR support the WPS with the base metal P-No. qualified?
a) No, the Group Number is not listed in the PQR.

b) No, the Group Number 4 is not listed in the WPS.
c) No, SA-516 grade 70 is not a P-No. 1 material.
d) Yes.
Practice Problem 3: WPS # CS-2 - Weld Metal F-No. QW-404, QW-430, QW-432
Does the PQR support the WPS with the weld metal F-No. qualified?
a) No, the SFA number is incorrect on the PQR.

b) No, the electrode AWS classification is incon-ect on the PQR.
c) No, the A-No is incorrect.
d) No, since SFA 5.1 classification E6010 is not a F-No. 4.
Notebook Page 122

Practice Problem 4: WPS # CS-2 - Weld Metal A-No. QW-442
Does the PQR support the WPS with the A-No. qualified?
a) No, the WPS specifies an A-No. of 4

b) No, the WPS s pecifies an A-No. of 1
c) No, an A-No. is not given in the PQR
d) Yes, the A-No. is correct.
Practice Problem 5: WPS # CS-2 - Base Metal Thickness (T) QW-403 and QW-451.1
Does the PQR support the WPS with the base metal thickness range qualified?
a) No, it should be 1/16 in. to 1.5 in.

b) No, it should be 3/16 in. to 0.750 in.
c) No, it should be 0.750 in maximum only.
d) Yes.
~ - .... -~ ..... - • ' -.,... ~ ... - . . - - ' -.r- ~
Practice Problem 6: WPS # CS-2- Individual Weld Metal Pass QW-403.9

Does the PQR support the WPS with the individual weld pass thickness requirement?
a) No, the minimum value of3/16 in. is not supported.

b) No, the maximum thickness of 1.5 in. is not supported .
c) No, th e thickness range is not supported.
d) Yes.
C Codes and Standards Training Institute (CAST!)
Notebook Paae 123

Practice Problem 7: WPS # CS-2- Weld Metal Thickness (t) QW-404 and QW-451.1
Does the PQR support the WPS with the weld metal thickness range qualified?
a) No, the WPS minimum value was exceed.

b) No, the PQR value was too low.
c) No, both the WPS and PQR values must be identical.
d) Yes.
Practice Problem 8: WPS # CS-2 - Fillet Weld Size QW-403 and QW-451 .4
Does the PQR support the WPS for fillet weld sizes qualified?
a) No, since a fillet weld coupon was not used in the PQR.
b) No, fillet weld size should be limited to 1116 in. to 1.5 in.
c) No, fillet weld size should be limited to 3/16 in. to 1.5 in.
d) Yes.
Practice Problem 9: WPS # CS-2- Welding Position QW-405 and QW-461.3

Does the PQR support the WPS with the welding position qualified?
a) No, since the 1G position in the PQR does not support all positions listed in the WPS.
b) No, since only the 6G position can qualify all positions.
c) No, since only the 2G, 3G, and 4G positions together can qualify all positions.
d) Yes, since position is not an essential variable for WPS qualification.
Notebook Page 124

Practice Problem 10: WPS # CS-2 - Welding Preheat QW-406
Does the PQR support the WPS with the preheat qualified?
a) No, since the P QR preheat was higher than allowed in the WPS.
b) No, since the WPS and PQR preheats need to be identical.
c) No, since the interpass temperature was not recorded on the PQR.
d) Yes, since the PQR preheat temperature was above the minimum required in the WPS.
. . .
Practice Problem 11: WPS # CS-2- PWHT QW-407.1
Does the PQR support the WPS with the PWHT?
a) No, PWHT is required.

b) No, PWHT is required for thickness above 0.750 in.
c) No, PWHT is required for thickness above 1.0 in.
d) Yes .
_.. ~ • ' •- ' • - - • .,... • ...,._ ~ - - ~ "" • _._ • -.- r - , '
Practice Problem 12: WPS # CS-2- Electrical Characteristics QW-409

Does the PQR support the WPS with the electrical characteristics variables qualified?
a) No, since amperage was not recorded.

b) No, since voltage was not recorded.
c) No, since both amperage and volt age were not recorded.
d) Yes, since electrical characteristics are nonessential variables for SMAW.
Notebook Paoe 125

Practice Problem 13: WPS # CS-2- Technique QW-410
Does the PQR support the WPS with the technique variables qualified?
a) No, since the travel speed was not recorded.

b) No, since oscillation was not recorded.
c) No, since the PQR weave technique did not meet the WPS requirements.
d) Yes, since technique variables are nonessential variables for SMAW, although the weave
requirement was met.
Practice Problem 14: WPS # CS-2- Tensile Test QW-153.1(d) and QW-451.1
Does the PQR support the WPS with the tensile test results?
a) No, specimen number 1 failed in the weld metal.

b) No, specimen number 2 was below the minimum specified tensile strength (70,000 psi).
c) Yes, the tensile tests are acceptable.
d) No, specimen number 2 was below the 5% tolerance of the min imum specified tensile
strength (66,500 psi).
Practice Problem 15: WPS # CS-2- Guided Bend Tests QW-163 and QW-451.1
Does the PQR support t he WPS with the guided bend test results?
a) No, 2 face and two root bend should have been tested.
b) No, since the 3/32 in. defect in the heat affected zone is unacceptable.
c) No, since the 5/32 in. defect on the corner is unacceptable.
d) Yes.
Notebook Page 126

WELDER QUALIFICATION RECORD (WQR) AB-76A 2010-09
Welder's Name: ~B~iii~S~m~i~th.!,.__ _ _ _ __ _ __ __ _ _.ABSA File No.: .!.1=:24:!.;-'-!.1_,_

1_ _ _ _ _ _Stamp No.: ""9"'9_ _ __
Identifi cation of WPS followed by welder during welding of test coupon: CS-2 W.P. Reg. # WP- ~c:!:s~-2=----
Base material(s) welded: P-No.1 to P-No.1 Thickness: 0.280 in. 181 Test Coupon 0 Prod. Weld
Testing Conditions and Qualification Limits
Welding Variables (QW-350) Actual Values Range Qualified
Welding Process(es) Used: SMAW SMAW
Type of Welding (i.e., Manual, Semi-Automatic) Used: manual manual
Base Metal P- or S-Number. ToP- or S-Number: P-No.1 to P-No. 1 P-No. 1 to P-No. 1
0 Plate 181 Pipe (enter diameter if pipe or tube) 6 inches 2.5 inches to 8 inches
Backing (metal, weld metal, double-welded, etc.): without with without
Filler Metal or Electrode Specification(s) (SFA) (info only): 5.1
Filler Metal or Electrode Classification(s) (info only): #1- E601 0 #2- E7018
Filler Metal or Electrode F-Number(s): F-No.3 F-No. 4 F-No. 3 F-No. 4
Filler Type (solid/metal or flux cored/powder) (GTAW or PAW):
Consumable Insert for GTAW or PAW:
Deposit Thickness for each process or electrode type, etc. (in.): 0.280 inch 0.560 inch
Process/Electrode #1: SMAW 3 layers minimum Yes 0 No 181 Process/Electrode #2: 3 lavers minimum 181 Yes 0 No
Welding Position (2G, 6G, 3F, etc.): _:::6~G:___ _ _ _ _ _ _- I_a:::.:I.:J I P~·O::.::S::.:it::.::
io:::.:n:::::s_ _ _ _ __
Vertical Progression (Uphill or Downhill): _:::d:::::OW.:.:.:..:.n~
h i::.:.
II _ _ _ _ _ _-I_U::~ J P::.:.Ih::.:il.:..:
l a:: .:n.:.:d: . d: :.:o: w::..:n
. : .:.:.h::.:il::._l_ __
Fuel Gas for OFW or Inert Gas Backing for GTAW, PAW, GMAW: - - - - - - - - - - +- - - - - -- - - -
Transfer Mode (spray/globular or pulse to short circuit- GMAW): - - - - - - - - - - + - - -- - - - - - -
GTAW Current Type/Polarity (AC, DCEP, DCEN): _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~.__ _ _ _ _ __ __
Results
Visual Examination of Fit-Up; Root Gap: pass Tack Welds: pass (Length: Number: _ _ )
Root Pass (Describe Discontinuity if Unacceptable):~"""-------------------------
Completed Weld (Describe defects if unacceptable): ~as~s:----------------==-----------
Bend Test: 181 Transverse Root and Face [QW-462.3(a)) 0 Longitudinal Root and Face [QW-462.3(b)J 0 Side [QW-462.2]
0 Pipe Bend Specimen, corrosion-resistant overlay [QW-462.5(c)] 0 Plate Bend Specimen, corrosion-resistant overlay [QW-462.5(d)]
0 Macro Test for Fusion [QW-462.5(b)) 0 Macro Test for Fusion [QW-462.5(e)]
Type Result Type Result Type Result
face pass - no indications face pass - 3/32" indication
root pass - 1/16" indication Root pass - no indications
(For alternative qualification of groove welds by volumetric examination to QW-191)
R.T. Results: U.T. Results: - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - -
Fillet Weld- Fracture Test (Describe location, nature and size of any crack or tearing -of spec i m e n ) : - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Length and Per Cent of Defects: inches - - - - - -- - -- -- - - -- - - - - --
Macro Test-Fusio n : - - - - - - - -- - - - - - -- - - -- - -- -- - - - - -- - - - - -- -
Appearance-Fillet Size (leg.): _ _ _ X inch. Convexity: inch. or Concavity: - - - - inch.
Oth er Tests: - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - -- - -- - -- - - - - - - - - - - -
Record Information
Film or Specimens Evaluated by: Company:------------
Welding supervised by: .!.T.::t.o!.'..nL.!..!H.::t.ud~sS!.Iol.!..n:___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ __ _ _ __ __ _ _ _ _ __
Mechanical tests conducted by: TH Testing Laboratory test no.: ..!..
T!...!
Hc:_ -1!.J1t.::
-O\L1.!.:-:!...782.-_ _ _ __
We certify that the statements in this record are correct and that the test coupons were prepared, welded and tested in
accord ance with the requirements of Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
ACCREDITED ORGANIZATION: TH Testing AOQP No.: 2552 Expiry Date: ...!.12~-:..!..
12~-~ 31!___ _ _ _ __
Certified by: Tony Hudson Examiner File No. 304 Date: !:!
OS!..
9-~0~9~-2;..;;9:___ _ _ _ _ __
P.O. Card No. (When issued): 11-78 Performance Test Reference No.: .!.1_,_1-:.!.7.::t.8_ _ _ _ _ _ __
Test Coupon I.D. No.: SMAW-01-78 Date Coupon is to be retained to: ..!..1..!.:1-~0c2-~2;..;;9:__
: _ _ _ _ __
NntP.hnnk P;wp 1 ?7
Practice Problem 16: WQR # CS-2 - Pipe Diameter QW-452.3
Does the WQR support the listed range qualified for pipe diameter qualified?
a) No, since the WQR should list 1 inch to unlimited.

b) No, since the WPS does not specify a diameter limitation.
c) Yes, since pipe diameter is a WPS nonessential variable.
d) No, since the WQR should list 2-7/8 inches to unlimited.
Practice Problem 17: WQR # CS-2 - F-No. QW-404.15

Does the WQR support the WPS with the F -No. qualified?
a) Yes, since SFA 5.1 classification E6010 is F-No. 3.

b) Yes, since SFA 5.1 classification E6010 is F-No. 3 and E7018 is F-No 4.
c) Yes, since the WPS lists P-No. 1.
d) No, since the WPS lists F-No. 4 (only) and a weld metal thickness of 1.5 in. max.
Practice Problem 18: WQR # CS-2- Vertical Progression QW-405.3

Does the WQR support the listed range qualified for vertical progression?
a) Yes, since the vertical weld progression is a WPS nonessential variable.

b) No, since the vertical weld progression is a WPS essential variable.
c) Yes, since downhill vertical progression also qualifies uphill vertical progression for
welder qualification.
d) No, since the vertical weld progression is an essential variable for welder qualification.
Notebook Page 1 28
WPS/PQR Review # CS.:~2
Solutions
Notebook Paoe 129

Answer Key to WPS/PQR Review # CS-2
Practice Problem Answer Reference

1 d QW-402
2 d Table QW/QB-422
3 d Table QW-432
4 d QW-442
5 d Table QW-451.1
6 d QW-403.9
7 d Table QW-451.1
8 d Table QW-451.4
9 d QW-461.3
10 d QW-406
11 d QW-407.1
12 d QW-416
13 d QW-410
14 d Table QW-451.1
15 d QW-163
16 d QW-353, QW-403.16, QW-452.3
17 d QW-353, QW-404.15, QW-452.1(b)
18 d QW-353, QW-405.3
Notebook Page 130

WPS/PQR Review # AS 2
Practice Problems
1\lf'IIPhf'lf'lk D :>nP 111

QW-482 SUGGESTED FORMAT FOR WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION (WPS)
(See QW-200.1, Section IX, ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code)
Company N ame: Com~an:tlnc. B y: Pea Green

Welding Procedure Spec. No .: AS-2 Date: 09-10-13 Supporting PQR No. (s) : AS-2 Rev. O
W P S Revision No.: Rev. 0 Rev. Date: 09-10-13
Welding Process(s): SMAW Type(s): Manual
(Automatic, Manual, Machine, or Semi-Auto)
JOINTS (QW-402) Joint Design
Joint Design: S i ngl e .. V ..

Backing: (Yes) X (No) X may b e u sed w it h b a c k i ng
or ope n r o ot
Backing Material: (Type): SA-516 - Gr. 55
..X.. Metal _
(Refer to both backing & retainers)
Nonfusing Metal
I ~ / I
- Nonmetallic - Other I B a c Kin g
I
Root spacing for ope n root: 3/3:<!" ""!:" "'/!J.2' '
No nonmetallic retainers permitted . R oot spa cing wi th b a cki ng: Va" ± Va"
P-No. 5A Group No. 1 toP-No. 4 Group No. 1

OR
Specification type and grade
to Specification type and grade
OR
Chern. Analysis and Mech. Prop.
to Chern. Analysis and Mech. Prop.
Thickness range:
Base Metal: Groove: 0.188 in. to 1.5 in . Fillet: All
Pipe Dia. Range: Groove: All Fillet: All
• FILLER METALS (QW-404)
Spec. No. (SFA): 5.5

E-8018-83
AWS No. (Class):
(2.25Cr-1Mo)
Filler Metal F-No.: F-No. 4
Chern. Comp. -A No.: A-No.4
Size of Filler Metals: 3/32 in., 1/8 in. , 5/32 in.
Weld Metal
Thickness range: Note: single pass t hickness 0.500 in. maximum.
Groove: 1.5 in. maximum

F illet: all sizes
Electrode-Flux (Class):
Flu x Trade Name:
Con s u mable Insert:
Other:
• Each base metal-filler metal combination should be recorded individually.
Notebook Page 132

QW-482 (Back)
WPS No. : AS-2 Rev. No.: 0
POSITIONS (QW-405) POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT (QW-407)
Position(s) of Groove: ALL Temperature Range: 1250•F min.
Welding Progression: Up X Down X Time Range: 1.5 hours
Positions(s) of Fillet: ALL
PREHEAT (QW-406) GAS ((QW-408)
Preheat Temp. Min.: 3oo·F Percent Composition:
lnterpass Temp. Max.: Gas(es) (Mixture) Flow Rate
Preheat Malnt.: None Shielding:
Trailing :
Backing:
(Continuous or special heating where applicable should be recorded.)
Current AC or DC: DC Polarity: Reverse

Amps Range: 75 to 200 Volts (Range): 18 to 30
(Amps and volts range should be recorded for each electrode size,
position, and thickness, etc. This information may be listed in a
tabular form similar to that shown below. )

(Pure Tungsten, 2% Thoriated, etc.)
Mode of metal Transfer for GMAW

(Spray arc, short circuiting arc, etc. )
Electrode Wire feed speed range
TECHNIQUE (QW-410)
St ring or Weave Bead: String or Weave; with weave not greater than 3 times electrode diameter
Orifice or Gas Cup Size:
Initial and lnterpass Cleaning (Brushing, Grinding, etc. ): Brush, grind, file as reguired
Note: weld QreQaration must be cleaned at least 1 in. back from weld surfaces
Method of Back Gouging; _ grinding or arc gouging allowed
Oscillation:
Contact Tube to Work Distance:
Multiple or Single Pass (per side ): Multiple
Multiple or Single Electrodes: Sinale
Travel Speed (Range):
Peening: Strictly none allowed
Other:
Filler Metal Current
Other
(e.g.,
Remarks,
Travel Comments,
Weld Type Amp Volt Speed Hot Wire,
Layer(s) Process Class Dia. Polar. Range Range Range Technique,
Torch Angle,
etc.)
ALL SMAW E8018-B3 3/32 in. DC- RP 75to 115 18-21
ALL SMAW E8018-B3 1/8 in. DC-RP 100 to 150 20-25
ALL SMAW E8018-B3 5/32 in. DC-RP 150 to 200 20-28

(See QW-200.2, Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure vessel Code)
Record Actual C·onditions Used to Weld Test Coupon
Company Name: Com(;!any Inc.

Procedure Qualification Record No.: AS-2 Rev. 0 Date: 09-10-13
WPS No.: AS-2 Rev. 0
Welding Process(s): SMAW
Types (Manual, Automatic, Semi-Auto. ): MA NUAL
JOINTS (QW-402)

(For combination qualifications, the deposited weld metal thickness shall be recorded for each filler metal or process used.)

Material Spec.: SA-387 Temperature: 12SO•F-1 27S•F
Type or Grade: Grade 22 Cl 1 Time: 90 minutes
P-No.: SA toP-No.: SA Other:
Thickness of Test Coupon: 0.7SO in.
Diameter of Test Coupon : Plate
Other:
GAS (QW-408)
FILLER METALS (QW-404) Percent Composition
SFA Specification: S.S Gas(es) (Mixture)
Flow Rate
AWS Classification: E8018-B3L (2.2SCr-1Mo) Shielding:
Filler Metal F No.: 4 Trailing:
Weld metal Analysis No.: 1 Backing:
Size of Filler metal: 1/8 in. and S/32 in. diameter ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (QW-409)
Other: Current: not recorded
Polarity: not recorded
Weld Metal Thickness: 0.70S in. Amps.: not recorded Volts: not record ed
Note: No single pass > 3/8 in. Tungsten Electrode Size:
POSITION (QW-405) Other:
Position of Groove: 1G
Weld Progression (Uphill, Downhill): N/A TECHNIQUE (QW-410)
Other: Travel Speed: not recorded
String or Weave Bead : string root (;!ass (see Other}
PREHEAT (QW-406) Oscillation:
Preheat Temp.: 2oo· F to 2so· F Multipass or Single Pass (per side):
lnterpass temp.: Single or Multiple Electrodes:
Other: Other: weave limited to 3 times electrode diameter
Notebook Page 134

QW-483 (Back)
PQR No.: AS-2 Rev. 0
Tensile Test (QW-150)

Specimen Total Load Unit Stress Failure &
No. Width Thickness Area Lb. psi Location
1 0.755 0.749 0.5651.1> 34,905 61,779 Weld Metal
2 0.752 0.748 0.562q 31,795 56,575 Weld Metal
Guided Bend Tests (QW-160)

Face Bend #1 per QW-462.3 pass
Face Bend #2 per QW-462.3 pass, 1/8 in. discontinuity observed
Root Bend #3 per QW-462.3 pass, 0.125 in. discontinuity observed
Root Bend #4 per QW-462.3 pass
Toughness Tests (QW-1 70)
Impact Values
Specimen Notch Specimen Test
No. Location Size Temp. Ft. Lbs. o/o Sh·e ar Mils Drop Weight Break (Y/N)
Comments: no im~act testing ~erformed
Fillet Weld Test (QW-180)
Result -- Satisfactory: Yes: No: Penetration Into Parent Metal: Yes: No :

Macro ••• Results:
Other Tests
Type of Test:
Deposit Analysis:
Other:
Welder's Name: Pierrine Nau Clock No.: OOZE Stamp No.: PN
_Tests conducted by: Pea Green Laboratory Test No.: 091013
We certify that the statements in this record are correct and that the test welds were prepared, welded, and
tested in accordance w ith the requirements of Section IX of the ASME Code.
Manufacturer: Com~an~ Inc.
Date: 09-10-13 By: Bill Smith
NntPhnnk P~nP 11"\

Practice Problem 1: WPS # AS-2
Are the joint design variables (QW-402) properly addressed on the WPS and PQR to meet
ASME Sec. IX?
a) No, must also list the welding pass sequence for each electrode size.
b) No, angle ofV-groove is not specified.
c) No, root spacing not specified.
d) Yes .

Does the PQR support the WPS with the base metal P-No. qualified?
a) No, the WPS and PQR P-Numbers do not match.

b) No, the Group Number was not specified on the PQR.
c) No, SA-387 grade 22 is not a P-No. 5A material.
d ) Yes.

Does the PQR support the WPS with the weld metal F-No. and A-No. qualified?
a) No, the SFA number is incorrect on the PQR, but the A-No. is correct.
b) No, the electrode AWS classification is incorrect on the PQR, but the A-No. is correct.
c) No, the F-no. is correct, but the A-No is incorrect (should be A-No. 4).
d) No, since AWS classification do not match (E8018-B3 vs. E8018-B3L).
Notebook Page 136

Does the PQR support the WPS with the base metal thickness range qualified?
a) No, it should be 1/16 in . to 1.5 in.

b) No, it should be 3/16 in. to 0.750 in.
c) No, it should be 0.750 in maximum only.
d) Yes.

Does the PQR support the WPS with the individual weld pass thickness requirement?
a) No, the minimum value of3/16 in. is not supported.

b) No, the maximum thickness of 1.5 in. is not supported.
c) No, the thickness range is not supported.
d) Yes.

Does the PQR support the WPS with the weld metal thickness range qualified?
a) No, the WPS minimum value was exceed.

b) No, the PQR value was too low.
c) No, both the WPS and PQR values must be identical.
d) Yes.
NntPhnnk P~nP 1 ~7
Does the PQR support the WPS for fillet weld sizes qualified?
a) No, since a fillet weld coupon was not used in the PQR.
b) No, fillet weld size should be limited to 1/16 in. to 1.5 in.
c) No, fillet weld size should be limited to 3/16 in. to 1.5 in.
d) Yes.

Does the PQR support the WPS with the welding position qualified?
a) No, since the 1G position in the PQR does not support all positions listed in the WPS.
b) No, since only the 6G position can qualifY all positions.
c) No, since only the 2G, 3G, and 4G positions together can qualify all positions.
d) Yes, since position is not an essential variable for WPS qualification.

Does the PQR support the WPS with the preheat qualified?
a) No, since the PQR preheat was lower than allowed in the WPS.
b) No, since the WPS and PQR preheats need to be identical.
c) No, since the interpass temperature was not recorded on the PQR.
d) Yes.
Notebook Page 138

Does the PQR support the WPS with the PWHT qualified?
a) No, the PQR PWHT temperature did not support the WPS.
b) No, PWHT was not required in the PQR.
c) No, the PQR PWHT time does not support the WPS.
d) Yes, the PQR PWHT time was satisfactory for the coupon thickness.
~ r ~F ..... - • • ..

Does the PQR support the WPS with the electrical characteristics technique variables qualified?
a) No, since amperage was not recorded.

b) No, since voltage was not recorded.
c) No, since both amperage and voltage were not recorded .
d) Yes, since electrical characteristics are nonessential variables for SMAW.
,0...-'-• ~ r - r' ·~ - - - ' • • ... - • ,/' ~·~.. .. f - ~·--- ....,.-

Does the PQR support the WPS with the technique variables qualified?
a) No, since the travel speed was not recorded.

b) No, since oscillation was not recorded.
c) No, since the PQR weave technique did not meet the WPS requirements.
d) Yes, since technique variables are nonessential variables for SMAW, although the weave
requirement was met.
Notebook Paoe 139

Does the PQR support the WPS with the tensile test results?
a) Yes, the tensile tests are acceptable.

b) No, specimen number 1 failed in the weld metal.
c) No, specimen number 2 was below the minimum specified tensile strength (60,000 psi).
d) Yes, although specimen number 2 was below the minimum specified tensile strength
(60,000 psi) it was within the 5% tolerance (56,500 psi).

Does the PQR support the WPS with the guided bend test results?
a) Yes, since all tests passed.

b) No, bend #2 should have failed.
c) No, both bend #2 and #3 should have failed.
d) No, since 4 side bends should have been tested.
Notebook Page 140

WPS/PQR Review # AS-2
Solutions
®Codes and Standards Training Institute (CAST!)
Notebook Paoe 141

Answer Key to WPS/PQR Review # AS-2
Practice Problem Answer Reference

1 c J oint Design QW-402
2 d Base Metal P-No. QW/QB-422, QW-403.11, QW-424
3 c Weld Metal F-No. and A-No. QW-404, QW-430, QW-432, QW-442
4 d Base Metal Thickness (T) QW-403 and QW-451.1
5 d Individual Weld Metal Pass QW-403.9
6 b Weld Metal Thickness (t) QW-404 and QW-451.1
7 d Fillet Weld Size QW-403 and QW-451.4
8 d Welding Position QW-405 and QW-461.3
9 d Welding Preheat QW-406.1
10 d PWHT QW-407 and QW-451.1
11 d Electrical Characteristics QW-409 (QW-423)
12 d Technique QW-410 (QW-423)
13 c Tensile Test QW 153.1(a);
QW 153.1(d) does not apply since the test failed in the weld
14 d Guided Be nd Tests QW-163 and QW-451.1
Notebook Page 142

Solutions
For ASME Section IX Practitce Problems
Notebook Paoe 143

Answer Key- ASME IX Practice Problems
Practice Practice
Problem Answer Reference Paragraph Problem Answer Reference Paragraph
Ql: d QW-100.1 Q51: b QW-302.2
Q2: a QW-100.1 Q52: a QW-321.3(a)
Q3: a QW-100.2 Q53: a QW-322 .1(a)
Q4: d QW-132.3 Q54: a QW-322 .2(a)
Q5: c QW-132.1 Q55: c P ressure Welders
Regulation 6(a-l)
Q6: d QW-141.1 Q56: e Pressure Welders
Regulation 8(5)(6)
Q7: e QW-143 Q59: b QW-354
Q8: c QW-151.1(b) Q61: b QW-350,
Table QW-416
Q10: d QW-152, QW-462.1 Q62: d QW-350,
Table QW-416
Q12: c QW-152 Q72: e QW-451,
QW-403.9
Q13: d QW-163 Q73: e QW-451.1,
QW-407.4
Q14: b QW-163 Q74: a QW-452.1(b),
Interpretation IX-01-27
Q15: b QW-171.1 Q75: a QW-452.1(b),
Interpretation IX-83-90
Q16: d QW/QB-492 Q78: b QW-452.1(a)
Q17: d QW-191.1.2.1(a) Q80: d QW-452.3
Q19: d QW/QB-422 Q82: d QW-461.9
Q20: c QW/QB-422
Q23: a QW-432
Q24: c QW-432
Q27: c QW-442
Q28: a QW-442
Q29: d QW-442
Q30: a QW-200.1(b)
Q31: c QW-200.1(c)
Q32: b QW-200.2(b)
Q33: b QW-200.2(b)
Q46: a QW-253, QW-403.11
Q47: a QW-253, QW-404.33
Q48: d QW-300.2(a)
Q49: b QW-301.1
Q50: c QW-301.4
© Cod es and Standards Training Institute (CAST!)
Notebook Page 144

Practice Problem 010: OW-152- Tension Test Procedure [SOLUTION]
As part of a welding procedure qualification, a tensile test is performed on SA-333 grade 6 plate,
normalized and tempered, with an allowable stress of 17,100 psi. The test specimen was 0.550 in.
thick, the maximum load during the tensile test was 38,482 lb, and the tensile strength was
70,100 psi. What was the width of the tensile test specimen?
Diagram:
/ width
I
weld material base metal
" thickness
Formula:
t ens1.1e s t rength =-maximum

- - - -load
--
area of specimen
area of specimen = width x thickness
Required Variables:
maximum load = 38,482 lbs

tensile strength= 70,100 psi
t = 0.550 in.
maximum load
tensile strength =
area of specimen
maximum load
tensile strength = - - - - - - -
width x thickness
maximum load
width = - -- - - - - -- -
tensile strength x thickness
38,482lbs
= ---~------
70,100 psi x 0.550 in.
38,482lbs
= 38,555 lbs I in.
= 0.998 in.
@ Codes and Standards Training Institute (CASTI)
Notebook Paoe 145

Practice Problem 012: QW-152- Tension Test Procedure [SOLUTION]
As part of a welding procedure qualification, a tensile test is pelformed on SA-335 grade Pl pipe.
The test specimen was 0.750 in. wide and 0.175 in. thick. The specimen broke in the base metal
outside of the weld and weld interface. What is the minimum acceptable tensile strength for this
WPS qualification?
Formula:
From QW-153.l(d)
If the specimen breaks in the base metal outside of the weld or weld intelface, the
test shall be accepted as meeting the requirements, provided the strength is not more
than 5% below t he minimum specified tensile strength of the base metal.
Required Variables:
From QW/QB-422:
Minimum specified tensile strength for SA-335 Grade Pl is 55 ksi.
Therefore: 5% below the minimum specified tensile strength= 0.95 x 55 ksi

= 52.25 ksi
Notebook Page 146

Practice Problem 019: QW/QB-422- Minimum Specified Tensile Strength [SOLUTION]
What is the minimum specified tensile strength of ASME SA-516 Grade 70?
QW/QB-422 FERROUS/NONFERROUS P-N U MBERS (CONT'Dl

Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification
Ferrous (CONT'DJ
Minimum Welding Brazi ng
Specified ISO
UNS Tensile, P- Group 15608
Spec. No. Type or Grade No. ksl <MPaJ No. No. P·No. Group Nominal Composition Product Form
A 514 E K21&04 110 (760) 118 2 102 3.1 1.7:5Cr- 0.5 M~Cu Plate, 2Y, in. ( &4 mml max.
A 514 p K21650 100 (690) 116 8 102 3.1 1.2:SNHCr-0.5 Mo Plate > zY, in.-o ln.
(64 mm-152 mm), incl.
A 514 p K21650 110 (760) 118 8 102 3.1 1.2:5Ni- 1Cr- 0.5Mo Plate, 2 Yz in. (64 mm) max.
A 514 Q .. . 100 (6<)0) 116 9 102 3. 1 1.3NI -1.3 Cr-Q.S M~V Platt > 2~ in.-o in.
(64 mm-152 mm), incl.
A 514 Q 110 (760) 118 q IOZ 3.1 1.3 N i-1.3Cr-0.5Mo-V Plate, 2~ in. (64 mm) max.
SA·515 60 K02401 60 (415) 1 1 101 1.1 c Plate
SA-515 65 K02800 65 (450) 1 1 101 11.1 C-SI Plate
SA-515 70 K03101 70 (485) 1 2 101 11.1 C-Si Plate
SA-516 55 K01800 55 (380) 1 1 101 1.1 C-Si Plate
SA-516 60 K02100 60 (415) 1 1 101 1.1 C- Mr>-Si Plat•
SA-516 65 KOZ403 os <4so> 1 1 101 1.1 C-Mr>-Si Plate
SA·516 70 K02700 CillillD 1 2 101 11.1 C- Mn-Si Plate
Notebook Page 14 7
Practice Problem 020: QW/QB-422- Minimum Specified Tensile Strength [SOLUTION]
What is the nominal composition of ASME SA-333 Grade 6?
QW/QB-42 2 FERROUS/NON FERROUS P-NU MB E RS <CONT' D)
Grouping of Base Metals for Qua li fication
Ferrous (CONT'D)
Specified ISO
UN$ Tensile, P- Group 15608
Spec. No. Type or Grade No. ksl (MPa) No. No. P-No. Group Nominal Composition Product Form
SA-312 TP321 $32100 70 (485) 8 1 102 8.1 18Cr-10Ni-Tl Smis. & w.lded pipe> % in. no mmJ
SA-312 TP321 $32 100 75 (515) 8 1 102 8.1 18Cr- 10Ni- Ti Smls. & welded pipe ;; % in. (10 mml
5A-312 TP321 532100 75 (515) 8 I 102 8.1 18Cr- 10Ni- Ti Smls. & w.lded pipe
SA·312 TP32!H $32 109 70 (485) 8 1 102 8 .1 18Cr-10NI-TI Smls. & w.lded pipe> % in. no mml
5A-312 TP321H $32109 75 (515) 8 1 102 8.1 18Ct-10Ni- Ti Smls. & w.lded pipe;;% in. (10 mm)
SA·312 TP321H 532109 75 (515) 8 1 102 8 .1 l8Cr- 10NI- Tl Welded pipe
SA-312 $34565 534565 115 (795) 8 4 102 8 .3 24Cr-17NH>Mn-4.5Mo-N Smls & welded pipe
SA·312 TP347 $34700 75 (515) 8 1 102 8.1 18Cr-10NI-Cb Smls. & w.lded pipe
SA-312 T P347H 534709 75 (515) 8 1 102 8 .1 18Cr-10Ni-Cb Smls. & welded pipe
SA-312 TP348 $34800 75 (515) 8 1 102 8.1 18Cr- 10NI-Cb Smls. & w•lded pipe
SA-312 TP348H 534809 75 (515) 8 l 102 8.1 18Cr-10Ni-Cb Smls. & welded pipe
SA-312 TPXM-15 $38100 75 (515) 8 1 102 8.1 18Cr-18Ni-2Si Smls. & welded pipe
SA-333
SA-333
6
1
K03006
K03008
60 (4 15)
55 (380)
1
1
1
1
101
101
11.1
11.1
~
C-Mn
Smls.
Smls.
&
&
welded
welded
pipe
pipe
SA-333 10 ... 80 (550) 1 3 101 11.1 C-Mn-Si Smls. & welded pipe
SA-333 4 Kll267 60 (415) 4 2 102 4 .1 0.75Cr- 0.75NI-Cu-AI Smls. & welded pipe
SA·333 7 K21903 65 (450) 'lA 1 101 9.1 2.5NI Smls. & welded pipe
© Codes and Standard s Training Institute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 148

Practice Problem 023: QW-432- F-No. [SOLUTION]
QW-432
F-NUMBERS
Grouping of Electrodes and Welding Rods for Qualification
(F-No) ASME Specification AWS Classification UNS No.
CD SFA-5.1 EXX20
1 SFA-5.1 EXX22
1 SFA-5.1 EXX24
1 SFA-5.1 EXX27
SFA-5.1 EXX28
SFA-5.4 EXXX(X)-26
SFA-5.5 EXX20-X
SFA-5.5 EXX27-X
2 SFA-5.1 EXX12
2 SFA-5.1 EXX13
2 SFA-5.1 EXX14
2 SFA-5.1 EXX19
3 SFA-5. 1 EXX10
3 SFA-5.1 EXX11
3 SFA-55 E(X)XX10-X
3 SFA-5.5 E (X)XX11-X
4 SFA-5.1 EXX15
4 SFA-5.1 EXX16
4 SFA-5.1 EXX18
4 SFA-5.1 EXX18M
4 SFA-5.1 E XX48

4 SFA-5 5 E(X)XX15-X
4 SFA-5.5 E (X)XX16-X
4 SFA-5.5 E(X)XX18M
4 SFA-5.5 E (X)XX18M1
4 SFA-5.5 E (X)XX45

5 SFA-5.4 austenitic and duplex EXXX(X)-1 7

6 SFA-5.20 A ll classifications
6 SFA-5.22 A ll classifications
6 SFA-5.2 5 All classifications

6 SFA-5.30 INMs-X
6 SFA-5.30 IN5XX
6 SFA-5.30 IN3XX(X)
Notebook Paqe 149

Practice Problem 024: QW-432 - F-No. [SOLUTION]
What is the F-No. ofSFA-5.5 classification E8018-B3L, low-alloy st eel electrodes for shielded metal
arc welding?
QW-432
F-NU MBERS
Grouping of Electrodes and Wel ding Rods fo r Q ualification
ASME Specification AWS Classificat ion UNS No.
SFA-5.1 EXX20
SFA-5 . 1 EXX22
SFA-5.1 EXX24
SFA-5.1 EXX27
SFA-5.1 EXX28
SFA -5.4 EXXX(X) -26

SFA -5.5 EXX20-X
SFA-5.5 EXX27-X
2 SFA-S. 1 EXX 12
2 SFA-5. 1 EXX 13
2 SFA-S. 1 EXX14
2 SFA-5. 1 EXX 19
2 SFA-5. 5 E(X)XX13 -X
3 SFA-5. 1 EXX 10
3 SFA-5. 1 EXX 1 1
3 S FA-5.5 E( X)XX10-X
4 SFA-5. 1 EXX 15
4 SFA-S.1 EXX 16
4 SFA-S. 1 EXX 18
4 SFA-S.1 EXX 18M
4 SFA-S. 1 EXX48
4 SFA-5.4 other than austenitic and duplex EXXX(X)-1S

4 SFA-5.5 E(X)XX1S· X
4 SFA-5.S E(XJXX16-X
G) SFA·S.S E(XJXX18-X
4 SFA·5.S E(X)XX18M
4 SFA-5.5 E(X)XX18M 1
4 SFA-5.5 E(XJXX45

s SFA-5.4 austenitic and duplex EXXX(X)-17
6 SFA-5.2 Al l classificat ions

6 SFA-5.9 Al l classificat ions
6 SFA -5.17 All cla ssificat ions
6 SFA-5.18 All cla ssifications
6 SFA-5.20 Al l cla ssificat ions

6 SFA-S.30 INMs-X
6 SFA-5.30 IN5XX
6 SFA-5.30 IN3XX(X)
Note book Page 150

Practice Problem 027: QW-442 - A-No. [SOLUTION]
What is the A-No. when welding SA-240 grade 304L using SFA-5.4 classification E309L (austenitic
stainless steel 18Cr-8Ni) filler met al?
QW-442
A-NUMBERS
Classification of Ferrous Weld Metal Analy sis for Procedure Qualification
Analysis, % (Note (1))

Types or Weld
~ Deposit c Cr Mo Ni Mn Si
Mild Steel 0.20 1.60 1.00
2 Carbon-Molybdenum 0.15 0.50 OA0-0,65 1.60 1.00
3 Chrome (0.4% to 2%)-Molybdenum 0.15 0.40-2.00 D.40-o.65 1.60 1.00

4 Chrome (2% to 6%)-Molybdenum 0.15 2.00-6.00 0.40-1.50 1.60 2.00
5 Chrome (6% to 10.5%)-Molybdenum 0.15 6.00·10.50 0.40·1.50 1.20 2.00
6 Chrome-Martensitic 0.15 11 .00-1 5.00 0.70 2.00 1.00
7 Chrome-Ferritic 0.15 11 .00-30.00 1.00 1.00 3.00
09 Chromium-Nickel
Chromium-Nickel
0.15
0.30
14.50·30.00
19.00-30.00
4.00
6.00
7.50-15.00
15.00-37.00
2.50
2.50
1.00
1.00
10 Nickel to 4% 0.15 0.55 0.80-4.00 1.70 1.00
11 Manganese-Molybdenum 0.17 0.25·0.75 0.85 1.25-2.25 1.00
12 Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum 0.15 1.50 0.25-0.80 1.25-2.80 0.75·2.25 1.00
NOTE:
(1) Single values shown above are maximum.
Notebook Page 151

Practice Problem 028: QW-422 - A-No. [SOLUTION]
What would be the A-No. when welding a n ASME SA-105 flan ge to SA-106 Grade B pipe, using an
AWS A 5.1 E7018 electrode?
ASME SA-105 can be found in Table QW/QB-422.
QW/QB-422 F ERRO US/NONFE RROUS P-NUMBERS

Ferrous
Specified ISO
UNS Tensile, p. Group 15&08
Spec. No. Type or Grade No. ksi (M Pal No. No. P-No. Group Nominal Comeosition Product Form
SA-36 K02600 58 (400) 1 1 101 11.1 C-Mn-Si Plate, bar & shapes
SA-53 Type F ... 48 (330) 1 1 101 11.1 c Furnace welded pipe
SA-53 TypeS, Gr. A K02504 48 (330) 1 1 101 11.1 c Smls. pipe
SA-53 Type E, Gr. A K02504 48 <330) 1 1 101 11.1 c Resistance ""'lded pipe
SA·5J Type E, Gr. B K03005 60 (415) 1 1 101 11.1 C-Mn Resistance ""'lded pipe
SA-53 TypeS, Gr. B K03005 60 (415) 1 1 101 11.1 C-Mn Smls. pipe
SA-105 ... K03504 70 (485) 1 2 101 n.1CD Flanges & fittings
SA-106 A K02501 48 (330) 1 1 101 1.1 C- Si Smls. pipe
SA· l06 B K03006 60 (415) 1 1 101 11.1 C- Mn-51 Smls. pipe
SA-106 c K03501 70 (485) 1 2 101 11.1 C-Mrt-SI Smls. pipe
The A-No. can be found in Table QW-442.

QW-442
A-N UMBERS
Classification of FE!rrous WE!Id ME!tal Analysis for ProcE!durE! Qualification
Analysis, % [Note (1))
Types of Weld
A-No. Deposit c Cr Mo Ni Mn Si
G) Mild Steel 0.20 ... . .. .•.. 1.60 1.00
2 Carbon-Molybdenum 0.15 0.50 0.40- 0.65 ... 1.60 1.00
3 Chrome (0.4% to 2%)- Molybdenum 0.15 0.40- 2.00 0.40- 0.65 ... 1.60 1.00
4 Chrome (2% to 4%)-Molybdenum 0.15 2.00- 4.00 0.40- 1.50 .. 1.60 2.00
5 Chrome (4% to 10.5%)- Molybdenum 0.15 4.00- 10.50 0.40-1 .50 .. 1.20 2.00
6 Chrome-Ma rtensitic 0.15 11.00-1 5.00 0.70 ... 2.00 1.00
7 Chrome-Ferritic 0.1 5 11.00- 30.00 1.00 .. . 1.00 3.00
8 Chromiu m- Nickel 0.15 14.50- 30.00 4.00 7.50-1 5.00 2.50 1.00
9 Chromium-Nickel 0.30 19.00-30.00 6.00 15.00- 37.00 2.50 1.00
10 Nickel to 4% 0.15 .. . 0.55 0.8Q-4.00 1.70 1.00
11 Manganese- Molybdenum 0.17 ... 0.25-0.75 0.85 1.25- 2.25 1.00
12 Nickel-Chrome-Molybdenum 0.15 1.50 0.25- 0.80 1.25-2.80 0.75- 2.25 1.00
NOTE:
(1) Single values shown above are maximum.
Notebook Page 152

Practice Problem 029: OW-422 - A-No. [SOLUTION]
What would be the A-No. when welding ASME SA-312 Type TP316 pipe using an AWS A 5.4 E316
electrode?
ASME SA-312 Type TP316 can be found in Table QW/QB-422.
QW/QB-422 FERROU S/NONFERROUS P·NU MBERS (CONT'D)

Ferrous (CONT'Dl
Specified ISO
UNS Tensile, p. Group 15608
Spec. No. Type or Grade No. ksi (M Pal No. No. P-No. Group Nom inaI Comegsilion Product Form
5A·302 A K12021 75 (515) 3 101 1.1 Mn-0.5Mo Plate
5A·302 B K12022 80 (550) 101 1.2 Mn-O.SMo Plate
SA-302 c K12039 80 (550) 101 Mn-0.5Mo-0.5Ni Plate
SA-302 0 K12054 80 (550) 101 Mn-0.5Mo-0.75Ni Plate
5A·312 TPXM- 19 520910 100 (690) 8 102 8.3 22Cr- 13Ni-5Mn 5mls. & welded pipe
5A·312 TPXM- 11 521904 90 (620) 8 102 8.3 21Cr-6Ni-9Mn 5mls. & mldod pipe
SA-312 TPXM-29 524000 100 (690) 8 102 8.3 18Cr- 3NI-12Mn 5mls. & welded pipe
SA-312 TP304 530400 75 1515) 8 102 8.1 18Cr-8NI 5mls. & welded pipe
5A·312 TP304L 530403 70 (485) 8 102 8.1 18Cr--SNI Smls. & wt!lded pipe
5A·3l2 TP304H 530409 75 (515) 8 102 8.1 18Cr--SNI Smls. & wt!lded pipe
SA-312 TP304N 530451 80 (550) 8 102 8.1 18Cr--8Ni-N 5mls. & welded pipe
5A·312 TP304LN 530453 75 (515) 8 102 8.1 18Cr--8Ni-N 5mls. & w<!lded pipe
5A·312 530600 530600 78 (540) 8 102 8.1 l BC,....15NI-4SI 5mls. & wolded pipe
SA·312 530815 530815 87 (600) 102 8.2 21Cr-ll NI-N Smls. & welded pipe
5A-3!2 $32615 532615 80 (550) 102 8.1 18Cr- 20Ni- 5.55i 5mls. & welded pipe
5A·312 TP3095 530908 75 (515) 102 8.2 23Cr-12NI 5mls. & welded pipe
5A·312 TP309H 530909 75 (515) 8 102 8.2 23Cr-12NI 5mls. & w<!lded pipe
5A·312 TP309Cb 530940 75 (515) 102 8.2 23Cr- 12NI- Cb Smls. & welded pipe
SA-312 TP309HCb $30941 75 (515) 102 8.2 23Cr- 12Ni- Cb 5mls. & welded pipe
5A·312 TP3105 531008 75 (515) 102 8.2 25Cr-20Ni 5mls. & welded pipe
5A·312 TP310H 531009 75 (515) 8 102 8.2 25Cr--20NI 5mls. & wt!lded pipe
5A·312 TP310Cb 531040 75 (515) 8 102 8.2 25Cr-20NI-Cb 5mls. & welded pipe
SA-312 TP310HCb 53104 1 75 (515) 102 8.2 25Cr- 20NI-Cb Smls. & welded pipe
SA-312 TP310MoLN 531050 78 (540) 102 8.2 25Cr- 22Ni-2Mo-N Smls. & wetded pipe, t > X. in. (O mm)
5A·312 TP310MoLN 531050 84 IS80) 8 102 8.2 25Ce-22Nj.,.2Mo-N 5mls. & weld•d pipe, Is; 'l, ln. (6 mm)
5A· 312 531254 531254 95 (655) 8 102 8.2 20Cr-18NI-6Mo Smls. & welded pipe, t > '1i 6 in. (5 mm)
5A·312 531254 531254 98 (675) 102 8.2 Smls. & w<olded pipe, IS ~. ln. (5 mm>
SA-312 TP316 531600 75 <Sl5) 102 8.1 5mls. & welded pipe
SA-312 TP316L 531603 70 (485) 102 8.1 5mls. & welded pipe
5A·312 TP316H 531609 7S ISIS) 8 102 8.1 16C,-...12NI-2Mo Smls. & welded pipe
The A-No. can be found in Table QW-442.

QW-442
A-NUMBERS
Classification of Ferrous Weld Metal Analysis for Procedure Qualification
Analysis, % (Note (1 ))
Types of Weld
A-No. Deposit c Cr Mo Ni Mn Si
Mild Steel 0.20 1.60 1.00
2 Carbon-Molybdenum 0.15 050 0.40-0.65 1.60 1.00
3 Chrome (0.4% to 2%)-Molybdenum 0.15 0.4~2.00 0.4Q-0.65 1.60 1.00

4 Chrome (2% to 4%)-Molybdenum 0.15 2.0()..4.00 0.40-1.50 1.60 2.00
5 Chrome (4% to 10.5%)-Molybdenum 0.15 4.0~10.50 0.4~1.50 1.20 2.00
6 Chrome-Martensitic 0.15 11.0Q-15.00 0.70 2.00 1.00
7 Chrome-Ferritic 0.15 11.oo--30.00 1.00 1.00 3.00
cp Chromium-Nickel
Chromium-Nickel
0.15
0.30
14.50-30.00
19.0<l-30.00
4.00
6.00
7.5~15.00
15.00--37.00
2.50
2.50
1.00
1.00
10 Nickel to4% 0.15 0.55 0.8()..4.00 1.70 1.00
11 Manganese-Molybdenum 0.17 0.25-0.75 0.85 1.25-2.25 1.00
12 Nickel-Chrome-Molybdenum 0.15 1.50 0.25-0.80 1.25-2.80 0.75-2.25 1.00
NOTE:
1 Sin le values shown above are maximum.
Notebook Page 153

Practice Problem Q46: QW-253 SMA W WPS Variable - P-No. [SOLUTION]
For a SMAW WPS, what type ofWPS variable is a change in P-No. qualified?
QW-253
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential Nonessential
.1 ¢> Groove design X
Joints .10 ¢> Root spacing X
.11 ± Retainers X
.5 ¢ Group Number X
.6 T Limits impact X
QW-40.3
Base .8 !Qualified X
Metals
.9 "' t Pass > ~ in. (13 mm) X
.11 1:. P-No. gualified ( x)
.4 ¢> F-Number X
.5 ¢> A-Number X
.6 ¢ Diameter X
QW-404
Fi ller .7 ¢> Diameter > Y.a in. (6 mm) X
Metals
.12 ¢> Classification X
.30 ¢> t X
.33 ¢> Classification X
A change in P-No qualified for a SMAW WPS is an essential variable.
Notebook Page 154

Practice Problem 047: QW-253 SMAW WPS Variable- Electrode Classification [SOLUTION]
For a SMAW WPS, what type of WPS variable is a change in the electrode classification within an
SFA specification (i.e., no notch toughness testing)?
QW-253
Supplementary
Paragraph Brief of Variables Essential Essential <[onessenti~
.1 ¢> Groove design X
Joints .10 ¢> Root spacing X
.1 1 ± Retainers X
.5 t/J Group Number X
.6 T Limits i fTllad X
QW-403
Base .8 t/J T OJal ifi a:l X
Metals
.9 t Pass > }2 in. (13 mm) X
.11 t/J P-No. quali fia:l X
.4 F-Number X
.5
"' A-Number X
.6 "' Diameter X
QW-404
Filler .7
"' Diameter > ~ in. (6 mm) X
Metals
.12
"' Oassifi cation X
.30
"' t X
.33 "' Classification 0

.1
"'
+ Position X
QW-405
.2 Pootion X
Positions
.3 "' tt Vertical welding X
QW-406
.1 "' Decrease > 1oo•F (55. C) X
Preheat .2 t/J Preheat maint. X

.3 1ncrease > 1oo·F ( ss•c) (1P) X
.1 PWHT X
QW-407
.2 "' PWHT (T & T range) X
PWHT
.4 "' TLimits X
.1 > Heat input X
QW-409
Characteristics
.8 "' I & E range X
.1
"'t/> String/weave X
.5 t/> Method cleaning X
.6 t/> Method back gouge X
QW-410
.9 Multiple to single pass/side X X
Technique
.25 "'t/J Manual or automatic X
.26 ± Peening X
Legend:
+ Addition > Increase/greater than t Uphill ~ Forehand ¢>Change
- Deletion < Decrease/less than ! Downhill -+ Backhand
For SMAW WPS, a change in the electrode classification within an SFA specification (no notch
toughness testing) is a nonessential variable.
Notebook Paqe 155

Practice Problem 059: QW-354 Pipe Diameter Qualified [SOLUTION]
What type of WPQ variable is a change in pipe diameter beyond the range qualified for SAW?
QW-354
SEMIAUTOMATIC SUBM ~ Rr.l=n-ARC WELDING (SAW)
C[ssential Variabl~
Paragraph Brief of Variables
QW-403 .16 1!. PiE!e diameter

Base Metals .18 </> P- Number
QW-404 .15 ¢> F- Number

Fil ler Metals .30 t Weld deposi t
QW-405
.1 + Position
Positions
A change in pipe diameter beyond the range qualified for SAW is an essential variable.
Notebook Page 156

Practice Problem 061: QW-350 Tables and QW-416 Welder Performance Qualification [SOLUTION]
What type of variable is a change in F-No. for welder performance qualification when using SAW
and GTAW?

QW-416
WELDING VARIABLES
Welder Performance
(Essential

Paragraph 1 Brief of Variables QW-352 QW-353 QW-354 QW-355 QW-356 QW-357
QW-402
Joints .7 + Backing X
Base
Metal .18 ¢> P-N umber X X X X X X
.14 ± Filler X X X
.15 ¢> F-Number X X a:::> X a:::> X
.22 ± Inserts X X
QW-404
flux-cored
Metals
QW-405
Positions .3 ¢> t . ). Vert. welding X X X X

QW-408

QW-409
Welding Processes:
GMAW Gas metal-arc weld ing
GTAW Gas tu ngsten-arc welding
Legend:
¢> Change t Thickness
+ Addition t Uphill
- Deletion ..). Downhill
NOTES:
(2) Flux-cored arc welding as shown in QW-355, with or w ithout additional shielding from an externally supplied gas or gas mixture, is included.
A change ofF-No. is an essential variable when using SAW and GTAW.
@ Codes and Standards Training Institute (CAST!)
Notebook Paoe 157

Practice Problem 062: QW-350 Tables and QW-416 Welder Performance Qualification [SOLUTION]
What type of variable is a change from downward to upward in the progression specified for a
vertical weld pass for welder performance qualification when using SAW?

QW-416
WELDING VARIABLES
Welder Performance
Essential

Paragraph 1 Brief of Variables QW-3S2 QW-353 QW-354 QW-355 QW-356 QW-357
QW-402
Joi nts .7 + Backing X
Base
Metal .18 ¢> P-Number X X X X X X
.1 4 ± Filler X X X
.1 5 ¢> F-Number X X X X X X
.22 ± Inserts X X
QW-404
flux-cored
Metals
.1 + Posit ion X X X X X X
QW-405
Pos itions .3 ¢> i .J.. Vert. welding X X X X

QW-408

QW-409
Welding Processes:
OFW Oxyfuel gas weldi ng
SMAW Shielded metal-arc weld ing
SAW Submerged-a rc welding
Legend:
¢ Change t Thickness
+ Addition i Uphill
- Deletion .J.. Downhill
NOTE$:
A change from downward to upward progression specified for a vertical weld pass for welder
pe1formance qualification using SAW is not listed in ASME Section IX.
Notebook Page 158

For a SMAW PQR groove weld pipe test coupon 5/8 in. thickness, P-No. 1 to P-No. 1 base metal, in the 6G position, with a single pass
and 250°F preheat and a 1100°F PWHT, what is the maximum WPS thickness of base metal that can be qualified? (Round to
0.001 in.)
QW-451.1
in. Cmml Deposited Weld Metal, Qualified, Side Face Root
~nd(2)] in. Cmm)
Thickness T of Test Coupon, Welded, Tension, Bend, Bend, Bend,
in. (mm) M in. Max. [ Notes (1) and (2)) QW-150 QW-160 QW-160 QW-160
Less than l,s. 0 (1. 5) T 2T 2t 2 2 2
l,s.o to 18 (1.5 to 10), incl. l,s.6 (1.5) 2T 2t 2 Note (5) 2 2
Over 18 <10), but less than ~ (19) ~ 2t 2 Note (5 ) 2 2
~ (19) to less t han 1~ (38) ~b (5) 2T 2 [ Note (4)) 4

~ (19) to less than l ~ (38) ~6 (5) 2T 2 [Note (4)) 4
1 ~ (38) t o 6 (150), Incl. ~0 ( 5) 8 (200) [Note (3)) 2 [N ote (4)) 4

1 ~ (38) to 6 (150 ), incl. ~6 ( 5) 8 (200) [ Note (3)) 2 [Note (4)] 4
Over 6 (150) ~0 (5) 1.33 T 2twhen t< 34 (19) 4

Over 6 (150) ~6 ( 5) 1.33 T 1.33 Twhen t '2. ~ (19) 4
NOTES:
(1) The f ollowing variables f urther restrict the limits shown in this table when they are referenced in QW-250 for the process under considerationCQW-403 .9)QW-4 03.10, QW-404.32, and
QW-407.4. A lso, QW -202. 2, QW-2 02.3, and QW-202.4 provide exemptions that supersede t he limits of this table.
(2) For combi nation of welding procedures, see QW-200.4.
(3 ) For the SMAW, SAW, GMAW, PAW, and GTAW we lding processes on ly; otherwise per Note (1 ) or 2 T, or 2t, whichever is applicable.rQW-403.9 For single-pass or multipass welding i n
(4) See QW-151.1, QW-151.2, and QW-151.3 for deta ils on mu lt iple specimens when coupon th icknesses are over 1 i n. (25 mm). which any pass is greater than l/2 in.< 13 mm) thick. an
ihncrea~ei_Jiin. base metal thickness beyond l. l times that of
(5) Four side-bend tests may be substitut ed for the required face- and root-bend tests, when t hickness Tis %in. (l O mm) and over.
1
t c qua ' catton test coupon.
Since a single pass weld is made that is greater than 1/2 in., then QW-403.9 in Note (1) must be applied.
T = 5/8 in. or 0.625 in. and applying QW-403.10 with a maximum qualified thickness of l.lT, then the maximum qualified WPS
~~u"fi.Ju::::>::> becomes 1.1 x 0.625 in.= 0.688 in .
WPS thickness = 3/16 in. to 0.688 in. or 0.188 in. to 0.688 in.
Notebook Paqe 159

For a SAW PQR groove weld plate test coupon 5/8 in. thickness, P-No. 3 to P-No. 3 base metal, with a 250°F preheat and a normali
PWHT, what is the WPS thickness range of base metal that can be qualified? (Round to nearest 0.001 in.)
QW-451.1
Base Metal, Qualified, <Tension and Guided-Bend Tests) [Note (2)]
in. <mm) Side Face Root
Deposited Weld Metal, Qualified,
Th ickness T of Test Coupon, Welded,
~nd(2)] in. (mm) Tension, Bend, Bend, Bend,
in. (mm) Min. Max. [ Notes (1) and (2)] QW-150 QW-160 QW-160 QW-160
Less t han 'l;6 (1.5) T 2T 2t 2 ... 2 2
'l;6 to ~ (1.5 to 10), incl. 'l;6 (1.5) 2T 2t 2 Note (5) 2 2
Over ~ (10), but less than ~ (19) 2t 2 Note (5) 2 2
~ (19) to less than 1~ (38) 2T 2t when t < ~ (19) 2 (Note (4)) 4

~ (19) to less than 1~ (38) 2T 2Twhen t?. ~ (19) 2 ( Note (4)] 4
1 ~ (38) to 6 050), incl. 8 (200) CNote (3)] 2twhen t < 3;.. (19) 2 ( Note (4)] 4
1 ~ (38) to 6 050), incl. 8 (200) CNote (3)] 8 (200) [N ote (3)] when t?. 3;.. (19) 2 [ Note (4)] 4
Over 6 050) 116 (5) l.33T 2t when t < ~ (19) 2 [ Note (4)] 4
Over 6 (150) 116 (5) 1.33 r 1.33 Twhen t?. ~ ( 19) 2 [ Note (4)] 4
... ~ low· g variables further restrict the l imits shown in this table when they are referenced in QW-250 for the process under consideration: QW-403.9, QW-403.10, QW-404.32, and
QW-407.4. lso, QW-202.2, QW-202.3, and QW-202.4 provide exemptions that supersede the limits of th is table. .-
QW-407.4 For ferrous base metals other than P-No. 7.
(2) For com · l ion of welding procedures, see QW-200.4. P-No. 8. and P-No.45. when a procedure quali fication test
(3) For the SM AW, PAW, and GTAW welding processes on ly; otherwise per Note ( 1) or 2 T, or 2t, wh ichever is applicable coupon receives a postweld heat treatment exce.eding the
(4) See QW-151.1, QW-151.2, and QW-15 . ecimens when coupon thicknesses are over 1 in. (25 mm). upper transfom1ation temperature or a solution heat treat-
(5) Four side-bend tests may be substituted for the requ ired face- and root-bend tests, when thtc ness ment for P-No. IOH materials. the maximum qual ified base
metal thickness. T. shall not exceed 1.1 times the thickness
of the test coupon.
Since a PWHT that exceeded the upper transformation temperature was made, then QW-407.4 in Note (1) must be applied.
With T = 5/8 in. or 0.625 in. and applying QW-407.4 with a maximum qualified thickness of 1.1T, the maximum qualified WPS thickness
becomes 1.1 x 5/8 in. or 1.1 x 0.625 in. = 0.688 in.
WPS thickness of 3/16 in. to 0.688 in. or 0.188 in. to 0.688 in.
:e: ,k JE ,Q
..
Practice Problem 078: QW-452.1 (a)- Welder Performance Qualification Tests [SOLUTION]
What tests must be performed to qualifY a welder performance coupon that has a diameter of NPS 4
QN-452.1 (a)
TEST SPECIMEN S
Face Bend Root Bend
Visua l Side Bend QN-462.3(al or QN -462.3(al or
Thickness of Weld Examination QN -462.2 QN -462.3(b) QW-462.3(bl
Metal, in. (mm) per QN-302.4 [ Note ( 1)] [ Notes (1), (2)] [ Notes ( 1), (2)]
Less than% ( 1Ol X 1

%(10) to less than X 2 [Note (3)] Note {3) Note {3)
% (19)
%(19) and over X 2
GENERAL NOTE : The "Thicknessof WeldMetal" isthetotal V\'e"l d metal thickness deposited by all welders
and all processes in the test coupon exclusive of the "'-€1d reinforcement.
NOTES:
(1) To qualify using positions SG or 6G, a tota l of four bend specimens are required. To qualify using a
combination of 2G and SG in a single test coupon, a total of six bend specimens are required. See
QN -302.3. The type of bend test shall be based on weld metal thickness.
(2) Coupons tested by face and root bends shall be limited to weld deposit made by one welder with one or
two processes or two welders with one process each. Wel d deposit by each welder and each process shall
be present on the convex surface of the appropriate bent specimen.
(3) One face and root bend may be substituted for the two side bends.
Either two side bends or from Note (3) one face and one root bend.
Notebook Paqe 161

Practice Problem 080: QW-452.3 - Welder Performance Qualification for Groove-Weld Diameter
[SOLUTION]
What is the qualified diameter range for a welder performance groove weld coupon that has a
diameter of NPS 4 and is welded using SMAW?
QW-452.3
GROCNE-WELD DI AMETER LIMITS
Outside Diameter
Qualified, ln. ( m m)
Outside Diameter
of Test CoupoQ l n. (mm) Min. Max.
L ess than 1 (25) Soze welded Unlimited
1 (25) to 2 74l (73) 1 (25) Unlimited
Over 27.\l (73)
2-7/8 in. (NPS 2-1/2) to unlimited
Notebook Page 162

Practice Problem 082: QW-452.3 - Welder Performance Qualification for Groove-Weld Diameter
[SOLUTION]
What are the qualified position(s) from a pipe groove weld performance test in the 2G and 5G
positions, using SMAW for fillet welding plate and pipe intended for low temperature service?
From ASME Section IX, Table QW-461.9, for a groove weld on a pipe qualified in the 2G and 5G
positions.
QW-461.9
PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION - POSITI ON AND DIAMETER LIMIT ATI ONS
(Within the Other Limitatiom of QW-303)
Position and Type Weld Qualified [Note (1)]
GroOYe
Plate and Pipe
Qualification Test Fillet
Over 24 in. Pipe 24 in.
Weld Position (610 mm) 0.0. (610 mm) 0.0. Plate and Pipe
Plate ·· Groove 1G F F (Note (2)] F

2G F.H F,H [Note (2)] F.H
3G F,V F (Note (2)] F.H.V
4G F.O F [Note {2) ] F.H.O
3G and 4G F,V,O F (Note (2) ] All
2G, 3G. and 4G Al l F.H (Note (2) ] A ll
Special Positions (SP) SP,F SP.F SP.F
Plate -- Fillet 1F .. . . .. F [Note (2) ]
2F .. . . .. F.H (Note (2) ]
3F .. . . .. F.H.V [Note (2) I
4F .. . . .. F.H.O [Note (2) I
3F and 4F .. . . .. Al l [Note (2)]
Special Positions (SP) ... . .. SP,F [Note (2))
Pipe ·• Groove I Note ( 3) I 1G F F F
2G F,H F.H F.H
5G F.V,O F,V.O Al l
6G Al l Al l Al l
2G and 5G All All QIC>
Special Positions (SP) SP.F SP,F SP.F
Pipe -- Fillet (Note (3) I 1F . .. ... F
2F ..' ... F.H
2FR . .. ... F.H
4F ... . .. F.H.O
SF .. . . .. Al l
Special Positions {SP) .. . . .. SP,F
NOTES:
{1) Posit ions of we lding as shown in QW-461 .1 and QW-461.2.
F = Flat
H = Horizonta l
V = Vert1cal
0 = Overheacl
(2) Pipe 21-!! in. (73 nun) 0.0. and over.
(3) See diameter restrictions in QW-452 .3. QW-452.4. and QW-452 .6.
Notebook Paqe 163

Notebook Page 164

Introduction to Steels
The expressions ferrous and nonferrous materials are used to divide metals into their two major
categories. Their definitions are found in ASTM A941 Standard Terminology Relating to Steel,
Stainless Steel, Related Alloys, and Ferroalloys, as follows.
Ferrous material, n- metals a nd alloys that contain iron as the principle component.
Nonferrous material, n-metals and alloys that do not contain iron as the principle
component.
The term ferrous comes from the Latin word 'ferrum' meaning iron.
There are a great many different ferrous materials, but they can be divided into three basic
categories, namely wrought iron, cast iron, and steel.
Wrought iron is a relatively pure iron containing non-metallic slag inclusions, which is no longer
commercially produced. Modern wrought iron products are actually made of low carbon steel mixed
with steelmaking slag. The term wrought product is defined in ASTM E1806 Standard Practice for
Sampling Steel and Iron for Determination of Chemical Composition, as follows:
Wrought product, n-item of steel which has been subject to deformation by rolling,
drawing, forging, or some other method, for example, a bar, billet, plate, strip, tube,
or wire.
Cast irons contain much higher carbon and silicon levels than steels, typically 2-4% carbon and 1-3%
silicon, however, 2% carbon is generally considered to be the dividing line between steel and cast
iron. These comprise another category of ferrous materials, which are intended to remain in their
cast product form as the final desired shape. The definition for cast iron is given in ASTM A644
Standard Terminology Relating to Iron Castings, as follows .
Cast iron , n- a generic term for a series of alloys primarily of iron, carbon, and
silicon in which the carbon is in excess of the amount which can be retained in solid
solution in austenite at the eutectic temperature.
All industrial metals start their production life as a liquid, then either casted or made into a powder.
The casting may remain as a casting (e.g., cast steel valve body) or can be further wor ked into a
wrought product, e.g., hot-rolled steel plate, forging, extruded wire, etc., as illustrated in Figure 1.
©Codes and Standards T raining Institute (CAST!)
Notebook Paqe 165

Liquid Metal
Casting Casting Powdered Metal
Deformation (work) by:

rolling, forging, drawing, etc.
Finished Product
(forging, pipe, plate, etc.)
Figure 1 - Manufacturing path for commercial metal products.
Wrought Products
A wrought product typically starts as a semi-finished product that is either hot rolled, forged, or
casted to rough dimensions, e.g., hot-rolled or forged blooms, billets, or slabs.
The next step in steel production would be to make the f'inished product by hot rolling, cold-rolling,
forging, or other types of working to a product specification with dimensional tolerances
requirements, e.g. forging, pipe, plate, etc.
The terms long product and fiat product are commonly used in the steel vocabulary and are defined
in ASTM A1040 Standard Guide for Specifying Harmonized Standard Grade Compositions for
Wrought Carbon, Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steels, as follows.
Flat product, n-generic term describing wrought sheet and strip.
Long product, n- generic term describing wrought bars, rod, wire, rail, tubing
(welded and seamless), plate, and pipe.
Discussion-Product. forms such as C shapes, HP shapes, L shapes, M shapes, MC
shapes, S shapes, W shapes, and sheet piling are considered long products. Such
product forms are produced to mechanical properties and are not normally produced
to the chemical compositions listed in this guide.
Practice Problem 01: Ferrous Material Definitions

What is a ferrous material?
a) an iron alloy that has at least 50% iron

b) an iron or steel alloy that has at least 50% iron
c) a cast iron or steel alloy that has at least 50% iron
d) metals and alloys that contain iron as the principle component
e) metals and alloys that contain at least 50% iron
©Codes and Standard s Training Institute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 166

VVroughtironis __________________________________________________________
a) widely used by industry today to produce structural products

b) mixture oflow-carbon steel with steelmaking slag
c) slag inclusion free
d) deoxidized iron
e) rimmed iron
Practice Problem 03 : Ferrous Material Definitions

Which of the following is not a wrought product?
a) ASTM A516 Grade 70 carbon steel pressure vessel plate

b) ASTM A106 Grade B carbon steel pipe
c) ASTM A276 UNS 830400 stainless steel bar
d) ASTM A105 carbon steel forging
e) ASTM A216 Grade VVCB carbon steel casting
' '

What is the typical carbon content of cast iron?
a) 0.8%C
b) up to 2% C
c) 2 to 4% c
d) up to 4%C
e) up to 6.67% C
~ '

Mter hot-rolling a slab to make a plate it becomes a--------------------------
a) semi-finished product without dimensional tolerance requirements

b) semi-finished product with dimensional tolerance requirements
c) finished product without dimensional tolerance requirements
d) finished product with dimensional tolerance requirements
e) long product with dimensional tolerance requirements
©Codes and Standards Training Institute (CASTI}
Notebook Paoe 167

Steels
Steels are ferrous alloys whose most important component element next to iron itself is carbon.
ASTM A941 defines steel as follows.
steel, n- a material that conforms to a specification that requires, by mass percent,

more iron than any other element and a maximum carbon content of generally less
than 2.
Discussion- The iron content requirement is not normally stated in the specification
and is not normally determined by chemical analysis, but is taken to be 100 % minus
the sum of the mean values permitted by the specification for all other elements
having a specified range or a specified maximum. For conformance purposes, this
calculated value for iron is compared on an individual basis to the mean values
permitted by the specification for each of the other elements having a specified range
or a specified maximum. Some chromium-containing steels may contain more than 2
% carbon; however, 2 % carbon is generally considered to be the demarcation
between steel and cast iron.
Carbon Steels
The carbon contents of steels are low, usually below 1%, but th e presence and amount of carbon in
the steel have a major effect on its behavior in service. By far the most common type of steel is
carbon steel, defined in ASTM A941 as follows.
carbon steel, n-a steel that conforms to a specification that prescribes a maximum
limit, by heat analysis in mass percent, of not more than: 2.00 for carbon and 1.65 for
manganese, but does not prescribe a minimum limit for chromium, cobalt,
molybdenum, nickel, niobium (columbium), tungsten (wolfram), vanadium, or
zirconium.
Discussion- Except as required above, it is permissible for carbon steel specifications

to prescribe limits (minimum or maximum, or both) for each specified alloying
element, subject to the following restrictions for the heat a nalysis limits in mass
percent:
a) for wrought carbon steel products, the specified maximum limit is not to
exceed: 0.10 for aluminum, 0.60 for silicon, and 0.050 for titanium;
b) for carbon steel castings, the specified maximum limit is not to exceed: 0.10
for aluminum, 1.00 for silicon, and 0.050 for titanium.
The manganese, silicon, and aluminum are added to compensate for the presence of the impurities
sulfur, oxygen and nitrogen (see Roles of Alloying Elements for more details).
There are no standard definitions for the terms: low-carbon steel, medium-carbon steel, or high-
carbon steel since they are relative terms depending on the intended application. The following
example compares the carbon content of an automotive sheet specification (ASTM A1008) versus
pressure vessel plate specification (ASTM A516).
©Codes and Standards T raining Institute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 168

c Mn p s Si
0.030 0.035
0. 10 max. 0.60 max.
max. max.
0.035 0.035
50 <t ~ 100 0.30 max. 0.85 - 1.20 0.15 - 0.40
rature
A1008/A1008M Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-
Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable
Data Source: Exce from ASTM to Steel Online Database.
In the case of the automotive sheet typically used for car bodies, carbon content is restricted to
0.10% maximum, wh ereas the pressure vessel plate specification allows 3 times the amount of
car bon (0.30% maximum). That is, a low-car bon steel in a pressure vessel application is high-carbon
steel in an automotive application, demonstrating that these terms are relative to t heir application.
However, since these terms are commonly used in industry, the following definitions will be applied
in this text .
• low-carbon steel (mild steel) ~ 0.30% C

• medium-carbon steel 0.31% to 0.50% C
• high-carbon steel > 0.50% C
Caution: it is emphasized that these are rules of thumb and not standard definitions.
Example 07: Defining Low Carbon Steel

ASME B&PV Code Section VIII Division 1
UCS-5(c) Carbon or low alloy steel having a carbon content of more than 0.35% by heat
analysis shall not be used in welded construction or be shaped by oxygen cutting.
In accordance with UCS-5(c) and the above definitions, most of the weldable carbon
steels permitted for use in pressure vessel construction would be low-carbon steels,
although those over 0.30% C would be classified as medium carbon steels.
Practice Problem 08: Steels

What is the maximum carbon (C) content of steel?
a) 0.8%C
b) < 2%C
c) ~4%C
d) ~ 6.67%C
e) 2to 4% C
Notebook Paqe 169

What is the maximum manganese (Mn) content of carbon steel?
a) 0.65%Mn
b) 1.00% Mn
c) 1.65% Mn
d) 2.00%Mn
e) 2.65%Mn
Notebook Page 170

Steel Making
Oxygen in Steels
Liquid steel coming from the steelmaking furnace contains high levels of dissolved oxygen which
may or m ay not be r emoved before the steel is cast, either in a continuous caster or as ingots.
Typical deoxidants employed for this purpose are silicon (in the form offerrosilicon) and aluminum.
The basic oxygen furnace (BOF) process uses 25-35% recycled steel scrap metal with th e balance of
pig iron to make new steel. It converts t his mixture into steel by blowing oxygen on the liquid melt
which lowers the carbon content to the required specified amount. The oxygen blown through a long
lance onto the liquid melt creates an exothermic reaction which gives off heat and keeps the melt
liquid. The longer the oxygen is blown on the melt, the lower the resulting carbon content of the
finished steel.
Tilt to Add Scrap

and Pig Iron
Tilt to Teem
into Laddie
Basic Refractory
Lining Pig Iron
and Scrap
Figure 2- Cross-section of a BOF; the spout on the right is for teeming the steel;
the opening at the top is where the oxygen lance enters.
Hist ory: the BOF process was developed in 1948 by Robert Durrer and commercialized in 1952 by
Austrian VOEST and OAMG. The BOF L-D converter was named after the Austrian towns of Linz
and Donawitz.
When oxygen is allowed to remain in the liquid steel, it reacts with carbon forming porosity
(blowholes) of carbon oxide gases, j .e., no deoxidants are added. Since the path of least resistance for
these gases to escape is along the mould wall, these steels have an outer rim of relatively pure iron,
low in carbon, phosphorus and sulfur. Consequently, these steels are known as rimmed steels, and
when the rimming action is controlled by capping the mould, they are called capped steels, and both
terms are defined in ASTM A941 as follows.
NotP.book PMP 171

rimmed steel, n-a steel that contained sufficient oxygen to generate carbon
monoxide at the boundary between the solid metal and the remaining molten metal
during solidification, resulting in an outer layer low in carbon.
capped steel, n-a rimmed steel in which, during ingot solidification, the rimming
action was limited by mechanical or chemical means.
The higher purity outer rim makes rimmed and capped steels more suitable for the production of low
carbon steel sheet with good surface quality, e.g., automobile bodies and home appliances (fridges,
stoves, washer, etc.).
D eoxidation of Steels
The removal of oxygen from the steel by adding silicon and aluminum is known as deoxidation and
stops the rimming action (gas escape) which is said to "kill" the s teel. Killed steel is sometimes
called silicon-killed steel or aluminum killed steel depending of the deoxidant used, whereas
semikilled steel has less deoxidant added. Both terms are defined in ASTM A941 as follows.
killed steel, n-a steel deoxidized to such a level that essentially no reaction occurred
between carbon and oxygen during solidification.
semikilled steel, n-an incompletely deoxidized steel that contained sufficient oxygen
to form enough entrapped carbon monoxide during solidification to offset
solidification shrinkage.
Example 010: Killed Steel- ASTM A516

4.1 Steelmaking Practice- The steel shall be killed and shall conform to the fine austenitic grain
size requirement of Specification A20/A20M.
Fully killed steel is relatively homogeneous in its chemical composition and properties and is
commonly used in carbon and alloy steels for pressure equipment service, forgings, carburizing, etc.
Whereas semikilled steel is typically used for low to medium carbon steels for structural applications
where some dissolved oxygen is permitted.
Capped steels are intermediate between rimmed and semi-killed steels and are suitable for sheet,
strip, wire, and bars with carbon levels above 0.15% (approximately).
Notebook Page 172

0.045 max.
0.035 max. 0.10 min.
0.025 max. 0.10 min.
Grade 6
A53/A53M Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
ASTM A106/A106M Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service
ASTM A333/A333M Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe for Low-Temperature Service
0·9
• Minimum elongation can be determined using e = 625 000 [1 940] A0·2 tu
Data to Steel Online Database.
Example 012: ASME 831.3 Use of Deoxidation Criteria for Impact Testing Requirements
Charpy V-notch impact testing requirements are based on fully deoxidized versus other than fully
deoxidized steel, as shown in Table 323.3.5.
Table 323.3.5 Minimum Required ( harpy V-Notch Impact Values

Energy [Note (2))
Fully Deoxidized Other Than Fu lly
Steels Deoxidized Steels
Specified Minimum No. of Specimens
Tensile Strength [Note (1)) Joules ft-lbf Joules ft-lbf
(a) Carbon and Low Alloy Steels
448 MPa (65 ksi) and less Average for 3 specimens 18 13 14 10

Minimum for 1 specimen 14 10 10 7
Over 448 to 517 MPa (75 ksi) Average for 3 specimens 20 15 18 13

Minimum for 1 specimen 16 12 14 10
Over 517 but not incl. 656 MPa (95 ksi) Average for 3 specimens 27 20
M inimum for 1 specimen 20 15
Lateral Expansion
656 MPa and over [Note {3)) Minimum for 3 specimens 0.38 mm (0.01 5 in.)
(b) Steels in P-Nos. 6, 7, and 8 Minimum for 3 specimens 0.38 mm (0.015 in.)
NOTES:
(1) See para. 323.3.S(d) for permissible retests.
(2) Energy values in this Table are for standard size specimens. For subsize specimens, these values shall be multiplied by the ratio of the
actual specimen width to that of a full-size specimen, 10 mm (0.394 in.).
{3) For bolting of this strength level in nominal sizes M 52 (2 in.) and under, the impact requirements of ASTM A 320 may be applied. For
bolting over M 52, requirements of this Table shall apply.
Notebook Paae 173

D esulfurization of Steels
The s ulfur in steel originates as impurities in coal, the material which, after it is converted to coke,
is used as the fuel and r eductant in the iron blast furnace. Conventionally, the addition of
manganese compensates for the sulfur in steel, the sulfur being tied up as manganese sulfides,
rather than iron sulfides which would be molten at hot rolling temperatures, causing the steel to be
brittle or hot short.
However manganese sulfide inclusions tend to degrade the fracture toughness, so modern blast
furnace iron and steels are subjected to various types of desulfurization involving, for example, the
injection of agents such as calcium carbide or calcium silicide into the molten iron or steel to remove
th e sulfur. Thus many modern steels have much lower sulfur conte nts than the levels which were
acceptable several decades ago, and wh ich are still reflected in the specifications for standard grades
of steel.
For example, ASTM A516 Grade 70 steel made for oil and gas sour (HzS) service typically will have
sulphur contents below 0.002%, whereas this s teel would typically contain 0.015% sulphur.
Cleanliness in Steels
The number, size, and distribution of nonmetallic inclusions permitted in a steel are commonly
specified in material specifications, e.g., CSA Z245 pipeline steels in sour service (H 2S).
ASTM E45 Standard Test Methods for Determining the Inclusion Content of Steel describes a
number of methods for determining the s ize, shape, quantity, and type of nonmetallic inclusions in
steel, and for est ablishing a quantitative rating for the cleanliness of the material being examined,
for both macroscopic a nd microscopic methods.
Nonmetallic inclusions can be classified in to two groups:
• exogenous, and
• indigenous.
Exogenous inclusions are those of external origination, such as e ntrapped slag, e.g., pieces of
refractory material from the ladle linings. Indigenous inclusions are those resulting from chemical
reactions that occur in the molten metal during the steelmaking process, e.g., iron sulphide
inclusions.
Nonmetallic inclusions can lead to:
• anisotropic mechanical properties,

• low ductility,
• poor fracture toughness,
• hot cracking in weld,
• fissuring in weld heat-affected zones,
• lamellar tearing,
• cracking in environmentally sensit ive service (sour service), etc.
©Codes and Standards Training Insti tute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 174

Steels with very low amounts of nonmetallic inclusions are commonly called "clean steels", whereas
steels with high nonmetallic inclusion content are said to be "dirty steels".
Example 013: Clean Steels

Chemical Composition of A516 Grade 70
c Mn p s Si
< 1/2 in. > 1/2 in. to 2 in. > 2 in. to 4 in. > 4 in. to 8 in. > 8 in. ~ 1/2 in. > 1/2 in. --- --- ---
0.85- 0.85- 0.025 0.025 0.15-
0.27 0.28 0.30 0.31 0.31
1.20 1.20 max. max. 0.40

Which of the following is a rimmed steel?
a) fully deoxidized st eel

b) partially deoxidized steel
c) steel with a minimum requirement of Al
d) steel with no deoxidant added
e) steel with a minimum requirement of Si
. -
Which of the following is a killed steel?
a) fully deoxidized steel

b) partially deoxidized steel
c) steel with no deoxidant added
d) steel with a minimum requirement of 10.5% Cr
e) steel with a minimum requirement of 0.10% C
~__..,.,.....,.........., --- ,. . . . -.....--,.. . ...,.. - _,_,_--,- ...,.,._ ~ ~
Practice Problem 016: Steels ·

Nonmetallic inclusions can be classified as:
a) always defects
b) never defects
c) exogenous
d) endogenous
e) both c and d
©Codes and Standards Training Institute (CAST !)
Notebook Paoe 175

Heat of Steel
When steels are made in batches they are given the term heat of steel, where a chemical analysis is
commonly performed for each heat, and is given a heat number, defined in ASTM A941 as follows.
Heat , n- a generic term denoting a specific lot of steel, based upon steelmaking and
casting considerations.
Discussion- where it is necessary to be more definitive, the following more specific

terms are used: primary h eat , multiple heat, and remelted heat. In product
specifications, the term heat generally is used, without qualification, to mean the
primary, multiple, or remelted heat, whichever is applicable.
Heat analysis, n- the chemical a nalysis determined by the steel producer as being
representative of a specific heat of steel.
Discussion- where the analysis reported by the steel producer is not sufficiently
complete for conformance with the heat analysis requirements of the applicable
product specification to be fully assessed, the manufacturer may complete the
assessment of conformance with such heat analysis requirements by using a product
analysis for the specified elements that were not r eported by the steel producer,
provided that product analysis tolerances are not applied and the heat analysis is not
altered.
Heat number, n-the alpha, numeric, or alphanumeric designator used to identifY a

specific heat of steel.
Product analysis, n- a chemical analysis of a specimen taken from the semi-finished

product or the finished product.
Notebook Page 176

Residual Elements and Un specified Elem ents in Steels
The steel making industry was one of the first major industries to lead the industrial revolution.
Although it was one of the main polluters of the environment, it was also one of the first green
industries by recycling used steel products.
For example, when an old car or washing machine is recycled, there will be copper wire in the scrap
metal from electrical wiring, solder (tin-lead-antimony) from electrical connections, chromium
plating on nameplates, and other metals. These residual metals end up in ASTM A106 pipe, ASTM
A516 plate, etc. Consequently, ASTM A941 defines residual element and unspecified element, as
follows.
Residual element, n-in steel, a specified or unspecified element , not intentionally

added, originating in the raw materials, refractories, or surrounding atmospheres
used in steel making.
Unspecified element, n- in steel, a n element not controlled to a s pecified minimum,

maximum, or range, in accordance with the requirements of the applicable product
specification.
-
Example 017: ASTM Unspecified Elements
ASTM A999 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe:
6.2. ~ For steels ordered under product specifications referencing this specification of
general requirements, the steel shall not contain an unspecified element, other than
nitrogen for stainless steels, for the ordered grade to the extent that the steel conforms to
the requirements of another grade for which that element is a specified element having a
required minimum content.

Example Q18: ASTM Unspecified Elements
ASTM A20/A20M, paragraph 7.1.3 and Table 1 details the requirements for unspecified elements as
follows.
7 .1.3 Heat analyses shall conform to the heat analysis requirements of the applicable
product specification for the applicable grade, class, and type. In addition, for elements
that are listed in Table 1 but are not specified or restricted in the applicable product
specification for the applicable grade, class, and type, heat analyses shall conform to the
applicable heat analysis limits given in Table 1.
Table 1 Limits on Elements

Copper, max%a Heat analysis 0.40
Product analysis 0.43
Nickel, max%a Heat analysis 0.40
Chromium, max%a. b Heat analysis 0.30
Molybdenum, max%a, b Heat analysis 0.12
Vanadium, max%C Heat analysis 0.03
Columbium, max%d Heat analysis 0.02
Titanium, max%e Heat analysis 0.03
Boron, max% Heat analysis 0.0010
..
a In add1bon for each heat, based upon the heat analys1s, the sum of copper, mckel,
chromium, and molybdenum shall not exceed 1.00 %, unless one or more of those
elements are specified or restricted by the applicable product specification for the
applicable grade, class, and type.
b In addition for each heat, based upon the heat analysis, the sum of chromium and
molybdenum shall not exceed 0.32 %, unless one or both of those elements are specified or
restricted by the applicable product specification for the applicable grade, class, and type.
c By agreement between the purchaser and the supplier, the heat analysis limit for vanadium
is permitted to be increased to a value not higher than 0.1 0 %, and the product analysis
limit for vanadium is permitted to be increased to a value not higher than 0. 11 %.
d By agreement between the purchaser and the supplier, the heat analysis limit for
columbium is permitted to be increased to a value not higher that 0.05 %, and the product
analysis limit for columbium is permitted to be increased to a value not higher than 0.06 %.
e By agreement between the purchaser and the supplier, the heat analysis limit for titanium is
permitted to be increased to a value not higher than 0.04 %, and the product analysis limit
for titanium is permitted to be increased to a value not higher than 0.05 %.
Notebook Page 178

Use of Ellipsis( ...) in ASTM Standards
Similar to an unspecified element, an ellipsis in ASTM standards is used to identify when a

requirement is not addressed in a standard. ASTM A941 defines an ellipsis as follows .
Ellipsis, n- in a tabular ent ry, three periods (. .. ) that indicate that th ere is n o
requirement.
0.30 max. 0.29-1.06 0.025 max.
Note: along with th e use of ellipsis, the st eel also h as meet the referenced gener al requirement
st andard where there may be maximum limits set for unspecified elements (e.g., A516/A516M
references A20/A20M) and definitions for the alloy category, carbon steel, low-alloy steel, alloy steel,
etc.
Practice Problem Q20: Steels

Which of the following defines a residual element in a steel?
a ) three periods (. ..) that indicate that there is no r equirement.

b) an element not controlled to a specified minimum, maximum, or range, in a ccor dance
with the requirements of the a pplicable product specification
c) a specified or unspecified element, not intentionally a dded, originating in the raw
materials, refractories, or surrounding atmospheres used in steel making
d) a and b
e) a orb
l\lnt~hl"'\nlt o~no 1'70

The Roles of Alloying Elements
As mentioned in the preceding discussion, the alloying elements in steels play many different roles
in determining the microstructure, properties and response to processing including heat treatment.
Alloying elements generally lower the eutectoid carbon content and can raise or lower the eutectoid
tern perature.
Some elements are austenite formers and stabilizers, while others are ferrite formers and
stabilizers. Some are strong carbide formers while others prefer, to a greater or lesser extent, to
dissolve in solution in ferrite.
Note: there is no such thing as a pearlite former or cementite former since pearlite is not a ph ase
and cementite is a compound of iron-carbide.
The presence of several elements together can give synergistic effects, or their individual effects can be
fully or partially cancelled. Table 1 shows a general summary of the alloying element effects on steel.
Carbon is the most important alloying element in steel. It is an austenite stabilizer, and the much
increased solubility of carbon in austenite, as compared to ferrite, provides the basis for all the heat
treating processes. In ferrite, carbon solubility is very low so that carbon exists in steels mainly as
carbides (in plain carbon steels as the iron carbide, cementite). Increasing the carbon content of
steels tends to increase their tensile and yield strengths (by increasing the amount of carbide
present), hardness, and hardenabilities, while ductility, toughness, workability, weldability and
machinability are reduced.
Manganese is normally present in all commercial steels. It combines with sulfur impurities to for m
particles of manganese sulfide (or iron-manganese sulfide), thereby avoiding the possibility of the
formation of the detrimental iron sulfide phase (iron sulfides are brittle, and furthermore they melt
at low temperatures causing the steel to be hot short). Manganese is an a ustenite stabilizer and it is
not a strong carbide former. It contributes to strength by solution strengthening the ferrite and
r efining the pearlite. Another major role of manganese is in strongly increasing hardenability,
especially when present in amounts greater than 0.8%. It also acts as a deoxidizer, and oxygen is
frequently present in its sulfides which are then referred to as oxysulfides.
Manganese contents much in excess of 2% tend to severely embrittle steel, however high carbon
austenitic steels containing a bout 12%Mn display toughness combined with a high work-hardening
rate, which make them useful industrial alloys for wear resistant applications, especially when the
wear is accompanied by impact loading. These alloys, known as Hadfield's Manganese Steels, find
applications in the mining industry (e.g. jaw crushers) and in severe service rail a pplications.
Silicon is present in all steels in minor amounts . It is a ferrite stabilizer, but not a carbide former,
and dissolves in the ferrite. Its major role is as a deoxidizer, since it combines readily with dissolved
oxygen in molten steel to form silicates. This removes the possibility of porosity (blow holes) upon
subsequent solidificat ion, ensuring the production of dense sound steel. In cast irons the presence of
silicon promotes graphite formation and provides resistance to attack by coiTosive acids.
Notebook Page 180

Silicon is added to steels designed for electrical and magnetic applications such as motors and
transformers since it reduces eddy current losses in alternating current magnetization. It is also
added to nickel-chromium-manganese steels where it increases strength and toughness. It increases
hardenability especially in high carbon steels, and improves the castability of steels.
Sulfur is almost always a deleterious impurity in steels. It segregates strongly in steel castings and
ingots, and degrades surface quality. It tends to combine with iron to form iron sulfides which are
hard and have low melting points, hence they cause cracking during both hot and cold working.
Thus the presence of sulfur in steel must be compensated for by additions of manganese or other
strong sulfide-forming elements such as calcium and the rare earths. Intentional sulfur additions
are made in the free-machining SAE llxx and 12xx steels where iron sulfide chip breakers are
desired for improved machinability.
Phosphorus has both detrimental and beneficial effects on the properties of steels. Like sulfur, it
segregates strongly in ingots and castings, and it forms a brittle iron phosphide phase which reduces
toughness. Phosphorus segregation during heat treatment or service of alloy steels is responsible for
embrittlement effects known as temper embrittlement. On the other hand phosphorus is a potent
hardener of iron. In recent years, re-phosphorized steels have been utilized as high strength sheet for
applications such as automotive body panels. It is also intentionally added to the low-carbon free-
machining SAE 12xx steels, and can have beneficial effects on sea water corrosion behavior of some
steels.
Aluminum is widely used for deoxidation and for control of grain size as a grain refiner . As a
deoxidizer it readily combines with oxygen in liquid steel to form aluminum oxides, which can be
r emoved into the slag. When added t o steel in small concentrat ions it also combines with oxygen
and nitrogen in the solid state to form aluminum oxides and nitrides which can h ave beneficial
effe cts in pinning grain boundaries h ence in controlling au st enite grain growth in reheated steels .
Furthermore in sh eet steel the aluminum nitride precipitation can be controlled during annealing so
as to give improved grain shape control with consequent improved sheet formability. Aluminum is
not a carbide former.
Aluminum is u sed as a n alloying addition in steels designed for nitriding, where it is present in
amounts near 1%. The extremely high hardness of the nitrided case is due to the formation of a
hard stable aluminum nitride surface layer. When present at high concentrations (above 1%),
aluminum substantially increas es the oxidation resistance of iron. This is applied in the ir on
aluminide alloys (FegAI, FeAl) and in aluminum bearing stainless steels.
Chromium is a strong ferrite stabilizer and carbide former; as well it provides some solution
strengthening of ferrite. Chromium also has a strong effect on increasing hardenability, especially
in medium carbon steel, and it imparts both strength an d oxidation resistance to steels at high
temperatures. In high carbon steels it also provides resistance to abrasion and wear.
When steels with chromium contents above 10.5% are exposed to oxidizing environments, the
chromium atoms in the steel react with oxygen to create a protective surface layer which gives
corrosion and oxidation resistance; this is the basis for the stainless st eels.
© Codes and Standards Training Institute (CAST I}

Nickel, like manganese, is an austenite stabilizer and does not form carbides, rather it acts as a
ferrite strengthener and toughner in solution. It also increases hardenability, especially in medium
carbon steels. Nickel produces a significant increase in notch toughness, even in the low
temperature range, and is therefore added for increased toughness in case-hardening, heat-treatable
and low temperature steels. Nickel is often used together with chromium in alloy steels to provide
high h ardenability, high impact strength and improved fatigue resistance.
The ability of nickel to stabilize austenite is utilized in stainless steels, where nickel contents of greater
than 7% are able to impart austenitic structure even below room temperature. In austenitic stainless
steels nickel also provides improved resistance to environments which are not strongly oxidizing.
Molybdenum is a strong carbide former, like chromium, and it also contributes to solution
strengthening of the ferrite. Molybdenum is usually present in steels in combination with other
alloying elements such as chromium and nickel. It is a ferrite stabilizer, and is capable of acting as
a grain refiner. Molybdenum is most effective in improving hardenability, especially in high carbon
st eels. It can induce secondary hardening during tempering of quenched steels, and it enhances the
creep resistance oflow alloy steels at elevated temperatures.
The presence of molybdenum in solution in steels gives improved resistance to pitting corrosion and
therefore it is frequently added to high alloy chromium steels and to austenitic stainless steels. It
also act s to reduce susceptibility to temper embrittlement in alloy steels.
Vanadium is a stronger carbide former than chromium or molybdenum; it also promotes grain
refinement and contributes to secondary hardening during tempering. Its complex carbides and
carbonitrides provide wear resistance, edge holding quality and high temperature strength.
Vanadium also dissolves to some extent in ferrite, imparting strength and toughness, and is a ferrite
stabilizer. It is used primarily in high speed, hot forming and creep resistant steels.
Titanium and zirconium are such strong deoxidizers that they can only be used in fully killed
steels. They are strong carbide formers and also strong nitride formers. They show some solubility
in ferrite and are ferrite stabilizers, as well as serving as effective grain refining agents. Titanium
and zirconium, as well as calcium and the rare earths, notably cerium, are used t o control the shape
of manganese sulfide inclusions, causing them to maintain a shape which is spherical rather than
elongated after the steel is worked; this gives improved fracture toughness, and more isotropic
properties.
Titanium is used widely in stainless steels as a stabilizer against intergranular corrosion

(sensitization), a role it is able to play because its carbides are more stable than those of chromium.
Niobium (columbium) and tantalum are often used together, both being strong carbide formers and
stabilizers of ferrite. Niobium strengthens ferrite; as well it is an effective grain refiner and as such
acts to improve toughness. In addition, like titanium it is added to stainless steels to counteract
sensitization (grain boundary corrosion due to intergranular chromium carbide precipitation).
Notebook Page 182

Boron is added t o steel only in very small quantities (between 0.0005 and 0.003%), specifically to
improve hardenability, especially in fully deoxidized steels. Its presence degrades weldability.
Selenium is used in some free-machining steel to improve machinability, much like sulphur and
lead . Lead additions in the range 0.015 to 0.035% are also made to improve machinability; in recent
years bismuth has been used as a substitute for lead.
Table 1 - Role of Alloying Elements in Steel

(/)
....
Q)
(/)
.... ..... Q)
.... -~ Q) E .~ c
- - -
Q)
Q)
c c Q)
() E .... .s::. .s::.
.t:! ;;:::: :.0
ctS
0 c
·u; .... 0
CJ)
:.0
ctS
CJ)
::I
:-g 0
X
....
Q)
c 0 u;
....
ctS
2 c .s .8
c Q) .... ·u; 2 ·c: Q)
..... .s::.
0
·cu.... -ectS 0 Q) .E u; () ....
Q)
-
Q) Q)
....
-
"0 ()
u; ctS ::I
Q)
CJ) .s::. ::I E ()
ctS ctS
~
manganese X X X X X
phosphorus X X X X
sulfur/selenium X
silicon X X X
copper X
chromium X X X X
nickel X X X+ X X
molybdenum X X X X+ X
niobium (columbium) X X X
vanadium X X X X
aluminum X X
nitrogen X
titanium X X X X
boron X+ X+
cobalt X X
tungsten X X X
lead X
+ very strong alloying effect

Which of the following is not increased with increasing carbon content in steels?
a) tensile strength
b) yield s trength
c) hardness
d) h ardenability
e) weldability
Notebook Paoe 183

Which of the following is used an a deoxid!izer in carbon steels?
a) C
b) Mn
c) Si
d) s
e) p

Which of the following is used for deoxidation and for control of grain size?
a)Si
b) Mn
c) V
d) s
e) AI

Which of the following is not a ferrite stabilizer?
a) Cr
b ) Ni
c) Mo
d) v
e) Ti

Which of the following will maximize the hardenability of carbon steel based on mass percent?
a) Cr
b) Mo
c) V
d) Ti
e) B
Notebook Page 184

Alloy Steels
Alloy steel contains in addition t o the above-mentioned elements, a mm1mum requirement for
elements such as chromium (Cr), nickel (Ni), molybdenum (Mo), etc., which distinguishes them from
carbon steels. Alloy steel is defined in ASTM A941 as follows.
Alloy steel, n- a steel, other than a stainless steel, that conforms to a specification
that requires one or more of the following elements, by mass percent, to have a
minimum content equal to or greater than :
Element C onten t Elem ent Content

aluminum (Al) 0.30 nickel (Ni) 0.30
boron (B) 0.0008 niobium (Nb) or columbium (Cb) 0.06
chromium (Cr) 0.30 silicon (Si) 0.06
cobalt (Co) 0.30 titanium (Ti) 0.05
copper (Cu) 0.40 tungsten (W) 0.30
lead (Pb) 0.40 vanadium (V) 0.10
manganese (Mn) 1.65 zirconium (Zr) 0.05
molybdenum (Mo) 0.08
0.10 for other alloying elements, except s ulphur, ph osphorus, carbon, and nitrogen
--~ -- -
Example 026: Alloy Steel for High Temperature Service

ASTM A335/A335M Grade P91
c Mn p s Si Cr Mo
0.08-0.12 0.30- 0.60 0.020 0.01 0 0.30-0.60 8.00-9.50 0 .85-1 .05
v N Nb Ni AI Ti Zr
0.18-25 0 .030-0.070 0.06-0.10 0.40 max. 0.02 max. 0.01 max. 0 .01 max.
Data Source: Excerpt from ASTM Passport to Steel Online Database.
NntP.hnnk P;1nP. 1R"i

T"-
af-
L-- ~~~_$ ~ f-e_-e_ ( ~
L ow-Alloy Steel S ·rvv-·
V\
ASTM A941 defines three sub-categories to alloy steels, namely low-alloy steel, high strength low-
alloy steel, and micro-alloy steel, as follows.
low-alloy steel, n-a steel, other than a carbon steel or an interstitial-free steel, that
conforms to a specification that r equires the minimum content for each specified
alloying element to be lower than the applicable limit in the definition for alloy steel.
high-strength low-alloy steel, n- a steel, other than a carbon steel or an interstitial-

free steel, that conforms to a specification that requires the minimum content for
each specified alloying element to be lower than the applicable limit in the definition
for alloy steel, and the yield point or yield strength of the product to be at least 36 ksi
or 250 MPa.
microalloyed steel, n-a low-alloy steel that conforms to a specification that requires
the presence of one or more carbide-, nitride-, or carbonitride-forming elements,
generally in individual concentrations less than 0.15 mass percent, to enhance
strength.
Discussion-The most common microalloying elements are niobium (columbium),

titanium, and vanadium.
high-alloy steel: a nonstandard term not used in ASTM standards, see alloy steel.
Example 027: Low-Alloy Steel for Low Temperature Service

ASTM A350/A350M Grade LF6
c Mn p s Si Cr I Mo
0 .22 max. 1.15-1.50 0 .025 0.025 0.15-0.30 0.30 I 0 .12 max.
v N Nb Ni Cu
0.04-0.1 1 0.01-0.030 0.02 max. 0.40 max. 0 .04 max.
a) When vacuum carbon-deoxidation is required by Supplementary Requirement S4, the silicon content shall be 0.12%
maximum .
b) The sum of copper, nickel, chromium, vanadium and molybdenum shall not exceed 1.00% on heat analysis.
C) The sum of chromium and molybdenum shall not exceed 0.32% on heat analysis.
The term high-alloy steel does not have an ASTM standard definition, although it is commonly
referred to when chromium, nickel, manganese, or a combination of these elements in steel is 10
percent or higher.
Tool St eels
Tool steel is a specialized carbon, low-alloy, or alloy steel which is capable of functioning under the
demanding service conditions associated with the working a nd shaping of metallic and non-metallic
materials into desired forms.
Notebook Page 186

Tool steels commonly range in carbon content between 0.8% and 1.2%, although lower and higher
values are used. Some tool steel is used in the form of castings, but most tool steel products are
mechanically worked into their final forms and are thus ·Categorized as wrought products. Spring
steel is a specialized type of tool steel that commonly has approximately 0.8% C, although it range
between 0.50% and more 1% C.

Which of the following is a carbon steel?
a) ASTM A333 Grade 3

b) ASTM A333 Grade 4
c) ASTM A333 Grade 8
d) ASTM A333 Gr ade 9
e) ASTM A333 Grade 10
' .
Which of the following is a low-alloy steel?
a) rimmed steel
b) killed steel
c) steel with a minimum requirement of0.30% Cr
d) steel with a minimum requirement of0.10% Cr
e) steel with a maximum requirement of0. 10% C

Which of the following is a high strength low-alloy steel?
a) steel with a minimum requirement of 0.30% Cr

b) steel with a minimum requirement of 0.10% Cr
c) st eel with a minimum requirement of 0.10% C f
d) steel with a minimum requirement of 0.30% Cr a nd MSYS of 40 ksi
e) st eel with a minimum requirement of0.10% Cr and MSYS of 40 ksi

Which of the following is an alloy steel?

b) steel with a minimum requirement of 0.10% Cr
c) steel with a minimum requirement of0. 10% C
d) steel with a minimum requirement of 0.10% Cr and MSYS of 40 ksi
e) steel with a maximum requirement of 0.30% Cr and MSYS of 40 ksi
NotP.hnnk P?lnP. 1?.7

Stainless Steel Categories
The term stainless steeLs owes its name to the fact that it would not stain (rust) when exposed to the
outside atmosphere (unpolluted, non-marine). This term is defined in A8TM A941 as follows.
stainless steeL, n-a steel that conforms to a specification that requires, by mass
percent, a minimum chromium content of 10.5 or more, and a maximum carbon
content ofless than 1.20.
Categories of Stainless Steels
There are five main categories of stainless steel:
1. martensitic stainless steel (typically 10.5 to 15% Cr)

• e.g., type 410- UN8 841000; grade CA15 - UN8 J91150
2. ferritic stainless steel (typically 15 to 30% Cr, optionally Mo, Cu, Nb, Ti)
• e.g., type 430- UN8 843000; grade CB30- UN8 J91803
3. austenitic stainless steel (typically 16 to 26% Cr, 2 to 22% Ni, optionally Mo, Cu, N, others)
• e.g., type 304; UN8 830400; CF8 - J92600
4. precipitation-hardening stainless steels (typically 11 to 18% Cr, 3 to 11% Ni, optionally Mo,
Al, Cu, Ti)
• e.g. , type 630 (17-4 PH) - UNS S 17400; grade CB7Cu-1- UN8 J 92180
5. duplex stainless steels (typically 20 to 30% Cr, 2 to 8% Ni, 1 to 4% Mo, 0.10 to 0.40% N,
optionally Cu, W)
• e.g., alloy 2205- UN8 832250; cast alloy 2205- UN8 J92205
Example 032 : Stainless Steels

Martensitic Stainless Steel: ASTM A240 Grade 410; UNS S41000
c I Mn I Si I Cr I Ni I Mo I N
0.08-0.15 I 1.00 max. I 1.00 max. I 11 .5- 13.5 I 0.75 max I ... I ...
Ferritic Stainless Steel: ASTM A240 Grade 430; UNS S43000
0.12 max. I 1.00 max. I 1.00 max. I 16.0- 18.0 I 0.75 max I ... I .. .
Austenitic Stainless Steel: ASTM A312 Grade 304; UNS S30400
0.08 max. I 2.00 max. I 1.00 max. I 18.0-20.0 I 8.0- 11.0 I . .. I ...
Precipitation-Hardening Stainless Steel: ASTM A693 Grade 630; UNS S17400
c I Mn I Si I Cr I Ni I Mo I Cu
0.07 max. I 1.00 max. I 1.00 max. I 15.0- 17.5 I 3.0- 5.0 I --- I 3.0 - 5.0
Duplex Stainless Steel : ASTM A312 Grade 2205; UNS S32550
0.03 max. I 2.00 max. I 1.00 max. I 22.0-23.0 I 4.5- 6.5 I 3.00-3.50 I 0.14- 0.20
Ferrous alloys dominate the world of construction materials. Their widespread applications are the
result of a broad range of desirable material properties combined with favorable economics. Iron is
the least expensive of all the metals and the second most abundant in nature.
ifttl t. are tyl(Jft 4t-t.. 3oo · dtlf-e~~~l f !ype. o f- c;.-fet., -vt tt-s.s ~f-e.-q_ (
J\JU::d 5:J- tJJ- ·tt\.'t/~ 65 X.XX c?j1 1-s Coc/-e .fk pe.f 47:-s~ AM( o;d.e_y-y
P Ehol { 7!,J> Codes and Standard~ Training Institute (CAS'H0 .

~/5 rt...C!..re. ~q e._ :5 / ~
1
Ju)-J
Austenitic Stainless Steel Physical Properties
Physical properties of stainless steels vary between the above categories which have a significant
effect on their weldability. For example, a comparison of physical properties between carbon steel
and austenitic stainless is shown below, with related welding remarks.
Example Q33: Comparison of Physical Properties

Austenitic
Physical Property Stainless Steel Carbon Stee·l Welding Remarks
Type 304 requires less heat to
Type 304
2800°F produce fusion , which means faster
melting point 2550-2650°F
1540°C welding for the same heat or less heat
1400-1450°C
for the same speed.
magnetic to
non-magnetic all
magnetic response over 1300°F Duplex stainless steels are magnetic.
temperatures
705°C
Type 304 conducts heat much more
slowly than carbon steel thus
promoting sharper heat gradients. This
accelerates warping, especially in
combination with higher expansion
rate of heat conductivity Type 304
rates. Slower diffusion of heat
(%at 2 12°F) (100°C) 28% 100%
expansion through the base metal
(% at 1200°F) (650°C) 66% 100%
means that weld zones remain hot
longer, one result of which may be
longer dwell in the carbide precipitation
range unless excess heat is artificially
removed (e.g. chill bars)
This is of importance in electrical
fusion methods. The higher electrical
resistance of Type 304 results in the
electrical resistance
generation of more heat for the same
(annealed)
current or the same heat with lower
(microhm-em approx.)
current, as compared with carbon
At 68°F (20°C) 72 12.5
steel. This, together with its low rate
At 1625°F (885°C) 126 125
of heat conductivity, accounts for the
effectiveness of resistance welding
methods on Type 304.
Type 304 expands and contracts at a
faster rate than carbon steel, w hich
thermal expansion over
means that increased expansion and
range indicated
contraction must be allowed for in
9.8 6.5 order to control warping and the
in./in./F x 1o·s
(68-932°F) (68-11 62°F) development of thermal stresses
17.6 11 .7 upon cooling. For example, more tack
in./in./C x 1o·6
(20-500°C) (20-628°C) welds are used for stainless steel
than for carbon steel.
Notebook Paoe 189

What is a stainless steel?

b) steel with a minimum requirement of0.30% Ni
c) steel with Cr and Ni added
d) steel with a minimum requirement of 9% Cr
e) steel with a minimum requirement of 10.5% Cr /
Notebook Page 190

Solution
For Steels Practice Problems
Notebook Paoe 191

Answer Key - Introduction to Steels
Practice
Problem Answer
Ql: d
Q2: b
Q3: e
Q4: c
Q5: d
Q8: b
Q9: c
Q14: d
Q15: a
Q16: e
Q20: c
Q21: e
Q22: c
Q23: e
Q24: b
Q25: b
Q28: e
Q29: d
Q30: e
Q31: a
Q34: e
Notebook Page 192

Introduction to Ferrous Metallurgy
Metallurgy of Steel
Atomic Crystalline Structures of Metals
Pure metallic iron is of very limited usefulness for engineering applications as it has a very low
strength and poor resistance to corrosion. Its density (specific gravity 7.87) is slightly lower than
that of copper, and its melting temperature is 1540°C (2804°F ), slightly above that of nickel and well
above copper and aluminum. However the most significant characteristic of iron is its allotropy.
Like all metals, iron develops a crystalline structure during solidification. The most common
crystalline structures in carbon and alloys steels are:
• face-centered cubic (fcc);

• body-centered cubic (bee);
• hexagonal close-packed (hcp);
• body-centered tetragonal (bet); and
• orthorhombic.
From the geometric patterns made by these crystalline structures, fcc and hcp will be the most dense
since the atoms are arranged closer to each other and likewise occupy the least volume.
Although single crystal metals are not commonly used in industrial practice, they do have
specialized applications, such as metal ribbons used to measure temperature, computer chips,
memory alloys, etc. To manufacture single crystal components, a liquid metal is cooled in a highly
controlled directional manner to slowly form its solid shape.
When liquid metal solidifies under the influence of earth's gravity, defects within the atomic
crystalline structures are produced, such as:
• point defects;
• lattice vacancies;
• dislocations;
• stacking faults; and
• impurity atoms .
Practice Problem 01: Atomic Crystalline Structures of Metals

Components made up of single crystals--- - -- - - - - - - - - - - -
a) are the result of usual multiple nucleation

b) are the result of gravity free cooling
c) are not useful
d) usually involve highly directional cooling
e) usually involve supercooling
Notebook PaoP. 193

Which of the following statements is correct?
a) bee structure has a higher density than fcc structure

b) bet structure has a higher density than hcp structure
c) bet structure has a higher density than fcc structure
d) fcc structure has a higher density than bee structure
e) orthorhombic structure has a higher density than hcp structure

Which of the following are lattice imperfections?
a) dislocations
b) stacking faults
c) point defects
d) lattice vacancies
e) all of the above
Iron and its Allotropy
Equilibrium
Allotropy is based on the principle of equilibrium, defined in ASTM E7 as follows.
equilibrium- a state of dynamic balance between the opposing actions, reactions, or

velocities of a reversible process.
In other words, equilibrium is the thermodynamically stable state which is achieved only after there
has been sufficient time for the atoms to move around and re-organize themselves into the stable
phase or phases which are predicted by a phase diagram.
Equilibrium can require long times to achieve, especially when temperatures are low since the
atomic diffusion process is slow where the thermal energy in the system is low.
If the system is subjected to a rapid change of temperature the atoms may be unable to diffuse fast
enough to keep up with any phase changes which are demanded by the phase diagram. As a result,
during rapid temperature changes the phase diagram does not accurately predict the phase
behavior; a different type of diagram is used for rapid changes of temperature, as discussed below.
Understanding of all these diagrams is of great importance since steels are virtually always heat
treated in some manner to develop their properties, and the diagrams allow the consequences of heat
treatment to be predicted and understood.
Notebook Page 194

The Allotropy of Iron
Between room temperature and its melting temperature, pure solid iron undergoes two changes of
crystal structure, known as allotropic phase transformations, so that it has one type of crystal
structure at high and low temperatures and another at intermediate temperatures. Below 912°C
(1674°F) iron exists with a body-centered cubic (bee) crystal structure, with its atoms packed as
shown in Figure 1. This material is known as alpha (a) iron.
Body-Centered Cubic (bee) Face-Centered Cubic (fcc)
Figure 1 - Crystal structures of iron.
At much higher temperatures, from 1395°C (2545°F) up to the melting temperature, iron also has
the bee crystal structure and in this temperature range it is referred to as delta (o) iron. However, at
intermediate temperatures, between 912°C and 1395°C (1674 and 2545°F), the cryst al structure of
iron is face-centered cubic (fcc), with atom packing shown at the right side of Figure 2; this is known
as gamma (y) iron.
Thus if iron is slowly heated from room temperature to above its melting point, several phase
changes (phase transformations) occur, and on subsequent slow cooling back to room temperature
the reverse changes occur. Note that this applies only to s low cooling; if cooling rates are too high
the behavior can be different as discussed below.
Metallography
History: Dr. Henry Clifton Sorby, a geologist and mineragrapher from Sheffield, England, is
believed to be the first to apply microscopic techniques to the study of metals, with studies recorded
as early as 1858 which began the science of metallography. This term is defined in ASTM E 7
Standard Terminology Relating to Metallography as follows.
metallography-that branch of science which relates to the constitution and

structure, and their relation to the properties, of metals and alloys.

Metallography allows for the study of the metal's structure, and when performed with a microscope,
the metals microstructure, defined in ASTM E7 as follows.
microstructure-the structure of a suitably prepared specimen as revealed by a

microscope.
A full understanding of a metal's micr ostructure can only be obtained by exanurung a small
specimen after metallographic preparation, i.e., polishing and etching the specimen's surface. Each
etchant is designed to specifically attack some aspect of the microstructure in such a manner as to
affect the s urface topography or surface chemistry so that upon examination in a microscope some
aspects of th e microstructure become apparent. A permanent r ecord of the microstructure is made by
photographing it within the microscope. Depending on the magnification, this photograph is called a
macrograph (photomacrograph) or micrograph (photomicrograph) which are defined in ASTM E7 as
follows.
macrograph-a graphic reproduction of an object, slightly reduced in size,

unmagnified, or magnified ten diameters or less (photomacrograph).
micrograph-a graphic reproduction of an object as seen through the microscope or

equivalent optical instrument, at magnifi cations greater than ten diameters.
(photomicr ograph).
Typically this means that in the optical microscope the surface then reflects light in such a way as to
provide contrast (light, dark, and gray level differences) among different microstructural features,
while in the electron microscope the contrast is provided by changes in electron emission and/or the
detection of emitted electrons. In many cases, etching with several different etchants may be
necessary in order to obtain a full understanding ofthe material's microstructure. Also, etchants ar e
designed as macroetchants for macrographs or microetchants for micrographs.
Etching typically reveals individual grain s, either by providing contr ast between adjacent grains
based on their differing crystallographic orientations, or else by delineating the network of grain
bounda ries which mark the limits of the individual gr ains. In a similar manner, second phase
particles and non-metallic inclusions are revealed by differences in gray level and/or color. Porosity
in general appears dark.
Metallographic Examination
The contrast created in the optical microscope is best understood by thinking in terms of the
scattering of incident light from the specimen surface. Regions of the surface which are smooth
reflect light back into the objective lens of the microscope and such regions appear bright. On the
other hand, regions which are roughened, grooved or pitted by the etchant scatter light in all
directions, so that only some of the light is collected by the objective aperture of the microscope,
hence these regions appear darker. This is illustrated in Figure 2.
~Codes and Standards Training Institute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 196

Before Etching After Etching
Polished
Figure 2 - Etching effects on optical microscopy

of grains and grain boundaries.
The size, sh ape and distribution of porosity are useful microstructural parameters. In castings, the
porosity often has a characteristic shape, reflecting the fact that it represents the space left as the
result of solidification shrinkage as the last regions solidify. Since the shapes of solid grains as they
solidify are normally dendritic (tree-like), the shrinkage p orosity is generally located between the
dendrite arms, and is hence termed interdendritic porosity. Porosity with this shape and
distribution is thus characteristic of as-cast microstructures. If castings are mech anically worked
the porosity will be completely or partially closed up, with its shape altered in ways geometrically
compatible with th e working geometry.
Metallographic examination of metal containing cracks can provide information on the crack path
(e.g. intergranular or transgranular), fractur e mode (cleavage, microvoid coalescence, metal fat igue,
creep, stress-corrosion cracking) and reveal the relationship between microstructure and cracking
including the existence of unexpected or special microstructures in the vicinity of crack tips.
The presence and characteristics of corrosion can also be studied and interpreted by metallographic
examination. Thus metallography is useful both for materials development and for failure analysis.
The great usefulness of metallographic examination to determine the microstructure of a material

can permit an understanding of the material properties and their relationships to manner in which
the material was processed or used; alternatively metallographic examina tion can provide
information on the processing of a material whose history is uncertain. It is widely used in
materials research and development, in production (quality control) and in failure analysis.
Practice Problem 04: Metallography

What is a microstructure of steel?
a) A science which relat es to the constitution and structure of steel and their relation to
t he properties.
b) A graphic reproduction of a specimen magnified ten diameters or less.
c) A graphic reproduction of an object as seen through a microscope at magnifications
greater than ten diameters.
d) The structure of a suitably prepared specimen as revealed by a microscope.
e) b or c
Notebook Page 197

Microstructures and Phases in Steel
Ferrite
The presence of carbon and alloying elements in iron make the allotropic behavior more complex, but
in so doing they create the opportunity for an even wider range of microstructures and properties.
The effects of carbon are the most significant in this respect. Carbon dissolves in the bee alpha-iron
(a-Fe) forming a solid solution known as ferrite and is defined in ASTM E7 as follows.
ferrite- designation commonly assigned to alpha iron containing alloying elements in

solid solution. Increasing carbon ·Content markedly decreases the high-temperature
limit of equilibrium.
History: the word ferrite most likely came from the Latin word for iron, ferrum.
Note: it is common practice is to use the expression ferrite synonymously with alpha (a) ferrite, and
to use the full expression delta (o) ferrite to refer to the high temperature phase.
The solubility of carbon in ferrite is very low, with a maximum of only 0.025%C at 725°C (1337°F) in
a-ferrite, and only 0.09%C at 1495°C (2725°F ) in &-ferrite, see micrograph offerrite below.
Ferrite is referred to as a phase since it is physically homogeneous and structurally distinct

constituent of the microstructure of the alloy, shown in the following micrograph (Figure 3).
Figure 3 - Microstructure of iron consisting of polygonal ferrite grains (alpha phase)

that are virtually equiaxed and rated ASTM grain size no. 6;
nital etchant at a magnification of 500X.
Notebook Page 198

Delta Iron (o Fe) and Delta Ferrite (o Ferrite)
Like alpha (a) iron, delta (()) iron also has a bee atomic stru cture. However, unlike alpha iron , delta
iron is not stable at room temperature, but rather , it exists between 2552°F (1400°C) and 2802°F
(1539°C). vVhen in carbon steels, this phase is referred to as delta ferrite. Both delta iron and delta
ferrite are defined in ASTM E7, as follows.
delta iron (oFe)- solid phase of pure iron which is stable at temperatures between
1400 and 1539°C and possesses the body-centered cubic lattice. Strictly, there is no
difference between delta and alpha iron.
delta ferrite-designation commonly assigned to delta iron containing alloying

elements in solid solution. Small amounts of carbon and large amounts of other
alloying elements markedly affect the high-and-low-temperature limit of equilibrium.
Since delta ferrite exists above the Curie temperature in carbon steels, it is paramagnetic (i.e.,
nonmagnetic). However, when delta ferrite exists in austenitic stainless steels (e.g., Type 304 or
316), it is stable at room temperature due to the nickel alloying content, and this delta ferrite is
magnetic since it exists below the Curie temperature .
Austentite
In fcc gamma-iron (y-Fe), the solubility of carbon is much greater than in bee a-iron (ferrite),
reaching a maximum of 2.1%C at a temper ature of 1150°C (2100°F); the fcc solid solution of carbon
in fcc iron is known as austenite and is defined in ASTM E7, as follows.
austenite-a fcc solid solution of carbon or other elements in gamma iron.
History: austenite was first reported by Floris Osmond, a French steelwor ks engineer, in the late
19th century and named by him in honour of a leading English metallurgist of the t ime, Professor
Sir William Chandler Roberts-Austen, F.R.S. (Fellow of the Royal Society).
Both ferrite and austenite are interstitial solid solutions, that is, the carbon atoms dissolve in the
iron by locating themselves in interstitial sites between the iron atoms which are arranged on the
bee or fcc crystal lattice, as shown in Figure 4.
Figure 4 - Carbon dissolved interstitially in fcc austenite. Carbon atoms are

represented by black circles and iron atoms by white circles (not to scale).

Austenite is referred to as a phase since it is physically homogeneous and structurally distinct
constituent ofthe microstructure of the aUoy, shown in the following micrograph (Figure 5).
Figure 5 -Microstructure of austenite in 0.8%C steel, lOOOX.
Iron Carbide (Fe 3 C) · Cementite
Iron carbide or cementite, is a compound with the formula Fe3C, corresponding to 6.67% C and is
defined in ASTM E7 as follows.
cementite-a very hard and brittle compound of iron and carbon corresponding to the
empirical formula Fe3C. It is commonly known as iron carbide and possesses an
orthorhombic lattice. In "plain-carbon steels" some of the iron atoms in the cementite
lattice are replaced by manganese, and in "alloy steels" by other elements such as
chromium or tungsten. Cementite will often appear as distinct lamellae or as
spheroids or globules of varying size in hypo-eutectoid steels. Cementite is in
metastable equilibrium and has a tendency to decompose into iron and graphite,
although the reaction rate is very slow.
History: the origin of the term cementite is not well documented, but it is thought to come from the
term cement carbon, which originated during the cementation steelmaking process where carbon
was added to iron to make steel in the 17th century.
The crystal structure of cementite is orthorhombic, giving it a very high hardness, strength and
brittleness in contrast to the soft ferrite and austenite phases. The micrograph in Figure 6 shows
cementite (Fe3C) in a matrix of ferrite.
©Codes and Standards Training Institute {CAST I)
Notebook Page 200

Figure 6 - Microstructure of a eutectoid steel (0.8%) showing cementite (worm-like shapes)
in a matrix offerrite (white background) at a magnification of 2500X.
-
Practice Problem 05: Microstructures in Steels
Ferrite at room temperature is commonly assigned to which of the following iron designation
containing alloying elements in solid solution?
a) delta iron
b) gamma iron
c) alpha iron
d) sigma iron
e) a orb
- ~ A_ ,.. T --.r_.
Practice Problem 06: Microstructures in Steels

Austenite is a fcc solid solution of:
a) carbon or other elements in alpha iron.

b) carbon or other elements in ferrite.
c) carbon or alloying elements in delta iron.
d) cementite (Fe3C) in gamma iron.
e) carbon or other elements in gamma iron.
©Codes and Standards T raining Institute (CASTI)

Pearlite
History: Dr. Henry Clifton Sorby, observed a pearly constituent, having the shine of the mother-of-
pearl, which he termedpearlyte, and eventually was renamed pearlite.
If steel having the eutectoid composition, 0.8%C, is heated within the austenite temperature range for
a sufficient amount of time to form 100% austenite and then allowed to cool slowly, it remains
completely austenitic until the temperature r eaches the eutectoid temperature, 725°C (1337°F), at
which time it transforms to a two-phase mixture offerrite and cementite. Ifthe carbon contents of the
phases are considered, it can be seen on the phase diagram that this eutectoid transformation consists
of austenite which contains a uniform cat·bon level of 0.8% transforming to ferrite which contains a
very low (0.025%) carbon content plus cementite with a high (6.67%) carbon content.
The actual morphology of the ferrite and cementite phases in this slowly cooled eutectoid steel are
characteristically lamellar, that is they occur as alternating plates of ferrite and cementite; this
lamellar microstructural constituent, Figure 7, is called pearlite, defined in ASTM E7 as follows.
pearlite-a metastable microstructure formed, when local austenite areas attain the
eutectoid composition, in alloys of iron and carbon containing greater than 0.025
percent but less than 6.67 percent carbon. The structure is an aggregate consisting of
alternate lamellae of ferrite and cementite formed on slow cooling during the eutectoid
reaction. In an alloy of given composition, pearlite may be formed isothermally at
temperatures below the eutectoid temperature by quenching austenite to a desired
temperature (generally above 550°C) and holding for a period of time necessary for
transformation to occur. The interlamellar spacing varies directly with the
transformation temperature; that is, the higher the temperature the greater the
spacing.
Figure 7 - Showing the pearlite in a 1%C steel. Mag. 550X
Notebook Page 202

Note: pearlite is not a phase, rather it is made up of two phases, of alternate lamellae of ferrite and
cementite.
Figure 8 shows how as the ferrite and cementite grow out into the austenite, carbon is rejected by
the growing ferrite and accumulates as adjacent cementite plates. It is apparent that this
transformation must require a great deal of carbon atom diffusion, hence pearlite formation can only
occur if the cooling rate through the temperat ure range around 725°C (1337°F) is relatively slow. If
the cooling rate is too r apid for sufficient carbon diffusion to occur, other microstructural
constituents and phases which are not shown on the phase diagram can form , as discussed below.
y - Austenite
C - Diffu sion C - Diffusion
a- Ferrite a- Ferrite
Figure 8 - Schematic illustration of pearlite formation.
The thicknesses of the ferrite and cementite plates in the pearlite strongly affect the mechanical
properties of the steel. When pearlit e forms under conditions of very slow cooling, the individual
ferrite and cementite lamellae are thicker than if the steel is cooled more rapidly. Pearlite can thus
be coarse or fine, with fine pearlite having a higher strength and lower ductility. This is only one of
the many ways in which cooling rate affects microstructure; further aspects of the h eat treating of
steel, including the effects of slow cooling hypoeutectoid and hypereutectoid steels, and of more rapid
cooling, are now considered in more depth.
Practice Problem 07: Phases and Microstructures in Steels

Which microstructure consists of alternating lamellae of cementite and ferrite?
a) ferrite and austenite

b) bainite and martensite
c) upper and lower bainite
d) pearlite
e) acicular ferrite

Iron-Iron Carbide (Fe-Fe3 C) Phase Diagram
The temperature ranges over which the bee and fcc crystal structures are stable are dramatically
affected by the presence of carbon. Carbon lowers the lower limit of stability of the fcc phase from
912°C (1675°F) to as low as 725°C (1337°F) and raises the upper limit from 1395°C (2545°F) to as
high as 1495°C (2725°F), as shown in Figure 9, with the exact limits depending on the amount of
carbon present.
Liquid
Melting 2804 oF ~
Point (1540 °C) o-Fe ~
Delta Ferrite ;1
2545 °F . ~4.
(1395 °C}
y-Fe
Austenite
1675 °F . ~3 .
(912 °C}
~
' 'A
a-Fe '~
Ferrite
Room Temp.
100% Fe 0.0 0.2 0.4
Pure Iron
%C .....
Figure 9 - Effects of the addition of carbon to pure iron.
The complexity of phase behavior and phase stability in ferrous materials can be dealt with most
easily by making use of a phase diagram; Figure 10 shows the iron-iron carbide phase diagram for
the effect of carbon on iron. The left end side of this diagram represents pure iron, with increasing
carbon content toward the right. Temperature increases toward the top of the diagram.
Notebook Page 204

Fe-FesC Phase Diagram - The Map of Steel
The Fe-FeaC phase diagram is basically a map which predicts which phases are stable for any alloy
with a given carbon content at a given temperature, i.e. as represented by a point on the phase
diagram. Each such point lies either in a single-phase region, e.g. the austenite region, or in one of
the two-phase regions which exist between the single-phase regions.
The single-phase solid solutions are readily apparent on Figure10, with a -ferrite in the region GQPG
and &-ferrite in region AJKA. The borders of these regions (e.g. the lines QPG and JKA) represent
th e limits of solid solubility of carbon.
This diagram also illustrates the fact that the carbon solubility is much great er in austenite than in
ferrite, the limits of the austenite phase being J IEHGJ with a maximum of2.1% Cat point E .
There are other two phases shown on this phase diagram. One of these is the liquid solution of
carbon in iron, which occurs at high temperatures, across the top of the diagram. The lower
boundary of this region shows how th e freezing temperature (or more accurat ely the liquidus
temperat ure, the lowest temperature at which the entire material is liquid) of iron-carbon alloys
changes with carbon content.
For example, it shows how at carbon contents in the cast iron range, between 3%C and 5%C, this
temperature is low, reaching 1150°C (2100°F ) at about 4.3%C. The low freezing temperature is a
major reason why cast iron products can be produced with relative ease and low cost.
Between any two single-phase regions, in a horizontal sense on the phase diagram, are two-phase
regions.
For example, a steel with a carbon content of 0.4% at a t emperature of 760°C (1400°F ) lies in the
two-phase region with ferrite on the left and austenite on the right. Thus the diagram predicts that
this steel at this t emperature would consist of a mixture of ferrite and austenite.
By constructing an artificial horizontal line across the t wo-ph ase region at the temperature of
interest , the relative amounts of ferrite and austenite, as well as their carbon content s can be
predicted. Thus for the 0.4%C steel at 760°C, the left (ferrite) end of the horizontal line intersects
the ferrite solubility limit line PG at about 0.01%C, read from the composition scale across th e
bottom ofthe diagram, so this is the predicted carbon content of the ferrite.
Correspondingly, the right (austenite) end of the artificial horizontal line intersects the austenite
solubility limit line HE at about 0.7%C, which is the predicted carbon content of the austenite. The
horizontal position of the alloy composition, 0.4%C, relative to the two ends of the line, 0.01%C and
0.7%C, permits the relative amounts offerrite and austenite to be determined; th e closer the overall
alloy composition is to the austenite end of the line, the more austenite is present in the steel's
microstructure. In this case, there is somewhat more austenite than ferrite present because the
alloy composition, 0.4%C, is somewhat closer to 0.7% than to 0.01%.

I 0
I
I
I
2804 °F o+L L I
A I
(1540 °C) (liquid) I
I
(delta 0
ferrite)
I
I
I
·-./E
..r::::
Q.
2545 °F I ~
0)
(1395 °C) I -1-
')'+L I ......./
c~
I
c(0~
v' I
I
')' 2100 °F \ - )(" I
E Fe 3 C
(austenite) (1150°C) M
j
Eutectic
G
A3
a +y
A-
2
-- -- N
p (725 °C)
\ 0.025 j
(ferrite) Eutectoid
a (ferrite) + Fe3 C (cementite)
0.008
aI o.4 0.8 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.3 5.0 6.0
I I ()
0.0 6.67
Hypoeutectoid Hypereutectoid
Steels Cast Irons
r-..lron
Figure 10 - The iron-iron carbide phase diagram.
©Codes and Standards Training Insti tute (CAST I)
Notebook Page 206

In this manner, the phase diagram is used to predict the equilibrium phase structure of any alloy at
any temperature, including which phases are present, their individual phase compositions (i.e. their
carbon contents) and their relative amounts.
Phase diagrams can also be used to predict the changes (transformations) which occur during
heating and cooling, as long as the temperature changes are slow as explained above.
For example, one typical heat treatment given to a 0.2%C steel consists of slowly cooling from a
temperature in the austenite region of the phase diagram, say 900°C (1650°F). In this case, the
phase diagram predicts that when the austenite temperature falls below the line GH, about 865°C
(1590°F), ferrite begins to form in the austenite. As the temperature continues t o decrease, more
and more ferrite forms so that by the time the steel reaches a temperature just above the horizontal
725°C (1337°F) boundary, line HP, about three-quarters of it has transformed to ferrite, while the
rest remains austenite. On cooling through the 725°C (1337°F) temperature line, the ferrite remains
unaffected, while all of the remaining austenite transforms to a mixture of ferrite and cementite.
There is little change during further slow cooling to room temperature so that the final
microstructure of the steel consists mainly of ferrite, with a small amount of cementite.
It is important to remember that all of these heat treatments which involve the cooling of austenite
occur completely in the solid state. Austenite is a solid, as are its transformation products when it is
cooled. This type of h eat treatment is typically carried out after the material has been formed into
its final or near-final shape.
This phase diagram in Figure 10 shows the phase behavior of iron-carbon alloys with compositions
up to 6.67%C; it is therefore called the iron-iron carbide (Fe-FeaC) phase diagram. It is equally
possible to show a phase diagram which covers the full range of carbon contents from pure iron to
pure carbon, however carbon contents of greater than 6.67% are not relevant to useful ferrous alloys.
The ranges of carbon content applicable to plain carbon steels and to cast irons are sh own in
Figure 10 below the bottom of the diagram.
In reality, the Fe-FeaC phase diagram shown in Figure 10 is a metastable phase diagram rather
than a true equilibrium phase diagram. Since graphite is thermodynamically more stable than iron
carbide, an equilibrium phase diagram would have iron at one end and graphite at the other and
iron carbide would not be shown. However iron carbide formation is kinetically favored over
graphite formation, and the conversion of iron carbide to graphite is normally extremely slow.
For example, iron carbide is present in steels which are more than 3000 years old. For t his reason
the Fe-FeaC system is applied to most ferrous alloys as if it were an equilibrium diagram. The
boundaries of the iron-rich phases (a, y, o) are not appreciably different in the Fe-Fe3 C phase
diagram and the Fe-C (graphite) phase diagram. However alloying elements can have a significant
influence on whether FeaC or graphite forms; this is particularly important in cast irons.

Eutectic and Eutectoid Equilibriums and Points
There are a number of other important features on the iron-iron carbide phase diagram in Figure 10.
The point at 0.8%C, 725°C (1337°F ) is called the eutectoid point, while the eutectic point is at 4.3%C,
1150°C (2100°F). The eutectic point is important for cast irons, while the eutectoid point applies to
steels. These two points and their corresponding equilibrium reactions are defined in ASTM E7 as
follows.
eutectic equilibrium- a reversible univariant transformation in which a liquid, that

is stable only at superior temperature, decomposes into two or more conjugate solid
phases; for example, L = y + Fe3C.
eutectic point- the composition of a liquid phase that is in univariant equilibrium

with two or more solid phases; the lowest melting alloy of a composition series.
eutectoid equilibrium-a reversible univariant transformation in which one solid

phase, that is stable only at superior temperature, decomposes into two or more
conjugate solid phases; for example, y = a+ Fe3C.
eutectoid point- the composition of a solid phase which, upon cooling, undergoes
univariant transformation into two, or more, other solid phases.
Steels with the eutectoid composition, 0.8%C, are referred to as eutectoid steels, steels with less
carbon are called hypoeutectoid steels while those with more carbon are called hypereutectoid steels.
Most structural and pressure equipment steels are hypoeutectoid steels, where ASME B&PV Code
Section VIII Div. 1, UCS-5 restricts welded components to a maximum of 0.30% C. On the other
hand, most tool steels are hypereutectoid steels.
Practice Problem Q8: Fe-Fe3 C Phase Diagram

Which of the following phases is located directly above the eutectoid temperature in the Fe-Fe3C
phase diagram?
a) martensite
b) delta ferrite
c) liquid
d) ferrite + cementite
e) austentite
Notebook Page 208

Lower Critical (Al) Temp erature
Very important for steel heat treating is the line PN, called the eutectoid temperature, also referred
to as the lower critical temperature or the A1 temperature. This is the first transformation line
reached on slowly heating steel from room temperature, i.e. the temperature at which austenite first
begins to form during slow heating.
The following table from ASME B31.1 Power Piping, shows the effects of added molybdenum and
chromium in alloys steels compared to carbon steel which raises the lower critical temperature.
ASME 831 .1 Table 129.3.1 Approximate Lower Critical Temperatures

Approximate Lower Critical
Material Temperatures, oF CC) [Note (1 )]
carbon steel (P-No. 1) 1,340 (725) ·.- ---,
carbon-1/2Mo steel (P-No. 3) 1,350 (730)
1Cr-112Mo (P-No. 4, Gr. No.1) 1,375 (745)
1114Cr-1J2Mo (P-No. 4, Gr. No. 1) 1,430 (775)
2114Cr- 1Mo, 3Cr-1Mo (P-No. 5A) 1,480 (805)
5Cr-1J2Mo (P-No. 58, Gr. No. 1) 1,505 (820)
9Cr 1,475 (800)
Note (1 ): These values are intended for guidance only. The user may apply
values obtained for the specific material in lieu of these values.
Upper Critical (A.g) Temperature
The line GH represents the temperature at which the last ferrite disappears from hypoeutectoid
steels on heating so that the entire microstructure then consists of austenite; this is referred to as
the A3 temperature or upper critical temperature. Note that unlike the A1 temperature, the A3
temperature depends on the carbon content of the steel.
For hypereutectoid steels the corresponding temperature line is the line HE (known as the Acm
temperature), the temperature at which the last cementite disappears on heating.
Curie (A2) Temperature
The A2 temperature is the Curie temperature of the ferrite, where an iron magnet will lose its
magnetism if h eated above the Curie temperature. ASTM E7 defines the Curie point as follows.
Curie point-that temperature above which a substance becomes paramagnetic.
NotP.honk Pr~nP. ?09

At Temperature
The temperature given by line JI , the lowest t emperature at which delta (a)-ferrite is stable, is
called the A4 temperature.
In fact, for real heating and cooling processes, which occur at finite rates, and bearing in mind the
need for sufficient time for atoms to diffuse as discussed above, these phase transformations do not
occur at exactly the same temperatures on heating as they do on cooling.
Ar and Ac Temperatures
Specifically the transformation temperatures on heating are higher than on cooling, the extent of the
discrepancy (or hysteresis) increasing at higher cooling or heating rates. For this reason they are
distinguished in the terminology as Ar and A c temperatures, the r and c referring to the French
words refroidissement and chauf{age for cooling and heating r espectively.
For example, the Ac 1 temperature is higher than the Ar1 temperature. In this way slight departures
from equilibrium are represented.
Practice Problem 09: Fe- Fe 3 C Phase Diagram

Which of the following terms is not used in the Fe-FeaC phas e diagram?
a) martensite
b) eutectic point
c) eutectoid temper ature
d) lower critical temperature
e) upper critical temperature
Notebook Page 210

Heat Treating of Steel
The term heat treatment is defined in ASTM A941 as follows.
Heat treatment, n- heating and cooling a steel object in such a way as to obtain
desired conditions or properties.
Discussion-heating for the sole purpose of hot working is excluded from the
meaning of this definition.
Austenitizing
The heat treating of steel normally begins with heating into the austentite temperature range and
allowing the pre-existing microstructure to transform fully to austenite as required by the phase
diagram, which is known as austenitizing and is defined in ASTM A941 as follows.
Austenitizing, n- forming austenite by heating a steel object above the

transformation range.
This austenitizing process may be carried out in any one of a number of atmospheres including air,
inert gas, vacuum or molten salt. The hot austenitic steel is then cooled at some rate ranging from
slow to rapid cooling (e.g. as little as 50°F (10°C) per hour by cooling in a hot furnace versus 1000°F
(537°C) per second by quenching in chilled brine).
When a steel is hot-worked, such as during rolling, forging, drawing, etc., it is typically done in the
austenitizing temperature range, defined in A941 as follows.
Hot working, n-mechanical deformation of a metal at temperatures above its

recrystallization tern perature.
The term as-rolled related to steel plate production does not address whether the rolling is
performed hot or cold or by some other means, defined in ASTM A941 as follows.
Plate-as-rolled, n-the quantity of plate product rolled at one time, either from an
individual slab or directly from an ingot.
Discussion-This term does not refer to the surface condition or the heat-treatment
state of the material; a plate-as-rolled may be in the as-rolled condition, or may have
received one or more surface treatments or heat treatments, or both.
©Codes and Standards Training Institute (CASTI}
1\lnt<>hnf\lt p,,.,,. ?11

Annealing
Annealing steel is used for purposes such as reducing hardness, improving machinability,
facilitating cold working, producing a desired microstructure, or obtaining desired mechanical,
physical, or other properties. Full annealing is defined in ASTM A941 as follows.
full annealing, n-annealing a steel object by austenitizing it and then cooling it

slowly through the transformation range.
Discussion-The austenitizing temperature is usually above Ac3 for hypoeutectoid

steels and between Ac 1 and Accm for hypereutectoid steels.
Austentiting is the first step prior to annealing, normalizing, or quench and tempering heat
treatments. When slow cooling austenitized steel, the chemical composition of the steel, section
thickness, and the cooling rate will determine whether annealing or normalizing is performed.
The term annealing is a generic term covering any of several heat treatments, including box
annealing, bright annealing, flame annealing, full annealing, graphitization annealing, intermediate
annealing, isothermal annealing, process annealing, recrystallization annealing, spheroidizing, and
subcritical annealing.
The term "annealing" without qualification, implies full annealing. Any process of annealing will
usually reduce stresses; however, if the treatment is applied for the sole purpose of stress reduction,
it should be designated stress relieving.
N orm alizing
Normalizing, n- heating a steel object to a suitable temperature above the

transformation range and then cooling it in air to a temperature substantially below
the transformation range.
It is important to remember that the cooling rate is normally not uniform throughout the cross-
section of the steel object, particularly at rapid cooling rates, and that many objects have varying
section thicknesses that will cool at different rates.
For example, the inside of a thick section can only cool by conducting its heat to the surface, where it
is removed into the cooling medium; this is always a relatively slow process. The consequence is
that if a thick section of steel is quenched, its smface undergoes a much higher cooling rate than its
center, and therefore the surface and the center can have different microstructures and properties.
Furthermore there will be residual stresses in the material associated with this situation. These
effects can be beneficial or detrimental to the application of the material. However in the following
discussion such complications will be avoided by considering only the cooling of a thin section, where
it can be assumed that the cooling rate is constant throughout the cross-section.
Notebook Page 212

Figure 11 - A normalized carbon steel, where the ferr ite grains
are the white areas and the pearlite is the darker areas. Mag. 750X
, ......-r- rr -~ • 0• 1
Example Q1 0: Normalizing Heat Treatment

One of the requirements for normalizing ASTM A333 Grade 6 piping is as follows.
A333/A333M Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe for Low-
Temperature Service
4.3 Heat Treatment:

4.3.1 All seamless and welded pipe, other than Grades 8 and 11, shall be treated to
control their microstructure in accordance with one of the following methods:
4.3.1.1 Normalize by heating to a uniform temperature of not less than 1500 oF [815 °CJ
and cool in air or in the cooling chamber of an atmosphere controlled furnace.
Note: the purpose of austenitization is to <lissolve all carbon into solid solution, however, this is
t ime-dependent function. Austenitization time for carbon s teels depends on the thickness (shape) of
the st eel part, its carbon content, heating medium (i.e, atmospheric gas versus liquid salt), and is
frequently specified as one hour per inch of thickness.
Upon slow cooling from the austenitizing temperature, there is no change until the A3 temperature
is reached, at which time the fcc austenite begins t o transform to the bee ferrite. By the time the
temperature is just above the A1 temperature, enough ferrite has formed that the carbon content of
the remaining austenite has reached 0.8%C, the eutectoid composition.
Notebook Paae 213

As the slow cooling proceeds and the temperature drops below A1, the untransformed austenite
becomes unstable and transforms to pearlite. The microstructure is then a mixture of ferrite and
pearlite, the pearlite being itself a mixture of ferrite and cementite. This is shown in Figure 11,
where the ferrite grains are the white areas and the pearlite is darker. Cooling from the A1
temperature to room temperature produces virtually no further phase changes.
The relative amounts of pearlite and ferrite in a 0.4% carbon steel can be estimated by noting that
they are the same as the relative amounts of austenite and ferrite which exist just above the A1
temperature, i.e. about equal amounts of each. Slowly cooled steels with carbon contents less than
0.4%C will thus have microstructures containing more ferrite and less pearlite than the 0.4%C steel.
On the other hand the microstructures of slowly cooled steels containing between 0.4%C and the
eutectoid composition, 0.8%C, will contain more pearlite than ferrite.
An effect of more rapid cooling (e.g., forced air versus still air cooling) is that the pearlite forms at a
temperature below the A1. As a result it forms with thinner lamellae offerrite and cementite, called
fine pearlite. On the other hand, slower cooling (e.g., as in annealing) will result in coarse pearlite.
Also, the pearlitic interlamellar spacing between ferrite and iron-carbide (i.e., coarse versus fine
pearlite) varies directly with the transformation temperature; that is, the higher the austenitizing
temperature, the coarser the pearlite will become.
Figure 12 shows a steel with 1.3% C, illustrating grains of pearlite with a (white) network of
cementite along the pearlite grain boundaries. These grains boundaries were established by the
prior austenite grains.
Figure 12 - A hypereutectoid steel (1.3% C) illustrating pearlite with a

(white) network of cementite along the prior austenite grain boundaries.
Notebook Page 214

The presence of alloying elements distorts the iron-iron carbide phase diagram by shifting the
positions of the various lines according to the particular alloying element and the amount added.
Furthermore, as mentioned previously, fast er rates of heating or cooling, such as those occurring
during quenching or welding, greatly exceed the equilibrium rates so that the transformation
r eactions are shifted, delayed or simply do not have sufficient time to occur.
Practice Problem Q11: Heat Treatment

When the term annealing is used without qualification, which of the following does it imply?
a) box annealing
b) full annealing
c) isothermal annealing
d) process annealing
e) recrystallization annealing
-
Which heat treatment involves austenitizing followed slow cooling in air to a temperature
substant ially below the transformation range?
a) austempering
b) a nnealing
c) normalizing
d) tempering
e) quench and tempering

What is the purpose of austenitization when annealing or normalizing a carbon steel?
a) to for m ferrite
b) t o dissolve all carbon into a solid solution
c) to dissolve all carbon into a liquid solution
d) to form pearlite
e) to deoxidize the st eel
Notebook Paoe 215

Quench and Tempering
After a ustenitizing, if the time available during cooling is insufficient to permit the atom diffusion
which is necessary for ferrite and pearlite to form, then other non-desirable microstruct ural
constituents may form. In this event, tempering must follow, as defined in A941 as follows.
tempering, n- reheating a quench hardened or normalized steel object to a

temperature below Ac1 , and then cooling it at any desired rate.
These higher cooling r ates can be obtained by quenching the steel after austenitizing, i.e. by
removing it from th e furnace and immediately immer sing it in a cold medium with particular heat
transfer ch ar acteristics . Common examples, listed in order of increasing cooling rate, include:
• forced air ,
• oil quenching,
• water quenching,
• polymer quenching, and
• brine (salt water) quenching.
Quench media may be subjected to various degrees of agitation, which increases the cooling rate and
permits more uniform cooling.
In genera l it is desira ble to utilize the mmunum cooling r ate necessary to achieve the desired
microstructure, as more rapid cooling increases the magnitude of the residual stresses left in the
quenched component , with consequent increased probability of distortion or cracking (quench
cracking).
Example 014: Quench and Tempering Heat Treatment

Two r equirements for tempering ASTM A333 Grade 6 piping ar e as follows .
Temperature Service
4.3 Heat Treatment:

4.3.1.2 Normalize, and at the discretion of the manufacturer, reheat to a suitable
tempering temperature.
4.3. 1.5 Seamless pipe of Grades 1, 6, and 10 may be heat treated by heating to a
uniform temperature of not less than 1500 °F [815 °C), followed by quenching in liquid
and reheating to a suitable tempering temperature, in place of any of the other heat
treatments provided for in 4.3.1 .
Notebook Page 216

Double Tem pering
In some medium and high carbon steels, tools steel, and alloy steels, a second tempering heat
treatment is required to ensure sufficient reduction in residual stresses after quenching, which is called
double tempering and is defined in ASTM A941, with an example from ASTM A333, as follows.
double tempering, n-a treatment in which a quench hardened steel object is given
two complete tempering cycles at substantially the same temperature for the purpose
of ensuring completion of the tempering reaction and promoting stability of the
resultant microstructure.
Example 015: Double Tempering Heat Treatment
A487/A487M Heat Treat Reguirement

Austenitizing Quenching Tempering
Grade Class Media
Temp., min. Cool Below Temperature
CA15 C and D 1750°F {955°C} Air or Liquid 400°F {205°C}
1150°F (620°C)
Air cool to below 200°F (95°C] after first temper.
Double temper with the final temper at a lower temperature than the intermediate temper.
Double Normalizing
There are occasions when the grain size of a steel must be tightly controlled to avoid brittle at low
temperatures wh ere a double normalizing heat treatment may be specified, as shown in the
following example.
~ - .. - .... ._..... ~
Example 016: Double Normalizing Heat Treatment

One of the requirements for double normalizing ASTM A333 Grade 6 piping is as follows.
Temperature Service
4.3 Heat Treatment:

4.3.2.2 Double Normalized and Tempered-Heat to a uniform temperature of 1650 ± 25
°F (900 ± 15 oC]; hold at this temperature for a minimum time in the ratio of 1 h/in. [2
min/mm] of thickness, but in no case less than 15 min; cool in air. Reheat until the pipe
attains a uniform temperature Of 1450 ± 25 °F [790 6 15 °C]; hold at thiS temperature for
a minimum time in the ratio of 1 h/in. [2 min/mm] of thickness, but in no case less than
15 min; cool in air. Reheat to a uniform temperature within the range from 1050 to 1125
°F (565 to 605 °C]; hold at this temperature for a minimum time of 1 h/in. (2 min/mm] of
thickness but in no case less than 15 min; cool in air or water quench at a rate not less
than 300 oF [1 65 °C]/h.
Notebook Paoe 217

Mechanical Properties Mter Annealin g, Normalizing, an d Quench and Tempering
For carbon steels, tempering can be performed in a wide range of temperatures and time depending
on the amount of residual stress reduction is required and the objects mech anical properties. In
general, for carbon and alloy steels, the higher the tempering t emperature or longer the longer the
tempering time, the tensile strength and hardness will be reduced, while the percent elongation and
reduction of area will be increased, as shown in the next example.
Quenched
and
425 800 370 181 1248
Tempered
540 1000 285 138 951
650 1200 230 110 758
• Excerpt from the Handbook of Steel Data: American and European. with permission from ASTM.
Tempering temperature range for most carbon steels is typically from 400°F to 1200°F, although the
900°F to 1100°F is the most common.

When is a tempering h eat treatment for alloy steel commonly performed?
a) after austenitizing
b) after annealing
c) after normalizing
d) after austenitizing, followed by quenching
e) both c and d -1
Notebook Page 218

P o st-Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT)
A special type of tempering is commonly performed on carbon and alloy steels after welding, which is
known as post-weld heat treatment (PWHT), sometimes called postheating, defined as follows.
ASME IX- QW-490

Postweld heat treatment: any heat treatment subsequent to welding.
ASTMA941
Post-weld heat treatment, n- heating weldments immediately after welding, to
provide tempering, stress relieving, or a controlled rate of cooling t o prevent
formation of a hard or brittle microstructure.
AWSA3.0
Postheating: the application of heat to an assembly after brazing, soldering, thermal
spraying, thermal cutting, or welding.
Base Metal Group
Carbon steel
Alloy steels,
3
Crs1!.2%
Alloy steels,
4
11.2% < Cr s 2%
Alloy steels,
5A,58,5C C
2.25% s r 10%
Note: the PWHT requirements in the above table for carbon and allow steels are a few hundred
degrees below the lower critical temperature, whereas tempering is performed over a wider range of
temperatures (e.g., 400°F to 1200°F for carbon steels). It is for this reason that PWHT is a special
type of tempering, although both heat treatments have the common purposes of controlling the
microstructure, reducing residual stresses, and controlling m echanical properties.
Practice Problem 020: Heat Treatment

-
At what temperature is post-weld heat treatment of carbon and alloy steels most commonly
performed?
a) in the intercritical range

b) a bove th e lower critical temperature
c) in the austenitizing range
d) below the lower critical temperature /
e) below the lower critical temperature in the aust enitizing range
Notebook Paae 219

Steel Microstructures After Quenching (Fast Cooling)
Martens ite Formation
History: the term martensite was coined by Floris Osmond, a French steelworks engineer, in the
late 19th century and named by him in honour of Professor Adolf Martens, a German railway
engineer who in 1878 founded an independent centre for metallographic research.
If austenite can be cooled to a sufficiently low temperature, for example by cooling very rapidly, its
diffusion-controlled transformation to ferrite, pearlite or even bainite will not be possible. Instead,
the austenite becomes so unstable that it is able to change its crystal structure by a diffusionless
shearing transformation which moves blocks of atoms by small distances simultaneously. The
transformation product is then martensite, a metastable phase which, like bainite, does not appear
on the phase diagram since it does not exist under equilibrium conditions. Martensite is defined in
ASTM E7, as follows.
martensite: metastable phase resulting from the diffusionless athermal decomposition

of austenite below a certain temperature known as the Ms temperature (martensite
start temperature). It is produced during quenching when the cooling rate of a steel, in
the a ustenitic condition, is such that the pearlite and bainite, or both, transformation is
suppressed. The composition of the martensite is identical with that of the austenite
from which it transformed. Hence, martensite is a super-saturated soUd solution of
carbon in alpha iron (fen-ite) having a body-centered tetragonal lattice. It is a magnetic
plate-like constituent formed by a diffusionless shear type of transformation. These
plates may appear needle-like or veriform in cross-section.
The ma rtensite structure is basically the result of the steel's attempt to transform from austenite
(fcc) to ferrite (bee), a process which is prevented by the presence in the austenite of a large amount
of carbon, an amount far above the very low solubility limit of carbon in ferrite. This large
supersaturation of carbon prevents a true bee structure from forming so that the martensite is
therefore a compromise structure. It can be thought of as a bee structure which is highly distorted to
accommodate the presence of the excessive amounts of carbon which are trapped at interstitial sites
within the martensite structure. As a result, martensite possesses a crystal structure which is body-
centered but not cubic; it is rather a body-centered tetragonal (bet) structure as shown in Figure 13.
0 for
Range of positions
iron atoms
Figure 13 - Austenite (fcc) to martensite (bet) trans formation.
Notebook Page 220

The distortion of the crystal structure, and the associated residual stresses, ar e responsible for the
very high hardness and strength and the extremely poor ductility and toughness of martensite. The
amount of distortion depends on the carbon content, as shown in Figure 14, since there is more
carbon trapped in t he martensites of higher carbon steels.
3.05
3 .00
o<{
c"
0
'iii 2.95
c
Q)
-~ "' "'
"' "'
0
2.90
Q)
(.)
"'
E
Cll
_J
"' "'
~-- - - - a - axis
2.85
2.80 1---J....----.1---1.---1.-.....1..-.....1...-.....1..-...1.
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0 .8 1 .0 1.2 1.4 1.6
%Carbon
Figure 14 - Distortion effect on bet structure due to carbon content.

The a- axis and c- axis are shown in Figure 13.
This in turn causes the hardness of martensite to be directly related to carbon content (up to a
limiting hardness at a bout 0.8%C), as shown in Figure 15.
60
()
a:
I
c.5
Q)
~
.::t!
(.)
0
a:
(/)
(/)
Q)
c
"E
Cll
I
0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 1.20

%Carbon
Figure 15 - Effect of carbon on martensite hardness.
NntP.hnnk P!lnP ?71

Because of the high strains associated with the martensite transformation, martensite forms in
s mall plates or laths within the austenite grains. The appearance of this microstructure is often
described as acicular, meaning needle-like, as shown in Figure 16. However, close examination
shows that the appearance of martensite depends on its carbon content, with high carbon
martensites exhibiting lenticular or plate-like morphology while low-carbon martensites are lath-
like. In the intermediate range of carbon content both lath a nd plate types are present. Any
untransformed austenite, r eferred to as retained austenite, which r emains in the microstructure
appears between the martensite plates or between packets of martensite laths.
Figure 16 - Acicular martensite showing needle-like appearance.

Mag. 475X
As mentioned a bove, in order for martensite to form , austenite must be brought to a sufficiently low
temperature at a cooling rate which is rapid enough that the formation of ferrite, pearlite and
bainite are avoided. Thus there is a critical cooling rate which must be exceeded in order to form
martensite. At cooling rates slightly less than this critical rate, mixtures of martensite with the
other transformation products, usually pearlite, are formed. This is described as a slack-quenched
microstructure. The austenite in steels of higher carbon content requires more carbon diffusion in
order to form the ferrite , pearlite or bainite constituents, h ence ma rtensite can be formed more
easily, i.e. the critical cooling rate is lower for higher carbon steels. In low carbon steels, it is very
difficult to form martensite as prohibitively high cooling r ates are r equired. This is especially true
in thick sections since, as mentioned above, cooling is never r apid in the center of a thick section.
Notebook Page 222

Martensite Temperatures
During rapid cooling of austenite, martensite begins to form only when the austenite has reached a
sufficiently low temperature, called the martensite start or M8 temperature, and the austenite-to-
martensite transformation is not complete until the temperature has fallen below an even lower
temperature, the martensite finish or Mr temperature. Both of these terms are defined in ASTM
F2809 Standard Terminology Relating to Medical and Surgical Materials and Devices, as follows.
martensite start temperature (MJ , n- (in nitinol), temperature at which the

transformation from austenite to martensite begins on cooling in a single-stage
transformation or the temperature at which the transformation from R-phase to
martensite begins on cooling in a two-stage transformation.
martensite finish temperature (Mp, n-(in nitinol), temperature at which the

transformation from austenite to martensite is completed on cooling in a single-stage
transformation or the temperature at which the transformation from R-phase to
martensite is completed on cooling in a two-stage transformation.
ASTM A941 defines the martensite range as follows.
martensite range, n-the temperature interval betw een M 8 and Mr.
Since higher carbon martensites are more highly distorted, higher carbon austenite must be cooled
further below the eutectoid temperature, i.e. to a lower temperature, in order that it becomes
sufficiently unstable to form martensite. Thus the M8 and Mr temperatures decrease with increasing
carbon content of the steels. Alloying elements (other than Co) also lower the M8 and Mr
ternperatures.
The Mr temperatures of medium and high carbon steels can be below room t emperature, with the
consequence that if such a steel is austenitized and quenched to room temperature, its
microstructure can consist of a mixture of martensite along with some austenite that does not
transform, known as retained austenite. This retained austenite can affect mechanical properties by
lowering the strength and increasing the toughness, but is generally considered to be undesirable
since it can cause problems by transforming t o (brittle) martensite during subsequent stages of heat
t reatment or service.
Martensite can also be produced from austenite when the object is mechanically deformed at a
sufficiently high temperature, known as the martensite deformation temperature (M d) which is
defmed in ASTM F2809 as follows.
martensite deformation temperature (Md), n-th e highest temperature at which

martensite will form from the austenite phase in response to an a pplied stress.
Notebook Paoe 223

Tempered Martensite
Although martensite is a very hard, strong, wear resistant material it lacks ductility and toughness,
so much so that in all but low carbon steels brittle failure of martensite is so easily initiated that its
strength cannot normally even be measured. Thus a steel through-hardened (transformed to
martensite throughout its thickness) is not a satisfactory engineering material for roost applications.
However, a smface layer of martensite on a tougher ferrite-pearlite base can provide useful
properties as discussed below. Furthermore, and even more usefully, martensite can be heat treated
by tempering to obtain a tempered martensite microstructure with properties which are appropriate
for industrial purposes and is defined in ASTM E7 as follows.
tempered martensite: the decomposition products which result from heating

martensite to temperatures below the ferrite austenite (A~!l) transformation temper.
Under the light microscope, darkening of the martensite needles is observed in the
initial stages of tempering. Prolonged tempering at high temperatures produces
spheroidized carbides in a matrix of ferrite. At the higher resolution of the electron
microscope, the initial stage of tempering is observed to result in a structure
containing a precipitate of fine epsilon iron carbide particles. At about 500°F (260°C),
there is a transition to a structure of larger and elongated cementite particles in a
ferrite matrix. With further tempering at higher temperature, the cementite
particles become spheroidal, decreased in number, and increased in size.
This tempering heat treatment allows a limited amount of carbon diffusion in the distorted bet
martensite structure, so as to allow some degree of structural change (e.g. limited carbide
formation). This reduces the distortion of the martensite and its internal stresses, with a
consequent increase in ductility and toughness at some expense to hardness, strength and wear
resistance. The extent of tempering and hence the mechanical properties can be controlled by
varying the tempering time and temperature.
As predicted by the iron-iron carbide phase diagram , the stable structure for a carbon steel at
ambient temperature is a mixture of ferrite and cementite. Thus during tempering martensite, a
non-equilibrium (metastable) phase, tends to decompose in the direction of ferrite and cementite. At
normal ambient temperatures, the mobility of carbon in martensite is too low for such changes to
occur, and examples of martensite are known which date from more than 3000 years ago. Thus for
engineering purposes, martensite can be considered stable.
However if carbon is given the chance to diffuse, by tempering even at relatively low temperatures
(e .g. hours at as little as 150°C or 300°F) then the amount of carbon diffusion can be sufficient to
permit important changes in the martensite.
At low tempering temperatures and/or short tempering times, decomposition of the martensite is
minimal and the martensite remains hard and strong with slight increases in ductility and
toughness. In the extreme, after tempering at high temperatures (still below the eutectoid
temperature of 725°C or 1337°F) for long times, decomposition of the martensite can be so complete
that its mechanical properties approach those offerrite (i.e. soft, ductile, low strength).
Notebook Page 224

Thus the tempering temperature and time at temperature can be selected so as to achieve the
specified mechanical properties, i.e. the balance between strength and toughness necessary for the
intended application. This range of obtainable properties make quenched and t empered (Q & T)
steels among the most versatile and useful engineering materials.
The actual changes that occur in the martensite during tempering are complex and depend on the
tempering time and temperature. Among the effects are the precipitation of several types of iron
carbides, including cementite, and the decomposition of retained austenite. During very h eavy
t empering at high temperatures the martensite decomposes to cementite and ferrite, as predicted by
the phase diagram, however the cementite here is in the form of coarse spheroidal particles (Figure
17), quite unlike the normal lamellar structure of pearlite.
Figure 17 - Tempered martensite exhibiting

spheroidized cementite in a matrix of ferrite.
In fact this s pheroidized morphology of the ferrite-cementite microstructure is more energetically

stable than lamellar pearlite, so if pearlite is held at high temperatures (below but close to 725°C
[1337°F)) for long times either during heat treatment or in service, its cementite lamellae will
gradually spheroidize also, giving a microstructure similar to that of very heavily tempered
martensite.
Alloying elements, such as chromium and molybdenum, affect the tempering of martensite in
several r espects. For example, alloying elements generally reduce the rate at which martensit e
tempers, as well as changing the type of carbide which precipitates during tempering from an iron
carbide to an alloy carbide.
Furthermore the combined presence of alloying elements and impurities can be responsible for the
occurrence of temper embrittlement, a loss of r oom t emperature ductility when alloy steels are
tempered in the range 350-525°C (660-980°F). However the most important effect of alloying
elements is on the hardenability, and this is discussed in the following section.
Notebook Page 225

Bainite Formation
History: In 1934 the term bainite was given to honour Dr. Edgar Collins Bain by his colleagues at
the U.S. Steel Corp. Kearny Laboratory in New Jersey; Dr. Bain retired as a Vice-President of
Research and Technology, U.S. Steel Corp. in 1957. In 1930, Dr. Bain and E. S. Davenport.
Transformation of austenite at constant subcritical
temperatures.
Bainite (upper, lower, intermediate) is a constituent which forms from austenite in a temperature
range below about 535°C (1000°F) and above a critical temperature (the M8 temperature) which
depends on carbon content and is about 275°C (525°F) for eutectoid steel and is defined in ASTM E 7
as follows.
bainite-upper, lower, intermediate- metastable microstructure or microstructures

resulting from the transformation of austenite at temperatures between those which
produce pearlite and martensite. These structures may be formed on continuous
(slow) cooling if the transformation rate of austenite to pearlite is much slower than
that of austenite to bainite. Ordinarily, these structures may be formed isothermally
at temperatures within the above range by quenching austenite to a desired
temperature and holding for a period of t ime necessary for transformation to occur. If
the transformation temperature is just below that at which the fmest pearlite is
formed, the bainite (upper bainite) has a feathery appearance. If the transformation
temperature is just above that at which martensite is produced, the bainite (lower
bainite) is acicular, resembling slightly tempered martensite. At the higher
resolution of the electron microscope, upper bainite is observed to consist of plates of
cementite in a matrix of ferrite. These discontinuous carbide plates tend to have
parallel orientation in the direction of the longer dimension of the bainite areas.
Lower bainite consists of ferrite needles containing carbide platelets in parallel array
cross-striating each needle axis at an angle of about 60°. Intermediate bainite
resembles upper bainite; however, the carbides are smaller and more randomly
oriented.
Bainite forms together with pearlite in steels which are cooled somewhat too rapidly to permit full
transformation to pearlite. Bainite is, like pearlite, a mixture of ferrite and iron carbide, but its
morphology is different from that of pearlite, as its formation involves both atomic diffusion and a
diffusionless shuffle of atoms referred to as shear. This latter characteristic enables bainite to form
at cooling rates faster than the maximum at which pearlite can form.
Furthermore the details of bainite formation depend strongly on the temperature at which the
austenite transforms. At transformation temperatures in the upper part of the bainite formation
range, upper bainite is formed. This is a rather feathery-appearing microstructural constituent, in
contrast to lower bainite which forms at lower temperatures and is finer and more lenticular (lens-
shaped).
The distinction between upper and lower bainite is significant, and they can differ appreciably in
mechanical properties. For the most part, a steel with a bainitic microstructure is harder, stronger
Notebook Page 226

and tougher at low temperatures than steels with ferrite-pearlite or fully pearlitic microstructures
and equivalent carbon content.
Unfortunately it can be extremely difficult to distinguish a steel microstructure as upper or lower

bainite using the optical microscope, or to distinguish upper bainite from fine pearlite or lower
bainite from martensite, a phase which will be discussed at length below. Examination using the
electron microscope is needed to fully characterize bainites.
Hardenability
It is important to distinguish clearly between the terms hardness, hardening, and hardenability, as
defined in ASTM E6 and A941.
hardness, n- the resistance of a material to deformation, particularly permanent

deformation, indentation, or scratching. (E6)
Discussion-Different methods of evaluating hardness give different ratings because
they are measuring somewhat differ ent quantities and characteristics of the
mater ial. There is no absolute scale for h ardness; therefore, to express hardness
quantitatively, each type of test has its own scale of arbitrarily defined hardness.
hardening, n- increasing the hardness by suitable treatment, usually involving

heating and cooling. (A941)
Discussion- Where applicable, it is preferred that the following more specific terms
be used: age hardening, case hardening, flame hardening, induction hardening,
precipitation hardening, and quench hardening.
hardenability, n-the property that determines the depth and distribution of

hardness induced by quenching a steel object. (A941)
The maximum attainable hardness of a carbon or alloy steel is determined by its carbon content for
a given heat treatment (see Figure 15), whereas carbon is also the primary controlling element for a
steel's hardenability.
On the other hand, alloying elements such as Cr, V, B, etc., are added steels to increase the its
hardenability, i.e. to form martensite to a specified depth. This corresponds to the steel having a low
critical cooling rate, i.e. having the ability to form martensite at slower cooling rates.
Steels with low hardenability are those which form only a thin surface layer of martensite when
quenched from the austenite. As mentioned above, this is related to the inherent slowness of the
removal of heat from the center of a thick section, so that the center of a thick section always cools
relatively slowly, as shown in Figure 18.
Notebook Paae 227

(.)
a:
I 70
CJi
(/)
Q)
c 60
12
«l
.!::
Q)
()
50
~
~
(/) 40
u
Q)
.s::
()
cQ)
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
~
0" (25.4) (50.8) (76.2) (1 01.6)
u,
<r Diameter quenched specimen, in (mm)
Figure 18 - Section size effect on surface hardness of 0.54%C steel,

water quenched from 830°C (1525°F).
Steels with higher hardenability commonly have very high hardness and brittleness from the
production of martensite which are normally undesirable, unless they are tempered sufficiently for
their intended application.
In alloy steels, however, the situation is such that a high hardenability can be combined with a good
combination of strength and toughness. This is because alloying elements increase the
hardenability, permitting the attainment of a martensite microstructure, which is suitable for
tempering, at lower cooling rates. This high hardenability is one of the major reasons for the use of
alloy steels.
Practice Problem Q21: Hardenability

What element in steel is the most important factor in determining hardness and hardenability?
a) iron
b) chromium
c) boron
d) vanadium
e) carbon
Notebook Page 228

CCT Diagrams
The CCT diagrams give predictions which are roughly similar to those of IT diagrams but differ in
some important respects such as a general shift of the beginning of the austenite transformation to
lower temperatures and longer times. As well, the formation of bainite is more prevalent on CCT
diagrams, which also give data on hardness after cooling to room temperature, as a function of
cooling rates
An alternative representation of CCT behavior is also available in the form of t emperature plotted
versus bar diameter, rather than time. Since cooling rate is a function of depth below th e surface
when a steel is cooled, it is possible to convert cooling rate to the diameter of a bar whose center
undergoes a particular rate of cooling when the bar is quenched in a given cooling medium. Hence
along the horizontal axis of this type of CCT curve is shown, typically, the bar diameter for air-
cooled, oil-quenched and water-quenched steel of the specific composition for which the diagram is
applicable (Figure 19-23). A vertical line drawn on this diagram predicts the microstructure present
at the center of a bar for a selected diameter and cooling medium. This gives useful representations
of industrial heat treatment behavior.
C Si Mn P S
Start
800
700
0 600
e....
~
:J
<U 500
05
a.
E
~ 400
300
200
100
Bar Diameter (mm)
Figure 19 - CCT diagram for a 0.18%C carbon steel.
Notebook Paqe 229

C Si Mn P S
0.40 0.20 0.70 0.020 0.020
800
700
0
e.... 600
~
:J
(ij 500
Qi
a.
E
~ 400
300
200
100
1000 500 200 100 so 20 10
COOUNG RATE AT 7SO"C "CPERMIN
0.1 0.2 05 10 20 so 100 200 500 1000 2000 mm

t---'---'---'---'-----'.___..__..__ ___..___._ _..__ _.__--~, _ _.__ Air
10
t---.._ ___20.______._
50 100 150 200 300
_____..__.___,.__. __SOO mm
..&...._ Oil
to 20 so 100 ISO 200 300 soomm Water
Bar Diameter (mm)
Figure 20- CCT diagram for a 0.40%C carbon steel.
C Si Mn P S Cr Mo
0. 15 0.30 0.60 0.030 0.030 1.25 0.50
900
800
700
0e.... 600
Q)
:3
~ 500
Q)
a.
E
Q) 400
I-
300
200
100
1000 500 200 100 so 20 10
COOliNG RATEAT7SO'C "C PERMIN
0.1 0.2 0.5

t----''--.....&.--'---'---..__
10 20
_.__........_ _
so
..__..__
100 200
_.__
500 1000 2000
___..__..____..__
mmAir
10 20 so 100 150 200 300 SOOmm
~:1o====~==2o===~=====:so===~====1
o:o=~=1s=o=~2:o~==3:oo~===s:oo=m~m== ~:tar
Bar Diameter (mm)
Figure 21 - CCT diagram for 1.25%Cr-0.50%Mo alloy steel (0.15%C).
Notebook Page 230

C Si Mn P S Cr Mo
0.40 0.20 0.85 0.020 0.020 1.05 0.30
900
800
700 '
0e., 600 ~
~
:J
"§ 500
(])
0.
L
E
(]) 400
~
300
!·-··"·····. . ~~ ..,__.,.,.
200
100
1000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 2 1
COOUNGRATEAT7SO"C "CPfRMIN
0
0 .1 0 .2 0.5 10 20 so 100 200 500 1000 2000 mm
Aif
10 20 so 100 soo mm
150200 300
~1~0---'"--:-2 o:--_.._ _ '--:-5o:.-'----,-oo--'~~:-:-~--~~-~- O il
U..----1------J'----~;._.....J;....;;.a.;_ _ __.J.;__.:..&.;.,.._ Water
Bar Diameter (mm)

Figure 22 - CCT diagram for l.O%Cr-0.30%Mo (4140) alloy steel.
C Si Mn P S Cr Mo
0.17 0.38 0.40 0.020 0.020 12.5 0.20
900
800
700
e.,
~
::J
1il 500
(jj
0.
E
Q) 400
~
300
o1 02 0S 10 20 .so 100 200 500 1000 2000 mm

I----1---'--..L.-..L.---'L..--.L--.L---L..---1--"---'----L--'-- Air
10 20 50 100 150 200 300 500 mm
1---'---:-:-'---~-'---~---:~~.._~._-:-:..__ _ Oil
l-J'o;.__ _-J;_ _ _..;s:.;.o_ _ _ a.;__.J_..;.&.;._~;.__..;J.;_.;__ Water
Bar Diameter (mm)
Figure 23 - CCT diagram for 13%Cr martensitic stainless steel.
Notebook Paoe 231

Grains and Grain Boundaries
A grain in steel is an individual crystallite that is separated from its neighbour by a grain boundary,
as defined in ASTM E7, as follows.
grain-an individual crystallite in metals.
grain boundary- an interface separating two grains, wh ere the orientation of the
lattice changes from that of one grain to that of the other. When the orientation
change is very small the boundary is sometimes referred to as a sub-boundary.
Upon cooling from a liquid, a solid grain will form in 3-dimensions, with each grain growing in a
unique direction and rate, such that each grain in a cast metal is a different size (volume) and
oriented in a different plane, as illustrated in Figur e 24.
b"t" - ----------- .,
"""" c
'' ''
'' ' '
'' ''
'
''' ''
- - - - --..:ll.d '
Figure 24 - Sample of solid polycrystalline metal before being cut for metallographic examination
(Courtesy of The Welding Institute, England)
When a metallographic sample is prepared for examination, the surface is made flat, thereby
allowing only a 2-dimensional smface to be observed under the microscope (see Figure 25). One of
the purposes of the etchant to reveal the grain boundaries and thus permitting the measurement of
the grain size.
F igure 25 - The 2-D surface from the above sample on plane abed.
(Courtesy of T he Welding Institute, England)
Notebook Page 232

Within a grain, the atoms tend to be orient ed in their equilibrium posit ion as an array of atoms, e.g.,
bee structure of ferrite. However, when a grain intersects with a nother grain at a different
orientation, the equilibrium crystal structure of the two grains becom es misaligned. This produces a
disarray of atoms between the grains that appears as grain boundary when metallographically
examined. It is this change in orientation between grains that by producing a grain boundary, allows
for the measurement of grain size.
Grain Size
Among the microstructural parameters which are most useful in characterizing materials is the
grain size. In materials where a second phase is of sufficient amount, size or continuity to be
significant, its grain size may be reported sepa rately (e.g., ferrite and a ustenite in a duplex stainless
steel). Grain size is defined in ASTM E7 as follows.
grain size- the dimensions of the grains or crystals in a polycrystalline metal

exclusive of twinned regions and subgrains when present. Grain size is usually
estimated or measured on the cross section of an aggregate of grains. Common units
are: (1) average diameter, (2) average area, (3) number of grains per linear unit, (4)
number of grains per unit area, and (5) number of grains per unit volume. See Test
Methods E 112.
McQuaid-Ehn grain size-the austenit ic grain size developed in steels by carburizing

at 1700°F (927°C) followed by slow cooling. See Test Methods E112.
ASTM Standard Ell2, Test Method for Determining the Average Grain Size
Grain size determination in single phase materials is carried out on polished and etched
metallographic specimens using ASTM Standar d E112, Test Method for Determining the Average
Grain Size. This st andard lists three methods for determining grain size, namely:
a) Comparison Procedure,
b) Planimetric (J effries') Procedure, and
c) Intercept Procedure.
It must be remembered that the grain size and shape as seen in a metallographic specimen
represent the projection of the tr ue microstructure on a planar sect ion (2-D) taken randomly through
the specimen, while a metal grain is actually a 3-dimensional (3-D) shape. The grain cross-section
as observed in a metallographic specimen is dependent on where the plane of observation cut
through each individual grain. Thus no two fields of observation are identical and samples from t he
same object may sh ow different grain size.
Using a comparison standard is a popular method of measuring grain size since it is simple and
straightforward, defined in ASTM E7 and illustrated in Figure 26, as follows.
comparison standard- a standard micrograph or a series of micrographs, usually

taken at 75 or 100 diamet ers, or a suitable equivalent built into the eyepiece and
used to determine grain size by direct comparison with the image.
Notebook Paqe 233

The ASTM grain size number corresponds to a certain number of grains per unit area of the image
at the specified magnification, as shown in Table 2.
Table 2- ASTM No, Grains/ in2, Grains/mm2

ASTM No. Grains/ in2 at 1OOX Grains/mm2 at 1X
0 0.5 8
1 1 16
2 2 31
3 4 62
4 8 124
5
6
I 16
32 ,_,
-
..
..,_.._ .........--·-
248
496 ..........
7 64 992
8 128 __
.. 1980
9 256 3970
10 1- - ·
512 7940
11 1024 15,870
12 2048 31 ,700
ASTM No. 7 1/2
Figure 26- Examples of ASTM E112 comparison standard

for ASTM grain size No. 5 and No. 7lh .
Notebook Page 23 4
The relationships between the grain size number and the number of grains per unit area are given
by the expressions:
where N= number of grains per square inch (at lOOX magnification), and
n =ASTM grain size number.
or, for SI units:
N = 2(n+3)
where N = number of grains per square millimeter (at lX magnification), and
n = ASTM grain size number (BS4490:1969).
In the Planimetric (Jeffries') Procedure a known area is inscribed in the observed field, and the
grains within this area (minimum 50) are counted (including half the number of grains which
intersect the perimeter of the field) and multiplied by J effries' multiplier. The product is the
number of grains per square millimeter.
The Intercept Method has two procedures, the lineal (Heyn) procedure and the circular procedure.
Both involve placing a grid pattern on the field of observation, and counting the number of grains at
each grid intercept within a selected area.
In recent years, software and procedures have been developed to permit the automatic
determination of grain size directly from images obtain ed in microscopes. A number of these
computerized image analysis systems and procedures are available, generally from microscope
manufacturers or suppliers.
Practice Problem 022: ASTM E112 Grain Size

An ASTM E112 grain size no. 7 has:
a) fewer grains per unit area than grain size no. 5

b) more grains per unit area than grain size no. 9
c) has 70 grains/in2 at lOOX magnification
d) has 992 grains/in2 at lX magnification
e) has 64 grains/in2 at l OOX magnification J
Notebook Page 235

Austenitic Grain Size and Grain Growth in Carbon Steels
During austenitization above the upper critical temperatures (Aa or Acm) temperatures, the previous
microstructure of the steel disappears, pre-existing carbides gradually dissolve, and a new
microstructure consisting of equiaxed austenite grains replaces the old one.
At higher austenitizing temperatures andJor longer austenitizing times the austenite becomes more
homogeneous and opportunity is provided in high carbon steels for more of the pre-existing carbides
to dissolve. However, in addition to these effects, growth of the newly formed austenite grains also
takes place.
For low-carbon and medium carbon steels which have been deoxidized with silicon, the austenite
grain size increases continuously and progressively as the austenitizing temperature is raised above
the Aa temperature, a behavior which is known as grain growth, as defined in ASTM E7 and shown
in the graph as follows.
grain growth- an increase in the grain size of a metal usually as a result of heating
at an elevated temperature.
Heating Temperature (°F) - 15 Minutes

1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100
Q; 6
.0
E
5
z:::J
~
t) 4
<t:
Q)
c75 3
c
·~ 2
<.9
~
c
*:::J
<t: 0
-1
700 800 900 1000 1100

Heating Temperature ( 0 C) - 15 Minutes
Figure 27 - Increasing grain size as a function of the austenitizing temperature.
Notebook Page 236

When these steels are heated to excessive austenitizing t empera tures during h eat treatm ent or steel
production (e.g., hot rolling), then they are said to be overheated, as defined in ASTM E7 as follows.
overheating, n-heating a steel object to such a high t emperature that excessive

grain growth occurs.
Discussion-Unlike burning, it may be possible to restore the original
properties/microstructure by further heat treatment or mechanical working, or a
combination thereof.
Austenitic grain growth is also time dependent , where the grains can continue to grow at any one
temper a ture.
Grain coarsening of austenite is reversible. Several new grains of austenite can be nucleated in th e
volume that had been occupied by one former austenite grain, and that the size to which these new
grains grows depends primar ily on the new austenitizing t emperature. Thus th e new austenite
grain size will generally be smaller than the former grain size if the new austenitizing temperature
is lower than the previous one.
However , a small aust enitic grain size is usually not always recovered in a single r ea ust enitizing
h eat treatment, depending on t he initial size of the grains. F or larger grain sizes, several
reaustenitizing heat t reatments may be required to obtain a uniform and small final grain size.
Keep in mind that the lower th e a ustenitizing temperature the greater the grain refinement.
Some steels ar e treated during the steelmaking process with grain refinement alloying elements,
such as AI, Nb, V, Ti and Zr, which inhibits austenitic grain growth. Th e austenitic grain size after
h eating at normal austenitizing temper atures is then much smaller than for normal steels. The
product then is commonly called fine-grained steel.
Grain Size and Properties of Steels
The grain size is one of the most important of the microstructural parameters, as it has a strong
effect on the str ength and fracture resistance of materials. At high temperatures where creep is a
problem, coar ser grained materials h ave advantages. However at lower temperatures (e.g., below
the freezing point of water) a finer-grained microstructure provides improved strength and fracture
resista nce (tough ness) properties compared to a coarser-grained microstructure. For example, the
yield strength varies as the inverse square root ofthe average grain diameter.
Reducing th e ferrite grain size by this or other methods r esults in increased yield strength , which
varies approximately with the reciprocal of th e squar e root of the ferrite grain diamet er (d-1/2).
Grain Size and Notch Toughness
Grain refinement is the one process which improves both the yield strength and toughness
simultaneously; other strengthening mechanisms, such as cold-working, tend to degrade toughness.
Hence many proprietary pr essure vessel, process piping, and line pipe steel specifications cont ain
requirements on grain size to minimize the risk of brittle fracture.
Notebook Page 237

Reducing the feiTite grain size also increases toughness, which is the one factor that improves both
the yield strength and toughness simultaneously. For example, many proprietary line pipe steel
specifications contain requirements on ferrite grain size to minimize the risk of brittle fracture.
The importance of controlling a steel's austenitic grain size is that it tends to transform to the same
grain size in its room temperature microstructw·es after cooling, with correspondingly poorer
strength and toughness. For this reason austenitizing temperatures are limited to the region within
60°C (140°F) of the A3 temperature, and austenitizing times are limited as well.
Grain Size and Fatigue
The influence of grain size on fatigue resistance is profound, but not simple. Fine grained materials
show greater resistance to fatigue crack initiation, but less resistance to fatigue crack propagation.
Fine grained material often exhibits superior formability, particularly in cold bending.
Even in high temperature service, fine grained materials often exhibit superior thermal fatigue
resistance. Thus, for many elevated temperature service applications an intermediate grain size
(e.g. ASTM grain size no. 3 to 8) will provide the best combination of formability, creep, and thermal
fatigue resistance.
Grain Shape
Grain size is not, however, the only microstructural parameter of importance. The shapes of grains
are determined by thermo-mechanical history of the material just as grain sizes are.
For example, the annealing of a cold-worked metal or alloy above about half of its melting
temperature (in Kelvins) causes the material to undergo a series of processes (recovery,
recrystallization, g rain growth) which result in the creation of a new set of equiaxed grains, whose
size depends on the previous cold-work and the annealing time and temperature.

In carbon steels, as the austenitizing temperature increases:
a) grain size decreases

b) grain shrinkage occurs
c) grain growth occurs
d) grain size no. increases
e) a and d
Notebook Page 238

Example 024: Heat Treatment Requirements for Fine Grain Size
ASTM A516 and A20 fine austenitic grain practice requirements are as follows.
ASTM A516/A516M Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel,
for Moderate- and Lower-Temperature Service
4. Materials and Manufacture

4.1 Steelmaking Practice- The steel shall be killed and shall conform to the fine
austenitic grain size requirement of Specification A20/A20M.
A20/A20M Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Plates for
Pressure Vessels
8.3 Fine Austenitic Grain Size:

8.3.1 Except as allowed in 8.3.2, and when fine austenitic grain size is specified, or
when the producer elects to determine the grain size, one McQuaid Ehn test per heat
shall be made and the austenitic grain size number so determined shall be 5 or higher,
and the chemical requirements of 8.3.2 do not apply.
Note: It is for this reason that ASTM A516 requires normalizing to be performed when
the section thickness is greater than 1.50 in. or when notch-toughness testing is
required, so that the grain size can be controlled, as follows.
ASTM A516/A516M Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel,
for Moderate- and Lower-Temperature Service
5. Heat Treatment
5.1 Plates 1.50 in. [40 mm] and under in thickness are normally supplied in the as-rolled
condition. The plates may be ordered normalized or stress relieved, or both.
5.2 Plates over 1.50 in. [40 mm] in thickness shall be normalized.
5.3 When notch-toughness tests are required on plates 1-112 in. (40 mm) and under in
thickness, the plates shall be normalized unless otherwise specified by the purchaser.
5.4 If approved by the purchaser, cooling rates faster than those obtained by cooling in
air are permissible for improvement of the toughness, provided the plates are
subsequently tempered in the temperature range 1100 to 1300°F [595 to 705°C).
Note: If normalizing was not performed, the required mechanical properties would not be
achieved, including notch-toughness.
Notebook Page 239

Example 025: Heat Treatment Requirements for Coarse Grain Size
ASTM A515 and A20 coarse austenitic grain practice requirements are as follows.
A515/A515M Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for
Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service
4.1 Steelmaking Practice-The steel shall be killed and made to a coarse austenitic
grain size practice.
8.2 Coarse Austenitic Grain Size- Where coarse austenitic grain size is specified one
austenitic grain size test per heat shall be made and the grain size number so
determined shall be in the range of 1 to 5 inclusive.

What is the thickness requirement for ASTM A516 plates when they are supplied in the as-rolled
condition?
a) 20 mm and over
b) 40 mm and under
c) 60 mm and over
d) 80 mm and under
e ) all ofthe above

Which of the following would not meet the requirement for ASTM A516 Grade 70?
a) grain size no. 5

b) grain size no. 6.5
c) made to a coarse austenitic grain size practice
d) made to a fine austenitic grain size practice
e) a or c
Notebook Page 240

Anisotropic
Metal that is rolled, forged or extruded develops and retains a fiber-like grain structure aligned in
the principal direction of working. This characteristic becomes visible on external and sectional
surfaces of wrought products when the surfaces are suitably prepared and etched. The "fibers" are
the result of elongation of the microstructural constituents of the metal in the direction of working.
Thus, the phrases "direction of grain flow" or "direction of rolling" is commonly used to describe the
dominant direction of these fibers within wrought metal products.
The directionality of grain deformation due to the steel rolling process or other working processes
results in anisotropic steels, and this term is defined in ASTM E 7 and illustrated in Figure 28, as
follows.
anisotropic (replaces anisotropy)-having different values for a property, in different

directions.
Through
Thickness
Direction
Transverse Direction
Figure 28 - The deformation of grains in a plate

relative to the rolling direction.
When an annealed or normalized steel is cold-worked (i.e. deformed plastically below the
recrystallization temperature), its equiaxed grains are deformed in shape and manner which follows
th e working direction (i.e., deforma tion direction).
In the case of rolling a flat product, e.g., plate, the equiaxed grains are deformed into pancakes
which are flattened in th e rolling plane and elongated in the rolling direction, while in wire drawing
or rod rolling the grains are elongated in the rolling/drawing direction and proportionally
compr essed in the transverse directions. Consequently, wrought steel will have different properties
when test specimen is taken in different orientations relative to the working direction.
Notebook Page 241

The terms that described the anisotropic directionality of steel test specimens are defined in ASTM
A370 Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products, and
illustrated in Figure 29, as follows.
Longitudinal Test, unless specifically defined otherwise, signifies that the lengthwise
axis of the specimen is parallel to the direction of the greatest extension of the steel
during rolling or forging. The stress applied to a longitudinal tension test specimen is
in the direction of the greatest extension, and the axis of the fold of a longitudinal
bend test s pecimen is at right angles to the direction of greatest extension.
Transverse Test, unless specifically defined otherwise, signifies that the lengthwise
axis of the specimen is at right angles to the direction of the greatest extension of the
steel during rolling or forging. The stress applied to a transverse tension test
s pecimen is at right angles to the greatest extension, and the axis of the fold of a
transverse bend test specimen is parallel to the greatest extension.
The terms radial test and tangential test are used in material specifications for some wrought
circular products and are not applicable to castings. When such reference is made to a test coupon or
test specimen, the following ASTM A370 definitions apply.
Radial Test, unless specifically defined otherwise, signifies that the lengthwise axis
of the specimen is perpendicular to the axis of the product and coincident with one of
the radii of a circle drawn with a point on the axis of the product as a center.
Tangential Test, unless specifically defined otherwise, signifies that the lengthwise
axis of the specimen is perpendicular to a plane containing the axis of the product
and tangent to a circle drawn with a point on the axis of the product as a center.
l ·S
(0)
c I
-~
n.
Test bars
1 long.tucJ<nallangOnoa
Of e«:Umferenllaf
(c) 4 long ltans"i«M Ot 8JUII
S Shcwt ttansWtM or rad.a
Figure 29 - Schematic views of tension specimens from (a) square rolled stock; (b) rectangular rolled
stock; (c) cylindrical extruded section; (d) ring-rolled section (left) and impact specimens (right).
Illustrating the effect of test specimen orientation to the working direction.
Notebook Page 242

Although best properties in wrought metals are most frequently the longitudinal (or equivalent),
properties in other directions may yet be superior to those in products not wrought-that is, in cast
ingots or in forging stock taken from only lightly worked ingot.
Mechanical anisotropy also is found in rectangular sections such as that shown in figure 35(b), in
cylinders as in figure 35(c), and in rolled rings as in figure 35(d). Again, best strength properties
are, on the average, a those of the longitudinal, as in test bar 1. Flat rolling of a section such as
figure 35(a) to a rectangular section figure 35(b) enhances the average "long transverse" properties
of t est bar 4 when compared with "short transverse" properties of test bar 5. Thus, such rectangular
sections exhibit anisotropy among all three (principal directions-longitudinal, long transverse and
short transverse).
A design that employs a rectangular section such as figure 9(b) involves the properties in all these
directions, not just the longitudinal. Thus, the longitudinal, long transverse and short transverse
service loads of rectangular sections are analyzed separately. The same concept can be applied to
cylinders, whether extruded or r olled; longitudinal direction changes with the forging process used,
as indicated in figure 9(c) and (d).
.... - ~ w - - - '
Example 028: Tempering Heat Treatment

Examples of orientation of mechanical test specimens for carbon steel pressure vessel plates.
A20/A20M Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Plates for
Pressure Vessels
(Note: ASTM A5 16 references A20.)
11 . Tension Tests
11 .2 Orientation of Test Specimens-The longitudinal axis of the tension test specimens
shall be transverse to the final rolling direction of the plate.
12. Notch-Toughness Tests

12.1 Charpy V-Notch Tests:
12.1.2 Orientation of Test Specimens-The long axis of the test specimens shall be
oriented either longitudinal (parallel to the final direction of rolling) or transverse
(transverse to the final direction of rolling), as specified in the applicable product
specification or the purchase order.
Furthermore, the non-metallic inclusions in the material may also be elongated by the working,
provided that they are capable of plastic deformation at the working temperature. For example,
manganese sulfide inclusions in steel are plastic at hot-rolling temperatures and hence are
elongated in the working direction, which is critical to control in sour (H 2S) service.
However, additions of cerium or calcium render the inclusions non-deformable at these temperatures
so that the sulfide inclusions remain spheroidal even during hot-rolling, which minimizes cracking
related to sour (H 2S) service.
Notebook Page 243

Practice Problem 029: Properties of Steel
What is anisotropic behaviour in metals?
a) chemical composition heterogeneity

b) chemical composition homogeneity
c) mechanical properties are homogenous
d) mechanical properties heterogenous
e) microstructural homogeneity
Practice Problem 030: Properties of Steel

When does a steel become anisotropic?
a) after annealing
b) after normalizing
c) before cold-working
d) after cold-working
c) after recrystallization
© Codes and Standards Training Insti tute (CAST!)
Notebook Page 244

Solutions
For Ferrous Metallurgy Practice Problems
Notebook Paoe 245

Answer Key -Introduction to Ferrous Metallurgy
Practice
Problem Answer
Ql: d
Q2: d
Q3: e
Q4: d
Q5: c
Q6: e
Q7: d
Q8: e
Q9: a
Qll: b
Q12: c
Q13: b
Q18: e
Q20: d
Q21: e
Q22: e
Q23: c
Q26: b
Q27: d
Q29: d
Q30: d
© Codes and Standards Training Institu te (CASTI)
Notebook Page 246

Brittle Fracture
Characteristics
Steel is generally considered to be a ductile material. When overloaded, it usually gives warning by
flowing plastically, i.e., bulging stretching, bending or necking, before rupturing. Contrary to
expectation, however, steels sometimes rupture without prior evidence of distress. Such brittle
failures are accompanied by little plastic deformation, and the energy required to propagate the
fracture appears to be quite low. Under certain conditions, steel may shatter like glass. In piping,
this extreme behavior generally occurs only at low temperatures.
Three conditions control this tendency for steel to behave in a brittle fashion. These include:
1) high stress concentrations, i.e., notches, nicks, scratches, internal flaws or sharp changes in
geometry;
2) a high rate of straining; and
3) a low environmental temperature.
These three factors are so interrelated that the determination of the effect of any one of them
provides an indication of how the steel will react to the intensification of either or both of the others.
The effect of lowering the testing temperature is the condition most convenient to measure
quantitatively. Consequently, the transition from ductile to brittle behavior of a steel is generally
expressed in terms of temperature.
The transition temperature for any steel is the temperature above which the steel behaves in a
predominantly ductile manner and below which it behaves in a predominantly brittle manner. Steel
with a high transition temperature is more likely to behave in a brittle manner during fabrication or
in service.
It follows that a steel with a low transition temperature is more likely to behave in a ductile manner
and, therefore, steels with low transition temperatures are generally preferred for service involving
severe stress concentrations, impact loading, low temperatures or combinations of the three.
Metallurgical factors, such as deoxidation practice, chemical composition, rolling, forging or

extruding practice, grain size and subsequent heat treatment, influence the transition temperature
of steel. In carbon steel materials, under the worst conditions, the transition temperature may be
above 200°F or under the best conditions, below minus 100°F.
Steels treated in accordance with most favorable deoxidation practice are those which are fully
killed. In plate and pipe steels, deoxidation is generally accomplished with sufficient silicon to
provide about 0.10 to 0.20 % of silicon in the steel. Aluminum is also used as a deoxidizer. The
amount of aluminum normally used causes the retention of only a few hundredths of a per cent
residual aluminum in the steel. Such steels are sometimes referred to as being made in accordance
with fine-grain steelmaking practice.
Notebook Paqe 247

Steels which have been fully annealed are in the poorest condition to resist embrittlement.
Normalizing provides improvement. Frequently, further benefit is derived from tempering after
normalizing or from stress relieving after welding. Optimum properties are obtained by fully
quenching and tempering to moderate strength levels.
The presence of notches or other stress-concentration factors is of very considerable importance.

Sharp notches in welded joints may encourage failure at loads well below those permitted by design.
Any aggravated notch, just like a severe geometric shape change, can result in a crack at relatively
low loads.
Low Temperature Service
Steels are commonly used below zero when they have Charpy V-notch impact values of at least 20 ft-
lb. (27 J ) at the lowest design temperature. Austenitic stainless steels with a limited carbon content,
copper and copper alloys, and aluminum do not experience transitions in impact strength from
ductile to brittle fracture and, therefore, may be used for low temperatures without pressure rating
penalties.
Low temperature piping is generally covered with thermal insulation which helps provide protection
from external impact blows or shock. This, however, is not sufficient insurance against the type of
damage that could result if a pipe should fracture.
Nature of Brittle Behavior
Brittle behavior in steel may result from a number of factors including (1) rapid rate of straining, (2)
t he presence of multidirectional stresses, or notches causing restraint such as surface defects,
discontinuities, incomplete welds, underbead cracks, microcracks, sharp re-entrant corners, etc., (3)
low operating temperature, or (4) a combination ofthese factors.
The brittle behavior of a steel is generally evidenced by sudden fracture and sometimes by
shattering. The initial cracking usually will propagate very rapidly and, under cer tain conditions,
the rate of propagation is practically infinite. Relatively little energy is required for propagation. At
failure, the surface of the fracture appears bright, granular and crystalline with the cross section
showing little or no evidence of necking, or plastic deformation. Such fractures are generally called
cleavage fractures.
In contrast, a steel which behaves in a ductile manner generally will fail gradually, i.e., at a much
slower rate. A high energy impact is required for crack propagation. Moreover, ductile failures in
pressure vessels, pipe or tubes usually are preceded by local bulging i.e., by plastic deformation, or
flow in the material because of shearing forces. Such shear fractur es will appear relatively dull and
fibrous and show a measurable and oft en considerable contraction of area across the fracture
section.
Notebook Page 248

Effects of Temp erature
The transition from ductile to brittle beh avior of carbon and low-alloy steels is not a phenomenon
only occasionally noted; it is an inherent property which can be demonstrated by a number of
accepted test methods. For example, figure 1 illustrates this transition as brought about by a
decrease in the testing temperature. It should be noted that since several criteria may be employed
to evaluate the transition temperature, its position with respect to the temperature scale may be
expected to vary with the criterion selected.
~
U:J
<ll-
oal ll!
-o~ u: :J
Q) E Q) t)
-€E- ~
O:J<Il u..
"'EO> £
.Q · - ~
~~ e u
c ~
Q)
0>:2 Cl..
ow .c
CeQ)
(i) _g,g .Q (J)
c >- >- t5+='Q c
UJ Ol Ol ~ :g, Q) Q)
<O(i)(i) §§ g> ~
.§tTitTI ()UJ<(
Q)
Cl..
""""-"'
>-
""""-"'
c Q)
u
'
~ 0 c
Q)
c ~ ~
<ll
UJ E Q)
Q.
.2
Q)
Q.
<(
0
Increasing
Testing Temperature
Figure 1- Schematic illustration of transition temperature range.
Transition Temperature
Various tests have been developed to determine whether a steel under certain test conditions will
fail definitely in a ductile or brittle manner. Each of these conditions actually shows a scatter region
or a transition-temperature range, within which a steel under the same set of test conditions will
exhibit either ductile or brittle behavior, or both.
Usually, some empir ically established point within the transition-temperature range is selected and
is thereafter designated as the transition temperature for the steel tested. This temperature can be
roughly defined as th e temperature above which the steel under the particular test conditions will
behave in a predominantly ductile manner and below which the steel will exhibit a predominantly
brit tle behavior.
For example, when the appearance of the fracture is the criterion, the transition t emperature may
be arbitrarily designated as the temperature at which half of the fracture surface shows a cleavage
failure while the other half exhibits a shear failure. When impact energy absorption is the criterion
which represents the most widely accepted method, some arbitrary energy value is generally used.
For example, in the Charpy test, the temperature corresponding to the 15 ft-lb. value may be
Notebook Paqe 249

designated arbitrarily as the transition temperature. It must be noted that at this value, the
fracture may be predominantly of the cleavage type. This last method is illustrated in figure 2.
Other criteria are the temperature at which the initial appearance of cleavage (brittle) fracture is
observed and the temperature at which the energy absorbed is half of the maximum energy value
obtained over the testing range.
It should be recognized that there exists no one "transition temperature" for a given steel except for
a particular set of conditions and one criterion of brittleness. Each particular forged or extruded
pipe or plate thickness rolled from a given steel will exhibit a range of temperatures in which the
fracture shifts from tough to brittle. This range may be varied considerably by changing the
metallurgical and mechanical properties of a steel.
average curve
o~,n~crreeaas~inncg~====~------~--------------------
Testing Temperature
Figure 2- Transition temperature range and Charpy impact test.
Effects of Notches and Notch Sensitivity
The sudden brittle failures which occur without measurable deformation are generally ascribed to
the notch sensitivity of the steel at the operating temperatures to which the steel was exposed.
Although not always obvious, actual mechanical notches or notch effects are present in all
structures. They may consist of minute surface or subsurface cracks, surface laps or scabs, visible
scratches, abrupt shape changes such as sharp corners, tool marks, grooves from drawing, dies,
edges, etc., or fabrication defects, such as arc strikes, etc.
Notch sensitivity is usually associated with an inability of the steel to deform in a plastic manner
(that is to flow) underneath the notch. This resistance to flow is increased by the triaxial state of
stress induced under a notch by a tensile stress. The condition is accentuated as the thickness of the
steel increases. Notches also are stress raisers. The greater the sharpness of the notch, the greater
will be the degree of restraint, the more severe the degree of restraint, the more severe will be the
stresses as to both triaxiality and magnitude, and the higher will be the transition temperature.
This is the basis of the general concept that the transition-temperature range or the arbitrarily
selected transition temperature will increase with the severity of the notch. In other words, a steel
Notebook Page 250

which contains extremely severe notches will fail in a brittle manner at higher ambient
temperatures than ifless severe notches are present.
It should be noted that in the inst ances where service conditions impose a triaxial state of stress, as
is true of internally loaded vessels and piping, brittle behavior may be encountered even in the
a bsence of notches.
Factors Determining Transition Tempera tures
The factors which influence the transition t emper atur e range of a steel may be separated into
metallurgical factors and mechanical factors. The met allurgical factors are characteristic of the
steel itself, whereas th e mech anical factors depend upon the service or testing environments as well
as many effects pr oduced by fabricating procedures. An analysis and underst anding of the various
factors is often import ant, particularly when it is desirable to make the most efficient use of a
particular steel.
Controlling Grain Size to Avoid Brittle Fracture
Controlling Grain Size by Normalizing
Grain growth occurs when h igher austenitizing temperatures are reached while heat treating low-
carbon and medium carbon steels, resulting in coarse grains, as defined in ASTM E7, as follows.
coarse grains-grains either larger than normal for the particular wrought metal or
alloy, or grains of such a size t hat a surface roughening, popularly known as "orange
peel" or" alligator skin," is produced .
Grain coarsening of austenite is reversible in silicon-deoxidized steels by re-austenitization. During

re-austenitization several new grains of austenite can be nucleated within the volume occupied by a
single pre-existing austenite grain, and the size to which the new austenite grains grow is dependent
on the re-austenitizing temper ature and time. Thus the new austenite grain size will generally be
smaller t han th e former grain size if the re-austenit izing t emperature is lower than the previous
one. This process is called recrystallization and is defined in ASTM E7 as follows.
recrystallization-the formation of a n ew grain structure through nucleation and

growth commonly produced by subjecting a metal, that may be str ained, to suitable
conditions of time and t emperat ure.
However an acceptably small austenite grain size may not be recovered in a single re-austenitization
heat treatment if the initial austenite grains ar e very coarse. In such a case, several re-
austenitizing heat treatments may be required to obtain a uniform and small final grain size, e.g.,
double-normalizing heat treat ment.
The austenite grain size of normalized or annealed medium-carbon steels can be readily observed
because proeutectoid ferrite precipitates along the aust enite grain boundaries during slow cooling.
Thus bands of ferrite outline the prior austenite grain boundaries.
Notebook Pa~w 251

However, it is not so easy to recognize the locations and paths of the prior austenite grain
boundaries in low-carbon steels when a large volume fr action of ferrite is present. Similarly, for
quenched and tempered (martensitic) steels special etching techniques are required to reveal the
prior austenite grain size. A picric acid etchant is suggested for revealing prior austenite grains in
steels which have been fully hardened to martensite (see ASTM Standard El12, Appendix 3 for
more details).
Normalizing is the most common heat treatment for carbon and alloy steels to control grain size.
However, it is the austenitizing temperature during normalizing that will define the final room
temperature grain size and likewise the steel's mechanical properties. The most sensitive
mechanical property in carbon and alloy steels effected by to grain size is th e notch-toughness (see
Figure 1).
F or example, the smaller the ferrite grain size, the lower generally will be the transition
temperature. Thus, the lower the final rolling temperature of the steel and the higher the cooling
rate, the smaller will be the grain size and the lower will be the transition temperature unless the
final rolling, temperature is so low that the steel is to some degree cold rolled.
Temperature, F
-100 -50 0 +50 100 150
160
140
I
l/"" - ~~ I
-/~
120
I
100
~
.:::
.;:.. Normalizing
~ 80 temperature
w
Q)
c: 1- - 2200 F(1200 C)
2000F(1 100 C)
60 18SOF(1000C) -
I 1650 F (900()
I
40
20
../__V_.
V;
w
I
0
-80 ·60 -40
- -20 0 +20 40 60 80
Test temperature, C
Figure 1 -Effect of austenitizing temperature (after normalizing) on fmal grain size of a

low-carbon steel and its reduction in not<:h toughness as measured by the transition temperature.
Notebook Page 252

Con trolling Grain Size by Ch em ical Composition
Another means of controlling grain size in carbon and alloy steels is through their chemical
composition, by adding grain refining elements such as silicon (Si), aluminum (Al), as defined in
ASTM A941, as follows.
fine grain practice, n-a steelmaking practice for other than stainless steel that is
intended to produce a killed steel that is capable of meeting the requirements
specified for fine austenitic grain size.
Discussion- It normally involves the addition of one or more austenitic grain
refining elements in amounts that have been established by the steel producer as
being sufficient. Austenitic grain refining elements include, but are not limited to,
aluminum, niobium (columbium), titanium, and vanadium.
Some steels are given small additions of such alloying elements as Al, Nb, V, Ti or Zr during
steelmaking to inhibit austenitic grain growth. This is accomplished by the formation of alloy
carbides or carbonitrides which are stable at a ustenitizing temperatures and impede with the
migration of austenite grain boundaries thus inhibiting grain coarsening. The result is fine-grained
austenite, even after heating at normal austenitizing temperatures; the product is then called fine-
grained steel, although the term grain refined steel has also been used.
Carbon influences the transition temperature of carbon steels unfavorably, since it increases
hardenability and the potential for martensite formation (see Figure 2). Most elements other than
those used for deoxidation raise the transition temperature with the notable exception of nickel,
which lowers appreciably the transition temperature of carbon steel. Austenitic chromium-nickel
stainless steel and some high-nickel steels do not show transition at temperatures even as low as-
325°F to -425°F .
Test Temperature, •f
2064ro~----1is~o_____~To~--~3ro======12Fo=====921Fo=====3~o=o~~~39q
0.11%C
48
Test Temperature, •c
Figure 2 - Effect of carbon content on notch-toughness in normalized steels.
Notebook PaQe 253

Sulphur, phosphorous and oxygen in quantities greater th an normally tolerated, and silicon in
percentages greater than required for deoxidation, also may raise the transition temperature. In
fact, most additions usually made to steel raise the transition temperature.
Steels treated during the steel making process with grain refinement alloying elements, such as Al,
Nb, V, Ti and Zr, inhibit austenitic grain growth. The austenitic grain size after heating at
commercial austenitizing temperatures is then much smaller than for non-treated steels. The
product then is commonly called fine-grained steel.
The additions of nickel and under certain conditions, manganese, will lower the transition
temperature. Nickel is frequently added to low-carbon steel when a transition temperature below
that obtainable with carbon steel is desired.
Commercial low-carbon steels, even those within the same grade, may exhibit considerable
differences in their notch-sensitivity characteristics. These differences, which are not predictable
from the conventional chemical analyses, may be attributed to various factors such as steel making
practice, deoxidation, grain size, finishing temperature, thickness of section, heat treatment, and
others.
Effect of We lding on Notch Tou ghness
The effect of two preheat temperatures on the toughness of simulated heat-affected zones in ASTM
A514 or A517 steel plate, 0.5-in. thick, is illustr ated in figure 6. The curves indicate the toughness of
the grain-coarsened area in the heat-affected zone on a final pass or a multiple-pass weld or a single-
pass weld. Such an area is considered to be t he worst condition because it does not receive the
benefits of tempering from additional weld passes. The toughness of the heat-affected zone of prior
passes in multiple-pass welds is expected to be significantly better. Nevertheless, the higher preheat
temperature (500°F) resulted in significantly decreased toughness wh en compared to that with the
lower preheat temperature (200°F).
Welding Heat Input · 47 kJ/in.
As· received
basemetal \
'1..--- - - - -
Test Temperature, •F
Figure 6- Effect of preheat temperature on the Charpy V-notch toughness

of the heat-affected zone (2400°F) in 0.5 inch thick ASTM A 514 or A 517 steel.
Notebook Page 254

ASME Section VIII, Division 1
Hydrostatic Test Medium and Temperat u re - UG-99(h)
Provided the hydrostatic testing medium is a nonhazardous liquid, it may be used at any
temperature only if it is below its boiling point. For example, combustible liquids with a flash point
less than l10°F (43°C), e.g., petroleum distillates, may be used only for near atmospheric
temperature tests.
UG-99(h) does not have a requirement for either minimum or maximum test temperature. However,
it does recommend that the metal temperature during hydrostatic test be maintained at least 30°F
(l7°C) above the minimum design metal temperature, but need not exceed 120°F (48°C), to minimize
the risk of brittle fracture.
UG-99(h) does specify that the test pressure shall not be applied until the vessel and its contents are
at about the same temperature. It further suggests that if the test temperature exceeds 120°F
(48°C), it is recommended that inspection of the vessel required by UG-99(g) be delayed until the
temperature is reduced to 120°F (48°C) or less.
Pneumatic Test Tempera ture- UG-lOO(c)
Unlike UG-99(h) for hydrostatic testing, UG-lOO(c) does specify that the metal temperature during
pneumatic t est shall be maintained at least 30°F (l7°C) above the minimum design metal
temperature to minimize the risk of brittle fracture. Again, the Code is warning the user about the
higher risk of performing a pneumatic test and avoiding brittle fracture.
ASME 831 .3
General R equirements for Leak Tests- 11345.2
Low Test Temperature- 1[345.2.2(c)
The Code makes no specific requirement of the metal temperature during pneumatic test for either
ambient or metal temperature. However, <j{345.2.2(c) does warn that that the possibility of brittle
fracture shall be considered when conducting leak tests at metal temperatures near the ductile-
brittle transition temperature.
Mechanical Strength - 302.4.1

When necessary, the wall thickness shall be increased to prevent overstress, damage, collapse, or
buckling due to superimposed loads from supports, ice formation, backfill, transportation, handling,
or other causes.
Where increasing the thickness would excessively increase local stresses or the risk of brittle
fracture, or is otherwise impracticable, the required strength may be obtained through additional
supports, braces, or other means without an increased wall thickness.
Notebook Paoe 255

API 510 and API 570
T est Temperature and Brit tle Frac ture Cons iderations

The potential for a brittle failure must be evaluated prior to hydrostatic and especially prior to
pneumatic testing because of the high potential energy in the vessel during the test (API 510, <J[5.8.6
and API 570 <J[5.8.3).
To minimize the risk of brittle fracture during a pressure test, API 510/570 suggests that the metal
temperature should be maintained at least:
• 30°F (l7°C) above the MDMT for vessels that are more than 2 in. (5 em) thick, and
• l0°F (6°C) above the MDMT for vessels that have a thickness of 2 in. (5 em) or less.
The test temperature need not exceed 120°F (50°C) unless there is information on the brittle
characteristics that indicate a risk of catastrophic fracture of the vessel material where a high er test
temperature must be employed.
Figure 10 - Hydrostatic pressure test this new vertical vessel r esulted in catastrophic brittle
fracture. Very cold water (temperature unknown) was a contributing factor.
Fortunately no injuries occurred.
Notebook Page 256

Steel Standards
ASTM Steel Standard D esignations
Originally in the carbon and alloy steel industries, but not the stainless industry, the terms "grade",
"type" and "class" had specific meaning. "Grade" was used to describe chemical composition, "type"
was used to define deoxidation practice, and "class" was used to indicate other characteristics such
as strength level or surface finish. However, within ASTM standards these terms were adapted for
use to identify a particular metal within a metal standard and are used without any strict defmition,
but essentially mean the same thing.
Examples of the ASTM ferrous metal designation system, describing its use of specification numbers
and letters, are as follows.
Example: ASTM Ferrous Metal Designation System

ASTM A5 16/A516M-10 Gr ade 70- Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-
Temperature Service:
• The "A" describes a ferrous metal, but does not sub-classify it as cast iron, carbon steel, alloy
steel or stainless steel.
• 516 is simply a sequential number without any direct relationship to the metal's properties.
• The "M" indicates that the standard A 516M is written in SI units (as a soft conversion) (the
"M" comes from the word "Metric"), hence together A 516/A 516M utilizes both inch-pound
and SI units.
• 10 indicates the year of adoption or revision. If a lower case letter follows, it indicates that
there was more than one edition published in that year.
• Grade 70 indicates the minimum tensile strength in ksi, i.e. 70 ksi (70,000 psi) minimum.
Cast Steel Designations
The ASTM designation system for cast stainless steels was adopted from the Alloy Casting Institute
(AC!) system. According to this system, the designation consists oftwo letters followed by two digits
and then optional suffix letters. The first letter of the designation is "C", if the alloy is intended for
liquid corrosion service, or "H", for high temperature service. A second letter refers to the chromium
and nickel contents of the alloy, increasing with increasing nickel content. The two letters are then
followed by a number, which gives the carbon content in hundredths of a percent, and in some cases
a suffix letter or letters to indicate the presence of other alloying elements.
It is important to note that the various casting grades of these stainless steels have a unique
designation system different from that of their wrought counterparts. For example, the designation
"cast 304" stainless steel does not exist within the ASTM (ACI) system and is a ppropriately called
grade CF8. ASTM A781/A781M, Table X2.1, lists the nearest similar wrought and cast stainless
steels, an excerpt is shown in the following example.
Notebook Page 257

Example: Similar Wrought and Cast Stainless Steel Designations
Nominal ASTM Casting Casting Grade UNS SimilarWrought
Composition Specification Designation Number Alloy UNS Number
13Cr A743/A743M CA15 J91150 410 841000
13Cr-Mo A743/A743M CA15M J91153 420 842000
16Cr-4Ni-4Cu A747/A747M CB7Cu-1 J92180 17-4 817400
18Cr-8Ni A743/A743M, A744/A744M CF3 J92500 304L 830403
16Cr-12Ni-2Mo A743/A743M, A744/A744M CF3M J92800 316L 831603
16Cr-12Ni-2Mo-N A743/A743M CF3MN J92804 316LN 831653
18Cr-8Ni A743/A743M, A744/A744M CFB J92600 304 830400
18Cr-10Ni-Cb A743/A743M, A744/A744M CFBC J92710 347 834700
16Cr-12Ni-2Mo A743/A743M, A744/A744M CFBM J92900 316 831600
18Cr-13Ni-3Mo A743/A743M, A744/A744M CGBM J93000 317 831700
20Cr-18Ni-6Mo-Cu-N A743/A743M, A744/A744M CK3MCuN J93254 254SMO 831254
25Cr-20Ni A743/A743M CK20 J94202 310 831000
24Ni-21 Cr-6Mo-N A743/A743M, A744/A744M CN3MN J94651 AL-6XN N08367
29Ni-20Cr-3Cu-2Mo A743/A743M, A744/A744M CN7M N08007 Alloy20 N08020
ASTM specifications for cast stainless steels have begun to use the UNS designations for cast
stainless steel grades. The UNS designation J xxxxx is used for cast stainless steels, while UNS
Sxxxxx is used for wrought stainless steels because of the significant differences in chemical
composition, mechanical and physical properties between cast and wrought products.
Grade Designations
An interesting use of ASTM grade designators is found in pipe, tube and forging products, where the
first letter "P" refers to pipe, "T" refers to tube, "TP" may refer to tube or pipe, and "F" refers to
forging. These naming systems date before the introduction of the UNS designation system.
Examples are found in the following ASTM specifications.
Example: ASTM Grade Designations

ASTMA351/A351M Grade CF8M, Grade HK40- Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex),
for Pressure Containing Parts:
• ASTM A335/A335M Grade P22- Seamless Ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
Service.
• ASTM A213/A213M Grade T22 - Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Alloy-Steel Boiler,
Superheater, and Heat-Exchanger Tubes.
• ASTM A269 Grade TP304, UNS S30400- Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel
Tubing for General Service.
• ASTM A312/A312M Grade TP304, UNS S30400- Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless
Steel Pipes.
• ASTM A336/A336M Class F22 - Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure and High-Temperature
Parts.
©Codes and Standards Training Institute (CA8TI)
Notebook Page 258

ASTM Reference Standards and Supplementary Requirements
ASTM Standards contain a section known as "Reference Documents" that lists other ASTM
Standards, all or part of which become a part of the referencing standard. Supplementary
requirements are listed at the end of an ASTM Standard and do not apply unless specified in the
order, i.e. they represent optional requirements that the purchaser may choose to impose in the
order.
Use of Ellipsis (•••) in ASTM Standards
Similar to an unspecified element, an ellipsis in ASTM standards is used to identify when a

requirement is not addressed in a standard. ASTM A941 defines an ellipsis as follows.
Ellipsis, n: in a tabular entry, three periods (... ) that indicate that there is no
requirement.
Note: along with the use of ellipsis, the steel also has meet the referenced general requirement
standard where there may be maximum limits set for unspecified elements (e.g., A516/A516M
references A20/A20M) and definitions for the alloy category, carbon steel, low-alloy steel, alloy steel,
etc.
Notebook Page 259

American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Designation System
The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section II Parts A and B contain the material
standards adopted for its use. These standards are based on the ASTM Standards and in most cases
are identical to ASTM Standards, however some of the ASTM Standards have been edited to
accommodate the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. When an ASTM standard has been
adopted by the ASME Code, an "S" is placed in front of the ASTM standard identification number
and a hyphen between SA and the number (SA-106) to indicate it is an ASME B&PV Code material.
ASME Code Section II Part A contains the ferrous metals and Part B contains the nonferrous
metals.
Differences Between ASME B&PV Code and ASTM Editions
All ASME B&PV Code materials that originate from an ASTM specification must be in accordance
with Section II, or as in Code Cases, or in the applicable Section of the Code. ASME Section II
provides a guideline list of ASTM Specifications and their acceptable dates of issue in which the
specification is approved for use. An excerpt of this guideline from ASME Section Il-2011 addenda is
shown in the next example, along with the current ASTM standard edition (as of 2012) for
comparison.
Example: ASME B&PV Code and ASTM Editions

Current
ASME Latest ASTM
Specification Differences Between Adopted Other Acceptable Edition
2011 Addenda ASME and ASTM Editions ASTM ASTM Editions as of 2012
SA-53/SA-53M Identical to 2001 ASTM edition, except 2001 1988a through 2001 2012
for the insertion of test practices in 11.1,
and editorial corrections to Table X4.1
SA-105/SA-1 05M Identical to 2005 ASTM edition 2005 1987a through 2005 2011a
SA-106/SA-1 06M Identical to 2008 ASTM edition 2008 1988a through 2008 2011
SA-240/SA-240M Identical to 2004 ASTM edition 2004 1988c through 2004 2012
SA-333/SA-333M Identical to 2004a ASTM edition, 2004a 1994 through 2004a 2011
except for the deletion of 12.3 that
conflicts with 15
SA-335/SA-335M Identical to ASTM 2006 edition , except 2006 1988a through 2006 2011
for the addition of hardness
requirements for P23 and P911 in 9.3
and 14.2.1, and the correction of UNS
numbers for P9 and P91.
SA-370 Identical to ASTM 2005 edition 2005 1977 through 2005 2012
SA-516/SA-516M Identical to ASTM 2006 edition, except 2006 1986 through 2006 2010
the reference to Footnote B in Table 1
shall apply to the -04, -05 , and -05e
editions.
Notebook Page 260

Guidelines on Multiple Marking of ASME B&PV Materials
ASME Section II Parts A and B include guidelines on multiple marking for boiler and pressure
vessel materials. These guidelines cover the acceptability, prohibition, and grade substitution for
m ultiple marked ASME boiler and pressure vessel materials, as follows.
Acceptability of Multiple Marking

Dual or multiple marking is acceptable, as long as the material so marked meets all of the
requirements of all the specifications, grades, classes, and types with which it is marked.
All of the measured and controlled attributes of the multiply-marked grades or

specifications must overlap (e.g., chemistry, mechanical properties, dimensions, and
tolerances) and the material so marked must exhibit values that fall within the overlaps.
Further, the controlled but unmeasured attributes of the specifications or grades must
overlap (e.g., melting practices, heat treatments, and inspection.)
Many specifications or grades have significant overlap of chemistry ranges or properties.

It is common for material manufacturers to produce materials that satisfy more than one
specification, grade, class, or type. Examples are SA-53 and SA-1 06 (some grades and
classes); SA-213 TP304L and TP304; SA-213 TP304 and 304H; and SA-106 B and
SA-106 C.
Example: Multiple Marking- ASME SA-53, SA-106, SA-333, CSA Z245.1

Specification Designation c Mn p 5 Si
ASME SA-53 Grade 8 0.30 max. 1.20 max. 0.05 max. 0.045 max. ...
ASME SA-106 Grade 8 0.30 max. 0.29- 1.06 0.035 max. 0.035 max. 0.10 min.
ASME SA-333a Grade 6 0.30 max. 0.29- 1.06 0.025 max. 0.025 max. 0.10 min.
CSAZ245.1 Grade 290 Cat 1 0.26 max. 2.00 max. 0.030 max. 0.035 max. 0.50 max.
Specification Desis:mat ion YS (MPa) YS (ksi) TS (MPa) TS (ksi) % Elonqation
ASME SA-53 Grade 8 240 min. 35min. 415 min. 60min. b
ASME SA-106 Grade 8 240 min. 35min. 415 min. 60min. 22min.
ASME SA-333a Grade 6 240 min. 35min. 415 min. 60min. 30min.
CSA Z245.1 Grade 290 Cat 1 290-495 ... 414 • 760 (L) ... b
a. Requires impact testing and likewise cannot be multiple marked with the other grades listed here.
b. Varies with wall thickness, see standard.
Notebook Page 261

Multiple marking of ASME SA-106 Grade Band CSA Z245.1 Grade 290 Cat. 1.
Multiple marking of ASME SA-333 Grade 6, and CSA Z245.1 Grade 241 Cat. 2.
Notebook Page 262

-~-.
DR I S"l.. Z ell I -ND< .........u
!686
-....__,.,l ......,..,...,
CERTifiED TEST REPORT
~A- '<IIIMQ,I &0.
aa.J)J'O-- W..'IO~ W.ICIOA
PIPE C~RBON SHLS liNE PIP£ ~ ~lpe-~gg ~E

~,..,...
BVC ASHE SA186-MZ661 £01TIOH GRADE B/C TO TS~- 003
REV 3 ~TO 7/6/61 ~PI 5~~1ZNO EDITION DATED l/~PSL-1 GRADE X42 9LK REG MILL ~T PE SC MEETING ~ll
rwE APPLICABLE RE~R£M£NTS OF HAC£ ST~ND~~O MR-Ot-75 MZ660
=-- ~1 •. 868(355.668) """'"""J-...: e. 758 (19.858) •I--t
--
AS ROLLED
.-.... -~
...
-.o vn -.-o
- -
, bY~ ~Ulio~Q ..
''"'"""'"'~'"' PSI: .58
1'111all·
PSI PSI
MRS
..:=&.. .:.=. narr
(1010 -..mt
r- ~z_,au.
• ·-
"'2'' I
1-
CAe
36t'JO :::
.............. IN r- ~ Z2.5 :.... B 96.7
"2l11!SS
ROUI'UVT/8
ROUNIVT/8
AIt
AR
'"· ::t5t:
fJ.lS£
5'.HJfJ6:
&1568· • Sit
' • 5tJ
---
88688
D. ott
6 . 78
.co;, • ..:
v.e
65.0 J~Sa'J ~
e.lse
...
"2!485 RWNIVV8 AA S95n1 .58 B&MH'J 8.69 Z9.e
l\2:l1e5 ROUJID/Va AR
.... 8~ !15£
r
fiof!IBo; • se 978fJ8 8.69 27.£
.• ..
£NO C OATA THIS:SMEE
.....,.......,. ..,... , __,.
&SUD
~
a, : ~~
.,.~
~
- H·NOMUIIIID
c: .... • • •
Of.· CJLOGa·~
. .. - I I I U ! I i a )
cu . ell' MO
,._ . MllllU.IID
M. ,. v
• ., Clll CD C£.•
- -1
l'1AX
I
/'"'\ 4.2!
Oi~· / 124 1!1117 Dtlfl 28 ~;j, . 38
~ ~6
I'\Z)1G5 H£1'\T .83 f)6 BZ~ f)fJt:J .8Ui .824
~23 .. es PROD :.rs 128 !1116
..
8ll'J 2s ill
rF!. ~~ )ts
26 ~l2
=: ils«J ill7 i!t26 • 41!1
w
~32 ilef ~57
..~1 7 ..~21
~z:s1es PAOO !11 Ms6 CJfJS });, . :s~
ltD ,. fl ~IS ..
~E £1i .. ~
. . '
. .. .. .. .. . ..
~ : i
~
. I
4C£.1SII. . .)(. . ntfF()U..(JiiiiiiG~S~ CE -=C+(P11f/6)+(Cir+K.J+V)/S+ (Nl+O.J)/lS_ i

-
~ 1'03fl10NLS~ 0 I I !I Ala£ '*'-*=A'TB) ay 'tit£ t.S'T IIMAC!f\ Vfln1CAL. DCJT'TGlt...IH5 CIA OCDMAI... Pont'I.
)Y
t I ov<L CP "'- ('Y...J ¥
~~fti
1 Of I ('tJvt f'f.ll
As pc r
Notebook Page 263
Example: Multiple Marking- Stainless Steel Pipe- ASME SA-213 Type 316 vs 316L
Material c Mn Si Cr Ni Mo YS (ksi) TS (ksi)
ASME SA-312 2.00-
0.08 max. 2.00 max. 1.00 max. 16.0- 18.0 11.0-14.0 30 min. 75min.
TP316 300
ASME SA-312 2.00-
0.035 max. 2.00 max. 1.00 max. 16.0- 18.0 10.0-14.0 25 min. 70 min.
TP316L 3.00
Material YS (MPa) YS (ksi) TS (MPa) TS (ksi) %EI Heat Treatment
ASME SA-312 35 min. (L) annealed then water quenched
205 min. 30 min. 515 min. 75min.
TP316 25 min. (T) or cooled rapidly
ASME SA-312 35 min. (L) annealed then water quenched
170 min. 25 min. 485 min. 70 min.
TP316L 25 min. (T) or cooled rapidly
CERTIFIED MATERIAL TEST REPORT
CUSTOMER DATE December 14, 2010
CUST. P.O. NO. PROJECTNO. - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - -

CUSTOMER
REFERENCE NO. _N~/~A~-------------- P.O. ITEM NO. - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
M ATERIA L TYPE, CONDITION &
SPECIFICATION ASTM A312-07/ASME SA312, TP316/316L
ASTM/ASME A/SA376, TP316, cold drawn, annealed and pickled. 10 inch NPS Sch. 108 (.165) seamless pipe
Dimensional
Heat No. Serial No. Work Order No. Length
19' 9%"
Chemistry
c Mn p s Si Cr Ni Mo
0.018 0.99 0.036 0.002 0.61 16.78 12.49 2.06
Mechanical Pro12erties
Yield Str. (PSI) Ult Str. ( PSI) % Elongation
30,200 75,200 55.6
SQecial Notes
Heat Treatment per ASTM A312- 1925°F for 30 min. and
rapidly cooled.
Flattening per ASTM A999 - acceptable
Hydrostatic per ASTM A999 @ 450 psig - acceptable
Corrosion Test per ASTM A262 Practice E- acceptable

Made in U.S.A.
Inspection certification in accordance with EN 10204 3.1
Pipe has been positively material identified (PMI) with a

coupon cut from each finished length. This coupon was
used to develop final chemistry and mechanical properties.
- --
This is to certify that the material listed herein has been inspected and tested in accordance with the listed specifications and has met all requirements.
Quality Assurance Representative
Notebook Page 264

Prohibition on Multiple Marking
Dual or multiple marking is not acceptable if two or more specifications to which the
material is marked have mutually exclusive requirements. This prohibition includes more
than just chemistry and property requirements. Examples are SA-515 and SA-51 6; the
former requ ires melting to coarse grain practice while the latter requires melting to fine
grain practice. Another example is SA-213 TP304L and TP304H; the carbon content
ranges of these grades have no overlap.
Example: Multiple Marking Prohibition- ASTM A515 vs. 5116 Grain Size
ASTM A515 and A516 coarse vs. fine austenitic grain practice requirements are as follows.
A515/A515M Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-
Temperature Service
4.1 Steelmaking Practice-The steel shall be killed and made to a coarse austenitic
grain size practice.
A20/A20M General Requirements for Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels

8.2 Coarse Austenitic Grain Size-Where coarse austenitic grain size is specified one
austenitic grain size test per heat shall be made and the grain size number so
determined shall be in the range of 1 to 5 inclusive.
ASTM A516/A516M Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-
Temperature Service

4.1 Steelmaking Practice-The steel shall be killed and shall conform to the fine
austenitic grain size requirement of Specification A20/A20M.
A20/A20M General Requirements for Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels
8.3 Fine Austenitic Grain Size:

8.3.1 Except as allowed in 8.3.2, and when fine austenitic grain size is specified, or
when the producer elects to determine the grain size, one McQuaid Ehn test per heat
shall be made and the austenitic grain size number so determined shall be 5 or higher,
and the chemical requirements of 8.3.2 do not apply.
Example: Multiple Marking Prohibition - ASME SA240 Type 304L vs. 304H
Material c Mn p s Si Cr Ni N
Type 304L 0.030 max. 2.00 max. 0.045 max. 0.030 max. 0.75 max. 18.0- 19.5 8.0. 12.0 0.10 max.
Type 304H 0.04. 0.100 2.00 max. 0.045 max. 0.030 max. 0.75 max. 18.0-20.0 8.0. 10.5 ...
Material YS (MPa) YS (ksi) TS (MPa) TS (ksi) %EI
Type 304L 170 min. 25 min. 485 min. 70 min. 40 annealed
Type 304H 205 min. 30min. 515 min. 75 min. 40 annealed
Notebook Paqe 265

Grade Substitution
Grade substitution is not permitted. Grade substitution occurs when: (1) the material
contains an element (other than nitrogen) that is unspecified for one of the grades
marked; and (2) the amount of that element present in the material meets the minimum
and maximum composition limits for that element in another grade of a specification
contained in Section II, Part A or Part B, whether or not it is also so marked.
For example, a material meets all of the composition limits for SA-240 Type 304, contains
0.06C and 0.02N, but also contains 0.45% Ti. This material cannot be marked or
provided as meeting SA-240 Type 304 because the Ti content meets the requirements of
SA-240 Type 321 [which is, Ti greater has 5 x (C + N) but less than 0.7.]. Another
material, with identical composition, except 0.35% Ti, may be marked SA-240 Type 304
because the Ti content does not meet the minimum requirement for 321. The Ti content
is just a residual.
Example: Multiple Marking - ASME SA-240 Type 304 vs 321

Material c Mn p s Si Cr Ni N
Type 304 0.07 max. 2.00 max. 0.045 max. 0.030 max. 0.75 max. 17.5 -19.5 8.0- 10.5 0.10 max.
Type 321* 0.08 max. 2.00 max. 0.045 max. 0.030 max. 0.75 max. 17.0 -19.0 9.0- 12.0 0. 10max.
*Ti 5x(C+N) min to 0.70 max.
Notebook Page 266

Unified Numbering System (UNS) For Metals and Alloys
UNS Designations
UNS Desi nations for Ferrous Metals and Allo s

tor Ferrous Metals
Dxxxxx Specified mechanical properties steels
Fxxxxx I Cast irons .
Gxxxxx SAE carbon and alloy steels (except tool steels)
Hxxxxx
Jxxxxx
ISAE
- -H-steels
-
Cast steels
.
Kxxxxx Mi?cell§lneous stee.ls a~d ferrous alloys

Sxxxxx Heat and corrosion resistant (stainless) steels
Txxxxx Tool steels
Axxxxx Aluminum and aluminum alloys
Cxxxxx Copper and copper alloys
Exxxxx Rare earth and rare earthlike metals and alf?YS
Lxxxxx Low-melting metals _?.n~ alloys
Mxxxxx Mi.~cellaneous nonfE,!rrous ~etals and .§lloys
Nxxxxx Nickel and nickel alloys
Pxxxxx Precious metals and alloys
Rxxxxx Reactive and refractory m.etals and alloys
Zxxxxx Zinc and zinc (lll()ys
Wxxxxx Welding filler metals, covered and tubular electrodes classified by weld deposit
com osition.
Notebook Paoe 267

Former AISI Designation Systems and Their Replacements
AISI, SAE, and ASTM Designations for Carbon and Alloy Steels
For many years, certain grades of carbon and alloy steels have been designated by a four-digit
American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) numbering system that identified the grades according to
standard chemical compositions. Since the AISI did not write material specifications, in 1995 it
transferred the responsibility of maintaining its numbering to the SAE through SAE Standard
J402-97- SAE Numbering System for Wrought or Rolled Steel, as shown in the following table.
Table 7.1 SAE J402 and ASTM A29 Numbering System for Carbon and Alloy Steels
(abbreviated list)
UNS SAE/ASTM Reference SAE Standard
G10XXO 10XX Nonresulfuri~~~.' Manganese 1.00% max J403 and J1249

G11XXO 11XX Resulfurized J403 and J1249
G12XXO 12XX f.1eph()~p~()rized and Resulfurized JJ403
G15XXO 1 15XX Nonresulfurized, Man anese J403 and J1249
G13XXO 13XX -+·------·--M

_a_nganese §teeIs_ J404 and J1249
+-·---'--""--..;.;.._
23XX Nickel Steels J1249
25XX J1249
J1249
J404 and J1249
J404 and J1249
J404 and J1249
J404 and J1249
J404 and J1249
J404
J404 and J1249
G50XXO 50 XX Chromium Steels i J404 and J1249
---- ---·-·-
G51XXO 51 XX Chromium Steels J404 and J1249
--·---
G50XX6 50XXX - + - - - Chromium Steels J404
Chromium Steels J404
Chromium Steels
+··••<><<<><<<>•<><><><<><><><<><><>«<«<<«<«<«<«<«««««- • •«<<«<
J404
Chromium-Vanadium Steels J404 and J 1249
G71XXO 71XXX Tun sten-Chromium Steels J1249
The SAE system is based on the original AISI numbering system which uses four-digits and letters
to designate the chemical composition of carbon and alloy steels. Throughout the system, the last
two digits give the carbon content in hundlredths of a percent. For example, a carbon steel containing
Notebook Page 268

0.45% carbon is designated 1045 in this system, where the first two digits, lOxx, identify the grade
as a carbon steel.
Resulfurized carbon steels are designated within the series llxx, resulfurized and rephosphorized
carbon steels 12xx and steels having manganese contents between 0.9 and 1.5 %, but no other
alloying elements are designated 15xx. Compositions for manganese and silicon and maximum
percentages for sulfur and phosphorus are also specified.
For alloy steels, the first two digits of the SAE system describe the major alloying elements present
in the material, the first digit giving the alloy group. For example, the 43xx series steels contain
1.65- 2.00% Ni, 0.50-0.80% Cr, and 0.20-0.30% Mo, along with composition ranges for manganese
and silicon and maximums for sulfur and phosphorus.
Letters added between the second and third digits include "B" when boron is added (between 0.0005
and 0.003%) for enhanced hardenability, and "L" when lead is added (between 0.15 and 0.35%) for
enhanced machinability. The prefix "M" is used to designate merchant quality steel (the least
restrictive quality descriptor for hot-rolled steel bars used in noncritical parts of structures and
machinery). The prefix "E" (electric-furnace steel) and the suffix "H" (hardenability r equirements)
are mainly applicable to alloy steels.
Stainless Steel Standards
Originally, the AISI granted "AISI type xxx" designations for stainless steels with more than one
producer and a minimum annual tonnage. Eventually, there were 57 stainless steels that were given
the designation "AISI type". Although the term "type" as related to stainless steels is not copyrighted
or trademarked by any organization, the use of "AISI type xxx" designation is restricted to the
original 57 AISI stainless steels. However, the use of the terms "grade", "type", or "alloy" to identify
a stainless steel can be freely used without reference to AISI.
Unlike the carbon and alloy steels, typically defined by their strengths, stainless steel grades are
defined by their composition in terms of specified elements, as listed in the ASTM product
specifications. Only the specified elements are restricted to minimums, maximums, or ranges, but
stainless steels are expected to also contain residual and trace elements as defined by ASTM A751.
The original "AISI type" stainless steels had chemical composition ranges that were relatively
loosely defined and were not a basis for ordering material. That is, you had to use a product
specification, like ASTM A240/A240M, for ordering a specific type of stainless steel. "AISI type"
stainless steels were generally defined as a distinct alloy composition within a group of similar
chemical compositions. For example, AISI type 304 had defined chemical composition ranges within
the group of austenitic stainless steels. The AISI type categories are still used for collection and
reporting of statistics on production and shipments.
Notebook PaQe 269

Consequently, when the AISI decided to no longer grant AISI type numbers, stainless steel
producers started to use the term "type" followed by 3 digits and letters to describe their new
products, much like the original AISI designation system. The result was the introduction of
"non AISI type" designations into the lexicon, designations resembling AISI numbers but never
granted that standing by AISI.
ASTM subcommittee A01.96 on Harmonization of Wrought Stainless Steel Requirements has formal
authority over the original type designations transferred from AISI. It is A01.96 policy not to add
more non-AISI type designations unless the number has been already accepted within the definition
of a "common name," (as defined by ASTM A01 Committee By-Laws Resolution 7).
ASTM A959 Standard Guide for Specifying Harmonized Standard Grade Compositions for Wrought
Stainless Steels provides a guide to ASTM Subcommittees for specifying chemical composition limits
of wrought stainless steels. Variations are permitted for individual product specifications for specific
technical effects. It is intended that these recommended grade composition limits be suitable for
adoption by other standardization bodies that prepare standards for stainless steel products. It also
indicates, in addition to the complete listing of UNS numbers for the wrought stainless steels in
ASTM specifications, the originally assigned AISI type designations, common names (non-AISI
designations), and names originating from a unique numbering system developed and applied by
ASTM (e.g., XM-21).
In 1997, ASTM stainless steel standards began to include "non-AISI" designations as "common
names".
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
ANSI is an impartial organization that does not develop standards, but rather validates the general
acceptability of standards developed by organizations such as ASTM, ASME, AWS, etc. It
guarantees that the standards writing group used democratic procedures that gave everyone who
will be "directly and materially" affected by the use of the standard an opportunity to participate in
the development work or to comment on the document's provisions. It assures users that consensus
was achieved on the standard's provisions and does not conflict with or unnecessarily duplicate other
national standards.
The designations of American National Standards reflect ANSI's role as national coordinator of
voluntary standards activities and as approval organization and clearinghouse for consensus
standards. The standards are identified by the publication number or alphanumeric designator
(where one exits) of the organization that administered the development work, preceded by ANSI's
acronym and the organization's. If the organization does not have a designation system, ANSI
assigns an identifier, see following example.
• ANSI/NACE MR0175/ISO 15156
Notebook Page 270

Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
The Canadian Standards Association (CSA) has established metal standards for structural steels
CCSA G40.20/40.21), pipeline steels (CSA Z245.1), corrugated steel pipe (G401), wire products
(CSA G4, G12, G30.x, G279.2, G387), sprayed metal coatings (G189), and welding consumables
(CSA W48.x).
Most CSA material standards use SI units, although some are available in both SI and Imperial
units (e.g. CSA G4), while others are available in both units but published separately (e.g.
CSA G40.20/G40.21-M92 (SI) and G40.20/G40.21-92 (Imperial)). When a CSA standard designation
is followed by the letter "M", it uses SI units, and if the letter "M" is not present, it may use both
units or use only Imperial units. The type of measurement units adopted in CSA standards are
specific industry driven, with some industr ies moving faster towards the exclusive use of SI units
than others, and th us the reason for these differences.
Welding filler metal specification under the CSA W48.x-M group of standardscontains both units of
measurement. These standards are based on the American Welding Society CAWS) system, but
includes SI units of measurement followed by Imperial units in bracket s.
CSA W48.1-M Classification E48018 - Carbon Steel Covered Electrodes for Shielded Metal
Arc Welding:
• based on the AWS A5.1 Classification E7018, except it has the CSA W48.1-M designation
and some minor specification differences.
• the first three digits in the classification designation, 480, represent minimum tensile
strength in MPa, rath er than ksi as in the AWS system.
• the fourth digit, and the fourth and fifth digits together, are used in the same manner as in
the AWS standards, namely, position and type of covering, respectively.
Notebook Paae 271

© Codes and Standards Training Institute {CASTI)
Notebook Page 272

201la SECTION II, PART A SA-106fSA-I06M
SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS CARBON STEEL PIPE

FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
SA-106/SA-106M
~
tNTW~t~~AnONAL
St«nd«rdJ Worklwf~•
(Identical with ASTM Specification A 1061 A 106M-08) (10}
1. Scope 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This specification covers seamless carbon steel pipe 2.1 ASTM Standards:
for high-temperature service (Note l) in NPS ~to NPS 48 A 530 / A 530M Specification for General Requirements for
[DN 6 to DN 1200] (Note 2) inclusive, with nominal (aver- Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe
age) wall thickness as given in ASME B36.lOM. It shall E 2 13 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe
be permissible to furnish pipe having other dimensions and Tubing
provided such pipe complies with all other requirements E 309 Practice for Eddy-Current Examination of Steel
of this specification. Pipe ordered under this specification Tubular Products Using Magnetic Saturation
shall be suitable for bending, flanging, and similar form ing E 381 Method of Macroetch Testing Steel Bars, Billets,
operations, and for welding. When the steel is to be welded, Blooms, and Forgings
it is presupposed that a welding procedure suitable to the E 570 Practice for Flux Leakage Examination of Ferromag-
grade of steel and intended use or service will be utilized. netic Steel Tubular Products
NOTE I - It is suggested, consideration be given to possible graphit· 2.2 ASME Standard:
ization. ASME B36.1 OM Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
NOTE 2 - The dimensionless designator NPS (nominal pipe size) [DN 2.3 Milita1y Standards:
(diameter nom inal)] has been substituted in this standard for such tradi- MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
tional terms as "nominal diamete r:· ..size." and ·'nominal size:·
MIL- STD- 163 Steel Mill Products , Preparation for
1.2 Supplementary requirements of an optional nature Shipment and Storage
are provided for seamless pipe intended for use in applica- 2.4 Federal Standard:
tions where a superior grade of pipe is required. These Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipments (Civi l Agencies)
supplementary requirements call for additional tests to be Fed. Std. No. I 83 Continuous Identification Marking of
made and when desired shall be so stated in the order. Iron and Steel Products
1.3 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound 2.5 Other Standards:
units are to be regarded separately as standard. The values SSPC-SP 6 Surface Preparation Specification No. 6
stated in each system may not be exact equivalents; there-
fore, each system shall be used independently of the other.
Combining values from the two systems may result in non- 3. Ordering Information
conformance with the standard. 3.1 111e inclusion of the following, as required will
1.4 The following precautionary caveat pertains only describe the desired material adequately, when ordered
to the test method portion, Sections I I , 12, and 13 of this under this specification:
specification: This standard does not purport to address 3.1.1 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths),
all of the safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It
3.1.2 Name of material (seamless carbon steel pipe),
is the responsibility of the user of this standard to establish
appropriate safety and health practices and determine the 3.1.3 Grade (Table 1),
applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. 3.1.4 Manufacture (hot-finished or cold-drawn),
195
Notebook Paae 273

SA-106/SA-106M 20lla SECTION 11, PART A
3.1.5 Size (NPS [DN] and weight class or schedule of Specification A 530/A 530M unless otherwise provided
number, or both; outside diameter and nominal wall thick- herein.
ness; or inside diameter and nominal wall thickness),
3.1.6 Special outside diameter tolerance pipe
7. Chemical Composition
( 16.2.2),
7.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to
3.1.7 Inside diameter tolerance pipe, over I 0 in. chemical composition prescribed in Table l.
[250 mm] TD (16.2.3),
3.1.8 Length (specific or random, Section l7),
8. Heat Analysis
3.1.9 Optional requirements (Section 9 and S 1 to S8),
8.1 An analysis of each heat of steel shall be made by
3.1.10 Test report req uired (Section on Certification the steel manufacturer to determine the percentages of the
of Specification A 530/A 530M), e lements specified in Section 7. If the secondary melting
3.1.11 Specification designation (A I06 or A 106M, processes of 5. I are employed, the heat analysis shall be
including year-date), obtained from one remelted ingot or the product of one
3.1.12 End use of material, remelted ingot of each primary melt. The chemical compo-
sition thus determined, or that determined from a product
3.1.13 Hydrostatic test in accordance with Specifica- analysis made by the manufacturer, if the latter has not
tion A 530/A 530M or I 3.3 of this specification, or NDE manufactured the steel, shall be reported to the purchaser
in accordance with Section 14 of this specification. or the purchaser's representative, and shall conform to the
3.1.14 Special requirements. req uirements specified in Section 7.
4. Process 9. Product Analysis

4.1 The steel shall be killed steel, with the primary 9.1 At the request of the purchaser, analyses of two
melting process being open-hearth, basic-oxygen, or elec- pipes from each lot (see 20.1) shall be made by the manu-
tric- furnace, possibly combined with separate degassing or facturer from the finished pipe. The results of these analyses
refining. If secondary melting, using electroslag remelting shall be reported to the purchaser or the purchaser's repre-
or vacuum-arc remelting is subsequently employed, the sentative and shall conform to the requirements specified
heat shall be defined as all of the ingots remelted from a in Section 7.
single primary heat. 9.2 If the analysis of one of the tests specified in 9.1
4.2 Steel cast in ingots or strand cast is permissible. does not conform to the req uirements specified in Section 7,
When steels of different grades are sequentially strand cast, analyses shall be made on additional pipes of double the
identification of the resultant transition material is required. original number from the same lot, each of which shall
The producer shall remove the transition material by any conform to requirements specified.
established procedure that positively separates the grades.
4.3 For pipe NPS I ~ [DN 40] and under, it shall be 10. Tensile Requirements
permissible to furnish hot finished or cold drawn. 10.1 The material shall conform to the requirements
4.4 Unless otherwise specified, pipe NPS 2 [DN 50] as to tensile properties given in Table 2.
and over shall be furnished hot finished. When agreed
upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser, it is
11. Bending Requirements
permissible to furnish cold-drawn pipe.
11.1 For pipe NPS 2 [DN 50] and under, a sufficient
length of pipe shall stand being bent cold through 90°
S. Heat T reatment around a cylindrical mandrel, the diameter of which is
5.1 Hot-finished pipe need not be heat treated. Cold- twelve times the outside diameter (as shown in ASME
drawn pipe shall be heat treated after the final cold draw B36.10M) of the pipe, without developing cracks. When
pass at a temperature of I 200°F (650°C) or higher. ordered for close coiling, the pipe shall stand being bent
cold through 180° around a cylindrical mandrel, the diame-
ter of which is eight times the o utside diameter (as shown
6. General Requirements in ASME 836. 1OM) of the pipe, without failure.
6.1 Material furnished to this specification shall con- 11.2 For pipe whose diameter exceeds 25 in. [635 mm]
form to the applicable requirements of the current edition and whose diameter to wall thickness ratio, where the
196
Notebook Page 274

20lla SECTION II, PART A SA-106/SA-106M
shall transfer complete identifying information, including of such material shall be in accordance with Fed. Std. No.
the name or brand of the manufacturer to each unmarked 123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD-129 or Fed. Std. No.
cut length, or to metal tags securely attached to bundles 183 if continuous marking is required for military agencies.
of unmarked small diameter pipe. The same material desig-
26.2 Inspection - Unless otherwise specified in the
nation shall be included with the information transfeJTed,
contract, the producer is responsible for the performance
and the processor's name. trademark. or brand shall be
of all inspection and test req uirements specified herein.
added.
Except as otherwise specified in the contract, the producer
25.3 Bar Coding - In addition to the requirements in shall use his own. or any other suitable facilities for the
25. 1 and 25 .2. bar coding is acceptable as a supplementary performance of the inspection and test requirements speci-
identification method. The purchaser may specify in the fied herein. unless disapproved by the purchaser. The pur-
order a specific bar coding system to be used. chaser shall have the right to perform any of the inspections
and tests set forth in this specification where such inspec-
tions are deemed necessary to ensure that the material
26. Government Procurement conforms to the prescribed requirements.
26.1 When specified in the contract, material shall be
preserved, packaged, and packed in accordance with the
req uirements of MIL-STD-163. The applicable levels shall 27. Keywords
be as specified in the contract. Marking for the shipment 27.1 carbon steel pipe; seamless steel pipe; steel pipe
TABLE 1
CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
Composit ion, %
Grade A Grade B Grade C
Carbon, maxA 0.25 0.30 0.35

Manganese 0.27- 0.93 0.29- 1.06 0.29-1.06
Phosphorus, max 0.035 0 .035 0 .035
Sulfur, max 0.035 0.035 0.035
Sil icon, min 0 .10 0.10 0.10
Chrome, max 8 0.40 0.40 0.40
Copper, max 8 0.40 0.40 0.40
Molybdenum,
max 8 0.15 0.15 0.15
Nickel, max 8 0.40 0.40 0.40
Vanadium, max 8 0.08 0.08 0.08
A For each reduction of 0.01% below the specified carbon maxi-

mum, an increase of 0.06% manganese above the spec ified maxi -
mum will be permitted up to a maximum of 1.35%.
8
These five elements combined shall not exceed 1%.
201
Notebook Page 275

SA-106/SA-106M 2011a SECTION II, PART A
TABLE 2
TENSILE REQUIREMENTS
Grade A Grade B Grade C
Tensile strength, min, psi (M Pal 48 000 [330 ] 60 000 [ 415] 70 000 [485]
Yield strength, min, psi ( M Pal 30 000 [205] 35 000 [240] 40 000 [ 275]
Longitu- Longitu- Longitu-
dinal Transverse dinal Transverse dinal Transverse
Elongation in 2 in. [50 mmJ, min, % :

Basic minimum elongation transverse strip tests, and for all small
sizes tested in full section 35 25 30 16.5 30 16.5
When standard ro und 2 in. [50 mml gage length test specimen is
used 28 20 22 12 20 12
For longitudinal str ip tests A A A
For transverse stri p tests, a deduction for each 1/ 32 in. [0.8 nnml
decrease in wall thickness below 5/ 16 in. [7.9 mml from the basic
minimum elongation of the fol lowing percentage shall be made 1.25 1.00 1.00
A The minimum elongation in 2 in. [50 mml shall be determined by the fol lowing equation:
e := 625 OOOA0 ·2t t.fl·9

for inch-pound uni ts, and
for SI units,
where:
e = minimum elongation in 2 in. [50 mml, %, rounded to the nearest 0.5%.
A = cross-sectional area of the tension test specimen, in.2 [mm2 J, based upon specified outside diameter or nominal specimen width and
specified wall thickness rounded to the nearest 0.01 in. 2 [ mm 2 J. If the area thus ca lculated is greater than 0.75 in.2 [500 mm2 J,
then the value 0.75 in.2 [ 50 mm 2J shall be used, and
U = specified tensi le strength, psi [M Pal
202
Notebook Page 276

20lla SECTION II, PAlin A SA-106/SA-106M
TABLE 3
VARIATIONS IN OUTSIDE DIAMETER
Permissible Variations in Outside Diameter
Over Under
NPS [ON Designator] in. mm in. mm
18 to 1 1
1
12[6 to 401, incl 'lo• (0.015) 0.4 11oo (0.015) 0.4
Over 1
1 /2 to 4 [40 to 100], incl 1
1n (0.031) 1
0.8 132 (0.031) 0.8
Over 4 to 8 [lOO to 200], incl 1116 (0.062) 1
1n (0.031)
1.6 0.8
Over 8 to 18 [200 to 450 ], incl %2 (0.093) 2.4 1132 (0.031)
0.8
1132 (0.031)
Over 18 to 26 [450 to 6501, incl 'Is (0.125) 3.2 0.8
Over 26 t o 34 [ 650 to 850], i ncl %2 (0.156) 4.0 '132 (0.031) 0.8
Over 34 to 48 [850 to 1200], incl 3 4.8 1
116 (0.187) 132 <0.03ll 0.8
TABLE 4
MARI<ING
Hydro NDE Marking
Yes No Test Pressure

No Yes NDE
No No NH
Yes Yes Test Pressure/ND E
203
Notebook Paae 277

SA-106/SA-106M 2011a SECTION 11, PART A
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
One or more of the fo llowing supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified
in the purchase order. The purchaser may specify a different frequency of test or analysis
than is provided in the supplementary requirement. Subject to agreement between the
purchaser and manufacturer, retest and retreatment provisions of these supplementary
requirements may also be modified.
S l. P roduct Ana lysis 84. Fla ttening Test , E nhanced

81.1 Product analysis shall be made on each length of 8 4.1 The flattening test of Specification A 530/A 530M
pipe. Individual lengths fai ling to conform to the chemical shall be made on a specimen from one end or both ends
composition requirements shall be rejected. of each pipe. Crop ends may be used. If this supplementary
requirement is specified, the number of tests per pipe shall
also be specified . If a specimen from any length fails
82. T ransverse Tension Test because of lack of ductility prior to satisfactory completion
8 2.1 A transverse tension test shall be made on a speci- of the first step of the flattening test requirement, that pipe
men from one end or both ends of each pipe NPS 8 shall be rejected subject to retreatment in accordance with
[DN 200] and over. If this supplementary requirement is Specification A 530/A 530M and satisfactory retest. If a
specified, the number of tests per pipe shall also be speci- specimen from any length of pipe fails because of a lack of
fied. If a specimen from any length fails to meet the required soundness, that length shall be rejected, unless subsequent
tensile properties (tensile, yield, and e longation), that retesting indicates that the remaining length is sound.
length shall be rejected subject to retreatment in accordance
with Specification A 530/ A 530M and satisfactory retest. SS. Metal S tructure a nd Etching Test
8 5.1 The steel shall be homogeneous as shown by
etching tests conducted in accordance with the appropriate
S 3. Flattening Test, Standa rd sections of Method E 381. Etching tests shall be made on
8 3.1 For pipe over NPS 2 [DN 50], a section of pipe a cross section from one end or both ends of each pipe
not less than 2~ in. [63.5 mm] in length shall be flattened and shall show sound and reasonably uniform material free
cold between parallel plates until the opposite walls of the from injurious laminations, cracks, and s imilar objection-
pipe meet. Flattening tests shall be in accordance with able defects. If this supplementary requirement is specified,
Specification A 530/A 530M, except that in the formu la the number of tests per pipe required shall also be specified.
used to calculate the "H" value, the following "e" constants If a specimen from any length shows objectionable defects,
shall be used: the length shall be rejected, subject to removal of the
0.08 for Grade A defective end and subsequent retests indicating the remain-
0.07 for Grades B and C der of the length to be sound and reasonably uniform
material.
83.2 When low D-to-t ratio tubulars are tested, because
the strain imposed due to geometry is unreasonably high
on the inside surface at the six and twelve o'clock locations, S6. Ca rbon Equiva lent
cracks at these locations shall not be cause for r~jecti on if 86.1 The steel shall conform to a carbon equivalent
the D-to-t ratio is less than ten. (CE) of 0.50 maximum as determined by the following
formula:
S 3.3 The flatten ing test shall be made on one length
of pipe from each lot of 400 lengths or fraction thereof of CE <ifC %Mn %Cr + %Mo + %V %Ni + %Cu
each size over NPS 2 [DN 50], up to but not including
= 0 + - 6- + 5 + 15
NPS 6 [DN 150], and from each lot of 200 lengths or 8 6.2 A lower CE max imum may be agreed upon
fraction thereof, of each size NPS 6 [DN 150] and over. between the purchaser and the producer.
83.4 Should a crop end of a finished pipe fail in the 8 6.3 The CE shall be reported on the test report.
flatten ing test, one retest is permitted to be made from the
failed end. Pipe shall be normalized either before or after S7. Heat T r eated Test Specimens
the first test, but pipe shall be subjected to only two nor- 87.1 At the request of the purchaser, one tensile test
malizing treatments. shall be performed by the manufacturer on a test specimen
204
Notebook Page 278

.. ;:::""\ .... ...... .. ~
CEATI.fiED TEST REPORT
(t'M• • • WlflO'M MniU...,4/UtDMI_.It
~~iiii: ~MD. PA~ ~-.:o,
ORlSCJ42 Ell
IUIJto~
T 1696
~yO~ W./'CXIA
~Ne·QIIItiCII
,IP£ C~R80M SHLS llN£ PIPE ~ Al~-H9~ ~E ~C ~SHE SA106~200l EOITICH GRAOE 8/C TO TS~-eD3
REV 3 ~TO 7/~81 ~PI SL~<ttNO £0tTIOK OATED 1/60 PSL- l GRADE X12 9LK REG MILL ~T PE SC ME ETING Al l
YUE ~P L ICASLE REQUOCREM£NTS Of NAC£ STAHDARO ~R-01-75 M200a
=r- NS ROLLED F 1'f . t!I00(3Ss.flH) ......1.-.....: "' '758 ( '9 .£)'50)

........
..=m:..
1 t:ft~ll.l~~ .......
PSI:
;a.a....
.58
p-~J · : .e~-. .- ]=-=:a ·1-'Psr' -..;('SI:o
& t~
XN
J
. :.
....-:
szaee:
•
ta.
riM~:'
....
22.~
1-'-
9D.7
~~ s
- . . .. . . "'lJ:l)IJ
ROOftOJ'T/8 1\it -~ •. ~:q- · ·a ·as.. or ~ -s
~
341:75
3185 AOUNCVT/8 AA 615218: 8821881 D ~7l!l Z7 ~ l!l
31l'IS RWND/l/8 AA S952tft: 86Mt0 8.6'3 Z9.eJ
, .. 05 ROUNIJ/V£:1 AR ti12006:• • 5iJ 97'f!Jf)9 8.69 27 .fl
...... ~ ~·
lJ-~
'I AMI" tl
O~T~
...
St
THIS:SMEET MM
or- e»~EJGtat a ~
.,._~-
Ja.tiNic:RIYD
.....,........
M.. I M I v
•
. . ..,.,
,. 1 ca Ct:l
W ·..e.A
t;L..•·
~ J 1'm!! f'W(
4:
~Z,1GS
~3105
IHEAT
PROD
:l+
!Is
J21
1?28 ~3 azf
· · ;· a&e~iJsg ·~~2~
t12
.'f.l&
!-'
. ...
.l~
~
.-.:..
~3
fttl1GS PROO :t1 a?zc
.... ..~s"Jj - .
~1 J!,z .l'J
.
1'
:.. ... ... ..
:
•
. ... ...
.¥ ~ .• :·
"C.£ o l!I!JIIII8)<11N nE FCU.OWHI~»c£ -=c+(MN/6 >+ <c.r+f10+v )/5+ <ttl +OJ)/ t s
I>IICIIML. ~fOR 8 ~.ua£ IMI()CAfm &Y Tli£ l.fJ!T MMOilf. ~. D01'TE'Q \.M OR OCC1IIAI.. POttY.
Notebook Page 279

Notebook Page 280
2011a SECTION II, PART A SA-333/SA-3331\:1
SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS AND WELDED

STEEL PIPE FOR LOW-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
SA-333/SA-333M
(Identical with ASTM Specification A 333/ A 333M-04a except for the deletion of 12.3 that conflicts with 15.)
1. Scope 3. Ordering Information

1.1 This specification covers nominal (average) wall 3.1 Orders for material under this specification should
seamless and welded carbon and alloy steel pipe intended include the following, as required, to describe the material
for use at low temperatures. Several grades of ferritic steel adequately:
are included as listed in Table I. Some product sizes may 3.1.1 Quantity (feet, centimete rs, or number of
not be available under this specification because heavier lengths),
wall thicknesses have an adverse effect on low-temperature
impact properties. 3.1.2 Name of material (seamless or welded pipe),
3.1.3 Grade (Table I),
1.2 Supplementary Requirement S I of an optional
nature is provided. This shall apply only when specified 3.1.4 Size (NPS or outside diameter and schedule
by the purchaser. number of average wall thickness),
3.1.5 Length (specific or random) (Section 9), (see
1.3 The values stated in either inch-pound units or SI
units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the
the Permissible Variations in Length section of Specifica-
tion A 9991 A 999M),
text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated
in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each 3.1.6 End fi nish (see the Ends section of Specifica-
system must be used independently ofthe other. Combining tion A 999/ A 999M),
values from the two systems may result in nonconformance 3.1.7 Optional requirements (see the Heat Analysis
with the specification. The inch-pound units shall apply requirement in the Chemical Composition section of
unless the "M" designation of this specification is specified A 999/ A 999M, the Repair by Welding section, and the
in the order. section on Nondestructive Test Requirements),
NOTE l - The d imensionless designator NPS (nominal pipe size) has 3.1.8 Test report required (see the Certification sec-
been substituted in this standard for such traditional terms as "nominal tion of Specification A 999/ A 999M),
diameter,.. ··size:· and "nominal size:·
3.1.9 Specification designation, and
3.1.10 Special requirements or exceptions to this
2. Referenced Documents specification.
2.1 ASTM Standards:
A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Test-
ing of Steel Products
A 671 Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe 4.1 Manufacture - The pipe shall be made by the seam-
for Atmospheric and Lower Temperatures less or welding process with the addition of no filler metal
in the welding operation. Grade 4 shall be made by the
A 999/ A 999M Specification for General Requirements for
seamless process.
Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe
E 23 Test Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of NOTE 2 - For electric-fusion-welded pipe, with filler metal added. see
Metallic Materials Specification A 671.
519
1\lntl>hnnl< P:>nP /R1

SA-333/SA-333M 20lla SECTION II, PART A
4.2 Heat Treatment: 11 pipe is annealed, it shall be normalized in the range of

4.2.1 All seamless and welded pipe, other than 1400 to 1600°F [760 to 870°C].
Grades 8 and ll, shall be treated to control their microstruc- 4.2.4 Material from which test specimens are
ture in accordance with one of the following methods: obtained shall be in the same condition of heat treatment
4.2.1.1 Normalize by heating to a uniform temper- as the pipe furn ished. Material from which specimens are
ature of not less than 1500°F [815°C] and cool in air to be taken shall be heat treated prior to preparation of the
or in the cooling chamber of an atmosphere controlled specimens.
furnace. 4.2.5 When specified in the order the test specimens
4.2.1.2 Normalize as in 4.2.1.1, and, at the discre- shall be taken from full thickness test pieces which have
tion of the manufacturer, reheat to a suitable tempering been stress relieved after having been removed from the
temperature. heat-treated pipe. T he test pieces shall be gradually and
4.2.1.3 For the seamless process only, reheat and uniforn1ly heated to the prescribed temperature, held at
control hot worki ng and the temperature of the hot-finish- that temperature for a period of time in accordance with
ing operation to a finishi ng temperature range from 1550 Table 2, and then furnace cooled at a temperature not
to 1750°F [845 to 945°C] and cool in air or in a controlled exceeding 600°F (3!5°C]. Grade 8 shall be cooled at a
atmosphere furnace from an initial temperature of not less minimum rate of 300°F [l65°C]/ h in air or water to a
than 1550°F [845°C]. temperature not exceeding 600°F [315°C].
4.2.1.4 Treat as in 4.2.1.3 and, at the discretion
of the manufacturer, reheat to a suitable tempering temper- 5. Chemical Composition
ature.
5.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to
4.2.1.5 Seamless pipe of Grades I, 6, and I0 may chemical composition prescribed in Table l.
be heat treated by heating to a uniform temperature of not
less than 1500°F (8!5°C], followed by quenching in I iquid 5.2 When Grades I, 6, or I0 are ordered under this
and reheating to a suitable tempering temperature, in place specification, supplying an alloy grade that specifically
of any of the other heat treatments provided for in 4.2.1. requires the addition of any element other than those listed
for the ordered grade in Table I is not permitted. However,
4.2.2 Grade 8 pipe shall be heat treated by the manu- the addition of elements required for the deoxidation of
facturer by either of the following methods: the steel is permitted.
4.2.2.1 Quenched and Tempered - Heat to a uni-
form temperature of 1475 ± 25°F [800 ± I5°C]; ho ld at
this temperature for a minimum time in the ratio of I h/in. 6. Product Analysis
[2 min/mm] of thickness, but in no case less than 15 min; 6.1 At the request of the purchaser, an analysis of one
quench by immersion in circulating water. Reheat until the billet or two samples of flat-rolled stock from each heat
pipe attains a uniform temperature within the range from or of two pipes from each lot shall be made by the manufac-
1050 to 1125°F (565 to 605°C]; hold at this temperature turer. A lot of pipe shall consist of the following:
for a minimum time in the ratio of I hlin. [2 min/mm] of
NPS Designator Length of Pipe in Lot
thickness, but in no case less than 15 min; cool in air or
Under 2 400 or fraction thereof
water quench at a rate no less than 300°F [165°C]/h. 2to 6 200 or fraction thereof
4.2.2.2 Double Normalized and Tempered - Heat Over 6 I 00 or fraction thereof
to a uniform temperature of 1650 ± 25°F [900 ± l 5°C];
hold at this temperature for a minimum time in the ratio 6.2 The results of these analyses shall be reported to
of I h/in. [2 min/rom] of thickness, but in no case less the purchaser or the purchaser's representative and shall
than 15 min; cool in air. Reheat until the pipe attains a conform to the requirements specified.
uniform temperature of 1450 ± 25°F (790 ± l5°C]; hold 6.3 If the analysis of one of the tests specified in 6.1
at this temperature for a minimum time in the ratio of does not conform to the requirements specified, an analysis
I h/in. [2 min/mm] of thickness, but in no case less than of each billet or pipe from the same heat or lot may be
15 min; cool in air. Reheat to a uniform temperature within made, and all billets or pipe conforming to the requirements
the range from 1050 to ll25oF [565 to 605°C]; hold at shall be accepted.
this temperature for a minimum time of I h/in. [2 min/
mm] of thickness but in no case less than 15 min; cool in
air or water quench at a rate not less than 300°F [ 165°C]/h. 7. Tensile Requirements
4.2.3 Whether to anneal Grade 11 pipe is per 7.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as
agreement between purchaser and supplier. When Grade to tensile properties prescribed in Table 3.
520
Notebook Page 282

2011a SECfiON II, PART A SA-333/SA-333M
8. Impact Requirements is not required but may be necessary to ensure compliance

8.1 For Grades I. 3. 4. 6. 7, 9, and 10, the notched- with 10.2.
bar impact properties of each set of three impact specimens. 10.2 Surface imperfections that penetrate more than
including specimens for the welded joint in welded pipe 12~% of the nominal wall thickness or encroach on the
with wall thicknesses of 0.120 in. [3 mmJ and larger, when minimum wall thickness shall be considered defects. Pipe
tested at temperatures in conformance with 14. 1 shall be with such defects shall be given one of the following dispo-
not less than the values prescribed in Table 4. The impact sitions:
test is not required for Grade II .
10.2.1 The defect may be removed by grinding pro-
8.1.1 If the impact value of one specimen is below vided that the remaining wall thickness is within specified
the minimum value, or the impact values of two specimens limits.
are less than the minimum average value but not below
10.2.2 Repaired in accordance with the repair weld-
the minimum value permitted on a single specimen, a retest
ing provisions of 10.5.
shall be allowed. The retest shall consist of breaking three
additional specimens and each specimen must equal or 10.2.3 The section of pipe containing the defect may
exceed the required average value. When an erratic result be cut off within the limits of requirements on length.
is caused by a defective specimen, or there is uncertainty ll0.2.4 The defective pipe may be rejected.
in test procedures, a retest will be allowed.
10.3 To provide a workmanlike finish and basis for
8.2 For Grade 8 each of the notched bar impact speci- evaluating conformance with I 0.2, the pipe manufacturer
mens shall display a lateral expansion opposite the notch shall remove by grinding the following:
of not Jess than 0.0 15 in. [0.38 mm]. 10.3.1 Mechanical marks, abrasions and pits, any of
8.2.1 When the average lateral expansion value for which imperfections are deeper than Yt 6 in. [ l.6 mm], and
the three impact specimens equals or exceeds 0.015 in. 10.3.2 Visual imperfections commonly referred to
[0 .38 mm] and the value for one specimen is below as scabs, seams, laps, tears, or slivers found by exploration
0.015 in. [0.38 mm] but not below 0.0 10 in. [0.25 mm], in accordance with I 0.1 to be deeper than 5% of the nomi-
a retest of three additional specimens may be made. The nal wall thickness.
lateral expansion of each of the retest specimens must equal
or exceed 0.015 in. [0.38 mm]. 10.4 At the purchaser's discretion, pipe shall be subject
to rejection if surface imperfections acceptable under I 0.2
8.2.2 Lateral expansion values shall be determined are not scattered, but appear over a large area in excess of
by the procedure in Test Methods and Definitions A 370. what is considered a workmanlike finish. Disposition of
8.2.3 The values of absorbed energy in foot-pounds such pipe shall be a matter of agreement between the
and the fracture appearance in percentage shear shall be manufacturer and the purchaser.
recorded for information. A record of these values shall
10.5 When imperfections or defects are removed by
be retained for a period of at least 2 years.
grinding, a smooth curved surface shall be maintained,
and the wall thickness shall not be decreased below that
permitted by this specification. The outside diameter at
9. Lengths the point of grinding may be reduced by the amount so
9.1 If definite lengths are not required, pipe may be removed.
ordered in single random lengths of 16 to 22 ft (Note 3)
10.5.1 Wall thickness measurements shall be made
with 5% 12 to 16ft (Note 3), or in double random lengths
with a mechanical caliper or with a properly calibrated
with a minimum average of 35 ft (Note 3) and a minimum
nondestructive testing device of appropriate accuracy. In
length of 22 ft (Note 3) with 5% 16 to 22 ft (Note 3).
case of dispute, the measw·ement determined by use of the
NOTE 3 - This value(s) applies when the inch-pound designation of mechanical caliper shall govern.
this specification is the basis of purchase. When the ..M.. designation of
this specification is the basis of purchase. the corresponding metric val- 10.6 Weld repair shall be permitted only subject to the
ue(s) shall be agreed upon between the manufacturer and purchaser. approval of the purchaser and in accordance with Specifi-
cation A 999/ A 999M.
10.7 The finished pipe shall be reasonably straight.
10. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
10.1 The pipe manufacturer shall explore a sufficient
number of visual surface imperfections to provide reason- 11. General Requirements
able assurance that they have been properly evaluated with 11.1 Material furnished to this specification shall con-
respect to depth. Exploration of all surface imperfections form to the applicable requirements of the current edition
521
Notebook Paoe 283

TABLE 1
CH EMICAL REQUIREMENTS
Composition, %
Element Grade 1 A Grade 3 Grade 4 Grade 6A Grade 7 Grade 8 Grade 9 Grade 10 Grade 11
Carbon, mal( 0.30 0.19 0.12 0.30 0.19 0.13 0.20 0.20 0. 10
Manganese 0.40-1.06 0.3 1-0.6 4 0.50-1.05 0.29-1.06 0.90 max 0.90 max 0.40-1.06 1.15-1.50 0.60 max
Phosphorus, max 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.035 0.025
Sulfur, max 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.015 0.025
Sil icon 0.18- 0.37 0.08-0.37 0.10 min 0.13- 0.32 0.13- 0.32 0.10-0.35 0.35 max
Nickel 3.18- 3.82 0.47-0.98 2.03-2.57 8.40- <1.60 1.60-2.24 0.25 max 35.0-37.0
Chromium 0.44- 1.01 0.15 max 0.50 max
Copper 0.40-0.75 0.75-1.25 0.15 max
Aluminum 0.04- 0.30 0.06 max
Vanadium, max 0.12
Columbium, max 0.05
Molybdenum, max 0.05 0.50 max
Cobalt 0.50 max
.. For each reduction of 0.01% carbon below 0.30%, an increase of 0.05% manganese above 1.06% would be permitted to a maximum of
1.35% manganese.
TABLE 2
STRESS RELIEVI NG OF TEST PIECES
Metal TemperatureA,B
Minimum Holding
Grade 4' Ti me, h/in. [min/mmJ
of Thickness
1100 600 1150 620 1 [2.4]

1050 565 1100 600 2 [ 4.7J
1000 540 1050 565 3 [7. 1]
A For intermediate temperatures, the holding time shall be determined by straight-line interpolation.
8
Grade 8 shall be stress relieved at 1025 to 1085°F [550 to 585° C], held for a minimum time of 2 h
for thickness up to 1.0 in. [25.4 mmJ, plus a minimum of 1 h for each additional inch [25.4 mml of
thickness and cooled at a minimum rate of 3 oo•F Cl65° Cl/h in air or water to a temperature not
exceeding 600°F [315°Cl
c Unless otherwise specified, Grade 4 shall be stress relieved at 1150°F (620°Cl
524
Notebook Page 284

TABLE 3
TEN SILE REQUIREMENTS
Grade 1 Grade 3 Grade 4 Grade 6 Grade 7 Grade 8 Grade 9 Grade 10 Grade 11
psi MPa psi MPa psi MPa psi MPa psi MPa psi MPa psi MPa psi MPa psi MPa
Tensile strength, min 55 000 380 65 000 450 60 000 415 60 000 415 65 000 450 100 000 690 63 000 435 80 000 550 65 000 450
Yield strength, min 30 000 205 35 000 240 35 000 240 35 000 240 35 000 240 75 000 515 46 000 315 65 000 450 35 000 240
-
N
l ongi- Trans- longi- Trans- longi- Trans- l ongi- Trans- longi- Trans- Longi- Trans- longi- Trans- Longi- Trans- Longi- ,...
C>
tudinal verse tudinal verse tudinal verse tudinal verse tudinal verse tudinal verse tudinal verse tudinal verse tudinal
A>
'Jl
Elongation in 2 in. or 50 ('!l
(")
mm <or 40), min,%: >-3
.....
Vl
IV Basic minimum elongation for walls 35 25 30 20 30 16.5 30 16.5 30 22 22 ... 28 . .. 22 .. . 18 11
0
Vl ~;, 6 in. [8 mml and over in thick- z
......
ness, strip tests, and for all small !""
sizes tested in full section
When standard round 2 in. or 50 rnm 14 . ... ~
28 20 22 22 12 22 12 22 14 16 .. 16
gage lengt h or propo rti ona lly
small er size test specimen with the
"';,...
>-3
gage length equal to 40 (4 t imes

the diameter l is used
11
For strip tests, a deduction for each 1.758 1.25 8 1.50 8 1.00 8 1.50 8 1. 00 8 1.508 1.00 8 1.508 1.00 8 1.25 6 1.50 8 . .. 1.25
1/
32 in. [0 .8 mml decrease in wall
thickness be low 5; ,<, i n. l8 mm J
from the basic minimum elonga-
tion of the following percentage
A Elongation of Grade 11 is for all walls and small si zes tested in ful l section.
8 The foll owing table gives the calculated minimum values.
'Jl
;,...
~
[;;
z
0 ;,...
ro
0'
.:..
0 ~
,.,.
0 ;:::
'U
C»
0
ro
N
00
C,11
2011a SECTION II, PART A SA-333/SA-333M
TABLE 4
IMPACT REQUIREMENTS FOR GRADES 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, AND 10
Minimum Average Notched Minimum Notched Bar
Bar Impact Value of Impact Value of One
Each Set of Three Specimen Only of
SpecimensA a SetA
Size of
Specimen, mm ft-lbf J ft-lbf J
10 by 10 13 18 10 14
10 by 7.5 10 14 8 11
10 by 6.67 9 12 7 9
10 by 5 7 9 5 7
10 by 3.33 5 7 3 4
10 by 2.5 4 5 3 4
A Straight line interpolation for intermediate values is permi tted.
TABLE 5
IMPACT TEMPERATURE
Minimum Impact Test
Temperature
Grade OF oc
1 -so -45
3 - 150 - 100
4 -150 - 100
6 - 50 -45
7 - 100 - 75
8 - 320 - 195
9 - 100 - 75
10 - 75 - 60
TABLE 6
IMPACl TEMPERATURE REDUCTION
Specimen Width Along Notch or Actual Temperature Reduction,
Material Thicl<ness Degrees ColderA
in. mm OF oc
0.394 10 <standard size) 0 0
0.354 9 0 0
0.315 8 0 0
0.295 7.5 e;4 std. size) 5 3
0.276 7 8 4
0 .262 6.67 <21> std. size) 10 5
0 .236 6 15 8
0.197 5 <'l2 std. size> 20 11
0.158 4 30 17
0.131 3.33 ( 11> std. size> 35 19
0.118 3 40 22
0.099 2.5 <114 std. sizel 50 28
A Straight line interpolation for intermediate values is permitted.
527
Notebook Page 286

(
(A04)
(AQ2} -- -- - -- - - - . - - - - - -
MATERIAL TEST REPORT

ISO 9001
INSPECTION CERTIFICATE EN 10204 3.1.8
(An6)Ptttchaser :
tMmOrder n· :
(t$8l)SEAMLESS.STEEL l>J~E,ROT FINISHED (KlLL.IW S'rtll!:L)
(aiiC) HOT Fllii.SIJED ~ORMAUZEO CONDm ON 9lii"C (l68lJ F) lllbli-alr
~NDS BEV~LL~ 37,s· A.NTl-.R,liST cOATfNG DR:Y VARNISH
(kO:Z)Sj>tdllcati'oa· ~ASTM A .133 (01/03/&S) +ASM.t: SA 333 A,DD OS(Ol/07/05) +GRADE I AND ~A Zl4!1-l (OJ/Q3198)i<;JlADE Z~ CAT..U+NAC'£ Mll.OJJ.S .ISO 1516 +CPCN.... JttV. DA.SME SA 530 (01107/04)<·ASME SF.CT.
JJ l'ART.A PART.D(2004) ADD (2005)
(B06.;8ll7)
Sten~J mar.king: - --<-- · r. A/SA333 U45-l 1 + 6 + 1!10 CAT fl 4 SCII40 0.137 HFS LT 49 F HT :flEAT NUMBER -·~ Wi!#nMi!f'
QUANTI1:Y PER ITEM
(811 -812} (813) (BIO) a (814) (BOS}
Y/R OIR. Si<!C single lettgth Qtwltity len!,>th Weight Heat
I
,. .c:::.
n Jb
OS 05 NPS4SCH40 J2192 / I3411MM
114.30 X 6.02 MM 480.02 /528.0lm
55
(C7J-C92)
Li4D/..E ANALYSIS
CP. "' C + F {MN/6 + SJ/24 + CUl lS+ Nl/20 -T (CR +MO .. V + NB) / 5 + 5 B } < 0.40"/o: HEAT 331406 = 0.32%
022: MN/C
(C70} (B08)
Process Heat c Si Mn F' 5 Cr Mo Ni Cu Ti Nb v B 022
MIN. 0. 10 0.40 3
MAX. 0.24 0.50 1.35 0.025 0.025 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.001
% % % % % % % ..
~ % % % % % %
L 331406 0.14 0.21 1.04 0.013 0.003 0.12 0.01 0.03 0.02 0.02 0 .00 0.00 0.000 7
FOR EACH REDUCTION OF O.Ol•A CARBON BET<OW 0,30%, AN INCREASE OF 0.05% MANGANESE ABOVE 1.06% WOULD BB PERMITTED TO A MAXIMUM OF l.35% MANGANESE
z
g
(j)
0"
0
0
'?<'
1)
0>
c(j)
N
(X)
.....
z
0
iO
rr
0
0
7<'
-u
Ql
co
<1>
·- -- -···-02)
·. --
"'
co
co MATERIAL TEST REPORT
ISO 9001
INSPECTION CERTIFICATE EN 10204 3.l.B
(C1O-C02-CO~)
-
RECTANGULAR SP£CIMEN LONGITUDINAL TENSILE TEST AT ROOM TEMPERATURe
(COO) (BOB) (Cil) (CI2) (C13)
Test fieaJ. width thi~k:. sect, Y.S. T.S. Elon.g. 2"'
MIN. 42000 60000 30
MAX.
mm mrn nun2 psi psi %
O!F£065 331406 19 7 s.s - 114.89 44684 6&622 35
02FE065 33 1406 19.4 6.0 J17.33 43524 68187 37
05FE065 331406 19.8 6.0 119.47 45264 70653 .36
OGFE06S ;}))406 19:7 5.9 116.88 42363 686,22 36
ROCKWELL C HARDNESS <OR~. 22 GUARANTEED
(C4fJ...C02-C41)
CJIARPY V LONGITUDINAL IMPACT TESr
(COO}
Test
(B08)
Heat
(C03)
temp. widih height sect.
(C42)
El
(C42)
E2
(C42)
E3
(C4l) (C42) (C42) (C4a}
mcan shear I s:bear2 shear3
(C41
shear
meaa
MIN. 4 4 4 7
MAX
'F mm mm cm2 ltlbf 1\.lbf fUbf I.Ubf % % % %1
01 fE065 33'1406 -69 3.33 10.00 ~ ~ D V V ~ ~ ~ ~
(C30)HB
BJUNELL HARDNESS
(COO) (B08) (C31)
Test Heat hardness l
MTN.
MAX. 200
HB
OlF.E065 331406 _ _ _ ___ _ _137
...... --·-
(ACM) v ••
.- --- ·--
MATERIAL TEST REPORT
ISO 9001
INSPECTION CERTIFICATE EN 10204 3.l.B -·- -
(DOl-D99)
NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTS
.
test test rate s_pccification pte$SIIrC hold lime resu.lt
psi sec
APPEARANCE & DlMl.:"NSlONS 100%LOT
-
'
EDDY CI".JR.RENT TEST
HYDROSTATlC TEST
(CSO-C69)
100% LOT
100%LOT
CSA Z245-1
-
. --
2654 8
OK
5- OK .
TECHNOLOGICAL TESTS
Itest
FLATl'ENINO TEST ~~~t I (Ut}31/01/2006
(ZOl} (A05)
Original com purer CO"Y • authenticity is guar.u1teed by the logo. The authorized ex- in n ullity Cootrol Sccti~--
All the pipeN'tubes conform to the requirements ofthe order and standard regardi!lg the gradc,quality and bent treat-
menl. throughout their whole length.
z
2
(!)
g
0
~
"0
Q)
D
(!)
N
co
<J:)
CONTROL DOCUMENT lt36 (MILL TEST CEATIFICA TE)
SEAlltii<OUCTIO:.
PftOOUCT l5I.U & OAUOE
lffilAOSfAtlC I"'IG$SlJM
$1i!PI'ED VSo\
Cll$10NEA P .0.
DATl'
ITI:iol tiO.
23/02/90
I~W.UttHG r_£UP.
t l.ll.LSP€60
$)tll'fi&O
1058
127
•c
FT./Mil-t
i8077 .58DY 449. .541
\8077 62DY .426 -.539
i8078 66Dt .450 . 542 311 .63

i8Q7S 74D'! . 4.58 548 30 I .84
LADlE
Cl*C1<
LADlE
CHECK
LAOl.E
CHECK
ARPY V NOTCH IMPA"CTiE~TS

IN£~~ I\~~- '
:~r-.
IU>i£MIEtiEIIOY OIERQY
·- . ....... ·-· .....

III!NTAnON: TRAHSYERSE LON.Giriiouii.L -· ·· !
·SITIONCOOE: SXELP ~1
PIPEBOOY PII'EWELO
- -· . .. ·-··-··· . ....... ..
ECIMEN SIZE: TEMPER.&.TURE:
EROY! -· JOULES Foor ·..o~os #2.
. . . - -·· ····-··· .i
. ,. . .I
;
GENERAL .COMMENTS
. . #3
I ,~. , OtEA,~Y .,
... -~~- K()RMALIZI.NC "AS ACHIE~ ON ~L OF 'llfl;_
~-:r-j~M<I•~-
EHEftOY , ... SHEAR! (HEIIGY 'I SMEAl\
#1 I ;
ABOVB·- HEATS.-
#2
*UIPACT ·- RESULTS ON AlTACI!ED PAGES
,. .·' ···l·-·--··
....... . .
#3 ·r·· 1
Jtt ol 19 9l
20Ila SECTION II, PART A SA-312/SA·312M
SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS AND WELDED

AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL PIPES
& SA-312/SA-312M
~
(Identical with ASTM Specification A 312/A 312M-Ola except for the deletion of 5.2, revision to 6.2 to add "H" Grade heat treatment
requirements and editorial differences in 7 .I and Table l and an editorial correction to the Cr and Ni percent chemical composition for UNS
S3 I 002 in Table 1.)
1. Scope 1.5 Grades TP321 and TP321H have lower strength

1.1 This specification covers seamless. straight-seam requirements for pipe manufactured by the seamless pro-
welded, and heavily cold worked welded austenitic stain· cess in nominal wall thicknesses greater than in. Ys
less steel pipe intended for high-temperature and general [9.5 mm].
corrosive service.
NOTE 1- When the impact test criterion for a low-temperan1re service units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the
wou ld be 15 ft·lbf [20 J] energy absorption or 15 mils [0.38 mm] lateral
expansion, some of the austenitic stainless steel grades covered by this
specification are accepted by certain pressure vessel or piping codes in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each
without the necessity of making the actual test. For example, Grades system must be used independently of the other. Combining
T P304, TP304L. and TP347 are accepted by the ASME Pressure Vessel values from the two systems may result in nonconformance
Code. Section VIII Division I, and by the Chem ical Plant and Refinery
with the specification. The inch-pound units shall apply
Piping Code, ANSI 831.3, for service at temperatures as low as
- 425°F[- 250°C) without quali fication by impact tests. Other AISI stain- unless the "M" designation of this specification is specified
less steel grades are usually accepted for service temperatures as low as in the order.
- 325°F [-200°C) without impact testing. Impact testing may, under cer-
tain circumstances, be required. For example, materials with chromium NOTE 2- The dimensionless designator NPS (nominal pipe size) has
or nickel content outside the AISI ranges. and for material with carbon been substituted in this standard for such trad itional terms as "nominal
content exceeding 0.10%. are required to be impact tested under the rules dimneter." "size," and "nominal size."
of ASME Section VIII Division I when service temperatures are lower
than -so•F [- 4s•q.
1.2 Grades TP304H, TP309H, TP309HCb, TP3lOH.

TP310HCb, TP316H, TP32LH, TP347H, and TP348H are 2. Referenced Documents
modifications of Grades TP304, TP309Cb, TP309S, 2.1 ASTM Standards:
TP31 OCb, TP31 OS, TP316, TP321, TP34 7, and TP348. A 262 Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranu-
and are intended for high-temperature service. lar Attack in Austenitic Stainless Steels
1.3 Optional supplementary requirements are provided A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Test-
for pipe where a greater degree of testing is desired. These ing of Steel Products
supplementary requirements call for additional tests to be A 450/ A 450M Specification for General Requirements
made and, when desired, one or more of these may be for Carbon, Ferritic Alloy, and Austenitic Alloy Steel
specified in the order. Tubes
1.4 Table Xl .l lists the standardized dimensions of A 941 Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel.
welded and seamless stainless steel pipe as shown in ANSI Related Alloys, and Ferroalloys
B36.19. These dimensions are also applicable to heavily A 999/A 999M Specification for General Requirements
cold worked pipe. Pipe having other dimensions may be for Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe
furnished provided such pipe complies with all other E 112 Test Methods for Determining the Average Grain
requirements of this specification. Size
487
Notebook Paqe 291

SA-312/SA-312M 2011a SECTION II, PART A
E 38 1 Method of Macroetch Testing Steel Bars, Billets, 5. General Requirements

Blooms, and Forgings 5.1 Material furnished under this specification shall
E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS) conform to the applicable requirements of the current edi-
2.2 ANSI Standards: tion of Specification A 9991 A 999M unless otherwise pro-
B 1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose vided herein.
B36.10 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe 5.2 DELETED
B36.19 Stainless Steel Pipe
2.3 ASME Standard:
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII 6. Materials and Manufacture
6.1 Manufacture:
2.4 A WS Standard:
A5.9 Corrosion-Resis ting Chromium and Chromium- 6. 1.1 The pipe shall be manufactured by one of the
Nickel Steel Welding Rods and Electrodes following processes:
2.5 Other Standard: 6.1.2 Seamless ( SML) pipe shall be made by a process
SAE J I 086 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys that does not involve welding at any stage of production.
(UNS) 6.1.3 Welded (WLD) pipe shall be made using an
automatic welding process with no addition of filler metal
2.6 Other Standard:
during the welding process.
SNT-TC-1 A Personnel Qualification and Certification in
Nondestructive Testing 6.1.4 Heavily cold-worked ( HCW) pipe shall be made
by applying cold working of not less than 35% reduction
in thickness of both wall and weld to a welded pipe prior
3. Terminology to the final anneal. No filler shall be used in making the
3.1 Definitions: weld. Prior to cold working, the weld shall be 100% radio-
3.1.1 The definitions in Specification A 999/A 999M graphically inspected in accordance with the requirements
and Terminology A 941 are applicable to this specification. of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII,
Division I, latest revision, Paragraph UW -51.
6.1.5 Welded pipe and HCW pipe of NPS 14 and
4. Ordering Information smaller shall have a single longitudinal weld. Welded pipe
4.1 Orders for material to this specification should and HCW pipe of a size larger than NPS 14 shall have a
include the following, as required, to describe the desired single longitudinal weld or shall be produced by forming
material adequately: and welding two longitudinal sections of flat stock when
4.1-1 Quantity (feet, centimetres , or number of approved by the purchaser. All weld tests, examinations,
lengths), inspections, or treatments shall be performed on each
weld seam.
4.1.2 Name of material (austenitic steel pipe),
6.1.6 At the option of the manufacturer, pipe shall
4.1.3 Process (seamless (SML) or welded (WLD) or
be either hot finished or cold finished.
heavily cold worked (HCW),
6.1.7 The pipe shall be free of scale and contaminat-
4.1.4 Grade (Table 1),
ing exogenous iron particles. Pickling, blasting, or surface
4.1.5 Size (NPS or outside diameter and schedule finishing is not mandatory when pipe is bright annealed.
number or average wall thickness), The purchaser is permitted to require that a passivating
4.1.6 Length (specific or random) (Section 13), treatment be applied to the finished pipe.
4.1.7 End finish (Section on Ends of Specification 6.2 Heat Treatment- All pipe shall be furnished in the
A 9991A 999M), heat-treated condition in accordance with the requirements
4.1.8 Optional requirements (product analysis, see of Table 2. Other than for Grades S33228, S30815, S31272
Section 8; hydrostatic or nondestructive electric test, see and the "H" grades, seamless pipe immediately following
Section 12), hot forming may be individually quenched in water or
rapidly cooled by other means, provided that the tempera-
4.1.9 Test report required (Certification Section of
ture of the pipes after hot forming is not less than the
Specification A 999/ A 999M),
minimum specified solution treatment temperature. For H
4.1.10 Specification number, and Grades, as well as Grades S33228, S30815, and S31272,
4.1.11 Special requirements or any supplementary the pipes shall be reheated to the specified solution treat-
requirements selected, or both. ment temperature for the required time before quenching.
488
Notebook Page 292

2011a SECTION II, PART A SA-312/SA· 312M
6.3 Grain Si:e: 11. Mechanical Tests, Grain Size Determinations,

6.3.1 T he grain size of Grade UNS S32615. as deter- and Weld Decay Tests Required
mined in accordance with Test Methods E 112, shall be 11.1 Transverse or Longitudinal Tension Test - One
No. 3 or finer. tension test shall be made on a specimen for lots of not
6.3.2 The grain size of grades TP309H, TP309HCb, more rhan 100 pipes. Tension tests sha ll be made on speci-
TP31 OH and TP3l OHCb, as determined in accordance with mens from two Lubes for lots of more than 100 pipes.
Test Methods E 112. shall be No. 6 or coarser. NOTE 3 - The term "lot." for mechanical tests. applies to all pipe of
6.3.3 The grain size of grades 304H. 316H. 321 H. the same diameter and wall thickness (Or schedule) which are produced
from the same heat of steel and subjected to the same finishing treatmem:
347H, and 348H. as determined in accordance with Test
(I ) in .a continuous heat-treatment furnace. (2) in a batch-type heat-
Methods E 112, shall be No. 7 or coarser. treatment furnace. equipped with recording pyrometers and automatically
controlled within a 50°F (30°C) range, or (3) by direct quenching after
hot forming, the larger of: (a) Each 200 ft [60 m] or fraction thereof or,
7. Chemical Composition (b) That pipe heat treated in the same batch furnace charge.
7.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to 11.2 Flattening Test - For material heat treated in a
chemical composition prescribed in Table I. batch-type furnace, flattening tests shall be made on 5%
of the pipe from each heat-treated lot. For material heat
8. Product Analysis treated by the continuous process, or by direct quenching
after hot forming this test shall be made on a sufficient
8.1 At the request of the purchaser, an analysis of one
number of pipe to constitute 5% of the lot, but in no case
billet or one length of flat-rolled stock from each heat, or
less than two lengths of pipe.
two pipes from each lot shall be made by the manufacturer.
A lot of pipe shall consist of the following number of 11.2.1 For welded pipe a transverse-guided face bend
lengths of the same size and wall thickness from any one test of the weld may be conducted instead of a flatte ning
heat of steel: test in accordance with the method outlined in the steel
tubular product supplement of Test Methods and Defini-
NPS Designator Lengths of Pipe in Lot
tions A 370. The ductility of the weld shall be considered
Unde r 2 400 or fraction thereof acceptable when there is no evidence of cracks in the weld
2 to 5 200 or fraction thereof
6 and over I 00 or fraction thereof
or between the weld and the base metal after bending. Test
specimens from 5% of the lot shall be taken from the pipe
8.2 The results of these analyses shall be reported to or test plates of the same material as the pipe, the test
the purchaser or the purchaser's representative. and shall plates being attached to the end of the cylinder and welded
conform to the requirements specified in Section 7. as a prolongation of the pipe longitudinal seam.
8.3 If the analysis of one of the tests specified in 8.1 11.3 Grain Size - Grain size determinations on Grades
does not conform to the requirements specified in Section TP309H, TP309HCb, TP310H, TP3 JOHCb. and UNS
7, an analysis of each billet or pipe from the same heat or S326 15 shall be made on the same number of tubes as
lot may be made. and all billets or pipe conforming to the prescribed for the flattening test.
req uirements shall be accepted . 11.4 HCW pipe shall be capable of passing the weld
decay tests listed in Suppleme ntary S9 with a weld metal
to base metal loss ratio of 0.90 to I. I. The test is not
9. Permitted Variations in WaU Thickness
required to be performed unless S9 is specified in the
9.1 In addition to the implicit limitation of wall thick- purchase order.
ness for seamless pipe imposed by the limitation on weight
in Specification A 999/A 999M, the wall thickness for
seamless and welded pipe at any point shall be within the 12. Hydrostatic or Nondestructive Electric Test
tolerances specified in Table 3, except that for welded pipe 12.1 Each pipe shall be subjected to the nondestructive
the weld area shall not be limited by the 'Over' tolerance. electric test or the hydrostatic test. The type of test to be
The wall thickness and outside diameter for inspection for used shall be at the option of the manufacturer, unless
compliance with this requirement for pipe ordered by NPS otherwise specified in the purchase order.
and schedule number is shown in Table Xl.l.
12.2 The hydrostatic test shall be in accordance with
Specification A 999 I A 999M, unless specifically exempted
10. Tensile Requirements under the provisions of 12.3.
10.1 The tensile properties of the material shall conform 12.3 For pipe whose dimensions equal or exceed NPS
to the requirements prescri bed in Table 4. 10, the purchaser, with the agreement of the manufacturer,
489
Notebook Paqe 293

~·
z
0
ro 1~
cr
0
0 ., ~
"'"
"'0 V)
...
Vl
~ ~
Q)
<D
ro TABLE l ~
N
"<\ CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS :::.
..,.
<D ;;;;
~\., •.L Composition, % 8 >
~
.....
"<l r UNS Tantalum,
"'~
~
'IJ Grade DesignationA Carbon Manganese Phosphorus Sulfur Silicon Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Titanium Columbium max. Nitrogenc Vanadium Copper Cerium Boron Aluminum
\} ... S20400 0.030 7.0-9.0 0.045 0.030 1.00 1 5.0-17.0 1.50-3.00 . .. . .. ... ... 0.1 5-0.30 . . . .. . .. . ...
~ T PXM -1 9 S20910 0.06 4.0-6.0 0.045 0.030 1.00 20.5-23.5 11.5-13.5 1.50- 3.00 .. . 0.1 0- 0.30 .. . 0.20- 0.40 0.10-{).30 ... ... . .. . ..
\l
~ T PXM·10 $21900 0.08 8.0- 1 0.0 0.045 0.030 1 .00 19.0-21.5 5.5- 7.5 ... . ..
... . ..
... 0.15-0.40 .. . . .. ...
.. .
. ..
...
...
~ TPXM·ll S21904 0.04 8.0-10.0 0.045 0.030 1.00 19.0-21.5 5.5- 7.5 ... .. . 0.1 5-0.40 ... ...
~'
t-
~
TPXM-29
T P304
S24000
530400
0.08
0.08
11.5-14.5
2.00
0.060
0.045
0.030
0.030
1.00
1.00
17.0-19.0
18.0-20.0
2.3-3.7
8.0- 11.0
...
...
.. .
. ..
. .. . ..
. ..
0.20-0.40
... . ..
. ..
..
...
...
... . ..
. .. .. . ... . .. .. .
~ ·' T P304L
TP304H
S30403
S30409
0.035° 2.00
0.04-0. 10 2.00
0.045
0.045
0.030
0.030
1.00
1.00
18.0-20.0
18 .0-20 .0
8.0-13.0
8.0-11.0
.. .
.. . . .. .. . .. . ...
.. . . ..
... .. .
~ ((\' ... S30415 0.04- 0.06 0.80 0.045 0.030 1 .00-2.00 18.0- 19.0 9.0- 10.0 .. . . .. .. . 0.12-0.18 .. . .. . 0.0 3-{).08 . . . ...
::-. '~ J TP304N S30451 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0-20.0 8.0-11 .0 ... . .. ... . .. 0.10- 0.16 ... ...
... . .. .. . . .. ... ...
~~
TP304LN S30453 0.035 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0-20.0 8.0-12.0 .. . 0.10-0.16
.. . S3or,oo O.Ql8 2.00 0.02 0.02 .3.7-4.3 17.0-18 .5 14.0-15.5 0.20 . .. .. . .. . ... .. 0.50 max. . . . ... ...
~· .. . S30615 0. 16-0.24 2.00 0.030 0.03 .3.2-4 .0 17.0-19.5 13.5- 16.0 13.5-16.0 ... ... . .. .. . .. ... .. . ... 0.80-1.50
... S30815 0.05- 0.1 0 0.80 0.040 0.030 1.40-2.00 20.0-22.0 10.0- 12.0 ... ... 0.14-0.20 . .. . .. 0.03-0.08 . . . ...
T P309S 530908 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.0.30 1.00 22 .0- 24.0 12.0-15.0 0.75 ... . .. .. . ... .. .. .
\J \ TP309H S30909 0.04-0.1 0 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 22.0-24.0 12.0-15.0 ... ... ... . .. ... ... ~
'1:\ <\. TP309Cb 530940 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.0.30 1.00 22.0- 24.0 12.0- 16.0 0.75 10 X C .. .. . .. .. . .....
~ ·~ min., I>'
(n
1.10
~ ~ max. Q
TP309 HCb 530941 0.04-0.1 0 2.00 0.045 0.030 1 .00 22.0-24 .0 12.0- 16.0 0.75 ... 10 X C .. . .. .
~ min., 0:z
IV
1.10
max. ~=
531002 0.015 2.00 0.020 O.Ql5 0.15 24.0-26.0 19.0-22.0 0.10 ... . .. . .. 0.10 ... -.:
TP3105 S.31008 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 24.0-26.0 19.0-2 2.0 0.75 ... ... . .. .. . .. .. >
::0
....,
TP310H 531009 0.04-0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 24.0- 26.0 19.0-22.0 .. . . .. .. . ... .. . .. .. .
TP310Cb $31040 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.0.30 1.00 24.0- 26.0 19.0- 22.0 0.75 ... 10 X C ... . .. ... .. . >
min.,
1.1 0
max.
TP.310HCb 53104 1 0.04-0.10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 24 .0-26.0 19.0-2 2.0 0.75 . .. 10 X C ... . .. ...
min.,
1.]0
max.
.. . $31050 0.025 2.00 0.020 O.Dl5 0.4 24.0-26.0 20.5-23.5 1.6-2.6 ... ... . .. 0.09- 0.15 . . .. . .. ...
... S31254 0.020 1.00 0.030 0.010 0.80 19.5- 20.5 17.5- 18.5 6.0- 6.5 . .. . .. . .. 0.18-0.22 .. 0.50-1.00 ... . .. ..
531272 0.08-0.12 1.5-2.00 0.030 0.01 5 0.25- 0.75 14.0-16.0 14.0-16.0 1.00- 1.40 0.30-0.60 0.004- 0.008
TP316 531600 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0-18.0 11.0-14 .0£ 2.00-3.00 ... . .. ... ... . .. .. .
TP316L 531&03 0.035° 2.00 0.045 0.0.30 1.00 16.0- 18.0 10.0- 14.0 2.00- 3.00 ... . .. . .. . .. .. ... . ..
TP316 H 531609 0.04-0. 10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0- 18.0 11.0-14.0£ 2.00- 3.00 ... . .. .. . ... ... . ..
. .. 531635 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 16.0-18.0 10.0-12.0 2.00-3.00 5 x! C+ N) . . . .. 0.10 ... ... . .. ... ..
min, 0.70
TP316N 531651 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 16.0-18 .0 11.0- 14.0£ 2.00-.3.00 0.10-{).16 . . .. . ..
TP316LN 531653 0.035 2.00 0.04 5 0.030 1.00 1o.0-18.o 11.0-14 .0£ 2.00-3.00 ... ... ... 0.10-{).16 ... .. . ..
TP317 $31700 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0-20.0 11.0- 14.0 3.0-4.0 . .. . .. .. .. . . .. . ..
TP317L 531703 0.035 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 18.0-20.0 11.0-15.0 3.0-4 .0 . .. . .. ... .. . . .. ... .. . ... ...
531725 0.03 2.00 0.040F 0.030 1 .00 18.0-20.0 13.5-17.5 4.0-5.0 ... . .. . .. 0.10 ... 0.75 . .. . .. . ..
.. . S317 26 0.03 2.00 0.040F 0.0.30 1.00 17.0- 20.0 14.5- 17.5 4.0- 5.0 .. .. 0.10-0.20 ... 0.75 ... .. . ..
TP321 532100 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0- 19.0 9.0-12.0 ... G
.. ... 0.10 ... . .. .. .
T P321 H 532109 0.04- 0. 10 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0-19.0 9.0-12.0 .. . H
... . .. .. . .. .
TA BLE 1
CHE MICAL REQUIRE MENTS (CONT1 D)
Composition, % 8
UNS Tanta lum,

Grade DesignationA Carbon Manganese Phosphorus Sulfur S ilicon Chromium Nickel Molybdenum Titanium Columbium max. Nitrogenc Vanadium Copper Cerium Boron Aluminum
... $32615 0.07 2.00 0.045 0.030 4.8- 6.0 16. 5- 19.5 19.0-22.0 0.30-1.50 ... . .. . .. ... . .. 1.50-2.50 ... . .. . ..
.. 532654 0.020 2.o-4 .0 0.030 0.005 0.50 24.0-25.0 21.0-2.3.0 7.0- 8.0 .. . .. . .. 0.45- 0.55 . . . 0 . .3o-0.60 . .. . ..
. .. 53.3228 0.04-0.08 1.00 0.020 0.0 15 0.30 26.0-28.0 .31.0- 33.0 .. .. 0.&0-1.00 . . . . .. . .. . .. 0.05-0.10 0.025
. .. 534565 0.03 5.0- 7.0 0.030 0.010 1.00 23.0-25.0 16.0-18.0 4.0-5.0 .. 0.10 . .. 0.40-0.60 . . . . .. . .. ...
TP347 $34700 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0-19.0 9.0-13.0 .. . . .. I
. .. ... . .. . .. . ..
TP347 H $34709 0.04- 0.10 2.00 0.04 5 0.030 1.00 17.0-19.0 9.0- 13.0 ... . .. J
. .. ... ... . .. . ..
0.005- 0. 20- }:5
,_
TP 347LN 534751 0.020 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0- 19.0 9.0-1 3.0 ... .. o.5oF • .. . 0.06- 0.10 .. . .. .. ,_
TP348 $34800 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0- 19.0 9.0-1 3.0 .. . . .. I
0.10 .. . .. .. . "'
Vl
TP348H $34809 0.04-0.1 0 2.00 0.045 0.030 1.00 17.0- 19.0 9.0-1 3.0 .. . . .. J
0.10 .. . .. . .. . .. tol
~
.. 535045 O.Ob--0.10 1.50 . .. 0.01 5 1.00 25.- 29.0 32 .0- 37.0 . .. 0.15-D.OO . . . .. .. 0.75 .. 0.15-0.60
~ . .. S35315 0.04-0.08 2.00 0.040 0.0 30 1.20-2.00 24 .0- 26.0 34.0- 36.0 .. . ... .. . .. . 0.1 2-0.18 . . . . .. 0.03-0.08 . ..
w TPXM-15 $38100 0.08 2.00 0.030 0.030 1.50- 2.50 17.0-19.0 17.5-18.5 ... . .. .. . ... . .. . .. .. .. .
.. N083&7 0.030 2.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 20.00-22.00 23 .5- 25.5 b.00-7.00 ... ... . .. 0.18-0.25 .. . 0.75 .. ... p
. .. . .. .. . .. 1.00-2.00 . .. . .. . ..
~
N08904 0.020 2.00 0.040 0.030 1.00 19.0- 23.0 23 .0-28.0 4.Q-5.0 0.10 . ..
. .. N08926 0.020 2.00 0.030 0.010 0.50 24.0-26.0 19.0-21.0 b.0- 7.0 .. . .. . . .. 0.15-0.25 ... 0.50- 1.50 .. . .. . . ..
New designation establ ished in accordance w ith Practice E 527 and SA E J l086.
A >
8 Maximum, unless otherwise indicated.
c The method of analysis for nitrogen shall be a matter of agreement between the purc haser and manufactu rer.
°
For small diameter or thin walls or both, where many drawing passes are required, a carbon maximum of 0.040% is necessary in grades TP304L and TP316 L. Small outside diameter
tubes are defined as those less than 0.500 in. [1 2.7 mml in outside diameter and light wall tubes as those less than 0.049 in. n.20 mmJ in average wal l thickness (0.0 44 in. [ 1.10 mml in
minimum wall th ickness).
E For welded TP 316, TP316N, T P316LN, and TP3 16H pi pe, the nickel range shall be 10.0-1 4.0%.
F For welded pipe, the phosphorus maximum shall be 0.045%.
6 The tit anium content shall be not less than five times the carbon content and not more than 0. 70%.
H The titanium content shall be not less than four times the carbon content and not more than 0.60% .
1
The columbium content shall be not less than ten times the carbon content and not more than 1.00%.
J The columbium content shall be not less than eight times the carbon content and not more than 1.0%.
K Grade 534751 shall have a columbium <niobium) plus tantalum content of not less than 15 times the carbon content.
Vl
>
....c:..
N
.....
2 Vl
0 >
m
o-
c:..
....
0 N
0
3:
"'
-o
Q)
a
ro
N
<D
"'
SA-3121SA-312M 2011a SECTION 11, PART A
TABLE 2
ANNEALING REQUIRE MENTS
Heat Treating Cooling/Testing
Grade or UNS Designation A Temperature 8 Requirements
All grades not individually listed

below: 1900°F (1040°Cl c
TP321H, TP347H, TP348H
Cold finished 2000°F [1100°C] 0
Hot finished 1925°F [l050°CJ 0
TP304 H, TP 3lo H
Cold finished 1900°F Cl040° Cl 0
Hot finished 1900°F [1040°C] 0
TP309 H, TP309HCb, TP 310 H,

TP310HCb 1900°F [1040° Cl 0
/)
530600 2010- 2140°F Cll00-1170°Cl
530815, 53 1272 1920° F Cl050°C] 0
531254, 532654 2100°F [1150°C] 0
533228 2050-2160°F [1120-1180°C] 0
534565 2050-2140°F [1120-1170°Cl 0
535315 2010°F Cl100°Cl 0
N08367 2025°F (1110°Cl 0

N08904 2000°F [1100°Cl 0
N08926 2010°F [1100°C] 0
A New designation established in accordance with Practice E 527 and 5AE Jl086.
8 Minimum, unless otherwise stated.
c Quenched in water or rapidly cooled by other means, at a rate sufficient to prevent reprecipitation of
carbides, as demonstrable by the capability of passing Practices A 262, Practice E. The manufacturer is
not required to run the test unless i t is specified on the purchase order (see Supplementary Requirement
S7l. Note that Practices A 262 requires the test to be performed on sensitized specimens in the l ow-car-
bon and stabilized types and on specimens re presentative of the as-shipped condition for other types. In
the case of low-carbon types containing 3% or more molybdenum, the applicability of the sensitizing treat-
ment prior to testing shall be a matter for negotiation between the seller and the purchaser.
0
Quenched in water or rapidly cooled by other means.
TABLE 3
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN WALL THICKNESS
To lerance, %
from Nominal
N PS Designator Over Under
1/ to 2!;2 incl., all tiD ratios
8 20.0 12.5
3 to 18 incl., tiD up to 5% incl. 22.5 12.5
3 to 18 incl., tiD> 5% 15.0 12.5
20 and larger, welded, all tiD ratios 17.5 12.5
20 and larger, seamless, tiD up to 5% incl. 22.5 12.5
20 and larger, seamless, tiD> 5% 15.0 12.5
where:
t = Nominal Wall Thickness
D = Ordered Outside Diameter
494
Notebook Page 296

20lla SECfiON ll, PART A SA· 312/SA·312M
TABLE 4
Tensi le Yie ld
S t rength, Stre ngth, TABLE 4
UNS Mi n. M in. TENSILE REQUIRE MENTS (CONT'O)
Grade Designation ksi CMPaJ ks i CM P aJ
T ens ile Yie ld
5 20400 95 [635) 48 [ 330) St rength, Strengt h,
TPXM·19 5 20910 100 (690] 55 ( 380 ) UNS Min. M in.
TPXM-10 521900 90 [620] 50 [345)
Grade Designation ksi CM PaJ ks i [MPaJ
T PXM-11 521904 90 [620) 50 [345 ]
TPXM-29 524000 100 [690] 55 [3801 TPXM-15 538100 75 [515] 30 [ 205]
TP304 530400 75 [S I S) 30 [ 205] N08367:
TP304L 530403 70 [485) 25 [1 70) t s 0.187 10 0 [690] 45 [ 310]
TP304 H 530409 75 [515] 30 [ 205] t > Q.187 95 [655] 45 [310)
530415 8 7 [600] 42 [ 29 0] N08904 71 [490] 31 [215]
TP304N 530451 80 (550] 35 (240) N08926 94 (650] 43 [295]
TP304 LN 5304 53 75 [515] 30 [205]
5306 00 78 [540) 35 [240] Elongation in 2 in . or 50 mm (or 40), Min., %: Long itudinal Transve rse
530615 90 [620 ] 40 [275]
530815 87 (600] 45 [310] All Grades except 531050 a nd 532615 35 25
TP3095 5 30908 75 [515) 30 [205) 532615, 5310 50 25
TP309H 5309 09 75 [515) 30 [205] N08367 30
TP309Cb 530940 75 [515 ] 30 [205]
TP309HCb 5 30941 75 [ 515] 30 [2 0 5)
531002 73 [500) 30 [205)
TP3105 531008 75 [515] 30 [205 ]
TP310 H 531009 75 [515] 30 [205]
TP310Cb 5 31040 75 [515) 30 [205]
TP310 HCb 531041 75 [515) 30 [2051 TABLE 5
531050:
84 [ S80J 39 [270]
PIPE AND FILLER METAL SPECIFICATION
t S 0.25 in.
t > 0.25 in. 78 [ 540) 37 [255] Pipe Fil le r Metal
531254:
t S 0.187 in. [5 .00 mml 98 [675) 45 (310 J UNS AW S A5.9
t > 0.187 in. [5.00 mmJ 95 [6 55] 45 [310] Grade Desig natio n Class UNS Designation
5312 72 65 [ 450) 29 [200)
TP316 531600 75 [ 515) 30 [205) TP 304 530400 E R3 0 8 530800, W30840
TP316L 53 1603 70 (485] 25 [ 170 ] TP30 4L 5 304 03 ER 308 L 5308831 W3084 3
TP316 H 531609 75 (51 5] 30 [205) TP304N 5 30451 E R3 0 8 530880 , W30840
531635 75 [515] 30 [ 205) T P 304 LN S304 53 E R308 L S30883, W30843
TP316N 5 31651 80 [550) 35 [24 0) T P304 H 530409 530880, W30840
E R308
TP316 LN 531653 75 (515] 30 [ 20 5]
TP 309Cb 530940
TP317 5317 00 75 [515] 30 [ 205)
75 [515) 30 (205) TP 3095 530908
T P317l 5 317 03
5 31725 75 [515] 30 [ 205] TP31 0Cb S 310 4 0
531726 80 [550] 35 [ 24 0] T P 31 0 S 5 31008
T P321 532 100: 531272
Welded 75 (515 ] 30 [205] T P316 531600 ER316 531 680, W31640
Seamless: TP 316 L 531603 ER 316 L 53168 3, W31643
s 318 in. 75 [515) 30 [205) TP 31 6N 5316 5 1 ER 316 531680, W 3 16 4 0
> 'Is in. 70 (485] 25 ( 170]
TP 3 16L N 5 31653 ER316L 5 31683, W 3 1643
TP32 l H 532109:
T P 316H 5 31 609 E R3 1 6 H 531 680, W31640
Welded 75 [515] 30 [2 05]
T P321 5 32100 ER321 $3 2180, W32 140
Seamless:
S 31}6 in. 75 [515] 30 (20 5] E R34 7 S34780, W 347 4 0
> 3/ 16 in. 70 [480 ] 25 [ 170) T P347 5 34 700 E R34 7 534780, W347 4 0
532615 8 0 [550] 32 [220) T P 348 534 800 ER 347 534 780, W 3 4 7 40
$32654 109 [750] 62 [430] TPX M -19 5 2 2 10 0 E R209 5 20980, W322 40
$33228 73 [ 500] 27 [ 185] T P XM -29 528300 ER24 0 5 23980, W 324 40
534565 115 [79 5] 60 [415] N08367 N06625
TP347 S34 700 75 [ 515] 30 [20 5]
520400 E R209 520980, W32 24 0
TP347H 534709 75 [ 51 5) 30 [20 5]
N08926 N06625
TP347 LN 534751 75 [ 515] 30 [205]
TP348 $34800 75 [ 515] 30 [20 5]
TP348 H 5348 09 75 [ 515) 30 [205]
535045 70 [48 5] 25 [170)
535315 9 4 [6 50] 39 (270]
495
Notebook Paqe 297

SA-312/SA-3121\1 20lla SECTION II, PART A
One or more of the following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified
in the purchase order. The purchaser may specify a different frequency of test or analysis
than is provided in the supplementary requirement. Subject to agreement between the
purchaser and manufacturer, retest and retreatment provisions of these supplementary
requirements may also be modified.
Sl. Product Analysis of injurious laminations, cracks, and similar objectionable

Sl.l For all pipe NPS 5 and larger in nominal size defects. If this supplementary requirement is specified, the
there shall be one product analysis made of a representative number of tests per pipe required shall also be specified.
sample from one piece for each ten lengths or fraction If a specimen from any length shows objectionable defects,
thereof from each heat of steel. the length shall be rejected, subject to removal of the
defective end and subsequent retests indicating the remain-
S1.2 For pipe smaller than NPS 5 there shall be one
der of the length to be sound and reasonably uniform
product analysis made from ten lengths per heat of steel
material.
or from I 0% of the number of lengths per heat of steel,
whichever number is smaller.
S1.3 Individual lengths fai ling to conform to the chemi- SS. Radiographic Examination
cal requirements specified in Section 7 shall be rejected. SS.l The entire length of weld in each double welded
pipe shall be radiographically examined, using X-radiation,
in accordance with Paragraph UW-51 of Section VIII Divi-
82. Transverse Tension Tes ts sion 1 of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. In
82.1 T here shall be one transverse tension test made addition to the marking required by Section 13 each pipe
from one end of I0% of the lengths furnished per heat of shall be marked "R"r' after the specification and grade.
steel. This applies only to pipe NPS 8 and larger. Requirements of S5 shall be required in the certification.
S2.2 If a specimen from any length fails to conf01m to
the tensile properties specified that length shall be rejected.
S6. Stabilizing Heat Treatment
S6.1 Subsequent to the solution anneal required in 6.2,
S3. Flattening Test Grades TP309HCb, TP3lOHCb, TP321 , TP321H, TP347,
S3.1 T he flattening test of Specification A 999/ A 999M TP347H, TP348, and TP348H shall be given a stabilization
shall be made on a specimen from one end or both ends heat treatment at a temperature lower than that used for
of each pipe. Crop ends may be used. If this supplementary the initial solution annealing heat treatment. The tempera-
requirement is specified, the number of tests per pipe shall ture of stabilization heat treatment shall be at a temperature
also be specified . If a specimen from any length fails as agreed upon between the purchaser and vendor.
because of lack of ductility prior to satisfactory completion
of the first step of the flattening test requirement, that pipe
shall be rejected subject to retreatment in accordance with S7. Intergranular Corrosion Test
Specification A 999/ A 999M and satisfactory retest. If a S7.1 When specified, material shall pass intergranular
specimen from any length of pipe fai Is because of a lack of corrosion tests conducted by the manufacturer in accor-
soundness that length shall be rejected, unless subsequent dance with Practices A 262, Practice E.
retesting indicates that the remaining length is sound.
NOTE S7 .I - Practice E requires testing on the sensitized condition for
low carbon or stabilized grades, and on the as-shipped cond ition for
other grades.
S4. Etching Tests
S4.1 The steel shall be homogeneous as shown by S7.2 A stabilization heat treatment in accordance with
etching tests conducted in accordance with the appropriate Supplementary Requirement S6 may be necessary and is
portions of Method E 38 1. Etching tests shall be made on permitted in order to meet this requirement for the grades
a cross section from one end or both ends of each pipe containing titanium or columbium, particularly in their H
and shall show sound and reasonably unifonn material free versions.
496
Notebook Page 298

CERTIFIED MA ERIAL TEST REPORT
CUSTOMER DATE December 14, 2010
CUST. P.O. NO. PROJECTNO. _________________________

CUSTOMER
REFERENCE NO. N/A
MATERIAL TYPE, CONDITION &
---------------------- P.O. ITEM NO. - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
SPECIFICATION ASTM A312-07/ASME SA312, TP316/316l
ASTM/ASME NSA376, TP316, cold drawn, annealed and pickled, 10 inch NPS Sch. 105 (.165) seamless pipe
Dimensional
,.,•...
Heat No.
~
Serial No. Work Order No. Length
19'9%"
Chemistry
c Mn p s Si Cr Ni Mo
0.018 0.99 0.036 0.002 0.61 16.78 12.49 2.06
Mechanical ProQerties
Yield Str. (PSI) Ult. Str. (PSI) % Elongation
30,200 75,200 55.6
SQecial Notes
Heat Treatment per ASTM A312 -1925°F for 30 min. and
rapidly cooled.
Flattening per ASTM A999 - acceptable
Hydrostatic per ASTM A999 @ 450 psig - acceptable
Corrosion Test per ASTM A262 Practice E- acceptable

Made in U.S.A.
Inspection certification in accordance with EN 10204 3.1
Pipe has been positively material identified (PMI) with a

coupon cut from each finished length. This coupon was
used to develop final chemistry and mechanical properties.
This is to certify that the material listed herein has been inspected and tested in accordance with the listed specifications and has met all requirements.
Quality Assurance Representative
Notebook Paqe 299

Notebook Page 300
20lla SECTION U, PART A SA·516/SA-516M
SPECIFICATION FOR PRESSURE VESSEL PLATES,

CARBON STEEL, FOR MODERATE- AND LOWER-
TEMPERATURE SERVICE
SA-516/SA-516M
<0
INnRIUinOHAL
Standard$ Worldwide
(Identical with ASTM Specification A 5 16/ A 516M-06)
1. Scope values from the two systems may result in nonconformance

1.1 This specification covers carbon steel plates with the specification.
intended primarily for service in welded pressure vessels
where improved notch toughness is impottant.
2. Referenced Documents
1.2 Plates under this specification are available in four 2.1 ASTM Standards:
grades having different strength levels as follows:
A 20/ A 20M Specification for General Requirements for
Tensile Strength. Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels
Grade U.S. [SI) ks i [MPa]
A 435/ A 435M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
55 [380] 55-75 [380-5 15] Examination of Steel Plates
60 [415] 60-80 [415-550] A 577 I A 577M Specification for Ultrasonic Angle-Beam
65 [450] 65-85 (450- 585]
Examination of Steel Plates
70 (485] 70-90 (485-6201
A 578/A 578M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic
1.3 The maximum thickness of plates is limited only Examination of Plain and Clad Steel Plates for Special
by the capacity of the composition to meet the specified Applications
mechanical property requirements; however, current prac-
tice normally limits the maximum thickness of plates fur-
3. General Requirements and Ordering
nished under this specification as follows:
Infot·mation
Maximum Thickness.
Grade U.S. [SI) in. [mm] 3.1 Plates supplied to this product specification shall
conform to Specification A 20/ A 20M, which outlines the
55 [380] 12 [305) testing and retesting methods and procedures, permissible
60 [415] 8 [205]
65 [450] 8 [205] variations in dimensions and mass. quality and repair of
70 [485] 8 [205] defects, marking, loading, and so forth.
3.2 Specification A 20/ A 20M also establishes the rules
1.4 For plates produced from coil and furnished without
for ordering information that should be complied with when
heat treatment or with stress relieving only, the additional
purchasing plates to this specification.
requirements. including additional testing requirements
and the reporting of additional test results of Specification 3.3 In addition to the basic requirements of this specifi-
A 20/ A 20M apply. cation, certain supplementary requirements are available
where additional control, testing, or examination is
required to meet end use requirements.
units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the
text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated 3.4 The purchaser is referred to the listed supplemen-
in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each tary requirements in this specification and to the detailed
system must be used independently of the other. Combining requirements in Specification A 20/ A 20M.
935
Copyright© 2011 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ~.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. ~ Notebook Page 301
SA-516/ SA-516M 201la SECTION U, PART A
3.5 Coils are excluded from qualification to this speci- 5.2 Plates over 1.50 in. [40 mm] in thickness shall be
fication until they are processed into finished plates. Plates normalized.
produced from coil means plates that have been cut to
5.3 When notch-toughness tests are required on plates
individual lengths from coil. The processor directly con-
I ~ in. [40 mm] and under in thickness, the plates shall be
trols, or is responsible for, the operations involved in the
normalized unless otherwise specified by the purchaser.
processing of coils into finished plates. Such operations
include decoiling, leveling, cutting to length, testing, 5.4 If approved by the purchaser, cooling rates faster
inspection, conditioning, heat treatment ( if applicable), than those obtained by cooling in air are permissible for
packaging, marking, loading for shipment, and certifi- improvement of the toughness, provided the plates are
cation. subsequently tempered in the temperature range 1100 to
1300°F [595 to 705°C] .
NOTE I: For plates produced from coil and furnished without heat
treatment or with stress relieving only, three test resu lts are reported for
each qualifying coil. Add itional requirements regard ing plate produced
from coi l are described in Specification A 20/ A 20M. 6. Chemical Composition
3.6 If the requirements of this specification are in con- 6.1 The steel shall conform to the chemical require-
flict with the requirements of Specification A 20/ A 20M, ments given in Table I unless otherwise modified in accor-
the requirements of this specification shall prevail. dance with Supplementary RequirementS 17, Vacuum
Carbon-Deoxidized Steel, in Specification A 20/ A 20M.

4.1 Steelmaking Practice- The steel shall be killed and 7. Mechanical Properties
shall conform to the fine austenitic grain size requirement 7.1 Tension Test-The plates, as represented by the
of Specification A 20/ A 20M. tension test specimens, shall conform to the requirements
given in Table 2.
5. Heat Treatment
5.1 Plates 1.50 in. [40 mm] and under in thickness are 8. Keywords
normally supplied in the as-rolled condition. The plates 8.1 carbon steel; carbon steel plate; pressure containing
may be ordered normalized or stress relieved, or both. parts; pressure vessel steels; steel plates for pressure vessels
936
Copyright © 20 II by the American Society of Mechanical Eng ineers.
Note book Page 302 No rep roduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
2011a SECTION II, PART A SA-516/SA-516M
TABLE 1 (a)
CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
Composition, %
Grade 60 Grade 65 Gr ade 70

Grade 55 [Grade 415) [Grade [ Grade 485)
Elements [Grade 380) 450]
Carbon, max<A>, :

1! in. [12.5 mmJ and under 0.18 0.21 0.2 4 0.27
2
Over 1/ 2 in. to 2 in. [12.5 to 50 mml , incl 0.20 0.23 0.26 0.28
Over 2 in. to 4 in. [50 to 100 mmJ, incl 0.22 0.25 0.28 0.30
Over 4 to 8 in. [100 to 200 mmJ, incl 0.24 0.27 0.29 0.31
Over 8 in. [2 00 mmJ 0.26 0.27 0.29 0.31
Manganese<BL
~ in. Cl 2.5J and under:
Heat analysis 0.60-0.90 0.60-0.90 <C> 0.85-1.20 0.85-1.20
Product analysis 0.55-0.98 0.55- 0.98 <C> 0.79- 1.30 0.79- 1.30
Over % in. [12.5 mml
Heat analysis 0.60-1.20 0 .85-1.20 0.85-1.20 0.85-1.20
Product analysis 0.55-1.30 0.79-1.30 0.79-1.30 0.79-1.30
Phosphorus, max<A> 0.035 0.035 0.035 0.035

Sulfur, max<A> 0.035 0.035 0.035 0.035
Silicon:
Heat analysis 0.15-0.40 0.15-0.40 0.15- 0.40 0.15- 0.40
Product analys is 0.13-0.45 0.13- 0.45 0.13- 0.45 0.13-0.45
NOTES:
<A> Applies to both heat and product analyses.
(Bl For each reduction of 0.01 percentage point below the specified maximum for carbon, an increase of 0.06 percentage point above the specified
maximum for manganese is permitted, up to a maximum of 1.50% by heat analysis and 1.60% by prod uct analysis.
(C) Grade 60 plates~ in. [ 12.5 mmJ and under in thickness may have 0.85- 1.20% manganese on heat analysis, and 0.79-1.30% manganese
on product analysis.
TABLE 2
Grade
55 [380] 60 [415) 65 [450] 70 [485]
Tensile strength, ksi [MPaJ 55-75 [ 380-515) 60-80 [ 415-5 50 ] 65-85 [4 50-585] 70-90 [ 485- 620)
Yield streng th, min, ksi CMPaiA> 30 [205] 32 [ 220] 35 [2 40] 38 [260]
Elongat ion in 8 in. [ 200 mmJ, min, % <Bl 23 21 19 17
Elongation in 2 in. [50 mmJ, min, % (8) 27 25 23 21
NOTES:
<Al Determined by either the 0.2% offset method or the 0.5% extension-under-load method.
(8) See Specificat ion A 20/A 20M for elongation adjustment.
937
Copyright © 20 I I by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ~
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. ~ Notebook Paae 303
SA-516/SA-5161\1 2011a SECTION II, PART A
Supplementary requirements shall not apply unless specified in the purchase order.
A list of standardized supplementary requirements for usc at the option of the purchaser
is included in ASTM Specification A 20/ A 20M. Those that are considered suitable for
use with this specification are listed below by title.
Sl. Vacuum Treatment, S7. High-Temperature Tension Test,

S2. Product Analysis, S8. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with
Specification A 435/ A 435M,
S3. Simulated Post-Weld Heat Treatment of
Mechanical Test Coupons, S9. Magnetic Particle Examination,
S4.1 Additional Tension Test,
Sll. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with
Specification A 577I A 577M,
S5. Charpy V -Notch Impact Test, S12. Ultrasonic Examination in accordance with
Specification A 578/A 578M, and
S6. Drop Weight Test (for Material 0.625 in.
[16 mm] and over in T hickness), S17. Vacuum Carbon-Deoxidized Steel.
938
Copyright © 2011 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. &
Notebook Page 304 No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. ~
ES
. .... 24h
.. - --
. , 'lOt i
I· • · - - - •• --- I
-·-"-T
-- -·-·-
·-·--
, -
I --.. I
........
-
-
I ---c.. ~-·-~ ·-- ····~ ··- I=.
'IS/lY31 li ~tl~
A.~.l. ft
PLAt'S HOC..ALU£0
AS1,-1i8. ~a.70
I:::....
•
lll Sl ~~
l~rs
··''. .,_Uf46.ti8/VAIICOvV£• fiA~ Ill I,.CH£5/CAST r.o AST" ASH-86 Cite 70

. ............ ( $1
....... s
.........
(It · (f.~
".. p .. o "'
.22 .14 1.11 .011 .01s .024 tou~ .u2s .4Z

AL.04l CU.O~l H .008
..a.ouJ v .oo~
4TE " ~I A~O TlSJS ~OR"ALIS£0

1.5 "l~UTES ~~R ~IL~~"fTAE
Af 890C • 9JOC fOR A
OF THJCKUES S
"JHlnO ~
_______
--------·
~xxw·~~~l~AllXAXX~A~~
·~~~XXXX~~))~AAXAA
......,_
~)~\C'X~··-~~~l~JXAAXAA ,.._.._
H:~uaid EMN GraiD Sice
8 ) 151 • 1
..______ -
._ .
0111--
'-•'-
Notebook Page 305

... - ·- - -- -~ - . - .. . ~ .
\Ai~-·~1>£'"""~ IIHttW Oitl Iw !SUI I SHiHfM Jbi1IIA I CIMIJ( I ""0Efi -~'" OROIIi-
-9Q6~ o•2lJ
~ -,0 CU.1l>i'iili "'AAAi Al'fl'>'AOOiii
Wl ti£Al8V ClATifY THAT lH( MAll ·

AIM . HEREIN 0£SCfU8EO W"'S MAO~
ANO TEST£0 IN ACCOAOANCl WITH
.,li't()o;iiii,..CII•c.a iiON THE AV L ES Of THE SPECI,ICATION
SHOWN HEA(IN ANO AS CONl AtNEO IN
H .R PLATE - CAJ.<[;:JN - A SME SA 51 6 70 C86 A8~) - PVQ - SHEARED
ffA~OA:orT-COAOS
~CUINiAM lldTIIIUCTI()fd
RESALE
.~ ....
;,;;·- RESA(E
-·- Mll"1,--$ t~/T·n··
·- -.. ---
.... NN - ,...,~ •
N ,.,.- A. ..
...:::7-W -d- 4... . -4
... ~b:,C
d.,..,:,l.
PLATE MILL
~
------•·u
.
. I
......... .......,....00,
""""""'"
- - · --
-
TUTfO
.. -- I
•Of...l.,t(;ATI()ot
Of Pt(Cf
--·- ---- I I I
,.IOHY
I
I
.....
~
I
TMIQCI-
OITUT
I
OONDIYION
01 '-*'
I
I PSI
.....o
-- · ·- ·· -
I PSI 12• I 4• I IJ" I

I I
IIIHOI
I
~10
I
I
TV"
O<MCT
IMPA CT PAO;(..-.;;U-
2 I
.
IF TLti F JLI',.}!_f.T.J....
)
- -- -
JrYIAIP
U51 ITE,. 2 OVA IT£14 002 .31'S JC &20 K 384 "

.- ••oN-03 &5•2~ 9801 2
·J1f tf71'/0 1VIt0 ;?:1
.. 6.0114-03 'Q32 ~ 9801 2 ·J'Jf iiJtto 1w1o 2?
• o90,.. -54 1932 • 9801 2 . }?) t.f!ltJO 7JtfO 23
.\!J' SJ I lEM .:J •lU~ I TEN OOJ .500 X 120 X 38. •

4 345 M -03 J 42 7 7 J 3068 2 .foo flf~O 7!1YO 2-3
4 345!1-51 ••z r e I:J06e z . fO.O· 51/J(). 75Ytl() ~0
43·~~-03
4345!1-SI
c .z5.MN 1.1o.s .o.6.P .o2o.st •2l.CR •IOe .. J .ot.cu .o;t.,..o .OI.AL .060rC8 <.Ol.V <.0 1
C .zS.MN l.lO.S .Ol~.P .020.51 • 21 .cR .a o.NJ • 01 • cu .,tJ 1 .~eo eOI .·AL .060.C8 <.Ol.V <.O l
~O~TPNVfO ON NE ~ T PNGE
te. Jk gt J6
An Introduction to the Welding Metallurgy of Steel
Physical Properties of Metals Related to Welding
Thermal conductivity and thermal expansion are t wo of the most important physical properties
related to welding since they significantly affect the weldment 's cooling rate and amount of thermal
expansion/contraction in the weld joint associated with residual stresses.
Thermal Conductivity
There are three mechanisms significant to welding by which heat can be transferred from the
welding arc and weld metal to the base metal, namely:
• conduction,
• convection, and
• radiation.
Conduction is the primary means of heat transfer during welding since the base metal provides a
"heat sink" for the energy (heat) of welding to be dissipated.
Alloying elements lower the thermal conductivity and melting temperature of pure metals since they
shorten the mean free path in the met al where thermal energy is transmitted. This is done by
increasing the:
• number of atomic lattice defects, e.g., dislocations;

• effe cts of mixed atoms in the atomic lattice; and
• potential for mixed phases in the mircrostructure.
T h erm al E xpansion and Contr action
Metals expand when they are heated and contract when they are cooled. Calculating the amount of
expansion and contraction is critical to all engineering designs, where the coefficient of thermal
expansion is used. The coefficient of thermal expansion of a metal is related to its crystalline
structure, whereas thermal conductivity is a function of the metal's chemical composition.
Common practice is to measure linear expansion, commonly measured as the coefficient of thermal
expansion with units of in./°F over 100ft, as shown in ASME B31.3 Table C-1, as follows.
ASME 831 .3 Table C-1: Total Thermal Expansion, U.S. Units, for Metals (Excerpt)*
Temp., °F Carbon Steel C-Mo-Low-Cr 5Cr-Mo Through 9Cr-Mo Austenitic Stainless Steels
- 325 - 2.37 ·- 2.22 - 3.85
- 250 - 1.98 - 1.86 - 3.19
250 1.40 1.33 2.03
325 2.04 1.90 2.90
• Total Linear Thermal Expansion Between 70°F and Indicated Temperature, in./100 ft
Notebook Page 307

--
Practice Problem 01: Physical Properties
What are three mechanisms by which heat can be transferred from the weld metal?
a) conduction
b) convection
c) radiation
d) x-rays
e) a, b, and c

Which of the following lowers thermal conductivity and melting temperature of pure metals?
a) adding alloying elements

b) casting the metal
c) working the metal as a wrought product
d) demagnetizing the metal
e) magnetizing the metal

How is thermal conductivity affected by the additions of alloying elements to a steel?
a) increases thermal conductivity

b) decreases thermal conductivity
c) a or b depending on the alloying elements
d) unchanged (not affected)
e) a or d

Which of the following affects the coefficient of thermal expansion?
a) crystalline structure
b) chemical composition
c) alloying elements
d) none of the above
e) all of the above
Notebook Page 308

Welding Terms and Definitions
Terminology - AWS A3.0 Standar d Welding Terms and Def'mitions
AWS A3 .0 contains the standard terms and definitions of welding. This standard and its welding
terms are commonly referenced by many construction codes, such as CSA W47.1 and W59, AWS
01.1, ASME B&PV Code Section IX, API St andard 1104, etc. Unfortunately, nonstandard (slang)
welding terms are commonly u sed in industry. Knowing which welding terms are standard versus
nonstandard is key to perfonning technically correct inspector work and being a better inspector.
The following contents will be based on fusion welding as defined in AWS A3.0, as follows.
Fusion, fusion weld ing: the melting together of filler met al and base metal, or of base
metal only, t o produce a weld.
Fusion zone: the area of base metal melted as determined on the cross section of a weld.
Note: fused zone is a non standard term for fusion zone.
Welding is the joining of two or more pieces of metal by applying heat or pressure, or both, with or
without the additi on of filler metal, to produce a localized union through fusion or recrystallization
across the interface.
In indust rial welding practice, a steel of one composition, such as pipeline or pressure vessel steel, is
likely to be welded with a steel electrode of different chemical com position., such as AWS A5.1
classification E7018. The majority of filler metals classifi.ed by AWS, CSA, and other standards are
based on providing crack-free welds and mechanical properties that at least meet the minimum
requirements of t he base metal. The chemical composition match, although important, is a
secondary consideration for carbon steels. However, matching filler metal chemistry to base metal
chemistry becomes increasingly important when welding alloy and stainless steels.
As a result of ihe chemically nonmatching filler metal, heat distribution, and electrical arc
ch aracteristics, the weld joint is usually a ch emically heterogeneous composite consisting of as many
as six metallurgically distinct regions. A typical single-pass weld, as sh own in Figure 1, consists of:
1. Weld metal zone 3. Weld interface 5. Heat-affected zone

2. Unmixed zone 4. Partially melted zone 6. Base metal zone
partially melted zone
base metal
zone (BMZ)
unmixed zone
Figure 1 Weld metallurgical zones.
® Codes and Standards Training lnsmute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 309

Weld Metal Zone
The term weld metal zone is defined in AWS A3.0, as follows.
Weld metal zone (WMZ): the portion of th e weld area consisting of weld metal.
By this definition, the weld metal zone (WMZ) includes both the mixed zone and unmixed zone (see
below).
Weld metal zone =mixed zone + unmixed zone
Mixed Zone
The term mixed zone is defined in AWS A3.0, as follows.
Mixed zone: the portion of the weld metal consisting of a mixture of base metal and
filler metal.
Should the filler metal be of a different chemical composition than the base metal, then the base
metal is said to become diluted by the filler metal. However, due to the electrical stirring action of
the welding arc and thermodynamic forces , the mixed zone is typically homogeneous.
Unmixed Zone
The term unmixed zone is defined in AWS A3.0, as follows.
Unmixed zone: a thin boundary layer of weld metal, adjacent to the weld interface,
solidified without mixing with the remaining weld metal.
Depending on the welding variables, including base metal and filler metal, the unmixed zone may or
may not occur to a practical extent. The unmixed zone is typically a very small and narrow portion of
the WMZ located at its outer edge next to the weld interface.
The metal in this region solidifies before mixing with the liquid filler metal, due mainly to
insufficient time at a high enough temperature. In other words, the stirring action and time above
the melting temperature is insufficient for mixing to have taken place. The unmixed zone is usually
only important when welding is performed with a filler metal of substantially different chemical
composition than the base metal or when microsegragation may occur.
Weld Int erface
The weld interface is defined in AWS A3.0 as follows.
Weld interface: the boundary between weld metal and base metal in a fusion weld.
Note: fusion line and weld line are nonstandard terms for weld interface.
© Codes and Standards Training Instit ute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 310

In carbon and alloy steels, the weld interface is easily revealed by standard etching techniques. This
method is often used in the fabrication shop or in the field to delineate the WMZ (composite and
unmixed zones) from the HAZ in carbon and alloy steel welds.
The most common macroetchant to visually identify the weld interface is 5 to 10% Nital (5 to 10%
concentrated nitric acid dissolved in 90 to 95% methanol or ethyl alcohol, by volume) .
P artially Melted Zone
In the base metal zone immediately adjacent to the weld interface, the temperature from welding is
insufficient for complete melting, i.e. just below the liquidus temperature but above the solidus
temperature, in th e solid-liquid region. This very thin region is called the partially melted zone.
In carbon and alloy steels, this zone becomes susceptible to hot cracking since t he liquation (melting)
of manganese sulfide inclusions can cause weak localized regions that do not have the hot strength
to withstand the heating/cooling (expansion/contraction) cycle of welding.
Heat-Affected Zone (HAZ)
The term heat-affected zone (HAZ) is defined in AWS A3.0, as follows.
Heat-affected zone (HAZ): the portion of base metal whose mechanical properties or
microstructure have been altered by the h eat of welding, brazing, soldering, or
thermal cutting.
The HAZ involves a wide range of temperatures from the welding operation that can significantly
alter the base metal's metallurgy and associated mechanical and physical properties.
Base Me tal Zone (BMZ)
The term bae metal zone (BMZ) is defined in AWS A3.0, as follows.
Base metal zone (BMZ): the portion of base metal adjacent to a weld, braze or solder
joint or thermal cut and unaffected by welding. brazing, soldering, or thermal
cutting.
The furthest region from the liquid WMZ is the BMZ. This region is defined by welding
temperatures below the lower critical temperature (As) or approximatley 1340°F (725°C) for carbon
steels. As such , there are no phase transformations that occur to the original base metal
microstructure.
However, since the temperatures reached in this region are sufficient to cause tempering or stress
relieving, it is important to know the original microstructure and the potential effects of further
heating.
Notebook Page 311

For example, when welding a quenched and tempered carbon steel steel that was tempered at
1000°F (538°C), the BMZ region that was heated above this temperature but below the lower critical
temperature will be further tempered, resulting in a region oflower tensile strength.
Practice Problem 05: Weld Zones

What is the part of a weld that did not mix the melted base metal with the added filler weld metal?
a) mixed zone
b) heat affected zone
c) unmixed zone
d) unaffected zone
e) base metal
Notebook Page 312

Heat-Affected Zones (HAZ)
Singl e-Pass Weldments
The heat-affected zones (HAZs) extends from the weld interface to the unaffected base metal. The
resultant temperature range in the HAZs extends from just below the liquidus down to the lowest
temperatures commonly used for tempering carbon steels (i.e., below the lower critical
transformation temperature, i.e. 2790- 400°F (1530- 204°C), as shown in Figure 2.
Temperature Changes During Welding
1100°F
1335°F
1560°F
,.
1850°F n' ...... , n
/
...... /
...... /
2550°F
2 3 4 5
-1~ ill I !\ \"\0?1}1

1/8" ~------+-----4(~,~,4~~~~
>~7++,-,~,~~----~~----~
W = liquid weld metal (weld melt); the shaded area is the metal that is in the mushy
stage, the boundaries of which are the liquids and solidus temperatures, 2768°F
and 2714°F respectively. Arrow indicates direction of welding.
Figure 2 Showing the temperature profile in a carbon steel plate during welding.
Notebook Page 313

The temperature profile in a carbon steel plate during welding shown in Figure 2 also reveals the
following:
1. the maximum temperature in the weld centre line decreases rapidly with increasing distance
(see dashed line n-n');
2. the rate of heating and cooling decrease with increasing distance from the weld centerline;
and
3. the time required to reach maximum temperature increases with increasing distance from
the weld centre line.
With this large temperature gradient comes varying microstructures in steel that will depend on the
peak t emperature reached, time at temperature, and cooling rate. Consequently, the term "heat
affected zone" is really a misnomer when describing it on a metallurgical basis, since the HAZ is
really made up of several distinct metallurgical zones which technical makes it Heat-Affected Zones
(HAZs).
Practice Problem 06: Weld Zones

Where is the largest temperature gradient in a weldment located?
a) from the weld centerline to the weld toe

b) from the weld centerline to the BMZ
c) from weld interface to theend of the HAZ
d) from weld interface to the BMZ
e) from the weld toe to the end of the HAZ
Figure 3 shows a cross section of a single-pass weldment outlining the weld metal and HAZs.
Because of varying thermal conditions as a function of distance from the weld interface, the HAZs
are actually composed of four distinct regions, namely, the grain-coarsened-HAZ, grain-refined-HAZ,
intercritical-HAZ, and subcritical-HAZ. Each of these regions within the HAZs possesses
microstructures and associated mechanical and physical properties that make them unique .
. - - - - - grain-coarsened HAZ
r - - - grain-refined HAZ
intercritical HAZ
subcritical HAZ
base metal
zone (BMZ)
Figure 3 Various regions of the HAZ in a single-pass weld.
©Co des and Standards Training Institute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 314

To define the four regions of the HAZs in metallurgical terms, the Fe-Fe3C phase diagram provides
an ideal tool. Figure 4 illustrates a single-pass weldment and compares the HAZs microstructures
produced by the heat of welding and related to peak temperature reached, time at temperature, and
cooling rate.
peak
temperature~
(oF) liquid
I
I
I
I
I
··l··f···{ ........... ········: 4

..
1000
%carbon
base metal
0.30% C steel
Figure 4 Various regions of the HAZs of a single-pass weld using a 0.30 %C steel as an example.
Zone 1 - grain-coarsened HAZ; Zone 2 - grain-refined HAZ;
Zone 3 - intercritical HAZ; Zone 4 subcritical HAZ.
Grain-Coarsened-HAZ
The peak temperatures reached in the grain-coarsened HAZ region range from approximat ely 2000 -
2700°F (1090 - 1480°C), depending on the carbon content. Another way to describe this temperature
range in metallurgical terms, is that it extends from much above the upper critical transformation
temperature to just below the solidus temperature. There are two main metallurgical conditions
that occur in this region:
1) the microstruct ure is austenite (for the most part), and

2) since the austenite produced is much above the upper critical transformation temperature,
grain growth will occur.
The amount of grain growth will depend on the peak t emperature and time at that temperature, i.e.
the higher the peak t emperature and the longer the time at that temperature, the l arger the
austenite grains will grow
@Codes and Standards Training Institute (CAST I)
Notebook Page 315

Two significant metallurgical consequences result in this region:
1) since austenite is produced, the potential for transformation to martensite upon cooling
exists, where martensite is not a desirable transformation product due to its lack of ductility,
toughness, and susceptibility to cold cracking, and
2) as austenitic grain size grows, the resultant room temperature microstructure will be
similarly effected, with low temperature notch-toughness being significantly changed, i.e.
the larger the grain size, the lower the notch toughness (see Figme 5).
Welding Heat Input - 47 kJ/in.
As-received
base metal
Test Temperatu re, oF
Figure 5 Effect of preheat temperature on the Charpy V-notch toughness of the

heat-affected zone (2400°F) in 0.5 inch thick ASTM A 514 or A 517 steel.
Grain-Refinement-HAZ
This region comprises temperatures from just above the lower critical transformation temperatme
and up to 200°F (93°C) higher. These temperatures are within the normalizing heat treatment
range and are very conducive to austenitic grain refinement and its associated improved low
temperature notch-toughness. On the other hand, austenite is still produced and the likelihood of
martensite must be considered.
Intercritical-HAZ
The temperatures in this region includes the intercritical range, between the lower and upper
critical temperatures. Some austenite is produced in this partially transformed range, such that the
potential for martensite transformation exists. In medium and high carbon steels, this austenite can
contain large amounts of carbon which has a higher tendency to produce martensite on cooling.
Notebook Page 316

Subcritical-HAZ
The subcrit ical-HAZ includes the tempered area of the Fe-Fe3C phase diagram. Should the base
metal be in the tempered condition (i.e. quenched and tempered) the heat of welding may be
sufficient for further tempering, thereby reducing the tensile strength and hardness in this region.
There are no phase transformations which take place in the tempered area since the lower critical
transformation temperature is not exceeded.
HAZ Cooling Rate
The cooling rate also varies from region t o region in the HAZs. It increases with increasing peak
temperature at constant heat input and decreases with increasing heat input at constant peak
temperature. Figure 5 displays a typical cooling rate curve (solid line showing peak temperatures)
for a single-pass weldment. By drawing a tangent to this curve, it becomes apparent that the
steepest part of the curve (i.e. fastest cooling rate) is related to the grain-coarsened HAZ. Since this
region is comprised essentially of austenite and is linked to the fastest cooling rate, it therefore
possesses the greatest potential for transformation to martensite.
Toe cracking is a form of hydrogen-assisted cold cracking related to welding and owes its name to
the area of the weld where cracking initiates. The toe of the weld is in the extreme grain-coarsened
HAZ (adj acent to the weld interface) and is directly affiliated with the aust enite to martensite
transform ation in this high cooling r ate region; a consequence of welding that produces the highest
potential hardness in the HAZs of a carbon steel (see Figure 6).
CJ)
CJ)
Q)
c
'0
,_
co
I
Figure 6 Relationship between hardness and

location within the HAZ of a carbon steel.
Notebook Page 31 7
Multipass Weldments
In multipass weldments, the situation is much more complex because of the presence of reheated
zones within the fusion zone, as shown in Figure 7. The partial refinement of the microstructure by
subsequent weld passes increases the inhomogeneity of the various regions with respect to
microstructure and mechanical properties.
Reaustenitization and s ubcritical heating can have a profound effect on the subsequent structures
and properties of the HAZs. Toughness property deterioration is related to small regions of limited
ductilitiy and low cleavage resistance within the Coarse-Grained HAZ (CGHAZ) that are known as
the localized brittle zones (LBZ).
Localized brittle zones consist of unaltered CGHAZ, intercritically reheated coarse-grain (IRCG)
heat-affected zone, and subcritically reheated coarse-grain (SRCG) heat-affected zone. At an
adjacent fusion line, the LBZs may be aligned, as shown in Figure 6. The aligned LBZs offer short
and easy paths for crack propagation. For this reason, fracture occurs along the weld interface.
t-:·:<·:···3 LBZs
lnlercritically reheated
coarse-grain HAZ
Subcribcally reheated coarse-

grain HAZ
Unaltered CGHAZ
Unaltered FGHAZ
Figure 7 Overlapping of HAZ to form localized brittle zones along the weld interface.
Notebook Page 318

Weldability, Hardenability, and Carbon Equivalent
Hardenability in steels has been used as an indicator of weldability and as a guide for select ing a
material and welding process to avoid excessive hardness and cracking in the HAZ. Steels with high
hardness often contain some martensite, which is very susceptible to cracking during welding.
Hardenability is also used to indicate the susceptibility of a steel to hydrogen assisted cracking
during welding and in service.
Traditionally, empirical equations have been developed experimentally to express weldability in

terms of the base metal's carbon equivalent (CE). It was developed to estimate the cracking
s usceptibility of a steel during welding and to determine whether the steel needs preheat and
postweld heat treatment to avoid cracking. CE equations include hardenability effects of alloying
elements by expressing the chemical composition of the steel as a sum of weighted alloy contents. To
date, several CE formulas with different coefficients for the alloying elements have been reported.
1. Original IIW and ASTM A106:

me %Mn %Cr+%Mo+%V %Cu+%Ni
CE ==ro +--+ +----
6 5 15
2. Current IIW:
m C %Mn %Si %Cr + %Mo +% V %Cu + %Ni
CE :~;o + - - + - - + +----
6 6 5 15
3. CSAZ662:
CE == C + F [ Mn Si Cu Ni Cr+Mo+ V +Ch + 5B]
6 + 24 + 15 + 20 + 5
where the concentration of the alloying elements is given in weight percent and F is
the compliance factor in CSA Z662.
4. Stout - pipeline steels

CE==%C+%Mn +%Cr+%Mo+%Cu+%Ni
6 10 10 40 20
5. Bersch & Koch - pipeline steel

CE==%C+ %Mn +%Si+%Cr+%Mo+%V +%Cu+%Ni
20
6. Ito-Bessyo- for linepipe steels with carbon levels <0.15%

nt C %Mn %Si %Cr %Mo %V %Cu %Ni mB
P =7o +- - + - - + - - + - - + - + - - + - - + 5·;o
em 20 30 20 15 10 20 60
7. Yurioka CEN- combines IIW and Pcm formats
m C A(C) I %Mn
CEN =~to + X - - + -%Si
- + %Cr + %Mo +% V +--+-
%Cu %Ni %Cb 5 nt
-+--+ 70
B}
6 24 5 15 20 5
where A(C)= 0.75 + 0.25{tanh[20(%C- 0.12)]}
Notebook Page 319

It can be seen in these equations that carbon is the element that most affects weldability. Together
with other chemical elements, carbon may affect the solidification temperature range, hot tear
susceptibility, hardenability, and cold-cracking behavior of a steel weldment.
The application of CE expressions is also empirical. For example, the IIW carbon equivalent
equation has been used successfully with traditional medium-carbon lowalloy steels. Steels with
lower CE values generally exhibit good weldability. When the CE of a steel is less than 0.45 wt%,
weld cracking is unlikely, and no heat treatment is required. When the CE is between 0.45 and 0.60
wt%, weld cracking is likely, and preheat in the range of approximately 95 to 400°C, (200 to 750°F)
is generally recommended. When the CE of a steel is greater than 0.60 wt%, there is a high
probability that the weld will crack and that both preheat and postweld heat treatments will be
required to obtain a sound weld.
©Codes and Standards Traiining Institute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 320

Weld Metal Microstructure
Solidification of Weld Metal
Fusion welds are commonly compared t o making a casting. For example, when a casting solidifies in
a mould, th e first crystals of the casting form at its mould wall and then grows in a direction
perpendicular to the mould wall.
Unlike a casting, in a weld the wetted face of the base metal provides the crystal lattice on which
atoms of the cooling weld metal can initial t o grow, called nucleation, and form new solid grains.
In other words, the liquid weld metal begins to solidifY at the base metal grains and takes on its
crystalline atomic structure, called epitaxial solidification, and as more liquid weld metal continues
solidify and the weld grains become larger, called epitaxial growth (see Figure 8).
Figure 8 Showing epitaxial growth in a low car bon steel.
There are four kinds of solidification structures that start in the initial layer of solid weld metal and
their modes of growth are:
a. planar,
b. cellular,
c. cellular dendritic, and
d. columnar dendritic.
During the weld metal solidification process many problems can occur, including:
• cracking,
• porosity,
• localized embrittlement, and
• abnormal weld appearance.
Notebook Page 321

The continuous growth of the epitaxial grains results in large columnar grains whose boundaries
provide easy paths for crack propagation. An elongated weld pool will yield straight and broad
columnar ,g rains, which promote the formation of centerline hot cracking cracking because of:
• impurity segregation,
• mechanical entrapment of inclusions, and
• shrinkage stresses that develop during solidification.
Epitaxial columnar growth is particularly deleterious in multipass welds where grains can extend
continuously from one weld bead to another.
Hot tears originate near the liquid/solid interface when strains from solidification shrinkage and
thermal contraction cause rupture of the liquid films of low melting point located at grain
boundaries. Ferrous alloys can be hot tear sensitive depending on the amount of phosphorus and
sulfur impurities they contain. Carbon and nickel are also known to influence hot cracking in steel
welding.
Increasing the cooling rate of the molten weld metal to avoid hot tearing or hot cracking often leads
to supercooling. Supercooling favours nearly simultaneous development of nucleation sites on the
faces of base metal grains along the wetted interface. The most influential factor that promotes the
cellular mode of grain growth is termed constitutional supercooling.
Practice Problem 07: Solidification of Weld Metal

What term describes the process by which the the liquid weld metal initially solidifies at the
crystalline base metal into the same unit cell arrangement?
a) grain growth
b) columnar solidification
c) epitaxial solidification
d) normalizing
e) austenitizing
Practice Problem 08: Solidification of Weld Metal

Which of the following is solidification structure found in weld metal?
a) hexagonal closed-packed
b) face-centered cubic
c) body-centered tetragonal
d) columnar dendritic
e) body-centered cubic
Notebook Page 322

Practice Problem Q9: Solidification of Weld Metal
During the weld metal solidification process, which of the following problems can occur?
a) cracking
b) porosity
c) localized embrittlement
d) abnormal weld appearance
e) all of the above
Chemical Comp osition Effect
The presence of hard phases in the final WMZ microstructure may be due to chemical segregation
from elements such as: carbon, manganese, chromium, and molybdenum. Since these elements
increase hardenability in steels, it is similar to pushing the CCT curves to the r ight and promoting
the formation of hard microstructures at slower coiling rates (i.e., the CCR is increased).
Because the cooling rate varies from point to point in the HAZ for many reaons, the microstructure
also changes accordingly, with potential hard microstructures, such as martensite and bainite, in
regions close to the weld interface (see Figure 9).
Figure 9 Illustrating martensite islands due to ch emical segregation

in the unmixed zone of a low-carbon steel.
Notebook Page 323

Preheating
Preheating
In the welding of carbon and low-alloy steels, the final microstructure of the weldment is primarily
determined by the cooling rate from the peak temperature. The temperature gradient and heat
input become the important parameters in weld metal microstructural evolution. A slower cooling
rate assisted by preheating, decreases shrinkage stress, prevents excessive hardening, and allows
time for hydrogen diffusion.
AWS A3.0 defines preheat and related terms as follows.
Preheat, n: the heat applied to the workpiece(s) to attain and maintain the preheat
temperature prior to joining, thermal cutting, or thermal spraying.
Preheat, v: the act of applying heat to the workpiece(s) prior to joining, thermal
cutting, or thermal spraying.
Preheat temperature, welding: the temperature of the base material in the volume
surrounding the point of welding immediately before welding is started. In a
multipass weld. it is also the temperature immediately before the second and
subsequent passes are started.
Local preheating: prehealing a specific portion of a structure.
Weld Metal Cooling
When welding is stopped, weld cooling arrest is started which can effect weld cracking susceptibility
and weld properties. Weld cooling arrest is commonly initiated due to:
• subsequent weld pass is made,

• interpass temperature maintenance, and
• postweld heat treatment performed immediately after welding.
Due consideration must be given when preheating or interpass temperature control arrests the
transformation of a newly formed HAZ at elevated temperatures, since the effects may be
detrimental or may also be beneficial.
For example, the weld cooling arrest may have beneficial results where residual stresses may be
reduced or HAZ cracking may be avoided. However, weld cooling arrest in some steels, e.g., above
approximately 500°F (260°C), can adversely affect the steel's notch-toughness or weld strength.
Time At Temperature D uring Welding
The length of time at peak temperature when welding some steels may result with HAZ
microstructures that will be semi-hardened. These semi-hardened microstructures occur due to
insufficient time at temperature above the lower critical temperature (Al). Likewise, when the weld
© Codes and Standards Trai ning Institute (CAST!)
Notebook Page 324

is cooled a mixture of hardened microstructures, such as martensite, lower bainite, and cement ite, in
a matrix of unhardened microstructure, such as ferrite or pearlite, produce a semi-h ardened area in
the HAZ and can result in lower ductility and notch-toughness.
Critical Cooling Rate
Th e critical cooling rate (CCR) is the slowest rate at which a given austenit ized steel can be cooled
and not form undesirable microstructures, such as martensit e.
The CCR is of particular import ance and is a function of the difference in temperature, ~T, as well
as the thermal conductivity ofthe material.
For example, when preh eating a carbon steel plate its ambient temperature increases thereby
decreasing the cooling rate and the amount of t he hardened microstructures, such as mar tensite and
lower bainite. For th e welding of hardenable steels, it is important to determine the CCR that the
base metal can t o]erate without cracking, an example CCR equation is:
CCR(°F/s) = 6.598/(CE - 0.3074) - 16.26
The higher the carbon equivalent (CE) of a carbon or alloy steel, the lower the critical or allowable
cooling rate. The use of a low-hydrogen welding electrode can also assist with preventing cracking.
One of the purposes of preheating is t o control the CCR for the intended application.
R easons for Preheating
There are four primary reasons for preheat ing carbon and alloy steels:
1. it decreases the temperature gradient in the weldment which slows the cooling rate,
including the CCR, producing a more ductile weldment that minimizes the potential for
cracking, particularly when the ambient metal temperature is below th e freezing point of
water (32°F or 0°C);
2. this slower cooling rate provides improved hydrogen diffusin g thereby minimizing the
potential for hydrogen related cracking (e.g., underbead, HAZ, and toe cracking);
3. it redu ces residual stresses of welding by controlling thermal contraction in th e WMZ, HAZ,
and BMZ, particularly in high restrained joints;
4. it raises the weldment above the ductile-to-brittle transition temperature, where brittle
fracture may occur during fabrication;
5. it can be used t o help ensure specific mech anical properties, such as notch-toughness by
assisting to control HAZ grain size.
Notebook Page 325

Preh eat Application, Measuring, and Verification
Most codes of contruction or repair have rules for preheating. The following are some basic
guidelines for preheat application, temperature measuring, and verification that should be included
in the qualified welding procedure specification (WPS) prior to welding.
1. Preheat should always be applied in uniformaly across the welded area and through the
material thickness; selection of the preheat method must consider the surface area,
thickness, and thermal conductivity of the base metal for preheating.
2. When preheat is applied to one side of the joint's surface, it should be measured on the
opposite side.
3. Whenever the heating and temperature measurement must be conducted from the same
surface, ensure that the joint was preheated through the entire thickness to a unifor m
temperature.
4. The preheat zone, on both sides of the weld, should be well defined.
5. Preheat t emperature should be checked by temperature sensitive pens (e.g., Tempi! sticks),
thermocouples, infrared pyrometers, or other suitable devices to ensure that the specified
preheat temperature is obtained prior to welding and maintained during welding.
6. When materials having different preheat requirements are welded together, the qualified
welding procedure should be prepared by someone knowledgeable in the related welding
metallurgy.
7. If welding is interrupted, the rate of cooling should be controlled, and preheat shall be
applied prior to resuming welding in the same manner as it was initially applied at the start
of welding.
Practice Problem 010: Weld Metal Cooling

The detrimental effects of cooling arr est in carbon steels typically occurs at what temperature?
a) below the lower critical temperature

b) above the lower critical temperature
c) approximately a bove 500°F (260°C)
d) approximately a bove 1100°F (593°C)
e) just below the typical PWHT temperature

When a localized area in a steel's HAZ is a mixture of hardened and unhardened microstructures,
the steel is said to be:
a) martensitic
b) lower banitic
c) ferritic-pearlitic
d) semi-hardened
e) fully hardened
© Codes and Standards Trai ning Institute (CAST!)
Notebook Page 326

What is the critical cooling rate of a weldment?
a) the slowest rate at which a given austenitized steel can be cooled and not form
undesirable microstructures
b) the highest rate at which a given austenitized steel can be cooled and not form
undesirable microstructures
c) the slowest rate at which a given austenitized steel can be cooled to form undesirable
microstructures
d) the highest rate at which a given austenitized steel can be cooled to form undesirable
microstructures
e) none of the above
Notebook Page 327

Post-Weld Heat Treatments
Heat treatment after welding is used to avoid or minimize the detrimental effects of:
• peak temperatures during welding,

• large temperature gradients within the weldment, and
• residual stresses from the inherent expansion and contraction.
A special type of tempering that is commonly performed on carbon and alloy steels after welding is
known as post-weld heat treatment (PWHT) and is defmed in ASTM A941, as follows.
Post-weld heat treatment, n- heating weldments immediately after welding, to

provide tempering, stress relieving, or a controlled rate of cooling to prevent
formation of a hard or brittle microstructure.
AWS A3.0 does not list the term post-weld h eat treatment, but does include the term stress-relief
heat treatment, defined as follows.
Stress-relief heat treatment: uniform heating of a structure or a portion thereof to a

sufficient temperature to relieve the major portion of the residual stresses, followed
by uniform cooling.
Local stress relief heat treatment: stress relief heat treatment of a specific portion of a
structure.
Many codes, e.g., ASME B&PV Code Sec. VIII-1, ASME B31.3, CSA Z662, CSA W59, have rules for
PWHT requirements. ASME B31.3 defines post-weld heat treatment as an example of heat
treatment and gives th e following definition for stress relief heat treatment.
Stress-relief: uniform heating of a structure or portion thereof to a sufficient

temperature to relieve the major portion of the residual stresses, followed by uniform
cooling slowly enough to minimize development of new residual stresses.
Note: ASME B31.3 uses the term heat treatment rather th an post-weld heat treatment since it is
also performed after bending pipe (i.e., a non-welding function).
Reasons for PWHT
The ASME B31.3 heat treatment requirements in the following table for carbon and alloy steels can
be classified as PWHT and are a few hundred degrees below the lower critical temperature, whereas
tempering is performed over a wider range of temperatur es (e.g. , 400°F to 1200°F for carbon steels).
It is for this reason that PWHT is a special type of tempering, although both heat treatments have
th e common purposes of:
• controlling the microstructure of the WMZ and BMZ,

• reducing residual stresses, and
• controlling mechanical properties.
Notebook Page 328

Example 013: ASME B31.3 PWHT Requirements
Base Nominal Wall Metal Minimum
Metal P- Base Metal Thickness SMTS Temperature Holding Time Hold Time
No. Group (in.) (ksi) (oF) {hr/in.) (hr)
~ 314 All None ... ...
1 Carbon steel
> 314 All 1 100-1 ,200
I 1 1
~ 314 ~ 71 None .. . ...
Alloy steels,
3 > 314 All 111 00-1,325 1 1
Cr :5 112%
All > 71 111 00-1,325 1 1
~ 1;2 ~ 71 None .. . ...
Alloy steels,
4 > 1;2 All 1,300-1 ,375 1 2
0.5%<Cr:5 2%
All > 71 1,300-1 ,375 1 2
None ... ...
Alloy steels,
SA, 58, SC All All 1,300-1,400 1 2
2.25%::;Crs1 0%
1,300-1 ,400 1 2
Practice Problem 014: Heat Treatment

When is postweld heat treatment performed?
a) within 24 hours after welding

b) within 48 hours after welding
c) 48 hours after welding
d) immediately after welding
e) as required to complet e the work
PWHT Heating and Cooling
PWHT must provide uniform metal h eating and temperature control, and is commonly performed:
a) in an enclosed furnace,
b) by electric resistance pads or blankets,
c) by local flame heating,
d) by electric induction, or
e) by exothermic chemical reaction.
After PWHT time at temeperature is complet ed, the cooling method must provide the required
cooling rate to avoid forming hard microstructures and minimizing residual stress, which typically
include cooling:
• in a furnace,
• in ambient air, or
• under insulation.
PWHT temperatures are commonly checked by thermocouples or infrared pyrometers to ensure that
the WPS requirements are met.
©Codes and Standards Training lnsmute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 329

PWHT Confirmation by Hardness Testing
Hardness tests of production welds are intended to verify satisfactory PWHT. Hardness test
requirements should include the WMZ, HAZ, and BMZ. Consequently, the appropriate hardness test
technique and related test method standard(s) must be selected with special care. For example, after
welding it is generally impractical to measure the WMZ hardness of a finished product with a fixed-
location hardness test equipment (e.g., the finished weld would not fit in a Brinell hardness tester).
Consequently, the appropriate portable hardness test method and related ASTM standard should be
carefully selected and included in the qualified WPS.
PWHT of Dissimilar Materials
It is common in many codes and standards for PWHT between dissimilar ferritic metals or between
ferritic metals using dissimilar ferritic filler metal to be performed at the higher of the two required
temperatur e. However, this practice may not always be metallurgically correct and a thorough
review by experienced and knowledgeable personnel is required.
Similarly, many codes and standards require that PWHT of welded joints that include ferritic
components, austenitic components, and/or ferritic or austenitic filler metals must be as required for
the ferritic material unless otherwise specified in the engineering design. Again, good engineering
practice must include a thorough review by experienced and knowledgeable personnel.
Delayed and Partial PWHT
If a weldment is allowed to cool prior to heat treatment, the rate of cooling must be controlled, such
as insulat ing with thermal blankets, to prevent detrimental effects. Delayed PWHT should be
avoided.
When an entire welded assembly to be PWHT cannot be fitted into a furnace, most codes permit the
assembly to be PWHT in more than one heat. Although provision must be made to overlap the
successive heats by some predefined lenth, commonly 1 ft (0.3 m) and that the portion of the
assembly outside the furnace is protected from harmful temperature gradients.
Notebook Page 330

Cracking Related to Welding
Cracks occur when a load or stress applied to a member exceeds the tensile strength of the metal.
Due to the heating and cooling during welding, tensile stresses are applied to the weldment. Mter
the weld metal is allowed to cool, a portion of these tensile stresses may remain in the weldment and
are known as residual stresses of welding, defined in AWS A3.0 as follows.
Residual stress: stress present in a joint member or material that is free of external
forces or thermal gradients.
Hot and Cold Cracking
Cracking can occur on the surface or below the surface, during welding (i.e., hot cracking) or after
welding (i.e., cold cracking). Another way cracks are categorized is by their location in the weldment
(i.e., in the weld metal or base metal).
Cold crack: a crack occurring in a metal when it is at or near ambient temperatures;

cold cracks can occur in the base metal, heat-affected zone, and weld metal zones.
Note: a delayed crack is a nonstandard term when used for cold or underbead crack .
Hot crack: a crack occurring in the metal during solidification or at elevated

temperatures; hot cracks can occur in both heat-affected zones and weld metal zones.
Cracks are typically tight, linear defect s whose path may or may not be straight. Most codes and
standar ds have a zero allowance for cracks, thus there are commonly described as a defect. Cracks
are a particularly detrimental defect due to their linear nature, sharp end conditions, and tendency
to propagate leading to failure. The following are various classifications of cracking.
Underbead Crack
Underbead crack: a heat-affected zone crack in steel weldments arising from the
occurrence of a crack susceptible microstructure, residual or applied stress, and the
presence of hydrogen.
Notebook Page 331

An underbead crack is typically a cold crack that forms in the HAZ of steel weldments, although
they can also occur in the weld metal. They are commonly short cracks that occur:
1. after welding is completed (i.e., a cold crack);

2. wh en a low ductility crack sensitive microstructure is present, such as martensite;
3. wh ere high residual stress, or applied tensile stress, or both are present; and
4. when hydrogen is in solid solution.
Not all 4 factors need to be applied equally. For example, when high residual stresses and a crack
sensitive microstructure are present, underbead cracking may occur with relatively low hydrogen
contents and little applied stress or combination of these factors.
Since this cracking mechanism involves hydrogen generated during the welding process, it is also
commonly referred the as the following (nonstandard) terms:
• Hydrogen-induced cracking (fusion welding)

• Hydrogen-induced cold cracking (fusion welding)
• Hydrogen-assisted cracking (fusion welding)
Underbead cracks typically occur hours or days after welding and consequently are sometimes called
delayed cracks (nonstandard term). Because of this delayed reaction, it is good practice to perform
NDE on a completed weldment after sufficient time has passed. This explains why some welding
procedure specifications and codes require 24, 48, or sometimes 72 hours to pass after welding,
before NDE is permitted.
Delayed crack : a nonstandard term when used for cold crack or underbead cr ack.
When underbead cracks are located in the HAZ of a weld, they become a type of HAZ cracking.
However, underbead cracking can also occur in the weld metal (i.e., a type of weld metal crack).
Heat-affect zone (HAZ) crack : a crack occurring in the heat-affected zone (HAZ).
Underbead cracks can also take on the form of:
• face crack;
• longitidinal crack;
• root crack;
• root surface cr ack;
• throat crack;
• toe crack;
• transverse crack; and
• weld metal crack .
Notebook Page 332

Some ofthe common sources of hydrogen during welding are:
• excessive hydrogen present in coated electrodes;

• moisture on the welded surface (early morning dew or frost);
o welding in unprotected enviroment when it is raining or snowing; and
• hydrocarbons on the welded surface (oil and grease).
Practice Problem 015: Welding Related Cracking

Which of the following is the primary cause of a weld metal crack?
a) when stresses from welding exceed the yield strength of the metal
b) when strain from slow cooling a weld exceeds yield strength of the metal
c) when stresses from welding exceed the tensile strength of the metal
d) when stress from quenching exceeds the yield strength of the metal
Practice Problem 016: Welding Related Cracking

When should final inspection be performed of critical welds on high strength steels?
a) immediately after welding to look for underbead cracking

b) immediately after welding, with NDE, to look for hydrogen cracking
c) 2 h ours aft.e r welding to allow the weld to completely cool
d) 24 to 72 hours after welding, with NDE, to look for hydrogen related cracking
Notebook Page 333

LABORATORY TEST REPORT
Laboratory Test Number: E88-408 Date:
Customer Name:
Address:
Attention: Mr. J. Bringas
WPS Number: P-No. 4-P-No. 4, with No PWHT Base Material: P-No. 4 toP-No. 4
Thickness: 8.56 mm (0.337 in.) Size: 114.3 mm (4.50 in.) O.D.
TENSILE TEST
Width mm (in.): 19.05 (0.750) 18.97 • (0.747)
Thickness mm (in.): 7.04 (0.277) 7.70 (0.303)
Area sq. mm (sq. in.): 134 (0.207) 146 (0.226)
Ult. Load N. (lbs.): 69.530 (15,600) 76.000 (17,100)
UTS MPa (psi.): 520 (75,400) 522 (75,700)
Gauge Le ngth mm (in.): 50.8 (2.0) 50.8 (2.0)
% Elongation: 24 22
Fracture Type: Ductile Ductile
Fracture Location: Parent Metal P arent Metal
GUIDED BEND TEST

Sample Width: 19.05 mm (0.750 in)
Sample Thickness: 8.56 mm (0.337 in)
Plunger Size: 34.2 mm (1.35 in.)
Yoke Size: 54.6 mm (2.15 in.)
Sample Number Fl F2 Rl R2
R esults Pass Pass Pass Pass
We certify the test results in this report and that the specimen(s) were prepared and tested in
accordance with the requirements of ASME Section IX latest edition and addenda. The information
regarding material identification (i.e. size, thickness, heat number, etc.) has been provided by the
Customer whose name appears on this report.
Notebook Page 334

LABORATORY TEST REPORT
Labor atory Test Number: ES88-108 Date:

Customer N arne:
Address:
Attention: Mr. J. Bringas
Machine Type: Vickers Load: 500 gm.

Material: WPQ Coupon, P-No. 4/P-No. 4 Pipe Weld: No PWHT
MICROHARDNESS TEST
CAP
A
ROOT
POSITION CAP MID-THICKNESS ROOT

HAZPipeA:
5 200 258 210
4 207 266 226
3 290 258 219
2 296 249 213
FL 241 216 180
Weld Metal: 234 226 195

234 219 198
HAZPipeB:
FL 241 226 223
2 285 234 237
3 266 223 216
4 258 216 201
5 210 213 195
Notebook Page 335

Notebook Page 336

Solutions
For Practice Problems
Notebook Page 337

Answer Key - Introduction to Welding Metallurgy
Practice
Problem Answer
Ql: e
Q2: a
Q3: b
Q4: a
Q5: c
Q6: b
Q7: c
Q8: d
Q9: e
QlO: c
Qll: d
Q12: a
Q14: d
Q15: c
Q16: d
Notebook Page 338

ASME 11-C - SPECIFICATIONS FOR WELDING RODS, ELECTRODES, AND
FILLER METALS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
List of Sections ....................... .............. ........................................................ ................................................................ v
Foreword ... ....... .... .... ....................................... .................................................... ............................. ..... ........ ... ... ....... vii
Statement of Policy on the Use of the Certification Mark and Code Authorization in Advertising ....................... ix
Statement of Policy on the Use of ASME Marking to Identify Manufactured Items ...... ........................................ ix
Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee- Mandatory ....... ....... ...... ....... .... x
Personnel .......................................................................... ... .... .... .... ............ ... ....... .................................................... xii
AWS Pe.rsonnel .. .... .... ....... ... ... .... .................................. ................... .... .... ....... ... ....... ........... ................................... . xxv
Guideline on the Approval of New Welding and Brazing Material Classifications Under the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code ............................................................... ......................... ... .... ... .... ...... ... .xxviii
Preface ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxx
Summary of Changes ...... ............................................ ... .... .... ....... ..... ............................................. .......... .. ........... xxxi
List of Changes in Record Number Order ............................... ........ .... .............. ............... ................. .................. x.xxiii
Specifications
SFA-5.01M/SFA-5.01 Procurement Guidelines for Consumables - Welded and Allied Processes- Flux
and Gas Shielded Electrical Welding Processes ..................... ....... ...................... .......... 1
SFA-5.02/SFA-5.02M Filler Metal Standard Sizes, Packaging, and Physical Attributes .... ......... ....... ... ............ 13
SFA-5.lfSFA-5.1M Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding .................................... ............ 23
SFA-5.2/SFA-5.2M Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel Rods for Oxyfuel Gas Welding ............................................ 63
SFA-5.3/SFA-5.3M Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding ................ 73
SFA-5.4/SFA-5.4M Stainless Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding .. ....... ............... ..................... 87
SFA-5.5/SFA-5.5M Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding ....... .... .......................... .... 119
SFA-5.6/SFA-5.6M Copper and Copper-Alloy Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding ............ ... .......... . 169
SFA-5.7/SFA-5.7M Copper and Copper-Alloy Bare Welding Rods and Electrodes ....................................... 189
SFA-5.8/SFA-5.8M Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding ..................................... ............................ 201
SFA-5.9/SFA-5.9M Bare Stainless Steel Welding Electrodes and Rods ........... ............................................. 229
SFA-5.10/SFA-5.10M Bare Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Welding Electrodes and Rods ........................... 253
SFA-5.11/SFA-5.11M Nickel and Nickel-Alloy Welding Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding .......... ... 279
SFA-5. 12/SFA-5.12M Tungsten and Oxide Dispersed Tungsten Electrodes for Arc Welding and
Cutting .. ....... ... .... ....... ........... ................................................... .................................... 309
SFA-5.13 Surfacing Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding .......................... ...................... ... 321
SFA-5.14/SFA-5. 14M Nickel and Nickel-Alloy Bare Welding Electrodes and Rods ............................ ............. 341
SFA-5.15 Welding Electrodes and Rods for Cast Iron .................................................................... 361
SFA-5.16/SFA-5.16M Titanium and Titanium-Alloy Welded Electrodes and Rods .... .... .... ... ... ........................ 379
SFA-5.17/SFA-5.17M Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding ...................... ... .... ... . 395
SFA-5.18/SFA-5.18M Carbon Steel Electrodes and Rods for Gas Shielded Arc Welding ........... .... ...... ....... ... ..421
SFA-5.20/SFA-5.20M Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding .................................................... .445
SFA-5.21 Bare Electrodes and Rods for Surfacing ....... .................................................................. .479
SFA-5.22/SFA-5.22M Stainless Steel Flux Cored and Metal Cored Welding Electrodes and Rods ................. 503
SFA-5.23/SFA-5.23M Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding ...... ... ......... ... ....... 547
SFA-5.24/SFA-5.24M Zirconium and Zirconium-Alloy Welding Electrodes and Rods ...................................... 583
SFA-5.25/SFA-5.25M Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Electroslag Welding ........ ....... 593
SFA-5.26/SFA-5.26M Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Electrogas Welding ................................... 617
SFA-5.28/SFA-5.28M Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes and Rods for Gas Shielded Arc Welding ............................ 641
SFA-5.29/SFA-5.29M Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding ........... ........ ... ....... ... ................ 671
SFA-5.30/SFA-5.30M Cons umable Inserts .......................................................................................................... 709
SFA-5.31 Fluxes for Grazing and Braze Welding ........................................................................... 727
SFA-5.321SFA-5.32M Welding Shielding Gases ...................................... ....... ....... ....... ........ ............. .... ............. 737
SFA-5.34/SFA-5.34M Nickel-Alloy Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding ...................................................... 751
MANDATORY APPENDIX
I Standard Units for Use in Equations .............................................................................. 775
Notebook Page 339

Notebook Page 340
20lla SECTION ll, PART C SFA-5.1/S.F A·S.lM
SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON STEEL ELECTRODES

FOR SHIELDED METAL ARC WELDING
SFA-5.1/SFA-S.lM
(Identical with A WS Specification A5.1/A5 .1 M:2004. In case of dispute, the original AWS text applies.)
1. Scope applying the most recent editions of the documents shown

1.1 T his specification prescribes requirements for the below. For undated references, the latest edition of the
classification of carbon steel electrodes for shielded metal standard reference applies.
arc welding. The fo llowing documents are referenced in the manda-
tory sections of this document:
1..2 Safety and health issues and concerns are beyond
(a) ASTM E 29, Standard Practice for Using Significant
the scope of this standard and, therefore, are not fully
Digits in Test Data to Determine Conformance with Speci-
addressed herein. Some safety and health information can . ?
be found in the Nonmandatory Annex Sections AS and .ficatwns-
(b) ASTM E 142, Standard Method for Controlling
A I 0. Safety and health information is available from other
sources, including, but not limited to, ANSI Z49. 1, Safety
Quality of Radiographic Testing
in Welding, Cutting, and Allied Processes, 1 and applicable (c) ASTM E 350, Standard Methodfo r Chemical Analy-
federal and state regulations. sis of Carbon Steel, Low-Alloy Steel, Silicon Electrical
Steel, Ingot Iron and Wrought Iron
1.3 This specification makes use of both U.S. Custom- (d) AWS A 1.1 , Metric Practice Guide for the Welding
ary Units and the International System of Units (Sl). The lndustr/
measurements are not exact equivalents; there fore, each
(e) AWS A4.3, Standard Methods for Determination of
system must be used independently of the other without
the Diffusible Hydrogen Content of Martensitic, Bainitic,
combining in any way when refening to material proper-
and Ferritic Steel Weld Metal Produced by Arc Welding
ties. The spec.ification with the designation AS. I uses U.S.
(f) A WS A4.4, Standard Procedure for Determination
Customary Units. The specification A5.1M uses SI Units.
of Moisture Content of Welding Fluxes and Welding Elec-
The latter are shown within brackets [ ] or in ap propriate
trode Flux Coverings
columns in tables and figures. Standard dimensions based
(g) A WS A5.0 1, Filler Metal Procurement Guidelines
on either system may be used for sizing of filler metal or
packaging or both under AS. I or A5.1M specifications. (h) A WS B4.0 or B4.0M , Standard Methods for
Mechanical Testing of Welds
(i) ANSI Z49.l , Safety in Welding, Cutting, and A llied
PART A- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Processes
2. Normative References (j) ISO 544, Welding consumables-Technical delivery
conditions for welding filler materials- Type of product,
T he following sttandards contai n provis io ns whic h,
dimensions, tolerances and markings4
through reference in this text, constitute provisions of this
A WS standard . For dated references, subsequent amend-
2
ments to. or revisions of, any of these publications do not ASTM standards can be obtained from American Society for Testing
and Materials, I 00 Barr Harbo r D rive, West Con s hoh ocke n. PA
apply. However, parties to agreement based on this AWS 19428 -2959
standard are encouraged to investigate the possibility of J AWS standards can be obtained from Global Engineering Documents.
an Information Handling Services ( IHS) Group Company, 15 Inverness
1
This ANSI standard can be obtained from Global Engineering Docu- Way East. Englewood. CO 80 112-5776.
4
ments. an Information Handling Services (IHS) Group Company, 15 ISO standards can be obtained from American National Standards
Inverness Way East, Englewood. CO 80112-5776. Institu te. II West 42nd Street. New York, NY 10036-8002.
23
Notebook Page 341

( C:onvri!lht © 20 11 hv the America n Societv of Mechanical Engi neers.
SFA-5.1/SFA-S.lM 20lla SECTION Il, PART C
TAB LE 1
ELECTRODE CLASSIFICATION
AWS Classification
Type of
AS.l AS.lM Type of Covering Welding Positionm Current' 2>
E6010 E4310 High cellulose sodium F, V, OH, H deep

E6011 E4311 High cel lulose potassium F, V, OH, H ac or deep
E6012 E4312 High titania sodium F, V, OH, H ac or dcen
E6013 E4313 High titania potassium F, V, OH, H ac, deep or dcen
E6018°> E4318c 3> Low-hydrogen potassium, iron powder F, V, OH, H ac or deep
E6019 E4319 Iron oxide titania potassium F, V, OH, H ac deep or dcen
E6020 E4320 High i ron oxide H-fi llet ac or dcen

F ac, deep or de en
E6022<•> E432z<•> High iron oxide F, H-fillet ac or dcen
E6027 E4327 High iron oxide, iron powder H-fillet ac or dcen

F ac, deep or dcen
E7014 E4914 I ron powder, titania F, V, OH, H ac, deep or dcen
E7015 E4915 Low-hydrogen sodium F, V, OH, H deep
E70lb()) E49lbm Low hydrogen potassium F, V, OH, H ac or deep
E7018C)l E4918< 3 > Low-hydrogen potassium, i ron powder F, V, OH, H ac or deep
E7018M E4918M Low-hydrogen iron powder F, V, OH, H deep
E7024()) E4924<l> I ron powder, titania H-fillet, F ac, deep or dcen
E702 7 E4927 High iron oxide, i ron powder H-fillet ac or dcen

F ac, deep or dcen
E7028m E4928< 3 > Low-hydrogen potassium, i ron powder H-fillet, F ac or deep
E7048 E4948 Low-hydrogen potassium, i ron powder F, OH, H, V-down ac or deep
NOTES:
(1 l The abbreviations, F, H, H-fillet, V, V-down, and 0 H indicate the welding positions as fo llows: F =
Flat, H =
Horizontal, H-fi l let = Horizontal
=
fillet, V %
Vertical, progression upwards (for electrodes ~ 6 in. [5.0 mmJ and under, except 2 in. [4.0 mmJ and under for classifications
Eo018 CE4318l, E7014 CE4914J, E7015 CE4915J, E7016 CE4916J, E7018 CE4918J, E7018M CE4918MJ, E7048 CE4948Jl. V-down =
Vertical, progression downwards (for electrodes ~16 in. [5.0 mmJ and under, except 5,) 2 in. ( 4.0 mml and under for classifications Eb018
CE4318], E7014 CE4914], E7015 CE4915l, E7016 CE4916l, E7018 [E4918l, E7018M (E 4918Ml, E7048 CE4948Jl, OH = Overhead
{for electrodes ~ 6 in. (5.0 mml and under, except ~2 in. [4.0 mmJ and under for classifications Eo018 CE4318l, E7014 CE4914J, E7015
[E4915J, E7016 CE491bl, E7018 CE4918J, E7018M [E4918MJ, E7048 (E4948ll.
(2) The term "deep" refers to direct current electrode positive {de, reverse polarity). The term "dcen" refers to direct current electrode negative
{de, straight polarity).
(3) Electrodes with supplemental elongation, notch toughness, absorbed moisture, and diffusible hydrogen requirements may be further identified
as shown in Tables 2, 3, 10, and 11.
<4> Electrodes of the E6022 CE4322l classification are intended for single-pass welds only.
24
Notebook Page 342

( C'on vri11h t © 201 1 hv the A m erican Societv of M echanicill f.npineers.
2011a SECTION II, PART C SFA-S.USF A-5.1M
TABLE 2
TENSION TEST REQU I REMENTS
AWS Classification Tensile Strength Yie ld Strength at 0.2% Offset Elongati on
Percentage in 4x
AS.l A5.1M AS.l ( ksi) A5.1 M <MPa) AS.l (ksil A5.1M ( M Pa) Diameter Length
E6010 E4310 60 430 48 330 22

E6011 E4311 60 430 48 330 22
E6012 E4312 60 430 48 330 17
E6013 E431.> 60 430 48 330 17
E6018 E4318 60 430 48 330 22
E6019 E4319 60 430 48 33 0 22
E60 20 E4320 60 430 48 330 22
E6022n> E4322n> 60 430 Not speci tied Not specified
E6027 E4327 60 430 48 330 22
E7014 E4914 70 490 58 400 17

E701 5 E4915 70 490 58 400 22
E7016 E491& 70 490 58 400 22
E7018 E4918 70 490 58 400 22
E7024 E4924 70 490 58 400 l i Z)
E702 7 E4927 70 490 58 400 22
E7028 E4928 70 490 58 400 22
E7048 E4948 70 490 58 400 22
E7018 M E4918 M Note (3 ) Note (3) 53-72 14 ) 370- 500( 4 ) 24
GE NERAL NOTES:
(al See Table 4 for si zes to be tested.
(b) Requirements are in the as-welded condition with aging as specified in 12.2.
(c) Single values are minimum.
NOTE S:
(1) A transverse tension test, as specified in 12.5 and a longitudinal guided bend test, as specified in Secti on 13 are required.
(2) Weld metal from electr odes identified as E7024-l CE49 24-1] shall have elongation of 22% minimum.
( .3 ) Tensile strength of tllis weld metal is a nominal 70 ksi ( 490 M Pal .
(4) For 31)2 in. (2.4 mmJ electrodes, the maximum yie ld strength shall be 77 ksi (530 M Pal
3. Classification as E70 18 [E491 8] provided the electrode meets all of the

3.1 The welding e lectrodes covered by the A5.1 speci- requirements of both classificatio ns.
fication utilize a system based on U .S. Customary Units
to classify the welding electrodes covered according to:
4. Acceptance
(a) type of current (see Table l)
(b) type of covernng (see Table I) Acceptance of the welding e lectrodes shall be in accor-
(c) welding positnon (see Table 1) dance with the provisions of AWS A S.O I , Filler Metal
(d) mechanical properties of the weld metal in the as- Procurement Guidelines.
welded or aged condition (see Tables 2 and 3).
3.1M The welding electrodes covered by the A5. 1M 5. Certification
specification utilize a system based on International System
By affi xing the AWS specification and classificatio n
o f U nits to c lass ify the welding e lectrodes cove re d
designations to the packaging, or the classification to the
according to:
product, the manufacturer certifies that the product meets
(a) type of current (see Table I)
the requirements of this specificati on.5
(b) type of covering (see Table I )
(c) welding positno n (see Table I )
(d) mechanical properties of the weld metal in the as- 6. Rounding-Off Procedure
welded or aged condition (see Tables 2 and 3).
For the purpose of determi11ing conform ance with this
3.2 Material classified under one classification shall specification , an observed or calculated value shall be
not be classified under any other classification in one speci-
fication, although it may be classified under both specifica- s See A4 (in Annex A) for further information concerning cet1ification
tions, except that E70 18M [E49181Vl] may also be classified and the testing called for to meet thi s requirement.
25
Notebook Page 343

( C:onvril!'ht © 20 I I hv the American Socie tv of Mec han ical F.nl!' ineers
SFA-5.1/SFA-S.JM 2011a SECTION IJ, PART C
TABLE 3
CHARPY V-NOTCH IMPACT REQUIREMENTS
AWS Classification Limits for 3 out of 5 Specimensm
A5.1 A5.1M Average, Min. Single Value, Min.
E6010, E6011, E60 18, E43 10, E4311, E4318

E6027, E7015, E4327, E4915, 20 ft-lbf at -20°F 15 ft-lbf at - 20°F
E7016m, E7018<2 >, E4916(2), E4918(2), [27 J at - 30°CJ [20 J at -30° CJ
E7027, E7048 E4927, E4948
E6019 E4319 20 ft-lbf at 0°F 15 ft-lbf at 0°F

E7028 E4928 [27 J at -20°CJ [20 J at - 20°CJ
E6012, E6013, E4312, E4313

E6020, E60 22, E43 20, E4322 Not specified Not speci fied
E7014, E7024< 2 > E4914, E4924< 2 >
AWS Classification Limits for 5 out of 5 Specimens<3>

A5.1 A5.1M Average, Min. Single Value, Min.
E7018M E4918M 50 h-lbf at - 20°F 40 ft-lbf at - 20°F

[ 67 J at - 30°Cl [ 54 J at - 30°C ]
NOTES:
<1 l Both the highest and lowest test values obtained shall be disregarded in computing the average. Two of these remaining three values shall
equal or exceed 20 ft-lbf [2 7 J l
(2) Electrodes with the following opti onal supplemental designations shall meet the lower temperature impact req uirements specified below.
Charpy V-Notch I mpact Requirements,

Electrode Limits for 3 out of 5 specimens
AWS Classification Designation [ Refer to Note (1) above]
AS.l ASJM AS.l ASJM Average, Min. Single Value, Min.
E7016 E4916 E7016-l E4916-1 20 ft-lbf at - 50°F 15 ft-lbf at - 50°F

E7018 E4918 E7018-1 E4918-l [27 J at -4 5° C] [ 20 J at - 45 °C]
E7024 E4924 E7024-1 E4924-1 20 ft- lbf at 0°F 15 ft-lbf at 0°F

[27 J at -20°CJ [ 20 J at -20°Cl
<3) All five values obtained shall be used in computing the average. Four of the five values shall equal, or exceed, 50 ft-l bf [ 67 Jl
rounded to the nearest I 000 psi for tensile and yield The base metal for the weld test assemblies, the welding
strength for A5.1, or to the nearest 10 MPa for tensile and and testing procedures to be employed, and the results
yield strength for A5.1M and to the nearest unit in the last required are given in Sections 9 through 18. The supple-
right-hand place of figures used in expressing the limiting mental tests for absorbed moisture, in Section 17, and
values for other quantities in accordance with the rounding- diffusible hydrogen, in Section 18, are not required for
off method given in ASTM E 29, Standard Practice for classification of the low-hydrogen e lectrodes except for
Using Significant Digits in Test Data to Determine Confor- E7018M [E4918M], where these are required [see Notes
mance with Specifications. (9) and (13) of Table 4].
PART B - TESTS, PROCEDURES, AND 8. Retest

REQUIREMENTS
If the results of any test fai l to meet the requirement,
7. S ummary of Tests
that test shall be repeated twice. The results of both retests
The tests req uired for each classification are specified shall meet the requirement. Specimens for retest may be
in Table 4. The purpose of these tests is to determine the taken from the original test assembly or from a new test
chemical composition, mechanical properties, and sound- assembly. For chemical analysis, retest need be only for
ness of the weld metal, moisture content of the low-hydro- those specific elements that failed to meet the test require-
gen electrode covering, and the usability of the electrode. ment. If the results of one or both retests fail to mee t the
26
Notebook Page 344

( C:onvri11ht © 201 1 hv the American Societv of Mechanical Emrineers.
SFA-5.1/SFA-S.lM 20lla SECTION II, PART C
FIG. 9 ALT ERNATIVE METHODS FOR FACILITATIN G FRACTURE OF THE FI LLET WELD
Rein forcing
Maximum depth
welds
of notch =
Web 1/ actual throat
2
Flange
(a) Reinforcing Welds (b) Offset of Web (c) Notching
15.4 The fractured surfaces shall be visually examined example E70 15R [E49l 5R], E7016R [E4916R], £7016-lR
without magnification . The fracture surface shall be free [E49 16- JR], E7018R [E4918R], E7018-1R [E4918- IR],
of cracks. Incomplete fusion at the weld root shall not be E70 18M [E49 18M], E7028R [E4928R], E704 8R
greater than 20% of the total length of the weld. There [E4948R]) shall be determined by any suitable method. In
shall be no continuous length of incomplete fusion greater case of dispute, the method described in AWS Specification
than I in. [25 mm] as measured along the weld axis except A4.4M , Standard Procedure f or Determination ofMoisture
for electrodes of the E60 12 [E43 12], E6013 [E43 13], and Content of Welding Fluxes and Welding Electrode Flux
£701 4 [£49 14] classifications. Fillet welds made with elec- Coverings, shall be the referee method. The moisture con-
trodes of these classifications may exhibit incomplete pene- tent of the exposed covering shall not exceed the maximum
tration through the entire le ngth. They may also exhibit specified moisture content for the designated electrode and
incomplete fusion wh ich shall at no point exceed 25% of c lassification in Table I 0.
the smaller leg length of the fillet weld.
17.2 An e lectrode sample of each size of E7018M
[E49 18M] or the smallest and the largest sizes of " R"
16. Moisture Test designated electrode shall be exposed. If the electrodes are
16.1 The moisture content of the covering of the elec- conditioned prior to exposure, that fact, along with the
trode, when required by Table 4, shall be determined by any method used for conditioning, and the time and temperature
suitable method. In case o f dispute, the method described in involved in conditioning, shall be noted on the test record.
AWS A4.4M, Standard Procedure for Determination of Conditioning of electrodes after exposure is not permitted.
Moisture Content of Welding Fluxes and Welding Elec- 17.3 The electrode sample shall be exposed in a suitably
trode Flux Coverings, shall be the referee method. calibrated and controlled environmental chamber for 9 hr
16.2 The electrodes shall be tested without condition- minimum at 80°F to 85°F [27°C to 30°C] and 80% to 85%
ing, unless the manufacturer recommends otherwise. If the relative humidity.
electrodes are conditioned , that fact, along with the method 17.4 The environmental chamber shall meet the follow-
used for condition ing, a nd the time and te mperature ing design requirements.
involved in the conditioning, shall be noted on the test
(a) The apparatus shall be an insulated humidifier which
record. The moisture content shall not exceed the limit produces the temperature of adiabatic saturation through
specified in Table 10, for the classification under test.
regenerative evaporation or vaporization of water.
(b) The apparatus shall have an average air speed within
17. Absorbed Moisture Test the envelope of air surrounding the covered e lectrode of
17.1 In order for a low-hydrogen electrode to be desig- 100 fpm to 325 fpm [0.5 m/s to 1.7 m/s].
nated as low-moisture-absorbing with the optional supple- (c) T he apparatus shall have a drip-free area where the
mental " R" suffix designator or classified as E70 18M covered electrode up to 18 in. [450 mm] in length can be
[E49 18M], sufficient electrodes shall be exposed to an positioned with length as perpendicular as practical to the
environment of 80°F [2JOC]/80% relative humidity (RH) general air flow.
for a period of not Jess than 9 hr by any suitable method. (d) The apparatus shall have a calibrated means of con-
In case of dispute, the exposure method described in 17.2 tinuously measuring and recording the dry bulb tempera-
through 17.6 shall be the referee method. The moisture ture and either the wet bulb temperature or the differential
c ontent of the e lectrode covering on the between the dry bulb and wet bulb temperature over the
low-moisture-absorbing, low-hydrogen electrodes (for period of time required.
44
Notebook Page 345

( \.onvri11ht © 20 I I hv the American Societv of Mechanical F.nqineers.
20lla SECTION II, PART C SFA-5.1/SFA-S.lM
TABLE 10
MOISTURE CONTENT LIMITS IN ELECTRODE COVERINGS
AWS Classification Electrode Designation Limit of Moisture Content, % by W11 Max
AS.l A5.1M AS.l AS.lM As-Received or Conditionednl As-Exposed<2l
E6018 E4318 E6018 E4318

E7015 E4915 E7015 E4915
E7016 E4916 E7016 E4916
E7016·1 E491 6·1
0.6 Not spec i lied
E7018 E4918 E7018 E4918
E7018· 1 E4918-l
E7028 E4928 E7028 E4928
E7048 E4948 E7048 E4948
E6018 E4318 E6018 R E4318R

E7015 E4915 E7015 R E4915R
E7016 E4916 E7016 R E4916R
E7016-1R E4916-1R
0.3 0.4
E7018 E4918 E7018R E4918R
E7018-l R E4918·1 R
E7028 E4928 E7028 E4928R
E7048 E4948 E7048R E4948R
E7018M E491 8M E7018M E4918M 0.1 0.4
NOTES:
(1} As-received or conditioned electrode coverings shall be tested as specified in Section 16, Moisture Test.
(2) As-exposed electrode coveri ngs shall have been exposed to a moist environment as speci fied in Section 17 before being test ed as specified in
Section 16.
(e) The apparatus shall have an air speed of at least covering taken for moisture determination, as specified in
900 fpm [4.5 m/s] over the wet bulb sensor unless the wet Section 16.
bulb sensor can be shown to be insensitive to air speed or
has a known correction factor that will provide for an 17.6 All of the critical variables which could affect test
adjusted wet bulb reading equal to the temperature of adia- results have not been identified here. Consequently, the
batic saturation. manufacturer shall control such other variables deemed
(j) The apparatus shall have the wet bulb sensor located relevant to ensure greater consistency of results.
on the suction side of the fan so that there is an absence
of heat radi ation on the sensor.
18. Diffusible Hydrogen Test
17.5 The exposure procedure shall be as follows. 18.1 The smallest and largest size of the electrode of
(a) The electrode sample taken from previously uno-
each classification to be identified by an optional supple-
pened packages, or from a reconditioned lot, shall be heated mental diffusible hydrogen designator, and all sizes of
to a temperature -0°, +I 0°F [6°C] above the dew point. E70 18M [E4918M], shall be tested according to one of
(b) The electrode sample shall be loaded into the cham-
the methods given in AWS A4.3, Standard Methods for
ber withouL delay after the packages are opened. Determination. of the Diffusible Hydrogen Content ofMar-
(c) The electrodes shall be placed in the chamber in a
tensitic, Bainitic, and Ferritic Steel Weld Metal Produced
vertical or horizontal position on at least I in. [25 mm] by Arc Welding. Based upon the average val ue of test
centers, with the length of the electrode perpendicular as results which satisfy the requirements of Table ll, the
practical to the general air flow. appropriate diffusible hydrogen designator may be added
(d) Time, temperature, and humidity shall be continu- at the end of the classification.
ously recorded for the period that the electrodes are in the
chamber. 18.2 Testing shall be done w]thout conditioning of the
(e) Counting of the exposure time shall start when the electrode, unless the manufacn1rcr recommends otherwise.
required temperature and humidity in the chamber are If the electrodes are conditioned, that fact , along with the
established. method used for conditioning, and the time and temperature
(f) At the end of the exposure time, the electrodes shall involved in the conditioning, shall be noted on the test
be removed from the chamber and a sample of the electrode record.
45
Notebook Page 346

( Convright © 20 I I hv the American Societv of Mecha nical F:nuineers.
SFA-5.1/SFA-S.lM 2011a SECTION II, PART C
TAB LE ll 20.2 The diameter of the core wire shall not vary more
DIFFUSIBLE HYDROGEN LIMITS FOR WELD META L than ±0.002 in. [0.05 mm] fro m the diameter spec ified.
AW S Classificati on Diffusible The length shall not vary more than ± 114 in. [ 10 mm] from
Hydrogen Content, that specified.
Di ffusibl e Average ml/100 g
Hydrogen Deposited Metal,
A5.1 A5.1M Designator Max.<1·2 l 21. Core Wire and Covering
21.1 The core wire and covering shall be free of defects
E7018 M E4918M None 4
that would interfere with uniform deposition of the elec-
E6018 E4318 trode.
E7015 E4915 H16 16
21.2 The core wire and the covering shall be concentric
E7016 E4916
E7018 E4918 HB 8 to the extent that the maximum core-plus-one-covering
E70 28 E4928 dim e nsio n s hall not exceed the m1mmum
E70 48 E4948 H4 4 core-plus-one-covering dimensio n by more tha n:
(a) 7% of the mean dimension in sizes '(12 in. [2.5 mm]
NOTES:
and smaller
(1} Diffusible hydrogen testing in Section 18, Diffusible Hydrogen Test,
is required for E7018M [E4918Ml. Diffusible hydrogen testing of (b) 5% of the mean dimension in sizes 'Is in. [3.2 mm]
other low hydrogen electrodes is onl y required when the opt ional and 5132 in. [4.0 mm]
di ffus ible hydrogen designator is added. (c) 4% of the mean dimension in sizes Y16 in. [5.0 mm]
(2) Some low hydrogen classi'fications may not meet the H4 and HB and larger.
requirements.
Concentricity may be measured by any suitable means.
18.3 For purposes of certifying compliance with diffus- 22. Exposed Core
ible hydrogen requirements, the reference atmospheric con- 22.1 The grip end of each electrode shall be bare (free
dition shall be an absolute humidity of ten (10) grains of of covering) for a distance of not less than ~2 in. [ 12 mm ],
moisturellb [1.43g/kg] of dry air at the time of welding.7
nor more than I ~4 in. [30 mm] for %2 in. [4. 0 mm] and
The actual atmospheric conditions shall be reported along smaller sizes, and not less than %in. [20 mm] nor more
with the average value for the tests according to AWS A4.3. than 1112 in. [40 mm] for Y16 in. [5 .0 mm] and larger sizes,
18.4 When the absolute humidity equals or exceeds to provide for electrical contact with the electrode holder.
the reference condition at the time of preparation of the 22.2 The arc end of each electrode shall be sufficiently
test assembly, the test shall be acceptable as demonstrating conductive and the covering sufficiently tapered to permit
compliance with the requirements of this specification, easy striking of the arc. The length of the conductive por-
provided the actual test results satisfy the diffusible hydro- tion (measured from the end of the core wire to the location
gen requirements for the applicable designator. Likewise, where the full cross section of the covering is obtained)
if the actual test results for an electrode meet the require- shall not exceed ~8 in. [3.2 mm] or the diameter of the
ments for the lower, or lowest hydrogen designator, as core wire, whichever is less. Electrodes with chipped cov-
specified in Table II , the electrode also meets the require- erings near the arc end, baring the core wire no more than
ments for all higher hydrogen designators in Table 11 the lesser of 114 in. [6.0 mm] or twice the diameter of
without need to retest. the core wire, meet the requirements of this specification,
provided no chip uncovers more than 50% of the circum fer-
ence of the core.
PART C- MANUFACTURE, IDENTIFICATION,
AND PACKAGING
23. Electrode Identification
19. Method of Manufacture
All electrodes shall be identified as follows:
The electrodes classified according to this specification
may be manufactured by any method that will produce 23.1 At least one imprint of the electrode designation
e lectrodes that meet the requirements of this specification. (classification plus any optional designators) shall be
applied to the electrode covering in the order s pecified in
20. Standard Sizes and Lengths Fig. 10, starting within 2'12 in. [65 mm] of the grip end of
the electrode. The prefix letter "E" in the classification
20.1 Standard sizes (diameter of the core wire) and
may be omitted from the imprint.
lengths of electrodes are shown in Table 12.
23.2 The numbers and letters of the imprint shall be
7
See A8.2 in Annex A. of bold block type of a size large enough to be legible.
46
Notebook Page 347

( C:onvright © 2011 hv th e American Societv of Mechanical Engineers.
2011a SECTION U, PART C SFA-S.tJSFA-S.lM
TABLE 12
STANDARD SIZES AND LENGTH S
Core Wir e Diameternl Lengthsn,2l
AS.l ( in.) AS.lM( 3l(mm) AS.l (in.) AS.lM <mml
1;16 1.6 9 225

5;04 2.0 9 or 12 225 or 300
\z 12 or 14
2.5 300 or 350
% 3.2 14 350
5;32 4.0 14 or 18 350 or 450
~16 14 or 18
5.0 350 or 450
7
132 14 or 18 or 28
6.0 350 or 450 or 700
~ 18 or 28
5
/ 16 8.0 18 or 28 450 or 700
NOTES :
(l) Leng ths and si zes other than these shal l be as agreed between purchaser and supplier.
(2) In al l cases, end-gripped electrodes are st andard.
(3 > I SO 544 Welding consumables- Technical delivery conditions for welding filler materials-Type ofproduct/ dimensions/ tolerances and markings.
See 20.2 for tolerances on diameter and length.
23.3 The ink used for imprinting shall provide sufficient the surface of the water. A "leaker" is indicated by a steady
contrast with the electrode covering so that, in normal use, stream of air bubbles emanating from the container. A
the numbers and letters are legible both before and after container with a stream that lasts for 30 sec or more does
welding. not meet the requirements of this specification.
23.4 When an electrode is classified as meeting the
requirements of AS. I and AS. 1M, both electrode designa- 25. Marking of Packages
tions shall be applied. 25.1 The following product information (as a mim-
mum) shall be legibly marked on the outside of each unit
package.
24. Packaging (a) A WS specification and classification designations
24.1 Electrodes shall be suitably packaged to protect along with applicable optional designators (year of issue
them from damage during shipment and storage under may be excluded)
normal conditions. In addition, E70 18M [E4918M] elec- (b) Supplier's name and trade designation
trodes shall be packaged in hermetically sealed containers. (c) Size and net weight
T hese hermet.ically sealed containers shall be capable of (d) Lot, control, or heat number
passing the test specified in 24.3.
25.2 The appropriate precautionary information 8 as
24.2 Standard package weights s hall be as agreed given in ANSI Z49.1 , latest edition, (as a minimum) or its
between purchaser and supplier. equivalent, shall be prominently displayed in legible print
on all packages of electrodes, including individual unit
24.3 Hermetically sealed containers may be tested by
packages enclosed within a large r package.
selecting a representative sample contai ner and immersing
in water that is at a temperature of at least 50°F [30°C]
above that of the packaged material (room temperature).
The container shall be immersed so that the surface under 8
Typical examples of ·'warning labe ls"' are shown in figures in ANSI
observation is I in. [25 mm] below the water level and Z49.! for some common or specific consumables used with certain pro-
the greatest basic dimension of the container is parallel to cesses.
47
Notebook Page 348

( C:onvri~tht © 20 1 1 hv the Ameri can Societv of Mechan ical F.nl?ineers.
SFA-5.1/SFA-S.J M 20lla SECTION ll, PART C
FIG . 10 ORDE R OF MANDATORY AN D OPTIONAL SUPPLEMENTAL DESIGNATORS
Mandatory Classificatio n Des ignators [Note (1))
Designates an electrode. This designator may be deleted from the product

im print req uired for identification of th e electrode.
Designates the tensil e strength (minimum), in ksi, or MPa + 10 of the weld

metal wh en produced in accordance w ith th e test assembly preparation
of t his specification (see Table 2).
Designates the welding position in which electrodes are usable, the type of
covering, and the kind o f welding current for which the electrodes are
suitable (see Table 1).
Designates an electrode (E7018Ml (E4918MJ intended to meet most military

requirements (greater toughness, lower moisture content- both
as-received and after exposure - and mandatory diffusible hydrogen
limit s for weld metal). (See Tables 3, 10, and 11 .)
E XXYY
E XXYY M
E X X YY- 1 HZR Optional Class ification Desig nators
T Designates that the electro de meets the requ irements of the absorbed
moist ure t est [an optional supplemental test for all low hydrogen
electrodes except th e E7018M !E49 18M) classi fica ti on, fo r which t he test
is requi red). (See Table 10.)
Designates that th e electrode meets the requirements of t he diffusible

hydrogen test (an optional supplemental test of the weld metal from low
hydrogen electrodes- as-received or conditioned - w ith an average
value not exceeding "Z" ml of H2 per 100 g of deposited metal, wh ere
"Z" is 4, 8, or 16). (See Table 11.)
Designates that the electrode (E7016, E7018, or E7024l (E4916, E4918, or

E49241 meets the requirements for improved toughness- and ductility
in th e case of E7024 (E49241 (optional supplemental test requirem ents
shown in Tables 2 and 3). (See Notes to Tables 2 and 3.)
NOTE:
(1)The combination of these designators constitutes the electrode classification.
48
Notebook Page 349

( C'nnvril!ht © 201 1 hv the American Sncietv ofMech;~niclll F.n11 ineer.>.
2011a SECTION II, P ART C SFA-5.1/SFA-S.l M
Annex A
Guide to AWS Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for
Shielded Metal Arc Welding
(This Annex is not a pan of AWS A5.1/A5.1 M:2004. Specificarion.fln· Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Mew/ Arc Welding, but is included
for information purposes only.)
Al. Introduction the purchaser. A "-1" designator following classification

identifies an electrode which meets optional supplemental
The purpose of this guide is to correlate the electrode
impact requirements at a lower temperature than required
classifications with their intended applications so the speci-
for the classification [see Note (2) to Table 3]. An example
fication can be used effectively. Appropriate base metal
of this is the E7024- l [E4924-l] electrode which meets
specifications are referred to whenever that can be done
the classification requirements of E7024 [E4924] and also
and when it would be most helpful. Such references are
intended only as examples rather than complete listings of meets the optional supplemental requirements for tough-
the base metals for which each electrode classification is ness and improved elongation of the weld metal [see Note
suitable. (2) to Table 2].
Certain low-hydrogen electrodes also may have optional
designators. An optional supplemental designator "HZ"
A2. Classification System following the four digit classification designators or follow-
A2.1 The system for identifying the electrode classifi- ing the "-1" optional supplemental designator, if used,
cations in this specification follows the standard pattern indicates an average diffusible hydrogen content of not
used in other AWS filler metal specifications. The prefix more than "Z" mL/1 OOg of deposited metal when tested
letter "E" at the beginning of each classification designation in the "as-received" or conditioned state in accordance
stands for electrode. The first two digits, 60 [43], for exam- with AWS A4.3, Standard Methods for Determination of
ple, designate tensile strength of at least 60 ksi [430 MPa] the Diffusible Hydrogen Content of Martensitic. Bainitic,
of the weld metal, produced in accordance with the test and Ferritic Steel Weld Metal Produced by Arc Welding.
assembly preparation section of the specification. In this Electrodes that are designated as meeting the lower or
document, the classification in U.S. Customary Units is lowest hydrogen limits, as specified in Table II, are also
followed by the SI Unit classification in brackets. The third
understood to be able to meet any higher hydrogen limits
digit designates position usability that will allow satisfac-
even though these are not necessarily designated along
tory welds lo be produced with the electrode.
with the electrode classification. T herefore, as an example,
Thus, the "1 ," as in E6010 [E4310], means that the
an electrode designated as "H4" also meets "H8" and
electrode is usable in all positions (flat, horizontal, vertical,
"H 16" requirements without being designated as such. See
and overhead). The "2," as in E6020 [E4320] designates
Section 18, Diffusible Hydrogen Test, and Table 11.
that the electrode is suitable for use in the flat position and
A letter "R" is a designator used with the low-hydrogen
for making fillet welds in the horizontal position. The
electrode classifications. It is used to identify electrodes
"4," as in E7048 [E4948], designates that the electrode is
suitable for use in vertical welding with downward progres- that have been exposed to a humid environment for a given
sion and for other positions (see Table l). The last two length of time and tested for moisture absorption in addition
digits taken together designate the type of current with to the standard moisture test required for classification of
which the electrode can be used and the type of covering low-hydrogen electrodes (see Section 17, Absorbed Mois-
on the electrode, as listed in Table l. ture Test, and Table I 0).
A2.2 Optional designators are also used in this specifi- A2.3 Table A2 shows the classification for similar elec-
cation in order to identify electrodes that have met the trodes from Canadian Standards Association standard
mandatory classification requirements and certain supple- W48-0l, Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc
mentary requirements as agreed to between the supplier and Welding.
49
Notebook Page 350

( Convril!ht © 201 1 hv the American Socierv of Mechanica l F.nl!i neer.~ .
SF A-5.1/SFA-S.IM 20lla SECTION II, PART C
A2.4 Request fo r Filler M etal Classification TAB LE Al

COMPARISON OF EQU IVALENT CLASSIFICATIONS
A2.4.1 When a welding electrode cannot be classi-
fied according to some classification given in this specifi- ISO USA
2560(1) AWS
cation, the manufacturer may request that a classification
be established for that welding electrode. The manufacturer A B AS.l AS.l M
may do this by followi ng the procedure given in A2.4.3, E35xC21 E4310 E6010 E4310
below. E35xCll E4311 E6011 E431l
E35xR12 E4312 E6012 E431 2
A2.4.2 A request to establish a new electrode classi- E4313
E35xR12 E6013 E431 3
fication must be a written request, and it needs to provide E4318 E6018 E4318
sufficient detail to permit the Committee on Filler Metals E35xRA12 E4319 E6019 E4319
and Allied Materials, or the Subcommittee, to determine E35x A13 E4320 E6020 E4320
whether a new classification or the modification of an E35xA33 E6022 E4322
E35xRA54 E4327 E6027 E4327
existing classification is more appropriate, and whether E38xR32 E4914 E7014 E4914
either is necessary to satisfy the need. E38xB22 E4915 E7015 E4915
A2.4.3 In particular, the request needs to include: E38xB12 E4916 E7016 E4916
E49 16·1 E7016· 1 E4916·1
(a) all classification requirements as given for existing E38xB32 E4918 E7018 E4918
c lassi fi cations, such as, chemical composi tion ranges, E4918·1 E7018·1 E4918·1
mechanical property requirements, and usability test E7018M E4918M
req uirements E38xRR4 E4924 E7024 E4924
E38xRR4 E4924-1 E7024-1 E4924-l
(b) any testing conditi.ons for conducting the tests used
E38xRA54 E4927 E7027 E4927
to demonstrate that the product meets the classification E38xB53 E4928 E7028 E4928
requirements. (It would be sufficient, for example, to state E38xB35 E4948 E7048 E4948
that the welding conditions are the same as for the other
classifications .) GENERAL NOTE: The requirements for the equivalent classificat ions
are not necessarily identical in every respect.
(c) information on Descriptions and Intended Use,
which parallels that for existing classifications, for that NOTE:
(1) I SO 2560, Welding Consumables-Covered electrodes for manual
section of the Annex. metal arc welding of non-alloy and fine grain steels- Classification.
(d) proposed ASME ..F" number, if appropriate.
A request for a new classification without the above
the Chair of the Committee on Filter Metals and Allied
information will be considered incomplete. The Secretary
Materials, for action.
will return the request to the requestor for further infor-
A2.4.6 The Secretary shall include a cop y of the log
mation.
of all requests pending and those completed during the
A2.4.4 The request should be sent to the Secretary preceding year with the agenda for each Committee on
of the Committee on Filler Metals and Allied Materials Filler Metals and Allied Materials meeting. Any other pub-
at A WS Headquarters. Upon receipt of the request, the lication of requests that have been completed will be at
Secretary will: the option of the American Welding Society, as deemed
(a) assign an identifying number to the request. The appropriate.
number shall include the date the request was received.
A2.5 An international system for designating welding
(b) confirm receipt of the request, and give the identifi -
filler metals developed by the International Institute of
cation number to the person making the request. Welding (IIW) is being adopted in many ISO specifica-
(c) send a copy of the request to the Chair of the Com- tions. Table A 1 shows those used in ISO 2560 for compari-
mittee on Filler Metals and Allied Materials, and the Chair son with the c lass ific ations in this s pecification . To
of the particular Subcommittee involved. understand the proposed international designation system,
(d) file the original request. one is referred to Table 1 and the Annex of A WS document,
(e) add the request to the log of outstanding requests. IFS: 2002, entitled Inte rnational Index of Welding Filler
A2.4.5 All necessary action on each request shall be Metal Classifications. National specifications from many
completed as soon as possible. If more than 12 months industrial countries having comparable filler metals are
elapse, the Secretary shall inform the requestor of the status also found in Table 1 of IFS:2002.
of the request, with copies to the Chairs of the Committee
and Subcommittee. Requests still outstanding after 18 A3. Acceptance
months shall be considered not to have been answered in Acceptance of all welding materials c la ssified under this
a timely manner and the Secretary shall report these to specification is in accordance with AWS A5 .0l , Filler
50
Notebook Page 351

( C:onvright © 20 II hv the American Societv of Mechan ical Engineers.
2011a SECfiON II, PART C SFA-5.1/SFA-S.lM
TABLE A2 required by the specification on material that is representa-

CANADIAN ELECTRODE CLASSIFICATIONS SIMILAR tive of that being shipped and that the material met the
TO AWS CLASSIFICATIONS requirements of the specification. Representative material,
Canadian in this case, is any production run of that classification
Electrode using the same formulation. "Certification" is not to be
Classification°l AS.l AS.lM construed to mean that tests of any kind were necessarily
E4310 E6010 E4310 conducted on samples of the specific material shipped.
E4311 E60ll E4311 Tests on such material may or may not have been made.
E4312 E6012 E4312 The basis for the certification required by the specification
E4313 E6013 E4313 is the classification test of "representative material" cited
E4322 E6022 E4322
above, and the "Manufacturer's Quality Assurance Pro-
E4327 E6027 E4327
E4910 gram" in AWS A5.01.
E49ll
E4912
E4913 AS. Ventilation During Weldi ng
E4914 E7014 E4914 AS.l The following five major factors govern the quan-
E4915 E701 5 E4915 tity of fumes in the atmosphere to which welders and
E4916 E7016 E4916
E4918<2l
welding operators are exposed during welding.
E7018 E4918
E4922 (a) Dimensions of the space in which welding is done
E4924°l E7024 E4924 (with special regard to the height of the ceiling)
E4927 E7027 E4927 (b) Number of welders and welding operators working
E4928 E7028 E4928
in that space
E4948 E7048 E4948
(c) Rate of evolution of fumes, gases, or dust, according
NOTES: to the materials and processes used
(l) From GSA Standard W48-0l, Filler Metals and Allied Materials (d) The proximity of welders and welding operators to
for Metal Arc Weldin~ publ ished by Canadian Standards Associa- the fumes as they issue from the welding zone, and to the
tion, 178 Rexdale Boulevard, Rex dale, On tario, Canada M9W 1 R3.
gases and dust in the space in which they are working
(2) Also includes E48018 -l designated electrode.
(3) Also includes E4924-l designated elec trode.
(e) The ventilation provided to the space in which the
welding is done.
A5.2 American National Standard ANSI Z49.1 , Safety
Metal Procurement Guidelines, as the specification states. in Welding, Cutting, and Allied Processes (published by
Any testing a purchaser requires of the supplier, for mate- the American Welding Society), discusses the ventilation
rial shipped in accordance with this specification, needs to that is required during welding and should be referred to
be clearly stated in the purchase order, according to the for details. Attention is drawn particularly to the section
provisions of AWS AS .0 I. In the absence of any such of that document entitled, "Health Protection and Venti-
statement in the purchase order, the supplier may ship lation."
the material with whatever testing the supplier no1mally
conducts on material of that classification, as specified A6. Welding Considerations
in Schedule F, Table I, of the A WS A5.0 I. Testing in
A6.1 Weld metal properties may vary widely,
accordance with any other schedule in that table must be
according to size of the electrode and amperage used, size
properly requiJed by the purchase order. In such cases,
of the weld beads, base metal thickness, joint geometry,
acceptance of the material shipped shall be in accordance
preheat and interpass temperatures, surface condition, base
with those requirements.
metal composition, dilution, etc. Because of the profound
effect of these variables, a test procedure was chosen for
A4. Certification this specification which would represent good welding
practice and minimize variation of the most potent of these
The act of placing the A WS Specification and Classifi-
variables.
cation designations and optional supplemental designators,
if applicable, on the packaging enclosing the product or the A6.2 It should be recognized, however, that production
classification on the product itself, constitutes the supplier's practices may be different. The differences encountered
(manufacturer's) certification that the product meets all of may alter the properties of the weld metal. For instance,
the requirements of the specification . interpass temperatures may range from subfreezing to sev-
The only testing requirement implicit in this certification eral hundred degrees. No single te mperature or reasonable
is that the manufacturer has actually conducted the tests range of temperatures can be chosen for classification tests
51
Notebook Page 352

( C:onvril!ht © 20 11 hv the American Societv ofMechanical Enl!ineers.
SFA-S.lJSFA-S.lM 201la SECTION II, PART C
which will be representative of all of the conditions encoun- A6.6 Conversely, postweld heat-treated welds made
tered in production work. with the same electrodes and using the same welding proce-
Properties of production welds may vary accordingly, dure except for variation in interpass temperature and post-
depending on the particular welding conditions. Weld weld heat treatment time, can have almost identical tensile
metal properties may not duplicate, or even closely and yield strengths. As an example, almost identical tensile
approach, the values listed and prescribed for test welds. and yield strengths may be obtained in two welds, one using
For example, ductility in single pass welds in thick base an interpass temperature of 300°F [150°C] and postweld
metal made outdoors in cold weather without adequate heat-treated for I hr at 1150°F [620°C], and the other using
preheating may drop to little more than half that required an interpass temperature of 2 12°F [I 00°C] and postweld
herein and normally obtained. This does not indicate that heat-treated for 10 hr at 1150°F [620°C].
either the electrodes or the welds are below standard. It
A6.7 Electrodes which meet all the requirements of
indicates only that the particular production conditions are
any given classification may be expected to have similar
more severe than the test conditions prescribed by this
characteristics. Certain minor differences continue to exist
specification.
from one brand to another due to differences in preferences
A6.3 Hydrogen is another factor to be considered in that exist regarding specific operating characteristics. Fur-
welding. Weld metals, other than those from low-hydrogen thermore, the only differences between the present E60XX
electrodes (E70 15 [E4915], E70 J 6 [E4916], E70 18 and E70XX [E43XX and E49XX] classifications are the
[E4918], E7018M [E4918M], E7028 [E4928], and E7048 differences in chemical composition and mechanical prop-
[£4948]) contain s ignificant quantities of hydrogen for erties of the weld metal, as shown in Tables 2, 3, and 7. In
some period of time after they have been made. Most of many applications, electrodes of either E60XX or E70XX
this hydrogen gradually escapes. After two to four weeks [E43XX or E49XX] classifications may be used.
at room temperature or 24 to 48 hr at 200°F to 220°F A6.8 Since the electrodes within a given classification
[90°C to 105°C], most of it has escaped. As a result of have similar operating characteristics and mechanical prop-
this change in hydrogen content, ductility of the weld metal erties, the user can limit the study of available electrodes
increases towards its inherent value, while yield, tensile to those within a single classification after determining
and impact strengths remain relatively unchanged. which classification best suits the particular requirements.
This specification permits aging of the test specimens
at 200°F to 220°F [90°C to I 05°C] for up to 48 hr before A6.9 This specification does not establish values for
subjecting them to the all-weld-metal tension or transverse all characteristics of the electrodes falling within a given
bend test. This is done to minimize discrepancies in testing c lassification, but it does establish values to measure those
(see also A8.2, Diffusibl e Hydrogen Test.) of major importance. In some instances, a partie ular charac-
teristic is common to a number of classifications and testing
A6.4 When weldments are given a postweld heat treat- for it is not necessary. In other instances, the characteristics
ment, the temperature and time at temperature are very are so intangible that no adequate tests are available. This
important. The tensile and yield strengths generally are specification does not necessarily provide all the informa-
decreased as postweld heat treatment temperature and time tion needed to determine which classification will best
at temperature are increased. fulfill a particular need. T he information included in Annex
Section A7 regarding typical applications for each classifi-
A6.5 Welds made with electrodes of the same classification supplements information given elsewhere in the
cation and the same welding procedure will have signifi- specification and is intended to provide assistance in mak-
cantly different tensile and yield strengths in the as-welded ing electrode selections. However, it must be noted that it
and postweld heat-treated conditions. Comparison of the is the fabricator's responsibility to ensure that the electrode
values for as-welded and postwe ld heat-treated ( 1150°F selected will satisfy all of the performance requirements
[620°C] for 1 hr) weld metal will show the fo llowing: for the intended applications under the specific fabrication
conditions in use.
A 6.5.1 The tensile strength of the postweld
heat-treated weld metal will be approximately 5 ksi A6.10 Some important tests for measuring major elec-
[35 MPa] lower than that of the weld metal in the as-welded trode characteristics are as follows:
condition.
A6.10.1 Radiographic Test. Nearly all of the carbon
A6.5. 2 The yic1d strength of the postweld steel electrodes covered by this specification are capable
heat-treated weld metal w ill be approximately I 0 ksi of producing welds that meet most radiographic soundness
[70 MPa]lower than that of the weld metal in the as-welded requirements. However, if incorrectly applied, unsound
condition. welds may be produced by any of the elec trodes. For
52
Notebook Page 353

( Convri11ht © 20 II hv the American Societv of Mechanical F.n11ineers.
20lla SECTION II, PART C SFA-5.1/SFA-S.l M
electrodes of some classifications, the radiographic require- A6.11.2 Electrodes are manufactured to be within
ments in Table 8 are not necessarily indicative of the aver- acceptable moisture limits, consistent with the type of cov-
age radiographic soundness to be expected in production ering and strength of the weld metal. They are then nor-
use. Electrodes of the E6010 [E4310], E6011 [E4311], mally packaged in a container which has been designed
E60 19 [E4319], and E6020 [E4320] classifications can be to provide the degree of moisture protection considered
expected to produce acceptable radiographic results. necessary for the type of covering involved.
Under certain conditions, notably in welding long, con- A6.11.3 If there is a possibi.lity that the noncellulosic
tinuous joints in relatively thick base metal, low-hydrogen electrodes may have absorbed excessive moisture, they
electrodes of the E7015 [E4915] , E7016 [E4916], E7018 may be restored by rebaking. Some electrodes require
[E4918], and E7018M [E4918M] classifications will often rebaking at a temperature as high as 800°F (425°C] for
produce even better results. On the other hand, in joints approximately I to 2 hr. The manner in which the electrodes
open to the atmosphere on the root side, at the ends of have been produced and the relative humidity and tempera-
joints, in joints with many stops and starts, and in welds lure conditions under which the electrodes are stored deter-
on small diameter pipe or in small, thin, irregularly shaped mine the proper length of time and temperature used for
joints, the low-hydrogen electrodes tend to produce welds conditioning. Some typical storage and drying conditions
of poor radiographic soundness. For the shielded metal arc are included in Table A3.
process, E6013 [E4313] electrodes usually produce the
A6.11.4 Cellulosic coverings for E6010 [E4310] and
best radiographic soundness in welding small, thin parts.
E60 11 [E43 1 I] electrodes need moisture levels of approxi-
E6027 [E4327], E7024 [E4924], and E7028 [E4928]
mately 3% to 7% for proper operation; therefore, storage
electrodes produce welds which may be either quite good
or conditioning above ambient temperature may dry them
or rather inferior in radiographic soundness. The tendency
too much a nd adversely affect their operation (see
seems to be in the latter direction. Of all types, the E6022
Table A3).
[E4322l and E60 12 [E4312] electrodes generally produce
welds with the least favorable radiographic soundness. A6.12 Core W ire. The core wire for all the electrodes
classified in the specification is usually a mild steel having
A6.10.2 Fillet Weld Test. This test is included as a
a typical composition which may differ significantly from
means of demonstrating the usability of an electrode. This
that of the weld metal produced by the covered electrodes.
test is concerned with the appearance of the weld (i.e. ,
weld face contour and smoothness, undercut, overlap, size, A6.13 Coverings
and resistance to cracking). It also provides an excellent A6.13.1 Electrodes of some classifications have sub-
and inexpensive method of determining the adequacy of stantial quantities of iron powder added to their coverings.
fusion at the weld root (one of the important considerations T he iron powder fuses with the core wire and the other
for an electrode). metals in the covering, as the electrode melts, and is depos-
A6.10.3 Toughness. Charpy V-notch impact require- ited as part of the weld metal, just as is the core wire.
ments are included in the specification. All classes of elec- Relatively high cuiTents can be used since a considerable
trodes in the specification can produce weld metal of portion of the electrical energy passing through the elec-
sufficient toughness for many applications. The inclusion trode is used to melt the thicker covering containing iron
of impact requirements for certain electrode classifications powder. The result is that more weld metal may be obtained
allows the specification to be used as a guide in selecting from a single electrode with iron powder in its covering
electrodes where low-temperature toughness is required. than from a single electrode of the same diameter without
There can be considerable variation in the weld metal iron powder.
toughness unless particular attention is given to the welding A6.13.2 Due to the thick covering and deep cup
procedure and the preparation and testing of the specimens. produced at the arcing end of the electrode, iron powder
The impact energy values are for Charpy V-notch speci- electrodes can be used very effectively with a "drag" tech-
mens and should not be confused with values obtained nique. This technique consists of keeping the electrode
with other toughness tests. covering in contact with the workpiece at all times, which
makes for easy handling. However, a technique using a
A6.11 Electrode Covering Moisture Content a nd 1·
short arc length is preferable if the 12 in. or 'lg in. [2.5 mm
Conditioning or 3.2 mm] electrodes are to be used in other than flat or
A6.11.1 Hydrogen can have ad verse effects on welds horizontal fillet welding positions or for making groove
in some steels under certain conditions. One source of this welds.
hydrogen is moisture in the electrode coverings. For this A6. 13.3 The E70XX [E49XX] electrodes were
reason, the proper storage, treatment, and handling of elec- included in this specification to acknowledge the higher
trodes are necessary. strength levels obtained with many of the iron powder
53
Notebook Page 354

( C:onvright © 20 I I hv the American Societv of Mechanical F.mzineers.
SFA-5.1/SFA -S.lM 2011a SECTION ll, PART C
TABLE A3
TYPICAL STORAGE AND DRYING CONDITIONS FOR COVERED ARC WELDING ELECTRODES
A WS Classification Storage Conditionsn·2'
Drying
AS.l A5.1M Ambient Air Holding Ovens Condi tions< 3>
E6010, E6011 E4310, E4311 Am bient temperature Not recommended Not recommended
E6012, E60l3, E6019, E431~ E4 3 1 ~ E4319 80°F ± 20°F 20°F to 40°F 275°F ± 25°F
E6020, E6022, E6027, E4320, E43 22, E4327, D0°C ± l0°CJ [ l0°C t o 20°C] Cl35°C ± l 5°C J
E7014, E7024, E7027 E49 14, E4924, E4927 50% max. above ambient 1 hr at
relative humidity temperature t emperature
E6018, E7015, E701 6, E4318, E4915, E49H:>, Not recommended 50°F to 250°F 500°F to 800°F
E7018, E7028, E701 8M, E4918, E4928, E4918M, D 0°C to 140°C J [260°C to 42 5°C J
E7048 E4948 above ambient 1-2 hr at tem-
temperature perature
NOTES:
(1) After removal from manufacturer's packaging.
<2) Some of these electrode classifications may be designated as meeting low moisture absorbing requirements. Th is designation does not imply
that storage in ambient air is recommended.
<3) Because of inherent differences in covering composit ion, the manufacturers should be consulted f or the exact drying conditions.
and low-hydrogen e lectrodes, as well as to recog nize the A7. Description and Intended Use of Electrodes
industry demand for electrodes with 70 ksi [490 MPa] A7.1 E6010 [E4310] Classification
minimum tensil e s treng th. Unlike the E7 0XX-X
[E49XX -X] classification in AWS A5 .5, Specification f or A7 .1.1 E60 I0 [E431 0] electrodes are c haracterized
Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Weld- by a deeply penetrating, forceful , spray type arc and readily
ing. these electrodes do not contain deliberate alloy addi- removable; thin; friable slag which may not seem to com-
tions, no r are they required to meet minimum tens ile pletely cover the weld bead. Fillet welds usually have a
properties after postweld heat treatment. relatively flat weld face and have a rather coarse, unevenly
spaced ripple. The coverings are high in cellulose, usually
A6.13.4 E70XX [E49XX] low-hydrogen electrodes exceeding 30% by weight. The other materials generally
have mineral coverings which are high in limestone and used in the covering include titanium dioxide, metallic
other ingredients that are low in moisture and hence pro- deoxidizers such as ferromanganese, various types of mag-
duce weld depos its " low in hydrogen content. " nesium or aluminum silicates, and liquid sodium silicate
Low-hydrogen electrodes we re de veloped for welding as a binder. Because of their covering composition, these
low-alloy high-strength steels, some of which were high electrodes are generally described as the high-cellulose
in carbon content. Electro des with other than low-hydrogen sodium type.
coverings may produce "hydrogen-induced cracking" in
A7.1.2 These electrodes are recommended for all
those steels. These underbead cracks occur in the base
welding positions, particularly on multiple pass applica-
metal, usually just below the weld bead. Weld metal cracks
tions in the vertical and overhead welding positions and
may also occur.
where welds of good soundness are required. They fre-
Low-hydrogen electrodes should be used when welding
quently are selected for joining pipe and generally are
high-sulfur or enameling steels. Other electrodes are likely
capable of welding in the vertical position with either uphill
to cause porosity and/or cracks in high-sulfur steels. With
or downhill progression.
enameling steels, the hydrogen that escapes after welding
with other than \ow-hydrogen electrodes produces holes A7.1.3 The majority of applications for these elec-
in the ename l. trodes is in joining carbon steel. However, they have been
used to advantage on galvani zed steel a nd on some
A6.14 Amperage Ranges. Table A4 gives amperage low-alloy steels. Typical applications include shipbuilding,
ranges which are satisfactory for most classifications. buildings, bridges, storage tanks,piping, and pressure ves-
When welding vertically upward, currents near the lower sel fittings. Since the applications are so widespread, a
limit of the range are ge nerally used. discussion of each is impractical. Sizes larger than :Y16 in.
54
Notebook Page 355

( C'onvrill'ht © 20 I I lw the American Societv o f Mechanica 1 F.nll'ineers.
z
0
ro
c:;
0
0
"'
"0
Q)
(D
(1)
w
(.)1
0>
:1
::>
:J
~-
It;
;:r
@ TABLE A4
N
0 TYPICAL AM PERAGE RANGES
::r E6018,
< E6010, E6027, E7015, E7018M, E7024,
:r
~ Electrode Diameter AS.l E6011 E6012 E6013 E6019 E6020 E60 22 E7027 E7014 E7016 E7018 E7028 E7048
--
)>
3
~
:::!.
<>
"'
:::l
AS.l
(in.)
AS.l M
<mm) AS.lM
E4310,
E4311 E4312 E4313 E4319 E4320 E4322
E4327,
E4927 E4914
E4915,
E4916
E4318,
E4918M,
E4918
E4924,
E4928 E4948
--
~
I»
(/)
{'j
(i
'./)
:>
~& 1.6 - - 20 to 40 20 to 40 - - - - - - - - - ....
>-l
~. lJl 0
<>
<
lJl
%4 2.0 - - 25 to 60 25 to 60 35 to 55 - - - - - - - - z
p
:>
-.,
~zm 2.4<1>, 2.5<u - 40 to 80 35 to 85 45 to 90 50 to 90 - - - 80 to 125 65 to 110 70 to 110 100 to 145 -
.,
~ 3.2 - 75 to 125 80 to 140 80 to 130 80 to 140 100 to 150 1 10 to 160 125 to 185 n o to 160 100 to 150 105 to 155 140to190 80 to 140
>
~
=r
~2 4.0 - 110 to 170 110 to 190 105 to 180 130 to 190 130 to 190 140 to 190 160 to 24 0 150 to 210 140 to 200 130 to 200 180 to 250 150 to 220 ...,
::0
"':::l ~& 5.0 - 140 to 215 140 to 240 150 to 230 190 to 250 175 to 250 170 to 400 210 to 300 200 to 275 180 to 255 200 to 275 230 to 305 210 to 270 (i
<> ~2 5 .6 - 170 to 250 200 to 320 210 to 300 240 to 310 225 to 310 370 to 520 250 to 350 260 to 340 240 to 320 260 to 340 275 to 365
"'
:Tl
~ 6.0 - 210 to 320 250 to 400 250 to 350 310 to 360 275 to 375 - 300 to 420 330 to 415 300 to 390 315 to 400 335 to 430
:::l ~b 8.0 - 275 to 425 300 to 500 320 to 430 350 to 410 340 to 450 - 375 to 475 390 to 500 375 to 475 375 to 470 4 00 to 525
~.
:::l
--
~
~ NOTE:
?1 (1) Th is diameter is not manufactured in the E7028 [E4828] classification.
~
(/)
'"l
>
.:,,
~
..,
)>
.:,.
~
SFA-5.1/SFA-S.IM 2011a SECTION II, PART C
coverings to facilitate their use with ac. Most of the preced- results are evaluated using all five test values and higher
ing discussion on E70 15 [E49 15] electrodes applies equally values are required at -20°F [-30°C). The maximum allow-
well to the E70 16 [E4916] electrodes. The discussion in able moisture-in-coating values in the "as-received" or
A6.13.4 also applies. reconditioned state are more restrictive than that required
A7.6.6.2 Electrodes des ignated as E7016-l for E7018R [E49 18R]. This classification closely corres-
[E4916- l ] have the same usability and weld metal composi- ponds to MIL-70 18-M in the United States military stan-
tion as E70 16 [E49 16] electrodes except that the manga- dard MIL-E-22200/1 0 specification, with the exception that
nese content is set at the high end of the range. They are the absorbed moisture limits on the electrode covering and
intended for welds requiring a lower transition temperature the diffusible hydrogen limits on the weld metal are not
than is normally available from E70 16 [E49 16] electrodes. as restrictive as those in MIL-E-22200/10.
A7.6.7 E6018 [E4318] a nd E7018 [E4918] Classi- A7.6.8.2 E701 8M [E4918Ml is intended to be
fications used with deep type current in order to produce the opti-
mum mechanical properties. However, if the manufacturer
A7.6.7.1 E7018 [E49 18] e lectrode coverings are
desires, the e lec trode may also be classified as E701 8
similar to E70 15 [E4915] coverings, except for the addition
[E49 18) provided all the requirements of E70 I 8 [E491 8)
of a relatively high percentage of iron powder. The cov-
are met.
erings on these electrodes are slightly thicker than those
of the E70 16 [E4916] electrodes. A7.6.8.3 In addition to their use on carbon steel,
the E70 18M [E49 18M] electrodes are used for j oining
A7.6.7.2 E701 8 [E4918] low-hydrogen electrodes
carbon steel to high-strength low-alloy steels and higher
can be used with either ac or deep. They are designed for
carbon steels. Fillet welds made in the horizontal and flat
the same applications as the E70 16 [E4916l electrodes. As
welding positions have a slightly convex weld face, with
is common with all low-hydrogen electrodes, a short arc
a smooth and finely rippled surface. The electrodes are
length should be maintained at all times.
characterized by a smooth, quiet arc, very low spatter, and
A7.6.7.3 In addition to their use on carbon steel, medium arc penetration.
the E70 18 [E49 18] e lectrodes are also used for j oints
A7.6.9 E7028 [E4928] Classification
involving high-strength. high-carbon, or low-alloy steels
(see also A6.1 3). The fillet welds made in the horizontal A7.6.9.1 E7028 [E4928] e lectrodes are very much
and flat welding positions. have a slightly convex weld face, like the E70 18 [E49 l 8 ) e lectrodes. However, E7028
with a smooth and fine!y rippled surface. The electrodes are [E4928] electrodes are suitable for fillet welds in the hori-
characterized by a smooth, quiet arc, very low spatter, and zontal welding position and groove welds in the flat weld-
medium arc penetration. E70 18 [E49 I 8] electrodes can be ing position only, whereas E70 18 [E49 18) electrodes are
used at high travel speeds. suitable for all positions.
A 7 .6. 7.4 Electrodes des ignated as E70 18-1 A7.6.9.2 The E7028 [E4928] electrode coverings
[E49 I 8- 1] have the same usability and weld metal composi- are much thicker. They make up approximately 50% of
tion as E70 18 [E4918) electrodes, except that the manga- the weight of the electrodes. The iron content of E7028
nese content is set at the high end of the range. They are [E4928] electrodes is higher (approximately 50% of the
intended for welds requ iring a lower transition temperature weight of lhe coverings). Consequently, on fillet welds in
than is normally available from E701 8 [E4918] electrodes. the horizontal position and groove welds in the flat welding
A7 .6. 7. 5 E60 l 8 [E43 l8 ] e lec trodes possess position. E7028 [E4928] electrodes give a hig her deposi-
operating and mechanical property characteristics similar tion rate than the E70l8 [E49J 8] electrodes for a given
to E70 18 [E49l8] except at a lower strength level. The size of electrode.
electrode coating and low hydrogen characteristics are also A7.6.10 E7048 [E4948] Classification. Electrodes
s imilar. This electrode is des irable where matching or ofthe E7048 [E4948] classification have the same usability,
undermatching weld deposit is required. Electrodes that composition, and desig n characteristics as E70 18 (E49 18]
meet this classificat ion may also be suitable for buffer layer electrodes, except that E7048 [E4948] e lectrodes are spe-
application in cladding operations. cifically designed for exceptionally good vertical welding
A7.6.8 E7018M [E4918M] Classification with downward progression (see Table I).
A7.6.8.1 E7018M [E4918M] electrodes are simi- A7.7 E6019 [E4319] Classification
lar to E7018- lH4R [E49 18-1 H4R) electrodes, except that A7.7.1 E60 19 [E43 19] e lectrodes, although very
the testing for mechanical properties and for classification similar to E60 13 and E6020 [E4313 and E4320] electrodes
is done on a groove weldl that has a 60 deg included angle in their coverings, have distinct differences. E6019 [E4319)
and, for electrodes up to 5/ 32 in . [4.0 mm], welded in the electrodes, with a rather fluid slag system. provide deeper
vertical position with upward progression. The impact test arc penetration and produce weld metal that meets a 22%
58
Notebook Page 357

( \.onvright © 2011 hv the American Societv ofMechlmical Engineers.
Notebook Page 358
20lla SECfi ON II, PART C SFA-5.5/SFA·S.SM
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW-Al.,LOY STEEL

ELECTRODES FOR SHIELDED METAL ARC WELDING
SFA-5.5/SFA-S.SM
8
(Identical with AWS Specification AS.5/A5.5M :2006. In case of dispute. the original AWS text applies.)
1. Scope 2.2 The following AWS standards 1 are referenced in

1.1 This specification prescribes requirements for the the normative sections of this document:
c lassification o f low-alloy steel e lectrodes for shielded (a) AWS A5.0 I , Filler Metal Procurement Guidelines
metal arc welding of carbon and !ow-alloy steels. T hese (b) AWS A4.3, Standard Methods for Determination of
e lectrodes include steel alloys in which no single alloying the Diffusible Hydrogen Content of Martensitic, Bainitic,
e lement exceeds 10.5 percent. and Ferritic Steel Weld Metal Produced by Arc Welding
1.2 Safety and health issues and concerns are beyond (c) A WS A4.4M, Standard Procedures for Determina-
the scope of this standard and, therefore, are not fully tion of Moisture Content of Welding Fluxes and Welding
addressed herein. Some safety and health information can Electrode Flux Coverings
be fou nd in Informative Annex Clauses AS and A I 0. Safety (d) A WS B4.0 (B4.0M), Standard Methods for Mechan-
and health information is available from other sources, ical Testing of Welds
including, but not limited to, ANSI Z49. 1, Safety in Weld·
2.3 The following ANSI standard 2 is referenced in the
ing, Cutting, and Allied Processes, and applicable federal
normative sections of this document:
and state regulations .
(a) ANSI Z49.1, Safety in Welding, Cutting, and Allied
1.3 This specification makes use of both U.S. Custom- Processes
ary Units and the International System of Units (Sl). The
measurements are not exact equi valents; therefore. each 2.4 The following ASTM standards3 are referenced in
system must be used independently of the other without the normative sections of this document:
combining in any way when referring to material proper- (a) ASTM A 29/A 29M , Standard Specification for
ties. The specificatio n designated A5.5 uses U.S. Custom- Steel Bars. Carbon and Alloy, Hot- Wrought, General
ary Units; and the specification designated A5.5M uses SI Requirements for
Units. The latter units are shown within brackets ( ) or in (b) ASTM A 36/A 36M, Standard Specification fo r Car-
appropriate columns in tables and figures . Standard dimen- bon Structural Steel
sions based on either system may be used for sizing of (c) ASTM A 203/A 203M, Standard Specification for
filler metal or packaging or both under A5.5 or A5 .5M Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Nickel
specification. (d) ASTM A 204/A 204M, Standard Specification for
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Molybdenum
2. Normative References (e) ASTM A 283/A 283M, Standard Specification for
2.1 The following standards contain provisions that, Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon. Steel Plates
through reference in this text, constitute provisions of this
A WS standard. For dated references, subsequent amend-
ments to, or revisions of, any o f these publications do not 1
AWS standards are published by the American Welding Society. 550
apply. However, parties to agreement based on this AWS N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, FL 33126.
2
standard are encouraged to investigate the possibility of This ANS I standard is published by the American Welding Society,
550 N.W. LeJeune Road. Miam i. FL 33 126.
applying the most recent edition of the documents shown 3 ASTM standards are publ ished by the American Society for Testing
below. For undated references, the latest edition of the and Mate rials. 100 Barr Harbor Drive. West Conshohoc ke n , PA
standard referred to applies. 19428-2959.
119
Notebook Page 359

( C:onvrig ht © 20 I I hv the American Soc ietv of Mechanical F.nl?ine crs.
2011a SECI'ION II, J>ART C SFA-5.5/SFA-S.SM
TABLE 1
ELECTRODE CLASSIFICATION
AWS Classi fication<A>
Welding Positions
A5.5 A5.5M Type of Covering for Classification181 Type of Current<c>
E7010-X E4910-X High cellulose sodium F, V, OH, H deep

E7011-X E4911-X High cellulose potassium F, V, OH, H ac or deep
E7o1s-x<o,e> E4915-X10•El Low hydrogen sodium F, V, OH, H deep
E701o-x10·e> E4916-x<o.e> Low hydrogen potassium F, V, OH, H ac or deep
E7018-X10•El E4918-X<D,E> Low hydrogen potassium, iron pow- F, V, OH, H ac or deep
der<F>
H-fillets ac or dcen ae,
E7020-X E4920-X High iron oxidm
F deep, or dcen
H-fillets ac or dcen ac,
E7027-X E4927-Xht High iron oxide, iron powder<F>
F deep, or dcen
E8010-X E55 10-X High cellu lose sodium F, V, OH, H deep
E801l-G E5511-G High cell ulose po tassium F, V, OH, H ac or deep
E8013-G E5513-G High titania potassium F, V, OH, H ac, deep, or dcen
E8015-X<D. e> Essl s- x <o.e> Low hydrogen sodium F, V, OH, H deep
E8016-X<D. e> E55lo-X10·e> Low hydrogen potassium F, V, OH, H ac or deep
E8018-x<o.e> E5518-X<D,E> Low hydrogen potassium, iron powder<F> F, V, OH, H ac or deep
EB045-P2(0,t:J £5545-P2(0, EJ Low hydrogen sodium F, OH, H, V-down deep
E9010-G E6210-G High cellulose sodium F, V, OH, H deep
E9010-X E6210-X High cellulose sodium F, V, OH, H deep
E9011-G E6211-G High cellulose potassium F, V, OH, H ac or deep
E9013-G E6213-G High titania potassium F, V, OH, H ae, deep, or deen
E9015-X<D,E> E6215-X<D,E> Low hydrogen sodium F, V, OH, H deep
E9016-X<D,E> E6216-X<D,El Low hydrogen potassium F, V, OH, H ac or deep
E9018-X<D,E> E6218-X<D,E> Low hydrogen potassium, iron powder<F> F, V, OH, H ac or deep
E9018M<O,E> E6218M<D,E> Iron powder, low hydrogen<F> F, V, OH, H deep
£9045-PZ0•t:J E6245-PZ0·EJ Low hydrogen sodium F, OH, H, V-down deep
E10010-G E6910-G High cellulose sodium F, V, OH, H deep

ElOOll-G E6911-G High cellulose potassium F, V, OH, H ac or deep
E10013-G E6913-G High titania potassium F, V, OH, H ac, deep, or dcen
El0015·X<D,E> E6915-XCD,E> Low hydrogen sodium F, V, OH, H deep
E10016-Xco,e> E6916-XCD,E> Low hydrogen potassium F, V, OH, H ac or deep
E10018·X<D,E> E6918·XCD,E> Low hydrogen potassium, iron powder<F> F, V, OH, H ac or deep
E10018M<D,E> E6918M<D,El Iron powder, low hydrogen<F> F, V, OH, H deep
£10045-P2(0,EJ £6945-P2fO,Ei Low hydrogen sodium F, OH, H, V-down deep
EllOlO-G E7610·G High cellulose sodium F, V, OH, H deep
EllO l l·G E76l l· G High cellulose potassium F, V, OH, H ac or deep
Ell013·G E7613· G High titania potassium F, V, OH, H ac, deep, or dcen
Ell015-G<D,El E7615·G<O,El Low hydrogen sodium F, V, OH, H deep
Ell016·G<D,E> E7616·G<D,El Low hydrogen potassium F, V, OH, H ac or deep
El1018-G<D,E> E7618-G<D,E> Low hydrogen potassium, iron powder<F> F, V, OH, H ac or deep
Ell018M<D,E> E7618M 10·El Iron powder, low hydrogen<F> F, V, OH, H deep
El2010-G E8310·G High cellu lose sodium F, V, OH, H deep
El2011-G E83ll·G High cellulose potassium F, V, OH, H ac or deep
El2013-G E8313-G High titania potassium F, V, OH, H ac, deep, or dcen
El2015-G10•E> E8315-GIO,El Low hydrogen sodium F, V, OH, H deep
El2016-G10·El E8316-G<D,E> Low hydrogen potassium F, V, OH, H ac or deep
E12018-G10•E> E8318-G<D,El Low hydrogen potassium, iron powderm F, V, OH, H ac or deep
E12018MIO,E> E8318M10·E) Iron powder, low hydrogenm F, V, OH, H deep
E12018Ml10•El E8318M 1(O,E) Iron powder, low hydrogen<F> F, V, OH, H deep
121
Notebook Page 360

( Convri l?h t © 20 11 hv the American Societv ofMech::~ni ca l P.noineers.
TABLE 2
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION REQUIREMENTS FOR WELD META L
AWS Classification<cl Weight Percent<A,Bl
Additional
Ele ments
:J UN S
:>
::l A5.5 A5.5 M Number<Dl c Mn Si p s Ni Cr Mo Type Am t.
<
:::!.
IQ Carbon-Molybdenum Steel Electrodes
;:r
@ E7010-Al E4 910-A1 Wl7010 0.12 0.60 0.40 0.03 0.03 ... ... 0.40-0.65
t0 E7011 -A1 E4 911-Al Wl7011 0.12 0.60 0.40 0.03 0 .03 . .. . .. 0 .40-0.65
0
E7015-Al E4915-Al Wl7015 0.12 0.90 0 .60 0.03 0.03 ... ... 0 .40-0.65
0" E7016-A1 E4916-Al Wl7016 0.12 0.90 0.60 0.03 0.03 ... . .. 0.40-0.65
...<::r E7018-Al E4 918-Al Wl7 018 0 .12 0.90 0.80 0.03 0 .03 . .. . .. 0.40- 0 .65
C1> E7020-A1 E4920-A1 W17020 0.12 0.60 0.40 0.03 0.03 ... . .. 0 .40- 0.65
l> E7027 -Al E4 927-A1 W17027 0.12 1.00 0.40 0.03 0 .03 ... ... 0 .40-0.65 ... . .. ~
.....
3C1> .....
:::!.
(')
Ch romium-Mol ybdenum Steel Electrodes ""
'J)
r<l
"" . .. . . ..
-
::l E8016-Bl E5516- B1 W51016 0.05-0.12 0.90 0.6 0 0.03 0.03 0.40- 0.65 0.40- 0.65 ..
:n
:> E8018-Bl E5518 - Bl W51018 0.05-0.12 0.90 0.8 0 0 .03 0.03 ... 0.40- 0 .65 0 .40-0.65 ... .. . ~
~. t0 0
"'< V.)
E8016-B2 E5516- B2 W52016 0.05- 0 .12 0.90 0 .60 0.03 0.03 . .. 1.00- 1.50 0.40- 0.65 ... ... z
....,
:> E8018-B2 E5518-B2 W52018 0.05-0. 12 0.90 0 .80 0.03 0.03 ... 1.00- 1.50 0.40- 0.65 . .. . .. .P
~
s: E7015 -B2L E4915- B2L W52115 0.05 0.90 1.00 0.03 0.03 . .. 1.00-1.50 0.40-{).65 ... . .. ~
...
C1>
(')
::r E7016-B2L E4916-B 2L W5 2116 0.05 0 .90 0.60 0.03 0.03 1.00-1.50 0.4 0- 0.65 ... . .. ~
""
::1 E7018-B2L E4918-82 L W5 2118 0 .05 0.90 0 .80 0.03 0.03 ... 1.00-1.50 0.40-0.65 ("')
r;·
~ E9015-B3 E6215 - B3 W53015 0.05- 0.12 0.90 1.00 0.03 0.03 .. . 2.00- 2.50 0.90- 1.20
:r:! E9016-83 E6216-83 W53016 0.05- 0.12 0 .90 0 .60 0.03 0.03 ... 2.00-2.50 0.9 0- 1.20
::1
'S.
::1
E9018-83 E6218-B3 W53018 0.05- 0. 12 0 .90 0.80 0.03 0.03 ... 2.00-2.50 0 .90-1.20
C1>
"'
:;!
E8015-83L E5515-83L W5311 5 0.05 0.90 1.00 0.03 0.03 ... 2.00-2.50 0 .90- 1.20
E8018-83L E5518-83L W5311 8 0.05 0 .9 0 0.80 0.03 0.03 .. . 2.00-2.50 0.90-1.20
E8015-84L E5515-84 L W534 15 0.05 0.9 0 1.00 0 .03 0.03 ... 1.75-2.25 0 .40-0.65
E8016-B5 E5516-85 W5l316 0.07- 0.15 0 .40- 0.70 0 .30·0.60 0.03 0.03 ... 0 .40-0.60 1.00- 1.25 v 0.05
~) E8015-8 6<E> E55 15-B6<E> W5021 5 0.05-0.10 1.0 0 .90 0.03 0.03 0.40 4.0-6.0 0.45-D.65
E8016· B6m E55 16 -86<El W50 216 0.05-0.10 1.0 0.90 0.03 0.03 0.40 4.0-6.0 0 .45-D.65
E8018- B6m E5518 -B6<El W5021 8 0.05- 0.10 1.0 0.90 0.03 0.03 0.40 4.0-6.0 0.45-D.65
CIJ
E8015-86l<El E5515- B6l< E> W50205 0.05 1.0 0 .90 0.03 0.03 0 .40 4.0- 6.0 0.45-D.65 . .. . .. ~
E8016- B6l<E> E5516-B6 L<El W50206 0.05 1.0 0.90 0.03 0 .03 0 .40 4.0-6.0 0.45- 0 .65 ... . .. ti.
E8018 -86L< El E5518-B6L<El W502 08 0.05 1.0 0.90 0.03 0.03 0.40 4.0- 6.0 0.45- 0.65 . .. ... ~
z
0
'o:l
)o

z
0
ro-
0"
0
0
"'
-u
C))
(n
"!j
c.c
(1)
>
w
tJ.
(J,
0>
N in
""l
TABLE 2 >
CHE MICAL COM POSITION REQUIREMENTS FOR WELD METAL (CONT'O ) tJ.
(J,
Weight Percent<A,B> ~
AWS Classi fication<c> Additional Elements

UN S
AS.S AS.SM Number<D> c Mn Si p s Ni Cr Mo Type Amt.
:") Chromi um- Molybdenum Steel Electrodes ( Continued)

:>
:I E8015-BiE> E5515- 87m W50315 0.05-0. 10 1.0 0.90 0.03 0.03 0.40 &.0- 8.0 0.45- 0.&5
<
:::! . E801&-BiE> E551&- B7m W5031& 0.05-0.10 1.0 0.90 0.03 0.03 0.40 &.0- 8.0 0.45-0.&5
IQ
::r
~
E8018-BiE> E5518- B7m W503 18 0.05-0.10 1.0 0.90 0.03 0.03 0.40 &.0-8.0 0.45-0.&5
@ E8015-87L m E5515- 87L<E> W50305 0.40 &.0- 8.0 0. 45-0.&5
0.05 1.0 0.90 0.03 0.03
IV
0 E801&-8 7L m E551&- 87L <E> W5030& 0.05 1.0 0.90 0.03 0.03 0.40 &.0- 8.0 0.45-0.&5
E8018-87L (E) E5518- B7L<E> W50308 0.05 1.0 0.90 0.03 0.03 0.40 &.0-8.0 0.45-0.&5
':T
< E8015-B8m E5515-88<E> W5041 5 0.05- 0.10 1.0 0.90 0.03 0.03 0.40 8.0- 10.5 0.85-1.20 ... . .. N
~
Cl> E801&- B8<E> E551& -B8m W5041& 0.05-0.10 1.0 0.90 0.03 0.03 0.40 8.0- 10.5 0.85-1.20 ... . ..
.........
Q
~
)>
3
E8018-88<E> E5518- B8<E> W50418 0.05- 0.10 1.0 0.90 0.03 0.03 0.40 8.0-1 0.5 0.85-1.20 .. . . .. (n
t!l
...
Cl>
;:;· E8015-B8L m E5515- B8 L <E> W50405 0.05 1.0 0.90 0.03 0.03 0.40 8.0-10.5 0.85-1.20 . .. . .. (")
E801&- B8L<El E551 &- B8 L<E> W5040& 0.05 1.0 0.90 0.03 0.03 0.40 8.0- 10.5 0.85-1.20 ... . .. ::l
"'::s 0
-
N
J) ~ E8018- 88L<E> E5518-B8 L<E> W50408 0.05 1.0 0.90 0.03 0.03 0.40 8.0-10.5 0.85- 1.20 ... . .. z
:>
0
Cl> E9015- B9<J> E&215- B9<J> W50425 0.08-0.13 1.20 0.30 0.01 0.01 0.80 8.0- 10.5 0.85-1.20 v 0.15- 0.30 ~-
"C
<: Cu 0.25 >
:>
......,
s::
Cl>
AI
Nb(Cb)
0.04
0.02-0.10
"
-l
(")
0
::r N 0.02-0.07
"'
::s
;:;· E901&-89<Jl E&21&- B9<J> W5042 & 0.08-0.13 1.20 0.30 0.01 0.01 0.80 8.0- 10.5 0.85-1.20 v 0.15- 0.30
~ Cu 0.25
:11
:l AI 0.04
'9. Nb(Cb) 0.0 2-0.10
:l
Cl>
Cl> N 0.02-0.07
~
E90 18-B9<J> E&218- B9w W50428 0.08-0.13 1.20 0.30 0.01 0.01 0.80 8.0-1 0.5 0.85- 1.20 v 0.15- 0.30
Cu 0.25
AI 0.04
Nb(Cb) 0.02- 0 .10
~ Nickel Steel Electr odes

N 0.02- 0.07
E801&-Cl E551&-C1 W2201& 0.1 2 1.25 0.60 0.03 0.03 2.00-2.75

E8018-Cl E5518-Cl W22018 0.12 1.25 0.&0 0.03 0.03 2.00- 2.75
Welding 111 27
General127.1
The B31.1 welding requirements apply to all fabrication in a shop or at a construction site. The
welding processes used must meet the requirements of ASME Section IX.
The following welding rules apply to ferrous materials. The welding of nonferrous materials, such as
aluminum, copper, etc., requires different preparations and procedures.
Electrodes and Filler Metal 127.2.1
Welding electrodes, filler metal, and consumable inserts used for B31.1 welding are listed in ASME
Section II, Part C.
An electrode or filler met al not conforming to ASME Section II, Part C may be used provided the
WPS and the welders and welding operators who will follow the WPS have been qualified as
required by ASME Section IX.
Unless the designer specifies otherwise, welding electrodes and filler metals used must produce weld
metal that complies with the following:
(A) The nominal t ensile strength of the weld metal shall equal or exceed the minimum specified
tensile strength ofthe base metals being joined .
(B) If base metals of different tensile strengths are to be joined, the nominal tensile strength of
the weld metal shall equal or exceed the minimum specified tensile strength of the weaker of
the t wo.
(C) The nominal chemical analysis of the weld metal shall be similar to the nominal chemical
analysis of the major alloying elements of the base metal [e.g., 2114%Cr, 1% Mo steels should
be joined using 2114% Cr, 1% Mo filler metals; see also para. 124.2(D)].
(D) If base metals of different chemical analysis are being joined, the nominal chemical analysis
of the weld metal shall be similar to either base metal or an intermediate composition, except
as specified below for austenitic steels joined to ferritic steels.
(E) When austenitic steels are joined to ferritic steels, the weld metal shall have an austenitic
structure.
(F) For nonferrous metals, the weld metal shall be that recommended by the manufacturer of
the nonferrous metal or by industry associations for that metal.
(G) For unusual materials or combinations of materials, the design engineer shall s pecify the
weld metal that is required. In addition, when a base metal is selected primarily for its
corrosion resistance, and the media is aggressive towards the material, the use of weld metal
that is electrochemically more noble than the base metal is recommended to en sure that
selective corrosion of the weld met al does not occur (e.g., wh en using type 316L base metal in
a strong acid, the use of 317L weld metal is preferred).
Notebook Page 363

Weld Backing Materia11I328.3.2
Backing rings must conform to the following:
• 'l{ l 27.2.2(A) Ferrous metal backing rings that become a permanent part of the weld shall be
made from material of weldable quality, compatible with the base material, and the sulfur
content shall not exceed 0.05%.
• 'lll27.2.2(B)(c) Nonferrous and nonmetallic backing rings may be used for backing provided
they are included in a qualified WPS. Nonmetallic or nonfusing rings shall be removed.
Con sumable Inserts '!T127.2.3
Consumable inserts may be used, provided:
• they are made from material compatible with the chemical and physical properties of the
base material, and
• they must be included in the qualification of the WPS.
Welding electrodes, filler metal, and consumable inserts, must conform to ASME Section IX.
Practice Problem 01: Filler Metal Code

Which code must welding electrodes, filler metal, and consumable inserts be conformed to, for ASME
B31.1 piping systems?
a) ASME Sec. II, Part A

b) ASME Sec. II, Part B
c) ASME Sec. II, Part C
d) ASME Sec. IX
e) c and d
Practice Problem 02: Backing Material

What are the ASME B31.1 quality requirements for ferrous metal backing rings used with process
piping?
a) shall be of weldable quality

b) shall meet the AWS backing specification requirements
c) shall be the same material as the base metal
d) shall be of weldable quality with a sulfur content not exceeding 0.05%
e) shall be of weldable and corrosion resistant quality
Notebook Page 364

Preparation for Welding 4f]127.3
Cleaning 'II 127.3(B)
Surfaces for welding shall be clean and shall be free from any detrimental effects to either the weld
or the base metal when heat is applied. Examples of debris for cleaning include:
• paint,
• oil,
• rust, and
• scale .
Alignment of Circumferential Welds 'II127.3(C)
The inside diameters of piping components to be butt welded shall be aligned as accurately as
practicable, within existing commercial tolerances on:
• diameters,
• wall thicknesses, and
• out-of-roundness.
Unless the piping design specifically states a different allowable misalignment, the maximum
allowable internal misalignment of the ends is 1116 in. (2.0 mm), see Fig. 9[127.3.
Spacing 'II127.3(D)
The root opening of the welded joint is as specified in the qualified WPS.
Socket Weld Assembly 'II 127.3(E)
In assembly of socket weld joints, the pipe or tube shall be inserted into the socket to the maximum
depth and then withdrawn approximately 1116 in. (2.0 mm) away from contact between the end of
the pipe and the shoulder of the socket (see Figs. 127.4.4(B) and (C)).
Practice Problem 03: Cleaning Welds

Which areas of an ASME B31.1 weld shall be clean and free from paint, oil, rust, scale, and other
material that would be detrimental to either the weld or the base metal when heat is applied?
a) base metal, including a minimum distance of 3 inches in all directions from the weld
b) on those surfaces that will be in contact with the process or, a minimum distance of 3
inch es in all directions from the weld, whichever is greater
c) surfaces for welding
d) I.D. only
e) O.D. only
Notebook Page 365

Practice Problem 04: Weld Alignment
What are the ASME B 31.1 tolerance limits for the root opening of the joint for process piping?
a) ±1/16 in.
b) ±1/8 in.
c) shall be within the tolerance limits in the WPS
d) a minimum of twice the diameter ofthe electrode size qualified in the WPS for the root
pass
e) ±3/16 in.
Practice Problem Q5: Socket Welds

The weld j oint fit-up gap between the end of a pipe and the bottom of the socket used in ASME B31.1
power piping shall be approximately:
a) 1/32 in.
b) 1/16 in.
c) 1/8 in.
d) 3/32 in.
e) 5/32 in.
Procedure 1]127.4
WPS Qualification <Jl.127.4.1(A)
Qualification of the WPS to be used, and of the performance of welders and operators, is required,
and shall comply with the requirements the ASME Section IX, except as modified in Cjl127.5.
External Impingement on Welded Area <Jl.127.4.1(B)
No welding is permitted ifthere is impingement of rain, snow, sleet, or high wind on the weld area.
Tack Welds <Jl.127.4.1(C)
Tack welds must meet the following criteria:
• tack welds that remain in the finished weld must be made by a qualified welder;
• tack welds made by an unqualified welder must be removed;
• tack welds that remain must be made with an electrode and WPS that is the same as or
equivalent to the electrode and WPS to be used for the first pass; and
• tack welds that have cracked must be removed.
Arc Strikes <Jl.127.4.1(D)
Arc strikes outside the area of the intended weld should be avoided on any base metal.
Notebook Page 366

Girth Butt Welds 1! 127.4.2(A)
Girth butt welds m ust be complete (full) penetration welds and must be made with:
• a single vee,
• double vee, or
• other suitable type of groove,
• with or without backing rings or consumable inserts.
Fillet Welds 11127.4.4
In making fillet welds:
• the weld metal must be deposited in such a way as to secure adequate penetration into the
base metal at the root of the weld;
• they may vary from convex to concave;
• the weld size is determined as shown in Fig. 127.4.4(A).
Fig. 127.4.4(A) FlUet Weld Size
{a) Convex Equal l eg (b) Concave Equal Leg

Fillet Weld Fillet Weld
(c) Convex Unequal Leg (d) Concave Unoqual Leg

<!ll Codes and Standards Training Institute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 367

Seal Welds <JI 127.4.5
Seal welding of threaded joints must be done by qualified welders and the threads must be entirely
covered by the seal weld.
Practice Problem Q6: Welding

When is welding prohibited on new ASME B31.1 power piping welds?
a) if there is impingement on the weld area of high wind

b) if the weld area is frosted
c) if the weld area is wet
d) all of the above
e) none required
'Practice Problem Q7: Welding

What are t he ASME B31.1 requirements for tack welds at the root ofthe joint?
a) shall be made with filler metal equivalent to that used in the first pass and made by the
pipe fitter or welder
b) shall be made with filler metal equivalent to that used in the first pass and made by a
qualified welder
c) shall be fused with any pass weld, in accordance with the qualified WPS
d) cracked tack welds are not required to be removed, provided they are fused with the root
pass weld
Practice Problem Q8: Seal Welding

What are the requirements for seal welding ASME B31.1 power piping?
a) seal welding may be done by any trades personal, provided they are inspected visually
after completion
b) seal welding shall cover a minimum of 2 exposed threads or 3/8 in., whichever is greater
c) seal welding shall cover all exposed threads or 3/8 in., whichever is greater
d) seal welding shall be done by a qualified welder and shall cover all exposed threads
e) none
Notebook Page 368

Weld Reinforcement 11. 127.4.2(C.2)
The amount of weld metal build-up on or below the base metal surface is referred to as reinforcement
(not convexity). If reinforcement exists on the side from which welding was done it is called face
reinforcement. Build up on the other side is called root reinforcement. The Palmgren weld
reinforcement gage is used to measure groove weld reinforcement, as shown below.
Measuring weld reinforcement with the Palmgren gage.
For ASME B31.1 welds, there are maximum requirements for weld reinforcement. The weld must
develop the strength of the base material. Weld reinforcement is a change in surface contour and
therefore is a stress concentrator: the more severe the build-up, the greater the stress magnification.
Although the Code does not require weld reinforcement, it does require full penetration, i.e.,
complete joint fill.
Notebook Page 369

Permitted weld reinforcement in accordance with Table 127.4.2 is as follows.
Table 127.4.2 Reinforcement of Girth and Longitudinal Butt Welds
Maximum Thickness of R einforcem ent

for D esign Temp erature
> 750°F 350°F -750°F < 350°F
Thickness of Base Metal, (400°C) (175°C-400°C) (175°C)
in. (m m) in. mm in. mm in. mm
Up to 1/8 (3.0), incl. 1116 2.0 3/32 2.5 3/16 5.0
Over 118 to 3/16 (3 .0 to 5.0), incl. 1116 2.0 118 3.0 3/16 5.0
Over 3/16 to 1/2 (5.0 to 13.0), incl. 1/16 2.0 5/32 4.0 3/16 5.0
Over 112 to 1 (13.0 to 25.0), incl. 3/32 2.5 3/16 5.0 3/16 5.0
Over 1 to 2 (25.0 to 50.0), incl. 118 3.0 114 6.0 114 6.0
The greater of 114 in. (6 mm) or 1/8 times
Over 2 (50.0) 5/32 4.0
the width of the weld in inches (mm).
General Notes:
(a) For double welded butt joints, this limitation on reinforcement given above shall apply
separately to both inside and outside surfaces of the joint.
(b) For single welded butt joints, the reinforcement limits given above shall apply to the outside
surface of the joint only.
(c) The thickness of weld reinforcement shall be based on the thickness of the thinner of the
materials being joined.
(d)The weld reinforcement thicknesses shall be determined from the higher of the abutting
surfaces involved.
(e) Weld reinforcement may be removed if so desired.
Practice Problem Q9: Weld Reinforcement

What is the ASME B31.1 maximum weld reinforcement for a girth welded pipe joint with a nominal
thickness of0.750 inch and design temperature of350°F?
a) 3/32 in.
b) 1/8 in.
c) 5/32 in.
d) 3/16 in.
e) 5/16 in.
Notebook Page 370

Repair Welding '11.127.4.1
Defect Removal (Du ring Fabrication) - 'll 127.4.1(A)
All defects in welds or base materials requiring repair shall be removed by:
• flame or arc gouging,

o grinding,
• chipping, or
• machining.
When a defect is removed but welding repair is unnecessary, the surface must be contoured to
eliminate any sharp notches or corners. The contoured surface must be reinspected by the same
means originally used for locating the defect.
Repair Welds (During Fabrication) - «JJ 127.4.1 (B)
Repair welds during fabrication shall:
• be made in accordance with a WPS using qualified welders or welding operators, recognizing
that the cavity t o be repair welded may differ in contour and dimension from a normal joint
preparation and may present different restraint conditions;
• use the types, extent, and methods of examination in accordance with Table 136.4,
Mandatory Minimum Nondestructive Examinations for Pressure Welds or Welds to
Pressure-Retaining Components;
• use as a minimum, the same examination method that revealed the defect in the original
weld; and
• use as a minimum for repairs to base material, the same examination method as required for
butt welds.
,.... .- - - ~ ~ - -
Practice Problem 01 0: Repair Welds
What examination technique shall be used for repairs to welds during ASME B31.1 piping
fabrication?
a) as required in the qualified WPS

b) as required in the design specification
c) as required by ASME Sec. IX
d) the appropriate method to detect any suspected internal defects
e) the same method that revealed the defect in the original weld
Notebook Page 371

Welding Procedure Specification Qualification <JI127.5
Qualification of the WPS to be used and of the performance of welders and welding operators shall
comply with the requirements of the ASME Section IX except as modified herein.
Certain materials listed in Appendix A do not appear in ASME Section IX P-Number listing in
QW/QB-422. Where these materials have been assigned P-Numbers in Appendix A, they may be
welded under this Code for nonboiler external piping only without separate qualification as if they
were listed in ASME Section IX.
Welding Responsibility 1! 127.5.2
Each employer is responsible for the welding performed by their organization and the pe1formance of
welders or welding operators employed by that organization.
Practice Problem 011: Welding Responsibilities

Who is responsible for ASME B31.1 piping welding done by the personnel and shall conduct the tests
required to qualify welding procedures, and to qualify or requalify welders and welding operators?
a) each employer
b) purchaser
c) jurisdiction
d) welding inspector
e) aandd
Notebook Page 372

Welding Preheat -n131
Minimum P reh eat R equirements IJI 131.1
The preheat requirements listed in B31.1, <J[131.1 are mandatory minimum values. 1[131.4 requires
that the minimum preheat for all materials shall be 50°F (10°C) unless stated otherwise for specific
P-Numbers.
Preh ea t Zone
The base metal temperat ure prior to welding shall be at or above th e specified minimum
temperature in all directions from the point of welding for a distance of 3 in. or 1.5 times the base
metal thickness (as defined in 1[131.4.1), whichever is greater.
The base metal temperature for t ack welds shall be at or above the specified minimum temperature
for a distance not less t han 1 in. in all directions from the point of welding.
Different P -Number Materials IJI 131.2
When welding two different P-Number materials, the minimum preheat temperature required must
be the higher temperature for the material to be welded.
Practice Problem 012: Preheating

For new ASME B31.1 pipe welding, wh at is the size of the preheat zone?
a) at least 1 in. beyond each edge of the weld

b) not less than 1 in. in all directions from the point of welding
c) 1 to 3 in. beyond each edge of the weld
d) in all directions from the point of welding for a dist ance of 3 in.
e) at least 2 in. beyond each edge of the weld

When two materials with different P-Nos. are welded according to ASME B31.1, what shall be the
minimum required preheat temperature?
a) 50°F
b ) 100°1<...
c) the average preheat temperature shall be used
d) the higher temperature for the material to be welded
e) the lower temperature for the material t o be welded
~ Codes and Standards Training Institute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 373

The following Examples and Practice Problem illustrate how to determine the preheat requirement
given a pipe material and size.
Example 014: Preheat Requirement

What is the B31.1 preheat requirement for 10 in. O.D., Schedule 140 (1.000 in.), ASTM A106/A106M
Grade B seamless piping material, when the ambient temperature is 0°F?
The P-No. for this material can be read from Table A-1.
Table A-1 Carbon Steel

Specified Specified
Minimum Minimum E
Spec. Nominal p. Tensile, Yueld, or
No. Grade Type or Class Composition No. Notes ksi ksi F
Seamless Pipe and Tube

A 53 A s c (2) 48 30 1.00
B s C- Mn (2) 60 35 1.00
A 106 A C- Si 1 (2) 48 30 1.00

B
c
C- Si
C- Si
CD
1
(2)
(2)
60
70
35
40
1.00
1.00
Since ASTM A 106/A 106M Grade B is a P-No. 1 and does not meet exceeds either of the
requirements in 131.4.2, as follows:
131.4.2 P-No. 1. 175°F (80°C) for material that has both a specified maximum carbon
content in excess of0.30% and a thickness at the joint in excess of 1 in. (25.0 mm).
Therefore, the preheat requirement is 50°F (10°C) in accordance with lj[l31.4.
Notebook Page 374

What is the B31.1 preheat requirement for 10 in. O.D.; Schedule 80 (0.594 in.); ASTM A 335/A 335M
Grade Pll seamless piping material?
Table A-2 Low and Intermediate Alloy Steel

Specified Specified
Minimum Minimum E
Spec. Nominal Tensile, Yield, or
No. Grade Type or Class Composition P·No. Notes ksl ksl F
A 199 TS 5Cr-%Mo 58 (1) 60 25 1.00

T9 9Cr-1Mo 58 (1) 60 25 1.00
A 199 T11 1%Cr-%Mo 4 (1) 60 25 1.00

T21 3Cr- 1Mo SA (1) 60 25 1.00
T22 2%Cr-1Mo SA (1)(17) 60 25 1.00
A 213 T2 t,tzcr-'l2 Mo 3 60 30 1.00

TS 5Cr-%Mo 58 60 30 1.00
TSb scr- % Mo- 1%SI 58 60 30 1.00
A 213 T5c 5Cr- 1/ 2 Mo-n 58 60 30 1.00

T9 9Cr-1Mo 58 60 30 1.00
T11 1%Cr-%Mo 4 60 30 1.00
A 213 T12 1Cr-Y2Mo 4 60 30 1.00

T21 3Cr-1Mo SA 60 30 1.00
T22 2%Cr- 1Mo SA (17) 60 30 1.00
T91 9Cr- 1Mo-V 15E (19) 85 60 1.00
T91 9Cr- 1Mo- V 15E (20) 85 60 1.00
A 333 3 3%Ni 98 (1) 65 35 1.00

4 ~ Cr-~Ni-Cu-AI 4 (l) 60 35 1.00
7 21,lzNI 9A (l) 65 35 1.00
9 2Ni- 1Cu 9A (1) 63 46 1.00
A 335 Pl c-1,lzMo 3 (2) 55 30 1.00

P2 1,lzcr- Y2Mo 3 55 30 1.00
PS 5Cr- 1,12Mo 58 60 30 1.00
P5b 5Cr-I,I2Mo-11,lzSi 58 60 30 1.00
A 335 PSc 5Cr-Y2Mo-n 58 60 30 1.00

P9 9Cr- 1Mo 58 60 30 1.00
P11 1% Cr- Vz Mo- SI
CD 60 30 1.00
A 335 P12 1Cr-%Mo 4 60 32 1.00

P21 3Cr- 1Mo SA 60 30 1.00
P22 2 t;. Cr-1Mo SA (17) 60 30 1.00
P91 9Cr- 1Mo-V 15E (19) 85 60 1.00
P91 9Cr- 1Mo- V 15E (20) 85 60 1.00
The preheat requirement is 250°F (120°C) as listed in 'J[131.4.4 for all P-No. 4 materials.
Notebook Page 375

Practice Problem Q16: Preheat Requirement
What is the B31.1 preheat requirement for NPS 10, Schedule 80 (0.594 in.), ASTM A 335/A 335M
Grade Pl seamless piping material when welding at an ambient temperature of 0°F?
a) 50°F
b) 150°F
c) 175°F
d) 200°F
e) 250°F
Notebook Page 376

Heat Treatment Requirements 1!331
9'[331.1.1 imposes the following heat treatment requirements:
1) Heat treatment shall be in accordance with the material groupings and thickness ranges in
Table 331.1.1 except as provided in 9'[331.2.1 and 9'[331.2.2.
2) Heat treatment to be used after production welding shall be specified in the WPS and shall
be used in qualifying the welding procedure.
3) The engineering design shall specify the examination and/or oth er production quality controls
(not less than the requirements of B31.3) to ensure that the fmal welds are of adequate quality.
4) Heat treatment for bending and forming shall be in accordance with 9'[332.4.
5) See Table 302.3.5 for special heat treatment requirements for longitudinal or spiral welds in
Elevated T emperature Fluid Service.
The following Example and Practice Problem illustrate how to determine the post-weld heat
treatment r equirement given a pipe material a nd size.
Notebook Page 377

Example 017: Post-Weld Heat Treatment Requirement
What are the ASME B31.1 PWHT requirements for 10 in. O.D., Schedule 140 (1.000 in.), ASTM
A106/A106M Grade B seamless piping material?

Specified Specified
Minim um Minimum E
Spec. Nominal p. Tensile, Yield, or
No. Grade Type or Class Composition No. Notes ksi ksl F
A 53 A s c 1 (2) 48 30 1.00
B s C- Mn 1 (2) 60 35 1.00
A 106 A C-Si 1 (2) 48 30 1.00

B C- Si CD (2) 60 35 1.00
c C- Si 1 (2) 70 40 1.00
The metal temperature range for a P-No. 1 material over thickness of 1.000 in. can be read from
Table132.

Specified Specified
Minimum Minimum E
Spec. Nominal p. Tensile, Yield, or
No. Grade Type or Class Composition No. Notes ksi ksi F
A 53 A s c (2) 48 30 1.00
B s C- Mn 1 (2) 60 35 1.00
A 106 A C-Si 1 (2) 48 30 1.00

B C-Si CD (2) 60 35 1.00
c C- Si 1 (2) 70 40 1.00
From Table 132, the PWHT metal temperature range is 1,100-1,200°F; the minimum holding time is
1 hour.
©Codes and Standards Traii ning Institute (CAST!)
Notebook Page 378

What are the ASME B31.1 PWHT requirements for 10 in. O.D., Schedule 80 (0.594 in.), ASTM A
335/A 335M Grade Pll seamless piping material?

Specified Specified
Minimum Minimum E
No. Grade Type or Class Composition P·NO. Notes ksi ksi F

A 199 TS 5Cr- '/2Mo SB (I) 60 25 1.00
T9 9Cr-1Mo SB (I) 60 25 1.00
A 199 Ttl 1'/.Cr-'/,Mo 4 (I) 60 25 1.00

T21 3Cr-1Mo SA (1) 60 25 1.00
T22 2'/.Cr- !Mo SA (1)(17) 60 25 1.00
A 213 T2 '/,Cr- Y,Mo 3 60 30 1.00

TS 5Cr- Y,Mo 56 60 30 1.00
TSb 5Cr-'/2 Mo-1'/,Si sa 60 30 1.00
A 213 TSc scr- '/2 Mo- n SB 60 30 1.00

T9 9Cr-1Mo 56 60 30 1.00
Ttl 1 ';.Cr- '/2 Mo 4 60 30 1.00
A213 Tl2 1Cr- 1/,Mo 4 60 30 1.00

T21 3Cr- 1Mo SA 60 30 1.00
T22 2';.Cr-1Mo SA (17) 60 30 1.00
T91 9Cr-1Mo-V 15E (19) 85 60 1.00
T91 9Cr- 1Mo- V I SE (20) 85 60 1.00
A 333 3'/,Ni 98 (1) 65 35 1.00

4 lj.Cr- ';.Ni- Cu- AI 4 (I) 60 35 1.00
7 2'/,Ni 9A (1) 65 35 1.00
9 2Ni-1Cu 9A (I) 63 46 1.00
A 335 P1 c-'/,Mo {2) 55 30 1.00

P2 '/2 Cr-
'/,Mo 3 55 30 1.00
PS 5Cr-'/,Mo 58 60 30 1.00
PSb scr- Y,Mo-1 '/,Si 58 60 30 1.00
A 335 PSc scr-Y, Mo-TI 58 60 30 1.00

P9 9Cr- 1Mo 58 60 30 1.00
Pit 1'/.Cr- '/,Mo-SI
CD 60 30 1.00
A 335 Pt2 1Cr- '/2 Mo 4 60 32 1.00

P21 3Cr- 1Ma SA 60 30 1.00
P22 2'/.Cr-!Mo SA (17) 60 30 1.00
P91 9Cr- 1Mo-V tSE (19) 85 60 1.00
P9t 9Cr- 1Mo-V 1SE (20) 85 60 1.00
The metal temperature range for a P-No. 4 material with a thickness of 0.594 in. can be read from
Table 132 (or from Appendix D of ASME IX).
Table 132 Postweld Heat Treatment (Cont'd)

P-Number Holding Time Based on Nominal Thickness
From Up to 2 in. Over 2 in .
Appendix A (SO mm) (50 mm)
P·No. 4 2 hr plus 15 min for each

Gr. Nos. 1, 2 additional inch (25 mm) over
2 in. (50 mm)
From Table 132 for P-No. 4, the PWHT metal temperature range is 1,200-1,300°F; the minimum
holding time is 0.594 inches x 60 minutes/inch = 36 minutes.
Notebook Page 379

Practice Problem 019: Post-Weld Heat Treatment Requirement
335/A 335M Grade P22 seamless piping material?
a) none required
b) metal temperature range is 1,300-1,400°F; the minimum holding time is 36 minutes
c) metal temperature range is 1,300°F; the minimum holding time is 2 hours
d) metal temperature range is 1,200°F; the minimum holding time is 2 hours
e) metal temperature range is 1200-1400°F, the minimum holding time is 4 hours
Notebook Page 380

Alternative Postweld Heat Treatment Requirements For Carbon and Low Alloy
Steels • Table 132.1
Table 132.1 presents alternative lower temperatures with corresponding longer times at
temperature (see Note (1)). Postweld heat treatment temperatures of 150°F or 200°F lower than
permitted in Tables 132 are only permitted for P-No. 1 Gr. Nos. 1 and 2 materials (see Note (2)).
Example 020: Table UCS-56.1 Alternative Heat Treatment of Carbon and low Alloy Steels
What is the minimum ASME B31.1 PWHT holding time for a 6 in. thick nozzle attached to a
pressure vessel made from ASME SA-516/SA-516M grade 70 and PWHT at 900°F?
Since SA-516 grade 70 is listed in ASME Section IX, QW-422, as a P-No. 1 Group 1, C-Mn-Si steel,
then Table 132.1 applies. The minimum required temperature for P-No. 1 Group 2 material in Table
132 is 1100°F.
Table 132 Postweld Heat Treatment

Holding Time Based on Nominal Thickness
P-Number Holding
From Temperature Up to 2 ln. Over 2 in.
Appendix A Range, °F ("C) ~om~ ~o m~
P-No. 1 1 hr/in. (25 mm), 2 hr plus 15 min for each

Gr. Nos. 1, 2, 3 15 min minimum additional inch (25 mm) over
2 in. (50 mm)
Since the minimum holding temperature in Table 132 is 1100°F:

then the adjusted holding time = 1100°F - 900°F
=200°F
From Table 132.1: Table 132.1 Alternate Postweld Heat Treatment
Requirements for Carbon and Low Alloy Steels
minimum holding time for a decrease of 200°F: Decrease In Temperatures
=20 hours + 15 minutes for each inch above 1 in. Below Minimum Specified
Tem perature,
Minimum Holding Time at
Decreased Temperature,
=20 hours+ (6 in.- 1 in.) (15 minutes) •F (•c) hr [Note (1)]
= 20 hours+ (5 in. x 15 minutes) 50 (28) 2

=21.25 hour 100 (56)
1 SO (84) (Note (2)] 10
4
200 (112) (Note (2))

®
GENERAL NOTE: Postweld heat treatment at lower temperatures for
longer periods of time, in accordance with this Table, shall be used
only where permitted In Table 132.
NOTES:
(1) Times shown apply to thicknesses up to 1 in. (2 5 mm). Add
15 min/in. (15 min/25 mm) of thickness for thicknesses
greater than 1 in. (25 mm).
(2) A decrease of more than too•F (56°() below the minimum
specified temperature is allowable only for P-No. 1, Gr. Nos. 1
and 2 materials.
Notebook Page 381

Notebook Page 382

Solutions
For ASME 831 .1 Practice Problems
Notebook Page 383

Answer Key - ASME 831.1 Practice Problems
Practice
Problem Answer Reference Paragraph
Q1: c 127.2.1
Q2: d 127.2.2(A)
Q3: c 127.3(B)
Q4: c 127.3(D)
Q5: b 127.3(E)
Q6: d 127.4.1(B)
Q7: b 127.4.1(C)
Q8: d 127.4.5
Q9: d Table 127.4.2
Q10: e 127.4.1(B)
Qll: a 127.5.2
Q12: d 131.1
Q13: d 131.2
Q16: c 131.4.3
Q19: b Table 132
Notebook Page 384

Practice Problem Q16: Preheat Requirement [SOLUTION]
What is t he B31.1 preheat requirement for NPS 10, Schedule 80 (0.594 in.), ASTM A 335/A 335M
Grade P1 seamless piping material when welding at an ambient temperature of ooF?
The P-No. for t his material can be read from Table A-2.
Specified Specified
Minimum Minimum E
No. Grade Type or Class Composition P· No. Notes ksi ksi F
A 199 TS 5Cr-%Mo SB (1) 60 25 1.00

T9 9Cr- 1Mo 5B (1) 60 25 1.00
A 199 Ttl 1%Cr-%Mo 4 (1) 60 25 1.00

T21 3Cr- 1Mo SA (1) 60 25 1.00
T22 2%Cr-1Mo SA <tl(ln 60 25 1.00
A 213 T2 %Cr-% Mo 3 60 30 1.00

TS 5Cr- % Mo 58 60 30 1.00
T5b 5Cr- Y2 Mo- 1% Si 58 60 30 1.00
A 213 T5c 5Cr-%Mo-n 58 60 30 1.00

T9 9Cr- 1Mo 58 60 30 1.00
T11 t % Cr-Y2 Mo 4 60 30 1.00
A 213 T1 2 1Cr-%Mo 4 60 30 1.00

T21 3Cr- 1Mo SA 60 30 1.00
T22 2%Cr- 1Mo SA (17) 60 30 1.00
T91 9Cr-1Mo-V 15E (1 9) 85 60 1.00
T91 9Cr- 1Mo- V 15E (20) 85 60 1.00
A 333 3 3% Ni 98 (1) 65 35 1.00

4 % Cr-%NT-Cu-At 4 (1) 60 35 1.00
7 2 1/ 2 Ni 9A (1) 65 35 1.00
9 2Ni - 1Cu 9A (1) 63 46 1.00
A 335 P1
P2
c-% Mo
%Cr-lfz Mo
CD
3
(2) 55
55
30
30
1.00
1.00
P5 5Cr-liz Mo 58 60 30 1.00
P5b 5Cr- 'l; Mo-l 'i;Si SB 60 30 1.00
A 335 PSc 5Cr-'l; Mo-Ti 5B 60 30 1.00

P9 9Cr- 1Mo 5B 60 30 1.00
P11 t%Cr- Y2 Mo-Si 4 60 30 1.00
A 335 P1 2 1Cr-%Mo 4 60 32 1.00

P21 3Cr-1Mo SA 60 30 1.00
P22 2%Cr-1Mo SA (17) 60 30 1.00
P91 9Cr-1Mo-V 15E (19) 85 60 1.00
P91 9Cr- 1Mo- V 15E (20) 85 60 1.00
The preheat requirement is 175°F (80°C) as listed in ~1 31.4.3 for P-No. 3 materials with a thickness
at the joint in excess of 1/2 inches.
Notebook Page 385

Practice Problem 019: Preheat Requirement [SOLUTION]
335/A 335M Grade P22 seamless piping material?
Table A-2 low and Intermediate Alloy Steel

Specified Specified
Minimum Minimum E
No. Grade Type or Class Composition P-No. Notes ksi ksi F

A 199 TS SCr- ',hMo 58 (1) 60 25 1.00
T9 9Cr- 1Mo 58 (1) 60 25 1.00
A 199 Tll t t,I,.Cr- 'hMo 4 (1) 60 25 1.00

T21 3Cr- 1Mo SA (1) 60 25 1.00
T22 2%Cr-1 Mo SA (1)(17) 60 25 1.00
A 213 T2 'hCr- 'h Mo 3 60 30 1 .00

TS SCr- 'hMo 58 60 30 1 .00
TSb 5Cr- 1J2 Mo- 1 Y2 Si 58 60 30 1.00
A 213 T5c scr- 'hMo- n 58 60 30 1 .00

T9 9Cr-1 Mo 58 60 30 1.00
Tll tt,I,.Cr- 'h Mo 4 60 30 1.00
A 213 Tl2 lCr- 'h Mo 4 60 30 1 .00

T21 3Cr-1 Mo SA 60 30 1.00
T22 2 t,I,. Cr- 1Mo SA (1 7) 60 30 1.00
T91 9Cr-1Mo-V lSE (19) 85 60 1.00
T91 9Cr-1Mo-V lSE (20) 85 60 1.00
A 333 3',hNi 98 (1) 65 35 1.00

4 %Cr-'i4Ni-Cu-Al 4 (1) 60 35 1.00
7 2'hNi 9A (1) 65 35 1.00
9 2Ni- 1Cu 9A (1) 63 46 1.00
A 335 Pl C- ',hMo 3 (2) 55 30 1.00

P2 ',h cr- 'h Mo 3 55 30 1.00
P5 5Cr-',h Mo SB 60 30 1.00
PSb SCr- 'h Mo- l ',hSi 58 60 30 1.00
A 335 PSc scr-'h Mo-Ti 58 60 30 1.00

P9 9Cr- 1Mo 58 60 30 1.00
P11 1% Cr- 1J2 Mo- Si 4 60 30 1.00
A 335 P12 1Cr- 'h Mo 4 60 32 1.00

P21 3Cr-1Mo SA 60 30 1.00
P22 2 1/ 4 Cr- 1Mo @ (17) 60 30 1.00
P91 9Cr- 1Mo- V 15E (19) 85 60 1.00
P91 9Cr-1 Mo- V 15E (20) 85 60 1.00
Notebook Page 386

~·· -
Practice Problem 019: Preheat Requirement (continued) [SOLUTION]
The metal temperature range for a P-No. 5A material with a thickness of 0.594 in. can be read from
Table 132 (or from Appendix D of ASME IX).
Table 132 Postwetd Heat Treatment (Cont'd)

P·Number Holding
From Temperature Up to 2 in. Over 2 in.
Appendix A Range, °F (°C) (50 mm) (50 mm)
P·No. SA 2 hr plus 15 min for each

Gr. No. 1 additional inch (25 mm) over
2 in. (50 mm)
From Table 132 for P-No. 5A, the PWHT metal temperature range is 1,300-1,400°F; the minimum
holding t ime is 0.594 inches x 60 minutes/inch = 36 minutes.
©Codes and St andards Training Institute (CAST!)
Notebook Page 387

Notebook Page 388

FOREWORD
The general philosophy underlying this Power Piping Code is to parallel those provisions of
Section t, Power Boilers, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, as they can be applied
to power p ip ing systems. The Allowable Stress Values for power pip ing are generally consistent
w ith those assigned for power boilers. This Code is more conserva tive than some other piping
codes, refl ecting the need for long service life and maximum reliability in power plant installations.
The Power Piping Code as currently written does not differentiate among the design, fabrication,
and erection requirements for critical and noncritical pipi ng systems, except for certain stress
calcula tions and manda tory nondestructive tests of welds for heavy wall, high temperature
applications. The problem involved is to try to reach agreement on how to evaluate criticality,
and to avoid the inference that noncritical systems do not requi re competence in design, fabrica tion,
and erection. Someday such levels of quality may be defi nable, so that the need for the many
different p iping codes w ill be overcome.
There are many instances where the Code serves to warn a designer, fabricator, or erector
against possible pitfalls; but the Code is not a handbook, and cannot substitute for education,
experience, and sound engineering judgment.
Nonmandatory Appendices are included in the Code. Each contains information on a specific
subject, and is maintained current with the Code. Although written in mandatory language, these
Appendices are offered for application at the user's discretion.
The Code never intentionally puts a ceiling limit on conservatism. A designer is free to specify
more rigid requirements as he feels they may be justified. Conversely, a designer who is capable
of a more rigorous analysis than is specified in the Code may justify a less conservative design,
and still satisfy the basic intent of the Code.
The Power Pip ing Committee strives to keep abreast of the current technological improvemen ts
in new materia ls, fabrication practices, and testing techniques; and endeavors to keep the Code
updated to permit the use of acceptable new developments.
vi
Copyright© 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. &
Notebook Page 390
INTRODUCTION (10)
The ASME B31 Code for Pressure Piping consists of It is the owner's responsibility to select the Cod e
a number of individually published Sections, each an Section that most nearly applies to a proposed piping
American National Standard, under the direction of installation. Factors to be considered by the owner
ASME Committee B31, Code for Pressure Piping. include limitations of the Code Section, jurisdictional
Rules for each Section have been developed consider- requirements, and the applicability of other codes and
ing the need for application of specific requirements for standards. All applicable requirements of the selected
various types of pressure piping. Applications consid- Code Section shall be met. For some installations, more
ered for each Code Section include than one Code Section may apply to different parts of the
installation. The owner is also responsible for imposing
831.1 Power Piping: piping typically found in elec-
tric power generating stations, in industrial requirements supplementary to those of the selected
and institutional plants, geothermal heating Code Section, if necessary, to assure safe piping for the
systems, and central and district heating and proposed installation.
cooling systems Certain piping within a facility may be subject to other
B31.3 Process Piping: piping typically found in codes and standards, including but not limited to
petroleum refineries; chemical, pharmaceuti- - ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III:
cal, textile, paper, semiconductor, and cryo- nuclear power piping
genic plants; and related processing plants - ANSI Z223.1 National Fuel Gas Code: piping for
and terminals fuel gas from the point of delivery to the connection of
B31 .4 Pipeline Transportation Systems for Liquid each fuel utilization device
Hydrocarbons and Other Liquids: piping - NFPA Fire Protection Standards: fire protection sys-
transporting products that are predominately tems using water, carbon dioxide, halon, foam, dry
liquid between plants and terminals and chemical, and wet chemicals
within terminals, pumping, regulating, and - NFPA 99 Health Care Facilities: medical and labora-
metering s tations tory gas systems
B31.5 Refrigeration Piping: piping for refrigerants - NFPA 8503 Standard for Pulverized Fuel Systems:
and secondary coolants piping for pulverized coal from the coal mills to the
B31.8 Gas Transportation and Distribution Piping burners
Systems: piping transporting products that - building and plumbing codes, as applicable, for pota-
are predominately gas between sources and ble hot and cold water, and for sewer and drain systems
terminals, including compressor, regulating, The Code sets forth engineering requirements deemed
and metering stations; and gas gathering necessary for safe design and construction of pressure
pipelines piping. While safety is the basic consideration, this factor
B31.9 Building Services Piping: piping typically alone will not necessarily govern the final specifications
found in industrial, institutional, commercial, for any piping system. The designer is cautioned that
and public buildings, and in multi-unit resi- the Code is not a design handbook; it does not eliminate
dences, which does not require the range of the need for the designer or for competent engineering
sizes, pressures, and temperatures covered in judgment.
B31.1 To the greatest possible extent, Code requirements for
B31.11 Slurry Transportation Piping Systems: piping design are stated in terms of basic design principles and
transporting aqueous slurries between plants formulas. These are supplemented as necessary with
and term.inals and within terminals, pump- specific requirements to ensure uniform application of
ing, and regulating stations principles and to guide selection and application of pip-
B31.12 Hydrogen Piping and Pipelines: piping in ing elements. The Code prohibits designs and practices
gaseous and liquid hydrogen service, and known to be unsafe and contains warnings where cau-
pipelines in gaseous hydrogen service tion, but not prohibition, is warranted.
This is the B31.1 Power Piping Code Section. Hereafter, The specific design requirements of the Code usually
in this Introduction an d in the tex t of this Code revolve around a simplified engineering approach to a
Section B31.1, where the word Code is used without subject. It is intended that a designer capable of applying
specific identification, it means this Code Section. more complete and rigorous analysis to special or
xi
Copyright © 20 10 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ~
unusual problems shall have latitude in the develop- issued periodically. New editions are published at inter-
ment of such designs and the evaluation of complex or vals of two to five years.
combined stresses. In such cases the designer is responsi- When no Section of the ASME Code for Pressure
ble for demonstrating the validity of his approach. Piping, specifically covers a piping system, at the user's
This Code Section includes the following: discretion, he/she may select any Section determined
(a) references to acceptable material specifications to be generally applicable. However, it is cautioned that
and component standards, including dimensional supplementary requirements to the Section chosen may
requirements and pressure-temperature ratings be necessary to provide for a safe piping system for
(b) requirements for design of components and the intended application. Technical limitations of the
assemblies, including pipe supports various Sections, legal requirements, and possible appli-
(c) requirements and data for evaluation and limita- cability of other codes or standards are some of the
tion of stresses, reactions, and movements associated factors to be considered by the user in determining the
with pressure, temperature changes, and other forces applicability of any Section of this Code.
(d) guidance and limitations on the selection and
The Committee has established an orderly procedure
application of materials, components, and joining to consider requests for interpretation and revision of
methods Code requirements. To receive consideration, inquiries
must be in writing and must give full particulars (see
(e) requirements for the fabrication, assembly, and
Mandatory Appendix H covering preparation of techni-
erection of piping
cal inquiries). The Committee will not respond to inquir-
(j) requirements for examination, inspection, and
ies requesting assignment of a Code Section to a piping
testing of piping installation.
(g) requirements for operation and maintenance of
The approved reply to an inquiry will be sent directly
piping systems to the inquirer. In addition, the question and reply will
It is intended that this Edition of Code Section 631.1 be published as part of an Interpretation Supplement
not be retroactive. Unless agreement is specifically made issued to the applicable Code Section.
between contracting parties to use another issue, or the A Case is the prescribed form of reply to an inquiry
regulatory body having jurisdiction imposes the use of when study indicates that the Code wording needs clari-
another issue, the latest Edition and Addenda issued at fication or when the reply modifies existing require-
least 6 mo prior to the original contract date for the first ments of the Code or grants permission to use new
phase of activity covering a piping system or systems materials or alternative constructions. The Case will be
shall be the governing document for all design, materi- published as part of a Case Supplement issued to the
als, fabrication, erection, examination, and testing for applicable Code Section.
the piping until the completion of the work and initial The ASME B31 Standards Committee took action to
operation. eliminate Code Case expiration dates effective
Users of this Code are cautioned against making use September 2t 2007. This means that all Code Cases in
of revisions without assurance that they are acceptable effect as of this date will remain available for use until
to the proper authorities in the jurisdiction where the annulled by the ASME B31 Standards Committee.
piping is to be installed. Materials are listed in the Stress Tables only when
Code users will note that clauses in the Code are not sufficient usage in piping within the scope of the Code
necessarily numbered consecutively. Such discontinu- has been shown. Materials may be covered by a Case.
ities result from following a common outline, insofar as Requests for listing shall include evidence of satisfactory
practicable, for all Code Sections. In this way, corres- usage and specific data to permit establishment of allow-
ponding material is correspondingly numbered in most able stresses, maximum and minimum temperature lim-
Code Sections, thus facilitating reference by those who its, and other restrictions. Additional criteria can be
have occasion to use more than one Section. found in the guidelines for addition of new materials
The Code is under the direction of ASME Committee in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section II
631, Code for Pressure Piping, which is organized and and Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix B. (To develop
operates under procedures of The American Society of usage and gain experience, unlisted materials may be
Mechanical Engineers which have been accredited by used in accordance with para. 123.1.)
the American National Standards Institute. The Requests for interpretation and suggestions for revi-
Committee is a continuing one, and keeps all Code sion should be addressed to the Secretary, ASME B31
Sections current with new developments in materials, Committee, Three Park Avenue, New York, NY
construction, and industrial practice. Addenda are 10016-5990.
xii
Copyright© 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ~
ASME 631.1·2010
Chapter V
Fabrication, Assembly, and Erection
127 WELDING (F) For nonferrous metals, the weld metal shall be
127.1 General that recommended by the manufacturer of the nonfer-
rous metal or by industry associations for that metal.
Piping systems shall be constructed in accordance with (G) For unusual materials or combinations of materi-
the requirements of this Chapter and of materials that als, the design engineer shall specify the weld metal that
have been manufactured in accordance with the require- is required. In addition, when a base metal is selected
ments of Chapter IV. These requirements apply to all primarily for its corrosion resistance, and the media is
fabrication, assembly, and erection operations, whether aggressive towards the material, the use of weld metal
performed in a shop or at a construction site. The follow- that is electrochemically more noble than the base metal
ing applies essentially to the welding of ferrous materi- is recommended to ensure that selective corrosion of the
als. The welding of aluminum, copper, etc., requires weld metal does not occur (e.g., when using type 316L
different preparations and procedures. base metal in a strong acid, the use of 317L weld metal
127.1.1 The welding processes that are to be used is preferred).
under this part of this Code shall meet all the test require-
127.2.2 Backing Rings. Backing rings, when used,
ments of Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure
shall conform to the following requirements:
Vessel Code.
(A) Ferrous Rings. Ferrous metal backing rings that
127.2 Material become a permanent part of the weld shall be made
from material of weldable quality, compatible with the
127.2.1 Electrodes and Filler Metal. Welding elec-
base material and the sulfur content shall not exceed
trodes and filler metal, including consumable inserts,
0.05%.
shall conform to the requirements of the ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section II, Part C. An electrode (A .l) Backin g rings may be of the continuous
or filler metal not conforming to the above may be used machined or split band type.
provided the WPS and the welders and welding opera- (A.2) If two abutting surfaces are to be welded to
tors who will follow the WPS have been qualified as a third member used as a backing ring and one or two
required by ASME Section IX. Unless otherwise speci- of the three members are ferritic and the other member
fied by the designer, welding electrodes and filler metals or members are austenitic, the satisfactory use of such
used shall produce weld metal that complies with the materials shall be determined by the WPS qualified as
following: required in para. 127.5.
(A) The nominal tensile strength of the weld metal (A.3) Backing strips used at longitudinal welded
shall equal or exceed the minimum specified tensile joints shall be removed.
strength of the base metals being joined. (8) Nonferrous and Nonmetallic Rings. Backing rings
(B) If base metals of different tensile strengths are to of nonferrous or nonmetallic materials m ay be used for
be joined, the nominal tensile strength of the weld metal backing provided they are included in a WPS as required
shall equal or exceed the minimum specified tensile in para. 127.5. Nonmetallic or nonfusing rings shall be
strength of the weaker of the two. removed.
(C) The nominal chemical analysis of the weld metal
127.2.3 Consumable Inserts. Consumable inserts
shall be similar to the nominal chemical analysis of the
may be used provided they are made from material
major alloying elements of the base metal [e.g., 2~% Cr,
compatible with the chemical and phys ical properties
1% Mo steels should be joined using 2~% Cr, 1% Mo
of the base material. Qualification of th e WPS shall be
filler metals; see also para. 124.2(D)].
as required by para. 127.5.
(D) If base metals of different chemical analysis are
being joined, the nominal chemical analysis of the weld
127.3 Preparation for Welding
metal shall be similar to either base metal or an interme-
diate composition, except as specified below for austen- (A) End Preparation
itic steels joined to ferritic steels. (A.l) Oxygen or arc cutting is acceptable only if
(E) When austenitic steels are joined to ferritic s teels, the cut is reasonably s mooth and true, and all slag is
the weld metal shall have an austenitic s tructure. cleaned from the flame cut surfaces. Discoloration that
77
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ~
ASME 831.1-2010
Fig. 127.3 Butt Welding of Piping Components With the socket to the maximum depth and then withdrawn
Internal Misalignment approximately 1,)6 in. (2.0 mm) away from contact
between the end of the pipe and the shoulder of the
socket [see Figs. 127.4.4(8) and (C)]. In sleeve-type joints
without internal shoulder, there shall be a distance of
i• • approximately 1;6 in. (2.0 mm) between the butting ends
L 1/ in. {2.0 mm) or less
of the pipe or tube.
16
The fit between the socket and the pipe shall conform
to applicable standards for socket weld fittings and in
no case shall the inside diameter of the socket or sleeve
exceed the outside diameter of the pipe or tube by more
than 0.080 in. (2.0 mm).
127.4 Procedure
L Greater than 1/
16 in. (2.0 mm) 127.4.1 General
(A) Qualjfication of the WPS to be used, and of the
performance of welders and operators, is required, and
may remain on the flame cut surface is not considered shall comply with the requirements of para. 127.5.
to be detrimental oxidation. (8) No welding shall be done if there is impingement
(A.2) Butt-welding end preparation dimensions
of rain, snow, sleet, or high wind on the weld area.
contained in ASME 816.25 or any other end preparation (C) Tack welds permitted to remain in the finished
that meets the WPS are acceptable. weld shall be made by a qualified welder. Tack welds
(A.3) If piping component ends are bored, such bor-
made by an unqualified welder shall be removed. Tack
ing shall not result in the finished wall thickness after welds that remain shall be made with an electrode and
welding less than the minimum design thickness. Where WPS that is the same as or equivalent to the electrode
necessary, weld metal of the appropriate analysis may and WPS to be used for the first pass. The stopping and
be deposited on the inside or outside of the piping com- starting ends shall be prepared by grinding or other
ponent to provide sufficient material for machining to means so that they can be satisfactorily incorporated
insure satisfactory fi tting of rings. into the final weld. Tack welds that have cracked shall
be removed.
(A.4) If the piping component ends are upset, they
(D) CAUTION: Arc strikes outside the area of the
may be bored to allow for a completely recessed backing
ring, provided the remaining net thickness of the fin- intended weld should be avoided on any base metal.
ished ends is not less than the minimum design 127.4.2 Girth Butt Welds
thickness. (A) Girth butt welds shall be complete penetration
(B) Cleaning. StLrfaces for welding shall be clean and welds and shall be made with a single vee, double vee,
shall be free from paint, oil, rust, scale, or other material or other suitable type of groove, with or without backing
that is detrimental to welding. rings or consumable inserts. The depth of the weld mea-
(C) Alignment. The inside diameters of piping com- sured between the inside surface of the weld preparation
ponents to be butt welded shall be aligned as accurately and the outside surface of the pipe shall not be less than
as is practicable within existing commercial tolerances the minimum thickness required by Chapter II for the
on diameters, wall thicknesses, and out-of-roundness. particular size and wall of pipe used.
Alignment shall be preserved during welding. The inter- (8) To avoid abrupt transitions in the contour of the
nal misalignment of the ends to be joined shall not finished weld, the requirements of (8.1) through (B.4)
exceed Yt6 in. (2.0 mm) unless the piping design specifi- below shall be met.
cally states a different allowable misalignment. (8.1) When components with different outside
When the internal misalignment exceeds the allow- diameters or wall thicknesses are welded together, the
able, it is preferred that the component with the wall welding end of the component with the larger outside
extending internally be internally trimme d per diameter shall fall within the envelope defined by solid
Fig. 127.3. However, trimming shall result in a piping lines in Fig. 127.4.2. The weld shall form a gradual transi-
component thickness not less than the minimum design tion not exceeding a slope of 30 deg from the smaller
thickness, and the change in contour shall not exceed to the larger diameter component. This condition may
30 deg (see Fig. 127.3). be met by adding welding filler material, if necessary,
(D) Spacing. The root opening of the joint shall be as beyond what would otherwise be the edge of the weld.
given in the WPS. (8.2) When both components to be welded (other
(£) Socket Weld Assembly. In assembly o{ the joint than pipe to pipe) have a transition from a thicker section
before welding, the pipe or tube shall be inserted into to the weld end preparation, the included angle between
78
Copyright© 2010 by the American Society ofMechanical Engineers. ~
Notebook Page 394 No reproduction may be made of this material without w ritten consent of ASME. ~
ASME 831.1-2010
Fig. 127.4.2 Welding End Transition - Maximum Envelope
Outside
Rad ius of at least O.OStm
30 deg max. See Note (2)
I
I
I
I
I
I
Component or fitting
See Note (1) _ / \
I
I
I
\
\
\
'
Max imum slope 1:3
Radius of at least O.OStm
2tm (m in.)
Inside
Transit io n region
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) The va lue of tm is w hichever of the following is applicable:
(1) as defined in para. 104.1.2(A)
(2) th e minimum ordered wall thickness of th e cylindrical weld ing end of a component or fitting (or the th inner of the two) when the
joint is between two components
(b) The maximum envelope is defined by solid lines.
NOTES:
(1) Weld is shown for illustration only.
(2) The we ld transition and weld reinforcement shall comply with paras. 127.4.2(B) and (C.2) and may be outside th e maximum envelope.
(3) The maximum th ickness at the end of the com pon ent is
(a) the greater of (tm + 0.15 in.) or 1.15tm when ordered on a minimum wa ll basis
(b) the greater of (trn + 0.15 in.) or l.lOtnom when ordered on a nominal wall basis
79
Copyright© 20 10 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ~.
ASME 831.1-2010
the surface of the weld and the surface of either of the Fillet welds may vary from convex to concave. The size
components shall not be less than 150 deg. Refer to para. of a fillet weld is determined as shown in Fig. 127.4.4(A).
119.3(8) for additional concerns related to this design. Typical minimum fillet weld details for slip-on flanges
(8.3) When welding pipe to pipe, the surface of the and socket-welding components are shown in
weld shall, as a minimum, be flush with the outer surface Figs. 127.4.4(8) and (C).
of the pipe, except as permitted in para. 127.4.2(8.4).
12 7.4 . 5 Seal Welds . Where seal welding of
(8.4) For welds made without the addition of filler
threaded joints is performed, threads shall be entirely
metal, concavity shall be limited to ~2 in. (1 mm) below
covered by the seal weld. Seal welding shall be done by
the outside surface of the pipe, but shall not encroach
qualified welders.
upon minimum required thickness.
(C) As-welded surfaces are permitted; however, the 127.4.8 Welded Branch Connections
surface of welds shall be sufficiently free from coarse (A) Welded branch connections shall be made with
ripples, grooves, overlaps, abrupt ridges, and valleys to full penetration welds, except as allowed in para.
meet the following: 127.4.8(F). Figures 127.4.8(A), (B), and (C) show typical
(C.1) The surface condition of the finished welds details of branch connections with and without added
shall be suitable for the proper interpretation of radio- reinforcement. No attempt has been made to show all
graphic and other nondestructive examinations when acceptable types of construction and the fact that a cer-
nondestructive examinations are required by tain type of construction is illustrated does not indicate
Table 136.4. In those cases where there is a question that it is recommended over other types not illustrated.
regarding the surface condition on the interpretation of (B) Figure 127.4.8(0) shows basic types of weld (10)
a radiographic film, the fi lm shall be compared to the attachments used in the fabrication of branch connec-
actual weld surface for interpretation and determination tions. The location and minimum size of these attach-
of acceptability. ment welds shall conform to the requirements of para.
(C.2) Reinforcements are permitted in accordance 127.4.8. Welds shall be calculated in accordance with
with Table 127.4.2. para. 104.3.1 but shall not be less than the sizes shown
(C.3) Undercuts shall not exceed ~2 in. (1.0 mrn) in Fig. 127.4.8(0).
and shall not encroach on the minimum required section The notations and symbols used in this paragraph,
thickness. Fig. 127.4.8(0), and Fig. 127.4.8(E) are as follows:
(C.4) If the surface of the weld requires grinding t, the smaller of~ in. (6.0 mm) or 0.7t11h
to meet the above cri teria, care shall be taken to avoid tmin the smaller of tnh or fur
reducing the weld or base material below the minimum fuv = nominal thickness of branch wall, in. (mm)
required thickness. t111r = nominal thickness of header wall, in. (mrn)
(C.5) Concavity on the root side of a single welded fur nominal thickness of reinforcing element (ring
circumferential butt weld is permitted when the or saddle), in. (mm)
resulting thickness of the weld is at least equal to the
(C) Figure 127.4.8(F) shows branch connections made (tO)
thickness of the thinner member of the two sections
being joined and the contour of the concavity is smooth by welding half couplings or adapters directly to the
without sharp edges. The internal condition of the root run pipe.
surface of a girth weld, which has been examined by Figure 127.4.8(E) shows branch connections using spe-
radiography, is acceptable only when there is a gradual cifically reinforced branch outlet fittings welded directly
change in the density, as indicated in the radiograph. to the run pipe. These branch connection fittings, half
If a girth weld is not designated to be examined by couplings, or adapters, which abut the outside surface
radiography, a visual examination may be performed at of the run wall, or which are inserted through an opening
welds that are readily accessible. cut in the run wall, shall have opening and branch con-
tour to provide a good fit and shall be attached by means
127.4.3 Longitudinal Butt Welds. Longitudinal butt of full penetration groove welds except as otherwise
welds not covered by the applicable material specifica- permitted in (F) below.
tions listed in Table 126.1 shall meet the requirements The full penetration groove welds shall be finished
for girth butt welds in para. 127.4.2. For longitudinal with cover fillet welds and meet the requirements of
welds and spiral welds in pipe intended for sustained para. 104. The cover fillet welds shall have a minimum
operation in the creep range (see paras. 104.1.1 and 123.4, throat dimension not less than that shown in
and Table 102.4.7), any welding using the SAW process Fig. 127.4.8(E) or Fig. 127.4.8(F), as applicable.
shall use a flux with a basicity index~ 1.0. (D) Tn branch connections having reinforcement pads
127.4.4 Fillet Welds. In making fillet welds, the or saddles, the reinforcement shall be attached by welds
weld metal shaH be deposited in such a way as to secure at the outer edge and at the branch periphery as follows:
adequate penetration into the base metal at the root of (0.1) If the weld joining the added reinforcement
the weld. to the branch is a full penetration groove weld, it shall
80
Copyright © 20 I 0 by the American Society ofMechanical Engineers. ~
ASME 831.1-2010
Table 127.4.2 Reinforcement of Girth and Longitudinal Butt Welds

Maximum Thickness of Reinforcement
for Design Temperature
> 7so•F 350°F-7 50°F < 3so•F
(4oo•c) (175°C-400°C) (17 s•c)
Thickness of Base Metal,
in. (mm) in. mm in. mm in. mm
Up to %(3.0), incl. V16 2.0 2.5 %6 5.0
Over Ya to 3,t; 6 (3.0 to 5.0), incl. Yt6 2.0 3.0 %6 5.0
Over ~ 6 to t;2 (5.0 to 13.0), incl. Yt6 2.0 4.0 %6 5.0
Over 1h to 1 (13.0 to 25.0), incl. 3/32 2.5 %6 5.0 %6 5.0

Over 1 to 2 (25.0 to 50.0), incl. Ya 3.0 % 6.0 % 6.0
Over 2 (50.0) %2 4.0 The greater of % in. (6 mm) or Ya times
the wi dth of the weld in inches (millimeters).
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) For double welded butt joints, this limitation on reinfo rcement given above shall apply separately to both inside and outside surfaces
of the join t.
(b) For single welded butt joints, the reinforcement limits given above shall apply to the outside surface of the joint only.
(c) The thickness of weld reinforcement shall be based on the thi ckness of the th inner of the materials being joined.
(d) The we ld rein fo rcemen t th icknesses shall be determined from th e higher of the abutting surfaces involved.
(e) Weld reinforcement may be removed if so desired.
81
Copyright © 20 I0 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ~
ASME B31.1·2010
Fig. 127.4.4(A) Fillet Weld Size
weld
(a) Convex Equal leg (b) Concave Equal leg
(c) Convex Unequal leg (d) Concave Unequal leg

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) The "size" of an equal leg fi llet weld shall be described by the leg length of the larg est
inscribed isoceles tri angle.
(b) The "size" of an unequal leg fillet weld shall be described using both leg lengths and t heir
location on the members to be joined.
(c) Angle 9, as noted in the above figures, may vary from the 90 deg angle as shown based on
t he angle between the surfaces to be welded.
(d) For an equal leg fi llet weld where the angle (} between the members being joined is 90 deg,
t he theoretical throat shall be 0.7 x leg length. For other fillet welds, t he t heoretical throat
shall be based on the leg lengths and the angle (} between the m embers to be joined.
(e) For all fi llet welds, particularly unequal leg fill et welds with angle (} less than 90 deg, t he
t heoretical throat shall lie within the cross section of the deposited weld metal and shall not
be less than the m inimum distance through the weld.
82
Copyrigl1t © 20 I 0 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ~
e s
Notebook Page 398 No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME 831.1·2010
Fig. 127.4.4(8) Welding Details for Slip-On and Socket-Welding Flanges; Some Acceptable Types of Flange
Attachment Welds
t_ tn or 1/4 in. (6.0 mml,

___/ ~
w hichever is smaller
(a) Front and Back Weld (b) Face and Back Welds (c) Socket Welding Flange
[See Notes (1) and (2)] [See Notes (1) and (2)] [See Notes (2) and (3))
t,. = nominal pipe wall th ickness

Xmin. = 1.4t,. or thickness of the hub, whichever is smaller
NOTES:
(1) Refer to para. 122.1.1(F) for limitations of use.
(2) Refer to para. 104.5.1 for limitations of use.
(3) Refer to para. 122.1.1(H) for limitations of use.
Fig. 127.4.4(C) Minimum Welding Dimensions

Fig. 127.4.8(8) Typical Welded Branch Connection
Required for Socket Welding Components Other Than
With Additional Reinforcement
Flanges
ex (min.)= 1.09tn or the thickness

of the socket wall,
whichever is smaller
Fig. 127.4.8(C) Typical Welded Angular Branch

Connection Without Additional Reinforcement
Fig. 127.4.8(A) Typical Welded Branch Connection
Without Additional Reinforcement
J
I
r
I
I
I
I
~
..:::::::::: 11111'1"'\ ___ - _ _.
- -
83
Copyright © 20 I 0 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. 6jb
N o reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. ~ Notebook Page 399
ASME 831.1-2010
Fig. 127.4.8(0) Some Acceptable Types of Welded

Branch Attachment Details Showing Minimum
Acceptable Welds
(a)
0.7tmin
(e)
GENERAL NOTE: Weld dimensions may be larger t han the

minimum values shown here.
84
Copyright© 20 10 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. &
ASME 831.1-2010
Fig. 127.4.8(E) Some Acceptable Details for Integrally Reinforced Outlet Fittings (10)
Manufacturer's
weld line
[No te( 1)]
..r::
Manufacture r's (.)
c:
weld line <0
!Note (1)] ..01

~
Bore may be straight

or tapered as shown
Cover weld
[Note (3)]
(1} Transverse View (2) Longitudinal View
(a} 90 deg Branch Fitting
Manufacturer's
weld line
[Note (111 Manufacturer's
..r:: we ld line
(.)
c: [Note (1})
co Cover weld
..0 [Note (3)]
~ Cover weld
I [N otes (2), (3)]
Heel area
\
{11 Transverse View
{b) Elbow Branch Fitting
Manufacturer's Manufacturer's
weld line weld line
Manufacturer's [Note (1)]
[Note( 1)]
weld line
..r:: l [Note( 1)]
(.)
c: Crotch area
<0
..0
~
~--~ Cover weld

[N ote (3) ]
(1) Transverse View (2} Longitudinal Vi ew

(c) Lateral Branch Fitting
85
Copyright © 20 I 0 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ~
No reproduction may be made of this material w ithout written consent of ASME. ~ Notebook Page 401
ASME 631.1-2010
(10) Fig. 127.4.8(E) Some Acceptable Details for Integrally Reinforced Outlet Fittings (Cont'd)
GENERAL NOTES;
(a) We lds shall be in accordance with para. 127.4.8(C).
(b) We ld attachment details for branch fittin gs that do not match the schedule or weight designation of the run pipe as defined by MSS
SP-97 Table 1 shall be designed to meet the requiremen ts in paras. 104.3.1 and 104.7.2.
(c) The stress intensi fication factors as req uired by paras. 104.8 and 119.7.3, for the fittings represe nted by drawings (b·l ), (b-2), (c-1),
and (c-2), should be obtained from the fitti ng manufacturer.
NOTES;
(1) When th e fitting manufacturer has not provided a visible scribe line on the branch fitti ng, the weld line shall be the edge of the fi rst
bevel on the branch fi tting adjacen t to the ru n pipe.
(2) The minimum cover weld throat thickness, t,, applies when the angle between the branch fitting groove we ld face and the run pipe
surface is less than 135 deg. For areas where the angle between the groove weld face and the run pipe surface is 135 deg or greater,
the cove r we ld may transition to nothing.
(3) Cover weld shall provi de a smooth transi tion to the run pipe.
(4) tnb shall be measured at the longitudinal centerline of the branch fitting. When lnb in the crotch area does not equal tnb in the heel
area, the thicker of the two shall govern in determining the heat treatment in accordance with para. 132.4.
(10) Fig. 127.4.8(F) Typical Full Penetration Weld Branch Connections for NPS 3 and Smaller Half Couplings or
Adapters
Full penetration
/ grooveweld
3J16 in. (5.0 mm) min.
Header or run pipe
pipe
3;16 in. (5 mm) min.
(a) Branch Connection Using ASME B16.11 (b) Branch Connection Using Forged Steel Socket-Welding or
Forged Steel Socket-Welding or Threaded Adapter for Pressure and Temperature Condition s
Threaded Half Coupling (See Note (1)] Greater Than Permitted for ASME B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings
NOTE:
(1) Refer to para. 104.3 .1(C.2) for branch connections not requiring reinforcement calculations.
be finished with a cover fillet weld having a minimum the pieces have strength equivalent to ring or saddle
throat dimension not less than tc; the weld at the outer parent metal and if each piece is provided with a vent
edge, joining the added reinforcement to the nm, shall be hole. A good fit shall be provided between reinforcing
a fillet weld with a minimum throat dimension of O.St,,. rings or saddles and the parts to which they are attached.
(0.2) If the weld joining the added reinforcement (F) Branch connections NPS 2 and smaller that do not
to the branch is a fillet weld, the throat dimension shall require reinforcements (see para. 104.3) may be con-
not be less than 0.7tmin· The weld at the outer edge structed as shown in Fig. 127.4.8(G). The groove welds
joining the outer reinforcement to the run shall also be shall be finished with cover fillet welds with a minimum
a fillet weld with a minimum throat dimension of O.St,,. throat dimension not less than that shown in
( E) When rings or saddles are used, a vent hole shall Fig. 127.4.8(G). This construction shall not be used at
be provided (at the side and not at the crotch) in the design temperatures greater than 750°F (400°C) nor at
ring or saddle to reveal leakage in the weld between design pressures greater than 1,025 psi (7 100 kPa).
branch and main run and to provide venting during 127.4.9 Attachment Welds. Structural attachments (10)
welding and heat treating operations. Rings or saddles may be made by complete penetration, partial penetra-
may be made in more than one piece if the joints between tion, or fillet welds.
86
Notebook Page 402 No reproduction m ay be made of this mater ial without written consent of ASME. ~
ASME 831.1 -2010
Fig. 127.4.8(G) Typical Partial Penetration Weld Branch Connection for NPS 2 and Smaller Fittings (to)
Socket-welding or
threaded fitting
Cover fillet wel d
3!16 in. (5.0 mm) m in.
L'· [<" """· 104.3.1 [C.2 ))
(A) Capacitor discharge welding may be used for the 127.5 Qualification
welding of temporary attachments or permanent non-
127.5.1 General. Qualification of the WPS to be
structural attachments, such as strain gages or thermo-
couples, directly to pressure parts, provided that the used, and of the performance of welders and welding
welding is performed in accordance with the require- operators, is required, and shall comply with the require-
ments of para. 132.3 .3. Performance and procedure quali- ments of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
(Section IX) except as modified herein.
fications are not required.
Certain materials listed in Appendix A do not appear
(8) Temporary attachments shall, after their removal,
in ASME Section IX P-Number groups. Where these
have the weld affected areas examined in accordance
materials have been assigned P-Numbers in Appendix
with para. 136.4.
A, they may be welded under this Code for nonboiler
127.4.10 Heat Treatment. Preheat and postweld external piping only without separate qualification as
heat treatment for welds shall be in accordance w ith if they were listed in ASME Section IX.
para. 131 or 132 as applicable.
127.5.2 Welding Responsibility. Each employer (see
127.4.11 Repair Welding para. 100.2) shall be responsible for the welding per-
(A) Defect Removal. All. defects in welds or base mate- formed by his/her organization and the performance of
rials requiring repa ir shall be removed by flame or arc welders or welding operators employed by that
gouging, grinding, chipping, or machining. Preheating organization.
may be required for flame or arc gouging on certain
127.5.3 Qualification Responsibility
alloy materials of the air hardening type in order to
prevent surface checking or cracking adjacent to the (A) Procedures. Each employer shall be responsible
flame or arc gouged surface. When a defect is removed for qualifying any WPS that he/ she intends to have used
but welding repair is unnecessary, the surface shall be by personnel of his/her organization. However, to avoid
contoured to elinunate any sharp notches or corners. duplication of effort, and subject to approval of the
The contoured surface shall be reinspected by the same Owner, a WPS qualified by a technically competent
means originally used for locating the defect. group or agency may be used :
(B) Repair Welds. Repair welds shall be made in accor- (A.l) if the group or agency qualifying the WPS
dance with a WPS using qualified welders or welding meets all of the procedure qualification requirements of
operators (see para. 127.5), recognizing that the cavity this Code
to be repair welded may differ in contour and dimension (A.2) if the fabricator accep ts the WPS thus qual-
from a normal joint preparation and may present differ- ified
ent restraint conditions. The types, extent, and methods (A.3) if the user of the WPS has qualified at least
of examination shall be in accordance with Table 136.4. one welder using the WPS
For repairs to welds the minimum examination shall be (A.4) if the user of the WPS assumes specific
the same method that revealed the defect in the original responsibility for the procedure qualifica tion work
weld. For repairs to base material, the minimum exami- done for him/ her by signing the records required by
nation shall be the same as required for butt welds. para. 127.6
87
No reproduction may be made of this material without wri tten consent of ASME. ~ Notebook Page 403
ASME 831.1 -2010
All four of the above conditions shall be met before a 128.1.2 Soldering. Solderers shall follow the proce-
WPS thus qualified may be used. dure in ASTM B 828, Standard Practice for Making
(B) Welders nnd Welding Operators. Each employer Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper
shall be responsible for qualifying all the welders and Alloy Tube and Fittings.
welding operators employed by him/her.
However, to avoid duplication of effort, he/she may 128.2 Materials
accept a Welder/Welding Operator Performance 128.2.1 Filler Metal. The brazing alloy or solder
Qualification (WPQ) made by a previous employer (sub- shall melt and flow freely within the specified or desired
ject to the approval of the Owner or his/her agent) on temperature range and, in conjunction with a suitable
piping using the same or an equivalent procedure flux or controlled atmosphere, shall wet and adhere to
w herein the essential variables are within the limits the surfaces to be joined.
established in Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code. An employer accepting such qualification 128.2.2 Flux. A flux that is fluid and chemically
tests by a previous employer shall obtain a copy of the active at brazing or soldering temperature shall be used
original WPQ, showing the name of the employer by when necessa ry to eliminate oxidation of the filler metal
whom the welders or welding operators were qualified, and the surfaces to be joined, and to promote free flow
the dates of such qualification, and evidence that the of the brazing alloy or solder.
welder or welding operator has maintained qualification 128.3 Preparation
in accordance with QW-322 of Section IX, ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code. The evidence of process usage 128.3.1 Surface Preparation. The surfaces to be
to maintain continuity may be obtained from employers brazed or soldered shall be clean and free from grease,
other than the original qualifying employer. The oxides, paint, scale, dirt, or other material that is detri-
employer shall then prepare and sign the record required mental to brazing. A suitable chemical or mechanical
in para. 127.6 accepting responsibility for the ability of cleaning method shall be used if necessary to provide
the welder or welding operator. a clean wettable surface.
127.5.4 Standard Welding Procedure 128.3.2 Joint Clearance. The clearance between sur-
Specifications. Sta ndard Welding Procedure faces to be joined by brazing or soldering shall be no
Specifications published by the American Welding larger than is necessary to allow complete capillary dis-
Society and listed in Appendix E of Section IX of the tribution of the brazing alloy or solder.
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code are permitted 128.4 Procedure
for Code construction within the limitations established
by Article V of ASME Section IX. 128.4.1 General
(A) Qualification of the brazing procedures to be used
127.6 Welding Records
and of the performance of the brazer and brazing opera-
The employer shall maintain a record (WPS and/or tors is required and shall comply with the requirements
WPQ) signed by him/ her, and available to the purchaser of para. 128.5.
or his/ her agent and the inspector, of the WPSs used (B) No brazing shall be done if there is impingement
and the welders and/ or welding operators employed of rain, snow, sleet, or high wind on the area to be
by him/her, showing the date and results of procedure brazed.
and performance qualification.
The WPQ shall also show the identification symbol 128.4.2 Heating. To minimize oxidation, the joint
assigned to the welder or welding operator employed shall be brought to brazing or soldering temperature in
by him/ her, and the employer shall use this symbol to as short a time as possible without localized underheat-
identify the welding performed by the welder or welding or overheating.
ing operator. This may be accomplished by the applica- 128.4.3 Flux Removal. Residual flux shall be
tion of the symbol on the weld joint in a manner specified removed if detrimental.
by the employer. Alternatively, the employer shall main-
tain records that identify the weld(s) made by the welder 128.5 Brazing Qualification
or welding operator. 128.5.1 General. The qualification of the brazing-
procedure and of the performance of brazers and brazing
128 BRAZING AND SOLDERING operators shall be in accordance with the requirements
128.1 General of Part QB, Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, except as modified herein.
128.1.1 The brazing processes that are to be used
under this part of the Code shall meet all the test require- 128.5.2 Brazing Responsibility. Each employer (see
ments of Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure para. 100.2) shall be responsible for the brazing per-
Vessel Code. formed by his/her organization and the performance of
88
e s.
ASME 831.1· 2010
brazers or brazing operators employed by that Table 129.3.1 Approximate l ower Critical (10)
organization. Tern peratu res
128.5.3 Qualification Responsibility Approximate
Lower Critical
(A) Procedures. Each employer shall be responsible
Tempe rature,
for qualifying any Brazing Procedure Specification (BPS) OF (OC)
that he/she intends to have used by personnel of his/ Materi al [Note (1)]
her organization. However, to avoid duplication of
effort, and subject to approval of the Owner, a BPS quali- Carbon steel (P·No. 1) 1,340 (725)
fied by a technically competent group or agency may Carbon- molybdenum steel (P·No. 3) 1,350 (730)
1Cr- 1/ 2Mo (P-No. 4, Gr. No. 1) 1,375 (745)
be used:
1I;4Cr-I;2Mo (P-No. 4, Gr. No. 1) 1,430 (775)
(A.1 ) if the group or agency qualifying the proce- 21;4Cr-1Mo, 3Cr-1Mo (P-No. SA) 1,480 (805)
dures meets all of the procedure qualification require- 5Cr-t;2Mo (P-No. 5B, Gr. No. 1) 1,505 (8 20)
ments of this Code 9Cr 1,475 (800)
(A. 2) if the fabricator accepts the procedure thus
NOTE:
qualified
(1) These values are in te nded for guidance only. The user may
(A.3) if the user of the procedure has qualified at
apply va lues obtained for the speci fic material in lieu of these
least one brazer using the BPS va lues.
(A.4) if the user of the procedure assumes specific
responsibility for the procedure qualification work done
by him/ h er by signing the records required by
para. 128.6 records that identify the braze joints(s) made by the
All four of the above conditions shall be met before a brazer or brazing operator.
procedure thus qualified may be used.
(B) Bra zers and Brazing Operators. Each employer
129 BENDING AND FORMING
shall be responsible for qualifying all the brazers and
brazing operators employed by him/her. 129.1 Bending
However, to avoid duplication of effort, he/she may
Pipe may be bent by any hot or cold method and to
accept a Bra zer /Brazing Operator Performance
any radius that will result in a bend surface free of
Q ualification (BPQ) made by a previous employer (sub-
cracks. Such bends shall meet the design requirements
ject to the approval of the Owner or his/her agent) on
of para. 102.4.5 with regard to minimum wall thickness.
piping using the same or an equivalent procedure
Where limits on flattening and buckling are not specified
wherein the essential variables are within the limits
by design, as delineated in para. 104.2.1, manufacturing
established in Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure
limits of PFI ES-24 shall be met. When defaulting to
Vessel Code. An employer accepting such qualification
PFI ES-24, mutual agreement between purchaser and
tests by a previous employer shall obtain a copy (from
fabricator beyond the stated manufacturing limits shall
the previous employer) of the BPQ showing the name of
not be allowed without the approval of the designer.
the employer by whom the brazers or brazing operators
The use of bends designed as creased or corrugated
were qualified, the dates of such qualification, and the
is not prohibited.
date the brazer last brazed pressure piping components
under s uch qualification. The employer shall then pre- 129.2 Forming
pare and sign the record required in para. 128.6 accepting
responsibility for the ability of the brazer or brazing Piping components may be formed (swedging, lap-
operator. ping, or upsetting of pipe ends, extrusion of necks, etc.)
by any s uitable hot or cold working method, provided
128.6 Brazing Records such processes result in formed surfaces that are uniform
and free of cracks or other defects, as determined by
The employer shall maintain a record signed by ltim/
method of inspection specified in the design.
her and available to the purchaser or his/her agent and
the inspector, showing the date and results of procedure 129.3 Heat Treatment of Bends and Formed
and performance qualification. Components
The BPQ shall a lso show the identification symbol
assigned to the brazer or brazing operator employed by 129.3.1 Hot bending or forming is performed at
him/her, and the employer shall use this symbol to a temperature above Tcrit - 100°F (56°C), where Tcrit is
identify the brazing performed by the brazer or brazing the lower critical temperature of the material. Cold
operator. This may be accomplished by the application bending or forming is performed at a temperature below
of the symbol on the braze joint in a manner specified by Tcrit- 100°F (56°C). (See Table 129.3.1 for lower critical
the employer. Alternatively, the employer shall maintain temperatures.)
89
Copyright© 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ~.·
ASME 831.1-2010
129.3.2 A postbending or postforming heat treat- 3 in. or 1.5 times the base metal thickness (as defined
ment at the time and temperature cycles listed for post- in para. 131.4.n whichever is greater.
weld heat treatment in Table 132 is required on all carbon The base metal temperature for tack welds shall be
steel (P-No. 1) materials with a nominal wall thickness in at or above the specified minimum temperature for a
excess of~ in. (19.0 mm) unless the bending or forming distance not less than 1 in. in all directions from the
operations are performed and completed at tempera- point of welding.
tures of 1,650°F (900°C) or greater.
131.2 Different P-Number Material s
129.3.3 A postforming or postbending heat treat-
When welding two different P-Number materials, the
ment as defined below is required for all ferritic alloy
minimum preheat temperature required shall be the
s teel (excluding P-No. 1) materials with a nominal tpe
higher temperature for the material to be welded.
size 4 in. and larger or with a nominal thickness of }2 in.
(13.0 mm) or greater. 131.3 Preheat Temperature Verification
(A) If hot bending or forming is performed, the mate-
The preheat temperature shall be checked by use of
rial shall receive a full anneal, normalize and temper, temperature-indicating crayons, thermocouple pyrome-
or tempering heat treatment as specified by the designer. ters, or other suitable methods to ensure that the
(B) If cold bending or forming is performed, a heat
required preheat temperature is obtained prior to and
treatment is required at the time and temperature cycle uniformly maintained during the welding operation.
listed for the material in Table 132.
131.4 Preheat Temperature
129.3.4 Postbending or postforming heat treat-
ment of other materials including austenitic stainless The minimum preheat for all materials shall be 50°F
s teel is neither required nor prohibited. If a postbending (10°C) unless sta ted otherwise in the following
or postforming heat treatment is to be performed, the paragraphs.
designer s hall fully describe the procedure to be used. 131.4.1 Thickness referred to is the greater of the
nominal thicknesses at the weld of the parts to be joined.
130 REQUIREMENTS FOR FABRICATING AND 131.4.2 P-No. 1. 175°F (80°C) for material that has
ATTACHING PIPE SUPPORTS both a specified maximum carbon content in excess of
130.1 Pipe Supports 0.30% and a thickness at the joint in excess of 1 in.
Standard pipe hangers and supports shall be fabri- {25.0 mm). Preheat may be based on the actual carbon
cated in accordance with the requirements of MSS SP-58. content as determined from a ladle or product analysis
Welders, welding operators, and WPSs shall be qualified in accordance with the material specification in lieu of
in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Boiler the maximum carbon content specified in the material
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX. s pecification.
131.4.3 P-No. 3. 175°F (80°C) for material or prod-
130.2 Alternate Pipe Supports
uct form that has either a specified minimum tensile
Special hangers, s upports, anchors, and guides, not s trength in excess of 60,000 psi (413.7 MPa) or a thickness
defined as standard types of hanger components in at the joint in excess of Yz in. (13.0 mm).
MSS SP-58, shall be welded in accordance with the
requirements of para. 127 (para. 132 is not applicable 131.4.4 P-No. 4. 250°F (120°C) for all materials.
except as required by the weld procedure used) and 131.4.5 P-Nos. SA and 58
inspected in accordance with the requirements of (A) 400°F (200°C) for material that has either a speci-
para. 136.4.2. fied minimum tensile strength in excess of 60,000 psi
(413.7 MPa), or has both a specified minimum chromium
130.3 Pipe Support Welds
content above 6.0% and a thickness at the joint in excess
Welds attach ing hangers, supports, guides, and of Yz in. (13.0 mm)
anchors to the piping system shall conform to the (B) 300°F (150°C) for all other materials having this
requirements of Chapters V and VI of this Code. P-Number
131.4.6 P-No. 6. 400°F (200°C) for all materials.
131 WELDING PREHEAT
131.4.7 P-Nos. 9A and 98
131.1 Minimum Preheat Requirements
(A) 250°F (120°C) for P-No. 9A materials
The preheat requirements listed herein are mandatory (B) 300°F (150°C) for P-No. 98 materials
minimum values.
131.4.8 P-No. 101. 300°F (150°C) with an interpass
The base metal temperature prior to welding shall be
at or above the specified minimum temperature in all temperature of 450°F (230°C) maximum.
directions from the point of welding for a distance of 131.4.9 P-No. 15E. 400°F (200°C) for all materials.
90
Copyright © 20 I 0 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ~
ASME 831.1 -2010
131.6 Interruption of Welding included in Table 132 shall be heat treated in accordance
with the WPS.
(10) 131.6.1 After welding commences, the minimum
preheat temperature shall be maintained until any 132.1.2 Pressure part welds and attachment welds
required PWHT is performed on P-Nos. 3, 4, SA, SB, 6, using ferritic filler metals that have a specified chro-
and 15E, except when all of the following conditions mium content of more than 3% shall receive a postweld
are satisfied: heat treatment. The postweld heat treatment time and
(A) A minimum of at least Ys in. (9.S mm) thickness temperature range used shall be that shown in Table 132
of weld is deposited or 2S% of the welding groove is for a base metal of similar composition.
filled, whichever is less (the weldment shall be suffi-
ciently supported to prevent overstressing the weld if 132.2 Mandatory PWHT Requirements
the weldment is to be moved or otherwise loaded).
Heat treatment may be accomplished by a suitable
(B) For P-Nos. 3, 4, and SA (with a chromium content
heating method that will provide the desired heating
of 3.0% maximum) materials, the weld is allowed to cool
and cooling rates, the required metal temperature, tem-
slowly to room temperature.
perature uniformity, and temperature control.
(C) For P-No. 58 (with a chromium content greater
(A) The upper limit of the PWHT temperature range
than 3.0%), P-No. 6, and P-No. 15E materials, the weld
in Table 132 is a recommended va lue that may be
is subjected to an adequate intermediate heat treatment
exceeded provided the actual temperatu re does not
with a controlled rate of cooling. The preheat tempera-
exceed the lower critical temperature of either material
ture may be reduced to 200°F (93°C) (minimum) for
(see Table 129.3.2).
the purpose of root examination without performing an
(8) When parts of two different P-Numbers are joined
intermediate heat treatment.
by welding, the postweld heat treatment shall be that
(D) After cooling and before welding is resumed,
visual examination of the weld shall be performed to specified for the material requiring the higher PWHT
assure that no cracks have formed. temperature. When a nonpressure part is welded to a
(E) Required preheat shall be applied before welding
pressure part and PWHT is required for either par t,
the maximum PWHT temperature shall not exceed the
is resumed.
maximum temperature acceptable for the pressure
131.6.2 Intermediate heat treatment for P-No. 58 retaining part.
or 15E materials may be omitted entirely when using (C) Caution is necessary to preclude metallurgical
low-hydrogen electrodes and filler metals classified by damage to some materials or welds not intended or
the filler metal specification with an optional supple- qua lified to w ithstand the PWHT tempera tures
mental diffusible-hydrogen d esignator of H8 or lower required.
and suitably controlled by maintenance procedures to
avoid contamination by hydrogen-producing sources. 132.3 Exemptions to Mandatory PWHT Requirements
The surface of the base metal prepared for welding shall
be free of contaminants. 132.3.1 Postweld heat treatment is not required
for the following conditions:
(A) welds in nonferrous materials
132 POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT
(B) welds exempted in Table 132
132.1 Minimum PWHT Requirements (C) welds subject to temperatures above the lower
critical temperature (see Table 129.3.2) during fab rica-
132.1.1 Before applying the detailed requirements
tion provided the WPS has been qualified with PWHT
and exemptions in these paragraphs, satisfactory qualifi-
(see para. 132.1) at the temperature range to be reached
cation of the WPS to be used shall be performed in
accordance with the essential variables of the ASME during fabrication
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX including 132.3.2 The postweld heat treatment exemption
the conditions o f postweld heat treatment or lack of of Table 132 may be based on the actual chemical compo-
postweld heat treatment and including other restrictions sition as determined by a ladle or product analysis in
listed below. Except as otherwise provided in paras. accordance w ith the material specification in lieu of the
132.2 and 132.3, all welds in materials included in the specified or maximum specified chemical composition
P-Numbers listed in Table 132 shall be given a postweld limits.
heat treatment within the temperature range specified
in Table 132. (The range specified in Table 132 may be 132.3.3 Capacitor discharge welding may be used
modified by Table 132.1 for the lower limit and para. for welding temporary attachments and permanent non-
132.2 for the upper limit.) The materials in Table 132 structural a ttachments w ithout subsequent postweld
are listed in accordance with the material P-Number heat treatment on P-No. 1 through P-No. SB materials,
grouping of Appendix A. Welds of m aterials not provided
91
ASME B31.1·2010
Table 132 Postweld Heat Treatment

P-Number Holding
Appendix A Range, °F (OC) (50 mm) (50 mm)
P·No. 1 1,100 (600) 1 hr/in. (25 mm), 2 hr plus 15 min for each
Gr. Nos. 1, 2, 3 to 15 min minimum additional inch (25 mm) over
1,200 (650) 2 in. (50 mm)
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) PWHT of P·No. 1 materials is not mandatory, provided that all of the following cond itions are met:
(1) the nominal th ickness, as defined in para. 132.4.1, is % in. (19.0 mm) or less
(2) a minimum preh eat of 200°F (95°C) is applied when the nominal material thickness of either of the base metals exceeds 1 in.
(25.0 mm)
(b) PWHT of low hardenability P·No. 1 ma terials with a nominal materia l thickness, as defined in para. 132.4 .3, over% in. (19.0 mm) but
not more than 1% in. (38 mm) is not mandatory, provided all of the following co nditions are met:
(1) the ca rbon equivalent, CE, is :s; 0.50, using the formula
CE = C + (Mn + Si)/6 + (Cr + Mo + 1/)/5 + (Ni + Cu)/15

The maximum chemical composition limit from the material specification or actual values from a chemical analysis or material test
report shall be used in computing C£. If analysis for the last two terms is not available, 0.1% may be substituted for those two terms
as follows:
C£ = C + (Mn + Si)/6 + 0.1

(2) a minimum preheat of 250°F (121°() is applied
(3) the maximum weld deposit thickness of each weld pass shall not exceed 1/4 in. (6 mm)
(c) When it is impractical to PWHT at the temperature range specified in Table 132, it is permissible to perform the PWHT of this material
at lower temperatures for longer periods of time in accordance with Table 132.1.

P-Number Holding
Appendix A Range, °F (0 ( ) (50 mm) (50 mm)
P-No. 3 1,100 (600) 1 hr/in. (25 mm), 2 hr plus 15 min for each
Gr. Nos. 1, 2 to 15 min minimum additional inch (25 mm) over
1,200 (650) 2 in. (50 mm)
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) PWHT of P·No. 3 materials is not mandatory, provided all of the following cond itions are met:
(1) the nominal thickness, as defined in para. 132.4.1, is %in. (16.0 mm) or less
(2) a minim um preheat of 200°F (95° C) is applied when the nominal material thickn ess of either of the base metal s exceeds% in.
(16.0 mm)
(3) the specified ca rbon con ten t of the P-No. 3 base ma terial is 0.25% or less
(b) When it is impractical to PWHT at the temperature range specified in Table 132, it is permissible to perform the PWHT of th is material
at lower temperatures for longer periods of time in accordance with Table 132.1.
92
Copyright © 20 I0 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
Notebook Page 408
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
ASME 831.1-2010

P-Number Holding
Ap pendix A Ran ge, ° F (°C) 00m~ 00m~
P-No. 4 1,200 {650) 1 hr/in. (25 mm), 2 hr plus 15 min for each
Gr. Nos. 1, 2 to 15 min minimum additional inch (25 mm) over
1,300 (700) 2 in. (SO mm)
GENERAL NOTE: PWHT is not mandatory for P-No. 4 material under the following conditions:
(a) welds in pipe or attachment welds to pipe com plying with all of th e followi ng condi tions:
(1) a nominal material thickness of 1;2 in. (13.0 mm) or less
(2) a specified car bon content of the material to be welded of 0.15% or less
(b) for seal we lding of th readed or oth er mechanical joints, provided the seal weld has a th roat th ickness of% in. (9.0 mm) or less
(c) attachment welds for nonload·carrying attachments provided in addition to (a)(2) above:
(1) stud welds or fillet welds made by the SMAW or GTAW process shall be used.
(2) the hardened portion of the heat affected zone (HAZ) shall not encro ach on the minimum wall thickness of the pipe, as determined
by welding procedure qualification using the maximum welding heat input. The depth of the HAZ shall be ta ken as the point where the HAZ
hardness does not exceed the average unaffected base metal hard ness by more than 10%.
(3) if SMAW is used, the electrode shall be th e low hydrogen type.
(4) the thickness of th e test plate used in making the welding procedure qualification of Section IX shall not be less than that of the
material to be welded.
(5) the attachm ent weld has a throat thickness of 'l;. 6 in. or less.
(d) for socket welded components and slip-on flange welds provided
(1) the throat thickness is Y2 in. (13 mm) or less
(2) the wa ll th ickness of the pipe is 1;2 in. (13 mm) or less
(3) the specified carbon content of the pipe is 0.15% or less

P-Number Holding
Appendix A Range, ° F (0 C) 00 m~ 00m~
P-No. SA 1,300 (700) 1 hr/in. (25 mm), 2 hr plus 15 min for each
Gr. No.1 to 15 min minimum additional inch (25 mm) over
1,400 (760) 2 in. (50 mm)
GENERAL NOTE: PWHl is not mandatory for P-No. SA material under the following cond itions:
(a) welds in pipe or attachment welds to pipe complying with all of the fo llowing conditions:
(1) a nominal material thickness of Y2 in. (13.0 mm) or less
(2) a specified carbon content of th e material to be welded of 0.15% or less
(b) for seal welding o f threaded or other mechanical joints, provided the seal weld has a throat thickness of% in. (9.0 mm) or less
(c) attachment welds fo r non-load-carrying attachments provided in addition to (a)(2) above:
(1) stud welds or fillet welds made by th e SMAW or GTAW process shall be used.
(2) the hardened portion of the heat affected zone (HAZ) shall not encroach on the minimum wall thickness of the pipe, as determined
by welding procedure qualifica tion using the maximum welding heat input. The depth of the HAZ shall be taken as the point where the HAZ
hardness does not exceed the average unaffected base metal hardness by more than 10%.
(3) if SMAW is used, the el ectrode shall be the low hydrogen type.
(4) the thickness of the test plate used in making the weld ing procedure qualification of Section IX shall not be less than th at of the
material to be welded.
(5) the attachment weld has a th roat thickness of 'l;. 6 in. or less.
(d) for socke t welded components and slip-on flan ge weld s provided
(1) the throat thickness is 1;2 in. (13 mm) or less
(2) the wa ll thickn ess of the pipe is% in . (13 mm) or less
(3) the specified carbon content of the pipe is 0.15% or less
93
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society ofMechanical Engineers.
N o reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. Notebook Page 409
ASME B31.1·2010

P·Number Holding
Appendix A Range, °F (0 C) (50 mm) (50 mm)
P·No. SB 1,300 (700) 1 hr/in. (25 mm), 2 hr plus 15 min

Gr. No.1 to 15 min minimum for each additional inch
1,400 (760) (25 mm) over 2 in.
(SO mm)

P-Number Holding
Appendix A Range, °F (0 C) ~Om~ ~Om~
P·No. 6 1,400 (760) 1 hr/in. (25 mm), 2 hr plus 15 min

Gr. Nos. 1, 2, 3 to 15 min minimum for each additional inch
1,475 (800) (25 mm) over 2 in.
(50 mm)
GENERAL NOTE: PWHT is not manda tory for P·No. 6 Type 410 material, provided all of the fo llowing conditions are- met:
(a) the specified carbon content is not more than 0.08%
(b) the nominal material thickness is % in. (10 mm) or less
(c) the weld is made with A·No. 8, A·No. 9, or F· No. 43 filler metal
94
Notebook Page 410 No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. w.
ASME B31.1-2010

P-Number Holding
Appendix A Range, °F (0 C) ~Om~ ~O m~
P-No. 7 1,350 (730) 1 hr/ in. (25 mm), 2 hr plus 15 min

Gr. Nos. 1, 2 to 15 min minimum for each additional inch
1,425 (775) (25 mm) over 2 in.
(50 mm)
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) In lieu of the cooling rate described in para. 132.5, P-No. 7 material cooling rate shall be not greater than 100°F (55°C) per hr in th e
range above 1,200°F (65 0°C), after which the cooling rate shall be sufficiently rapid to prevent embrittlement.
(b) PWHT is not mandatory for P-No. 7 Type 405 material, provided all of the following conditions are met:
(1) the speci fied ca rbon content is not more than 0.08%
%
(2) the nominal materi al th ickness is in. (10 mm) or less
(3) the weld is made with A-No. 8, A-No. 9, or F-No. 43 fi ller metal
Holding Tim e Based on Nominal Thickness

P-Number Holding
P-No. 8 None None None

Gr. Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4
GENERAL NOTE: PWHT is neith er requ ired nor prohibited for joints between P-No. 8 austenitic stainless steels.

P-Number Holding
P-No. 9A 1,100 (600) 1 hr/ in. (25 mm}, 2 hr plus 15 min

Gr. No. 1 to 15 min minimum for each additional inch
1,200 (650) (25 mm) over 2 in.
(50 mm)
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) PWHT is not mandatory for P-No. 9A material when welds on pipe or attachment welds to pipe comply with all of the following cond i-
tions:
(1) a nominal material thickness of lj2 in. (13.0 mm) or less
(2) a specified carbon content of th e material to be welded of 0.15% or less
(3) a minimum preheat of 250°F (120°C) is maintained during welding
(b) When it is impractical to PWHT at the temperature range specified in Table 132, it is permissible to perform the PWHT of th is material
at lower temperatures for longer periods of time in accordance with Table 132. 1, but the minimum PWHT shall not be less than
1,000°F (5 50°C).
Holding Tim e Based on Nominal Thickness

P-Number Holding
App endix A Range, °F (0 C) (50 mm) (50 mm)
P-No. 98 1,100 (600) 1 hr/ in. (25 mm), 2 hr plus 15 min

Gr. No. 1 to 15 min minimum for each additional inch
1,175 (630) (25 mm) over 2 in.
(50 mm)
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) PWHT of P-No. 98 material is not mandatory for a nominal material thickness of% in. (16.0 mm) or less provided the Welding Proce·
dure Qualification has been made using material of th ickn ess equal to or greater than the production wel d.
(b) When i t is impractical to PWHT at the temperature range specified in Ta ble 132, it is permissible to perform the PWHT of this material
at lower temperatures for longer periods of time in accordance with Table 132.1, but the minimum PWHT temperature shall not be less
than 1,000°F csso<>c).
95
Copyright © 20 l 0 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ~
No reproduction may be made of this material w ithout written consent of ASME. ~ Notebook Page 411
A5ME B31.1-2010

Holding Time Based on Nomina l Thickness
P-Number Holding
Appendix A Range, °F (0 C) (50 mm) ( 50 mm)
P-No. 10H
Gr. No. 1
GENERAL NOTE: Postweld heat treatment is neith er required nor prohibited. If any heat treatment is perform ed after forming or we lding, it
shall be perfo rmed with in the temperature range listed below for the particula r alloy, followed by a rapid cool:
Alloy 531803 1,870°F-2,010°F

Alloy 532550 1,900°F- 2,050°F
Alloy 532750 1,880°F-2,060°F
All others 1,800°F- 1,900°F
Hol ding Time Based on Nominal Thickness

P-Number Holding
Append ix A Ra nge, °F (°C) (50 mm) (50 mm)
P-No. 101 1,350 (730) 1 hr/ in. (25 mm), 1 hr/ in. (25 mm)
Gr. No. 1 to 15 min minimum
1,500 (81 5)
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) In lieu of the coo ling rate described in para. 132.5, the P-No. 101 ma terial cooling rate shall be not greater than 100°F (55° C) per hr in
the range above 1,200°F (650°C), after which the cooling rate shall be sufficien tly rapid to prevent embrittl ement.
(b) Postweld heat treatmen t is neith er required nor prohibited for a nominal thickness of 1;2 in. (13 mm) or less.
96
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. ~
Notebook Page 412
ASME B31 .1-201 0
Table 132 Postweld Heat Treatment (Cont'd) (10)

P-Number Holding
Appendix A Range, °F (0 ( ) (125 mm) (125 mm)
P·No. 15E 1,3 50 (7 30) 1 hr/in . (25 mm), 5 hr plus 15 min for each
Gr. No.1 to 30 min minimum additio nal inch
1,425 (775) (25 mm) over 5 in.
(125 mm)
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) If the nominal weld thickness is ::; %in. (13 mm), the minimum holding temperature is 1,325°F (720°().
(b) For dissimilar metal welds (i.e., welds mad e between a P·No. 15E and another lower chromium ferritic, austeni tic, or nickel-based
steel), if fille r metal chromium content is less th an 3.0% or if the fi ller metal is nickel-based or austen i tic, the minimum holding tem-
perature shall be 1,300°F (700°().
(c) The maximum holding temperature above is to be used if the actual chemica l composition of the matching filler metal used when
making the weld is unknown. If the chemical composition of th e match ing fi ller metal is known, th e maximum holding temperature can
be increased as follows:
(1) IfNi + Mn < 1.50% but~ 1.0%, the maximum PWHT temperature is 1,450°F (790°().
(2) IfNi + Mn < 1.0%, the maximum PWHT temperature is 1,470°F (800°().
Explanatory Note to (c) Above: The lower transformation tem perature for matching filler material is affected by alloy content, primarily
the total of Ni + Mn. Th e maximum holding temperature has been set to avoid heat treatment in the intercritical zone.
(d) If a portion of the component is heated above the heat treatm ent temperature allowed above, one of the following actions shall be
performed:
(1) The component in its entirety must be renormalized and tempered.
(2) If the maxi mum holding temperature in the Table or Note (c)(l) above is exceeded but does not exceed 1,470°F (800°( ), the
weld metal shall be remove d and replaced.
(3) The portion of the component heated above 1,470°F (800°() and at least 3 in. (75 mm) on either side of the overheated zone
must be removed and be re normalized and tempered or replaced.
(4) The allowa ble stress shall be that for Grade 9 material (i.e., SA-213-T9, SA-33 5-P9, or equivalent product specifica tion) at the
design temperature, provided that the porti on of the component heated to a te mperature greater than that allowed above is rehea t
treated within the temperature range speci fied above.
Table 132.1 Alternate Postweld Heat Treatment

Requirements for Carbon and Low Alloy Steels
Decrease in Temperatures
Below Minimum Specified Minimum Holding Time at
Temperature, Decreased Tempe rature,
Of (OC) hr (Note (1))
50 (28) 2
100 (56) 4
150 (84) [Note (2)) 10
200 (112) [Note (2)) 20
GENERAL NOTE: Postweld heat treatment at lower temperatures for

longer periods of time, in accord ance with this Ta ble, shall be used
only where permitted in Table 132.
NOTES:
(1) Times shown apply to thicknesses up to 1 in. (25 mm). Add
15 min/ in. (1 5 min/25 mm) of thickn ess for th ickn esses
greater than 1 in. (25 mm).
(2) A decrease of more than 100°F (56°C) below the minimum
specified temperature is allowable only for P-No. 1, Gr. Nos. 1
and 2 materials.
97
Copyright © 20 I 0 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. &
ASME 831.1·2010
(A) a Welding Procedure Specification is prepared, (3) for welds described in Fig. 127.4.8(F) and
describing the capacitor discharge equipment, the com- Fig. 127.4.8(G):
bination of materials to be joined, and the technique of
application; qualification of the welding procedure is weld thickness = dep th of groove weld
not required + throat thickness of cover fillet
(8) the energy output of the welding process is lim- 132.4.3 The term 11ominal material thickness as used
ited to 125 W-sec in Table 132 is the thicker of the materials being joined
(C) for P-No. SA and P-No. SB materials, the maxi- at the weld.
mum carbon content of the material is 0.15%
132.5 PWHT Heating and Cooling Requirements
132.4 Definition of Thickness Governing PWHT
Above 600°F (315°C}, the rate of heating and cooling
132.4.1 The term nominal thickness as used in shall not exceed 600°F /hr (315°C/ h) divided by one-
Table 132 and Notes is the lesser thickness of (A) or (B) half the maximum thickness of material in inches at
as follows: the weld, but in no case shall the rate exceed 600°F / hr
(A) the thickness of the weld (315°C/h). (See Table 132 for cooling rate requirements
(B) the thicker of the materials being joined at the for P-Nos. 7 and 101 materials.)
weld
132.6 Furnace Heating
132.4.2 Thickness of the weld, which is a factor
in d etermining the nominal thickness, is defined as (A) Heating an assembly in a furnace should be used
follows: when practical; however, the size or shape of the unit
(A) groove welds (girth and longitudinal) - the or the adverse effect of a desired heat treatment on one
thicker of the two abutting ends after weld preparation, or more components where dissimilar materials are
including 1.0. machining involved, may dictate alternative procedures such as
(8) fillet welds- the throat thickness of the weld heating a section before assembly, or by applying local
(C) partial penetration welds - the depth of the weld
heating in accordance with para . 132.7.
(B) An assembly may be postweld heat treated in
groove
(D) material repair welds - the depth of the cavity
more than one heat in a furnace provided there is at
to be repaired least a 1 ft (300 mm) overlap of the heated sections
(10) (E) branch welds - the weld thickness is the dimen-
and the portion of the assembly outside the furnace is
shielded so that the temperature gradient is not harmful.
sion existing in the plane intersecting the longitudinal
(C) Direct impingement of flame on the assembly is
axes and is calculated as indicated for each detail using
prohibited.
1
lc = the smaller of 14 in. or 0.7fub
132.7 local Heating
(1) for welds described in Fig. 127.4.8(0): Welds may be locally PWHT by heating a circumferen-
Detail (a) tial band around the entire component with the weld
located in the center of the band. The width of the band
weld thickness = t 11b + tc heated to the PWHT temperature for girth welds shall
be at least three times the wall thickness at the weld of
Detail (b) the thickest part being joined. For nozzle and attachment
welds, the width of the band heated to the PWHT tem-
weld thickness = lu!J + fc perature shall extend beyond the nozzle weld or attach-
ment weld on each side at least two times the header
Detail (c)
thickness and shall ex tend completely around the
weld thickness = greater of fur + lc or tub + tc header. Guidance for the placement of thermocouples on
circumferential butt welds is provided in AWS 010.10,
Detail (d) Sections 5, 6, and 8. Special consideration shall be given
to the placement of thermocouples when heating welds
weld thickness = lull + lur + tc adjacent to large heat sinks such as valves or flanges,
or when joining parts of differing thicknesses, to ensure
Detail (e) that no part of the materials subjected to the heat source
weld thickness = lnb + tc exceeds the lower critical temperature of the material.
Particular care must be exercised when the applicable
(2) for welds described in Fig. 127.4.8(E): PWHT temperature is close to the material's lower criti-
cal temperature, such as for creep strength enhanced
weld thickness = lub + t, ferritic steels.
98
Copyright © 20 I 0 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ~.
Notebook Page 414 No reproduction may be made of this material w ithout written consent of ASME. ~
ASME 831.1-201 0
133 STAMPING 135.3.4 Bolt Enga gement. All bolts shall be

engaged so that there is visible evidence of complete
Stamping, if used, shall be performed by a method
threading through the nut or threaded attachment.
that will not result in sharp discontinuities. In no case
shall stamping infringe on the minimum wall thickness 135.3.5 Nonmetallic Lined Joints. When assembling
or result in dimpling or denting of the material being nonmetallic lined joints, such as plastic lined steel pipe,
stamped. consideration should be given to maintaining electrical
CAUTIONARY NOTE: Detrimental effects can result from continuity between flanged pipe sections where
stamping of material that will be in operation under long-term required.
creep or creep fa tigue conditions.
135.4 Packed joints and Caulked joints
135 ASSEMBLY Care shall be used to ensure adequate engagement of
135.1 General joint members. Where packed joints are used to absorb
thermal expansion, proper clearance shall be provided
The assembly of the various piping components,
at the bottom of the sockets to permit movement.
whether done in a shop or as field erection, shall be
done so that the completely erected piping conforms 135.5 Threaded Piping
with the requirements of the engineering design.
135.5.1 Thread Compound. Any compound or
135.2 Alignment lubricant used in threaded joints shall be suitable for
135.2.1 Equipment Connections. When making the service conditions, and shall be compatible with the
connections to equipment, such as pumps or turbines or piping material and the service fluid.
other piping components that are sensitive to externally
135.5.2 joints for Seal Welding. Threaded joints
induced loading, forcing the piping into alignment is
that are intended to be seal welded in accordance with
prohibited if this action introduces end reactions that
para. 127.4.5 should be made up without any thread
exceed those perm.iitted by design.
compound.
135.2.2 Cold Springs. Before assembling joints in
piping to be cold sprung, an examination shall be made 135.5.3 joints Using Straight Threads. Some joints
of guides, supports, and anchors for obstructions that using straight threads, with sealing at a surface other
might interfere wi th the desired movement or result in than threads, are shown in Fig. 135.5.3. Care shall be
undesired movement. The gap or overlap of piping prior used to avoid distorting the seal when incorporating
to assembly shall be checked against the design specifi- such joints into piping assemblies by welding or brazing.
cations and corrected if necessary. 135.5.4 Backing Off. Backing off threaded joints to
135.3 Bolted Flanged Connections allow for alignment is prohibited.
135.3.1 Fit Up. All flanged joints shall be fitted up 135.6 Tubing joints
so that the gasket contact surfaces bear uniformly on
the gasket and then shall be made up with relatively 135.6.1 Flared. The sealing surface shall be free of
uniform bolt stress. injurious defects before installation.
135.3.2 Gasket Compression. When bolting gas- 135.6.2 Flareless and Compression. Flareless and
keted flange joints, the gasket shall be properly com- compression joints shall be assembled in accordance
pressed in accorda nce with the design principles with manufacturer's recommendations.
applicable to the type of gasket being used.
135.7 Ductite Iron Bell End Piping
135.3.3 Cast Iron to Steel Joints. Cast iron to steel
flanged joints in accordance with para 108.3 shall be Assembly of ductile iron pipe, using ANSI/ AWWA
assembled with care to prevent damage to the cast iron C111 I A21.11 mechanical or push-on joints, shall comply
flange. with AWWA C600.
99
ASME 831.1 -2010
Fig. 135.5.3 Typical Threaded Joints Using Straight Threads
(a) (b ) (c)
GENERAL NOTE: Threads are ASME 81.1 straight threads.
100
Copyright © 2010 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ~
~ s.
Welding 1!328
Welding Responsibility 1!328.1
Each employer is responsible for:
• the welding done by the personnel of his/her organization

• shall conduct the tests required to qualify welding procedures, and
• to qualify and as necessary requalify welders and welding operators.
Welding Electrodes a nd Filler Metal 1!328.3.1
Welding electrodes and filler metal must meet the requirements of Section II, Part C.
The 2010 version of the ASME B31.3 code was changed to state that a filler metal not covered within
Section II, Part C may be used provided the WPS and the welders who will follow the WPS have
been qualified as required by Section IX. Prior to this code change, a filler metal not incorporated
into Section IX could not be used with the owner's approval and a procedure qualification test is
successfully performed.
Weld Backing Material 1!328.3.2
When backing rings are used, they must conform to the following:
• ~328.3.2(a) Ferrous metal backing rings must be of weldable quality, with a sulfur content
not to exceed 0.05%.
• <)l328.3.2(c) Nonferrous and nonmetallic backing rings may be used provided the designer
approves their use and the welding procedure using them is qualified.
Consumable Inserts 1!328.3.3
When consumable inserts are used, they must conform to the following:
• they are of the same nominal chemical composition as the filler metal
• they will not cause detrimental alloying of the weld metal, and
• the welding procedure using them is qualified.
Notebook Page 417

Practice Problem Q1: Welding Responsibilities
Who is responsible for ASME B31.3 process piping welding done by the personnel and shall conduct
the tests required to qualify welding procedures, and to qualify and as necessary requalify welders
and welding operators?
a) each employer
b) purchaser
c) jurisdiction
d) welding inspector
e) a and b
Practice Problem Q2: Backing Material

What are the ASME B31.3 quality requirements for ferrous metal backing rings used with process
piping?
a) shall be of weldable quality

b) shall meet the AWS backing specification requirements
c) shall be the same material as the base metal
d) shall be of weldable quality with a sulfur content not exceeding 0.05%
e) shall be of weldable and corrosion resistant quality
Practice Problem Q3: Consumable Inserts

May a filler metal be used that is not listed in ASME Sec. IX, in accordance with ASME B31.3?
a) yes, provided it has the owner's inspector's approval

b) yes, provided a welding procedure has been successfully qualified with it
c) no, it must be listed in ASME Sec. IX
d) a and b
e) a or c
Notebook Page 418

Preparation for Welding 1]328.4
Cleaning <J[328.4.1
Internal and external surfaces to be thermally cut or welded must be clean and free from any
detrimental effects to either the weld or the base metal when heat is applied. Examples of debris for
cleaning include:
• paint,
• oil,
• r ust,
• and scale.
"
Practice Problem 04: Cleaning Welds
Which areas of an ASME B31.3 weld shall be clean and free from paint, oil, rust, scale, and other
material that would be detrimental to either the weld or the base metal when heat is applied?
a) base metal, including a minimum distance of 3 inches in all directions from the weld
b) on those surfaces that will be in contact with the process or, a minimum distance of 3
inches in all directions from th e weld, whichever is greater
c) internal and external surfaces
d) I.D. only
e) O.D. only
Alignme nt of Circumferential Welds <J[328.4.3
Inside surfaces of components at ends to be joined in girth or miter groove welds shall be aligned
within the dimensional limits in the WPS and the engineering design, <J[328.4.3(a)(1).
If the external surfaces of the components are not aligned, the weld must be tapered between them,
<J[328.4.3(a)(2).
Although <J[328.4.3((d) does not s pecifically include a minimum r equirement for root spacing, it does
require that the root opening of the joint must be within the tolerance limits in the WPS.
Practice Problem 05: Weld Alignment

What are the ASME B31.3 tolerance limits for the root opening of the joint for process piping?
a) ±1/16 in.
b) ±1/8 in.
c) shall be within the tolerance limits in the WPS
d) a minimum of twice the diameter of the electrode size qualified in the WPS for the root
pass
e) ±3/16 in.
Notebook Page 419

Welding Requirements <Jl328.5
91328.5.1 mandates the following welding requirements:
(a) We lds must be made in accordance with a qualified WPS by qualified welders or welding
operators.
(b) Each qualified welder and welding operator must be assigned an identification symbol and
each pressure containing weld or adjacent area shall be marked with this symbol. In lieu of
marking the weld, appropriate records must be filed.
(c) Tack welds at the root ofthejoint shall be:
• made with filler metal equivalent to that used in the root pass by a qualified
welder/welding operator;
• fused with the root pass weld, except that those which have cracked shall be
removed; and
• bridge tacks (above the weld) must be removed.
(d) Peening is prohibited on the root pass and final pass of a weld.
(e) No welding is allowed if there is impingement on the weld area of rain, snow, sleet, or
excessive wind, or if the weld area is frosted or wet.
(f) The welding sequence and procedure and any heat treatment for a welding end valve must
be made to retain the seat tightness of the valve.
Practice Problem Q6: Welding Requirements

What are the ASME B31.3 requirements for tack welds at the root of the joint?
a) shall be made with filler metal equivalent to that used in the root pass and made by the
pipe fitter or welder
b) shall be made with filler metal equivalent to that used in the root pass and made by a
qualified welder
c) shall be fused with any pass weld, in accordance with the qualified WPS
d) cracked tack welds are not required to be removed, provided they are fused with the root
pass weld
Practice Problem Q7: Welding Requirements

When is welding prohibited on new ASME B31.3 process piping welds?
a) if there is impingement on the weld area of excessive wind

b) if the weld area is frosted
c) if the weld area is wet
d) all of the above
e) none required
Notebook Page 420

Fillet and Socket Welds <Jl328.5.2
Fillet welds, including socket welds, may vary from convex to concave. The size of a fillet weld is
determined as shown in Fig. 328.5.2A.
Surface of perpendicular member Surface of perpendicular member

nvex fillet weld Size of fillet weld
. w~ Surface of
S1ze of Suriace of
horizontal member
weld horizontal member r'---"'-t---'"""""t
~-~_..;::..-...,
Theoretical throat - - - - - - Theoretical throat

Equal Leg Fillet Weld Unequal Let Fillet Weld
Fig. 328.5.2A Fillet Weld Size
Typical weld details for slip-on and socket welding flanges are shown in Fig. 328.5.2B and Fig.
328.5.2C. If slip-on flanges are single welded, the weld shall be at the hub.
'l[328.5.3 specifies that seal welding must be done by a qualified welder and must cover all exposed
threads.
Practice Problem 08: Socket Weld

The fit-up gap between the end ofthe pipe and the bottom ofthe socket of a socket weld joint used in
process piping shall be approximately:
a) 1/32 in.
b) 1/16 in.
c) 1/8 in.
d) 3/32 in.
e) 5/32 in.
Practice Problem 09: Seal Welding

What are the requirements for seal welding ASME B31.3 process piping?
a) seal welding may be done by any trades personnel, provided they are inspected visually
after completion
b) seal welding shall cover a minimum of 2 exposed threads or 3/8 in., whichever is greater
c) seal welding shall cover all exposed threads or 3/8 in., whichever is greater
d) seal welding shall be done by a qualified welder and shall cover all exposed threads
e) none
Notebook Page 421

Weld Reinforcement or Internal Protrusion- Table 341.3.2
For ASME B31.3 welds, there are maximum requirements for weld reinforcement. The weld must
develop the strength of the base material. Weld reinforcement is a change in surface contour and
therefore is a stress concentrator: the more severe the build-up, the greater the stress magnification.
Although the Code does not require weld reinforcement, it does require full penetration welds, i.e.,
complete joint fill.
Permitted weld reinforcements for girth, miter groove and branch connection, longitudinal groove,
and fillet welds for normal and category m fluid service, and severe cyclic conditions in accordance
with Table 341.3.2 are as follows.
Table 341.3.2 Reinforcement of Girth and Longitudinal Butt Welds (excerpt)
ForT w, mm (in.) Height, mm (in.)

Height of reinforcement or internal protrusion [Note < 6(V4) < 1.5 (1116)
(8)] in any plane through the weld shall be within > 6(V4), :5 13 (];2) < 3 (118)
limits of the applicable height value in the > 13 (1;2), < 25 (1) < 4 (5-32)
tabulation at right, except as provided in Note (9). > 25 (1) :55 (31.6)
Weld metal shall merge smoothly into the
component surfaces.
Notebook Page 422

Practice Problem 010: Weld Reinforcement
thickness of 0. 750 inch in normal fluid service?
a) 3/32 in.
b) 1/8 in.
c) 5/32 in.
d) 3/16 in.
e) 5/16 in.
Weld Re pair (During Fabrication) 328.6
Repair welds during fabrication shall:
• be made using a qualified welding procedure, recognizing that the cavity to be repaired may
differ in contour and dimensions from the original joint;
• have all weld defects removed to sound metal;
• be made by qualified welders or welding operators; and
• use preheating and heat treatment as required for the original welding.
Defective Compone nts and Workmanship 341.3.3
An examined item with one or more defects must be repaired or replaced.
The repaired work sh all be reexamined by the same methods, to the same extent, and by the same
acceptance criteria as required for the original work.
• __,.... ~ • • - 7
Practice Problem 011: Repair Welds

What examination technique shall be used for repairs to welds during ASME B31.3 piping
fabrication?

c) as required by ASME sec. IX
e) the same method that revealed the defect in the original work
Notebook Page 423

Preheating [~330]
Preheating for all types of piping welds is covered in B31.3 under CJ[330. The second sentence of
Cj[330.1 states: "The necessity for preheating and the temperature to be used shall be specified in the
engineering design and demonstrated by procedure qualification." If such requirements ar e not
included in the engineering design, then the minimum Code requirements are generally assumed.
Table 330.1.1 gives minimum requirements and recommendations for preheat, based on P-Number
and thickness. When selecting minimum preheats from this table, there are four additional
conditions to consider:
a) For ambient temperatures below 0°C (32°F)), recommendations of Table 330.1.1 become
mandatory requirements CJ[330.1.1.
b) When base metals of a dissimilar weld have different preheat requirements, the higher
temperature shown in the table is recommended Cj[330.2 .3.
c) In the Preheat Table 330.1.1, nominal wall thickness refers to the thickness of weld joint,
and ifth ejoint has dissimilar thicknesses, than the thicker component governs.
d) If welding is interrupted as described in Cj[330.2.4, the rate of cooling must be controlled to
prevent detrimental effects in the piping. Before welding is resumed, the preheat specifi.e d in
the WPS must be applied.
CJ[330.1.4 defines the preheat zone shall extend at least 25 mm (1 in.) beyond each edge of the weld.
Practice Problem Q12: Preheating

If the ambient temperature is below ooc (32°F), the preheat temperatures in ASME B31.3 become:
a) recommendations or requirements
b) recommendations or requirements, provided they are qualified in a written WPS
c) minimum requirements
d) maximum requirements

How are preheat requirements established for unlisted materials in ASME B31.3?
a) preheat requirements for an unlisted material shall be specified in the WPS

b) unlisted material require a minimum preheat of 200°F or as specified on the WPS
provided it is acceptable to the owner's inspector
c) preheat requirements for an unlisted material may be specified in the WPS, but no less
than 200°F
d) unlist ed materials are not allowed in B31.3
Notebook Page 424

For new ASME B31.3 process pipe welding, what is the size of the preheat zone?

d) in all directions from the point of welding for a distance of 1 in. or 1.25 times the base
metal thickness, whichever is greater
e) at least 2 in. beyond each edge of the weld
The following Example and Practice Problem illustrate how to determine the preheat requirement
given a pipe material and size.
Example 015: Preheat Requirements

What is the B31.3 preheat requirement for 10 in. O.D., Schedule 140 (1.000 in.), ASTM A106/A106M
Grade B seamless piping material, when the ambient temperature is 0°F?
Table A-1 Basic Allowable Stresses in Tension for Metals1 (Cant' d)
Numbers in Parentheses Refer to Notes for Appendix A Tables; Specifications Are ASTM Unless Otherwise Indicate d
Specified Min.
P-No. or Min. Min.
Strength, ksi
S-No. UNS Temp. , Temp.
Material Spec. No. (5) Grade No. Notes •F (6) Tensile Yield to 100 200 300
Carbon Steel
Pipes and Tubes (2)
A 53 1 B I<D3005 (57)(59) B 60 35 20.0 20.0 20.0
.aw..
A333
CD
1
~
6
I<D3006
I<D3006
(57)
(57)
B
- 50
60
60
35
35
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
A334 6 I<D3006 (57) -50 60 35 20.0 20.0 20.0
A369 1 FFB I<D3006 (57) -20 60 35 20.0 20.0 20.0
A381 S-1 Y35 A 60 35 20.0 20.0 20.0
.AA 5L S-1 B (57)(59)(77) B 60 35 20.0 20.0 20.0
Since ASTM A106/A106M Grade B is a P-No. 1 and the ambient temperature is below 32°F, then the
recommended preheat of 175°F in Table 330.1.1 becomes mandatory in accordance with 330.1.1.
Table 330.1.1 Preheat Temperatures
Base
Specified Min.
Metal Weld M etal Min. Temperature
Nominal Wall Tensile Strength,
P-No. or Analysis
Thickness Base M etal Required Recommended
S·No. A·No.
[Note (l)J [Note ( 2)) Base Metal Group mm in. MPa ksi •c Of •c •f
.1. Carbon steel < 25 <1 $490 $71 10 50

;;: 25
All
...u
All
All
> 490
All
>71
<:ZCJE>
79 1 75
3 2, 11 Alloy steels, <13 <~ $490 s 71 10 50

CrS~% <!:13 ;;:~ All All 79 175
All All > 490 > 71 79 175
4 3 Alloy steels, All All All All 149 300

~%< CrS 2%
The preheat re uirement from Table 330.1.1 is 175°F (79°C) minimum.
Notebook Page 425

Example 016: Preheat Requirements
What is the B31.3 preheat requirement for 10 in. O.D. , Schedule 80 (0.594 in.), ASTM A335/A335M
Grade Pll seamless piping material?
Table A-1 Basic Allowable Stresses in Tension for Metals1 (Cont'd)

Numbers in Parentheses Refer to Notes for Appendix A Tables; Specifications Are ASTM Unless Otherwise Indicated
Min. Specified Min.

P..No. or Min.
Strength, ksi
S.No. Temp .. Temp.
Material Spec. No. (5) Grade Notes °F (6) Tensile Yield to 100 200
Low and Intermediate Alloy Steel

Pipes (2)
Y2Cr-Y2Mo A 335 3 P2 - 20 55 30 18.3 18.3
Y2Cr-Y2Mo A 691 3 Y2CR (11 )(67) -20 55 33 18.3 18.3
A 387 Gr. 2 Ct 1
C-Y2Mo A 335 3 P1 (58) - 20 55 30 18.3 18.3

C-Y2Mo A 369 3 FP1 (58) - 20 55 30 18.3 18.3
%Cr-Y2Mo A 369 3 FP2 - 20 55 30 18.3 18.3
1Cr-Y2Mo A691 4 1CR (11)(67) - 20 55 33 18.3 18.3
A 387 Gr. 12 Cl. 1
Y2Cr-Y2Mo A 426 3 CP2 (10) - 20 60 30 18.4 17.7

1Y2Si-Y2Mo A 335 3 P15 - 20 60 30 18.8 18.2
1Y2Si-Y2Mo A 426 3 CP15 (10) - 20 60 30 18.8 18.2
1Cr-Y2Mo A 426 4 CP12 (10) - 20 60 30 18.8 18.3
SCr-Y2Mo-1 Y2Si A 426 56 CP5b (10) - 20 60 30 18.8 17.9

3Cr-Mo A 426 SA CP21 (10) - 20 60 30 18.8 18.1
:Y.cr-7'-Ni-Cu-AJ A 333 4 4 - 150 60 35 20.0 19.1

2Cr-Y2Mo A 369 4 FP3b -20 60 30 20.0 18.5
1Cr-Y2Mo A 335 4 P12 - 20 60 32 20.0 18.7

1Cr-Y2Mo A 369 4 FP12 - 20 60 32 20.0 18.7
1%Cr-Y2Mo
1Y4Cr-Y2Mo
A 335
A 369
CD
4
ill
FP1 1
- 20
-20
60
60
30
30
20.0
20.0
18.7
18.7
Using the P-No., the required minimum preheat temperature can be read from Table 330.1.1.

Base
Specified Min.
Metal Weld Metal Min. Temperature
P· No. or Analysi.s
Thickness Base Metal Req uired Recommended
S·No. A·No.
[Note (1)) [Note (2)] Base Metal Group mm in. MPa ksl •c "F •c "F
carbon steel < 25 <1 s 490 S71 10 50
~ 25 ~ 1 All All 79 175
All All > 490 >71 79 175
3 2, 11 Alloy steels. <13 <Y, s 490 s 71 10 50

Cr S Y,% <:13 <:Y, All All 79 175
All All > 490 > 71 79 175
4 3 Alloy steels,
Y,% < Cr s 2%
All All All All
~
@> Co d es and Standa rd s Training Institute (CAST!)
Notebook Page 426

Practice Problem 017: Preheat Requirements
What is the B31.3 preheat requirement for NPS 10, Schedule 80 (0.594 in.), ASTM A335/A335M
Grade PI seamless piping material when welding at an ambient temperature of 0°F?
a) 50°F
b) 150°F
c) 175°F
d) 200°F
e) 250°F
Notebook Page 427

Heat Treatment Requirements 1]331
C)l331.1.1 imposes the following heat treatment requirements:
1) Heat treatment shall be in accordance with the material groupings and thickness ranges in
Table 331.1.1 except as provided in C)l331.2.1 and C)l33 1.2.2.
2) Heat treatment to be used after production welding shall be specified in the WPS and shall
be used in qualifying the welding procedure.
3) The engineering design shall specify the examination and/or other production quality controls
(not less than the requirements of B31.3) to ensure that the final welds are of adequate quality.
4) Heat treatment for bending and forming shall be in accordance with <J[332.4.
5) See Table 302.3.5 for special heat treatment requirements for longitudinal or spiral welds in
El·e vated Temperature Fluid Service.
The following Example and Practice Problem illustrate how to determine the post-weld heat
treatment requirement given a pipe material and size.

What are the ASME B31.3 PWHT requirements for 10 in. O.D., Schedule 140 (1.000 in.),
ASTM A106/A106M Grade B seamless piping material?

Numbers in Parentheses Refer to Notes for Appendix A Tables; Speci fi cations Are ASTM Unless Otherwise Indicated
P-No. or Min. Specified Min. Min.

Strength, ksi
S-No. UNS Temp., Temp.
Material Spec. No. (5) Grade No. Notes °F (6) Tensile Yield to 100 200 300
Carbon Steel
Pipes and Tubes (2)
A 53 1 B 1<03005 (57)(59) B 60 35 20.0 20.0 20.0
A 106 CD ....§._ 1<03006 (57) 8 60 35 20.0 20.0 20.0
A333 1 6 1<03006 (57) - 50 60 35 20.0 200 20.0
A334 6 1<03006 (57) -50 60 35 20·.0 20.0 20.0
A369 1 FPB 1<03006 (57) - 20 60 35 20·.0 20.0 20.0
A381 &1 'r35 A 60 35 20.0 20.0 20.0
AA 5L S-1 B (57)(59)(77) B 60 35 20.0 20.0 20.0
The metal temperature range for a P-No. 1 material over thickness of 0.750 in. can be read from
Table 331.1.1.
Table 331.1.1 Requirements for Heat Treatment
Specified Min. Holding Time
Base
Metal Weld Metal
Tensile
Brlnell
Nominal Wall Strength, Nominal Wall
P·No. Anatysis Min. Hardness.
or S·No. A·Number
Thk kness Base Metal Metal Temperature Range [Note (J ))
Time, Max.
[Note (1)) [Note (2)) Base Metal Group mm ln. MPa lui •c Of min/mm hr/in. hr [N ote(~))
,; 20 s: %
~
Carbon steel All All None
> 20 >% All All 593-649 0 2.4
0 0
2, 11 Alloy steels, ~ 20 s: :Y,. ~ 490 ~ 71 None None
Cr s Y2% > 20 >~ All All 593- 718 1,100-1,325 2.4 225
All All >490 > 71 593- 718 1,100- 1,325 2.4 225
From Table 331.1.1, the PWHT metal temperature range is 1,100-1,200°F; the minimum holding
time is 1 h our.
Notebook Page 428

ASTM A335/A335M Grade Pll seamless piping material?

Numbers in Parentheses Refer to Notes for Append ix A Tables; Specifications Are ASTM Unless Otherwise Indicated
Specified Min.
P-N:l. or Min. Min.
Strength, ksi
S.No. Temp., Temp.
Material Spec. No. (5) Grade Notes °F (6) Tensile Yield to 100 200

Pipes (2)
%Cr-Y2Mo A 335 3 P2 -20 55 30 18.3 18.3
Y2Cr-Y2Mo A691 3 Y2CR (11)(67) -20 55 33 18.3 18.3
A 387 Gr. 2 Cl. 1
C-Y2Mo A 335 3 P1 (58) -20 55 30 18.3 18.3

C-Y2Mo A 369 3 FP1 (58) - 20 55 30 18.3 18.3
Y2Cr-Y2Mo A 369 3 FP2 -20 55 30 18.3 18.3
1cr- Y2Mo A 691 4 1CR (11)(67) - 20 55 33 18.3 18.3
A 387 Gr. 12 Cl. 1
%Cr-%Mo A 426 3 CP2 (10) -20 60 30 18.4 17.7

1Y2Si-Y2Mo A 335 3 P15 - 20 60 30 18.8 18.2
1Y2 Si- Y2 Mo A 426 3 CP15 (10) - 20 60 30 18.8 18.2
1Cr- Y2Mo A 426 4 CP12 (10) - 20 60 30 18.8 18.3
5Cr- Y2 Mo-1Y2Si A426 5B CP5b (10) - 20 60 30 18.8 17.9

3Cr-Mo A 426 5A CP21 (10) - 20 60 30 18.8 18.1
%Cr-%Ni-Cu- AI A 333 4 4 - 150 60 35 20.0 19.1

2Cr-Y2Mo A 369 4 FP3b - 20 60 30 20.0 18.5
1Cr- Y2Mo A 335 4 P12 - 20 60 32 20.0 18.7

1Cr- Y2Mo A369 4 FP12 - 20 60 32 20.0 18.7
1Y4 Cr-Y2 Mo
1Y.c r-Y2Mo
A335
A 369
04 P1 1
FP11
-20
-20
60
60
30
30
20.0
20.0
18.7
18.7
The metal temperature range for a P-No. 4 material containing 114Cr with a thickness of 0.750 in .
can be read from Table 331.1.1.

Spoclfied Min. Holding Time
Base
Tensile
Metal Weld Metal Brinell
P·No. Analysis Nominal Wall Strength, Nominal Wall Min. Hardness.
Thickness Base Metal Metal Temperature Ranp (Note (3)) Max.
or S·No. A· Number Time,
(Note (1)] [Note (2)) Base Metal Group mm ln. MPa ksl •c 'f mln/mm hr/ ln. hr [Note (4)]
Carbon steel s 20 s 3/ , All All None None

> 20 >Y, All All 593- 649 1.100- 1,200 2.4
2, 11 Alloy steels, s 20 sY, S490 s 71 None None

Cr s Y,% > 20 > •;.. All All 593-718 1.100-1.32 5 2.4 225
All All > 490 > 71 593- 718 1.100-1,325 2.4 225
.!.[Note (5)] Alloy ste<!ls, S13 s ';, , 490 S 71 None

Y,% <Crs 2% > 13 2..Yz... All AIL 704-746 2.4 2 225
AIL All > 490 > 71 704- 746 2.4 225
From Table 331.1.1, the PWHT met al temperature range is 1,300-1,375°F; the minimum holding
t ime is 2 hours, with a maximum hardness of 225 HBW (see 331.1.7).
Notebook Page 429

Practice Problem 020: Post-Weld Heat Treatment Requirement
ASTM A335/A335M Grade P22 seamless piping material?
a) none required
b) metal temperature range is 1,300-1,400°F; the minimum holding time is 2 hours; and the
maximum hardness is 241 HBW
c) metal temperature range is 1,250°F; the minimum holding time is 36 minutes
d) metal temperature range is 1,250°F; the minimum holding time is 36 minutes; and the
maximum hardness is 241 HBW
e) as required in the material specification
Notebook Page 430

Solutions
For ASME 8 31 .3 Practice Problems
Notebook Page 431

Answer Key - ASME 831.3 Practice Problems
Practice
Q1: a 328.1
Q2: d 328.3.2(a)
Q3: b 328.3.1
Q4: c 328.4.1
Q5: c 328.4.3(d)
Q6: b 328.5.1(c)
Q7: d 328.5.1(e)
Q8: b 328.5.2, Fig. 328.5.2
Q9: d 328.5.3
Q10: c Table 341.3.2
Qll: e 341.3.3
Q12: c 330.1.1
Q13: a 330.1.2
Q14: a 330.1.4
Q17: c 330.1.1, Table 330.1.1
Q20: b Table 331.1.1
Notebook Page 432

Practice Problem Q8: Socket Weld [SOLUTION]
The fit-up gap between the end of the pipe and the bottom of the socket of a socket weld joint used in
process piping shall be approximately:
From Figures 328.5.2B and 328.5.20, the fit-up gap should be approximately 1116 in.
~ The le-sser of -Tor 6 mm ( 1/4 In .I

approx, gap
before weldi ng
{1) Fron·t and Back Welds (21 Face and Back Welds (31 Socket Weldi ng Flange
X.,..,_ = the lesser of 1.47' or the thickness of the hub
Fig. 328.5.28 Typical Details for Double-Welded Slip-On and Socket Welding Flange Attachment Welds
t • p ressure design thickness

(sea para. 304.1)
1.5m~
approx. gap
Cx (min. I e 11f4t but not before welding
less than 3 mm (1/a in.)
Fig. 328.5.2( Minimum Welding Dimensions for Socket Welding Components Other Than Flanges
Notebook Page 433

Practice Problem 01 0: Weld Reinforcement [SOLUTION)
thickness of0.750 inch in normal fluid service?
The maximum reinforcement can be read from Table 341.3.2:
Table 341.3.2 Acceptance Criteria for Welds and Examination Methods for Evaluating Weld Imperfections
Criteria (A to M) for Types of Welds and for Service Conditions (Note (1)1 Examination Methods
Normal and Catego!X M Auld
Service Severe CycUc Condlllons Category D Auld Service
Type of Weld Type of Weld Type of Weld
::::
""~ ~
I! I! ..
C!.
"'"'
olfC!. "'"'
....
ode!. ~
0
~
li ~
e
>-
2!
~
0
0
"'!!
e ~
e
e
0
""~
..
~
"'"
-
:~
0
"'~8 ~
!l .. ..,
"'e
- 0
~
~~
~
.. i "'
..
..,~8
~
!l ~
.s
>
~ :. ~
:..,e
:E~
~~
0
~
:=
:E~
v
~i ~
0 "11 .. f.o
0
~
~ ..;;:
a.
e. i
!13 ~8
0
.. z
e- ~ r~ .!1 ~
e~ ~ ...I! ;; "::? 3
.3
"' \5 .s ~ "
<3 .s
"' Wel d Imperfection > ~ :IE "
::l
A A A A A A A A A A Crack .t" .t" .t" .t"

A A A A A A c A N/A A Lack of fusion .t" .t" . .. . ..
8 A N/A A A N/A c A N/A 8 Incomplete penetration .t" .t" ...
E E N/A D D N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Internal porosity ... .t" ... .. .
Internal slag Inclusion. tungsten
inclusion, or elongated
G G N/A F f N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A indication ... .t" ... ...
H A H A A A I A H H Undercutting .t" .t" .. . ...
Surface porosity or exposed slag
A A A A A A A A A A inclusion (Note (S)I .t" ... ... ...
N/A N/A N/A J J J N/A N/A N/A N/A Surface finish .t" ... .. . ...
Concave root surface
K K N/A K K N/A K K N/A K (suck up) / I .. . ...
.Yl1kl rtlnforcement or Internal
l l l L L L M M M M protrusion .t" .. . . .. ..
Criterion Value Notes for Table 341.3.2
Criterion
Symbol Measure Acceptable Value Limits (Note (6)1
A Extent of imperfection Zero (no evident imperfection)

Depth of incomplete penetration s I mm (Y,, in.) and S 0.2Tw
Cumulative length of Incomplete penetration S 38 mm (1.S In,) in any I SO mm (6 in.) weld length
Depth of lack of fusion and incomplete penetration s 0.21',
Cumulative length of tack of fusion and incomplete s 38 mm (l.S i n.) in any ISO mm (6 ln.) weld length
penetration (Note (7)1
0 Size and distribution of intema1 porosity See BPV Code, Section VIII, Division 1. Appendix 4
Size and distribution of internal porosity For Tw S 6 mm CYt. in.), limit is same as 0
For Tw > 6 mm (';.ln.), limit Is l.S x 0
Slag Inclusion, tungsten Inclusion, or elongated Indication
Individual length ST./3
Individual width s 2.S mm W, ln.) and s T./3
Cumulative length ~ T.. in any tiT\.,. weld length
G Slag inclusion, tungsten inclusion, or elongated indication
Individual length S 2Tw
Individual width s 3 mm ('Ia in.) and s T. /2
Cumulative length S 4Tw In any ISO mm (6 ln.) weld length
Depth of undercut s I mm (Y, inJ and s T.,/4
Depth of undercut s 1.5 mm ('/,,in.) and s (f./4 or I mm <'!, ln.)(
Surface roughness s SDO min. R. i n aC(Ordance with ASME 846.1
K Depth of root surface concavity Total joint thickness, incl. weld reinf., ~ Tw
Height of reinforcement or internal protrusion [Note (8)) in For T"' mm Gn.)
any plane through the weld shall be within limits or
the applicable height value In the tabulation at ri gh~ s 6 <Y.>
except as provided In Note (9). Weld metal shall merge > 6 <Y.l. s 13 ( 1/ ,)
smoothly into the component surfaces. > 13 ('/,), s 25 (1)
> lS (1)
M Height of reinforcement or internal protrusion (Note (8)) limit is twice the value applicable for l above
as described in L Note (9) does not apply.
The maximum reinforcement is 5/32 in.
Notebook Page 434

Practice Problem 017: Preheat Requirements [SOLUTION]
What is the B31.3 preheat requirement for NPS 10, Schedule 80 (0.594 in.), ASTM A3.35/A335M
Grade Pl seamless piping material when welding at an ambient temperature of 0°F?
From Table A-1, the P-No. for this material is 3.

Numbers in Parentheses Refer to Notes fo r Appendix A Tables; Specifications Are ASTM Unless Otherwise Indicated
P..f\b. or Min. Specified Min. Min.

Strength, ksi
8-f\b. Temp., Temp.
Material Spec. No. (5) Grade Notes OF (6) Tensile Yield to 100 200

Pipes (2)
%Cr- Y2 Mo A 335 3 P2 -20 55 30 18.3 18.3
Y2 Cr_J/2 Mo A 691 3 Y2CR (11)(67) - 20 55 33 18.3 18.3
A 38 7 Gr 2 Cl. 1
C-Y2 Mo
C- Y2 Mo
A335
A 369
CD
3
£.1
FP1
(58)
(58)
- 20
- 20
55
55
30
30
18.3
18.3
18.3
18.3
Y2Cr-Y2Mo A 369 3 FP2 -20 55 30 18.3 18.3
1Cr-Y2Mo A 691 4 1CR (1 1)(67) - 20 55 33 18.3 18.3
A 387 Gr. 12 Cl. 1
The P-No. for any given material is also found in Appendix D of ASME IX.
The minimum preheat t emperature can be read off ofTable 330.1.1. The material has a base metal
group Cr ~ 1/2%, and NPS 10 Sch 80 pipe has a nominal thickness ~ 1h in.

Base
Metal Weld Metal Specified Min.
Min. Temperature
P·No. or Analysis Nominal Wall Tensile Strength,
A·N(). Thickness Base Metal Required Recommended
S-No.
[Not e (1)) [Note (2)] Base Metal Group mm in. MPa ksl •c Of •c Of
Carbon steel < 25 <1 ~ 490 ~ 71 10 50

~ 25 ~ 1 All All 79 175
AU All > 490 >71 79 175
3 2, 11 Alloy steels, <13 <~ ~ 490 ~71 10 50

Crs ~% ~ 13 ~~ All All 79 @)
All All > 490 > 71 79 175
The preheat requirement from Table 330.1.1 is 175°F (149°C) minimum, since 'J[330.1.1 requires that
when the ambient temperature is below ooc (32°F), the recommendations in Table 330.1.1 become
requirements.
©Codes and Standards Training Institute (C ASTI)
Notebook Page 435

Practice Problem 020: Post-Weld Heat Treatment Requirement [SOLUTION]
ASTM A335/A335M Grade P22 seamless piping material?
The P-No. for this material can be read from ASME Sec. IX Table QW/QB-422.
QW/QB-422 FERROUS/NONFERROUS P-NUMBERS (CONT'Dl
Grouping of Base Metals lor Qualification
Ferrous CCONT'Dl
Spe<:ilied ISO
Spec. No. Type or Grade No. ksi CMPal No. No. P- No. Group Nominal Composition Product Form
5A· 312 TP321 532100 70 (485) 8 102 8.l 18Cr-10NI- TI Sml$, & welded pipe > ~ in. (10 mm>
SA·312 TP321 532100 75 (515} 8 102 8.1 l8Cr- IONI- Ti Smls. & welded pipes% in. ClO rnm)
SA-312 TP321 532100 75 (515) 8 102 8.1 18Cr-10NI- TI 5mls. & welded pipe
5A· 312 TP321H 532109 70 (485) 8 102 8.1 18Cr- ION1- Tl 5mls. & welded pipe >\ in. 110 mm>
5A· 312 TP321H 532109 75 (515) 8 102 8.1 18Cr-10N1- Tl Smls. & welded pipeS:% in. {10 mm)
SA-312 TP321H 532109 75 (515) 8 102 8.1 18Cr- 10NI-TI Welded pipe
SA· 312 534565 534565 115 (795} 8 102 8.) 24Cr- 17 NI- 6Mn-4.5Mo-N Smls & welded pipe
SA-312 TP347 534700 75 (515} 8 102 8.1 18Cr-10N1- Cb 5mls. & welded pipe
SA· 312 TP347H 534709 75 (515) 8 102 8.1 18Cr-10N1- Cb 5mls. & welded pipe
5A·312 TP348 534800 75 (515> 8 102 8.1 18Cr·10NI· Cb 5mls. & welded pipe
SA· 312 TP348H 534809 75 (515) 8 102 8.1 18Cr- 10N1- Cb 5mls. & welded pipe
5A· 312 TPXM- 15 538100 75 (SIS> 8 102 8.1 18Cr-18NI- 2SI Smls. & ...,lded pipe
SA· J)3 K03006 60(415) 101 11.1 c-M,..SI Smls. & welded pipe
SA· 333 K03008 55 (380> 101 11.1 C- Mn Smls. & welded pipe
SA-333 10 80 (550) 1 101 ll.1 C Mn -SI Smls. & welded pipe
SA-3)3 Kll267 60 (415) 4 102 4.1 0.75Cr-0.75N H:~>-AI Smls. & ""'lded pipe
5A·333 K2190) 65 (450) 9A 101 9.1 2.5NI Smls. & ,..lded pipe
SA· 333 K22035 63 (4)5) 9A 101 9.1 2NI-1Cu Smls. & ""'lded pipe
5A·333 K)l918 65 (450) 98 101 9.2 3.5NI Smls. & ,..lded pipe
SA-333 1<81340 100 (690) llA 101 9.3 9NI Smls. & ,..lded pipe
SA-334 1<03006 60 (415) 101 11.1 t-Mn-Si Welded wbe
SA· 334 1(0)008 55 ()80) 101 11.1 C- Mn Welded Wbe
SA-334 K21903 65 (450) 9A 101 9.1 2.5NI Welded Wbe
SA 334 K220)5 6) (4)5) 9A 101 9.1 2NI-1Cu Welded wbe
SA· 334
SA-334
'8
3 K31918
K81340
65 (450)
100 (690)
98
llA
101
101
9.2
9. 3
3.5NI
9HI
Welded wbt
Welded tube
5A·335 PI K11522 55 (380) 3 101 1.1 C-o.SMo Smls. pipe:
5A·3)5 P2 Kll547 55 ()80) 3 101 4.2 0.5Cr-o.5Mo Smls. pipe
SA·335 P12 K11562 60 (415) 102 5.1 1Cr-o.5Mo Smls. pipe
SA·335 PIS KIIS78 60 (4151 101 1.551-o.sMo Smls. pipe
SA-335 Pll Kll597 60 (415) 4 102 5.1 1.25Cr-o.5Mo-SI Smls. pipe
~ P22 K21590 60(415l@ 102 5.2 2.25Cr-1Mo Smls. pipe

SA·)35 P21 K31545 60 (415> SA 102 5.2 3Cr- 1Mo Smts. pipe
SA·335 P5c K41245 60 (415} 58 102 5.3 SCr-O.SMo- TI Smls. pipe
5A·335 P5 K41545 60 (415) 5 8 102 5.3 5Cr- 0.5Mo Smls. pipe
SA· 335 PSb KS1545 60 (415) 58 102 5.3 5Cr- 0.5Mo- SI Smls. pipe
The metal temperature range for a P-No. 5A material with a thickness of 0.594 in. can be read from
Table 331.1.1.
Table 331.1.1 Requirements for Heat Treat ment
Specifitd Min. Holdins Time
Base
Tensile
Metal Weld Metal 8rineU
P· No. Analysis Min. Hardness,
Thickness Bast Molal Mttal Ttmptr1turo Rance (Note (J )J
or 5-Ho. A· Number Time. Mu.
(Note (I)) (Note (l)J Base Metal Group mm ln. MPa ksl •c •r mln/mm h r/in. hr (Note (4)1
Carbon steel s 10 s \1. All All None None

> 20 > \1, All All 593-649 1,1D0-1.200 2.4
2. 11 Alloy steels, s 10 s~ s 490 s 71 None None

ers \1,% > 20 >~ All All 593-718 l.IOD-1,325 2.4 225
All All > 490 > 71 593- 718 I.IOD-1.325 2.4 225
4 (Note (S)J Aloy steels, Sl3 s \1, S490 S71 None None
'/,% < Cr s 2% >13 >~ All All 704- 746 1.3D0-1,37S 2.4 225
All All > 490 > 71 704- 746 1,30D-1,375 2.4 225
2. 58, sc 4. s Alloy sleets (l'/.% s Cr s 10%)

sn
~
(Note (S)J S 3% Cr and S 0.15% C s'/, All All None
S 3% Cr and S 0.15% C >13 >\I, All All 704-760 2.4 d) @
>3%Cror>0.1S%C All All All All 704-760 . ' 2.4 2 241
From Table 331.1.1, the PWHT metal temperature range is 1,300-1,400°F; the minimum holding
time is 2 hours, with a maximum hardness of241 HBW (see 331.1.7).
~ Codes and Standards Training Institute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 436

ASME 831.3-2010
Chapter V
Fabrication, Assembly, and Erection
327 GENERAL backing rings, are used, their suitability shall be demon-
strated by procedure qualification, except that a proce-
Metallic piping materials and components are pre- dure qualified without use of a backing ring is also
pared for assembly and erection by one or more of the qualified for use with a backing ring in a single-welded
fabrication processes covered in paras. 328,330,331,332, butt joint.
and 333. When any of these processes is used in assembly (j) To reduce the number of welding procedure quali-
or erection, requirements are the same as for fabrication . fications required, P-Numbers or S-Numbers, and
Group Numbers are assigned, in the BPV Code, Sec-
tion IX, to groupings of metals generally based on com-
position, weldability, and mechanical properties, insofar
328 WELDING as practicable. The P-Numbers or S-Numbers for most
metals are listed for the convenience of the Code user
Welding shall conform to paras. 328.1 through 328.6 in in a separate column in Table A-1. See Section IX, QWI
accordance with applicable requirements of para. 311.2. QB-422, for Group Numbers for respective P-Numbers
and S-Numbers. Use of Section IX, QW-420.2,. is required
for this Code.
328.1 Welding Responsibility
328.2.2 Procedure Qualification by Others. Each
Each employer is responsible for the welding done employer is responsible for qualifying any welding pro-
by the personnel of his/ her organization and, except as cedure that personnel of the organization will use. Sub-
provided in paras. 328.2.2 and 328.2.3, shall conduct the ject to the specific approval of the Inspector, welding
tests required to qualify welding procedures, and to procedures qualified by others may be used, provided
qualify and as necessary requalify welders and welding that the following conditions are met:
operators. (a) The Inspector shall be satisfied that
(1) the proposed welding procedure specification
(WPS) has been prepared, qualified, and executed by a
328.2 Welding Qualifications
responsible, recognized organization with expertise in
the field of welding
328.2.1 Qualification Requirements
(2) the employer has not made any change in the
(a) Qualification of the welding procedures to be used welding procedure
and of the performance of welders and welding opera-
(b) The base material P-Number is either 1, 3, 4 Gr.
tors shall conform to the requirements of the BPV Code,
Section IX except as modified herein. No. 1 (1~ Cr max.), or 8; and impact testing is not
required.
(b) Where the base meta l will not withstand the
180 deg guided bend required by Section IX, a qualifying (c) Th e base metals to be joined are of the same
welded specimen is required to undergo the same degree P-Number, except that P-Nos. 1, 3, and 4 Gr. No. 1 may
of bending as the base metal, within 5 deg. be welded to each other as permitted by Section IX.
(c) The requirements for preheating in para. 330 and (d) The material to be welded is not more than 19 mm
for heat treatment in para. 331, as well as such require- (% in.) in thickness. Postweld heat treatment shall not
ments in the engineering design, shall apply in qualify- be required.
ing welding procedures. (e) The design pressure does not exceed the ASME
(d) When impact testing is required by the Code or 616.5 Class 300 rating for the material at design tempera-
the engineering design, those requirements shall be met ture; and the design temperature is in the range - 29°C
in qualifying welding procedures. to 399°C (-20°F to 750°F), inclusive.
(e) If consumable inserts [Fig. 328.3.2 sketch (d), (e), (j) The welding process is SMAW or GTAW or a com-
(f), or (g)] or their integrally machined equivalents, or bination thereof.
58
Copyright© 20 11 by the American Society of Mechanical En2ineers. ~
~ e s.
No reproduction may be made of th is material without written consent of ASME. Notebook Page 437
ASME 831.3-2010
(g) Welding electrodes for the SMAW process are welding electrodes and filler metals used shall produce
selected from the following classifications: weld metal that complies with the following:
AWS A5.1 1 AWSA5.41 AWS A5.5 1 (a) The nominal tensile strength of the weld metal
shall equal or exceed the minimum specified tensile
E6010 E308-15, -16 E7010-A1
strength of the base metals being joined, or the weaker
E6011 E308L-15, -16 E7018-Al
E7015 E309-15, -16 E8016-B1
of the two if base metals of two different strengths are
E7016 £310-15, -16 £8018-Bl being joined.
E7018 E-16-8-2-15, -16 E8015-B2L (b) The nominal chemical analysis of the weld metal
£316-15, -16 E8016-B2 shall be similar to the nominal chemical analysis of the
E316L-15, -16 E8018-B2 major alloying elements of the base metal (e.g., 2Yt% Cr,
£347-15, -16 E8018-B2L
1% Mo steels should be joined using 2Y4% Cr, 1% Mo
(h) By signature, the employer accepts responsibility filler metals).
for both the WPS and the procedure qualification record (c) If base metals of different chemical analysis are
(PQR). being joined, the nominal chemical analysis of the weld
(i) The employer has at least one currently employed metal shall be similar to either base metal or an interme-
welder or welding operator who, while in his/her diate composition, except as specified below for austen-
employ, has satisfactorily passed a performance qualifi- itic steels joined to ferritic steels.
cation test using the procedme and the P-Number mate- (d) When austenitic steels are joined to ferritic steels,
rial specified in the WPS. The performance bend test the weld metal shall have a predominantly austenitic
required by Section IX, QW-302 shall be used for this microstructure.
purpose. Qualification by radiography is not acceptable. (e) For nonferrous metals, the weld metal shall be that
328.2.3 Performance Qualification by Others. To recommended by the manufacturer of the nonferrous

avoid duplication of effort, an employer may accept a base metal or by industry associations for that metal.
performance qualification made for another employer, 328.3.2 Weld Backing Material. When backing rings
provided that the Inspector specifically approves. are used, they shall conform to the following:
Acceptance is limited to qualification on piping using (a) Ferrous Metal Backing Rings. These shall be of
the same or equivalent procedure wherein the essential weldable quality. Sulfur content shall not exceed 0.05%.
va riabl es are within the limits in Section IX. The
(b) If two abutting surfaces are to be welded to a third
employer shall obtain a copy from the previous
member used as a backing ring and one or two of the
employer of the performance qualification test record,
three members are ferritic and the other member or
showing the name of the employer, name of the welder
members are austenitic, the satisfactory use of such
or welding operator, procedure identification, date of
materials shall be demonstrated by welding procedure
successful qualification, and the date that the individual
qualified as required by para. 328.2.
last used the procedme on pressure piping.
Backing rings may be of the continuous machined or
328.2.4 Qualification Records. The employer shall split-band type. Some commonly used types are shown
maintain a self-certified record, available to the owner in Fig. 328.3.2.
(and the owner's agent) and the Inspector, of the proce- (c) Nonferrous and Nonmetallic Backing Rings. Backing
dures used and the welders and welding operators rings of nonferrous or nonmetallic material may be used,
employed, showing the date and results of procedure provided the designer approves their use and the weld-
and performance qualifications, and the identification ing procedure using them is q ualified as required by
symbol assigned to each welder and welding operator. para. 328.2.
328.3 WeMing Materials 328.3.3 Consumable Inserts. Consumable inserts
(10) 328.3.1 Electrodes and Filler Metal. Welding elec- may be used, provided they are of the same nominal
trodes and filler metal, including consumable inserts, composition as the filler metal, w ill not cause detrimen-
shall conform to the requirements of the ASME Boiler tal alloying of the weld metal, an.d the welding procedure
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section II, Part C. An electrode using them is qualified as required by para. 328.2. Some
or filler metal not conforming to the above may be used commonly used types are shown in Fig. 328.3.2.
provided the WPS and the welders who will follow the
WPS have been qualified as required by ASME 328.4 Preparation for Welding
Section IX. Un less otherwise specified by the Designer, 328.4.1 Cleaning. Internal and external surfaces to
1
be thermally cut or welded sha ll be clean and free from
AWS A5.1, Ca rbo n Steel Elect ro d es fo r Shi eld ed Me tal Arc paint, oil, rust, scale, and other material that would be
Welding; AWS A5.4, Stainless Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal
Arc Welding; and AWS AS.S, Low Alloy Steel Covered Arc Weld i.ng detrimental to either the weld or the base metal when
Electrodes. heat is applied.
59
Copyright© 201 1 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ~
ASME 831.3-201 0
Fig. 328.3.2 Typical Backing Rings and Consumable Inserts
:·, : ;. :. ·.·.·
c:tCJ ~·
(c) Nonmetallic Removable

Backing Ring ( Refractory )
3 mmto5 mm
(1Js
in. to 3J,s in.)
(a) Butt Joint With Bored Pi pe Ends

and Solid or Split Backing Ring [Note ( 1) ] (d ) Square Ring or Round
Wire T ype
~ (e) f l at Rectangul ar R ing
Typical
Consumabl e
Inserts
(f ) Formed Ring Type
3 mmto5mm
11fa in. t o 3t, 6 in.)
(b) Butt Joint With Taper-Bored Ends (g) Y-Type

and Solid Backing Ring [Note (1))
NOTE:
(1) Refer to ASM E 816.25 fo r detailed dimensional in formation on welding ends.
328.4.2 End Preparation (4) Where necessary, weld metal may be deposited
(a) General inside or outside of the component to permit alignment
(1) End preparation is acceptable only if the surface or provide for machining to ensure satisfactory seating
is reasonably smooth and true, and slag from oxygen of rings or inserts.
or arc cutting is cleaned from thermally cut surfaces. (5) When a girth or miter groove weld joins compo-
Discoloration remaining on a thermally cut surface is nents of unequal wall thickness and one is more than
not considered detrimental oxidation. 1~ times the thickness of the other, end preparation and
(2) End preparation for groove welds speci fied in geometry shall be in accordance with acceptable designs
ASME 816.25, or any other which meets the WPS, is for unequal wall thickness in ASME Bl6.25.
acceptable. [For convenience, the basic bevel angles of (6) Buttweld fittings manufactured in accordance
ASME B16.25 and some additional J-bevel angles are with ASME B16.9 may be trimmed to produce an angular
shown in Fig. 328.4.2 sketches (a) and (b).] joint offset in their connections to pipe or to other butt-
(b) Circumferential Welds weld fittings without being subject to design qualifica-
(1) If component ends are trimmed as shown in tions in accordance with para. 304.7.2 p rovid ed the total
Fig. 328.3.2 sketch (a) or (b) to fit backing rings or con- angular offset produced between the two jointed parts
sumable inserts, or as shown in Fig. 328.4.3 sketch (a) does not exceed 3 deg.
or (b) to correct internal misalignment, such trimming 328.4.3 Alignment
shall not reduce the finished wall thickness below the (a) Circumferential Welds
required minimum wall thickness, t111• (1) Inside surfaces of components at ends to be
(2) Component ends may be bored to allow for a joined in girth or miter groove welds shall be aligned
completely recessed back ing ring, p rov ided the within the dimensional limits in the WPS and the engi-
remaining net thickness of the finished ends is not less neering design.
than t111• (2) If the external surfaces of the components are
(3) It is permissible to size pipe ends of the same not aligned, the weld shall be tapered between them.
nominal size to improve alignment if wall thickness (b) Longitudinal Welds. Alignment of longitudinal
requirements are maintained. groove welds (not made in accordance with a standard
60
Copyright © 201 1 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ~.
No reproduction may be made of this material without wri tten consent of ASME. ~ Notebook Page 439
ASME 831.3-2010
listed in Table A-1 or Table 326.1) shall conform to the

Fig. 328.4.2 Typical Butt Weld End Preparation requirements of para. 328.4.3(a).
(c) Branch Connection Welds
(1) Branch connections which abut the outside sur-
face of the run pipe shall be contoured for groove welds
~
T
22 m m
which meet the WPS requirements [see Fig. 328.4.4
sketches (a) and (b)].
Pia in.)
(2) Branch connections which are inserted through
_L ~........,_,.....,_,_,._, a run opening shall be inserted at least as far as the
inside surface of the run pipe a t all points [see Fig. 328.4.4
sketch (c)] and shall otherwise conform to para.
328.4.3(c)(l).
(a ) Wall Thickness 6 mm to 22 mm,
(3) Run openings for branch connections shall not
Inclusive I 3/,s in. to 1! 8 in.)
deviate from the required contour more than the dimen-
sion m in Fig. 328.4.4. In no case shall deviations of the
shape of the opening cause the root spacing tolerance
limits in the WPS to be exceeded. Weld metal may be
added and refinished if necessary for compliance.
(d) Spacing. The root opening of the joint shall be
within the tolerance limits in the WPS.
328.5 Welding Requirements
328.5.1 General
(a) Welds, including addition of weld metal for align-
ment [paras. 328.4.2(b)(4) and 328.4.3(c)(3)], shall be
(b ) Wa ll Thickness Ov« 22 mm F/8 in.)
made in accordance with a qualified procedure and by
qualified welders or welding operators.
(b) Each qualified welder and welding operator shall
be assigned an identification symbol. Unless otherwise
specified in the engineering design, each pressure con-
taining weld or adjacent area shall be marked with the
identification symbol of the welder or welding operator.
In lieu of marking the weld, appropriate records shall
Fig. 328.4.3 Trimming and Permitted Misalignment be filed.
(c) Tack welds at the root of the joint shall be made
with filler metal equivalent to that used in the root pass.
Tack welds shall be made by a qualified welder or weld-
ing operator. Tack welds shall be fused with the root
pass weld, except that those which have cracked shall
be removed. Bridge tacks (above the weld) shall be
...... removed .
m isalignment .
See WPS.
'·,~ 30deg max. (d) Peening is prohibited on the root pass and final
pass of a weld.
(e) No welding shall be done if there is impingement
(a) Thicker Pipe Taper-Bored to Align on the weld area of rain, snow, sleet, or excessive wind,
or if the weld area is frosted or wet.
(j) Welding End Valves. The welding sequence and
procedure and any heat treatment for a welding end
valve shall be such as to preserve the seat tightness of
the valve.
328.5.2 Fillet and Socket Welds . Fillet welds
(including socket welds) may vary from convex to con-
misal ignment.
See WPS.
30 deg cave. The size of a fillet weld is determined as shown
max. in Fig. 328.5.2A.
(a) Typical weld details for slip-on and socket welding
(b) Th icker Pipe Bored fo r Al ignment flanges are shown in Fig. 328.5.28; minimum welding
61
Copyright © 20 ll by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ~
ASME 831.3·2010
Fig. 328.4.4 Preparation for Branch Connections
g ~ root gap per welding specification

m ~ t he lesser of 3.2 mm (1fs in.) or 0.5 rb
Fig. 328.5.2A Fillet Weld Size

Surface of perpendicular member Surface of perpendicular
vex fillet weld Size fillet weld
Size of Surface of Surface of
weld hori2ontal member horizontal member
Theoretical throat ~---
Theoretical throat
Equ al Leg Fillet Weld Unequal Leg Fillet Weld
GENERAL NOTE: The size of an equal leg fillet we ld is the leg GENERAL NOTE: The size of unequal leg fillet weld is the leg
length of th e largest inscribed isosceles right triangle (theoretical lengths of the largest right triangle which can be i nscribed
throat = 0.70 7 x size). within th e weld cross section [e.g., 13 mm x 19 mm C.t2 in.
x% in.)].
Fig. 328.5.28 Typical Details for Double-Welded Slip-On and Socket Welding Flange Attachment Welds
~ The lesser of -T or 6 mm ( 1/4 in.)

approx. gap
befo re welding
( 1) Front and Back Welds (2 ) Face and Bacl< Welds (3) Socket Welding F lange
xmln . = the lesser of 1.47or the thickness of the hub
62
Copyright© 2011 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. Notebook Page 441
ASME 831.3-2010
Fig. 328.5.2C Minimum Welding Dimensions for Socket Welding Components Other Than Flanges (to)
Cx(min.) = 1.09 fworthe thickness

ofthe socket wall,
w hichever is smaller
1+----++-- Socket wall t hickness
Figs. 328.5.4A, B, C Typical Welded Branch Connections
(al Without Added (bl Wit h Added (cl Angular Branch Without
Reinforcement Reinforcement Added Reinforcement
dimensions for other socket welding components are conform to the requirements herein. Welds shall be cal-
shown in Fig. 328.5.2C or MSS SP-119. culated in accordance with para. 304.3.3, but shall be
(b) If slip-on flanges are single welded, the weld shall not less than the sizes shown in Fig. 328.5.40.
be at the hub. (c) The nomenclature and symbols used herein and
in Fig. 328.5.40 are
328.5.3 Seal Welds. Seal welding shall be done by
Tb = nominal thickness of branch
a qualified welder. Seal welds shall cover all exposed
threads. T11 = nominal thickness of header
T, = nominal thickness of reinforcing pad or saddle
328.5.4 Welded Branch Connections tc = lesser of 0.7Tb or 6 mm (~ in.)
(n) Figures 328.5.4A through 328.5.4E show accept- tlnin = lesser of Tbor T,
able details of branch connections with and without
added reinforcement, in which the branch pipe is con- (d) Branch connections, including branch connection
nected directly to the run pipe. The illustrations are fittings (see paras. 300.2 and 304.3.2), which abut the
typical and are not intended to exclude acceptable types outside of the run or which are inserted in an opening
of construction not shown. in the run shall be attached by fully penetrated groove
(b) Figure 328.5.40 shows basic types of weld attach- welds. The welds shall be finished with cover fillet welds
ments used in the fabrication of branch connections. The having a throat dimension not less than t,. See
location and minimum size of attachment welds shall Fig. 328.5.40 sketches (1) and (2).
63
ASME 831.3-2010
Fig. 328.5.4D Acceptable Details for Branch Attachment Welds
o.sr,
(1) (2) (3)
(4) (5)
GENERAL NOTE: These sketches show minimum acceptable welds. Welds may be larger than those shown here.
Fig. 328.5.4E Acceptable Details for Branch Attachment Suitable for 100% Radiography
(1) Contour Outlet Fitting (2) Extruded Header Outlet
(e) A reinforcing pad or saddle shall be attached to strength equivalent to pad or saddle parent metal, and
the branch pipe by ei ther if each piece has a vent hole.
(1) a fully penetrated groove weld finished with a (h) Examination and any necessary repairs of the
cover fillet weld having a throat dimension not less than completed weld between branch and run shall be made
t0 or before adding a pad or saddle.
(2) a fillet weld having a throat dimension not less 328.5.5 Fabricated Laps. Figure 328.5.5 shows typi-
than 0.7tmin.· See Fig. 328.5.40 sketch (5) cal fabricated laps. Fabrication shall be in accordance
(j) The outer edge of a reinforcing pad or saddle shall with the applicable requirements of para. 328.5.4.
be attached to the run pipe by a fillet weld having a
throat dimension not less than O.ST,. See Fig. 328.5.40 328.5.6 Welding for Severe Cyclic Conditions. A
sketches (3), (4), and (5). welding procedure shall be employed which provides
(g) Reinforcing pads and saddles shall have a good a smooth, regular, fully penetrated inner surface.
fit with the parts to which they are attached. A vent
328.6 Weld Repair
hole shall be provided at the side (not at the crotch) of
any pad or saddle to reveal leakage in the weld between A weld defect to be repaired shall be removed to
branch and run and to allow venting during welding sound metal. Repair welds shall be made using a weld-
and heat treatment. A pad or saddle may be made in ing procedure qualified in accordance with para . 328.2.1,
more than one piece if joints between pieces have recognizing that the cavity to be repaired may differ in
64
Copyright © 20 II by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ~
No reproduction may be made of this material without wri tten consent of ASME. l.w.' Notebook Page 443
ASME 831.3 -2010
Fig. 328.5.5 Typical Fabricated Laps
_j_ j_
T
t--- T
r2 > r
i>f
0.7 ('7' - c)
r2 > T
/-r
(a) (b ) (c) (d ) (e)
GENERAL NOTE: Laps shall be machined (front and back) or trued after weldi ng. Plate flanges in accordance with para. 304.5 or lap join t
flanges in accordance with ASME B16.5 may be used. We lds may be machined to radius, as in sketch (e), if necessary to match ASME B16.5
lap joint fla nges.
contour and dimensions from the original joint. Repair discharge method of welding without welding proce-
welds shall be made by welders or welding operators dure and performance qualifications. After thermocou-
qualified in accordance with para. 328.2.1. Preheating ples are removed, the areas shall be visually examined
and heat treatment shall be as required for the original for evidence of defects to be repaired.
welding. See also para. 341.3.3.
330.1.4 Preheat Zone. The preheat zone shall
extend at least 25 mm (1 in.) beyond each edge of the
330 PREIHEATING weld.
330.1 General 330.2 Specific Requirements
Preheating is used, along with heat treatment, to mini- 330.2.3 Dissimilar Materials. When materials hav-
mize the detrimental effects of high temperature and ing different preheat requirements are welded together,
severe thermal gradients inherent in welding. The neces- it is recommended that the higher temperature shown
sity for preheating and the temperature to be used shall in Table 330.1.1 be used.
be specified in the engineering design and demonstrated 330.2.4 Interrupted Welding. If welding is inter-
by procedtue qualification. The requirements and rec- rupted, the rate of cooling shall be controlled or other
ommendations herein apply to all types of welding means shall be used to prevent detrimental effects in
including tack welds, repair welds, and seal welds of the piping. The preheat specified in the WPS shall be
threaded joints. applied before welding is resumed.
330.1 .1 Requirements and Recommendations.
Required and recommended minimum preheat temper- 331 HEAT TREATMENT
atures for materials of various P-Numbers are given in Heat treatment is used to avert or relieve the detrimen-
Table 330.1.1. If the ambient temperattue is below ooc tal effects of high temperature and severe temperature
(32°F), the recommendations in Table 330.1.1 become gradients inherent in welding, and to relieve residual
requirements. The thickness intended in Table 330.1.1 is stresses created by bending and forming. Provisions in
that of the thicker component measured at the joint. para. 331 are basic practices which are suitable for most
330.1.2 Unlisted Materials. Preheat requirements welding, bending, and forming operations, but not nec-
for an unlisted material shall be specified in the WPS. essarily appropriate for all service conditions.
330.1.3 Temperature Verification 331.1 General

(a) Preheat temperature shall be checked by use of 331.1.1 Heat Treatment Requirements
temperature indicating crayons, thermocouple pyrome- (a) Heat treatment shall be in accordance with the
ters, or other suitable means to ensure that the tempera- material groupings and thickness ranges in Table 331.1.1
ture specified in the WPS is obtained prior to and except as provided in paras. 331.2.1 and 331.2.2.
maintained during welding. (b) Heat treatment to be used after production weld-
(b) Thermocouples may be temporarily attached ing shall be specified in the WPS and shall be used in
directly to pressure containing parts using the capacitor qualifying the welding procedure.
65
ASME B31.3-2010
(10) Table 330.1.1 Preheat Temperatures

Base
Specified Min.
Metal Weld Metal Min. Temperature
P-No. or Analysis
Thickness Base Metal Requi red Recommended
S-No. A-No.
[Note (1)) [Note (2)) Base Metal Group mm ln. MPa ksi oc OF oc OF
1 1 Carbon steel < 25 < 1 $490 $ 71 10 50

~ 25 ~1 All All 79 175
All All > 490 > 71 79 175
3 2, 11 Alloy steels, <13 < t;; $490 $71 10 50

Cr s %% ~13 ~~ All All 79 175
All All > 490 >71 79 175
4 3 Alloy steels, All All All All 149 300

V2% < Cr ~ 2%
SA, 5B, 4, 5 Alloy steels, All All All All 177 350
sc 2lj,.% S Cr S10%
6 6 High alloy steels All All All All 14 94 3004

martensitic
7 7 High alloy steels All All All All 10 50

ferriti c
8 8, 9 High alloy steels All All All All 10 50

austenitic
9A, 9B 10 Nickel alloy steels All All All All 93 200
10 Cr- Cu steel All All All All 149- 204 300- 400
101 27Cr steel All All All All 1493 3003
llA SG 1 8 Ni, 9Ni steel All All All All 10 50
11A SG 2 SNi steel All All All All 10 50
15E 5 Alloy steels All All All All 204 400

9Cr- 1Mo- V
21 - 52 All All All All 10 50
NOTES:
(1) P-Number or S-Number from BPV Code, Section IX, QW/QB-422.
(2) A-N umber from Section IX, QW-442.
(3) Maintain interpass temp erature between 177°C- 232°C (350°F- 450°f).
(4) Maximum interpass temp erature 316°C (600°f).
66
Copyright © 20 11 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ~.
z
0
ro
CT
0
0
;7<:'
\J
Cll
<0
<1)
~
~
cr>

z
0 Specified Min. Holding Time
til (") Base
"Q 0 Metal Weld Metal Tensile Brinell
0"0
0..'< P-No. Analysis Nominal Wall Strength, Nominal Wall Min. Hardness,
c= """t
("")
-(]Q -· or S-No. A-Number Thickness Base Metal Metal Temperature Range [Note (3)] Time, Max.
-· :r
0 - [Note (1)] [Note (2)] Base Metal Group mm in. MPa ksi oc Of min/mm hr/in. hr [Note (4)]
~@
"'N
'< 0 1 1 Carbon steel ~ 20 ~% All All None None
o--
~
3 0"
- > 20 > J/4 All All 593-649 1,100- 1,200 2.4 1 1
"''<
o..- 3 2, 11 Alloy steels, $20 $% $490 $71 None None
0 ~
0 >- Cr ~ '/2% > 20 >% All All 593 - 718 1,100- 1,325 2.4 1 1 22 5
::::'3 All All > 490 > 71 593 - 718 1,100-1,325 2.4 1 1 225
=.en::1.
fJ)
3 £
)>
4 [Note (5)] 3 Alloy steels, $ 13 $ y2 $490 $ 71 None None ... . .. . .. .. . VI
~
g,
::1
~ 1;2% < Cr ~ 2% > 13 >% All All 704- 746 1,300- 1,375 2.4 1 2 22 5 ,..,
3::
"' ("") ~ All All > 490 > 71 704- 746 1,300- 1,375 2.4 1 2 22 5
.......,w
Cll
i~· 'I
9-o SA, 5B, 5C 4, 5 Alloy steels (2%% ~ Cr ~ 10%) ~

0 .....
~ ~ [Note (5)] $ 3% Cr and$ 0.15% C ~ 13 ~1;2 All All None None ... . .. . .. .. . ...
0
0
~ g $3% Cr and$ 0.1 5% C >13 >% All All 704-760 1,300-1,400 2.4 1 2 241
- "'o·
~.
<i'
:::s
::r
::1
> 3% Cr or > 0.15% C All All All All 704-760 1,300- 1,400 2.4 1 2 241
" "' I
0
:::1
-
trl
<J> :::1
G(]Q
6 6 High alloy steels martensitic
A 240 Gr. 429
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
732 - 788
62 1-663
1,350- 1,450
1,150-1,225
2.4
2.4
1
1
2
2
241
241
:::1 -·
- :::1
~~ I 7 7 High alloy steels ferri tic All All All All None None
>Yl
(/)
~
8 8, 9 High alloy steels austenitic All All All All None None
9A, 9B 10 Nickel alloy steels ~ 20 ~% All All None None

> 20 >% All All 593 - 635 1,100- 1,175 1.2 1;2 1
10 ... Cr- Cu steel All All All All 760-816 1,400-1,500 1.2 Yz Yz
[Note (6)) [Note (6)]
(10) Table 331.1.1 Requirements for Heat Treatment (Cont'd)
Specified Min. Holding Time
Base
Tensile Brinell
Metal Weld Metal
P-No. Analysis Min. Hardness,
~ or S-No. A-Number
Thickness Base Metal Metal Temperature Ra nge [Note (3)]
Time, Max.
Cil (") [Note (1)] [Note (2)) Base Metal Group mm in. M Pa ksi oc Of min/mm hr/in. hr [Note (4))
-g 0
0"0
0. '-<:
-·
s:: ....
(')
,...OQ
10H . .. Duplex stainless steel All All All All Note (7) Note (7) 1.2 v2 lh
-· ::r
0 -
:::> 101 ... 27Cr steel All All All All 663- 704 1,225-1,300 2.4
3@ [Note (8)) (Note (8))
"' 0N
'<
c:r-
<11
- c:r
- 11A SG 1 .. . 8Ni, 9Ni steel ::; 51 :>2 All All None None
::l«: > 51 >2 All All 552-58 5 1,025- 1,085 2.4 1 1
~~
(1>
..., [Note (9)) [Note (9))
0 > l>
::' a
=:.
"'
n llA SG 2 .. . 5Ni steel >51 >2 All All 55 2-585 1,025-1,085 2.4 1 1 . .. l.n
s:
m
3
....
~· [Note (9)) [Note (9))
g)
"'
:J.
o
(; {/)
0
I 00
a..
15E 5 Alloy steels All All All All 732- 77 4 1,350- 1.425 2.4 1 2 250
...
I.N
w
.:..
; o·
"'0
-·-<
9Cr-1 Mo-V
...
0
0
:T o
0 ...., 62 ... Zr R60705 All All All All 538- 593 1,000- 1,100 Note (1 0) Note (10) 1
s ;s::: [Note (10)) [Note (10))
~ n
.... 0
a· 5 NOTES:
g ~·
(')
0 - "'
:::> tr1
(1) P-Number or S·Number fro m BPV Code, Section IX, QW/ QB -422.
(2) A-Number from Section IX, QW-442.
"' :::>
<'>OQ (3) For holding time in 51 metric units, use min/m m (minutes per mm thickness). For U.S. units, use hr/in. thickness.
Q - ·
-
0 (1> :::> (4) See para. 331.1.7.
....,n
;J>;il (5) See Appendix F, para. F331.1.
{/)
(6) Cool as rapid ly as possible after the hold period.
~ (7) Postweld heat treatment is neither req uired nor prohibited, but any heat treatment applied shall be as requ ired in the material specification.
(8) Cooling rate to 649°C (1,200°F) shall be less than 56°C (100°F)/hr; thereafter, the cooling rate shall be fast enough to prevent embrittlement.
~ (9) Cooling rate shall be > 167°C (300°F)/hr to 316°C (600°F).

(10) Heat treat with in 14 days after welding. Hold time shall be increased by 1;2 hr fo r ea ch 25 mm (1 in.) over 25 mm thickness. Cool to 427°C (800°F) at a rate ::; 278°C
(500°F)/hr, per 25 mm (1 in.) nominal th ickness, 278°C (500°F)/hr max. Cool in still air from 427°C (800°F).
z
~
CD
cr
0
0
""-o
Q)
<0
CD
~
~
-.J
ASME 831.3- 2010
(c) The engineering design shall specify the examina- (3) not required for ferritic materials when welds
tion and/ or other production quality control (not less are made with filler metal which does not air harden.
than the requirements of this Code) to ensure that the Austenitic welding materials may be used for welds to
final welds are of adequate quality. ferritic materials when the effects of service conditions,
(d) Heat treatment for bending and forming shall be such as differential thermal expansion due to elevated
in accordance with para. 332.4. temperature, or corrosion, will not adversely affect the
(e) See Table 302.3.5 for special heat treatment require- weldment.
ments for longitudinal or s piral welds in Elevated
331.1.4 Heating and Cooling. The heati.ng method
Temperature Fluid Service.
shall provide the required metal temperature, metal tem-
331 .1.3 Governing Thickness. When components perature uniformity, and temperature control, and may
are joined by welding, the thickness to be u sed in include an enclosed furnace, local flame heating, electric
applying the heat treatment provisions of Table 331.1.1 resistance, electric induction, or exothermic chemical
shall be that of the thicker component measured at the reaction. The cooling method shall provide the required
joint, except as follows: or desired cooling rate and may include cooling in a
(a) In the case of branch connections, metal (other furnace, in air, by application of local heat or insulation,
than weld metal) added as reinforcement, whether an or by other suitable means.
integral part of a branch fitting or attached as a reinforc- 331.1 .6 Temperature Verification. Heat treatment
ing pad or saddle, shall not be considered in determining temperature shall be checked by thermocouple pyrome-
heat treatment requirements. Heat treatment is required, ters or other si.titable methods to ensure that the WPS
however, when the thickness through the weld in any requirements are met. See para. 330.1.3(b) for attachment
plane through the branch is greater than twice the mini- of thermocouples by the capacitor discharge method of
mum material thickness requiring heat treatment, even welding.
though the thickness of the components at the joint is
less than the minimum thickness. Thickness through the 331.1.7 Hardness Tests. Hardness tests of produc-
weld for the details shown in Fig. 328.5.40 shall be tion welds and of hot bent and hot formed piping are
computed using the following formulas: intended to verify satisfactory heat treatment. The hard-
ness limit applies to the weld a nd to the heat affected
sketch (1) = Tb + tc zone (HAZ) tested as close as practicable to the edge of
the weld.
sketch (2) = T1, + t, (a) Where a hardness limit is specified in Table 331.1.1,
at least 10% of welds, hot bends, and hot formed compo-
sketch (3) = greater of T11 + lc or T, + fc
nents in each furnace heat treated batch and 100% of
those locally heat treated shall be tested.
sketch (4) = r, + T, + tc (b) When dissimilar metals are joined by welding,
sketch (5) = Tb + lc the hardness limits specified for the base and welding
materials in Table 331.1.1 shall be met for each material.
(b) In the case of fillet welds at slip-on and socket
welding flanges and piping connections DN 50 (NPS 2) 331.2 Specific Requirements
and smaller, for seal welding of threaded joints in piping Where warranted by experience or knowledge of ser-
DN 50 and smaller, and for attachment of external non- vice conditions, alternative methods of heat treatment
pressure parts such as lugs or other pipe supporting or exceptions to the basic heat treatment provisions of
elements in all pipe sizes, heat treatment is required para. 331.1 may be adopted as provided in paras. 331.2.1
when the thickness through the weld in any plane is and 331.2.2.
more than twice the minimum material thickness requir-
331.2.1 Alternative Heat Treatment. Normalizing,
ing heat treatment (even though the thickness of the
components at the joint is less than that minimum thick- or normalizing and tempering, or annealing may be
applied in lieu of the required heat treatment after weld-
ness) except as follows:
ing, bending, or forming, provided that the mechanical
(1) not required for P-No. 1 materials when weld
properties of any affected weld and base metal meet
throat thickness is 16 mm (% in.) or less, regardless of
specification requirements after such treatment and that
base metal thickness.
the substitution is approved by the designer.
(2) not required for P-No. 3, 4, 5, or lOA materials
when weld throat thickness is 13 .m m (~ in.) or less, 331.2.2 Exceptions to Basic Requirements. As indi-
regardless of base metal thickness, provided that not cated in para. 331, the basic practices therein may require
less than the recommended preheat is applied, and the modification to suit service conditions in some cases.
specified minimum tensile strength of the base metal is In such cases, the designer may specify more stringent
less than 490 MPa (71 ksi). requirements in the engineering design, including heat
69
Copyright© 2011 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
ASME 831.3-201 0
treatment and hardness limitations for lesser thickness, 332.2 Bending

or may specify less stringent heat treatment and hard- 332.2.1 Bend Flattening. Flattening of a bend, the
ness requirements, including none.
difference between maximum and minimum diameters
When provisions less stringent than those in para. at any cross section, shall not exceed 8% of nominal
331 are specified, the designer must demonstrate to the outside diameter for internal pressure and 3% for exter-
owner's satisfaction the adequacy of those provisions nal p ressure. Removal of metal shall not be used to
by comparable service experience, considering service achieve these requirements.
temperature and its effects, frequency and intensity of
thermal cycling, flexibility stress levels, probability of 332.2.2 Bending Temperature
brittle failure, and other pertinent factors. In addition, (a) Cold bending of ferritic materials shall be done at
appropriate tests shall be conducted, including WPS a temperature below the transformation range.
qualification tests. (b) Hot bending shall be done at a temperature above
the transformation range and in any case within a tem-
331.2.3 Dissimilar Materials perature range consistent with the material and the
(a) Heat treatment of welded joints between dissimi- intended service.
lar ferritic metals or between ferritic metals using dis-
332.2.3 Corrugated and Other Bends. Dimensions
similar ferritic filler metal shall be at the higher of the
temperature ranges in Table 331.1.1 for the materials in and configuration shall conform to the design qualified
in accordance with para. 306.2.2.
the joint.
(b) Heat treatment of welded joints including both 332.3 Forming
ferritic and austenitic components and filler metals shall
The temperature range for forming shall be consistent
be as required for the ferritic material or materials unless with material, intended service, and specified heat
otherwise specified in the engineering design. treatment.
331.2.4 Delayed Heat Treatment. If a weldment is 332.4 Required Heat Treatment
allowed to cool prior to heat treatment, the rate of cool-
ing shall be controlled or other means shall be used to Heat treatment shall be performed in accordance with
prevent detrimental effects in the piping. para. 331.1.1 when required by the following.
332.4.1 Hot Bending and Forming. After hot bend-
331.2.5 Partial Heat Treatment. When an entire pip-
ing and forming, heat treatment is required for P-Nos.
ing assembly to be heat treated cannot be fitted into the 3, 4,5, 6, and lOA materials in all thicknesses. Durations
furnace, it is permissible to heat treat in more than one and temperatures shall be in accordance with para. 331.
heat, provided there is at least 300 mm (1 ft) overlap
between successive heats, and that parts of the assembly 332.4.2 Cold Bending and Forming. After cold bend-
outside the furnace are protected from harmful tempera- ing and forming, heat treatment is requ ired (for all thick-
ture gradients. nesses, and with temperature and duration as given in
Table331.1.1) when any of the following conditions exist:
331.2.6 Local Heat Treatment. When heat treatment (a) for P-Nos. 1 through 6 materials, where the maxi-
is applied locally, a circumferential band of the run pipe, mum calculated fiber elongation after bending or form-
and of the branch where applicable, shall be heated until ing exceeds 50% of specified basic minimum elongation
the specified temperature range exists over the entire (in the direction of severest forming) for the applicable
pipe section(s), gradually diminishing beyond a band specification, grade, and thickness. This requirement
which includes the weldment or the bent or formed may be waiv ed if it can be demonstrated that the
section and at least 25 mm (1 in.) beyond the ends selection of pipe and the choice of bending or forming
thereof. process provide assurance that, in the finished condition,
the most severely strained material retains at least 10%
elongation.
332 BENDING AND FORMING (b) for any material requiring impact testing, where
the maximum calculated fiber elongation after bending
332.1 General or forming will exceed 5%.
Pipe may be bent and components may be formed by (c) when specified in the engineering design.
any hot or cold method which is suitable for the material,
the fluid service, and the severity of the bending or 333 BRAZING AND SOLDERING
forming process. The Jfinished surface shall be free of
333.1 Qualification
cracks and substantially free from buckling. Thickness
after bending or forming shall be not less than that 333.1 .1 Brazing Qualification. The qualification of
required by the design. brazing procedures, brazers, and brazing operators shall
70
Copyright © 20 II by the American Society of Mechanica l Engineers. ~.
ASME 631.3·2010
be in accordance with the requirements of the BPV Code, (c) Flanged foilzts. Unless otherwise specified in the (10)
Section IX, Part QB. For Category D Fluid Service at engineering design, flanged joints shall be aligned as
design temperature not over 93°C (200°F), such qualifi- described in subparas. (1) or (2), and (3).
cation is at the owner's option. (1) Before bolting, mating gasket contact surfaces
shall be aligned to each other within 1 mm in 200 mm
333.2 Brazing and Soldering Materials ci)6 in./ft), measured across any diameter.
333.2.1 Filler Metal. The brazing alloy or solder (2) The flanged joint shall be capable of being
shall melt and flow freely within the specified or desired bolted such that the gasket contact surfaces bear uni-
temperature range and, in conjunction with a suitable formly on the gasket.
flux or controlled atmosphere, shall wet and adhere to (3) Flange bolt holes shall be aligned within 3 mm
the surfaces to be joined. (Ys in.) maximum offset.
333.2.2 Flux. A flux that is fluid and chemically 335.2 Flanged Joints
active at brazing or soldering temperature shall be used
when necessary to eliminate oxidation of the filler metal 335.2.1 Preparation for Assembly. Any damage to
and the sllffaces to be joined, and to promote free flow the gasket seating surface which would prevent gasket
of brazing alloy or solder. seating shall be repaired, or the flange shall be replaced.
335.2.2 Bolting Torque
333.3 Preparation
(a) In assembling flanged joints, the gasket shall be
333.3.1 Surface Preparation. The surfaces to be uniformly compressed to the proper design loading.
brazed or soldered shall be clean and free from grease, (b) Special care shall be used in assembling flanged
oxides, paint, scale, and dirt of any kind. A suitable joints in which the flanges have widely differing
chemical or mechanical cleaning method shall be used mechanical properties. Tightening to a predetermined
if necessary to provide a clean wettable surface. torque is recommended.
333.3.2 Joint Clearance. The clearance between sur- 335.2.3 Bolt Length. Bolts should extend com-
faces to be joined by soldering or brazing shall be no pletely through their nuts. Any which fail to do so are
larger than necessary to allow complete capillary distri- considered acceptably engaged if the lack of complete
bution of tlhe filler metal. engagement is not more than one thread.
333.4 Requirements 335.2.4 Gaskets. No more than one gasket shall be
used between contact faces in assembling a flanged joint.
333.4.1 Soldering Procedure. Solderers shall follow
the procedure in the Copper Tube Handbook of the 335.3 Threaded Joints
Copper Development Association.
335.3.1 Thread Compound or Lubricant. Any com-
333.4.2 Heating. To minimize oxidation, the joint pound or lubricant used on threads shall be suitable for
shall be brought to brazing or soldering temperature in the service conditions and shall not react unfavorably
as short a time as possible without localized underheat- with either the service fluid or the piping material.
ing or overheating.
335.3.2 joints for Seal Welding. A threaded joint
333. 4.3 Flux Removal. Residual flux shall be to be seal welded shall be made up without thread com-
removed if detrimental. pound. A joint containing thread compound which leaks
during leak testing may be seal welded in accordance
335 ASSEMBLY AND ERECTION with para. 328.5.3, provided an compound is removed
from exposed threads.
335.1 Alignment
(a) Piping Distortions. Any distortion of piping to 335.3.3 Straight Threaded Joints. Typical joints
bring it into alignment for joint assembly which intro- using straight threads, with sealing at a surface other
duces a detrimental strain in equipment or piping com- than the threads, are shown in Fig. 335.3.3 sketches (a),
ponents is prohibited. (b), and (c). Care shall be taken to avoid distorting the
(b) Cold Spring. Before assembling any joints to be seat when incorporating such joints into piping assem-
cold sprung, guides, supports, and anchors shall be blies by welding, brazing, or bonding.
examined for errors which might interfere with desired
335.4 Tubing Joints
movement or lead to undesired movement. The gap or
overlap of piping prior to assembly shall be checked 335.4.1 Flared Tubing joints. The sealing surface
against the drawing and corrected if necessary. Heating of the flare shall be examined for imperfections before
shall not be used to help in closing the gap because it assembly and any flare having imperfections shall be
defeats the purpose of cold springing. rejected.
71
Notebook Page 450 No reproduction may be made of this material wi thout written consent of ASME. ~
ASME 831.3·2010
Fig. 335.3.3 Typical Threaded Joints Using Straight Threads
Threads are ASME 8 1.1 straight threads.
(a) (b) (c)
335.4.2 Ftareless and Compression Tubing Joints. in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, as
Where the manufacturer's instructions call for a speci- modified by the engineering design. Care shall be taken
fied number of turns of the nut, these shall be counted to ensure adequate engagement of joint members.
from the point at which the nut becomes finger tight.
335.6.2 Packed Joints. Where a packed joint is used
335.5 Caulked Joints to absorb thermal expansion, proper clearance shall be
Caulked joints shall be installed and assembled in provided at the bottom of the socket to permit this
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, as movement.
modified by the engineering design. Care shall be taken
335.9 Cleaning of Piping
to ensure adequate engagement of joint members.
See Appendix F, para. F335.9.
335.6 Expanded joints and Special Joints
335.6.1 General. Expanded joints and special joints 335.10 Identification of Piping
(as defined in para. 318) shall be installed and assembled See Appendix F, para. F335.10.
72
Notebook Page 452
UW-5 Materials
UW-5(a) specified that pressure parts materials for welded pressure vessels must be proven of
weldable quality, where satisfactory qualification of Section IX welding procedure is considered as
proof.
UW-5(b) requires that non-pressure parts materials welded to pressure vessels must be of proven
weldable quality, as follows:
(1) For material identified in accordance with UG-10, UG-11, UG-15, or UG-93, satisfactory
qualification of Section IX welding procedure is considered as proof of weldable quality.
(2) For materials not identifiable in accordance with UG-10, UG-11, UG-15, or UG-93,
satisfactory qualification of Section IX welding procedure is considered as proof of weldable
quality, provided the material is identifiable by:
• nominal chemical analysis and mechanical properties
• S-Number under Section IX, QW/QB-422, or
• a material specification not permitted in this Division.
(3) Material which cannot be identified may be proved to be of weldable quality by:
• preparing a butt-joint test coupon from each piece of nonidentified material to be used,
and
• guided bend test specimens made from the test coupon shall pass the tests specified in
QW-451 of Section IX.
UW-5(c) Two materials of different specifications may be joined by welding provided the
requirements of Section IX, QW-250, are met.
Practice Problem Ql: Materials

Which of the following is a Category D welded joint in a pressure vessel?
a) welded joint connecting a flange to main shell

b) longitudinal joint within the main shell
c) circumferential joint within the main shell
d) welded joint connecting a nozzle to main shell
e) welded joint connecting a nozzle to head
Practice Problem Q2: Materials

What type of materials shall be used for nonpressure parts which are welded to a pressure vessel?
a) materials received with a certified test report

b) materials received with a certified test report referencing ASME Sec. II Part A or B
c) material proven of weldable quality
d) material proven of weldable quality with a carbon equivalent< 0.35
d) material proven of weldable quality with a carbon equivalent < 0.50
Notebook Page 453

UW-30 Lowest Permissible Temperatures for Welding
The Code in UW-30 does not specify a minimum ambient temperature for welding. Rather, it only
recommends that no welding of any kind be done when the temperature of the base metal is lower
than 0°F (- 20°C).
UW-30 also recommends that at temperatures between 32°F (0°C) and ooF (-20°C), the surface of
all areas within 3 in. (75 mm) of the point where a weld is to be started should be preheated to a
temperature at least warm to the hand [estimated to be above 60°F (15°C)] before welding is started.
When surfaces are wet or covered with ice, when snow is falling on the surfaces to be welded, during
periods of high wind, or unless the welders or welding operators and the work are properly protected,
UW-30 again only recommends that no welding be done.
Practice Problem 03: Temperatures for Welding

During the construction of a pressure vessel outside, what should not be done if welders and the
work are not properly protected?
a) no welding be done when surfaces are wet or covered with ice

b) no welding be done when snow is falling on the surfaces to be welded
c) no welding be done during periods of high wind
d) all of the above
e) a and c
UW-33 Welding Alignment Tolerance
Alignment tolerances for butt welded edges are listed in Table UW-33.
Practice Problem 04: Alignment

During the construction of a pressure vessel, what is t he maximum allowable offset for a shell to
hemispherical head weld joint, where the nominal shell and head thicknesses (t) are 2.00 in. each?
a) 1/4t
b) 1/8t
c) 1/8 in.
d) 3/16 in.
e) 5/16 in.
Notebook Page 454

UW-35 Finished Longitudinal and Circumferential Joints
UW-35(a) requires that butt welded joints must have complete penetration and full fu sion. The
welded surfaces may remain as-welded.
The welded surfaces must be sufficiently free from coarse ripples, grooves, overlaps, and abrupt
ridges and valleys to permit proper interpretation of radiographic and other required nondestructive
examinations. If there is a question regarding the s urface condition of the weld when interpreting a
radiographic film , the film shall be compared to the actual weld s urface for determination of
acceptability.
UW-35(b) requires that any reduction in thickness resulting from welding process is permitted when
all of th e following are satisfied:
a) The reduction in thickness shall not reduce the material of the adjoining surfaces below the
minimum required thickness at any point.
b) The reduction in thickness shall not exceed 1132 in. (1 mm) or 10% of the nominal thickness
of the adjoining surface, whichever is less (see footnote 8).
Footnote 8: It is not the intent of this paragraph to require measurement of reductions in thickness
due to the welding process. If a disagreement between the Manufacturer and the Inspector exists as
to the acceptability of any reduction in thickness, the depth shall be verified by actual meas urement.
Practice Problem Q5: Welded Surface

What shall be done when there is a question regarding the surface condition of a longitudinal or
circumferential butt welded joint in a pressure vessel when interpreting a r adiographic film?
a) the film sh all be compared to the actual weld surface for determination of accept ability
b) the film sh all be reviewed by a 2nd qualified examiner
c) the radiogTaph shall be retaken with an adjusted procedure to accommodate t he
circumstance for the question
d) the film shall be interpreted as best as possible
e) the film shall be interpreted by a certified inspector
Notebook Page 455

UW-35(d) Maximum Allowable Reinforcement
For ASME Section VIII Div. 1 welds, there are minimum requirements for joint throat and
maximum requirements for weld reinforcement. The weld must develop the strength of the base
material. Weld reinforcement is a change in surface contour and therefore is a stress concentrator:
the more severe the build-up, the greater the stress magnification. Although the Code does not
require weld reinforcement, but does require complete joint fill.
UW-35(d) states that limitations for the thickness of the weld reinforcement on each face shall not
exceed those listed in Table 3.
Notebook Page 456

Table 3 Maximum Reinforcement per ASME Section VIII, Division 1 UW-35(d)
Max imum Rein forcement, in.

Material Nominal Thickness, in. Category Band C Butt Welds Other Welds
Less than 3/32 3/32 1/32
3/32 to 3/16, incl. 118 1/16
Over 3/16 to 112, incl. 5/32 3/32
Over 112 to 1, incl. 3/16 3/32
Over 1 to 2, incl. 114 1/8
Over 2 to 3, incl. 114 5/32
Over 3 to 4, incl. 114 7/32
Over 4 to 5, incl. 114 114
OverS 5/16 5/16
Practice Problem 06: Weld Reinforcement

What is the maximum thickness of the weld reinforcement on each face for a welded joint connecting
flange to nozzle with a nominal thickness of0.750 in.?
a) 3/32 in.
b) 1/8 in.
c) 5/32 in.
d) 3/16 in .
e) 5/16 in.
Repair of Weld Defects • UW-38
Finding the rules for repairing weld defects during the fabrication of an ASME Sec. VIII-1 pressure
vessel is not easy. The Code makes references in to s everal paragraphs. A short summary follows,
but it is not complete .
UW-38 states that defects, such as cracks, pinholes, and incomplete fusion, detected visually or by
the hydrostatic or pneumatic test or by the examinations prescribed in UW-11 (Radiographic and
Ultrasonic Examination) shall be removed by mechanical means or by thermal gouging processes,
after which the joint sh all be rewelded [see UW-40(e) Pr ocedures for PWHT].
Notebook Page 457

Inspection and Tests- UG-90
UG-90(b) states that the Manufacturer has the responsibility of assuring that the quality control, the
detailed examinations, and the tests required by this Division are performed. Some, but not all, of
these responsibilities, which are defined UG-90(b) to (n) .
However, the Manufacturer has the responsibility for repair welding during fabrication to:
• UG-90(g) verify that material imperfections repaired by welding were acceptably repaired
[UG-78 Repair of Defects in Materials, UW-52(d)(2)(c) Evaluation and Retests;
• UG-90(h) verify that weld defects were acceptably repaired [UW-51(c) and UW-52(c) Spot
Radiography).
UW-51(b) states that indications shown on the radiographs of welds and characterized as
imperfections are unacceptable under the following conditions and shall be repaired as provided in
UW-38 (see above), and the repair radiographed to:
• UW-51 (Radiographic Examination ofWelded Joints), or

• at the option of the Manufacturer, ultrasonically examined in accordance with the method
described in Appendix 12, provided the defect has been confirmed by the UT to the
satisfaction of the Authorized Inspector prior to making the repair; and
• for material thicknesses in excess of 1 in. (25 mm), the concurrence of the user shall be
obtained.
UW-52(d)(2)(c) states that repair welding shall be performed using a qualified procedure and in a
manner acceptable to the Inspector. The rewelded joint, or the weld repaired areas, shall be spot
radiographically examined at one location in accordance with the foregoing requirements of UW-52.
Practice Problem 07: Repair Welds

What examination technique shall be used by the manufacturer for repairs to welds during ASME
Sec. VIII-1 pressure vessel fabrication?

c) by RT or UT
e) the same method that revealed the defect in the original weld
Notebook Page 458

Fabrication Responsibilities - UW-26
UW-26(d) states that the Manufacturer (Certificate Holder) may engage individuals by contract or
agreement for their services as welders at the shop location shown on the Certificate of
Authorization and at field sites (if allowed by the Certificate of Authorization) for the const r uction of
pressure vessels or vessel parts, provided all of the following conditions are met:
(1) All Code construction shall be the responsibility of the Manufacturer.

(2) All welding shall be performed in accordance with the Manufacturer's welding procedure
specifications in accordance with the requirements of Section IX.
(3) All welders shall be qualified by the Manufacturer in accordance with th e requirements of
Section IX.
(4) The Manufacturer's Quality Control System shall include as a minimum:
(a) a requirement for complete and exclusive administrative and technical supervision of all
welders by the Manufacturer;
(b) evidence of the Manufacturer's authority to assign and remove welders at his discretion
without involvement of any other organization;
(c) a requirement for assignment of welder identification symbols;
(d) evidence that this program has been accepted by th e Manufacturer's Authorized
Inspect ion Agency which provides the inspection service.
(5) The Manufacturer shall be responsible for Code compliance of the vessel or part, including
Code Symbol stamping and providing Data Report Forms properly executed and
counter signed by the Inspector .
Practice Problem 08: Welding Responsibilities

Who is responsible for ASME Sec. VIII-1 pressure vessel welding done by the personnel and shall
conduct the tests required to qualify welding procedures, and to qualify or requalify welders and
welding operators?
a) each employer
b) the testing facility
c) the jurisdiction
d) the welding inspector
e) the manufacturer
Notebook Page 459

Preheat - Non-Mandatory Appendix R
Mandatory welding preheating rules are not given in ASME Sec. VIII Division 1, except as required
in the footnotes that provide for exemptions to postweld heat treatment in Tables UCS-56 and
UHA-32. In essence, this code requires all carbon and alloy steels welds to be PWHT, except when
preheated and within thickness limits, and other limitations.
In general, the requirements for preheating, temperature, time at temperature, method of

application, etc., are dependent on many factors, including:
• chemical analysis of the base metal and filler metal, and deposited weld metal,
• degree of restraint of the parts being joined,
• elevated physical properties, and
• section thickness(es).
P reheat Zone
Since mandatory welding preheating rules are not given in ASME Sec. VIII Division 1, except as
required iin the footnotes that provide for exemptions to postweld heat treatment, there are no
specified limits for the preheat zone, as exists in ASME B31.1 and B31.3.
Non-Mandatory Appendix R
Non-mandatory Appendix R lists some practices used for preheating as a general guide for the
materials listed by P-Numbers in ASME Section IX, as shown in the following table.
Non-Ma ndator y Appendix R

Base Material P-Numbe r Preheat Practice Guide
P-No. 1 Group Nos. 1, 2, 3 (a) 175°F (79°C) for material which has both a specified
maximum carbon content in excess of 0.30% and a thickness
at the joint in excess of 1 in. (25 mm);
(b) 50°F (10°C) for all other materials in this P-Number.
P-No. 3 Group Nos. 1, 2, 3 (a) 175°F (79°C) for material which has either a specified
minimum tensile strength in excess of 70,000 psi (480 MPa)
or a thickness at the joint in excess of 5/8 in. (16 mm);
P-No. 4 Group Nos. 1, 2 (a) 250°F (12rC) for material which has either a specified
minimum tensile strength in excess of 60,000 psi (410 MPa)
or a thickness at the joint in excess of 112 in. (13 mm);
P-Nos. SA and 5b Group No. 1 (a) 400°F (204°C) for material which has either a specified
minimum tensile strength in excess of 60,000 psi (410 MPa),
or has both a specified minimum chromium content above
6.0% and a thickness at the joint in excess of 1/2 in. (13 mm);
(b) 300°F (149°C) for all other materials in these P-Numbers.
P-No. 6 Group Nos. 1, 2, 3 400°F (204°C)
P -No. 7 Group Nos. 1, 2 None
P-No. 8 Group Nos. 1, 2 None
© Codes and Standards Trai ning Institute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 460

For new ASME Sec. VIII-1 pressure vessel welding, what is the size of the preheat zone?

d) in all directions from the point of welding for a distance of 3 in.
e) as required in the qualified WPS
The following Examples and Practice Problem illustrate how to determine the suggested preheat
requirement given a pipe material and size.
Example Q10: Preheat Requirement

What is the Sec. VIII Div. 1 suggested preheat requirement, ASME SA-516/SA-516M Grade 70 plate,
1 inch thick, when the ambient t emperature is 0°F?
The P-No. for this material can be read from ASME Sec. IX, Table QW/QB-422.
QW/QB-422 FERROUS/NON FERROU S P-NU MBERS (CONT'Dl

Grouping of Ba$C Metal$ for Qualification
Ferrous CCONT'D)
Minlmum Welding Brazing
Specified ISO
Spec. No. Type or Grade No. ksi CMPal No. No. P-No. Group Nominal Composition Product Form
A 514 1<21604 110 (760) ua 102 3.1 l.75Cr-Q.5Mo-Cu Plate, 2~ in. (64 mm) max.
A 514 1(21650 100 (690) llB 102 3.1 1.25Ni-1Cr-Q.5M o Plate> 2~ in.-6 ln.
(64 mm-152 mml, incl.
A 514 1<21650 110 (760) 116 102 3.1 1.25Ni-1Cr-0.5Mo Pial~, 2~ ln. {&4 mm) max.
A 514 100 (690) l iB 102 3.1 L3Ni- 1.3Cr-0.5Mo-V Plate > 2~ in.-6 in.
( &4 mm-152 mm>, incl.
A 514 Q 110 (700) llB 102 3.1 U Ni-UCr-<>.s Mo-V Plate, 2 ~ in. (04 mm> max.
SA-515 60 1<02401 60(415) 1 101 1.1 c Plate
SA-515 65 K02800 65 (450) 101 11.1 C- Si Plate
SA-515 70 1<03101 70 (435) 101 11.1 C-Si Plate
SA·516 55 K01800 55 <380) 1 101 1.1 C- SI Plate
SA-516 60 K02100 60 (415) 1 101 1.1 C- Mn- Sl Plate
SA-516 65 K02403 65 (450) 1 101 1.1 C-Mn-Sl Plate
SA-516 70 K02700 70 (435> CD 101 11.1 C-Mn-Si Plate
SA-517 F Kll576 115 (7951 llB 101 3. 1 0.75NI-<>.5Cr-0.5M ~V Plates 2 ~ ln. {b4 mm)
SA-517 8 Kll630 115 (795) us 101 3.1 0.5Cr-0.2 Mo-V Plat~ S 1114 ln. (32 mm)
SA-5 17 A K11856 115 (795) 118 101 3. 1 o.sCr-<> .2 5 M~S i Pliite S 1X. in. {32 mm)
SA-517 E K21604 105 (725) 118 102 3.1 1 .75Cr-Q.5Mo-Cu Plate > 2 ~ in.-6 in. (64 mm- 152 mm),
incl.
Since ASME SA-516/SA-516M Grade 70 plate is a P-No. 1 and does not exceed either of the
suggestions in Appendix R, <JIR-l(a), as follows:
175°F (79°C) for material which has both a specified maximum carbon content in
excess of 0 .30% and a thickness at the joint in excess of 1 in. (25 mm);
Th erefore, the suggested preh eat is 50°F (10°C) in accordance with Appendix R, <JIR-l(b).
Notebook Page 461

What is the Sec. VIII Div. 1 suggested preheat requirement for 10 in. O.D., Schedule 80 (0.594 in.),
ASME SA-335/SA-335M Grade Pll seamless piping material?
The P-No. for this mat erial can be read from ASME Sec. IX, Table QW/QB-422
QW/QB-422 FERROUS/NONFERROUS P·NU MBERS (CONT'DJ

Ferrous (CONT'D)
Specified ISO
UNS Tensile1 p. Group 15608
Spec. No. Type or Grade No. ksi <MPa) No. No. P-No. Group Nominal Composition Product Form
SA·H2 TP32 1 Sn 100 70 (485) 8 102 8.1 18Cr-10NI- To Smls. & welded pipe > l'a ln. (10 mm)
SA-312 TP321 532100 75 (5151 8 102 8.1 18Cr-10Ni-Ti Smls. & w~lded pipeS~ in. (10 mm)
SA·312 TP 32 1 532 100 75 (515) 8 102 8.1 18Cr- 10NI-TI Smls. & welcled pipe
SA-312 TP n1H 5n1o9 70 (485) 8 102 8.1 18Cr- 10Ni-Ti Smls. & we1dtd pipe > %in. (10 mm}
SA·312 TP32 1H $32 109 75 (515) 8 102 8.1 18Cr- 10NI-Ti Smls. & welcled pipe S l1, in. <10 mml
SA-312 TPn1H s n1o9 75 (515) 8 102 8.1 18Cr- 10Ni-Ti Welded pipe
SA-312 $34565 S34S65 us 17951 8 102 8.3 24Cr- 17 NI -6Mn-4 .5M~N Smls & wold<)d pipe
SA-312 TP 347 $34700 75 (515) 8 102 8.1 18Cr- 10Ni-cb Smls. & welcled pipo
SA-312 TP347H $34709 75 15151 8 102 8.1 18Cr- 10Ni-cb Smls. & welded pipe
SA-312 TP 348 $34800 75 1515) 8 102 8.1 18Cr-10NI-{;b Smls. & welded pipe
SA-312 TP348H 534809 75 15151 8 102 8.1 18Cr-10Ni-cb Smls. & wolclod pipe
SA·312 TPXM- 15 $38100 75 1515) 8 102 8.1 18Cr- 18NI- 2SI Smls. & welded pipe
SA-333 K03006 60 14151 1 101 11.1 C- Mn- Si Smls. & welded pipe
SA-333 1 K03008 55 13801 1 101 11.1 C- Mn Smls. & welded pipe
SA·3H 10 80 1550) 101 11.1 C-Mn-Si Smls. & welded pipe
SA-333 K11267 60 14151 102 4.1 0.75Cr- 0. 75N 1-cu-AI Smls. & woldod pipe
SA-333 K21903 65 14501 9A 101 9.1 2.5NI Smls. & welcled pipe
SA-333 9 K2203S 63 14351 9A 101 9. 1 2Ni-1Cu Smls. & welclod plpo
SA-333 K31918 6S 14501 98 101 9.2 3.5Ni Smls. & welded pipe
SA-333 8 K81)40 100 1690) llA 101 9.3 9Ni Smls. & welcled pipe
5A-334 K03006 60 14151 1 101 11.1 C- Mn- Si Woldod wbo
SA-334 1 K03008 55 13801 1 101 11.1 C-Mn Welded wbo
SA-334 7 K21903 65 1450) 9A 101 9.1 2.5 Ni Welded tube
SA-334 9 K2203S 63 14351 9A 101 9.1 2Ni- 1Cu Welded wbo
SA-334 3 K3 1918 65 1450) 98 101 9.2 3.5NI Welded tube
SA-334 8 K81340 100 (690) llA 101 9.3 9 Ni Welded wbo
SA-335 P1 Kll522 55 1380) 3 10 1 1.1 c-o.5Mo Smls. pipe
SA·335 P2 Kll547 55 ()80) 3 101 4.2 0.5Cr-Q.5Mo Smls. pipe
SA-335 P12 K11562 60 14151 4 102 5.1 1Cr-Q.5Mo Smls. pipe
SA-335 P15 Kll578 bO 14151 3 101 l.5SI-o.5Mo Smls. pipe
SA·335 Pll K11597 60(4151 0 102 5.1 l.25Cr-0.5Mo-Si Smls. pipe
SA-335 P22 K21590 60 14 151 SA 102 5.2 2.25Cr-1Mo Smls. plpo
SA-335 PZ1 K31545 bO 14151 SA 102 5.2 3Cr-1Mo Smls. pipe
SA·335 P5c K41245 bO 1415) SB 102 5.3 SCr-o.S M ~T i Smls. pipe
SA-335 PS K41545 60 14151 56 102 5.3 SCr-O.SMo Smls. plpo
SA-335 P5b K51545 bO 14151 58 102 5.3 5Cr-c.5Mo-SI Smls. pipe
Using t he P-No., the required minimum preheat temperature can be read from Appendix R, C)[R-3 .
P-No. 4 Group Nos. 1, 2
(a) 250°F (121°C) for material which has either a specified minimum tensile strength in
ex-cess of 60,000 psi (410 MPa) or a thickness at the joint in excess of 1/2 in. (13 mm);
The suggested preheat is 250°F (121°C) based on a section thickness of at the joint in excess of 1/2 in.
(13 mm), i .e., 0.594 in.
Notebook Page 46 2
Practice Problem 012: Preheat Requirement
What is the Sec. VIII Div. 1 suggested preheat requirement for NPS 10, Sch 80, 0.594 inch, ASME
SA-335/SA -335M Grade Pl seamless piping material with an ambient temperature of 0°F?
a) 50°F
b) 150°F
c) 175°F
d) 200°F
e) 250°F
© Codes and St andards Training Institute (CAST!)
Notebook Page 463

UW-40 Procedures for PWHT
In accordance with UW-40(a) the PWHT soak band must contain:
• the weld
• heat affected zone
• a portion of base metal adjacent to the weld being heat treated for a minimum distance of the
widest width of weld plus 1t or 2 in. (50 mm), whichever is less, on each side or end of the
weld.
The term t (above) is the nominal thickness of the weld at the point of attachment.
It is important to note that for a fully completed pressure vessel, all heat treatment must be done
after all weld repairs and prior to hydrostatic testing, see UW-40(e).
UW-40(a)(2) PWHT with Multiple Heats
When heating the vessel in more than one heat in a furnace, the overlap of the heated sections of the
vessel must be at least 5 ft (1.5 m ). The vessel portion outside of the furnace must be shielded to
prevent any harmful temperature gradient.
Practice Problem Q13: PWHT Procedures

What is the minimum width of a PWHT soak band in the construction of a new pressure vessel?
a) a minimum of 2 in. from the center line of the weld in all directions
b) a minimum of 3 in. from the center line of the weld in all directions
c) shall extend at least 1 in. (25 mm) beyond each edge of the weld or 2 in., whichever is less
d) widest width of weld plus lt or 2 in. (50 mm), whichever is less, on each side or end of the weld
e) a minimum of 5 times the section thickness
Practice Problem Q14: PWHT Procedures

What is the preferable procedure for PWHT a new pressure vessel?
a) by locally PWHT with electric blankets

b) by locally PWHT with electric blankets that are insulated with ceramic
c) heating the vessel in more than one heat in a furnace, provided the overlap of the heated
sections of the vessel is at least 5 ft (1.5 m)
d) as a whole in an enclosed furnace
e) by locally PWHT with tiger torch
Notebook Page 464

UCS-56 Heat Treatment of Carbon and Low Alloy Steels
ASME Section VIII, Division 1 - Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels
The following topics are listed in the API Body of Knowledge:
Exam '
Pr~parati o y Gen·e ral Welding Requirements:
Guidance The inspector should be familiar with and understand the general r ules for welding in
ASME Section VIII, Div. 1, Parts UW and UCS such as :
• heat treatment UCS-56
UCS-56 presents the minimum requirements for post weld heat treatment of carbon and low alloy
steels. While this article of the Code is labeled post weld heat treatment, the heat t reatments
prescribed are used in achieving stored internal energy redisbibution and reduction. This energy
results not only from welding, but from other fabrication means as well, s uch as forging or r olling.
Heat treatment, as defined by Part UCS-85 of the Code, is a controlled exposure to a temperature
greater than 900°F (480°C), but less than the lower transformation temperature for the steel (1333°F
from the Body of Knowledge) for carbon steel but slightly higher for alloy steels, with greater alloy
additions having a higher transformation temperature). At these temperatures, the metal will be red
hot as shown in Figure 13.
Figure 13 Thick wall shell sections glow red upon their removal
from the heat treatment furnace.
Notebook Page 465

UCS-56 provides a set of heat treating rules that represents good practice for heat treating carbon
and alloy steel products other than just pressure vessels.
• UCS-56(d)(1): The heat treated item shall not be placed in a furnace hotter than 800°F
(427°C).
• UCS-56(d)(2): Above 800°F (425°C), the rate of heating shall be not more than 400°F/hr
(222°C/ h) divided by the maximum metal thickness of the shell or head plate in inches, but
in no case more than 400°F/hr (222°C/h).
• UCS-56(d)(2): During the heating period there shall not be a greater variation in
temperature throughout the portion of the vessel being heated than 250°F (120°C) within
any 15ft (4.6 m) interval oflength.
• UCS-56(d)(2) footnote 3: The rates of heating and cooling need not be less than 100°F/hr
(56°C/h). However, in all cases consideration of closed chambers and complex structures may
indicate reduced rates of heating and cooling to avoid structural damage due to excessive
thermal gradients.
• UCS-56(d)(3): During the holding period the furnace temperature shall not vary by more
than 150°F (83°C) between the hottest and coldest areas in the furnace.
• UCS-56(d)(4): Furnace atmospheres shall be controlled to limit the amount of high
temperature oxidation.
• UCS-56(d)(4): The flame shall not directly impinge on the material.
• UCS-56(d)(5): Above 800°F (425°C), cooling shall be done in a closed furnace or cooling
chamber at a rate not greater than 500°Fihr (280°Cih) divided by the maximum metal
thickness of the shell or head plate in inches, but in no case more than 500°F/hr (280°C/h).
(see footnote 3)
• UCS-56(d)(5): Cooling from 800°F (425°C) the vessel may be cooled in still air.
• Table UCS-56: The time at temperature (1 hour per inch (25 mm) of thickness up to 2 inches
(50 mm), 15 minutes minimum) and the stated temperatures in Table UCS-56 are
mi nimums.
• Table UCS-56.1: For P-Number 1 Groups 1 and 2 materials, Table UCS-56.1 presents
alternative lower temperatures with coiTesponding longer times at temperature.
• UCS-56(f): Weld repairs during fabrication made toP-No. 1 Group Nos. 1, 2, and 3 and toP-
No. 3 Group Nos. 1, 2, and 3 materials may be made after the final PWHT but prior to the
final hydrostatic test, without additional PWHT, provided that PWHT is:
• not required as a service requirement in accordance with UW-2(a)
• not an exemption in Table UCS-56, or
• as a service requirement in accordance with UCS-68.
• UCS-56(f)(1) through to (6): These 6 paragraphs specify the weld repair requirements, (see
the Code). These requirements do not apply when the welded repairs are minor restorations
of the material surface, such as those required after removal of construction fixtures, and
prQvided that the surface is not exposed to the vessel contents.
• UW-40: Heat treatment shall be done after all weld repairs and prior to hydrostatic testing.
• UW-40: The thickness of the weld throat, exclusive of permitted reinforcement, shall govern
the time at the specified temperature.
© Codes and Standards Tra ining Institute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 466

These rules allow the material to achieve a reduction in internal energy without introducing stress
caused by thermal gradients. When components of a vessel are restricted from moving during heat
treatment, such as might be encountered during a local heat treat procedure, or when large thermal
gradients are present, then stress equal to or greater than that already in the part may be created by
the process. The Code user is cautioned t o consider the potential for creating this condition,
particularly on treatments where the entire object is not being heated.
Practice Problem 015: PWHT

What is the maximum permitted temperature of a PWHT furnace at the time a pressure vessel is
placed in it?
a) 400°F (205°C)
b) 500°F (260°C)
c) 800°F (425°C)
d) 100°F (56°C) above room temperature
e) 200°F (l12°C) above room temperature

What is the permitted t otal weld repair depth after PWHT for the construction of an ASME Sec.
VIII-1 pressure vessel with a P-No. 1, Group No. 3 material?
a) shall not exceed 1 in. (25 mm)

b) sh all not exceed 1-1/4 in. (32 mm)
c) shall n ot exceed 1-112 in. (38 mm)
d) as required to make the repair
e) as required in the WPS as required
~ ~-...... - ....
When repair welding an ASME Sec. VIII-1 pressure vessel nozzle made from SA-335 grade P1
material during construction and after PWHT, wh at welding tech nique is required?
a) stringer welds only

b) stringer welds with controlled heat input
c) temper bead stringer welds only
d) weld temper bead reinforcement
e) narrow gap welding
Notebook Page 467

Table UCS-56 Postweld Heat Treatment (PWHT)
The PWHT details for each material used to fabricate pressure vessels are listed in Table UCS-56.
The Code takes the approach that all materials shall be PWHT, except as provided in the "Notes"
below each individual UCS-56 Table.
The factors that affect weldability and result in ASME classifying materials in P-Number groupings
also apply to postweld heat treatment. Therefore, the heat treatment dwell times and temperatures
are given in Table UCS-56 in accordance with P-Number classifications.
The Code user should keep in mind that the heat treatment requirements listed in Table UCS-56 are
minimum requirements and while a number of exemptions are given for each P-Number listing in
the Table UCS-56 Notes, using the exemptions may not represent the lowest risk or the lowest cost
for the pressure vessel.
Table UCS-56 exemptions are not applicable for some cold service vessels as defined in UCS-68 (i.e.,
service temperature less than -55°F (-48°C)).
© Codes and Standards Tra ining Institute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 468

Example 018: Table UCS-56 Heat Treatment
What are the Sec. VIII Div. 1 PWHT requirements for ASME SA-516/SA-516M Grade 70 plate,
1.000 inch thick?
Table UCS-56lists heat treatment requirements that are organized by P-No. The P-No. for all B&PV
materials are found in ASME Sec. IX, QW/QB-422, as follows.
QW/QB-422 FERROUS/NONFERROUS P-NUMBERS <CONT'D)
Ferrous CCONT'Dl
Specified ISO
UNS Tensile, p. Croup 15608
Spec. No. Type or Grade No. ksi CMPal No. No. P-No. Croup Nominal Composition Product Form
A 514 E K2 1604 110 (760) 118 102 3.1 1.75Cr- 0.5Mi>-Cu Plate, 2l,s in. {64 mm) max.
A 514 p K21650 100 (690) 118 102 3.1 1.2SN1-1Cr-o.SMo Plate> 2~ in.- 6 in.
(64 mm- 152 mm>, incl.
A 514 p K21650 110 (760) 11 8 102 3.1 1.25N1-1Cr-Q.5Mo Plate, 2 Y, in. (64 mml max.
A 514 Q 100 (690) 11 8 9 102 ).1 1.3Ni- 1.3Cr- 0.5Mo-V Plate> 2'1, ln.-6 in.
(64 mm-152 mm), l n~l .
A 514 Q 110 (760) 118 102 3.1 1.3Ni-1.3Cr-o.5Mi>-V Plate, 2 ~ in. (64 mm) max.
SA-515 60 K02401 60 (41 5) 101 1.1 c Plate
SA·515 65 K02800 65 (450) 101 11.1 C-SI Plate
SA-515 70 K03101 70 (485) 1 101 11 .1 C-Si Plate
SA·516 55 K01800 55 (380) l 101 1.1 C-Si Plate
SA·516 60 K02100 60 (415) 1 101 1.1 C-Mn-Si Plate
SA-516 65 K02403 65 (450) 1 101 1.1 C-Mn- Si Plate
SA-516 70 K02700 10 <48s> CD 101 11.1 C-Mn- Si Plate
Since this material has an ASME P-No. 1, then find the required PWHT values in Table UCS-56 for
P-No. 1, with a thickness of 1.000 in, as follows:
TABLE UCS-56
POSTWELD HEAT TRE ATMENT REQUIREMENTS FOR CARBON AND LOW ALLOY STEELS
Normal Holding
Minimum Holding Time at Normal Temperature
for Nominal Thickness [See UW-40(f)]
Temperature,
•F (•C), Up to 2 in. Over 2 in. to 5 in. Over 5 in.
Materi al Minimum (50 mml (50 mm to 125 mm) <125 mm>
E.:.!i2:..!.. 1 hr/in. (25 mm), 2 hr plus 15 min for 2 hr plus 15 min

Gr. Nos. 1, 2, 3 15 min minimum each additional inch for each addi-
(25 mml over 2 in. tional inch (25
(50 mm) mm) over 2 in.
(50 mml
Gr. No.4 NA None None None
From Table UCS-56 for P-No. 1, the minimum PWHT metal temperature is 1,100°F; the minimum
holding time is 1 hour.
Notebook Page 469

Example 019: Table UCS-56 Heat Treatment of Carbon and Low Alloy Steels
What are the ASME Sec. VIII-1 requirements for 10 in. O.D., Schedule 80 (0.594 in.), ASME SA-
335/SA-335M Grade Pll seamless piping material?
Table UCS-56 lists heat treatment requirements that are organized by P-No. The P-No. for all B&PV
QWfQB-422 FERROUS/NONFERROUS P·NUMBERS <CONT'Ol
Grouping of BMe Metals for Quallflcalion
Ferrous <COIH'DJ
Minimum Welding Bratlng
Specifie<l ISO
UNS Tensile, P- Croup 15608
Spec. No. Type or Grade No. ksi (MPal No. No. P-No. Group Nominal Composition Product Form
SA-312 TP321 532100 70 (485) 8 102 8.1 18Cr- 10 Nf-T I 5mls. & wolded pipe> l'a ln. no mmJ
5A· 312 TP321 532100 75 (515) 102 8.1 18Cr- 1 0 Nf-Tl 5mls. & wtlded pipe S '4 in. (10 mm)
5A· 312 TP321 532100 75 (515) 102 8 .1 18Cr· 10 Nf-TI 5mls. & wolded pipe
5A-312 TP321 H 532loq 70 (485) 102 8.1 18Cr- 10 Nf-TI Smls. & welded pipe>~ ln. (10 mml
SA-312 TP321H 53210q 75 (515) 102 8.1 18Cr·lONI-TI 5mls. & wolded pipes '4 in. (lO mmJ
5A· 312 TP321 H 53210q 75 (515) 102 8.1 18Cr- 10 NI- TI Welded pipe
5A·312 S34565 534565 115 (H5) 8 102 8.3 2 4C1'-17 NI-6 Mn-4.5Mo-N 5mls & welded pipe
5A·312 TP347 534700 75 (515) 8 102 8.1 18Cr- 10 Nf-Cb 5mls. & wtlded pipe
5A·312 TP347 H 534709 75 (515) 102 8.1 18C1'-10NI-Cb 5mls. & wtlded pipe
5A-312 TP348 534800 75 (515) 102 8.1 18C r~1 0N f-Cb Smls. & wolded pipe
SA· 312 TP348H S348oq 75 (515) 102 8.1 18Cr- 10NI-Cb Smls. & wtlded pipe
SA-312 TPXM- 15 538100 75 (515) 8 102 8.1 18Cr-18 Ni-251 Smls. & Vfl!:lded pipe
5A·3)) K0300b bO ( 415) 101 11.1 c-M,._SI Smls. & welded pipe
5A·3H 1 K03008 55 (JSOJ 101 11.1 c-Mn Smls. & wolded pipe
SA-333 10 80 (550) 101 11.1 C- M,...SI Smls. & .,..lded pipe
SA-333 Kll267 60 (415) 4 102 4.1 0.75Cr-0. 7SNI-C.,..AI Smls. & wolded pipe
SA-333 K21q03 65 (450) qA 101 9.1 2.SNI Sm ''· & welded pipe
SA·333 9 K22035 63 (435) 9A 101 9.1 2NI-1Cu Sm s. & wetde<l pipe
SA-333 3 K31918 65 ( 450) 98 101 9.2 3.SNI Sm,s . & ,..Ide<! pipe
SA-333 8 K81340 100 (690) llA 101 9.3 9NI Sm s. & ....,tded pipe
SA·334 6 K03006 60 (415) 101 11.1 C- Mn-51 Weded wbe
SA-334 K03008 55 <38 0) 101 11.1 C- Mn We ded tube
SA-334 7 K21903 65 (450) 9A 101 9.1 2.SNI Weded wbe
SA-334 9 K22035 63 (435) 9A 101 9.1 2NI- 1Cu Weded bJbe
SA-))4 3 K31918 65 (450) 98 101 9.2 ).5NI Weded bJbe
SA· 334 8 K81340 100 (690) llA 101 9.3 9NI Welded tube
SA-))5 PI K11522 55 (380) 101 1.1 C-o.SMo Smls. pipe
SA-335 P2 Kll547 55 (380) 101 4.2 0.5Cr-0.5Mo Smls. pipe
SA·H5 P12 Kll5b2 60 (415) 4 102 5.1 1Cr-o.sMo Smls. pipe
SA-335 PIS K11578 bO (415) 3 101 l.SSI-o.SMo Smls. pipe
SA-335 Pll KUSH bo<<15) CD 102 5.1 1.25Cr-0.5Mo-SI Smls. pipe
SA·335 P22 K21590 60 (415) SA 102 5.2 2.25Cr-1Mo Smls. pipt
SA-335 P21 K31545 60 (415) SA 102 5.2 3Cr- 1Mo Smls. pipe
5A-335 P5c K41245 bO (41Sl 5B 102 5.3 5Cr-0.5Mo-TI Smls. pipe
SA· 335 P5 K41545 bo (415l 58 102 5.) 5Cr- O.SMo Smls. pipe
SA-335 P5b K51545 60 (415) 58 102 5.3 5C1'-0.5Mo-SI Smls. pipe
Since SA-335 grade Pll has an ASME P-No. 4, then find the required PWHT values in Table
UCS-56 for P-No. 4, with a thickness of0.594 in, as follows:
TABLE UCS-56
POSTWELO HEAT TREATMENT REQUIREMENTS FOR CARBON AND LOW ALLOY STEELS (CONT'O)
Normal Holding
for Nominal Thickness [ See UW-40<rlJ
Temperature,
•F <•C), Up to 2 in. Over 2 in. to 5 in. Over 5 in.
Material Minimum (50 mml (50 mm to 125 mml <125 mm)
P-No. 4 @<650) 1 hrlin. (25 mml 5 hr plus 15 min

Gr. Nos. 1, 2 for each addi-
tional inch (25
mm) over 5 in.
(125 mml
From Table UCS-56 for P-No. 4, the minimum PWHT metal temperature is 1,200°F; the minimum
holding time is 0.594 x 60 minutes = 36 minutes.
© Codes and Standard s Trai ning Institute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 470

'
Practice Problem 020: Table UCS-56 Heat Treatment of Carbon and Low Alloy Steels
What are the ASME VIII-1 PWHT requirements for 10 in. O.D., Schedule 80 (0.594 in.), ASTM SA-
335/SA-335M Grade P22 seamless piping material?
a) none required
b) holding temperature range is 1,300-1,400°F; the minimum holding time is 2 hours; and
the maximum hardness is 241 HBW
c) minimum holding temperature of 1,250°F; the minimum holding time is 36 minutes
d) minimum holding temperature of 1,250°F; the minimum holding time is 36 minutes; and
the maximum hardness is 241 HBW
e) as required in the material specification
©Codes and Standards Training Instit ute (CAST!)
Notebook Page 471

Alternative Postweld Heat Treatment Requirements For Carbon and Low Alloy
Steels (Table UCS-56.1)
Table UCS-56.1 presents alternative lower temperatures with corresponding longer times at
temperature (see Table UCS-56.1 Note (1)) . Postweld heat treatment temperatures of 150°F or
200°F lower than permitted in Tables UCS-56 are only permitted for P-No. 1 Gr. Nos. 1 and 2
materials (see Table UCS-56.1 Note (2)).
Example 021: Table UCS-56.1 Alternative Heat Treatment of Carbon and Low Alloy Steels
What is the minimum PWHT holding time for a 6 in. thick nozzle attached to a pressure vessel made
from SA-516 grade 60 and PWHT at 900°F?
Since SA-516 grade 60 is listed in ASME Sec. IX, QW-422, as a P-No. 1 Group 1, C- Mn- Si steel, then
Table UCS-56.1 applies. The minimum required temperature for P -No. Group 1 material in Table
UCS-56 is 1100°F.
T AB LE UCS· 56
POS T W EL D HEAT TREATME NT REQU I REMENTS FOR CARBON AND L(}N A LL OY STEELS
Minimum Holding T ime at Normal Temper ature

Normal Holding
for Nominal Thickness (See UW-40(f) ]
Temperature,
'F ('C), Up to 2 in. Over 2 in. to 5 in. Over 5 in.
Material M inimum (SO mm) ( SO mm to 125 mm) (125 mm)
P·No. 1 1 hr/in. (25 mm), 2 hr plus 15 min for 2hrplus 15min

Gr. Nos. 1, 2, 3 15 min minimum each additional inch fOf each addi-
(25 mm) over 2 ln. tional i nch (25
(50 mm) mm) over 2 in.
(50 mm)
Since the minimum holding temperature in Table UCS-56 is 1100°F:

then the adjusted holding time = 1100°F - 900°F
= 200°F
TAB LE UCS-56.1
AL TER NATIVE POSTWELD HIE AT TREATM ENT
From Table UCS-56.1: REOOI REMENTS FOR CAR BON
minimum holding time for a decrease of 200°F: AND LON ALLOY STEEL S
Applicable Q11y When Permitted in Ta ble UCS-56
=20 hours + 15 minutes for each inch above 1 in. De<rease in
= 20 hours+ (6 in. - 1 in.) (15 minutes) Temperature
Below Minimum Mi nimum Holding
= 20 hours + (5 in. x 15 minutes) Specified Time [N ote (1))
T emperature, "F at Decreased
=21.25 hour ('C) Temper.ature, hr Notes
so (28 )
100 (56) 4
150 (83) 10 (2)
200 (111) (2o) (2)
NOTES:
(1) Minimum holding t ime for 1 in. (25 mm) tllickness or less• .8.!!!1
15 minutes per Inch ( 25 mmJ cl thickness for thicknesses greater
than I in. (25 mm).
(2) T hese lower postweld heat treatment {e~ atures permlued only
fOI' P -No. 1 Gr. Nos. l and 2 materials.
Notebook Page 472

Practice Problem 022: Table UCS-56.1 Alternative Heat Treatment of Carbon and Low Alloy Steels
What is the minimum PWHT holding time for a 2 in. thick nozzle attached to a pressure vessel made
from SA-335 grade P2 and PWHT at 1000°F?
a) 1 hours
b) 2 hours
c) 2.25 hours
d) 4.25 hours
e) 4.5 hours
Notebook Page 473

Notebook Page 47 4
Solutions
For ASME Section Vlll-1 Practice Problem s
©Codes and Standards Training Insti tute (CAST!)
Notebook Page 475

Answer Key - ASME Section VIII, Division 1 Practice Problems
Practice
Ql: d UW-3(d), Fig. UW-3
Q2: c UW-5(b)
Q3: d UW-30
Q4: c UW-33(a), UW-3,
Fig. UW-3
Q5: a UW-35(a)
Q6: d UW-35(d)
Q7: c UW-51(b)
Q8: e UW-26(d)
Q9: e UW-26(d)(2)
Ql2: a Appendix R
Ql3: d UW-40(a)
Ql4: d UW-40(a)( l )
Ql 5: c UCS-56(d)(l)
Ql6: c UCS-56(f)(2)
Ql7: d UCS-56(f)( 4)(c)
Q20: c Table UCS-56
Q22: d Table UCS-56.1
Notebook Page 476

Practice Problem 012: Preheat Requirement [SOLUTION]
What is the Sec. VIII Div. 1 suggested preheat requirement for NPS 10, Sch 80, 0.594 inch, ASME
SA-335/SA-335M Grade P1 seamless piping material with an ambient temperature of ooF?
The P-No. for this material can be read from ASME Sec. IX, Table QW/QB-422
QW/QB-422 FERROUS/NONFERROUS P- NUMBERS <CONT' Ol

Ferrous (CONT'Dl
S~ified ISO
UNS Tensile, P- Group 15608
Spec. No. Type or Grade No. ksi ( MPal No. No. P-No. Group Nominal Composit ion Product Form
SA-312 TP321 532100 70 (4851 8 1 102 8.1 18Cr- 10Ni-Ti Smls. & welded pipe> 'Is in. no mml
5A-3 12 TP32l 532100 75 (5 151 8 1 102 8. 1 18Cr-10Ni-Ti Smls. & welded pipe ~ 'is in. no mml
5A·312 TP321 532100 75 (5151 8 1 102 8.1 18Cr- 10Ni-TI 5mls. & welded pipe
5A-312 TP321H 532109 70 (4851 8 1 102 8.1 18Cr-lONi-Ti Smls. ole welded pipe > 'Is in. (1 0 mml
5A· 312 TP321H 532109 75 (5 151 8 1 102 8.1 18Cr-10 NI- Tl 5mls. & welded pipe~ 'Is ln. no mml
SA-312 TP321H 532109 75 (515) 8 1 102 8.1 18Cr- l0Ni- Ti Welded pipe
5A·312 $ 34565 534565 115 (795) 8 4 102 8.3 24Cr-17N i-i>Mn- 4.5M<>-N 5mls & welded pipe
SA-312 TP347 $34700 75 (515) 8 1 102 8.1 18Cr- 10 Ni-Cb Smls. & welded pipe
SA-312 T P347H 534709 75 (515) 8 1 102 8.1 18Cr-10N I- Cb 5mls. ole welded pipe
SA-312 TP348 534800 75 (515) 8 1 102 8.1 18Cr- 10Ni- Cb Smls. ole welded pipe
SA-312 TP348H 534809 75 (515) 8 1 102 8.1 18Cr-10NI-Cb 5mls. & welded pipe
SA-312 TPX M-15 538100 75 (5 15) 8 1 102 8.1 18Cr-18Ni-25i 5mls. & welded pipe
SA-333 6 K03006 60 (415) 1 1 101 11.1 C- Mn- 51 Smls. ole welded pipe
SA-333 1 K03008 55 (380) 1 1 101 11.1 C-Mn 5mls. & welded pipe
SA-333 10 ." 80 (5501 1 3 101 11.1 c-Mn- 51 Smls. ole welded pipe
SA-333 4 Kll267 60 (4151 4 2 102 4.1 0. 75Cr-0 .75 Ni- Cu-AI Smls. & welded pipe
SA-333 7 K21903 65 (4501 9A I 101 9.1 2.5 Ni Smls. & welded pipe
SA-333 9 K22035 63 (4351 9A 1 101 9.1 2N I-1Cu Smls. & welded pipe
SA-333 3 K31918 65 (450) 9B 1 101 9.2 3.5 Ni Smls. & welded pipe
SA-333 8 K81340 100 (6901 llA 1 101 9.3 9N I Smls. & welded pipe
5A·334 6 K03006 60 (4151 1 1 101 11.1 c-Mn- Si Welded tube
SA-334 1 K03008 55 (380 1 1 1 101 11.1 c-Mn Welded tube
5A-334 7 K21903 65 (450) 9A 1 101 9.1 2.5Ni Welded tube
SA-334 9 K22035 63 (435) 9A 1 101 9.1 2N I-1Cu Welded tube
5A-334 3 K31918 65 (4 501 9B 1 101 9.2 3.5Ni Welded t ube
SA-334 8 K81340 100 (690) llA 1 101 9.3 9N I Welded tube
5A-335 Pl K11522 s5(38ol CD 1 10 1 l.l c-o.s Mo Smls. pipe
SA-335 P2 Kll547 55 (3801 3 1 101 4.2 0.5Cr- 0.5Mo 5mls. pipe
5A-335 P12 Kll562 60 (4151 4 1 102 5.1 lCr-o.SMo Smls. pipe
SA-335 PIS Kll 578 60 (4151 3 1 101 ... 1.5Si-Q.5Mo 5mls. pipe
5A-335 Pll Kll597 60 (4151 4 1 102 5.1 l.25Cr-o.5Me>-SI Smls. pipe
5A-335 P22 K21590 60 (4151 SA 1 102 5.2 2.25Cr- 1Mo Smls. pipe
SA-335 P21 K31545 60 (4 151 SA 1 102 5 .2 3Cr-1 Mo 5mts. pipe
5A-335 PSc K41245 60 (4 151 58 1 102 5.3 5Cr-o.SM<>-Ti Smls. pipe
SA-335 PS K41545 60 (4151 56 1 102 5.3 5Cr-o.sMo Smls. pipe
5A-335 P5b K51545 60 (415) 58 1 102 5.3 5Cr-Q.5M<>-Si Smls. pipe
Using the P-No., the required minimum preheat temperature can be read from Appendix R, 1{R-2(b).
P-No. 3 Group Nos. 1, 2, 3
(a) 175°F (79°C) for material which has either a specified minimum tensile strength in excess of
70,000 psi (480 MPa) or a thickness at th e joint in excess of 5/8 in. (16 mm);
The suggested preheat is 50°F since the specified minimum tensile str ength of this material in less
than 70,000 psi (480 MPa) (see QW/QB-422) an d th e thickness at the joint is less than 5'8 in.
(16 mm).
Notebook Page 477

Practice Problem 020: Table UCS-56 Heat Treatment of Carbon and Low Alloy Steels [SOLUTION]
What are the ASME VIII-1 PWHT requirements for 10 in. O.D., Schedule 80 (0.594 in.),
ASTM SA- 335/SA-335M Grade P22 seamless piping material?
Table UCS-56 lists heat treatment requirements that are organized by P-No. The P-No. for all B&PV
QW/QB-422 FERROUS/NONFERROUS P·NUMBERS <CONT' Dl
Ferrous (CONT' Ol
Speclfled ISO
Spec. No. Type or Grade No. ksi <MPal No. No. P· No. Group Nominal Composition Product Form
5A·312 TP321 532100 70 (485) 8 102 8.1 18CI"-10NI-TI 5mls. & welded pipe> % in. (lO mml
5A·312 TP321 532100 75 1515) 8 102 8.1 18CI"--ONI-TI 5mls. & welded pipe S% in. 110 mml
5A·312 TP321 532100 75 (515) 102 8.1 18CI"-10NI-TI 5mls. & welded pipe
5A·312 TP321 H 53210'1 70 (485) 102 8.1 18Cr- JONI-TI 5mls. & welded pipe> %ln. (10 mm)
5A·312 TP321 H 532109 75 (515) 8 102 8.1 18C1"-IONI-TI 5mls. & welded pipe S % in. 110 mml
5A·312 TP3ZI H 532109 75 (515) 8 102 8.1 18C1"-IONI-TI Welded pipe
5A·312 534565 5345b5 115 (795) 8 102 8.3 24Cr- 17NI-oMn-4.5Me>-N 5mls & welded pipe
5A·312 TP347 534700 75 (5 15) 8 102 8. 1 18Cr-10N f Cb Smls. & welded pipe
5A·312 TP347H 534709 75 (515) 8 102 8.1 18Cr- ION1-Cb 5mls. & welded pipe
5A·312 TP348 534800 75 (5 15) 8 102 8.1 18Cr-10N1-Cb 5mls. & welded pipe
SA·312 TP348H 534809 75 (515) 8 102 8.1 18Cr-10NI-Cb Smls. & welded pipe
5A·312 TPXM-15 538100 75 (515) 8 102 8.1 18Cr- 18N I-251 5mls. & welded pipe
SA·333 0 K0300b bO 14151 I 101 11.1 c-Mr>-SI Smls. & ""lded pipe
SA·333 K03008 55 (380) 1 101 11. 1 C- Mn Smls. & welded pipe
SA·333 10 80 (550) 1 101 ll.1 C-M,...SI Smls. & welded pipe
SA·333 Kll2b7 bO (415) 4 102 4,1 0.75CI"-0.7SN1-Cu-AI Smls. & welded pipe
SA·333 K21903 b5 (4501 9A 101 '1. 1 2.SNI Smls. & welded pipe
SA·333 9 K22035 b) (4351 'lA 101 '1.1 2NI-1Cu Smls. & welded pipe
SA·333 K31918 b5 (450) '18 101 '1.2 3.SNI 5mls. & welded pipe
SA·333 8 K81340 100 (690) llA 101 '!.) 'IN I Smls. & welded pipe
SA·334 6 K0300b 60 (415) 1 101 ll.1 C- M~>-5 1 Welded tube
5A·334 K03008 55 <380) 1 101 ll.1 C- Mn Weldedtu~
5A·334 K21903 65 (450) 9A 101 9.1 2.5NI Weldedtu~
SA·334 9 K22035 63 (435) 9A 101 9.1 2Ni- 1Cu Weldedtu~
SA·334 3 K31918 65 (450) 98 101 9.2 3.5NI Welded tu~
SA·334 K81340 100 (690) l!A 101 9.3 9 NI Welded tu ~
SA·335 PI Kll522 55 (380) 3 101 1.1 C~.5Mo Smls. pipe

SA·335 P2 Kll547 55 (380) 3 101 4.2 O.SC.....O.SMo Smls. pipe
SA·335 P12 Kll 562 60 (415) 4 102 5. 1 1Cr~.5Mo Smls. pipe
5A·335 PIS Kll578 bO (415) 3 101 1.5SI-D.5Mo 5mls. pipe
5A·335 Pll Kll597 bO 14151 4 102 5. 1 1.25Cr-0.5Me>-51 Smls. pipe
SA·l3S P22 K21Sqo 60 (415) @ 102 5.2 2.25Cr-1Mo Smls. pipe
511·335 P2 1 K31545 60 (415) SA 102 5.2 3Cr-1Mo 5mls. pipe
5A·33S Psc K41245 bO (4151 SB 102 5.3 5C r~.5 M e>-TI 5mls. pipe
511·335 P5 K41545 60 (415) SB 102 5.3 5C r~.5 M o Smls. pipe
SA·33S PSb K51545 60 (415) 58 102 5.) 5C r~.5Me>-S I 5mls. pipe
Since SA-335 grade P22 has an ASME P-No. 5A, then find the required PWHT values in Table
UCS-56 for P-No. 5A, with a thickness of 0.594 in, as follows:
TABLE UCS-56
POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT REQUIREMENTS FOR CARBON AND LOW ALLOY STEELS <CONT'Dl
Normal Holding Minimum Holding Time at Normal Temperature

Temperature, for Nominal Thickness !See UW-40(fll
"F <"Cl, Up to 2 in. Over 2 in. to 5 ln. Over 5 in.
Material Minimum (50 mml (50 mm to 125 mml !125 mml
P-Nos. SA, 58 Gr. No. 1, @<t.75) 1 hr/ln. (25 mml 5 hr plus 15 min
and SC Gr. No. 1 for each addi·
tlonal inch
(25 mml over
5 in. 025
mml
From Table UCS-56 for P-No. 5A, the PWHT minimum holding temperature is 1,250°F; the
minimum holdin time is 0.594 x 60 minutes= 36 minutes; no hardness testing required.
Notebook Page 478

2011a SECTION VJII - DIVISION 1
INTRODUCTION
SCOPE construction under this Divisio n. The Nonmandatory

Appendices provide information and suggested good prac-
(a} U-1 SCOPE
tices.
U- l(a)
U-J(c)
U-l(a)( 1) The Foreword provides the basis for the
rules described in this Division. U-l(c)( I) The scope of this Division has been estab-
U-l(a)(2) For the scope of lhis Division, pressure lished to identify the components and parameters consid-
vessels are containers for the containment of pressure, ered in formulating the rules given in this Division. Laws
either internal or external. This pressure may be obtained or regulations issued by municipality, state, provincial,
from an external source, or by the application of heat from federal, or other enforcement or regulatory bodies having
a direct or indirect source, or any combination thereof. jurisdiction at the location of an installation establish the
U- J(a){J) This Division contains mandatory require- mandatory applicability of the Code rules, in whole or in
ments, specific prohibitions, and nonmandatory guidance part, within their jurisdiction. T hose laws or regulations
for pressure vessel materials, design, fabrication , examina- may require the use of this Division of the Code for vessels
tion, inspection, testing, certification, and pressure relief. or components not considered to be within its Scope. These
The Code does not address all aspects of these activities, laws or regulations should be reviewed to determine size
and those aspects which are not specifically addressed or service limitations of the coverage which may be differ-
should not be considered prohibited. Engineering judgment e nt or more restrictive than those given here.
must be consistent with the philosophy of this Division, and U- l (c)(2) Based on the Committee's consideration,
such judgments must never be used to overrule mandatory the following classes of vessels are not included in the
requirements or specific prohibitions of this Division. See scope of this Division; however, any pressure vessel which
also informative and nonmandatory guidance regarding meets all the applicable req uirements of this Division may
metallurgical phenomena in Appendix A of Section II, be stamped with the Certification Mark with the U Desig-
Part D. nator:
U-l(b) This Division is divided into three Subsections,
(a) those within the scope of other Sections;
Mandatory Appendices, and Nonmandatory Appendices.
Subsection A consis ts of Part UG, covering the general (b) fired process tubular heaters ;
requirements applicable to all pressure vessels. Subsection (c) pressure containers which arc integral parts or
B covers specific requirements that are applicable to the components of rotating or reciprocating mechanical
various methods used in the fabr ication of pressure vessels. devices, such as pumps, compressors, turbines, generators,
It consists of Parts UW, UF, and UB dealing with welded, engines, and hydraulic or pneumatic cylinders where the
forged , and brazed methods, respectively. Subsection C primary design considerations and/or stresses are derived
c overs specific requirements applicable to the several from the functional requirements of the device;
classes of materials used in pressure vessel construction.
(d) except as covered in U-1(f), s tructures whose
It consists of Parts UCS, UNF, UHA, UCI, UCL, UCD,
primary function is the transport of fluids from one location
UHT, ULW, ULT, and UIG dealing with carbon and low
to another within a system of which it is an integral part,
alloy steels, nonferrous metals, high alloy steels, cast iron,
that is,piping systems;
clad and lined material, cast ductile iron , ferritic steels with
properties enhanced by heat treatment, layered construc- (e) piping components, such as pipe, fl anges, bolt-
tion, low temperature materials, and impregnated graphite, ing, gaskets, valves, expansion joints, fittings, and the pres-
respectively. Section 11, Part D also contains tables of sure containing parts of other components. such as strainers
maximum allowable stress values for these classes of mate- and devices which serve such purposes as mixing, separat-
rials, except for impregnated graphite. ing, snubbing, distributing, and metering or controlling
The Mandatory Appendices address specific subjects not flow, provided that pressure containing parts of such com-
covered elsewhere in this Division, and their requirements ponents are generally recognized as piping components or
are mandatory when the subject covered is included in accessories;

tl S
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. 111
Notebook Page 479
20lla SECTION Vlll - DI VISION 1
(f) a vessel for containing water 1 under pressure, (c) the face of the first flange for bolted, flanged
including those containing air the compressio n of which connections;
serves only as a cushion, when none of the fo llowing (d) the fi rst sealing surface for proprietary connec-
limitations are exceeded: tions or fittings;
( 1) a design pressure of 300 psi (2 MPa); U-l (e)(2) where nonpressure parts are we lded
(2) a des ign temperature of 2 l0°F (99°C); directly to either the internal or external pressure retaining
(g) a hot water supply storage tank heated by steam surface of a pressure vessel, this scope shall include the
or any other indirect means when none of the following design, fabrication, testi ng, and material requirements
limitations is exceeded: established for non pressure part attachments by the applica-
( I ) a heat input of 200,000 Btu/hr (58.6 kW); ble paragraphs of this Division; 3
(2) a water temperature of 21 0°F (99°C); U -I (e)( 3) pressure retaining covers for vessel open-
(3) a no min a l water containing cap acity of ings, such as manhole or handhole covers, and bolted cov-
120 gal (450 L) ; ers with their attaching bolting and nuts;
(h) vessels not exceeding the design pressure (see U-l(e)(4) the first sealing surface for proprietary fit-
3-2), at the top of the vessel, limitations below, with no tings or components for which rules are not provided by
limitation on size (see UG-28(1), 9- I (c)): this Divisio n, such as gages, instruments, and nonmetallic
( I ) vessels having an internal or external pres- components.
sure not exceeding 15 psi (100 kPa); U-l(j) The scope of the Division includes provisions
(2) comb inati o n units having a n internal or for pressure relief devices necessary to satisfy the require-
external pressure in each chamber not exceeding 15 psi ments of UG- I 25 through UG- I 37 and Appendix 11.
( I 00 kPa) and d ifferential pressure on the common ele- U-1(g)( I) Unfired steam boilers shall be constructed in
ments not exceeding 15 psi ( 100 kPa) [see UG-1 9(a)]; accordance with the rules of Section I or this Division [see
(i) vessels having an inside diameter, width, height, UG-l25(b) and UW-2(c)].
or cross section diagonal not exceeding 6 in. ( 152 mm), U -l (g)(2) The fol lowing pressure vessels in whi ch
with no limitation on length of vessel or pressure; steam is generated shall not be considered as unfired steam
(j) pressure vessels for human occupancy.2 boilers, and shall be constructed in accordance with the
U-l(d) The rules of this Division have been formulated rules of this Division:
on the basis of design principles and construction practices U-l(g)(2)(a) vessels known as evaporators or heat
applicable to vessels designed for pressures not exceeding exchangers;
3000 psi (20 MPa). For pressures above 3000 psi (20 MPa), U-l(g)(2)(b) vessels in which steam is generated
deviations from and additions to these rules usually are by the use of heat resulting from operation or a processi ng
necessary to meet the requirements of design principles system containing a number of pressure vessels such as
and construction practices for these higher pressures. Only used in the manufacture of chem ical and petroleum
in the event that after having applied these additional design products;
principles and construction practices the vessel still com- U-l(g)(2)(c) vessels in which steam is generated
plies with all of the requirements of this Di vision may it but not withdrawn for external use.
be stamped with the applicable Certification Mark with the U-l(h) Pressure vessels or parts subject to direct firing
Designator. from the combustion of fuel (solid, liquid, or gaseous),
U - l (e) In relation to the geometry of pressure con- which are not within the scope of Sections I, ill, or IV
taining parts, the scope of this Division shall include the may be constructed in accordance with the rules of this
following: Division [see UW-2(d)].
U-1 ( e)(J) where external piping; other pressure ves- U- l(i) Gas fired jacketed steam kettles with j acket
sels including heat exchangers; or mechanical devices, such operating pressures not exceeding 50 psi (345 kPa) may
as pumps, mixers, or compressors, are to be connected to be constructed in accordance with the rules of this Division
the vessel: (see Appendix 19).
(a) the welding end connection for the first circum- U-l(j) Pressure vessels exclusive of those covered in
ferential joint for welded connections [see UW-l3(h)]; U-l (c), U-l(g), U- l (h), and U-l(i) that are not required
(b) the first threaded joint for screwed connections; by the rules of this Division to be fully radiographed, which
are not provided with quick actuating closures (see UG-35),
1
The water may contain additives provided the flash point of the and that do not exceed the fo llowing volume and pressure
aqueous sol ution at atmospheric pressure is 185°F or higher. The flash
point shall be determined by the methods speci fied in ASTM D 93 or in 3
These requirements for design, fabrication, testi ng, and material for
ASTM D 56, whichever is appropriate. nonp ressure part attachments do not establ ish the length, size, or shape
2
Requirements for pressure vessels for human occupancy are covered of the attachment material. Pads and standoffs are permitted and the
by ASME PVH0- 1. scope can tenni nate at the next welded or mechanical joint.
2
Copyright © 201 1 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ~
em·S
Notebook Page 480 No reproduction may be made of this material wi thout w ritten consent of ASME.
2011a SECTION Vlii - DIVISION 1
limits may be exempted from inspection by Inspectors, as from the Manufacturer may be necessary for completion
defined in UG-91, provided that they comply in all other of this form.
respects with the requirements of this Division: (b) Responsibi/ities5
U-l(j)( 1) 5 cu ft (0.14 m3) in volume and 250 psi ( I) The Manufacturer o f any vessel or part to be
( 1.7 MPa) design pressure; or marked with the Certification Mark has the responsibility
U-l(j)(2) 3 cu ft (0.08 m3) in volume and 350 psi of complying with all of the applicable requirements of
(2.4 MPa) design pressure; th is Division and, through proper certificaLion, of assuring
U-l(j){3) 1 ~ cu ft (0.04 m3) in volume and 600 psi that all work done by others also complies. The vessel or
(4.1 MPa) design pressure. part Manufacturer shall have available for the Inspector's
In an assembly of vessels, the limitations in (I) through review the applicable design calculations. See I 0-5 and
(3) above apply to each vessel and not the assembly as a I0-15(d).
whole. Straight line interpolation for intermediate volumes (2) Some types of work, such as forming, nondestruc-
and design pressures is permitted. Vessels fabricated in tive examination, and heat treating, may be performed by
accordance with this rule shall be marked with the "UM" others (for welding, see UW-26 and UW-31). It is the
Symbol in Fig. UG- 116 sketch (b) and with the data vessel or part Manufacturer's responsibility to ensure that
required in UG-116. Certificates of Compliance shall sat- all work so performed complies with all the applicable
isfy the requirements of UG- l20(a). requirements of this Division. After ensurimg Code compli-
ance, the vessel or part may be stamped with the Certifica-
tion Mark and Designator by the appropriate Certificate
Holder after acceptance by the Inspector.
GENERAL
(c) A vessel may be designed and constructed using any
{a) U-2 GENE RAL combination of the methods of fabrication and the classes
4
(a) T he user or his designated agent shall establish of materials covered by this Division provided the rules
the design requirements for pressure vessels, taking into applying to each method and material are complied with
consideration factors associated with norm al operation, and the vessel is marked as required by UG-11 6.
such other conditions as startup and shutdown, and abnor- (d) When the strength of any part cannot be computed
mal conditions which may become a governing design with a satisfactory assurance of safety, the rules provide
consideration (see UG-22). procedures for establishing its maximum allowable work-
Such consideration shall include but shall not be limited ing pressure.
to the followi ng: (e) It is the duty of the Inspector to make all of the
( 1) the need for corrosion allowances; inspections specified by the rules of this Division, and of
(2) the definition of lethal services. For example. see monitoring the quality control and the examinations made
UW-2(a). by the Manufacturer. He shall make such other inspections
(3) the need for postweld heat treatment beyond the as in his judgment are necessary to permit him to certify that
requirements of this Division and dependent on service the vessel has been designed and constructed in accordance
conditions; with the requirements. The Inspector has the duty of veri-
(4) for pressure vessels in which steam is generated, f'y ing that the applicable calculations have been made and
or water is heated [see U-l(g) and (h)], the need for piping, are on file at Manufacturer's plant at the time the Data
valves, instruments, and fittings to perform the functions Report is signed. Any questions concerning the calculations
covered by PG-59 through PG-61 of Section I. raised by the Inspector must be resolved. See UG-90(c)(l ).
(5) the degree of nondestructive examinations(s) and (j) The rules of this Division shall serve as the basis
the selection of applicable acceptance standards, when such for the Inspector to:
examinations are applied, are beyond the requirements of (I) perform the required duties;
this Division. (2) authorize the application of the Certification
Sample User Design Requirements forms and guidance Mark;
o n their preparation are found in Nonmandatory (3) sign the Certificate of Shop (or Field Assembly)
Appendix KK. This sample form might not be applicable Inspection.
to all pressure vessels that may be constructed in accor- (g) This Division of Section VIII does not contain rules
dance with this Divnsion. T he user is cautioned that input to cover all details of design and construction. Where com-
plete details are not given, it is intended that the Manufac-
4 turer, subject to the acceptance of the Ins pector, shall
For this Division, the user"s designated agent may be e ither a design
agency specifically engaged by the user, the Manufacturer o f a system
for a specific service that includes a pressure vessel as a patt and that is
5 See UG-90(b) and UG-90(c)(l) for summaries of the responsibilities
purchased by the user, or an organization that offers pressure vessels for
sale or lease for specific services. of the Manufacturer and the duties of the Inspector.
3
20lla SECTION VIII - DIVISION 1
provide details of design and construction which will be U-4 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT6
as safe as those provided by the rules of this Division.
Either U.S. Customary, SI, or any local customary units
(h) Field assembly of vessels constructed to this Divi-
may be used to demonstrate compliance with all require-
sion may be performed as follows. ments of this edition, e.g., materials, design, fabrication,
(I) The Manufacturer of the vessel completes the examination, inspection, testing, ceNification, and over-
vessel in the field, completes the Form U- 1 or U- 1A Manu- pressure protection.
facturer's Data Report, and stamps the vessel. In general, it is expected that a single system of units
(2) The Manufacturer of parts of a vessel to be com- shall be used for all aspects of design except where unfeasi-
pleted in the lleld by some other party stamps these parts ble or impractical. When components are manufactured at
in accordance with Code rules and supplies the Form U- different locations where local customary units are different
2 or U-2A Manufacturer's Partial Data Report to the other than those used for the general design, the local units
party. The other party, who must hold a valid U Certificate may be used for the design and documentation of that
of Authorization, makes the final assembly, required NDE, component. Similarly, for proprietary components or those
final pressure test; completes the Form U- 1 or U-1 A Manu- uniquely associated with a system of units different than
facturer's Data Report; and stamps the vessel. that used for the general design, the alternate units may be
( 3) The field portion of the work is completed by a used for the design and documentation of that component.
holder of a valid U Certificate of Authorization other than For any single equation, all variables shall be expressed
the vessel Manufacturer. The Certillcate Holder performing in a single system of units. When separate equations are
the field work is required to supply a Form U-2 or U-2A provided for U.S. Customary and SI units, those equations
Manufacturer's Partial Data Report covering the portion must be executed using variables in the units associated
of the work completed by his organization (including data with the specific equation. Data expressed in other units
on the pressure test if conducted by the Certificate Holder shall be converted to U.S. Customary or SI units for use
performing the field work) to the Manufacturer responsible in these equations. The res ult obtained from execution of
for the Code vessel. The vessel Manufacturer applies his these equations may be converted to other units.
Certification Mark with the U Designator in the presence Production, measurement and test equipment, drawings,
of a representative fro m his Inspection Agency and com- welding procedure specifications, welding procedure and
pletes the Form U- I or U-1 A Manufacturer's Data Report performance qual ifications, and other fabrication docu-
with his Inspector. ments may be in U.S. Customary, SI, or local customary
units in accordance with the fabricator's practice. When
In all three alternatives, the party completing and signing
values shown in calculations and analysis, fabtication doc-
the Form U-1 or U-lA Manufacturer's Data Report
uments, or measurement and test equipment are in different
assumes full Code responsibility for the vessel. In all three
units, any conversions necessary for verification of Code
cases, each Manufacturer's Quality Control System shall
compliance and to ensure that dimens ional consistency is
descri be the controls to assure compliance for each Certifi-
maintained, shall be in accordance with the following:
cate Holder.
(a) Conversion factors shall be accurate to at least four
(i) For some design analyses, both a chart or curve and sig nificant figures.
a formula or tabular data are given. Use of the formula or
(b) The results of conversions of units shall be expressed
tabular data may result in answers which are slightly differ-
to a minimum of three significant figures.
ent from the values obtained from the chart or curve. How-
Conversion of units, using the preci.sion specified above
ever, the differe nce, if any, is within practical accuracy
shall be performed to assure that dimensional consistency
and either method is acceptable.
is maintained. Conversion factors between U.S. C ustomary
and SI units may be found in the Non mandatory Appendix,
Guidance for the Use of U.S. Customary and SI Units in
the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Whenever
U-3 STANDARDS REFERENCED BY THIS local customary units are used the Manufacturer shall pro-
DIVISION vide the source of the conversion factors which shall be
subject to verification and acceptance by the Authorized
(a) Throughout this Division references are made to Inspector or Certified Individual.
various standards, such as ANSI standards, which cover Material that has been manufactured and certified to
pressure-temperature rating, dimensional, or procedural either the U.S. Customary or SI material specification (e.g.,
standards for pressure vessel parts. These standards, with SA-516M) may be used regardless of the unit system used
the year of the acceptable edition, are listed in Table U-3.
(b) Rules for the use of these standards are stated else- ~ Guidance for conversion of units from U.S. Customary to Sl is found
where in this Division. in Nonmandatory Appendix GG.
4
Copyright © 20 l l by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
Notebook Page 482 No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent ofASME.
2011a SECTION VJll - DIVISION 1
in design. Standard fittings (e.g., flanges, elbows, etc.) that U·5 TOLERANCES (a)
have been certified to either U.S. Customary units or SI
units may be used regardless of the units system used in The Code does not fully address tolerances. When
design. dimensions, sizes, or other parameters are not specified
All entries on a Manufacturer's Data Report and data with tolerances, the values of these parameters are consid-
for Code-required nameplate marking shall be in units ered nominal, and allowable tolerances or local variances
consistent with the fabrication drawings for the component may be considered acceptable when based on engineering
using U.S . Customary, SI, or local customary units. It is judgment and standard practices as determi ned by the
acceptable to show alternate units parenthetically. Users designer.
of this Code are cautioned that the receiving jurisdiction
should be contacted to ensure the units are acceptable.
5
No reproduction may be made of this material without w ritten consent of ASME. ~ Notebook Page 483
201la SECTION VIII -DIVISION 1
UG -85 HEAT TREATMENT (9) examination of the shell and head sections to con-
firm they have been properly formed to the specified shapes
When plate specification heat treatments are not per-
within the permissible tolerances (UG-79, UG-80, UG-81,
formed by the material manufacturer, they shall be per-
UF-27, and UF-29);
formed by, or be under the control of, the Manufacturer
who shall then place the letter "T" following the letter "G" ( 10) qualification of the welding and/or brazing pro-
in the Mill plate marking (see SA-20) to indicate that the cedures before they are used in fabrication [UG-84(h),
heat treatments required by the material specification have UW-28(b), and UB-31];
been performed. The Manufacturer shall also document in (If) qualification of welders and welding operators
accordance with UG-93(b) that the specified heat treatment and brazers before using the welders or brazers in produc-
has been performed. tion work (UW-29, UW-48, UB-32, and UB-43);
UCS-85, UHT-5(e), and UHT-81 provide requirements ( 12) examination of all parts prior to joining to make
for heat treatment of test specimens. certain they have been properly fitted for welding or braz-
ing and that the surfaces to be joined have been cleaned and
the alignment tolerances are maintained (UW-31, UW-32,
UW-33, and UB-1 7);
INSPECTION AND TESTS
(I 3) examination of parts as fabrication progresses,
(a) UG-90 GENERAL for material marking (UG-94), that defects are not evident
(UG-95), and that dimensional geometries are maintained
(a) The inspection and testing of pressure vessels to be
marked with the Certification Mark with the U Designator (UG-96 and UF-30);
and the testing of vessels to be marked with the Certifica- ( I4) provision of controls to assure that all required
tion Mark with the UM Designator shall conform to the heat treatments are performed (UW-2, UW- 10, UG-85 ,
general requirements for inspection and testing in the fol - UF-31, and 10- 11);
lowing paragraphs and, in addition, to the specific require- ( I5) provision of records of nonclestructi ve testing
ments for Inspection and Tests given in the applicable Parts examinations performed on the vessel or vessel parts. This
of Subsections B and C. shall include retaining the radiographic film if radiographic
(b) The Manufacturer has the responsibility of assuring examinations are performed (UW-51, UW-52, and 10-10);
that the quality control, the detailed examinations, and ( I6) making the required hydrostatic or pneumatic
the tests required by this Division are performed. The test and having the required inspection performed during
Manufacturer shall perform his specified duties. See UG-92 such test (UG-99, UG-100, UG-101, and UW-50);
and 10-15. Some, but not all, of these responsibilities, ( 17) applying the required stamping and/or name-
which are defined in the applicable rules, are summarized plate to the vessel and making certain iit is applied to proper
as follows: vessel (UG-1 16, UG- 118, and UG- 119);
(I) the Certificate of Authorization from the ASME
( 18) preparing required Manufacturer's Data Report
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee authorizing the
and having it certified by the Inspector (UG-120);
Manufacturer to fabricate the class of vessel being con-
( I9) providing for retention of radiographs (UW-51),
structed [UG-ll7(a)];
ultrasonic test reports (12-4 ), Manufacturer's Data Reports
(2) the drawings and design calculations for the ves-
(UG-120), and other documents as required by this Divi-
sel or part [10-5 and l0- 15(d)];
sion (10- 13).
(3) identification for all material used in the fabrica-
tion of the vessel or part (UG-93); (c)(J) The Inspector shall make all inspections specifi-
(4) securing Partial Data Reports [UG- 120(c)]; cally required of him plus such other inspections as he
(5) access for the Inspector in accordance with UG-92 believes are necessary to enable him to certify that all
and l0- 15; vessels which he authorizes to be stamped with the Certifi-
(6) examination of all materials before fabrication to cation Mark have been designed and constructed in accor-
make certain they have the required thickness, to detect dance with the requirements of this Division. Some, but
defects [UG-93(d)], to make certain the materials are per- not all, of the required inspections and vetifications, which
mitted by this Division (UG-4), and that traceability are defined in the applicable rules, are summarized as
(UG-77) to the material identification (UG-93) has been follows:
maintained; (a) verifying that the Manufacturer has a valid Cer-
(7) documentation of impact tests when such tests are tificate of Authorization [UG- 117(a)] and is working to a
required (UF-5, UCS-66, UHA-51, UHT-6, and ULT-5); Quality Control System [UG-117(e)];
(8) concu1Tence of the Inspector prior to any base (b) verifying that the applicable design calculations
metal repairs (UG-78 and UF-37); are available [U-2(b), U-2(c), 10-5, and IO- l5(d)];
72

eOls
201la SECTION VIII - DIVISION 1
(c) verifying that materials used in the construction UG·91 THE INSPECTOR
o f the vessel comply with the requirements of UG-4
(a) All references to Inspectors throughout this Division
through UG-14 (UG-93);
mean the Authorized Inspector as defined in this paragraph.
(d) verify ing that all welding and brazing proce- All inspections required by this Division of Section VIII
dures have been qualified (UW-28, UW-47, and UB-42); shall be:
(e) verifying that all welders, welding operators, ( 1) by an Inspector regularly employed by an ASME
brazers, and brazing operators have been qualified (UW-29, accred ited Authori zed I nspection Agency ,33 i.e., the
UW-48, and UB-43); inspection organization of a state or munjcipality of the
(f) verifying that the heat treatments, including United States, a Canadian province, or an insurance com-
PWHT, have been performed (UG-85, UW -10, UW -40, pany authorized to write boiler and pressure vessel insur-
UW-49, and UF-52); ance, except that
(g) verifying that material imperfections repaired (2) inspections may be by the regularly employed
by welding were acceptably repaired [UG-78, user's Inspector in the case of a User-Manufacturer which
UW-52(d)(2)(c), UF-37, and UF-47(c)] ; manufactures pressure vessels exclusively for its own use
(h) verifying that weld defec ts were acceptably and not for resale [sec UG-116(a)(l)] .
re paired [UW-51(c) and UW-52(c)]; Except as permitted in (2) above, the Ins pector shall not
(i) verifying that required nondestructive examina- be in the employ of the Manufacturer. All Inspectors shall
tions, impact rests, and other tests have been performed have been qualified by a written examination under the
and that the results are acceptable (UG-84, UG-93, UW-50, rules of any state of the United States or province of Canada
UW-51, UW-52, and UB-44); which has adopted the Code.
(j) making a visual inspection of vessel to confirm (b) In addition to the duties specified, the Inspector has
that the material identification numbers have been properly the duty to monitor the Manufacturer's Quality Control
transferred (UG-77 and UG-94) ; System as required in Appendix 10.
(k) making a visual inspection of the vessel to con-
firm that there are no material or dimensional defects
UG-92 ACCESS FOR INSPECTOR
(UG-95, UG-96, and UG-97);
(I) performing internal and external inspections The Manufacturer of the vesse l shall arrange for the
and witnessing the hydrostatic or pneumatic tests (UG-96, Inspector to have free access to such parts of all plants as
UG-97, UG-99, UG- 100, and UG-10 I ); are concerned with the supply or manufacture of materials
(m) verifying that the required marking is provided for the vessel, when so requested. The Inspector shall be
(UG-115) and that any nameplate has been attached to the permitted free access, at all times while work on the vessel
proper vessel; is being performed, to all parts of the Manufacturer's shop
(n) signing t he Certificate of Inspection on the that concern the construction of the vessel and to the site
Manufacturer's Data Report when the vessel, to the best of field erected vessels during the period of assembly and
of his knowledge and belief, is in compliance with all the testing of the vessel. The Manufacturer shall keep the
provisions of this Division. When the Inspector has certi- Inspector informed of the progress of the work and shall
fied by signing the Manufacturer's Data Report, this indi- notify him reasonably in advance when vessels will be
cates acceptance by the Inspector. This acceptance does ready for any required tests or inspections.
not imply assumption by the Inspector of any of the respon-
sibilities o f the Manufacturer.
UG-93 INSPECTION OF MATERIALS (a)
(2) When mass production of pressure vessels makes
it impracticable for the Inspector to personally perform (a) Except as otherwise provided in UG-4(b), UG-10,
each of his required duties, 32 the Manufacturer, in collabo- UG-11, or UG-1 5, requirements for acceptance of materials
ration with the Inspector, shall prepare an inspection and furnished by the material manufacturer or material supplier
quality control procedure setting forth, in complete detail, in complete compliance with a material specification o f
the method by which the requirements32 of this Di vision Section II shall be as follows .
will be maintained. This procedure shall be developed, (I) For plates,2 the vessel Manufacturer shall ensure
accepted, and implemented in accordance with Mandatory all requirements of the material specilication, and all spe-
Appendix 35. c ial requirements of this Division, that are to be fulfilled
by the materials manufacturer have been complied with.
33 Whenever Autlw r ized fnspecrion Agency or AlA is used in this Code,

32 SeeUG-90(b) and UG -90(c)( I) for summaries of the responsibil ities it shall mean an Authorized Inspection Agency accredi ted by ASME in
of the Manufacturer and the duties of the Inspector. accordance with the requirements in the latest ed ition of ASME QA I- l .
73
Copyright © 20 I I by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ~.
201la SECTION Vlll - DIVISION 1
The Manufacturer shall accomplish this by obtaining cer- than the material manufacturer [see UG-84(d) and UG-85] ,
tificates of compliance or Material Test Reports . The then the vessel Manufacturer shall obtain supplementary
Inspector shall determine if these documents represent the material test reports or certificates of compliance and the
material and meet the requirements of the material specifi- Inspector shall examine these documents and shall deter-
cation. mine that they represent the material and meet the require-
(a) These documents shall include results of all ments of the material specification.
required tests and examinations, evidence of compliance (c) When requirements or provisions of this Division
with the material specifications, and additional require- applicable to materials exceed or supplement the require-
ments, as applicable. When the specification permits cer- ments of the material specification of Section II (see
tain specific requirements to be completed later, those UG-24, UG-84, and UG-85), then the vessel Manufacturer
incomplete items shall be noted on the material documenta- shall obtain supplementary material test reports or certifi-
tion. When these specific requirements have been com- cates of compliance and the Inspector shall examine these
pleted by someone other than the material manufacturer, documents and shall determine that they represent the mate-
this completion shall be documented and attached to the rial and meet the requirements or provisions of th is
material documentation. Division.
(b) The vessel Manufacturer shall receive a copy (d) All materials to be used in COiilStructing a pressure
of the test report as prepared by the originator of the data vessel shall be examined before fabrication for the purpose
and maintain as part of his construction records. of detecting, as far as possible, imperfections which would
(2) For all other product forms, the material shall be affect the safety of the vessel.
accepted as complying with the material specification if ( 1) Particular attention should be given to cut edges
the material specification provides for the marking of each and other parts of rolled plate which would disclose the
piece with the spec ificati on designation, including the existence of serious laminations, shearing cracks, and other
grade, type, and class if applicable, and each piece is so imperfections.
marked.
(2) All materials that are to be tested in accordance
(3) If the material specification does not provide for
with the requirements of UG-84 shall be inspected for
the marking of each piece as indicated in (a)(2) above, the
surface cracks.
material shall be accepted as complying with the material
(3) When a pressure part is to be welded to a flat
specification provided the fo llowing requirements are met.
plate thicker than ~ in. ( 13 mm) to form a corner joint
(a) Eacih bund le, lift, or sh ipping container is
under the provision ofUW-13(e), the weld joint preparation
marked with the specification designation, including the
in the flat plate shall be examined before welding as speci-
grade, type, and class if applicable by the material manufac-
fied in (d)(4) below by either the magnetic particle or liquid
turer or supplier.
penetrant methods. After welding, both the peripheral edge
(b) The handling and storage of the material by
of the flat plate and any remaining exposed surface of the
the vessel Manufacturer shall be documented in his Quality
weld joint preparation shall be reexamined by the magnetic
Control System such that the Inspector can determine that
particle or liquid penetrant methods as specified in (d)(4)
it is the material identified in (a)(3)(a) above. Traceability
below. When the plate is nonmagnetic, only the liquid
to specific lot, order, or heat is not required. Traceability
penetrant method shall be used. The requirements of this
is required only to material specification and grade and
paragraph shall not apply to those j oints when 80% or
type and class, if applicable.
more of the pressure load is carried by tubes, stays, or
(4) For pipe or tube where the length is not adequate
braces.
for the complete marking in accordance with the material
specification or not provided in accordance with (a)(3) (4) For Fig. UW- 13.2 the weld j oint preparation and
above, the mater ial shall be acceptable as complying with the peripheral edges of fiat plate forming a corner joint
the material specification provided the following are met: shall be examined as follows:
(a) a coded marking is applied to each piece of (a) the weld edge preparation of typical weld joint
pipe or tube by the material manufacturer or material sup- preparations in the flat plate as shown in sketches (b), (c),
plier; and (d), (f), and (n);
(b) the coded marking applied by the material man- (b) the outside peripheral edge of the fiat plate after
ufacturer or material supplier is traceable to the specifica- welding as shown in sketches (a), (b), (c), and (d);
tion designation, including the grade, type, and class if (c) the outside peripheral edge of the flat plate after
applicable. welding, as shown in sketches (e), (t), and (g) if the distance
(b) Except as otherwise provided in UG-4(b), UG-10, from the edge of the completed weld to the peripheral edge
UG- 11 , or UG- 15, when some requirements of a material of the flat plate is less than the thickness of the flat plate
specification of Section II have been completed by other such as defined in UG-34(b);
74
Notebook Page 486 No reproduction may be made ofthis material without written consent of ASME. ~
2011a SECTION Vffi - DIVISION 1
(10} FIG . UW-21 TYPICAL DETAI LS FO R SLIP-ON AND SOCI<ET WE LDED FLANGE ATTACHMENT WELDS
(a)
(1) (2) (3) (4 )
GENERAL NOTE: Xm;n =the lesser of 1.4tn or the thi ckness of the hub
that are fabri cated by welding and shall be used in conjunc- (a) a requi re ment for complete and exclus ive
tion with the general requirements for Fabrication in Sub- administrative and technical supervision of all welders by
section A , and with the s pecific requirem e nts for the Manufacturer;
Fabrication in Subsectio n C that pertain to the class of (b) e vidence of the Manufacturer 's a uthori ty to
material used. assign and remove welders at hi s discretion wi thout
(b) Each Manufacturer or parts Manufacturer shall be involvement of any other organization;
responsible for the quality of the welding done by his (c) a requirement for assignment of welder identi-
organization and shall conduct tests not only of the welding fication symbols;
procedure to determine its suitability to ensure welds which (d) evidence that this program has been accepted
will meet the required tests, but also of the welders and by the Manufacturer 's A uthorized Inspection Agency
welding operators to determine their ability to apply the which provides the inspection service.
procedure properly. (5) The Manufacturer shall be responsible for Code
(c) No production welding shall be undertaken until compliance of the vessel or part, including Certification
after the welding procedures which are to be used have Mark stamping and providing Data Report Forms properly
been qualified. Only welders and welding operators who executed and countersigned by the Inspector.
are qualified in accordance with Section IX shall be used
in prod uction.
(d) The Manufacturer (Certificate Holder) may engage UW-27 WELDING PROCESSES (a)
individuals by contract or agreement for their services as
welders 5 at the shop location shown on the Certificate of (a) The welding processes that may be used in the con-
Authorization and at field sites (if allowed by the Certificate struction of vessels under this Part of this Division are
of Authorization) for the construction of pressure vessels restricted as follows:
or vessel parts, provided all of the following conditions ( 1) arc welding processes: atomic hydrogen, electro-
are met: gas, gas metal arc, gas tungsten arc, plasma arc, shielded
( 1) All Code construction shall be the responsibility metal arc, stud, and submerged arc;
of the Manufacturer. (2 ) pressure welding processes: flas h, induction ,
(2) All welding shall be performed in accordance resistance, pressure thermit, explosive,6 pressure gas, and
with the Manufacturer' s welding procedure specifications inertia and continuous drive friction welding.
in accordance with the requirements of Section IX. (3) other weld ing processes: electron beam, electro-
(3) All welders shall be qualified by the Manufacturer slag, laser beam, oxyfuel gas, and thermit.
in accordance with the requirements of Section IX. (b) Other than pressure inherent to the welding pro-
(4) The Manufacturer's Quality Control System shall cesses, no mechanical pressure or blows shall be applied
include as a minimum : e xcept as permitted for peening in UW-39.
6 explosive welding - a solid state welding process wherein coalescence

5 Welder includes brazer. welding operator, and brazing operator. is produced by the application of pressure by means of an explosion.
142
Copyright© 201 1 by the American Society ofMechanical Engineers. ~
2011a SECTION Vlll -DIVISION 1
(c) Definitions are given in Section IX which include UW-29 TESTS OF WELDERS AND WELDING
variations of these processes. OPERATORS
(d) Arc stud welding and resistance stud welding may
(a) The welders and welding operators used in welding
be used only for nonpressure-bearing attachments, having
pressure parts and in joining load-carrying nonpressure
a load or nonload-carrying function , except for material
parts (attachments) to pressure p arts shall be qualified in
listed in Table UHT-23 provided that, in the case of ferrous
accordance with Section IX.
materials, the heat treatment requirements of UCS-56 are
complied with and the requirements of UW-28(b) and ( 1) The qualification test for welding operators of
UW-29(a) are met prior to start of production welding. machine welding equipment shall be performed on a sepa-
Studs shall be limited to l in. (25 mm) diameter maximum rate test plate prior to the start of welding or on the first
for round studs and an equivalent cross-sectional area for workpiece.
studs with other shapes. (2) When stud welding is used to attach load-carrying
(e) The electroslag welding process may be used for studs, a production stud weld test of each welder or welding
butt welds only in ferritic steels and austenitic stainless operator shall be performed on a separate test plate or tube
steels of types listed in UW-5(d), provided the requirements prior to the start of welding on each work shift. This weld
of UW-ll(a)(6) and UW-ll(d) are satisfied. [See UW- test shall consist of five studs, welded and tested by the
5(e).] bend or torque stud weld testing procedure described in
(f) The electrogas welding process may be used for butt Section IX.
welds only in ferritic steels and austenitic stainless steels (b) The welders and welding operators used in welding
of types listed in UW-5(d), provided the requirements of nonpressure-bearing attachments, which have essentially
UW-Il(a)(6) are satisfied. When a single pass is greater no load-carrying function (such as extended heat transfer
than I~ in. (38 mm) in ferri tic materials, the joint shall surfaces, insulation support pins, etc.), to pressure parts
be given a grain refining (austenitizing) heat treatment. shall comply with the following:
[See UW-5(e).] (I) When the welding process is manual, machine,
or semiautomatic, qualification in. accordance with Section
UW-28 QUALIFICATION OF WELDING IX is required.
PROCEDURE (2) When welding is done by any automatic welding
(a) Each procedure of welding that is to be followed in process, performance qualification testing is not required.
construction shall be recorded in detail by the manufac- (3) When stud welding is used, a production stud
turer. weld test, appropriate to the end use application require-
(b) The procedure used in welding pressure parts and ments, shall be specified by the Manufacturer and carried
in joining load-carrying nonpressure parts, such as all per- out on a separate test plate or tube at the start of each shift.
manent or temporary c lips and lugs, to pressure parts shall (c) Each welder and welding operator shall be assigned
be qualified in accordance with Section IX. an identifying number, letter, or symbol by the manufac-
(c) The procedure used in welding non pressure-bearing turer which shall be used to identify the work of that welder
attachments which have essentially no load-can·ying func- or welding operator in accordance with UW-37(t).
tion (such as extended heat transfer surfaces, insulation (d) T he Manufacturer shall maintain a record of the
support pins, etc.), to pressure parts shall meet the follow- welders and welding operators showing the date and result
ing requirements. of tests and the identification mark assigned to each. These
(I) When the welding process is manual, machine, records shall be maintained in accordance with Section IX.
or semiautomatic, procedure qualification is required in (e) Welding of all test coupons shall be conducted by
accordance with Section IX. the Manufacturer. Testing of all test coupons shall be the
(2) When the welding is any automatic welding pro- responsibility of the Manufacturer. A performance qualifi-
cess performed in accordance with a Welding Procedure cation test conducted by one Manufacturer shall not qualify
Specification (in compliance with Section IX as far as a welder or welding operator to do work for any other
applicable), procedure qualification testing is not required. Manufacturer except as provided in QW-300 of Section IX.
(d) Welding of all test coupons shall be conducted by
the Manufacturer. Testing of all test coupons shall be the
responsibility of the Manufacturer. Alternatively, A WS
UW-30 LOWEST PERMISSIBLE
Standard Welding Procedure Specifications that have been
TEMPERATURES FOR WELDING
accepted by Section IX may be used provided they meet
all other requirements of this Division. Qualification of a It is recommended that no welding of any kind be done
welding procedure by one Manufacturer shall not qualify when the temperature of the base metal is lower than 0°F
that procedure for any other Manufacturer except as pro- (- 20°C). At temperatures between 32°F (0°C) and 0°F
vided in QW-201 of Section IX. (-20°C), the surface of all areas within 3 in. (75 mm) of
143
Copyright© 201 1 by the American Society ofMechanical Engineers.
20lla SECTION Vlll - DIVISION 1
the point where a weld is to be started should be heated TABLE UW-33

to a temperature at least warm to the hand [estimated to Customary Units
be above 60°F ( I5°C)] before welding is started. It is
reconunended also that no welding be done when surfaces Joint Categories
are wet or covered with ice, when snow is fall ing on the Section Thickness, in. A B, C, & D
surfaces to be welded, or during periods of high wind,
Up to ~' incl. ~t \t
unless the welders or we1ding operators and the work are Over ~ to \ incl. \18 in. 't4t
properly protected. Over~ to 1~, incl. V8 in. 'lu, in.
Over 1 1/ 2 to 2, incl. l;s in. Yet
Over 2 Lesser of 'li6 t or Lesser of Yet or
~ in. 3
1.; in.
UW-31 CUTTING, FITTING, AND SI Units
ALIGNMENT
Joint Categories
(a) When plates are shaped by oxygen or arc cutting, Section Thickness, mm A B, C, & 0
the edges to be welded shall be uniform and smooth and
Up to 13, incl. \t ~t
shall be freed of all loose scale and slag accumulations
before welding (see UG-76 and UCS-5).
Over 13 to 19, incl. 3 mm \t
Over 19 to 38, incl. 3 mm 5 mm
(b) Plates that are being welded shall be fitted, aligned, Over 38 to 51, incl. 3 mm Yet
and retained in position during the welding operation. Over 51 Lesser of 116t or Lesser of 1/gt or
10 mm 19 mm
(c) Bars, jacks, clamps, tack welds, or other appropriate
means may be used to hoEd the edges of parts in alignment.
Tack welds used to sec ure a li gnment s hall e ither be
removed completely whe n they have served their purpose, UW-32 CLEANING OF SURFACES TO BE
or their stopping and starting ends shall be properly pre- WELDED
pared by grinding or other suitable means so that they may UW-32(a) The surfaces to be welded shall be clean and
be satisfactori ly incorporated into the final weld. Tack free of scale, rust, oil, grease, slag, detrimental oxides, and
welds, whether removed or left in place, shall be made other deleterious foreign material. The method and extent
using a fillet weld or butt weld procedure qualified in of cleaning should be determined based on the material to
accordance with Section IX. Tack welds to be left in place be welded and the contam inants to be removed. When
shall be made by welders q ualified in accordance with weld metal is to be deposited over a previously welded
Section IX, and shall be examined visually for defects, and surface, all slag shall be removed by a roughing tool, chisel,
if found to be defective shall be removed. chipping hammer, or other suitable means so as to prevent
Provided that the work is done under the provisions of inclusion of impurities in the weld metal.
U-2(b), it is not necessary that a subcontractor making UW-32(b) Cast surfaces to be welded shall be machined,
such tack welds for a vessel or parts manufacturer be a chipped, or ground to remove foundry scale and to expose
holder of a Code Certificate of Authorization. The require- sound metal.
ments of UW-26(d) do not apply to such tack welds. UW-32(c) The requirements in (a) and (b) above are
(d) The edges of butt joints shall be held during welding not intended to apply to any process of welding by which
so that the tolerances of UW-33 are not exceeded in the proper fus ion and penetration are otherwise obtained and
completed joint. When fitted g irth joints have deviations by which the weld remains free from defects.
exceeding the permitted tolerances, the head or shell ring,
whichever is out-of-true, shall be reformed until the errors
are within the limits specified. Where fillet welds are used, UW-33 ALIGNMENT TOLERANCE
the lapped plates shall fit closely and be kept in contact (a) Alignment of sections at edges to be butt welded
during welding. shaii be such that the maximum offset is not greater than
(e) When joining two parts by the inertia and continuous the applicable amount for the welded joint category (see
drive friction welding processes, one of the two parts must UW-3) under consideration, as listed in Table UW-33. The
be held in a fixed position and the other part rotated. The section thickness tis the nominal thickness of the thinner
two faces to be joined must be essentially symmetrical secti on at the joint.
with respect to the axis of rotation. Some of the basic types (b) Any offset within the aiiowable tolerance provided
of applicable joints are solid round to solid ro und, tube to above shall be faired at a three to one taper over the width
tube, solid round to tube, solid round to plate, and tube of the finished weld, or if necessary, by adding additional
to plate. weld metal beyond what would otherwise be the edge of
144
Copyright© 2011 by the American Society ofMechanical Engineers. ~.
20lla SECTION VOl - DIVISION 1
SUBSECTION C
REQUIREMENTS PERTAINING
TO CLASSES OF MATERIALS
PART UCS
REQUIREMENTS FOR PRESSURE VESSELS
CONSTRUCTED OF CARBON AND
LOW ALLOY STEELS 1
GENERAL exceed those of the material specification for the pressure

part to which it is attached.
UCS-1 SCOPE
(2) Either of the following requirements shall be met:
The rules in Part UCS are applicable to pressure vessels (a) The backing strip base metal, and its associated
and vessel parts that are constructed of carbon and low alloy HAZ, and the weld metal shall be impact tested in accor-
steels and s hall be used in conjunction with the general dance with UG-84 at the MDMT shown on the nameplate
requirements in Subsection A, and with the specific require- with a butt weld test specimen to the pressure part material
ments in Subsection B that pertain to the method of fabrica- or to a material with the same P-No. and Group No. as
tion used. the pressure part.
(b) The material is assigned to Curve A and is
exempt from impact testing at the MDMT shown on the
MATE RIALS nameplate by Fig. UCS-66 alone (i.e., MDMT reduction
per Fig. UCS-66.1 is not permitted), and both of the follow-
lal UCS-5 GENERAL ing apply:
(a) All carbon and low alloy steel material subject to ( I ) The backing strip material specification min-
stress due to pressure shall conform to one of the Specifica- imum te nsile strength shall not exceed that of the pressure
tions give n in Section ll and shall be limited to those listed part material specification.
in Table UCS-23 except as otherwise provided in UG-1 0 (2) The backing strip material specification min-
and UG-11. imum percent elongation shall be at least equal to that for
(b) In addition to the requirements of UG-4(a), backing the pressure part material specification.
strips which remain in place need not conform to a material (c) Carbon or low alloy steel having a carbon content
specification permitted by this Division if all of the follow- of more than 0.35% by heat analysis shall not be used in
ing arc met: welded cons truc tion or be shaped by oxygen c utting
(I) The specification maximum composition limits (except as provided in Part UF in this Division).
or certificate values for the backing strip material shall not (d) Small parts used under the pr ovisions of
UG-11 (a)(2) in welded construction shall be of good weld-
1
Low alloy Sleets - those alloy steels listed in Table UCS-23. able qual ity.
165
Copyright © 20 II by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. &
Notebook Page 490 No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. W.
2011a SECTION Vill - DIVISION 1
UCS-12 BARS AND SHAPES (b) Shells of pressure vessels may be made from electric
resistance welded pipe or tubing listed in Table lA of
(a) Approved specifications for bar and shape materials
Section II, Part D in nominal diameters up to 30 in. (750
of carbon steel are given in Table UCS-23. A tabulation
mm) provided the material is manufactured by the open-
of allowable stress values at different temperatures are
hearth , basic oxygen, or electric-furnace process [see
g iven in Table I A of Section II, Part D.
UG-16(d)].
(b) Bolt materials as described in UCS-1 0 may be used
as bar materials.
(c) Parts made from bars, on which welding is done,
UCS-28 THICKNESS OF SHELLS UNDER
shall be of material for which a P-Number for procedure
EXTERNAL PRESSURE
qualification is given in Section IX, QW-422 (see UW-5) .
(a) Cylindrical and spherical shells under ex.ternal pres-
sure shall be designed by the rules in UG-28, using the
applicable figures in Subpart 3 of Section II, Part D and
DESIGN the temperature limits of UG-20(c).
UCS-16 GENERAL (b) Examples illustrating the use o f the charts in the
figures for the design of vessels under external pressure
The rules in the following paragraphs apply specifically are given in Appendix L.
to the design of pressure vessels and vessel parts that are
(c) Corrugated shells subject to external pressure may
constructed of carbon and low alloy steel and shall be used be used in pressure vessels in accordance with PFT- 19 of
in conjunction with the ,general req uirements for Design
Section I.
in Subsection A and with the specific requirements for
Design in Subsection B that pertain to the method of fabri-
cation used.
UCS-29 STIFFENING RINGS FOR SHELLS
UNDER EXTERNAL PRESSURE
UCS-19 WELDED JOINTS Rules coveri ng the design of stiffening rings are given
in UG-29. An example illustrating the use of these rules
When radiographic examinati on is required for butt
is given in Appendix L.
welded joints by UCS-57, joints of Categories A and 8
(see UW-3) shall be of T ype No. ( I) or No. (2) of Table
UW- 12. UCS-30 ATTACHMENT OF STIFFENING
RINGS TO SHELL
UCS-23 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE STRESS Rules covering the attachment of stiffening rings are
VALUES given in UG-30.
Tables 3 (for bolting) and l A (other materials) in Section

II, Part D give the maxjmum allowable stress values at FORMED HEADS, PRESSURE ON
UCS-33
the temperature indicated for materials conforming to the CONVEX SIDE
specifications listed therein? Values may be interpolated
for intermediate temperatures. (See UG-23.) For vessels Ellipsoidal, torispherical, hemispherical, and conical
designed to operate at a temperature below - 20°F (- 29°C), heads having pressure on the convex side (minus heads)
the allowable stress values to be used in design shall not shall be designed by the rules of UG-33, using Fig. CS-1
exceed those given in Table 3 or lA in Section li, Part D or Fig. CS-2 of Subpart 3 of Section II, Part D. Examples
for l00°F (40°C). illustrating the application of this paragraph are given in
Appendix L.
UCS-27 SHELLS MADE FROM PIPE

UCS-56 REQUIREMENTS FOR POSTWELD (10}
(a) Shells of pressure vessels may be made from seam- HEAT TREATMENT
less pipe or tubing listed in Table lA of Section II, Part
D provided the material of the pipe is manufactured by (a) Before applying the detailed requirements a nd
the open-hearth, basic ox.ygen, or electric-furnace process. exemptions in these paragraphs, satisfactory weld proce-
dure qualifications of the procedures to be used shall be
2 See Append ix I of Section II, Part D for the basis on which the performed in accordance with all the essential variables of
allowable stress values have been established. Section IX including conditions of postweld heat treatment
168
20lla SECTION Vlll -DIVISION l
or lack of postweld heat treatment and including other but in no case more than 400°F/hr (222°C/h). During the
restrictions listed below. heating period there shall not be a greater variation in
Except as otherwise specifically provided in the notes temperature throughout the portion of the vessel being
to Table UCS-56 and Table UCS-56.1, all welds in pressure heated than 250°F ( 140°C) within any 15ft (4.6 m) interval
vessels or pressure vessel parts shall be given a postweld of length.
heat treatment at a temperature not less than specified in ( 3) The vessel or vessel part shall be held at or above
those Tables when the nominal thickness, as defined in the temperature specified in Table UCS-56 or Table UCS-
UW-40(t), including corrosion allowance, exceeds the lim- 56.1 for the period of time speci(ied in the Tables. During
its in those Tables. The exemptions provided in Table the holding period, there shall not be a greater difference
UCS-56 or Table UCS-56.1 are not permitted when post- than l50°F (83°C) between the highest and lowest tempera-
weld heat tJeatment is a service requirement as set forth ture throughout the portion of the vessel being heated,
in UCS-68, when welding ferritic materials greater than ~ except where the range is further limited in Table UCS-56.
in. (3 mm) thick with the electron beam welding process,
(4) During the heating and holding periods, the fur-
or when welding P-No. 3, P-No. 4, P-Nos. SA, SB, and
nace atmosphere shall be so controlled as to avoid exces-
5C, P-No. 10, and P-No. 15E matetials of any thickness
sive oxidation of the surface of the vessel. The furnace
using the inertia and continuous drive friction welding
shall be of such design as to prevent direct impingement
processes. E lectroslag welds in ferritic materials over I ~
of the flame on the vessel.
in. (38 mm) thickness at the joint shall be given a grain
(5) Above 800°F (425°C), cooling shall be done in
refining (austenitizing) heat treatment. Electrogas welds in
a closed furnace or cooling chamber at a rate 3 not greater
ferritic materials with any single pass greater than I ~ in.
than 500°F/hr (280°C/h) divided by the maximum metal
(38 mm) shall be given a grain refining (austenitizing) heat
thickness of the shell or head plate in inches, but in no
treatment. For P-No. I materials only, the heating and
case more than 500°F/hr (280°C/h). From 800°F (425°C)
cooling rate restrictions of (d)(2) and (d)(5) below do not
apply when the heat treatment following welding is in the the vessel may be cooled in still air.
austenitizing range. (e) Except as permitted in (f) below, vessels or parts of
The materials in Table UCS-56 are listed in accordance vessels that have been postweld heat treated in accordance
with Section IX P-Number material groupings of QW-422 with the requirements of this paragraph shall again be
and also listed in Table UCS-23. postweld heat treated after welded repairs have been made.
(b) Except where prohibited in Table UCS-56, holding lj) Weld repairs to P-No. 1 Group Nos. I, 2, and 3
temperatures and/or holding times in excess of the mini- materials and toP-No. 3 Group Nos. I, 2, and 3 materials
mum values given in Table UCS-56 may be used. Interme- and to the weld metals used to join these materials may
diate postweld heat treatments need not conform to the be made after the final PWHT but prior to the final hydro-
requirements of Table UCS-56. The holding time at tem- static test, without additional PWHT, provided that PWHT
perature as specified in Table UCS-56 need not be continu- is not required as a service requirement in accordance with
ous. It may be an accumulation of time of multiple postweld UW-2(a), except for the exemptions in Table UCS-56, or
heat treatment cycles. as a service requirement in accordance with UCS-68. The
(c) When pressure parts of two different P-Number welded repairs shall meet the requirements of (I) through
groups are joined by welding, the post weld heat treatment (6) below. These requirements do not apply when the
shall be that specified in e ither of Tables UCS-56 or welded repairs are minor restorations of the material sur-
UHA-32, with applicable notes, for the material requiring face, such as those required after removal of construction
the higher postweld temperature. When nonpressure parts fixtures, and provided that the surface is not exposed to
are welded to pressure parts, the postweld heat treatment the vessel contents.
temperature of the pressure part shall control.
( 1) The Manufacturer shall give prior notification of
(d) The operation of postweld heat treatment shall be
the repair to the user or to his designated agent and shall
carried out by one of the procedures given in UW -40 in
not proceed until acceptance has been obtained. Such
accordance with the following requirements:
repairs shall be recorded on the Data Report.
(1) The temperature of the furnace shall not exceed
(2) The total repair depth shall not exceed I~ in.
800°F (425°C) at the time the vessel or part is placed in it.
(38 mm) for P-No. 1 Group Nos. I, 2, and 3 materials and
(2) Above 800°F (425°C), the rate 3 of heating shall
be not more than 400°F/hr (222°C/h) divided by the maxi- %in. (16 mm) for P-No. 3 Group Nos. 1, 2, and 3 materials.
mum metal thickness of the shell or head plate in inches, T he total depth of a weld repair shall be taken as the sum
of the depths for repairs made from both sides of a weld
' The rates of heating and cooling need not be less than 100°F / hr at a given location.
(56°C/h). However, in all cases consideration of closed chambers and
complex stmctures may indicate reduced rates of heating and cooling to ( 3) After removal of the defect, the groove shall be
avoid stmctural damage due to excessive thermal gradients. examined, using either the magnetic particle or the liquid
169
201la SECTION VID - DIVISION 1
(a) TABLE UCS-56

POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT REQU IREMENTS FO R CARBON AN D LOW ALLOY STEELS
Normal Holding
Temperature,
OF (OC), Up to 2 in. Over 2 in. t o 5 in. Over 5 in.
Material Minimum (50 mml (50 mm to 125 mml <125 mml
P-No. 1 1 hr/ in. (25 mm), 2 hr plus 15 mi n f or 2 hr plus 15 min

Gr. Nos. 1, 2, 3 15 min minimum each additional inch for each addi-
(25 mml over 2 in. t ional inch (25
(50 mml mm> over 2 in.
(50 mm>
Gr. No.4 NA None None None
NOTES:
(l) When it is impractical to postweld heat treat at the temperatu re specified in this Table, it is permissible to carry out the post weld heat t reatment
at lower temperatures for longer periods of t ime i n accordance with Table UCS-56.1.
(2) Postwe ld heat treatment is mandatory under the fo llowing cond itions:
<a> for welded joints over 1 ~ in. (38 mm) nominal thi ckness;
 f or welded joints over 1~ i n. (32 mm) nominal thickness th rough 1\.'2 in. (38 mm) nominal th ickness unless preheat is applied at a
minimum temperatur e of 200°F (95°C) during welding. This preheat need not be applied to SA-841 Grades A and B, provided that the
carbon content and carbo n equivalent <CE> for the plate mater ial, by heat analysis, do not exceed 0.14% and 0.40%, respectively, where
CE _ C Mn Cr+M o+V Cu+Ni
- + 6 + 5 + 15
(c) f or we lded joints of all thicknesses if required by UW-2, except postweld heat treatment is not mandatory under the conditions specified below:
(l) f or groove we lds not over \.2 in. (13 mm> size and fillet welds with a th roat not over ~ in. <1 3 mm) that attach nozzle connections
that have a finished inside diameter not greater than 2 in. (50 mm), provided the connections do not for m ligaments that require
an increase in shell or head thickness, and preheat to a minimum te mperature of 200°F (9 5°Cl is appl ied;
(2) for groove welds not over~ in. (13 mm) in size or fillet welds with a throat th ickness of~ in. (1 3 mml or less that attach tubes
to a tubesheet w hen t he tu be diameter does not exceed 2 in. (50 mml. A preheat of 200°F (95°C) minimum must be applied when
the carbon content of the tubesheet exceeds 0. 22%.
(3) f or groove welds not over Y 2 in. (13 mm> in size or fillet welds with a th roat thickness of~ in. ( 13 mml or less used f or attaching
nonpressure parts to pressure parts provided preheat t o a minimum temperature of 200°F (95°Cl is appl ied when the th ickness of
the pressure par t exceeds 1 Y4 in. (32 mm>;
(4) for studs we lded to pressure parts provided preheat to a minimum temperature of 200° F (95°C) is applied when the thick ness of
the pressure part exceeds 1 ~ in. (32 mml;
(5) for corrosion resistant weld metal over lay cladding or f or welds attaching corrosion resistant applied lining <see UCL-34) provided
pre heat to a minimum temperature of 200°F {95°Cl is maintained during application of the first layer when the thickness of the
pressure part exceeds 1Y4 in. (32 mm>.
NA = not applicable
170
20lla SECHON VIII - DIVISION I
TABLE UCS-56
POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT REQUIREMENTS FOR CARBON AND LOW ALLOY STEELS (CONrOJ
Normal Holding
for Nominal Th ickn ess [See UW-40(f)]
Temperature,
OF (OC), Up to 2 in. Over 2 in. to 5 in. Over 5 in.
Material Minimum (50 mml (50 mm to 125 mml (1 25 mml
P-No. 3 1,100 ( 595) 1 hr/in. (25 mml, 2 hr plus 15 min for 2 hr plus 15 min
Gr. Nos. 1, 2, 3 15 min minimum each addi tional for each addi-
inch (25 mml tional inch (25
over 2 in. mml over 2 in.
(50 mml (50 mml
NOTES:
(1) When it is impractical to postweld heat treat at the temperatures specified in this Tabte, it is permissible to carry out the postweld heat
treatment at lower temperatures for longer periods of time in accordance with Table UCS-56.1.
(2) Postweld heat treatment is mandatory on P- No. 3 Gr. No. 3 material in all thicknesses.
(3) Except for the exemptions in Note (4), postweld heat treatment is mandatory under the following conditions:
<a> on P-No. 3 Gr. No. 1 and P-No. 3 Gr. No. 2 over% in. <16 mml nominal thickness. For these materials, postweld heat treatment is
mandatory on material up to and including% in. (16 mm> nominal thickness unless a welding procedure qualification described in UCS-
56<al has been made in equal or greater thickness than the production weld.
(b) on ma terial in all thicknesses if required by UW-2.
(4) For weldi ng connections and attachments to pressure parts, postweld heat treatment is not mandatory under the conditions speci fied below:
(a) fo r attach ing to pressure parts that have a specified maximum carbon content of not more than 0.25% <SA material specification carbon
content, except when fu rther limited by the purchaser t o a value within the specification limits) or nonpressure parts with groove we lds
not over '1:! in. (13 mml in si ze or fi llet welds that have a throat thickness of 11 in. (13 mml or less, provided preheat to a minimum
temperature of 200°F (95°Cl is applied;
(b) for circumferential butt welds in pipe or tube where the pipe or tube have both a nominal wall thickness of '1:! in. <13 mml or less and
a speci fied maximum carbon content of not more than 0.25% <SA material speci fication carbon con tent, except when further limited
by the purchaser to a value within the specification limits>;
<cl for studs welded to pressure parts that have a specified maximum carbon content of not more than 0.25% <SA material specification
carbon conten t, except when fu rther limited by the purchaser to a value within the specification limits) provided preheat to a minimum
temperature of 200°F (95°Cl is applied;
(d) for corrosion resistant weld metal overlay cladding or for welds attaching corrosion resistant applied lining <see UCL-34) when welded
to pressure parts which have a specified maximum carbon content of not more than 0.25% <SA material specification carbon content,
except when further limited by the purchaser to a value within the specification limits) provided preheat to a minimum temperature of
200°F (95°Cl is maintained during application of the first layer.
17 1
20lla SECTION VTU - DIVISION 1
TABLE UCS-56
POSTWELD HEAT TREATME NT REQU IREMENTS FOR CARBON AND LOW ALLOY STEELS (CONT' Dl
M inimum Holding Time at Normal Temperature
Normal Holding
Temperature,
OF (OC), Up to 2 in. Over 2 in. to 5 in. Over 5 in.
Material Minimum <50 mml (50 mm to 125 mml (125 mml
P-No. 4 1 hr/in. (25 mml, 1 hr/in. (25 mml 5 hr plus 15 min

Gr. Nos. 1, 2 15 min minimum for each add i-
tional inch (25
mml over 5 in.
<125 mml
NOTE S:
(1) Except for exemptions in Note (2), postweld heat treatment is mandatory under the following conditions:
<a> on material of SA-202 Grades A and B over % in. <16 mml nominal thi ckness. For these materials postweld heat treatment is mandatory
up to and including % in. <16 mml nominal th ickness unless a welding procedure qualification descr ibed in U CS -56(a) has been made
in equal or greater thickness than the production weld.
(b) on material of all thicknesses if required by UW-2;
<c> on all other P-No. 4 Gr. Nos. 1 and 2 materials.
(2) Postweld heat treatment is not mandatory under the condi tions specified below:
<a> for circumferent ial butt welds in pipe or tube of P-No. 4 materials where the pipe or tubes com ply with all of the fo llowing conditions:
( 1) a maximum nominal outside diameter of 4 in. (lO Omml <O N 100);
(2) a maximum nominal thickness of% in. (16 mml;
(3l a maximum specified carbon content of not more than 0.15% <SA material specification carbon content, except when further limited
by the purchaser to a value within the specificat ion limits>;
(4) a minimum preheat of 250°F <120°Cl.
(b) for P-No. 4 pipe or tube materials meeting the requirements of (2)(a)(1), (2)(a)(2), and (2)(a)(3} above, having nonpressure attachments
fillet welded to the m provided :
(1) the fil let welds have a maximum throat thi ckness of 'l2 in. ( 13 mml;
(2) a minimum preheat temperature of 250°F U 20°C) is applied.
(c) for P-No. 4 pipe or tube materials meeting the requirements of (2l<aHll, (2)(a)(2l, and (2)(a)(3) above, having studs welded to them,
a minimum preheat temperatu re of 250°F <l20°Cl is applied.
(d) for P-N o. 4 pipe or tube mater ials meeting the requirements of (2)(a)(l) and (2}(a)(3), above, having extended heat absorbing fins
electrically resistance-we lded to them provided:
(1) the fins have a maximum thickness of 'l8 in. <3 mml;
( 2) pr ior t o using the we lding procedure, the Manufacturer shall demonstrate that the heat-affected zone does not encroach upon the
minimum pipe or tube wal l thickness.
172
Copyright © 20 I I by the American Society of Mechanica l Engineers.
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. Notebook Page 495
20lla S ECTION VIII - DIVISION 1
TABLE UCS-56
POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT REQUIREMENTS FOR CARBON AND LOW ALLOY STEELS <CONT'Dl
Minimum Holding Time at Normal T emperature
Normal Holding
for Nominal Thickness [See UW-40(flJ
Temperature,
oF (OC), Up to 2 in. Over 2 in. to 5 in. Over 5 in.
Material Minimum (50 mml (50 mm to 125 mm) <125 mml
P-Nos. SA, 58 Gr . No. 1, 1 hr/in. (25 mml, 1 hr/in. (25 mml 5 hr plus 15 min
and 5C Gr. No. 1 15 min minimum for each addi-
tional inch
(25 mm) over
5 in. 025
mml
NOTES:
(1) Except fo r exemptions in Note (2), postweld heat treatment is mandatory under all condit ions.
(2) Postweld heat treatment is not mandatory under the following cond itions:
<al fo r ci rc umferential bult wel ds in pipe or tu be where the pipe or tubes comply with all of the fol lowing co ndi tions:
(1} a maximum specified chromium content of 3.00%;
(2} a maximum nominal outside diameter of 4 in. 000 mml (ON 100>;
(3) a maximum nominal thickness of % in. <16 mml;
(4} a maximum specified carbon content of not more than 0.15% (SA material specification carbon content, except when further limited
by the purchaser to a value within the specification limits>;
(5) a minimum preheat of 300°F (l50°C) is applied.
(b) fo r pipe or tube mater ials meeting the requirements of (2)(a)(1), (2){a)(2), (2}(a)(3), and (2)(a)(4) having nonpressure attachments
fill et welded to them provided:
{1) the fillet we lds have a maximum thr oat thickness of 1,-z in. (13 mml;
(2) a minimum preheat temperature of 300° F (150°C) is applied.
(c) for pipe or tube materials meeting the requirements of (2Hal< 1 l, (2)( a)(2), (2)(a)(3), and (2)(a)( 4) having studs welded to them provided
a minimum preheat temperature of 300°F (150°C) is applied.
<dl fo r pipe or tube materials meeting the requirements of (2)(a)( ll and (2)(a)(3 ), above, having extended heat absorbing fins electricall y
res ist ance-we lded to them provided:
(l) the fins have a maximum thickness of %in. (3 mml;
( 2) prior to using the welding procedure, the Manufacturer shall demonstrate that the heat-affected zone does not encroach upon the
minimum pipe or tube wall thickness.
(3) When it is impractical t o postweld heat P-N os. SA, 58 Gr. No. 1, and 5C Gr. No. 1 mate rials at the temperature specified in this Table, it
is permissible to perform the postweld heat treatment at 1,200°F (650°Cl minimum provided that, for material up to 2 in. (50 mm) nominal
th ickness, the holding time is increased to the greater of 4 hr minimum or 4 hr/in. (25 mm) of th ickness; for th ickness over 2 in. (50 mml,
the specified holding times are mult iplied by 4. The requi rements of UCS-85 must be accommodated in this reduction in postweld heat treatment.
173
Note book Page 496 No reproduction may be made of this material w ithout written consent of ASME. ~
20lla SECTION Vffi - DIVISION 1
TABLE UCS-56
POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT REQUIREM ENTS FOR CARBON AND LOW ALLOY STEELS (CONT'D)
Maximum
M inimum Holding
Holding Minimum Holding Time at Normal Temperature
Temperature,
OF (OC) for We ld Thickn ess <Nominal)
Temperature, °F (°C)
[Notes (ll [ Notes <3l Upto5in. Over 5 i n.
Material and (2)1 and (4)1 (125 mml <125 mml
P-No. 1,350 (730) 1,425 (775) 1 hr/in. 5 hr plus 15 min for each additional
15E (2 min/mml, inch (25 mml over 5 in. <125 mml
Group 30 min
No. 1 minimum
NOTES :
(1) If the nominal weld thickness is $ 0.5 in. (1 3 mml, the minimum holding temperature is 1,325°F (720°Cl.
(2) For dissimi lar metal welds (i.e., welds made between a P-No. 15E Group No. 1 and another lower chromium ferritic, austeniti c, or nickel-
based steeD, if fi l ler metal chrom ium content is less than 3.0% or if the fil ler metal is nickel-based or austenit ic, the minimum holding
temperature shall be 1,300°F (705°Cl.
(3) The maximum holding temperature above is to be used if the actual chemical composition of the matching fi ller metal used when making the
weld is unknown. If the chemical composilion of the matching fil ler metal is known, the maximum holding temperature can be increased as
fol lows:
(a) IfN i + Mn < 1.50% but;::: 1.0% 1 the maximum PWHT tem perature is 1,450°F (7 90°C>.
(bl IfN i + Mn < 1.0%, the maximum PWHT temperature is 1,470°F (800°Cl.
Explanatory Note to (JJ Above: The lower transformation temperatu re for mat ching fi l ler mater ial is affected by al loy content, primar ily the
total of Ni + Mn. The maximum holding temperatu re has been set to avoid heat treatment in the intercr itical zone.
(4) If a portion of the component is heated above the heat treatment temperatu re al lowed above, one of the following actions shall be performed:
(a) The component in it s entirety must be renormalized and tempered.
CbJ If the maximum holding temperature in the Table or Note (3)(a) above is exceeded, but does not exceed 1,470°F (800°CJ, the weld
metal shal l be removed and replaced.
<cl The port ion of the component heated above 1,470°F (800°Cl and at least 3 in. (75 mml on either side of the overheated zone must be
removed and be renormal ized and tempered or replaced.
<dl The al lowable stress shall be that f or Grade 9 material (i.e., SA-213-T9, SA·335- P9, or equivalent product specification) at the design
temperature, provided that the portion of the component heated to a temperatu re greater than that al lowed above is reheat treated within
the temperatu re range specified above.
(5) Postweld heat treatment is not mandatory for elec tric resistance welds used to attach ex tended heat-absorbing fins to pipe and tube materials,
provided the f ollowing requ irements are met:
(a) a maximum pipe or tube size of NPS 4 <DN 100)
(b) a maximum speci fied carbon content (SA material specification carbon content, except when further li mi ted by the Purchaser to a value
within the specificati on limit s> of not more than 0.15%
(c) a maximum fi n th ickness of Y8 in. (3 mml
<dl pr ior to using the weld ing procedure, the Manufacturer shal l demonstrate that the heat-affected zone does not encroach upon the minimum
wal l th ickness
!74
2011a SECTION VIII - DIVISION 1
TABLE UCS-56
POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT REQUIREMENTS FOR CARBON AND LOW ALLOY STEELS (CONT'D)
Nor mal Holding
Temperature,
OF (OC), Minimum Holding T ime at Normal Temperature
Mater ial Minimum for Nominal Thickness [S ee UW-40( f)]
P- No. 9A Gr . No. 1 1,100 (595) 1 hr minimum, plus 15 min/in. (25 mml for
thickness over 1 'i n. (25 mml
NOTE S:
<1 > When it is impractica l to postweld heat treat at the temperature speci fied in th is Table, it is permissible to carry out the postweld heat treatment
at lower temperatures [1,000°F (540°Cl minimum) for longer periods of time in accordance wi th Table UCS- 56.1.
(2) Except for exemptions in Note (3), postweld heat treatment is mandat ory under the f ollowing cond itions:
(a) on material over% in. (16 mm> nominal th ickness. For material up t o and including ~ in. (16 mml nominal thickness, postweld heat
treat ment is mandat ory unless a welding procedure quali fication described in UCS-56(al has been made in equal or greater thickness
than the production we ld.
<bl on material of all thicknesses if requ ired by UW-2.
<3> Postweld heat treatment is not mandatory under cond itions speci fied below:
(a) for circumferential butt welds in pipe or tubes where the pipe or tubes comply with all the following conditions:
(l) a maximum nominal outside diameter of 4 in. (100 mml <DN lOOJ;
(2) a maximum thickness of~ in. ( 13 mml;
(3) a maximum specified carbon content of not more than 0.15% <SA material specification carbon co ntent, except when f ur ther limited
by the purchaser to a value withi n the specification limits);
(4) a minimum preheat of 250° F (120° Cl.
(b) fo r pipe or tu be materials meeting the requirements of (3)(a)(l), (3)(a)(2), and (3)(a)(3J above, having attachments fil let welded to
them, provided:
<1 > t he fi llet we lds have a th roat thickness of ~ in. <13 mm) or less;
<2> the material is preheated to 250° F ( 120°Cl minimum. A l ower preheating temperature may be used provided specifically contro lled
procedures necessary to produce sound we lded join ts are used. Such proced ures shall include but shall not be limited to the fo llowing:
<al The th roat thickness of fi llet welds shall be \12 in. ( 13 mml or less.
<bl The maximum continuous length of fi llet we lds shal l be not over 4 in. ( 100 mml .
<cl The thickness of the test plate used in making the welding procedure qualification of Section IX shall not be less than that of
the material t o be welded.
<cl for attaching nonpressure parts to pressure parts with groove welds not over 1.12 in. <13 mml in si ze or fi llet we lds that have a throat
thick ness of ~ in. ( 13 mml or less, provided preheat to a minimum temperature of 200° F (95°C) is applied;
<d> for studs welded to pressure part s provided preheat to a minimum temperature of 200°F (95°Cl is applied;
<el for corrosion resistant weld metal over lay cladding or for welds attaching co rrosion resistant appl ied lining (see UCL-34) provided preheat
to a m inimum temperature of 200°F (95°Cl is maintained during application of the fi rst layer .
(4) When the heating rate is less than 50°F (28°Cl/hr bet ween 800°F (425°Cl and the holding temperature, the additional 15 min/in. (25 mml
holding time is not required. Add itionally, where the Manufacturer can provide evidence that the minimum temperature has been achieved
throughout the th ickness, the additional 15 min/in. ( 25 mml holding time is not required .
175
Copyright © 20 II by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. &
Note book Page 498 No reproduction may be made of this material wi thout written consent of ASME. w.
201la SECTION VIU - DIVISION 1
(10) TABLE UCS-56

POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT REQU I REMENTS FOR CA RBON AND LOW ALLOY STEELS (CONT'D)
Normal Holding Temperature, M inimum Holding Time at Normal Temperature
Material °F (°C), Minimum for Nominal Thickness [ See U W-40(f))
P-No. 98 1,100 (595) 1 hr minimum, plus 15 min/in. (25 mm) for

Gr. No. 1 thickness over 1 in. (25 mml
NOTES:
( 1 l When it is impract ical to postweld heat treat at the temperatures specified in this Table, it is permissible to carry out the postweld heat
treatment at lower temperatures [1,000°F (540°C) minimum] for longer peri ods of time in accordance with Table UCS-56.1.
(2) The holding temperature for postweld heat treatment shall not exceed 1,175°F (635°Cl.
(3) Except for exemptions in Note (4), postweld heat treatment is mandatory under the following conditions:
<a> on material over~ in. <16 mml nominal th ickness. For material up to and including ~ in. (16 mml nominal thickness, postweld heat
treatment is mandatory unless a weld ing procedure qualification described in UCS-56(a) has been made in equal or greater thickness
than the pr oduction weld.
(b) on material of all thicknesses if required by UW-2.
(4) Postweld heat treatment is not mandatory under the conditions specified below:
<a> for attaching nonpressure parts t o pressure parts with groove welds not over \'2 in. ( 13 mm} in size or fi llet welds that have a throat
thickness of Yz in. <13 mml or less, provided preheat to a minimum temperature of 200°F (95°C) is applied;
(bl for studs we lded t o pressure part s provided preheat to a minimum temperature of 200°F (95°Cl is applied;
(c) for corrosion resist ant weld metal overlay cladd ing or for welds attaching corrosion resistant applied lining <see UCL-34) provided preheat
to a minimum temperature of 200°F (95°C) is maintained during application of the first layer.
(5} When the heating rate is less than 50°F (28°C)/hr between 800°F <425°Cl and the holding temperatu re, the additional15 min/in. (25 mm)
holding t ime is not required. Addi tionally, where the Manufacturer can provide evidence that the minimum temperature has been achieved
throughout the thickness, the additional 15 min/in. (25 mml holding time is not required.
Normal Holding Temperature, Minimum Holding Time at Nor mal Te mperature

Material °F (°C), Minimum for Nominal Thickness [ See UW-40(f)J
P-No. lOA 1,100 (595) 1 hr minimum, plus 15 min/in. (25 mm) for
Gr. No. 1 th ickness over 1 in. ( 25 mm}
NOTES:
(1) (a) When it is impractical to postweld heat treat at the temperature specified in this Table, it is permissible to carry out the postweld heat
treatment at lower temperatures for longer periods of time in accordance with Table UCS-56.1.
 Consideration should be given for possible embrittlement of materials containing up to 0.15% vanadium when postweld heat treating at
the minimum temperature and at lower temperature for longer holding t imes.
( 2) Except for exemptions in Note <3), postweld heat treatment is mandatory under the fo llowing conditions:
(a) on all thicknesses of SA-487 Class 1Q material;
(b) on all other P-No. lOA materials over% in. (16 mml nominal thickness. For these materials up to and including~ in. ( 16 mm> nominal
thickness, post we ld heat treatment is mandatory unless a we lding procedure qualification described in UCS-56(a) has been made in equal
or greater thickness than the production we ld.
(c) on material of all thicknesses if required by UW-2.
<3} Postweld heat treatment is not mandatory under the cond itions specified below:
<a> for attaching t o pressure part s that have a specified maximum carbon con tent of not more than 0.25% <SA material specification carbon
content, except when further limited by the purchaser t o a value within the specification limit s) or nonpressure parts with groove weld
not over Yz in. (13 mm) in size or fillet welds having a throat thickness of Yz in. (13 mml or less, provided preheat t o a minimum
temperature of 200""F (95°C) Is applied;
(b) for circumferential butt we lds in pipes or tube where the pipe or tube has both a nominal wall thickness of Yzin. <13 mml or less and
a specified maximum carbon content of not more than 0.25% <SA mate rial specificati on carbon content, except when further limited
by purchaser to a va lue with in the speci fication limits) provided preheat to a minimum temperature of 200°F (95°Cl is applied;
<cl for studs welded t o pressure part s that have a specified maximum carbon content of not more than 0.25% <SA material speci fication
carbon content, except when further limited by purchaser to a value within the specification limit s) provided preheat to a minimum
temperature of 200° F <9 5°Cl is applied;
(d) for corrosion resistant weld metal over lay cladding or for we lds attaching corrosion resistant applied lining (see UCL-34) when welded
to pressure parts that have a specified maximum carbon content of not more than 0.2 5% <SA mater ial specification carbon content,
except when further limited by the purchaser to a value within the specification limits> provided preheat to a minimum temperature of
200°F (95°C) is main tained during applicat ion of the fi rst layer.
(4) When the heating rate is less than 50""F (28°Cl/hr between 800°F (425°C) and the holding temperature, the additional 15 min/in. (25 mml
holding time is not requ ir ed. Additionally, where the Manufactu rer can provide evidence that the minimum temperature has been achieved
throughout the thickness, the additional 15 min/in. (25 mm} holding time is not required.
176
No reproduction may be made of this materi al without written consent of ASME. ~ Notebook Page 499
2011a SECTION Vlll - DIVISION 1
TABLE UCS-56 (10)

POSTWE LD HEAT TREATMENT REQUIREMENTS FOR CARBON AND LOW ALLOY STEE LS (CONT'D)
Norma l Holding Temperature, Minimum Holding Time at Normal Temperature
Mate r ial ° F {° C), Minimum for Nominal Thickness [See UW-40{f)]
P-N o. lOB 1,100 (595) 1 hr minimum, plus 15 min/in. (25 mml for
Gr. No. 1 thickness over 1 in. (25 mm>
NOTES:
(1) Post weld heat treatment is mandatory for P-No. l OB materials for all thicknesses.
(2) When the heating rate is less than 50°F (28° C)/hr between 800°F (425°C) and the holding temperatu re, the additiona l 15 min/in. (25 mml
holding time is not requ ired. Addi tionally, where the Manufacturer can provide evidence that the minimum tempe rature has been achieved
th roughout the thickness, the additional 15 min/in. (25 mml holding time is not required.
Normal Holding Temperature, Minimum Holding Time at Normal Temperature

Material oF (°C), Minimum for Nominal Thickness [ See UW-40(f)]
P-N o. l OG 1,000 (540) 1 hr minimum, plus 15 min/in. (25 mm) for

Gr. No. 1 th ickness over 1 in. (25 mml
NOTES:
(1) When it i s impractical to postweld heat treat at the temperatu res specified in th is Table, it is permissible to carry out the postweld heat
treatment at lower temperatures for longer per iods of time in accordance with Table UCS-56.1.
(2) Except fo r exemptions in Note <3), postweld heat treatment is mandatory under the foll owing cond itions:
(a) fo r materia l over 1~ in. <38 mm) nominal thickness. Postweld heat treatment is mandato ry on materials over 1 ~ in. <3 2 mml nominal
thickness th rough 1!.;~ in. 08 mml nominal th ickness unless preheat is applied at a minimum temperature of 200°F (95°C) during
we ld ing.
<bl on mater ial of all thicknesses if required by UW-2.
(3) Postweld heat treatment is not mandatory under the cond itions specified below:
(a) for groove we lds not over Y2 in. (13 mm) in si ze and fi llet wel ds with throat not over ~ in. (13 mml that attach nozzle connection s that
have a fin ished inside diameter not greater than 2 in. (50 mml provided the connections do not form ligaments that require an increase
in shell or head th ickness and preheat to a minimum temperature of 200°F (95°Cl is applied;
<bl for groove welds not over ~ in. <13 mm) in size or fillet welds having throat th ickness of ~ in. (13 mm) or less used for attaching
non pressure parts to pressure parts and preheat to a minimum temperature of 200°F (95°C) is applied when the thickness of the pressure
part exceeds 1 ~ in. (32 mml;
(c) fo r studs welded to pressure parts provided preheat to a minimum temperatu re of 200° F (95°C) is appl ied when the thickness of the
pressure part exceeds 1 ~ in. (32 mm>;
<dl for corrosion resistant weld metal overlay cladding or for welds attaching corrosion resistant applied lining <see UCL-34) provided preheat
to a minimum temperature of 200°F ( 95°Cl is main tained duri ng applicati on of the first layer when the th ickness of the pressure part
exceeds 1 ~ in. (32 mml.
(4) When the heating rate is less than 50°F (28°Cl/hr bet ween 800° F (425°Cl and the holding temperature, the additional 15 min/in. (25 mml
holding t ime is not required. Additionally, where the Manufacturer can provide evidence that the minimum temperatu re has been achieved
throughout the thickness, the additional 15 min/in. (25 mml holding time is not req uired.
Normal Holding Temperature, Minimum Holding Time at Normal Temperature

Material ° F (°C), Minimum for Nominal Thickness [ See UW-40(0J
P- No. lOF 1,000 ( 540) 1 hr minimum, plus 15 min/in. (25 mml fo r

Gr . No. 1 thickness over 1 in. (25 mml
NOTES:
(1) Postweld heat treatment is mandat ory for P-No. 10F materia ls for all thicknesses.
(2) When the heating rate is less than 50°F <28° Cl/hr between 800°F (425° C) and the holding temperature, the additional 15 min/in. <25 mml
holding time is not required . Addi tionally, where the Manufacturer can provide evidence that the minimum temperature has been achieved
th roughout the th ickness, the additional 15 min/in. (25 mml holding time is not required.
177
Copyrigh t © 20 11 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. &
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. ~
Notebook Page 500
20lla SECTION Vill - DIVISION 1
TABLE UCS-56.1 TABLE UCS-57

ALTERNATIVE POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT THICKNESS ABOVE WHICH FULL RADIOG RAPH IC
REQUIREM ENTS FOR CARBON EXAMINATION OF BUTT WELDED JOINTS I S
AND LOW ALLOY STEELS MANDATORY
Applicable Only When Permitted in Table UCS-56
P-No. & Group No. Nominal Thickness Above Which
Decrease in Classification of Butt Welded Joints Shall Be
Temperature Material Fully Radiographed, in. (mml
Below Minimum Minimum Holding
Specified Time [Note <1)] 1 Gr. 1, 2, 3 1 1/4 (32)
Temperature, oF at Decreased 3 Gr. 1, 2, 3 %(1 9)
(oC) Temperature, hr Notes 4 Gr. 1, 2 %(1 6)
SA Gr. 1, 2 0 (0 )
50 (28) 2 58 Gr. 1 0 (0 )
100 (56) 4 5C Gr. 1 0 ( 0)
150 (83) 10 (2 ) 15E, Gr. 1 0 (0 )
200 (1 11) 20 (2 )
9A Gr. 1 %( 16)
NOTES :
98 Gr. 1 %( 1 6 )
l OA Gr. 1 ~ (19 )
(1 lMinimum holding t ime for 1 in. <25 mml thickness or less. Add
lO B Gr. 1 %(1 6 )
15 minutes per inch (25 mml of thickness for thicknesses greater %(16)
l OC Gr. 1
than 1 in. (25 mml.
l OF Gr. 1 ~ (19)
(2) These lower postweld heat t reatment temperatures permitted only
for P-No. 1 Gr. Nos. 1 and 2 materials.
penetrant examination methods, in accordance with Appen-

dix 6 for MT and Appendix 8 for PT.
all welding, the repair area shall be maintained at a tempera-
(4) In addition to the requirements of Section IX for
ture of 400°F-500°F (205°C- 260°C) for a minimum period
qualification of Welding Procedure Specifications for
of 4 hr. The final temper bead reinforcement layer shall
groove welds, the following requirements shall apply:
be removed substantially flush with the surface of the base
(a) The weld metal shall be deposited by the man-
material.
ual shielded metal arc process using low hydrogen elec-
(5) After the finished repair weld has reached ambient
trodes. T he electrodes s hall be properly conditioned in
accordance with Section II, Part C, SFA-5.5, Appendix temperature, it shall be inspected using the same nonde-
structive examination that was used in (f)(3) above, except
A6.11 . The maximum bead width shall be four times the
electrode core diameter. that for P-No. 3, Group No. 3 materials, the examination
shall be made after the material has been at ambient temper-
(b) For P-No. 1 Group Nos. I , 2, and 3 materials,
ature for a minimum period o f 48 hr to determine the
the repair area shall be preheated and maintained at a
minimum temperature of 200°F (95°C) during welding. presence of possible delayed cracking of the weld. If the
examination is by the magnetic particle method, only the
(c) For P-No. 3 Group Nos. I , 2, and 3 materials,
alternating current yoke type is acceptable. I n addition,
the repair weld method shall be limited to the half bead
weld repair and weld temper bead reinforcement technique. welded repairs greater than ~ in. ( 10 mm) deep in materials
The repair area shall be preheated and maintained at a and in welds that are required to be radiographed by the
minimum temperature of 350°F (l75°C) during welding. rules of this Division, shall be radiographicall y examined
The maximum inte rpass temperature shall be 450° F to the requirements of UW-51.
(230°C). The initial layer of weld metal shall be deposited (6) The vessel shall be hydrostatically tested after
over the entire area using~ in. (3 mm) maximum diameter making the welded repair.
electrodes. Approximately one-half the thickness of this
layer shall be removed by grinding before depositing subse-
quent layers. The subsequent weld layers shall be deposited
using 5/ 32 in. (4 mm) maximum diameter electrodes in such UCS-57 RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION
a manner as to assure tempering of the prior weld beads
and their heat affected zones. A final temper bead weld In addition to the requirements of UW- I 1, complete
shall be applied to a level above the surface being repaired radiographic examination is required for each butt we lded
without contacting the base material but close enough to joint at which the thjnner of the plate or vessel wall thick-
the edge of the underlying weld bead to assure tempering nesses at the welded joint exceeds the thickness limit above
of the base material heat affected zone. After completing which full radiography is required in Table UCS-57.
178
e ·s.
No reproduction may be made of this materia l without written consent of ASME. Notebook Page 501
20lla SECTION Vlll - DI VISION 1
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX R
PREHEATING
INTRODUCTION R-3 P-NO. 4 GROUP NOS. 1 AND 2

Preheating may be employed during welding to assist (a) 250°F ( 121 oq for material which has either a speci-
in completion of the welded joint. The need for and temper- fied minimum tensile strength in excess of 60,000 psi
ature of preheat are dependent on a number of factors, (410 MPa) or a thickness at the joint in excess of ~ in.
such as the chemical analysis, degree of restraint of the (13 mm);
parts being joined, elevated physical properties, and heavy (b) 50°F ( l0°C) for all other materials in this P-Number.
thicknesses. Mandatory rules for preheating are, therefore,
not given in this Division except as required in the footnotes
that provide for exemptions to postweld heat treatment in R-4 P-NOS. SA AND SB GROUP NO. 1
Tables UCS-56 and UHA-32. Some practices used for
preheating are given below as a general guide for the (a) 400°F (204°C) for material which has either a speci-
materials lis ted by P-Numbers in Section IX. It is cautioned fied minimum tensile strength in excess of 60,000 psi
that the preheating temperatures listed below do not neces- (410 MPa), or has both a specified minimum chromium
sarily insure satisfactory completion of the welded joint content above 6.0% and a thickness at the joint in excess
and requirements for individual materials within the P- of~ in. (13 mm);
Number listing may have preheating more or less restrictive (b) 300°F ( 149°C) for all other materials in these P-
than this general guide. The procedure specification for the Numbers.
material being welded specifies the mi nimum preheating
requirements under Section IX weld procedure qualifica-
tion requirements. R-5 P-NO. 6 GROUP NOS. I, 2, AND 3
The heat of welding may assist in maintaining preheat 400°F (204°C)
temperatures after the start of welding and for inspection
purposes, temperature checks can be made near the weld.
The method or extent of application of preheat is not there- R-6 P-NO. 7 GROUP NOS. 1 AND 2
fore, speci fi cally given. Normally when materials of two
different P-Number groups are joined by welding, the pre- None
heat used will be that of the material with the higher preheat
speci lied on the procedure specified on the procedure speci-
fication. R-7 P-NO. 8 GROUP NOS. I AND 2
None
R-1 P-NO. I GROUP NOS. 1, 2, AND 3
(a) I 75°F (79°C) for material which has both a specified
maximum carbon content in excess of 0.30% and a thick- R-8 P-NO. 9 GROUPS
ness at the joint in excess of l in. (25 mm); 250°F (121 °C) for P-No. 9A Group No. 1 materials
(b) 50°F (I ooq for all other materials in this P-Number. 300°F ( 149°C) for P-No. 9B Group No. I materials
R-2 P-NO. 3 GROUP NOS. 1, 2, AND 3

R-9 P-NO. 10 GROUP
(a) l75°F (79°C) for material which has either a speci-
fied minimum tensile strength in excess of 70,000 psi 175°F (79°C) for P-No. I OA Group No. 1 materials
(480 MPa) or a thickness at the joint in excess of~ in. 250°F (121°C) for P-No. lOB Group No.2 materials
(16 mm); 175°F (79°C) for P-No. JOC Group No. 3 materials
(b) 50°F (10°C) for all other materials in this P-Number. 250°F ( 12 1°C) for P-No. I OF Group No. 6 materials
667
Notebook Page 502 No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. W.
2011a SECfi ON VIII - DIVISION 1
For P-No. IOC Group No. 3 materials, preheat is neither Group No. 3 - Same as for P-No. 3 (see Note)
required nor prohibited, and consideration shall be given Group No. 4 - Same as for P-No. 3 (see Note)
to the I imitation of interpass temperature for various thick- Group No. 5 - Same as for P-No. 3 (see Note)
nesses to avoid detrimental e ffects on the mechanical prop- Group No. 6 - Same as for P-No. 5 (see Note)
erties of heat treated material. Group No. 7 -Same as for P-No. 5 (see Note)
For P-No. IOD Group No. 4 and P-No. I OI Group No.
l materials, 300°F (149°C) with interpass temperature NOTE: Considerati on shall be given to the limitation ofinterpass temper-
ature for various thicknesses to avoid detrimental effects on the mechani-
maintained between 350°F and 450°F ( l77°C and 232°C) cal properties of heat treated materials.
R-10 P-NO. 11 GROUP

R-11 P-No. 15E, Group No.1
(a) P-No. I l A Group
Group No. I - None (see Note) (a) 400°F (205°C) for material that has either a specifi ed
Group No. 2 - Same as for P-No. 5 (see Note) minimum tens il e stre ngth in excess of 60,000 psi
Group No. 3 - Same as for P-No. 5 (see Note) (410 MPa) or has both a specified minimum chromium
Group No. 4 - 250°F ( 12 1oq content above 6.0% and a thickness at the joint in excess
(b) P-No. l iB Group of~ in. (13 mm).
Group No. I - Same as for P-No. 3 (see Note) (b) 300° F ( 150°C) for a ll other materials in this
Group No. 2 - Same as for P-No. 3 (see Note) grouping.
668
Notebook Page 504
WORKSHOP
You will be asked t o write an abbreviated WPS for either a maintenance or new construction weld,
based on one of 3 construction codes (ASME B31.1, B31.3, or Sec. VIII Div. 1). Listen closely to the
instructions given by the instructor.
Given
Base Metal: ASME SA-335/SA-335M, Grade P22

Size: 4" O.D. x 0.625" W.T.
Carbon Content:< 0.15%
Chromium Content:< 3%
Single-V, Groove-Weld with SMAW
WPS Information
With the above given conditions and the material specification in this Workshop tab of your
notebook, list the information you decide to include in a welding procedure specification (WPS),
based on the following variables:
1
Base Metal: ASME P-No. and Group No.
Base Metal Qualified Thickness Range (T): ~

,. c s I
1-e f (C'
Filler Metal: ASME SFANoA5 · ;

AWS Classification No. t> y_olB t>3l (
ASME F-No. 4
ASMEA-No. --1
Filler Metal Qualified Thic~ess Range (t):
Preheat:
PWHT: see construction code
Hardness testing: see construction code
© Codes and Standards Training Institute
Notebook Page 505

©Codes and Standards Training Institute
Notebook Page 506

201la SECTION II, PART A SA-335/SA-335M
SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS FERRITIC ALLOY-

STEEL PIPE FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
SA-335/SA-335M
(Identical with ASTM Specification A 335/ A 335M-06 except for the addition of hardness requirements for P23 and P9 11 in 9.3 and 14.2.1 , and
the correction of the UNS numbers for P9 and P91.)
1. Scope E 2 13 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe

1.1 This specification covers nominal wall and mini- and Tubing
mum wall seamless ferritic alloy-steel pipe intended for E 309 Practice for Eddy-Current Exam ination of Steel
high-temperature service. Pipe ordered to this specification Tubular Products Using Magnetic Saturation
shall be suitable for bending, flanging (vanstoning), and E 381 Method of Macroetch Testing Steel Bars, Billets,
similar forming operations, and for fusion welding. Selec- Blooms, and Forgings
tion will depend upon design, service conditions, mechani- E 527 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys in the
cal properties, and high-temperature characteristics. Unified Numbering System (UNS)
E 570 Practice for Flux Leakage Examination of Ferromag-
1.2 Several grades of ferritic steels (see Note I) are
netic Steel Tubular Products
covered. Their compositions are given in Table I.
2.2 ASME Standard:
NOTE I - Ferritic steels in this specification are defined as low- and
B36.IOM Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
intermediate-alloy steels contain ing up to and includi ng I 0% chromium.
1.3 Supplementary req uiremen ts (S I to S 7) of an 2.3 Other Documellfs:

optional nature are provided. These supplementary require- SNT-TC-IA Recommended Practice for Nondestructive
ments call for additional tests to be made, and when desired, Personnel Qualification and Certification
shall be so stated in the order together with the number of SAE J l086 Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys
such tests required. (UNS)

units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the 3. Ordering Information
3.1 Orders for material under this specification should
in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each
incl ude the following, as required, to describe the desired
system must be used independently of the other. Combining
material adequately:
values from the two systems may result in nonconformance
with the specification. The inch-pound units shall apply 3.1.1 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths),
unless the "M" designation of this specification is specified 3.1.2 Name of material (seamless alloy steel pipe),
in the order. 3.1.3 Grade (Table 1),
NOTE 2 -The dimensionless designator NPS (nomina l pipe size) has 3.1.4 Manufacture (hot-finished or cold-drawn),
been substituted in this standard for such trad itional te1ms as "nomjnaJ
diameter," ''size." and ·'nominal size." 3.1.5 Size using one of the following:
3.1.5.1 NPS and schedule number,
2. Referenced Documents 3.1.5.2 Outside diameter and nominal wall
2.1 ASTM Standards: thickness,
A 999/ A 999M Specificati on for General Requirements 3.1.5.3 Outside diameter and minimum wall
for Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe thickness,
541
Notebook Page 507

~----------------------------------------------------~
3.1.5.4 Inside diameter and nominal wall thick- 7. Workmanship, Finish , and Appearance
ness, and 7.1 The pipe manufacturer shall explore a sufficient
3.1.5. 5 Inside diameter and minimum wall number of visual surface imperfections to provide reason-
thickness. able assurance that they have been properly evaluated with
respect to depth. Exploration of all surface imperfections
3.1.6 Length (specific or random),
is not required but may be necessary to ensure compliance
3.1.7 End finish (Ends Section of Specification with 7.2.
A 999 I A 999M),
7.2 Surface imperfections that penetrate more than
3.1.8 Optmonal requi rements (Section 8, 12 and 13
12~% of the nominal wall thickness or encroach on the
of this specification. See the Sections on Hydrostatic Test
minimum wall thickness shall be cons idered defects. Pipe
Requirements and Permissible Variation in Weight for
with such defects shall be given one of the following dispo-
Seamless Pipe in Specification A 999 I A 999M),
sitions:
3.1.9 Test report required (Certification Section of
7.2.1 The defect may be removed by grinding pro-
Specification A 999 I A 999M),
vided that the remaining wall thickness is within specified
3.1.10 Specification des ignation, and limits.
3.1.11 Special requirements or any supplementary 7.2.2 Repaired in accordance with the repair welding
requirements selected, or both . provisions of 7.6.
7.2.3 The section of pipe containing the defect may
4. General Requirements be cut off within the limits of requirements on length.
4.1 Matetial furnished to this specification shall con- 7.2.4 Rejected.
form to the applicable requirements of the cutTent edition
7.3 To provide a workmanlike finish and basis for
of Specification A 999 I A 999M, unless otherwise provided
evaluating conformance with 7.2, the pipe manufacturer
herein.
shall remove by grinding the following :
7.3.1 Mechanical marks, abrasions (see Note 5) and
5. M aterials and Manufacture pits, any of which imperfections are deeper than ~ 6 in.
5.1 Pipe may be either hot finished or cold drawn with [ 1.6 mm].
the finishing treatment as required in 5.3. NOTE 5 - Marks and abrasions are defi ned. as cable marks, dinges,
5.2 Grade P2 and P/2 - The steel shall be made by guide marks. roll marks. ball scratches, scores, die marks. and rhe like .
coarse-grain melting practice. Specific limits, if any, on 7.3.2 Visual imperfections, commonly refetTed to as
grain size or deoxidation practice shall be a matter of scabs, seams, laps, tears, or slivers, found by exploration
agreement between the manufacturer and purchaser. in accordance with 7 .I to be deeper than 5% of the nominal
wall thickness.
5.3 Heat Treatment:
5.3.1 All pipe shall be reheated for heat treatment 7.4 At the purchaser's discretion, pipe shall be subject
and heat treated in accordance with the requirements of to rejection if surface imperfections acceptable under 7.2
Table 2. are not scattered, but appear over a large area in excess of
what is considered a workmanlike finish. Disposition of
NOTE 3 - 11 is recommended that the temperature for tempering should
such pipe shall be a matter of agreement between the
be at least 100°F [50°C) above the intended service temperature; conse-
quently, the purchaser s hou ld advise the manufacturer if the service manufacturer and the purchaser.
temperature is to be over ll00°F [600°C].
7.5 When imperfections or defects are removed by
NOTE 4 - Certain of the ferri tic steels covered by this s pecification grinding, a smooth curved surface shall be maintained,
will harden if cooled rapid ly from above their c1itical temperature. Some and the wall thickness shall not be decreased below that
will ai r harden, that is, become hardened to an undesirable degree when permitted by this specification. The outside diameter at
cooled in air from high temperatures. Therefore, operations involving
the point of grinding may be reduced by the amount so
heating such steels above their critical temperatures. such as welding,
flanging. and hot bending, should be followed by suitable heat treatment. removed.
7.5.1 Wall thickness measurements shall be made
with a mechanical cal iper or with a properly calibrated
6. Chemical Composition nondestructive testing device of appropriate accuracy. In
6.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to case of dispute, the measurement deter mined by use of the
chemical composition prescribed in Table I . mechanical caliper shall govern.
542
Notebook Page 508

2011a SECTIO N II, PART A SA-335/SA-33SM
7.6 Weld repair shall be permitted o nly subject to the Direction of Test Equation
approval of the purchaser and in accordance with Specifi- Longitudinal, all grades except P23. E = 48t + 15.00
cation A 999/A 999M. P9 1, P92. Pl22, and P911 [£ = 1.87/ + 15.00]
Transverse. al l grades except E = 32t + 10.00
7.6.1 After weld repair, Grades P23, P91, P92, and P23. P9 1. P92. Pl22. and P911 [£ = 1.251 + 10.00]
P l22 shall be heat treated at 1350-1 470°F [730-800°C]. Longitudinal, P23, P91 , P92, Pl 22, E = 321 + 10.00
and P9 11 [£ = 1.251 + 10.00]
7.6.2 After weld repair, Grade P9ll shall be heat Longitudinal. P36 E = 32t + 5.0
treated at 1365- 1435°F [740-780°C]. [£ = 1.25t + 5.0]
7.7 The finished pipe shall be reasonably straight. where

E = elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, % and
r = actual thickness of specimens. in. [mm]
8. Product Analysis
8.1 At the req uest of the purchaser, an analysis of two
pipes from each lot shall be made by the manufacturer. A 10. Permissible Variations in Diameter
lot (see Note 6) of pipe shall consist of the following: 10.1 For pipe ordered to NPS [DN] or o utside diameter,
variations in outside diameter shall not exceed those speci-
NPS Designator
fied in Table 6.
Under 2 400 or fraction thereof
2 to 5 200 or fraction thereof 10.2 For pipe ordered to inside diameter, the inside
6 and over I00 or fraction thereof diameter shall not vary more than ± I % from the specified
inside diameter.
NOTE 6- A lot shall consist of the number of lengths specified in 8.1

of the same size and wall thickness from any one heat of steel.
11. Permissible Variations in Wall Thickness
8.2 The results of these analyses shall be reported to 11.1 In addition to the implicit limitatio n of wall thick-
the purchaser or the purchaser's representative, and shall ness for pipe imposed by the limitation on weight in Speci-
conform to the requirements specified in Table I . fication A 999/A 999M, the wall thickness for pipe a t any
point shall be within the tolerances specified in Table 7.
8.3 For grade P 9 I the carbon content may vary for the The minimum wall thickness a nd o utside d iameter for
product analysis by - 0.0 I% and +0.02% from the specified inspection for compliance with this requirement for pipe
range as per Table I. ordered by NPS [DN] and schedule number is shown in
ASME B36. 1OM.
8.4 If the analysis of one of the tests specified in 8.1
does not conform to the requirements specified in 6. 1, an
analysis of each billet or pipe from the same heat or lot
12. Hydrostatic Test
may be made, and all billets or pipe conforming to the
12.1 Each length of pipe shall be subjected to the
requirements shall be accepted.
hydrostatic test, except as provided for in 12.2 or 12.3.
12.2 Unless otherwise specified in the purchase order,
each length of pipe shall, at the option o f the manufacturer,
9. Tensile and Hardness Requirements
be subjected to the nondestructive electric test as shown
9.1 The tensile properties of the material shall conform in Section 13 in lieu of the hydrostatic test.
to the requirements prescribed in Table 3.
12.3 When specified by the purchaser, pipe shall be
9.2 Table 4 lists elongation requirements. furnished without hydrostatic test and without nondestruc-
tive examination.
9.3 Pipe of Grades P9 1, P92, P91 I, P 122, and P36shall
have a hardness not exceeding 250 HB/265 HV [25 HRC] . 12.4 When specified by the purchaser, pipe shall be
Hardness of P23 shall not exceed 220 HB (RB 97). furnished with both the hydrostatic test and a nondestruc-
tive examination having been performed.
9.4 Table 5 gives the computed minimum elongation
values for each ~2 in. [0.8 mm] decrease in wall thickness.
Where the wall thiclkness lies between two values above, 13. Nondestructive Examination
the minimum elongation value is determined by the follow- 13.1 When selected by the manufacturer or when speci-
ing formula: fied in the order, as an alternative to the hydrostatic test
543
Notebook Page 509

TABLE 1
CHEMICAL REQU IREMENTS
Composition, %
UNS Phosphorus, Sul fur,
Grade DesignationA Carbon Manganese Max. Max. Silicon Chromium Molybdenum Others
P1 K11522 0.10-0.20 0.30-0.80 0.025 0.025 0.10-0.50 0.44- 0.65
P2 K11547 0.10- 0.20 0.30- 0.61 0.025 0.025 0.10- 0.30 0.50- 0.81 0.44-0.65
P5 K41545 0.15 max. 0.3G-0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50 max. 4 .00-6.00 0.45-0.65
P5b K51545 0.15 max. 0.30-0.60 0.025 0.025 1.00-2.00 4.00-6.00 0.45-0.65
P5c K41245 0.12 max. 0.3G-0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50 max. 4.00-6.00 0.45- 0.65 8
P9 S50400 0.15 max. 0.30-0.60 0.025 0.025 0.25- 1.00 8.00- 10.00 0.90- 1.10
Pl l K11597 0.05- 0.15 0.30- 0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50- 1.00 1.00- 1.50 0.44-0.65
P12 Kl1562 0.05-0.15 0.30-0.61 0.025 0.025 0.50 max. 0.80- 1.25 0.44-0.65
P15 Kl1578 0.05- 0.15 0.30- 0.60 0.025 0.025 1.15- 1.65 0.44-0.65
P21 K31545 0.05-0.15 0.30-0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50 max. 2.65-3 .35 0.80- 1.06
P22 K2 1590 0.05- 0.15 0.30- 0.60 0.025 0.025 0.50 max. 1.90-2 .60 0.87-1..13
P23 K41 650 0.04-0.10 0. 10-0.60 0.030 max. 0.010 max. 0.50 max. 1.90-2 .60 0.05- 0.30 v 0.20- 0.30
Cb 0.02-0.08
B 0.0005- 0.006
N 0.030 max.
AI 0.030 max.
w 1.45-1.75
P36 K21001 0.10-0.17 0.80-1.20 0.030 max. 0.025 max. 0.25-0.50 0.30 max. 0.25-0.50 Ni 1.00- 1.30
Cu 0.050-0.080
Cb O.Dl5- 0.045
V 0.02 max.
N 0.02 max.
AI 0.050 max.
P91 1<91560 0.08- 0.12 0.30- 0.60 0.020 0.010 0.20-0.50 8.0G-9.50 0.85-1.05 v 0. 18-0.25
N 0.030- 0.070
Ni 0 .40 max.
AI 0.02 max.
Cb 0.06-0.10
Ti 0.01 max.
Zr 0.01 max.
P92 K92460 0.07-0.13 0.30-0.60 0.020 0.010 0.50 max. 8.5G-9.50 0.30-0.60 v 0.15- 0.25
N 0.03- 0.07
Ni 0.40 max.
AI 0.02 max.
Cb 0.04-0.09
w 1.5- 2.00
B 0.001- 0.006
Ti 0.01 max.
Zr 0.01 max.
P122 1<92930 0.07- 0.14 0.70 max. 0.020 0.010 0.50 max. 10.00-11.50 0.25-0.60 v 0. 15-0.30
w 1.50-2.50
Cu 0.30-1.70
Cb 0.04- 0.10
B 0.0005-0.005
N 0.04G-0.100
Ni 0.50 max.
AI 0.020 max.
Ti 0.01 max.
Zr 0.01 max.
P911 K9 1061 0.09- 0.13 0.30- 0.60 0.020 max. 0.010 max. 0.10- 0.50 8.50- 9.50 0.90-1.10 v 0.18-Q.25
Ni 0.40 max.
Cb 0.060-0.10
B 0.0003- 0.006
N 0.04-0.09
AI 0.02 max.
w 0.90-1.10
Ti 0.01 max.
Zr 0.01 max.
NOTES:
A New designation established in accordance with Practice E 527 and SAE J 1086, Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys CU NS).
8 Grade P5c shal l have a t itan ium content of not less than 4 times the car bon content and not more than 0.70%; or a columbium content of
8 to 10 times the carbon content.
548
Notebook Page 510

20lla SECJION II, PART A SA-335/SA-335M
TABLE 2
HEAT TREATM ENT REQUIR EMENTSA
Normalizing Subcritical Annealing
Temperature, or Tempering
M in. or Range Temperature, Min. or
Grade Heat Treat Type OF [ OCJ Cooling Media Range ° F [°C]
P1 FuII or isothermaI
anneal
Normalize and temper 1200 [650)
Subcrit ical anneal 1200-1300
[650-705)
P2 Full or isothermal
anneal
Normalize and temper 1250 [675)
Subcrit i cal an neal 1200-1300
[650-705]
P5 Fu1 1 or isothermal
anneal
Normalize and temper 1250 [ 675]
P5b Full or isotherma l

anneal
Nor mali ze and temper 1250 [ 675)
P5c Subcritical anneal 1325- 1375

[715- 745]
anneal
Normal ize and temper 1250 [675)
Pll Ful l or isothermal

anneal
Normalize and temper 1200 (650)
P12 Ful l or isothermal

anneal
Normalize and temper 1200 [ 650 ]
Subcritical anneal 1200-1300
[ 650- 705]
P1 5 Full or isothermal
anneal
Normali ze and temper 1200 [650]
P21 Ful l or isothermal

anneal
Normalize and temper 1250 [675]

anneal
Normali ze and temper 1250 [675]
P23 Normalize and temper 1900-1 975 air or accelerated 1350-1470

[1040- 1080] cooling [730-800 ]
549
Notebook Page 511

SA·335/SA·335M 20lla SECTION II, J>A RT A
TABLE 2
HEAT TREATMENT REQUIREMENTSA (CONT' D)
Normalizing Subcritical Annealing
Temperature, or Tempering
Min. or Range Temperature, M in. or
Grade Heat Treat Type OF [ OC] Cooling Media Range oF [ ° C]
8
P30 Normalize and temper 1650 [ 900] 1100 [59 5)
P91 Normalize and temper 1900-1 975 1350- 1470

[1040- 1080] [ 730-800Jc
Quench and temper 0 1900-1975 1350-1470
[ 1040-1080 ] [ 730- 800]
P92 Normalize and temper 1900-1975 1350-1470

[1 040-1080] [7 30-8 00]

[1040-1080] [7 30- 800)
E
[1040-1080) [740- 780)
A Where ellipsis (. . .> appear in this table there is no requirement.

8 Alternatively, Grade P36, Class 2 shall be cooled from the austenitizing temperature by accelerated cooling in air or by liquid quenching.
c Except when Supplementary Requirement S7 is speci fied by the purchaser.
0
When mutually agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser, quenching and tempering shall be permi tted for th icknesses
greater than 3 in. [75 mmJ.
E Acce lerated cooling from the normali zing temperature shall be permitted for section thickness greater than 3 in. [ 7 5 mm J.
TABLE 3
Grade
P92, P911
Pl, P2 Pl2 P23 P91 P3o Class 1 Pl22 P3o Class 2 All Others
Tensile Strength, min.:
ksi 55 60 74 85 90 90 95.5 60
MPa 380 415 5 10 585 620 620 660 415
Yield strength, min.:
ksi 30 32 58 60 64 58 66.5 30
MPa 205 220 400 415 440 400 460 205
550
Notebook Page 512

.. ...:"'\ ... . . . ...
('11
r
~...,:.
~ ~ ri- '\
l~ (()
~ \)
',('~ .
Vl
t ~\) Q \ ~l I
~~ ~
._..-r '
~
Q ~
~\' ~
\
'J\
....;
\
I~
~
I ~
'"'1--
,~
\) ~ ~
~ ~ ~
Q_ · --..:'
·.£) \..0 V1
..r
-.....
"~"
;J. G ~
I
I
(.::)
t>
~ -:r l
"""
.t
~
\ '\()
'{) ti--
'-.). ~ 6
\,)
...... I K
\.!)
~""" \ >
---
•
--~ -
-- -
..,·'
.!!
......_
---- ' )
- -
- -----
·--
(\
aximum specified tensile strength for P1 materials Group #1, 2, 3, and 4
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Codes
• ASME B31.1 Power Piping
• ASME B31.3 Process Piping
• ASME B&PV Code Section VIII, Division 1 - Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels
• ASME PCC-2 Repair of Pressure Equipment and Piping
ASTM International Standards
ASTM Standard Specifications for Steels

• ASTM A20/A20M Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Plates for Pressure
Vessels
• ASTM A53/A53M Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
• ASTM A105/A105M Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications
• ASTM A106/A106M Standard Specification for Seamless Car bon Steel Pipe for High-
Temperature Service
• ASTM A240/A240M Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel
Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications
• ASTM A312/A312M Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked
Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes
• ASTM A333/A333M Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe for Low-
Temperature Service
• ASTM A515/A515M Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Car bon Steel, for
Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service
• ASTM A516/A516M St andard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for
Moderate- and Lower-Temperature Service
• ASTM A1008/1008M Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution
Hardened, and Bake Hardenable
• ASTM A1040 Standard Guide for Specifying Harmonized Standard Grade Compositions for
Wrought Carbon, Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steels
• ASTM Passport to Steel Online Database
ASTM Standard Test Method s for Steels

• ASTM A370: Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
• ASTM E8/E8M St andard Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials
• ASTM E23 Standard Test Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of Metallic Materials
• ASTM E45 Standard Test Methods for Determining the Inclusion Content of Steel
• ASTM Elll Standard Test Method for Young's Modulus, Tangent Modulus, and Chord Modulus
• ASTM E112 Standard Test Method for Determining the Average Grain Size
• ASTM E132 Standard Test Method for Poisson's Ratio at Room Temperature
• ASTM E399 Standard Test Method for Plane-Strain Fracture Toughness Testing of Metallic
Materials
• ASTM E1806 Standard Practice for Sampling Steel and Iron for Determination of Chemical
Composition
Notebook Page 513

ASTM St a n dard Terminology
• ASTM A941 Standard Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel, Related Alloys
• ASTM E6 Standard Terminology Relating to Methods of Mechanical Testing
• ASTM E7 Standard Terminology Relating to Metallography
• ASTM F2809 Standard Terminology Relating to Medical and Surgical Materials and Devices
• NACE/ASTM G193 Standard Terminology and Acronyms Relating to Corrosion
ASTM Corrosion Testing of Stainless Steels

• A262 Standard Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular Attack in Austenitic
Stainless Steels
• A380 Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts,
Equipment, and Systems
• A763 Standard Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular Attack in Ferritic
Stainless Steels
• A923 Standard Test Methods for Detecting Detrimental Intermetallic Phase in Duplex
Austenitic/Ferritic Stainless Steels
• A967 Standard Specification for Chemical Passivation Treatments for Stainless Steel Parts
• G78 Standard Guide for Crevice Corrosion Testing of Iron-Base and Nickel-Base Stainless Alloys
in Seawater and Other Chloride-Containing Aqueous Environments
• G35 Standard Practice for Determining the Susceptibility of Stainless Steels and Related Nickel-
Chromium-Iron Alloys to Stress-Corrosion Cracking in Polythionic Acids
• G123 Standard Test Method for Evaluating Stress-Corrosion Cracking of Stainless Alloys with
Different Nickel Content in Boiling Acidified Sodium Chloride Solution
ArcelorMittal USA
A516 and A387 Pressure Vessel Steels: A Technical Overview
http://pc.arcelormittal.com/NA/plateinformation/documents/en/lnlandflats/Prod uctBrochm·e/ARC
ELORMI'l'TAL_PRESSURE_VESSEL.pdf
The Welding Institute (TWI)

Job Knowledge Modules (119)
www.twi.eo.uk/technical-k nowledge(job-knowledge
Damage Mechanisms References

API 571
Damage Mechanisms Affecting Fixed Equipment in the Refining Industry
ASME Section II, Part D, Appendix A:
Met allurgical Phenomena
ASME B31.1, Appendix IV:
Corrosion Control for ASME B31.1 Power Piping Systems
ASME B31.3, Appendix F:
Precautionary Considerations
CSAZ662:
Annex H (normat ive) - Pipeline failure records
©Codes an d Standards Tra ining Institute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 514

NBIC Part 1, Part 2 Inspection:
Section 3 - Corrosion and Failure Mechanisms
Section 6 - Supplements: S4.10 Photographs of Typical Conditions
NACE Corrosion Article:
Pipeline Failures in the Grizzly Valley Sour Gas Gathering System
www .osti.gov/energycitations/product.biblio.jsp?osti_id=500 1204
Technical Articles

Lawson V. B., Duncan C., Treseder R. S., NACE Materials Performance, 1988, vol. 27, no. 4
www .nace.org
San Bruno PG&E Pipeline Plagued b y Poor Welding

Katie Worth, SF E xaminer, 21 July 2011
www.sfexaminer.comllocallpeninsula/2011/07/local-pge-pipeline-plagued-poor-welding
Brittle Fracture During Hydrostatic P ressure Test

www.qaqc-construction.com/graphics/Hydro-Test_2.jpg
Creep and Stress-R elaxation Test

www. instron. us/walglossary/Creep-and-StressRelaxation-Test.aspx
Remaining Life Assessment of Refinery Furnace Tubes Using Omega Simulations

www. aiche-chkago.org/symposium06/wilks. pdf
A Comprehensive Approach to Reformer Tube Insp ect ion and Assessment

www .ndt.net/article/mendt03/shannon/shannon.htm
F atigue Test
www.instron.us/walapplications/test_types/fatigue/default.aspx
More Lessons "R e-Learned" from Corrosion Under Insulation

www.abiquim.org.br/congresso/cong .cd/fullpapers/P171748.doc
Material Selection For Sour Service Environment

www. pipelineandgasjournal.com/material-selection -souJ"-service-environment
A Comprehensive Approach to Reformer Tub e Inspection and Assessment

www.ndt.net/article/mendt03/shannon/shannon.htm
Guidelines for the welded fabrication of nickel-containing stainless s teels for corrosion
resistant services
www .nickelinstitute.org/-/Media/f:i"'iles!I'echnicalLiterature/GuidelinesfortheWeldedFahricationofNic
kelStainlessSteelsforCorrosionResistantService_l1007_.pdf
Notebook Page 515

GE Betz Water Handbook
www .gewat er.comlhandbooklindex.jsp
The Hazards of Pressure Testing

W\VW. tefkuwait.com/HazardsofPressureTesting.pdf

www.osti.gov/energycitationslproduct.biblio.jsp?osti_jd=5001204
ABSA Information Bulletin No. ffi07-003 May 2, 2007 Alert

NPS 2 Class 3000 Screwed Couplings IML Industria Meccanica Ligure S.P.A. Heat Number 79168
www .absa .ca/IBindex!IB07-003Rl.pdf
Proper Design and Fabrication of Socket Welds for Use in Sour Service
by R.D. Caligiuri, L.E. Eiselstein, and L.N. Eastep
Materials Science Forum Vols. 638-642 (2010) pp 3649-3654
www .scientific.net
© (2010) Trans Tech Publications, Switzerland
DOl: 10.4028/www.scientific.net/MSF.638-642.3649
Videos
Videos
NORR Report, Appendix, Exhibit 03141-NL_E000013115

www .youtube.com/watch?v=qfDX3xA1QsY
ABSA
ABSA Web Video 3

www.absa_ca/ABSA-Info/ABSAWebVideo3.flv
Casting
Centifugal casting - dangerous process

www.youtube.com/watch?v=9ZeLn7BT3qc
Centrifugal Casting in EI Nasr Company

www.youtube.com/watch?v=levxlKzqwcM
Centrifugal Casting the Process

w"""v .youtube.com/watch'?v=3qKGx_AxHpO
Notebook Page 516

Casting (continued)
Deloro Stellite Investment Casting Process Feinguss Prozess

www.youtube.corn/watch?v=9FPyEgatwnY
Steelmaking: Continuous Casting

Description: Corus-Continuos Casting
www .youtube.com./watch?v=d-72gc6I-_E
Titanium Investment Casting

www .youtube.com/watch'?v=WXFRRg8YMTO
Vertical Centrifugal Casting-VlOK

Description: Cast Tube Production
www .youtube.com/watch?v=OSNft6xyurc
Coating
Corus-Coating Steel
www .youtube.com/watch?v=U zoJoXvhcMY
Thermal Spraying
www .youtube.com/watch?v=C3sKsOKOPSY
D ownhole Technology
Shale Fracking Process

Description: Horizontal Shale Oil Drilling
www .youtube.com/watch?v=qMzbf\v0d2jY
Fabrication
Fabrication: Plates
www.youtube.com/watch'?v=f4ao79hTHME
Fabrication: Tee Splitting

www .youtubo.com/watch?v=uxYcpte79FI
How It's Made Stainless Steel Sinks

Description: Stainless Steel Sink Drawing
www.youtube.com/watch?v=DgAEpm3Jxag
© Codes and Sta ndards Training Institute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 517

Fabrication (continued)
Roll Forming
Description: SME-Roll Forming
www.youtube.com/watch?v=xGLHjyPdDBI
Steelmaking: Seondary Steel

Description: Corus-Secondary Steel
wv.rw .youtube.com/watch ?v=wtsBRFlW2oQ
Steelmaking: Shaping Steel

Description: C01·us-Shaping Steel
www.youtube.com/watch?v=ikTdPFnGP2w
Steelmaking; Tube Manufacture
www.youtnbe.com/watch?v=JDMin5vitgE
Forging
fireballs - drop forging

www .youtube .com/watch'?v':::::xmS3LgfdT7E
Forging
Description: SME-Forging
www.yout-ube.com/watch'?v'=tLHkOupbARM
Heat Treatment
Heat treatment experiment 316L stainless

Description: Heat Treating and Magnetism
www .youtube.com/watch'?v=vo3s0Whms2E
Jominy End-Quench Test

www .youtube.com/watch?v=q WOaUbTWtVM
Martensitic transformation
www .youtube.com/watch?v=OQ51VjYssko
Oil Quench - Certified Steel Treating Corp.

www.youtube.com/watch?v=8QOjMui7V90
Heat Treating
Decription: SME - Heat Treating
www.youtube.com/watch?v=p3bkZBJV7X8
Notebook Page 518

NDE
125mm OD Tube Mill

\vww .youtube.com/watch?v=RjQoyg5Vjsg
Dacon illtrasonic Thickness Measurement

wvlw .youtube .com/watch?v=NSKa8 UK_Ogl
ERW Inspection
www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ed90Ji83c.Js
Knowledgefloater "Ultrasonic Measurement and Testing"

www.youtube.com/watch?v=j4Kp5jFp3BU
Pipeline
Exxon Pipeline Breaks in Arkansas.WMV

www.youtube.com/watch?feature=player_embedded&v=u:30m8U6VP3E
P ipe Making
lOK Reformer Tube Production

www .youtube.com/watch?v=jZwQOJbBta4
How Its Made Ductile Iron Pipe

www .youtubo.com/watch?v=kJGlgSZe4k4
Plymouth Tube Company: Cold Drawn Tubing Process

www.youtube.cornJwatch?v=zlueiHudt4k
Seamless Pipe MiU.wmv

Description: seam1ess pipe making- wrought by Danieli
www .youtube.com/watch?v=a947wTtY5xc
Seamless Pipe Production

www .youtube.cornfwatch?v=cMgHG1NydD4
Spuncast - Centrifugal Casting and Stainless Steel Tubing Manufacturer

Description: seamless pipe making- centrifugal casting
www .youtube.com/watch?v=ptsRkOE4seA
Steelmaking: Tube Manufacture

www .youtube.com/watch?v=JDlVIln5vitgE
Notebook Page 519

Powder Metallurgy
Near-net shape product solutions based on powder metallurgy from Sandvik

\VWW .youtube.com/watch?v=d.08'I'4Cfx9XI
Powder Metallurgy
Description: SME-Powder Metallurgy
www.youtube.com/watch?v=1Mjsi2F2MrY
Steel Making
How It's Made Stainless Steel

Description: stainless steel making process - Discovery/Science Channel
www.youtube.com/watch?v=sTrvSXJW8zw
NOTE : stainless steel making process (video) is the same as this one, except with a different
narrator- unable to locate link for this version.
STEEL: From Start to Finish

Description: steel making by USS
www.youtube.com/watch?v=9l7Jqon.yoKA
Steelmaking
wv..r\v.yo\ltube.com/watch?v=wAcnOpOHeCU
Steelmaking
Description: Steel Making with Ingot Casting
www .youtube.com/watch?v=Ea_7Rnd8BTM
Steelmaking: Blast Furnace

Description: Corus-Blast Furnace
W\VW .youtube.com/watch?v=Yov7ZOrMyHI
Steelmaking: Raw Materials

Description: Corus-Raw Materials
www.youtube.com/watch?v=8x1Hf_U-lfo
Steelmaking: Rolling
www .youtube.com/watch?v=6xnKmt_gsLs
Nitrofreeze Dry Ice Blast Cleaning Heat Treatment Equipment

www.youtube.com/watch'?v=dW5pJ}"'ov4P:Nl
Sand blasting Vs. Dry ice blasting

www .youtube.com/watch?v=-TZnrEBfltQ
Notebook Page 520

Vessels
ASME Pressure Vessels

ww\v .youtube.co.m/watch?v=uSFowT9H8XY
Oversize Load to CNRL

www .youtube.com/watch?v=zsLNOZK06Wc
Pressure Vessel Demo

www.youtube.com/watch?v=qPZATbrlyzc
BEHROOZ MEHRI Simple Vertical Vessel

Description: Simple Vertical Vessel
www .youtube.com/watch?v=XjZxlRjjSai
Welding and Brazing
Brazing and Soldering

Description: SME-Furnace Brazing
www.youtube.com/watch?v=3UBdlHIXegM
Fronius CMT Advanced EnglischEnglish

www.youtube.com/watch?v=_WrhWf9XLHM
Pipe Friction Stir Welding

wvvw.youtube.com/watch?v=niVs•.JPFlglY
Laser weldingl
Description: laser welding 304 ss
wviw.youtube.com/watch?v=n-NUlppvR:3Y
Learn to Weld and Fit Pipe in This Welding Home Study Course
www .youtube .com/watch?v=eka2Z6TI'q K4
Titanium - GMAW CMT Fillet

www .youtube.com/\vatch?v=n5XdmT ljFrk
Notebook Page 521

©Codes and Standards Trai ning Institute (CASTI)
Notebook Page 522

Training Schedule
CAST/
Codes and Standards Training Institute 2013
Course Name Date Location
API510
Pressure Vessel Inspector Exam Preparation April15-20 Edmonton
- for Candidates Registered in the June Exam
API570
Piping Inspector Exam Preparation April 22-27 Edmonton
- for Candidates Registered in the June Exam
API RP 571
Damage Mechanisms Affecting Fixed Equipment in the Refining Industry April 23-26 Calgary
- for Engineers, Inspectors and Experienced Tradesmen
ASME Section IX - Welding Codes and Metallurgy
Carbon/ Alloy Steels
April 30-May 3 Edmonton
- for Engineers, Inspectors, and Experienced Tradesmen
- Covers Alberta Welding Examiner Papers #2 and #4
CSAZ662
Construction and Inspection Requirements for Pipelines April 30-May 3 Calgary
- for Pipeline Engineers, Operators, Contractors, and Inspectors
ASME 831 .3
Code Design Requirements for Process Piping May 7-10 Edmonton
- for Engineers and Designers
ASME Section VIII, Div. 1
Materials, Fabrication, Inspection, and Testing Requirements for Pressure Vessels May 14-17 Edmonton
ASME 831 .3
Materials, Fabrication, Insp ection, and Testing Requirements for Process Piping May 28·31 Calgary
Introduction to ASME Pressure Equipment Codes
ASME 83 1.1, 831 .3, 8&PV Sections IIA, IIC, Vlll-1, and IX J une 11 -14 Edmonton
- for the Novice Code User
CSA W1 78.2 Level 2
CLA Hybrid Training J une 24-29 Edmonton
- for CSA W178.2 Level 2 Exam Preparation, including 2 Code Exams
NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 Parts 1 and 2 and NACE MR01 03
Carbon and Low Alloy Steel Materials for Sour Service September 17-20 Calgary
- for Inspectors, Engineers, and Technolog ists
Welding Fundamentals
- for Engineers, Inspectors, and Experienced Tradesmen September 24-27 Calgary
- Covers Alberta Welding Examiner Papers #1 and #3
ASME Section VIII, Div. 1
Code Design Requirements for Pressure Vessels October 8-11 Calgary
- for Engineers and Design ers
The information shown here is subject to change without notice. Please visit www.casti.ca for the most recent information.
In-House Training:
In house training is a cost-effective way to provide customized training for small groups or whole departments with the convenience of
having the training done at your facility or a nearby site and to accommodate your staff's schedule. CASTI can adapt the content of any
of our standard open-enrollment courses to suit your requirements, or we can develop a bespoke course exclusively for you. Please
Contact us to discuss in-house course options.
Contact Us:
Codes and Standards Training Institute (CASTI) phone: 780 424 2552
Suite 205 - 10544 106 Street e-mail: casti@casti.ca
Edmonton AB T5H 2X6 website: www.casti.ca
www.casti.ca ©CASTI 2013
Notebook Page 523

Notebook Page 524
Code Document Order Form
CAST/
ASME Codes
for Alberta Welding Examiner
Documents Price Quantity Subtotal
Paper #1 Package
$600.00
ASME Section II, Part C (201 0 Edition and 2011 Addenda)
Paper #2 Package
ASME Section II, Part A (2010 Edition and 2011 Addenda): SA-106, SA-312, SA-333, SA-387 and $140.00
SA-516 only
Paper #3 Package
ASME Section V (2010 Edition and 2011 Addenda)
$465.00
ASME Section IX (2010 Edition and 2011 Addenda): Part QW only
ASME 831 .3 (2012 Edition): Chapter VI only
Paper #4 Package
ASME Section I (2010 Edituon and 2011 Addenda): Part PW only
ASME Section VIII, Division 1 (2010 Edition and 2011 Addenda): Parts U, UG, UW, UCS, UHA,
and UHT only $365.00
ASME Section IX (201 0 Edition and 2011 Addenda): Part QW only
ASME 831.1 (2010 Edition) : Chapter Vonly
ASME 831 .3 (2012 Edition): Chapter V only
Subtotal
5%GST
TOTAL
NOTES AND CONDITIONS
1. All document orders must be pre-paid by VISA, MasterCard or Purchase Order. Please make purchase orders payable to: Codes and Standards
Training Institute. GST Registration Number R1 32771981.
2 . All documents will be deliver-ed directly to the classroom. For other delivery options, please place document orders online at www.casti.ca
3. All documents are printed on 3-hole punched paper and are delivered as a shrink-wrapped set.
4. All prices are in Canadian funds and subject to change without notice.
5. ABSOLUTELY NO RETURNS ACCEPTED.
PAYMENT INFORMATION
Purchase Order Number:
Visa Card Number: Card Expiry: _______________________
MasterCard Number: Signature:
------------------------------------------ -------------------------
BILLING INFORMATION
Name: Title:
-----------------------------------
Company:
Street Address:
City:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Province/State:
------------------------ -------------------- PostaVZIP Code: ----------------
Telephone: Fax: E-mail:
------------------------- ------------------------
www.casti.ca Rev. 130220
Notebook Page 525

Notebook Page 526
CASTI Publishing Inc. In-Classroom Book Sale Order Form*
Educational Discount Pricing for CASTI Course Registrants
'Spe<:ify the desired quantity of each item and return this completed form to CASTI .I:lafare the last day of your training course. Sale pricing available on io-stoo~ items ODill.
CASTI Guidebook Series ™ Regular Price $165, Sale Price $132- Save 20%! Q uantity Sub-Total
CASTI Guidebook to ASME Section II, B31.1 & B31.3 - Materials Index (Tenth Edition) e-book: $132 each
I
CASTI Guidebook to ASME Section VIII Div. 1 - Pressure Vess els (Fourth Ed ition) e-book: $132 each
CASTI Guidebook to ASME B31.3 - Process Piping (Fifth Edition) e-book: $132 each
CASTI Guidebook to ASME Section IX -Welding Qua lification (Fourth Edition) e-book: $132 each
CASTI Metals Data Books Series TM Regular Price $165, Sale Price $132- Save 20%! Quantity Sub-Total
CASTI Metals Red Book - Nonferrous Data (Fourth Edition) e-book: $132 each
CASTI Metals Blue Book - Welding Filler Metals Data (Fourth Edition) e-book: $132 each
CASTI Corrosion Series ™ Regular Price $165, Sale Price $132 - Save 20%! Quantity Sub-Total
Handbook of C ladding Technology (Second Editi on) e-book: $132 each
Handbook of Stainless Steels & Nickel Alloys (Second Edition) e-book: $132 each
Handbook of Corrosion Control in Soils (First Edition) e-book: $132 each
printed book: $132 each

Corrosion Control (Second Edition)
e-book: $132 each
printed book: $ 132 each
Practical Self-Study Guide to Corrosion Control
e-book: $132 each
Online ASME Code Interpretations Database m Quantity Sub-Total
1 hour of access: $60
ASME BPV & Piping Codes Online Interpretations Database 5 hours of access: $270
10 hours of access: $480
Important Notes: Sale pricing is available only for the duration of training course and only on in-stock items. Total
Printed books are delivered to the classroom only. No shipping is available on sale priced items.
E-books are delivered via internet downloaded upon processing of payment.
All prices are quoted in Canadian funds. Prices subject to change without notice. GST
Grand Total
..
Btlhng lnformatron:
Name: __________________________________________________________________________________________________
Company: ________________________________________________________________________________________________
Address: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---- - - - - - -

City: _______________________ State:------------------ Postal Code:-------------- Country: ______________________
Telephone: __________________________ Fax:__________________________
E·mail: --------------------- - - - - - -
Shipping Information:
Name: __________________________________________________________________________________________________
Company: _________________________________________________________________________________________________
Address: --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
City: _______________________
State: ------------------ Postal Code: ____________ Country: ______________________
Telephone: ____________________________ Fax: __________________________
E-mail: --------------- - - - -- - - - - - -
Payment Method: (All E-book purchases must be prepaid.)

<cASTI;;
CAST! Publishing Inc. Tel: 780.424-2552
D -:- Credit Card Number: -------------------------------------------- Suite 205, 10544-106 Street Fax: 780-421-1308
Edmonton AB T5H 2X6 e-mail: casti@casti.ca
0 .,. Signature: ______________________________ Expiry:_____________ Canada website: www.casti.ca
Printed Book Return Policy: Printed books may be returned for refund within 10 days of receipt only if they are in re·sellable condition. Requests for refunds must be ~
submitted in writing by fax or email. Please indicate the reason for the return. A return order number will be issued. Refunds will not be Issued without a return order number. Do ~
not return items via UPS (United Parcel Service). Items shipped via UPS will not be accepted and will be returned at the sender's expense. The purchaser is responsible for ~
the cost of return shipping. Original shipping charges will not be refunded. CASTI Publishing Inc. reserves the right to revise this policy at anytime withou t notice. 0
E·book Return Policy: E-bookspurchases are nol eligible for refund, credit, or exchange. C\J
Notebook Page 527

Notebook Page 528
2 New Books on Steel Data from ASTM International
•
INTERNATIONAL
ASTM Metals Data Series™

FREE Introduction available at www.astm.org.
Extensively Revised!
DS70 DS67C
Handbook of Steel Data: The Handbook of
American and European Comparative World Steel
Editor: john Bringas, CAST/ Standards: 4th Edition
Editor: john E. Bringas
This new publication includes the
latest specification data covering Get a detailed explanation of how
carbon steels, alloy steels, tool steels, stainless steels, and why one steel is comparable
and cast irons, with designations and titles, chemical to another. This edition allows the user to identify and
compositions, mechanical properties, and physical evaluate comparable steelsthat are found in standards
properties. Data is well organized in each chapter by from around the world.
North American specification, grade and UNS number,
followed by European EN specification, steel names and Compare standards from ASTM, AFNOR, API, ASME, BSI,
steel number EN, CSA, DIN, GB, ISO,J IS, and SAE.
It also includes: New to this edition:

• 800+ stainless steels from 10 product forms • 6,100+ steels
• Basic metallurgy of steels chapter, including heat • 450+ worldwide standards
treatment of steels • 275+ new or updated standards
• Synopsis of North American and Euro pean EN steel • 155,000+ pieces of data
designations • 30,000+ pieces of Chinese steel data
• Non-comparable steel data not found in ASTM • Designation changes from AFNOR, BSI, and Dl Nto
Handbook of Comparative World Steel Standards their new CEN designations
• And more! • Explanation and examples of designation systemsof
ASTM, SAE, UNS, and CSA
779 Pages (2009); Soft Cover, 8.5" x 11" • Introduction to European (EN) standard steel
Price: $236 designation systems
ISBN: 978-1-894038-89-8; Stock#: DS70 • And more!
840 pages (2007); Soft Cover, 8.5" x 11"

Price: $340
ISBN: 978-0-8031-6223-5; Stock#: DS67C
Special Offers! • Get both Handbook ofSteel Data: American and European plus the
Handbook of Compamtiue World Steel Standards: 4th Edition for
only $476- a savings of$100 (Stock# DS70COMBO)
Buy either DS70 or DS67C and get a FREE One-Month Subscription to
Passport to Steel, the most complete and current online steel database
Notebook Page 529

ORDER TODAY>>
Please send me the items indicated below. SHIPPING & HANDLING
On print and CD·ROM products on1J!.
DS70 Handbook of Steel Data: American and European
Sub Total ...................................... Charge
Price: $236 Upto$50 .....................................................$4.60
$50.01 to $100 ..........................................$9.00
ISBN: 978-1-894038-89-8; Stock#: DS70 $100.Dl to $150..................................... $13.50
$150.01 to $250 ..................................... $18.00
_ DS67C The Handbook ofComparative World Steel Standards: 4th Edition $2 50.01 to $500..................................... $26.00
$500.01 to $750 ..................................... $36.00
Price: $340 $750.01 to $1000 .................................. $44.00
ISBN: 978-0-8031-6223-5; Stock#: DS67C $1000.01 to $1500 ............................... $58.00
$1500.01 to$2500 ............................... $75.00
$2500.01 to $4999 ............................ $100.00
__ Handbook of Steel Data: American and European and Handbook of Comparative $5000 or higher............................................ free
World Steel Standards: 4th Edition Please Note: Shipping and handling charges are
Price: $476 approximate. Additional charges may be incurred if
your order requires multiple shipments. This does
Stock# DS70COM BO not apply to complete sets or sections. ASTM is not
responsible for typographical errors. We reserve
theright to make adjustments o r corrections due to
these errors. Prices are subject to change without
notice.
0 Payment Enclosed
·Residents of AL, CA, DC, FL, IL, MD, NJ, NY, OH, PA, TX, VA, Canada add applicable
sales tax. Return Policy: ALL SALES ARE FINAL, with
·Members deduct 10% from the subtotal of your order. the followi ng limited exceptions: ASTM will (1)
replace defective products and (2) reship orders
0 Electronic Fund Transfer(EFT) to:National Penn Bank, Philadelphia & Reading Aves., improperly filled or electronically downloaded,
Boyertown, PA 19512 Routing#: 031308784; Acct.#: 8165432 only if an authorization number is first obtained
After completing w;re transfer, email seruice@astm.org with account and contact from ASTM's Customer Relations Dept. and
information, dollar amount and bank, and date of transfer. ASTM receives the return within 30 days of the
0 Credit Card: 0 AMEX 0 MasterCard OVisa invoice date. ASTM will not accept returns:
(1) without prior authorization or (2) after 30
Acct.#: _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _
days from shipment of the order. All materials,
Exp.Date: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - including the original accompanying packing
list, must be returned. The authorization
Name as it appears on card: - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - number must be clearly annotated and
Member# (if applicable): - - - - - -- - - -- - - - - - - displayed on the return package. Under no
circumstances will monies be refunded or
Promo: PUBNEWZCASTI
credited to your account. You are responsible
Name: for return shipping costs unless you receive
Company: _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ confirmation otherwise from ASTM.
Address:-------- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- Specia l prices for CASTI cou rse

participants only.
City, State, Zip:-- -- -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Count~: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _
Phone: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - -
FAX:
EMAIL: - - -------------------------------------
Can we email promotional material to you from ASTM? 0 Yes 0 No
Return this form to:
ASTM International
Attn: Monica Siperko
100 Barr Harbor Drive
PO BoxC700
West Conshohocken, PA 19428
Fax: 610-832-9622
Ema il : msiperko@astm.org
PUBNEWZCASTI
1/10
Notebook Page 530

ONLINE
~~A
~- SME CODE INTERPRETATIONS
DATABASE
CASTI
POW ERED BY
Access and Search ASME B&PV and Piping Code Interpretations from Anywhere, at Anytime! ~
Why spend your time and energy search ing a mountain of paper ASME Code Interpretations for that one interpretation e s
you need? · 91 ®
Save Time and Money

Search, organize, and print over 8,300 Interpretations of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (all sections, parts and
divisions) and the two most popular pressure piping codes (B31 .1 and B31 .3) in the most powerful database available on line, at
a very affordable price.
Fast and Powerful Search Engine

Flexible keyword seaching allows you to search through thousands of Code Interpretations in mere seconds!
Comprehensiv e Code Interpr etation Coverage

Thousands of ASME Code Interpretations from 1969 to 2011! Coverage of
1: ~ ....~~~....._ .,x..-. .. ;a~e..,. ,e f' r,,,,"' "''' -.~~, .
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes and ASME Piping Codes: r "· ""·"~"' · ·_ ........ ~-;.f~·.. roj ~ r ..Ju:<(r ....~~
•" ~l~··Qtt.• 'ioo•h• "•·r ,J
(' ~·t.~'•e.:.rY."Ovt,..:t r ..,,,.~:oc •tln<O-f
( ,.,........ u.......,
• Section I Rules for Construction of Power Boilers
• Section II Materials
• Section Ill Rules for Construction of Nuclear Facility Components
• Section IV Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers
• Section V Nondestructive Examination ,_, _ ,,......~ ..............., .. N
• Section VI Recommended Rules for the Care and Operation of Heating Boilers la . •.-
. . . . ~...l!!!!C:::=!B~Bii.li18REB~::JJ!IIII'il1
• Section VII Recommended Guidelines for the Care of Power Boilers ~:'::'"'''""·· '"•P•e··~"~·
• Section VIII Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels · ~::·:.-.::~""'
• Section IX Welding and Brazing Qualifications ~.:,7::.:.::.~,
• Section X Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels =~~-~·. :1':.~:~:·.:;;:;:~~·!;""'' ·"· ···~-~ ....,...~..... -·~····· ... ,.,..... ~ .•. -
• Section XI Rules for lnservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components ....,_,., .........., .., ••..•.•.,..~......,, ~.-...,·""·-., ...........,..,,
~~~).l)..;.. • .,r_, ,<l~ I,...:OI>"o<'V! I',r:O 1- 1 l· J ~' ....._. ~~~ ""~IJo...,l'.oll.>n .d:>.l!t :l$ ,_ ,.,;_~t ..~ J ..J:.IIII~...~»•"I-"" ~ "'·
• B31 .1 Power Piping ............,... "
• 831.3 Process Piping ~~;.:~.~.:~: :;:~~.;~~J:~·:~~~~.~~::;:~:~~:~~~~~0~!~~~~;~;:·:~:;~:!3.~~o;~~j;: ~ ..
Allliff <31'N'. Pe·.• ·~·-'··~lllf><>II-"-At~'Utv. ..IJ!lllf•f·<\Jlli"J.";~ool•J<tlP;.t, \II j \ ):~u• ..:..... 4""''" 1t'I P .o•" h.t 1 ;;,
Always Up-to-Date ,•h,;ll (-.<hklt>o ti ,e~l .-·.~l.oof-UU) I~tt,r.•llf. ""' 1•00\J't(w-r. A II>OI'fl•" •' 'ot,;,,
Joh>.cbo,1\ IJ1,1t!·TAI• I. i l
(!/'0 1•1•->11•• ,\M I•tUII •t..., • ...,.,._.t ,lll I >II•
Your subscription includes Interpretations dating back to 1969, plus all new
Interpretations published during the subscription period. You'll never need to
update with diskettes, CDs, or new software.
Access and Search As Often As Needed. Anywhere, Anytime!

Log on anywhere, anytime using just an internet browser, your username and your password.
Pric ing and Access

A subscription to the Interpretations Database is time-based and works much like a telephone calling card. When you purchase
60 minutes of access, you can use the minutes any way you like. Log in and log out as often as you wish, until your 60 minutes
are used. Your minutes do not expire and there are no restrictions on the number of separate accesses. When your minutes are
completely used up, you can p urchase additional minutes.
Time Price
60 minutes $60
300 minutes $270 (I 0% discount)
600 minutes $480 (20% discount)
Multiple User Access

The Interpretations Database can accomodate multiple users at different locations. Once you have created a subscription
account, you can invite other users to share your minutes. The minutes they use will be deducted from your account. There is no
limitation on the number of users as long only one user is logged in at any one time. Should you require sim ultaneous multiple
user access, you may purchase additional accounts.
~ Suite
205 10544 106
· - Street Phone· (780) 424-2552 Fax· (780) 421-1308
~ ~dmonton . AB T5H 2X6 · ·
Pubhsh1ng Inc. canada E-mail: casti@casti.ca Web Site: www.casti.ca
Notebook Page 531
Notebook Page 532
Passport to Steel
•
INTERNATIONAL
Standards Worldwide The World's most up-to-date and technically accurate steels database.
POWERED BY CAST!
The Ultimate Online Resource for Steel Data!
A powerful, online database, ASTM International's new Passport to Steel enables you to search for the latest steel data of more than
68,000 steels and 15,000 coated steels; find comparable steel standards from Standards Development Organizations (SDOs)
around the world; and access an information-rich Reference Center.
You'll find the steels data you need in only a few seconds with
both simple and advanced search modes. Search tips and Free Trial Access! I
other helpful hints are just a click away in this convenient and ----------------~-------
Judge the power and comprehensiveness of Passport to Steel !
easy to use resource. for yourself. Call today for a free test drive. Contact the ASTM
sales department at 1-610-832-9552 or visit our website at:
Access Anytime, Anywhere
Using your web browser, username and password you'll have www.passporttosteel.com
global, around the clock access to one of the most robust,
comprehensive and useful resources for steel data.
Simpler, Faster, and More Powerful

A new "Simple Search" mode delivers data faster and easier
than ever before. Find the data you need in seconds!
The "Advanced Search" mode now has improved data range

selection for Chemical Compositions and Mechanical
Properties data. Find the data you need by defining your search
criteria with more flexibility than any other database.
The Most Frequently Updated Steels Database

Access the latest data from over 83,000 steels and growing - no other steel database can match the timeliness or reliability. Passport
to Steel is second-to-none thanks to a team of engineers and technical experts continually studying changes to the standards and
revising and expanding the database. Continual data updates provide all the latest steel data! Your annual subscription includes
updates to the latest data-no COs or software to update throughout the year.
All standard specification data is shown with complete year-date and status. Instantly confirm the version of each specification
document and whether the document is current, withdrawn, or replaced by a newer document! Use the year-date to verify the version
of each specification document and never be caught with out-of-date information again!
The Best Comparable Steels Search Engine

The most "technically accurate" steel comparisons available today. Passport to Steel includes hundreds of cross-references to
comparable international steels. Finding similar steels from other countries is made quick and easy. Use the built-in "Search for
Comparable Steels" option or customize your own search to find all matching steels with any search parameters you choose. It's your
choice, either way this powerfu I search engine will help you find what you are looking for in just a few seconds. Comparable steels are
now easier to view with color coding for each group of comparable steels. Passport to Steel is the only steels database that:
· Allows the user to "fully customize" their own steel comparison searches.
·Includes product form, chemical composition and mechanical properties in the comparison search engine
· Includes the "rules of comparison" so that the user can see how the comparisons were made.
Full Status Report

The only steels database that shows the "status" of each standard (current, replaced, or withdrawn including the year-date of
standard), and if a standard has been replaced, the "replacement" standard is shown with a link to the new data. When requested by
users, obsolete data from replaced or withdrawn standards is added (e.g ., the 1955 version of BS 970 with 109 En steel grades were
added by request.)
The Only Coated Steels Database

Passport to Steel offers the only customized database containing data that is unique to coated steels. All coated steel data is available
at no extra charge.
-~ Call 1-61 0-832-9552 or visit www.passporttosteel.com to order.

Notebook Page 533
Comprehensive Source of Global Standards
The database includes steel data from 11 SDOs Order Now!
including: ASTM, AFNOR, API, SAE, DIN, GB,
•
Passport to Steel subscriptions are available in both 1-year 1
BSI, CEN, CSA, JIS, and ISO. You can easily
or 1-month terms for single user or multi-user access. 1
search by:
Contact our sales department at 1-610-832-9552 or visit 1
• Standard Organization
• Standard Designation
INTERNATIONAL www.passporttosteel.com for more information. Call us I
Standards Worldwide today for a free test drive!
• Grade, Class, Type, Symbol, Steel Name
• Specification Title
• Steel Number
• UNS Number
•ICS Number
• Product Form (22 forms)
• Alloy Group (9 groups)
• Carbon Equivalence
• Chemical Composition
• Mechanical Properties in both inch-pound and Sl
units (tensile strength, yield strength, elongation, lt";:t;:;:::-::;:;:;:;jG:::;;;;:;J-=~~~~~~;;;v.;:;;,;;;:;;;;<~s.;;,:t;;"M;~;:;;;;;'i::;;;;;:-f,~:t:=l
reduction of area, hardness, impact strength, ~~~~~~~~~!!::::::=1!~~~~~~~~======~=~~
with longitudinal or transverse data)
T he comprehensive data within Passport to Steel

also includes the most current chemical
composition and mechanical properties of:
• Steels for General Use
• Structural Steel Plates a nd Shapes
• Pressure Vessel Steel Plates Carbon «<U'""'"""'r.::• d.."'~·~ O>Vf>lilt-mt-nbry.
,., CE;C.1'1.in'*:.t- ce d..iU~ipplieuo ~~f()(.(l ~HI plat~ br lt")'dt.:>Huorb I
· Steel Pipes and Tubes (Seamless and Welded) A~TI.1A.Sl~{A
$1 ~M~ tCr+lolr.-+VJSHNi-tCu !.lS xdafk}.b.OOn $~M·.::~.
• Steel Forgings 'CE m:uimum~t\."411 ~.,Co.41 br pli'te;t-.k.l<:nti>~S:l

rrmJ.,nd(l ~$ k,.r pbt~ lh_,kno:o.G ..,, tn ~S •nrn)
in. (2S I
• Steel Castings
• Wrought Stainless Steels
• Spring Steels
• Free-Cutting Steels :Jt-rolle.d.n.: rrn:diz~j.
• Bearing Steels Zl n.;n. ~7~~i~';r~~~~t;rf~~

tli ~)l~
• Tool Steels
• And more!
EasytoUse
Show or Hide the search results tables to make it easier to view the data you want. A new "Show Specifications List" feature can
display a only the specifications and titles allowing the user to review a list of specification documents in detail and to print that list if
desired. Sort and select data for faster viewing with the easy-to-understand results page that d isplays:
• Specification designation with year-date
• Grade, class, type, symbol or steel name
• UNS number. steel number, and/or ICS number
• Product form, application, and full specification title
• Complete chemical composition and mechanical properties
• All special notes relating to the data
The search results can be easily sorted, printed or copied and pasted into your favorite program, such as Microsoft Excel®, to save an
electronic copy of the data.
Reference Center
The database includes access to a unique Reference Center providing valuable information for all steel users. The Reference Center
includes selected standards, journal articles, related book chapters, hardness conversion tables, the Periodic Table, and a list of metal
terms in English, Spanish, German, and French.
User-Friendly for the Novice and Expert!

Extensive tips, hints and FAQs provide valuable guidance with lots of practical examples. Help menu offers step-by-step instructions
and p ractical examples for each feature. Hints and tips for searching, navigating , sorting data results, selecting data for display, and
printing search results, with clear examples.
...AND MORE USER FRIENDLY FEATURES!
.• Call 1-61 0-832-9552 or visit www.passporttosteel.com to order.

Notebook Page 534

Casti Asme Section Ix 2013 PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Casti Asme Section Ix 2013 PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Codes and Standards Training Institute

Welding Codes and Metallurgy

April 30-May 3, 2013

Codes and Standards Training Institute

Engineering Information: Training and Publishing

©Codes and Standards Training Institute (CASTI)

T he Legal Position of the Pressure Equipment Codes

In Canada, we have an organization of volunteers known as the Canadian Standards Association

©Codes and Standards Training Institute (CAST!)

Codes and Standards for Pressure Vessels and Piping

©Codes and Standards Training Institute (CASTI)

ASME B&PV ASME 831 II Other Adopted ,I

Cod es and Standar ds Declared in Force by t h e Alb erta R egulations

• CSA B51 Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code

• Section I Rules for Construction of Power Boilers

©Codes and Standards Training Institute (CAST I)

• B31.1 Power Piping

Other Bodies of Ru les

CSA 851 - Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code

CSA 51 has three main parts, as follows:

©Codes and Standards Training Institute (CAST!)

1. acceptability of fittings manufactured outside Canada (Part 1, Clause 4.2.4);

Quality Control Systems

©Codes and Standards Training Institute (CAST!)

Alberta Design Registration Program Administered by ABSA1

The scope of the Design Registration Program involves:

Safety Codes Act Flow Chart

Design Submission Require m ents

• Boilers and Pressure Vessels

©Codes and Standards Training Institute (CASTI)

Canadian Registration Number (CRN)

1- British Columbia 8 - Nova Scotia

Alberta Identification "A" Number

©Codes and Standards Training Institute (CASTI)

ABSA Safet y Codes Act Flow Chart

Design Registration Forms

• AB31 Design Registration Application

• AB41 Statutory Declaration Form for Registration of Fittings

• AB41a Guide For Completing Form AB-41

• AB96a Guide for Completing Form AB-96

• AB520 Finite Element Analysis (FEA) Requirements

Pressure Equipment Forms

• AB76A Welder Qualification Record (WQR)

• AB76B Welding Operator Qualification Record (WOQR)

• AB83 Construction Data Report for Piping Systems

• AB83a G uide for Completing Form AB-83

• AB147 Owners Integrity Management System Information Form

• AB505 Risk Based Inspection Programs for Pressure Equipment

• AB506 Inspection and Servicing Requirements for Pressure Equipment, Rev 6

• AB512 Owner-User Pressure Equipment Integrity Management Requirements

• AB512a Owner-User PEIM Program Scope and Responsibilities

• AB512b Integrity Management Requirements Checklist

• AB512c PEIM Audit Workbook

• AB513 Pressure Equipment Repair and Alteration Requirements

• AB516 PESR User Guide

• AB518 Pressure Piping Construction Requirements

• AB522 Standard Pneumatic Test Procedure Requirements

© Codes and Standards Training Institute (CASTI)

IB07-003 Rev. 1: NPS 2 Class 3000 Screwed Couplings

IBll-010: Fatal Accident Involving a High Temperature Hydrogen Attack

IBl0-006 Rev. 2: ABSA Requirements for Steam Pipelines

IBll-006: Pressure Equipment Repair and Alteration Requirements